solidworks

Chapter 1

Drawing Sketches forthe Solid Models

After completing this chapter you will be able to:• Understand the requirement of the sketching environment.• Open a new part document.• Understand the various terms used in sketching environment.• Work with various sketching tools.• Use the drawing display tools.• Delete the sketched entities.

Learning Objectives

c01-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:52 AM1

1-2 SolidWorks for Designers

THE SKETCHING ENVIRONMENTMost of the products designed using SolidWorks are a combination of sketched features,placed features, and derived features. The placed and derived features are created withoutcreating a sketch but the sketched features require a sketch to be created first. Generally, thebase feature of any design is a sketched feature and is created by drawing the sketch. However,once you are conversant with the various options of SolidWorks, you can also use a derivedfeature or a derived part as the base feature. Therefore, while creating any design, the firstand foremost point is to draw the sketch for the base feature. Once you have drawn the sketchfor the base feature, you can convert it into the base feature and then add the other sketched,placed, and derived features to complete the design. In this chapter you will learn to createthe sketch for the base feature using the various sketcher entities.

In general terms, a sketch is defined as the basic contour for the feature. For example, considerthe spanner shown in Figure 1-1.

This spanner consists of a base feature, a cut feature, a mirror feature (cut on the back face),fillets, and an extruded text feature. The base feature of this spanner is shown in Figure 1-2.This base feature is created using a single sketch shown in Figure 1-3. This sketch is drawn inthe sketching environment using the various sketching tools. Therefore, to draw the sketch ofthe base feature, you first need to invoke the sketching environment where you will draw thesketch.

Figure 1-1 Solid model of a spanner

c01-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:52 AM2

Drawing Sketches for the Solid Models 1-3

The sketching environment of SolidWorks can be invoked any time in the Part mode, Assemblymode, and Drawing mode. You just have to specify that you want to draw the sketch of afeature. This is done by choosing the Sketch button from the Sketch toolbar, see Figure 1-4.This toolbar is available by default on the right of the drawing window. When you choose thisbutton, the sketching environment will be invoked. You can draw the sketch in this environmentand then proceed to the part modeling environment for converting the sketch into a solidmodel.

Figure 1-2 Base feature of the spanner

Figure 1-3 Sketch for the base feature of the spanner

c01-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:52 AM3


Figure 1-5 Tip of the Day dialog box

Figure 1-4 Choosing the Sketch button from the Sketchtoolbar to invoke the sketching environment

OPENING A NEW DOCUMENTWhen you start SolidWorks, the Tip of the day dialog box will be displayed as shown inFigure 1-5.

Choose the Close button from this dialog box. You will notice that the Welcome toSolidWorks 2003 window is displayed as shown in Figure 1-6. This window can be used toopen a new file, open an existing file, and use the various types of helps available in SolidWorksto start working with this 3D solid modeling tool. This window is also used to visit the websiteof the SolidWorks partners.

Tip. When you choose any option from the Welcome to SolidWorks 2003 window,it is not closed. It is minimized on the screen and you can restore this window toopen an existing file, open a new file, or use any other option.

Tip. If the Tip of the Day dialog box is not displayed when you start the SolidWorkssession then choose Help > Tip of the Day from the menu bar. The Tip of theDay dialog box is displayed. Select the Show tips at startup option from thisdialog box. By selecting the Show tips at startup option, the Tip of the Daydialog box will be displayed every time when you start SolidWorks session. You getvaluable tips from the Tip of the Day dialog box. The tips displayed in this dialogbox are helpful in the full utilization of this CAD package.

c01-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:52 AM4


Figure 1-7 New SolidWorks Document dialog box

Choose New Document from the Welcome to SolidWorks 2003 window. The New SolidWorksDocument dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 1-7. The various options available inthis dialog box are discussed next.

Figure 1-6 Welcome to SolidWorks 2003 window

c01-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:52 AM5


Template TabThe Template tab displays the three default templates for opening a new part, assembly, ordrawing file. These three default templates are discussed next.

Part TemplateSelect the Part template and choose OK from the New SolidWorks Document dialog box toopen a new part document for creating the solid models or sheet metal component. Whenyou open a new part document, you will enter the Part mode and Plane 1 is selected bydefault for sketching. As mentioned earlier, choose the Sketch button from the Sketch toolbarand you will enter the sketching environment where you can draw the sketch of the basefeature.

Assembly TemplateSelect the Assembly template and choose OK from the New SolidWorks Document dialogbox to open a new assembly document. In an assembly document, you will assemble variouscomponents created in the various part files. You can also create the components in theassembly document.

Drawing TemplateSelect the Drawing template and choose OK from the New SolidWorks Document dialogbox to open a new drawing document. In a drawing document, you can generate or createthe drawing views of the parts created in the part document or the assemblies created in theassembly documents. When you select the Drawing template, the Create RapidDraft Drawingcheck box is displayed on the lower left corner of the New SolidWorks Document dialogbox. This check box is selected to create the rapid draft drawings. A rapid draft drawing isthe one that can be opened and edited without loading the part or the assembly file in thememory of SolidWorks.

NoteThe concept of rapid draft is discussed in detail in later chapters.

Tutorial AreaThe Tutorial tab also displays the three default templates for opening a new part, assembly,or drawing file. The only difference between the default templates in the Template tab andthe default templates in the Tutorial area is the drawing template. If you choose the drawingtemplate from the Tutorial tab, a standard A-Landscape format sheet will be displayed inthe current document, whereas if you choose the drawing template from the Template tabthen you can choose a drawing sheet of any size. Therefore, it is recommended that youalways select the templates from the Template tab.

In addition to the Template area, this dialog box also provides you with three buttons andthe Preview area. These options are discussed next.

c01-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:52 AM6


Large Icon buttonThe Large Icon button is used to display the templates in the Templates area in theform of large icons. This button is chosen by default.

List buttonThe List button is used to list the three templates in the Template area in the form ofsmall icons.

List Details buttonThe List Details button is chosen to list the details of the templates in the Templatesarea. When you choose this button, the Template area is divided into three columns:Name, Size, and Modified. These columns display the name, size, and the date when

the template was modified.

Preview AreaThe Preview area is used to preview the template to be used.

NoteYou can customize the templates in the New SolidWorks Document dialog box according toyour need and add a tab with the customized templates in this dialog box. Creation andcustomization of the templates is discussed later in the book.

THE SKETCHING ENVIRONMENTWhen you choose the Part template, a new part file will be opened in the part modelingenvironment. As mentioned earlier, you will have to choose the Sketch button from the Sketchtoolbar to invoke the sketching environment. The default screen appearance of a SolidWorkspart document in the sketching environment is shown in Figure 1-8.

SETTING UP THE DOCUMENT OPTIONSWhen you install SolidWorks on your system, you are prompted to specify the dimensioningstandards and units for measuring linear distances. You can specify these options at thattime. The settings specified at that time are made the default settings and whenever youopen a new SolidWorks document, the new file will have those settings. However, if you wantto modify these settings for a particular file, you can easily do it using the Document Propertiesdialog box. To invoke this dialog box, choose Tools > Options. When you invoke this option,the System Options dialog box will be displayed. In this dialog box, choose the DocumentProperties tab. The name of this dialog box is changed to Document Properties dialog box.

c01-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:52 AM7


Modifying the Dimensioning StandardsTo modify the dimensioning standards, invoke the System Options dialog box and thenchoose the Document Properties tab. You will notice that the Detailing option is selected bydefault from the area on the left to display the detailing options as shown in Figure 1-9.

The default dimensioning standard that was selected while installing SolidWorks will beselected in the drop-down list provided in the Dimensioning standard area. You can selectthe required dimensioning standard from this drop-down list. The standards that are availablein this drop-down list are ANSI, ISO, DIN, JIS, BSI, GOST, and GB. You can select any one ofthese dimensioning standards for the current document.

Figure 1-8 Screen display of a part document in the sketcher environment

Tip. When you open a new SolidWorks document, it is not maximized in theSolidWorks window. This is the reason the area of the new document is not maximum.To maximize the document, choose the Maximize button provided on the upperright corner of the document. You can also maximize the document window bydouble-clicking the blue bar on top of the document window.

c01-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:52 AM8


Modifying the Linear and Angular UnitsTo modify the linear and angular units, invoke the System Options dialog box and thenchoose the Document Properties tab. In this tab, select the Units option from the area onthe left to display the options related to linear and angular units as shown in Figure 1-10. Thedefault option for measuring the linear distances that was selected while installing SolidWorkswill be various in the drop-down list provided in the Linear units area. The various types ofunits that you can select from this drop-down list are angstroms, nanometers, microns,millimeters, centimeters, meters, microinches, mils, inches, feet, and feet & inches. You canalso change the units for angular dimensions by selecting it from the drop-down list in theAngular units area. The various types of angular units that can be selected from this drop-downlist are degrees, deg/min, deg/min/sec, and radians.

Figure 1-9 Setting the dimensioning standards

c01-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:52 AM9


Modifying the Snap and Grid SettingsWhen you switch to the sketching environment of SolidWorks, you will notice that thecursor jumps through a distance of 10 units. This is evident from the coordinates ofthe current location of the cursor displayed close to the lower left corner of the

SolidWorks window. You will notice that as you move the cursor, the coordinates change. Thischange in coordinate values is in the increment of 10 units. Therefore, if you draw a sketchedentity, its length will change in the increment of 10. The reason for this is that the defaultratio between the major and minor grid spacing in the sketching environment is 10. However,if you want that the coordinates should change in any other increment, you will have tomodify the ratio of major and minor lines in the grid accordingly. For example, if you wantthat the coordinates should change in the increment of 5 units, you will have to make theratio of major and minor lines to 5. To do this, choose the Grid button from the Sketchtoolbar. The Document Properties - Grid/Snap dialog box will be displayed as shown inFigure 1-11.

Note that the value of the Major grid spacing spinner is 100 and that of the Minor-lines per

Figure 1-10 Setting the dimensioning units

c01-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:52 AM10


major spinner is 10. This means that the ratio between the major and minor lines is 10because of which the cursor jumps through a distance of 10mm. To make the cursor jumpthrough a distance of 5mm, set the value of the Major grid spacing spinner to 50. The cursorwill now jump through a distance of 5mm.

NoteRemember that this setting will only be for the current documents. When you open anotherdocument, it will again have the settings that were defined while installing SolidWorks.

Tip. If you want to display the grid in the sketching environment, select the Displaygrid check box from the Grid area of the Document Properties - Grid/Snapdialog box. If you do not want the cursor to snap to a point, clear the Snap topoints check box from the Snap area.

Figure 1-11 Modifying the Grid and Snap settings

c01-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:52 AM11


LEARNING ABOUT SKETCHER TERMSBefore you learn about the various sketching tools, it is important for you to understandsome terms that are used in the sketching environment. These terms are discussed next.

OriginThe origin is a red color icon that is displayed in the middle of the sketching environmentscreen. This icon consists of two arrows displaying the X and the Y axis direction. The pointof intersection of these two axes is the origin point and the coordinates of this point are 0,0.

Inferencing LinesThe inferencing lines are the temporary lines that are used to track a particular point on thescreen. These lines are dashed lines and are automatically displayed when you select a sketchingtool in the sketcher environment. These lines are created from the endpoint of a sketchedentity or from the origin. For example, if you want to draw a line from the point where twoimaginary lines intersect, you can use the inferencing lines to locate the point and then drawthe line from that point. Figure 1-12 shows the use of inferencing lines to locate the point ofintersection of two imaginary lines.

Figure 1-13 shows the use of inferencing lines to locate the center of an arc. Notice that theinferencing lines are created from the endpoint of the line and from the origin.

NoteThe inferencing lines that are displayed on the screen will be either blue or brown in color. Theblue inferencing lines suggest that the relations are not added to the sketched entity and thebrown inferencing lines suggest that the relations are added to the sketched entity. You will learnabout various relations in later chapters.

Figure 1-12 Using inferencing lines to locate a point

Tip. You can also turn off the automatic inferencing lines by choosing Tools >Sketch Settings > Automatic Inferencing Lines from the menu bar.

c01-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:52 AM12


Select Tool

The Select tool is used to select a sketched entity or exit any sketching tool that isactive. You can select the sketched entities by picking them one by one using the leftmouse button. You can also define a window by holding the left mouse button down

and dragging the cursor around the sketched entities to select them. Remember that onlythose entities will be selected that lie completely inside the window that you have defined.

NoteYou can also invoke the Select tool or exit a sketching tool by pressing the ESC key.

Once you are familiar with these terms, you will learn about various sketcher tools availablein SolidWorks. The various sketcher tools are discussed next.

DRAWING LINES

The lines are one of the basic sketching tools available in SolidWorks. In generalterms, a line is defined as the shortest distance between two points. As mentionedearlier, SolidWorks is a parametric solid modeling tool. This property allows you to

draw a line of any length and at any angle and then later force it to the desired length andangle. To draw a line in the sketcher environment of SolidWorks, choose the Line tool. Youwill notice that the cursor that was an arrow earlier is replaced by the line cursor. The linecursor is actually a pencil-like cursor with a small inclined line below the pencil.

Figure 1-13 Using inferencing lines to locate the center of an arc

Menu: Tools > SelectToolbar: Sketch > Select

Menu: Tools > Sketch Entity > LineToolbar: Sketch Tools > Line

c01-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:52 AM13


In SolidWorks, there are two methods to draw lines. The first method is to draw continuouslines and the second method is to draw individual lines. Both these methods are discussednext.

Drawing Continuous LinesThis is the default method of drawing lines. In this method you just have to specify thestartpoint and the endpoint of the line using the left mouse button. As soon as you specifythe startpoint of the line, the Line PropertyManager will be displayed on the left of thescreen. However, when you are drawing continuous lines, the options in the LinePropertyManager will not be available.

When you specify the startpoint and the endpoint of the line using the left mouse button, aline will be drawn between the two points. You will notice that the line is green in color andhas square boxes at the two ends. The line is displayed in green color because it is stillselected. As soon as you draw another line, choose the Select tool, or choose another tool, theline turns to blue in color and the new line is displayed in green color.

You will notice that after you have drawn the first line, another line is displayed on thescreen. The startpoint of this line is the endpoint of the last line and the length of this linewill increase or decrease as you move the mouse. This line is called a rubber-band line andthe reason it is a called a rubber-band line is that this line will stretch like a rubber-band asyou move the cursor. The point that you specify next on the screen will be taken as theendpoint of the second line and a line will be drawn such that the endpoint of the first line istaken as the startpoint of the new line and the point you specify is taken as the endpoint ofthe new line. Now, a new rubber-band line is displayed starting from the endpoint of the lastline. This is a continuous process and you can draw as many continuous lines as you need byspecifying the points on the screen using the left mouse button.

You can exit the continuous line drawing process by pressing the ESC key from the keyboard,by choosing the Select tool, or by double-clicking the screen. You can also right-click todisplay the shortcut menu and choose the End Chain option from the shortcut menu.Figure 1-14 shows a sketch drawn using continuous lines.

NoteWhen you exit the line drawing process by double-clicking the screen or by choosing End chainfrom the shortcut menu, the current chain is ended but the Line tool is still active and you candraw additional lines.

Drawing Individual LinesThis is the second method of drawing lines. Using this method you can draw individual linesand the startpoint of the next line will not necessarily be the endpoint of the last line. Todraw individual lines, you need to press and hold down the left mouse button and drag thecursor from the startpoint of the line to the endpoint. Once you have dragged the cursor tothe endpoint, release the left mouse button. A line will be drawn between the point fromwhere you started dragging the mouse and the point where you released the mouse.

c01-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:52 AM14


To make the process of sketching in SolidWorks easy, you are provided with thePropertyManager. The PropertyManager is a table that is displayed on the left of the screenas soon as you select the first point of any sketch entity. The PropertyManager has all theparameters related to the sketched entity such as the startpoint, endpoint, angle, length, andso on. You will notice that as you start dragging the mouse, the Line PropertyManager isdisplayed on the left of the drawing window. All the options in the Line PropertyManagerwill be available when you release the left mouse button. Figure 1-15 shows partial display ofthe Line PropertyManager.

NoteThe Line PropertyManager will also display addition options about relations. You will learnmore about relations in later chapters.

After you have drawn the line, modify the parameters in the Line PropertyManager to forcethe line to the desired length and angle. You can also dynamically modify the line by holdingthe square boxes at the endpoints of the line and dragging them.

When you draw lines in the sketcher environment of SolidWorks, you will notice that a numericvalue is displayed above the line cursor, see Figure 1-16. This numeric value indicates thelength of the line that you draw. This value is the same as that in the Length spinner of theLine PropertyManager. The only difference is that in the Line PropertyManager, the valuewill be displayed with more precision.

Figure 1-14 Sketch drawn with the help of continuous lines

c01-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:52 AM15


The other thing that you will notice while sketching is that sometimes when you are drawingvertical or horizontal lines, a V or an H symbol is displayed below the line cursor. These arethe symbols of the Vertical and Horizontal relations. SolidWorks automatically appliesthese relations to the lines. These relations ensure that the lines that you draw are verticalor horizontal and not inclined. Figure 1-17 shows the symbol of the Vertical relation on a lineand Figure 1-18 shows the symbol of the Horizontal relation on a line.

Figure 1-15 Partial display of the Line PropertyManager

Figure 1-16 The length of the line displayed on the screen while drawing the line

c01-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:52 AM16


NoteIn addition to the Horizontal and Vertical relations, you can also apply a number of otherrelations such as Tangent, Concentric, Perpendicular, Parallel, and so on. You will learnabout all these relations in later chapters.

The other options of the Line PropertyManager will be discussed in later chapters.

Drawing Construction Lines

Construction lines are the ones that are drawn only for the aid of sketching. Theselines are not considered while converting the sketches into features. You can draw aconstruction line similar to the sketched line by using the Centerline tool. You will

notice that when you draw a construction line, the For Construction check box in the LinePropertyManager is selected. You can also draw a construction line by sketching the lineusing the Line tool and then selecting the For Construction check box available in the LinePropertyManager. You will notice that when you choose this check box, the line is turnedinto a centerline.

DRAWING CIRCLES

In SolidWorks, the circles are drawn by specifying the centerpoint of the circle usingthe left mouse button and then moving the mouse on the screen to define the radiusof the circle. Similar to the lines, as soon as you specify the center of the circle, the

Circle PropertyManager is displayed. However, note that the options in the CirclePropertyManager will be available only after you have defined the radius of the circle.Figure 1-19 shows the Circle PropertyManager.

To draw the circle, choose the Circle button. You will notice that the arrow cursor is replacedby the circle cursor. The circle cursor consists of a pencil and two concentric circles below thepencil. Specify the centerpoint of the circle and then move the cursor to define the radius of

Menu: Tools > Sketch Entity > CenterlineToolbar: Sketch Tools > Centerline

Figure 1-18 Symbol of the Horizontal relationFigure 1-17 Symbol of the Vertical relation

Menu: Tools > Sketch Entity > CircleToolbar: Sketch Tools > Circle

c01-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:52 AM17


Tip. To convert a construction entity back to the sketched entity, invoke the selecttool and then select the construction entity. The entity will turn green in color andthe PropertyManager will be displayed on the left of the drawing window. Fromthe PropertyManager, clear the For Construction check box. The constructionentity will again be changed into a sketched entity and will be displayed withcontinuous line.

the circle. The current radius of the circle is displayed above the circle cursor. This radius willchange as you move the cursor. You can define any arbitrary radius of the circle and thenmodify it to the desired value by using the Circle PropertyManager. Figure 1-20 shows acircle being drawn using the Circle tool.

Sketching a Construction CircleIf you want to sketch a construction circle, draw the circle using the Circle tool and thenselect the For Construction check box available in the Circle PropertyManager.

Figure 1-19 Circle PropertyManager

c01-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:52 AM18


Menu: Tools > Sketch Entity > Tangent ArcToolbar: Sketch Tools > Tangent Arc

Figure 1-20 Sketching a circle

DRAWING ARCSIn SolidWorks, you can draw the arcs using three methods: Tangent Arc, Centerpoint Arc,and 3 Point Arc. All these methods can be invoked separately by choosing their respectivebuttons from the Sketch Tools toolbar. All these three methods to draw arcs are discussednext.

Drawing Tangent Arcs

The tangent arcs are the ones that are drawn tangent to an existing sketched entity.The existing sketched entities include sketched and construction lines, arcs, andsplines. As soon as you invoke this tool, the arrow cursor is replaced by the arc cursor.

An arc cursor consists of a pencil and an arc below the pencil.

To draw a tangent arc, invoke the Tangent Arc tool and then move the arc cursor close to theendpoint of the entity that you want to select as the tangent entity. You will notice that theentity selected as the tangent entity is turned green in color and the color of the pencil in thecursor is changed to yellow. Also, an orange-colored box is displayed below the pencil. Thissuggests that the endpoint of the entity is selected. Now, press the left mouse button onceand move the cursor to size the arc. The arc will start from the endpoint of the tangent entityand its size will change as you move the cursor. Note that the angle and the radius of thetangent arc are displayed above the arc cursor, see Figure 1-21.

As soon as you start moving the cursor, the Arc PropertyManager is displayed. However, theoptions in the Arc PropertyManager are not available at this stage. These options are enabledonly after you have completed drawing the tangent arc. When you complete a tangent sketchby specifying its endpoint, the SolidWorks information box is displayed as shown inFigure 1-22. This dialog box will inform you to select the endpoint of a sketched entity todraw another tangent arc.

c01-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:52 AM19


Menu: Tools > Sketch Entity > Centerpoint ArcToolbar: Sketch Tools > Centerpoint Arc

You can draw an arbitrary tangent arc and then modify its value using the ArcPropertyManager. Figure 1-23 shows a partial view of the Arc PropertyManager.

NoteWhen you select a tangent entity to draw a tangent arc, the Tangent relation is applied betweenthe startpoint of the arc and the tangent entity. Therefore, if you change the coordinates of thestartpoint of the arc, the tangent entity will also be modified accordingly.

Drawing Centerpoint Arcs

The centerpoint arcs are the ones that are drawn by defining the centerpoint,startpoint, and endpoint of the arc. When you invoke this tool, the arrow cursor isreplaced by the arc cursor. As mentioned earlier, an arc cursor consists of a pencil

and an arc below the pencil.

To draw a centerpoint arc, invoke the Centerpoint Arc tool and then move the arc cursor tothe point that you want to specify as the centerpoint of the arc. Press the left mouse button

Figure 1-21 Drawing tangent arc

Figure 1-22 SolidWorks information box prompting youto select the endpoint of another sketched entity

c01-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:52 AM20


once at the location of the centerpoint and then move the cursor to the point from where youwant to start the arc. You will notice that a dotted circle is displayed on the screen. This sizeof this circle will modify as you move the mouse. This circle is drawn for your reference andthe centerpoint of this circle lies at the point that you specified as the center of the arc. Pressthe left mouse button once at the point that you want to select as the startpoint of the arc.Next, move the mouse to specify the endpoint of the arc. You will notice that the referencecircle is no more displayed and an arc is being drawn with the startpoint as the point thatyou specified after specifying the centerpoint. Also, the Arc PropertyManager similar to theone that is shown in the tangent arc is displayed on the left of the drawing window. Note thatthe options in the Arc PropertyManager will not be available at this stage.

Figure 1-23 Arc PropertyManager

c01-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:52 AM21


Figure 1-25 Moving the cursor to specify the startpoint and the endpoint of the arc

If you move the cursor in the clockwise direction, the resultant arc will be drawn in theclockwise direction. However, if you move the cursor in the counterclockwise direction, theresultant arc will be drawn in the counterclockwise direction. Specify the endpoint of the arcusing the left mouse button. Figure 1-24 shows the reference circle that is drawn when youmove the mouse button after specifying the centerpoint of the arc and Figure 1-25 shows theresultant centerpoint arc.

Drawing 3 Point Arcs

The 3 point arcs are the ones that are drawn by defining the startpoint and endpointof the arc, and a point somewhere on the arc. When you invoke this tool, the arrow

Menu: Tools > Sketch Entity > 3 Point ArcToolbar: Sketch Tools > 3 Pt Arc

Figure 1-24 Specifying the centerpoint and the startpoint of the centerpoint arc

c01-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:52 AM22


Figure 1-26 Specifying the startpoint and the endpoint of the arc

Figure 1-27 Specifying the point on arc to draw it

cursor is replaced by the arc cursor.

To draw a 3 point arc, invoke the 3 Pt Arc tool and then move the arc cursor to the point thatyou want to specify as the startpoint of the arc. Press the left mouse button once at thelocation of the startpoint and then move the cursor to the point that you want specify as theendpoint of the arc. As soon as you start moving the cursor after specifying the startpoint, areference arc will be drawn and the Arc PropertyManager will be displayed. However, theoptions in the Arc PropertyManager will not be available at this stage.

Using the left mouse button, specify the endpoint of the arc. You will notice that the referencearc is no more displayed. Instead a solid arc is displayed and the cursor is attached to the arc.As you move the cursor, the arc will also be modified dynamically. Using the left mousebutton, specify a point on the screen to create the arc. The last point that you specify willdetermine the direction of the arc. The options in the Arc PropertyManager will be displayedafter you have drawn the arc. You can modify the properties of the arc using the ArcPropertyManager. Figure 1-26 shows the reference arc that is drawn by specifying the startpointand the endpoint of the arc and Figure 1-27 shows the resultant 3 point arc.

c01-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:52 AM23


Figure 1-28 Drawing a tangent arc using the Line tool

Invoking the Options to Draw an Arc from within the LineToolSolidWorks allows you to invoke the options to draw tangent and normal arcs while you aredrawing continuous lines using the Line tool. Note that the option to draw an arc can beinvoked only if at least one sketched line, arc, or spline exists on the screen. To draw an arctangent to the last line drawn using the current Line tool sequence, move the cursor awayfrom the endpoint of the line and then move it back close to the endpoint. You will noticethat the line cursor is replaced by the arc cursor and the Line PropertyManager is replacedby the Arc PropertyManager. Similarly, if you want to draw an arc tangent to an existingsketched entity using the Line tool, invoke this tool and select the endpoint of the sketchedentity. Now, move the cursor away from the endpoint and then move it back close to theendpoint. You will switch to the arc mode.

Now, if you want to draw an arc tangent to the previous line, move the cursor along the linethrough a small distance. A dotted line will be drawn. Next, move the cursor in the directionin which the arc should be drawn. You will notice that a tangent arc is drawn. Specify theendpoint of the tangent arc using the left mouse button. Figure 1-28 shows an arc tangent toan existing line.

If you want to draw an arc normal to the previous line, move the cursor away from theendpoint and then move it back to the endpoint to switch to the arc mode. Next, move thecursor normal to the existing line and then move the cursor in the direction in which the arcshould be drawn. You will notice that a normal arc is being drawn. Figure 1-29 shows anormal arc being drawn using the Line tool.

Figure 1-29 Drawing a normal arc using the Line tool

c01-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:52 AM24


Figure 1-30 Drawing a rectangle by specifying two opposite corners

After drawing an arc using the Line tool, the next entity that will be drawn in the samesequence is the line. If you want to draw another arc, use the procedure that was followedwhile drawing the first arc. Note that if you want to switch back to the line mode, click once atthe endpoint of the previous entity using the left mouse button. You can also toggle betweenthe line and the arc mode by pressing the A key from the keyboard or by using the option inthe shortcut menu that is displayed when you right-click in the drawing area.

DRAWING RECTANGLES

In SolidWorks, the rectangles are drawn by specifying two opposite corners of therectangle. To draw a rectangle, invoke the Rectangle tool. The arrow cursor will bereplaced by the rectangle cursor. Move the cursor to the point that you want to specify

as the first corner of the rectangle. Press the left mouse button once at the first corner andthen move the cursor and specify the other corner of the rectangle using the left mousebutton. You will notice that the length and width of the rectangle are displayed above therectangle cursor. The length is measured along the X axis and the width is measured alongthe Y axis. Figure 1-30 shows a rectangle being drawn by specifying two opposite corners.

Menu: Tools > Sketch Entity > RectangleToolbar: Sketch Tools > Rectangle

c01-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:52 AM25


NoteWhen you draw a rectangle, the PropertyManager will not be displayed. This is because arectangle is considered as a combination of four individual lines. Therefore, after drawing therectangle, if you select one of the lines of the rectangle using the Select tool, the LinePropertyManager will be displayed. You can modify the parameters of the selected line usingthe Line PropertyManager.

Remember that since the relations are applied to all the four corners of the rectangle, if youmodify the parameters of one of the lines using the Line PropertyManager, the other threelines will also be modified accordingly.

You can convert a rectangle into a construction rectangle by selecting all the lines together usinga window and then selecting the For Construction check box from the PropertyManager.

DRAWING PARALLELOGRAM

In SolidWorks, the Parallelogram tool can be used to draw a parallelogram and also to drawa rectangle at an angle. The methods to draw both these entities are discussed next.

Drawing a Rectangle at an AngleA rectangle at an angle is drawn by first defining one of the edges of the parallelogram usingtwo points. Since the edge is defined using two points, you can specify the points at an angle,thus forcing the edge to be at an angle. After defining one of the edges at an angle, you willmove the cursor to define the width of the rectangle. The width of the rectangle will bedefined normal to the first edge. Therefore, you will specify a total of three points in defininga parallelogram.

To draw a rectangle at an angle, invoke the Parallelogram tool from the menu bar. Thecursor will be replaced by the parallelogram cursor. Move the cursor to the point that youwant to select as the startpoint of one of the edges of the rectangle. Press the left mousebutton once at this point and move the cursor to size the edge. You will notice that a referenceline is being drawn. Based on the current position of the cursor, the reference line will behorizontal, vertical, or aligned. The current length of the edge and its angle will be displayedabove the parallelogram cursor. Using the left mouse button, specify the endpoint of theedge such that the resultant reference line is at an angle.

Next, move the cursor to specify the width of the rectangle. You will notice that a referencerectangle is drawn at an angle. Also, irrespective of the current position of the cursor, thewidth will be specified normal to the first edge, either above or below. Using the left mousebutton, specify a point on the screen to define the width of the rectangle. The referencerectangle will be converted into a sketched rectangle. Figure 1-31 shows a rectangle drawn atan angle.

Drawing ParallelogramsThe process of drawing a parallelogram is similar to that of drawing a rectangle at an angle.

Menu: Tools > Sketch Entity > Parallelogram

c01-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:52 AM26


The only difference is that while specifying the third point to define the width, press theCTRL key from the keyboard. The width will no more be added normal to the first edge.Therefore, you can draw a parallelogram.

To draw a parallelogram, invoke the Parallelogram tool from the menu bar. The cursor willbe replaced by the parallelogram cursor. Specify two points on the screen to define one edgeof the parallelogram. Next, press the CTRL key from the keyboard once and then move themouse to define the width of the parallelogram. You will notice that the width is no moreadded normal to the first edge. As you move the mouse, a reference parallelogram will bedrawn. The size and the shape of the reference parallelogram will depend upon the currentlocation of the cursor.

Specify the point on the screen to define the parallelogram. Figure 1-32 shows a parallelogramdrawn at an angle.

NoteSimilar to the rectangles, each edge of a parallelogram is considered as a separate line. Also, incase of parallelograms, the PropertyManager is not displayed while you are drawing it.

DRAWING POLYGONS

A polygon is defined as a multisided geometric figure in which the length of all thesides and the angle between all the sides are the same. In SolidWorks, you can drawa polygon with the number of sides ranging from 3 to 40. The dimensions of a polygon

are controlled using the diameter of a construction circle that is either inscribed inside thepolygon or circumscribed about the polygon. If the construction circle is inscribed inside the

Menu: Tools > Sketch Entity > PolygonToolbar: Sketch Tools > Polygon

Figure 1-31 Rectangle at an angle

c01-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:52 AM27


polygon, the diameter of the construction circle is taken from the edges of the polygon. If theconstruction circle is circumscribed about the polygon, the diameter of the construction circleis taken from the vertices of the polygon.

To draw a polygon, invoke the Polygon tool. When you invoke this tool, the PolygonPropertyManager will be displayed as shown in Figure 1-33. Set the parameters such as thenumber of sides, inscribed or circumscribed circle, and so on in the Polygon PropertyManager.You can also modify these parameters after drawing the polygon. When you invoke this tool,the arrow cursor will be replaced by the polygon cursor. Press the left mouse button at thepoint that you want to select as the centerpoint of the polygon and then move the cursor tosize the polygon. The length of each side and the rotation angle of the polygon will bedisplayed above the polygon cursor as you drag it. Using the left mouse button, specify apoint on the screen after you get the desired length and rotation angle of the polygon. Youwill notice that based on whether you selected the Inscribed circle or the Circumscribedcircle radio button in the Polygon PropertyManager, a construction circle will be drawninside or outside the polygon. After you have drawn the polygon, you can modify theparameters such as the centerpoint of the polygon, the diameter of the construction circle,the angle of rotation of the polygon, and so on using the Polygon PropertyManager. If youwant to draw another polygon, choose the New polygon button provided below the Anglespinner in the Polygon PropertyManager.

Figure 1-34 shows a six-sided polygon with the construction circle inscribed inside the polygonand Figure 1-35 shows a five-sided polygon with the construction circle circumscribed outsidethe polygon. Notice that the reference circle is retained with the polygon. Remember thatthis circle will not be considered while converting the polygon into a feature.

Figure 1-32 Parallelogram at an angle

c01-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:52 AM28


Figure 1-34 Six-sided polygon with construction circle inscribed inside the polygon

Figure 1-33 Polygon PropertyManager

c01-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:52 AM29


DRAWING SPLINES

In SolidWorks, the splines can be drawn using two methods. In the first method,which is the default method, you can draw a spline by continuously specifying theendpoints of the spline segments using the left mouse button. This method of drawing

splines is similar to the method of drawing continuous lines.

In the second method of drawing a spline, you have to specify the first point of the spline andthen press and hold the left mouse button and drag the cursor to define the second point ofthe spline. After specifying the second point, release the left mouse button. One segment ofthe spline will be drawn. To draw the next segment, move the cursor close to the endpoint ofthe first spline segment. The pencil in the spline cursor will turn yellow in color and anorange-colored box will be displayed below the pencil. This suggests that the endpoint isselected. When the orange box is displayed, press and hold the left mouse button down anddrag the cursor. The endpoint of the last segment will be taken as the startpoint of thesecond segment and the point where you release the cursor will be taken as the endpoint ofthe second segment. Repeat the procedure to draw as many segments of the spline.

The number of points you specify in a spline are taken as the handles of the spline. Therefore,after drawing a spline, if you select it using the Select tool, all the points that you specifiedare displayed on the spline inside square boxes. These points are called the handles or thecontrol points and you can modify the shape of a spline using these handles. Figure 1-36shows a sketched spline.

NoteIrrespective of the number of segments in a spline, it will be considered as a single entity.

Figure 1-35 Five-sided polygon with construction circle circumscribed outside the polygon

Menu: Tools > Sketch Entity > SplineToolbar: Sketch Tools > Spline

c01-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:52 AM30


DRAWING POINTS

To draw a point, choose the Point tool and then specify the point on the screen whereyou want to place the point. The Point PropertyManager will be displayed with the Xand Y coordinates of the current point. You can modify the location of the point by

modifying its X and Y coordinates in the Point PropertyManager.

DRAWING ELLIPSES

In SolidWorks, the ellipse is drawn by specifying the centerpoint of the ellipse and thenspecifying the two ellipse axes by moving the mouse. To draw an ellipse, invoke this tool fromthe menu bar. The arrow cursor will be replaced by the ellipse cursor. Move the cursor to thepoint that you want to select as the centerpoint of the ellipse. Press the left mouse buttononce at the centerpoint of the ellipse and then move the cursor to specify one of the ellipseaxis. You will notice that a reference circle is drawn and two values are displayed above theellipse cursor, see Figure 1-37. The first value that shows R = * is the radius of the first axisthat you are defining and the second value that shows r = * is the radius of the other axis.

Menu: Tools > Sketch Entity > Ellipse

Figure 1-36 Sketched spline with startpoint at the origin

Tip. As you start drawing a spline, the Spline PropertyManager is displayed.However, the options in it are not available. These options will be available whenyou select an existing spline using the Select tool. The current handle will bedisplayed with a filled square and its number and the corresponding X and Ycoordinates will be displayed in the Spline PropertyManager. You can modifythese coordinates to modify the selected spline.

Menu: Tools > Sketch Entity > PointToolbar: Sketch Tools > Point

c01-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:52 AM31


While you are defining the first axis, the second axis is taken equal to the first axis. This is thereason a reference circle is drawn and not a reference ellipse.

Specify a point on the screen to define the first axis. Next,move the cursor to size the other ellipse axis. You will noticethat the Ellipse PropertyManager is displayed. Figure 1-38shows a partial view of the Ellipse PropertyManager.

The second value above the ellipse cursor that shows r = *will change dynamically as you move the cursor on the screen.Using the left mouse button, specify a point on the screen todefine the second axis of the ellipse, see Figure 1-39.

Figure 1-37 Dragging the cursor to define the first axis

Figure 1-38 Partial view of theEllipse PropertyManager

Figure 1-39 Define the second axis of the ellipse

c01-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:52 AM32


DRAWING ELLIPTICAL ARCS

In SolidWorks, the process of drawing an elliptical arc is similar to that of drawing an ellipse.You will follow the same process of defining the ellipse first. The point that you specify on thescreen to define the other axis of the ellipse is taken as the startpoint of the elliptical arc. Youcan define the endpoint of the elliptical arc by specifying a point on the screen as shown inFigure 1-40.

You can also set the parameters of the elliptical arc in the Ellipse PropertyManager shown inFigure 1-41.

DRAWING A PARABOLIC CURVE

In SolidWorks, you will draw a parabolic curve by specifying the focal point of the parabolaand then specifying two points on the guide lines of the parabolic curve. To draw a paraboliccurve, invoke this tool from the menu bar. The cursor will be replaced by the parabola cursor.Move the cursor to the point that you want to specify as the focal point of the parabola. Pressthe left mouse button once at the focal point and then move the cursor to define the apexpoint and size the parabola. You will notice that a reference parabolic arc is displayed. As youmove the cursor away from the focal point, the parabola is flattened. After you get the basicshape of the parabolic curve, specify a point on the screen using the left mouse button. Thispoint is taken as the apex of the parabolic curve. Next, specify two point on the screen with

Menu: Tools > Sketch Entity > Parabola

Menu: Tools > Sketch Entity > Centerpoint Ellipse

Figure 1-40 Drawing the elliptical arc

c01-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:52 AM33


respect to the reference parabola to define the guide lines of the parabolic curve, seeFigure 1-42.

As you move the mouse after specifying the focal point of the parabola, the ParabolaPropertyManager will be displayed. But the options in the Parabola PropertyManager willnot be available. These options will be available only after you have drawn the parabola.Figure 1-43 shows a partial view of the Parabola PropertyManager.

Figure 1-41 Ellipse PropertyManager

c01-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:52 AM34


DRAWING DISPLAY TOOLSThe drawing display tools are one of the most important tools provided in any of the solidmodeling software. These tools allow you to modify the display of the drawing by zooming orpanning the drawing. Some of the drawing display tools that are available in SolidWorks arediscussed in this chapter. The remaining tools are discussed in the later chapters.

Figure 1-42 Drawing the parabola

Figure 1-43 Partial view of the ParabolaPropertyManager

c01-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:52 AM35


Zoom to Fit

The Zoom to Fit tool is used to increase or decrease the drawing display area so thatall the sketched entities or dimensions are fitted inside the current view.

Zoom to Area

The Zoom to Area tool is used to magnify a specified area so that the part of thedrawing inside the magnified area can be viewed in the current window. The area isdefined by a window that is created by dragging the cursor and specifying two opposite

corners of the window. When you choose this tool, the cursor is replaced by a magnifyingglass cursor. Press and hold the left mouse button down and drag the cursor to specify twoopposite corners of the window. The area enclosed inside the window will be magnified.

Zoom In/Out

The Zoom In/Out tool is used to dynamically zoom in or out of the drawing. Whenyou invoke this tool, the cursor is replaced by the zoom cursor. To zoom out of adrawing, press and hold the left mouse button down and drag the cursor in the

downward direction. Similarly, to zoom in a drawing, press and hold the left mouse buttondown and drag the cursor in the upward direction. As you drag the cursor, the drawingdisplay will be modified dynamically. After you get the desired view, exit this tool by choosingthe Select tool from the Sketch toolbar. You can also exit this tool by right-clicking andchoosing Select from the shortcut menu or by pressing the ESC key.

Zoom to Selection

The Zoom to Selection tool is used to modify the drawing display area such that theselected entity is fitted inside the current display. This tool will be available onlywhen you select an entity using the Select tool. After selecting the entity, choose the

Zoom to Selection button. The drawing display area will be modified such that the selectedentity fits inside the current view.

Menu: View > Modify > Zoom to FitToolbar: View > Zoom to Fit

Menu: View > Modify > Zoom to AreaToolbar: View > Zoom to Area

Menu: View > Modify > Zoom In/OutToolbar: View > Zoom In/Out

Menu: View > Modify > Zoom to SelectionToolbar: View > Zoom to Selection

Tip. You can also use the keyboard shortcuts to invoke some of the drawing displaytools. For example, to invoke the Zoom to Fit tool, press the F key. Similarly, tozoom out of a drawing, press the Z key and to zoom in, press SHIFT+Z key.

c01-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:52 AM36


Pan

The Pan tool is used to drag the view in the current display. This process is similar tochanging the view by using the scroll bars available in the drawing window.

Redraw

The Redraw tool is used to refresh the screen. Sometimes when you draw a sketchedentity, some unwanted elements remain on the screen. To remove these unwantedelements from the screen, choose this tool. The screen will be refreshed and all the

unwanted elements will be removed. You can also invoke this tool by pressing CTRL+R keysfrom the keyboard.

DELETING THE SKETCHED ENTITIESYou can delete the sketched entities by selecting them using the Select tool and then pressingthe DELETE key from the keyboard. You can select the entities by picking them individuallyor select more than one entity by defining a window around the entities. When you select theentities, they turn green in color. When they turn green, press the DELETE key from thekeyboard. You can also delete the sketched entities by selecting them and choosing the Deleteoption from the shortcut menu that is displayed upon right-clicking.

TUTORIALS

Tutorial 1In this tutorial you will draw the sketch of the model shown in Figure 1-44. The sketch isshown in Figure 1-45. You will not dimension the sketch. The solid model and the dimensionsare given only for your reference. (Expected time: 30 min)

The steps that will be followed to complete this tutorial are listed below:

a. Start SolidWorks and then open a new part file.b. Maximize the part file document and then switch to the sketching environment.c. Draw the sketch of the model using the Line and the Circle tools, refer to Figure 1-48

through Figure 1- 50.d. Save the sketch and then close the file.

Menu: View > Modify > PanToolbar: View > Pan

Menu: View > RedrawToolbar: Standard > Rebuild

Tip. You can also invoke the Pan tool using the CTRL key and the arrow keys onthe keyboard. For example, to pan toward the right, press the CTRL key and thenpress the right arrow key a few times. Similarly, to pan upward, press the CTRLkey and then press the up arrow key a few times.

c01-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:52 AM37


Starting SolidWorks and Opening a New Part Document1. Start SolidWorks by choosing Start > Programs > SolidWorks 2003 > SolidWorks 2003

or by double-clicking the shortcut icon of SolidWorks available on the desktop of yourcomputer.

The Tip of the Day dialog box will be displayed. If the Tip of the Day dialog box is notdisplayed when you start the SolidWorks session then you need to set the option todisplay the Tip of the Day dialog box when you start the new SolidWorks session.

2. Choose Help > Tip of the Day from the menu bar. The Tip of the Day dialog box isdisplayed. Select the Show tips at startup check box from this dialog box.

Figure 1-44 Solid model for Tutorial 1

Figure 1-45 Sketch of the model

c01-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:52 AM38


Figure 1-46 New SolidWorks Document dialog box

By selecting the Show tips at startup check box, the Tip of the Day dialog box will bedisplayed every time you start the SolidWorks session. You can get many valuable tipsfrom the Tip of the Day dialog box. The tips displayed in this dialog box are helpful tomake the full utilization of this CAD package.

3. Close the Tip of the Day dialog box by choosing the Close button. The Welcome toSolidWorks 2003 window is displayed. Choose the New Document option from thiswindow.

The New SolidWorks Document dialog box is displayed.

4. Select the Part option and then choose the OK button from the New SolidWorksDocument dialog box as shown in Figure 1-46.

A new SolidWorks part document will be opened. But the part document window will notbe maximized in the SolidWorks window.

Tip. If the shortcut icon of SolidWorks is not created automatically on the desktopof your system when you install SolidWorks, you can create it manually. To createthe shortcut icon on the desktop, choose Start > Programs > SolidWorks 2003to display the SolidWorks cascading menu. Right-click SolidWorks 2003 in thecascading menu and then choose Send To > Desktop (create shortcut) from theshortcut menu.

c01-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:52 AM39


5. Choose the Maximize button available on the upper right corner of the part documentwindow to maximize the document window.

When you open a new part document, the part modeling environment is active by default.Since you first need to draw the sketch of the feature, you need to invoke the sketchingenvironment.

6. Choose the Sketch button from the Sketch toolbar to invoke the sketchingenvironment.

You will notice that the origin that was displayed with gray color earlier is changed to redcolor, indicating the sketching environment. The default screen appearance of thesketching environment of SolidWorks is shown in Figure 1-47.

Figure 1-47 Screen display in the sketcher environment

Tip. If the grid is displayed on the screen when you invoke the sketching environmentfor the first time, then you can set the option to turn off the grid display. ChooseTools > Options from the menu bar. The System Options - General dialog boxis displayed. Choose the Document Properties tab from this dialog box. Select theGrid/Snap option from the left of this dialog box. Clear the Display grid checkbox from the Grid area and choose the OK button from this dialog box.

c01-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:52 AM40


Setting the Units and GridIt is assumed that while installing SolidWorks, you selected the option of measuring thelength in millimeters. This is the reason the length will be measured in millimeter in thecurrent file. However, if you selected some other units, you need to make some initialsettings of changing the linear and angular units before you proceed with drawing thesketch.

1. Choose Tools > Options from the menu bar to invoke the System Options - Generaldialog box.

2. Choose the Document Properties tab. The name of the dialog box will be changed tothe Document Properties - Detailing dialog box.

3. Select the Units option from the area on the left to display the options related to linearand angular units.

4. Select Millimeters from the drop-down list available in the Linear units area. Also, selectthe Degrees option from the drop-down list provided in the Angular units area.

NoteIf you selected Millimeters as the units while installing SolidWorks, you can skip the pointsdiscussed earlier in this section.

5. Select Grid/Snap from the area on the left. Set the value of the Major grid spacingspinner to 100 and the value of the Minor-lines per major spinner to 10.

6. Select the Snap to points check box if it is cleared. Choose OK to exit the dialog box.

Drawing the Outer Loop of the SketchIt is a good practice to draw the sketch on one side of the origin, preferably in the firstquadrant. This is because while generating the part program for manufacturing the part,you will have a reference for work origin in advance.

The sketch of the model consists of an outer loop, two circles inside the outer loop, anda cavity. Therefore, it will be drawn using the Line and the Circle tools. You will firstdraw the outer loop and then the inner entities. Note that in the sketcher environment,the lower right corner of the SolidWorks window displays three areas. The first areadisplays the X, Y, and Z coordinates of the current location of the cursor. These coordinateswill modify as you move the cursor around the drawing area. You will use the coordinatedisplay to draw the sketch of the model.

You will start drawing the sketch from the lower left corner of the sketch and the outerloop will be drawn using the continuous lines.

1. Choose the Line button from the Sketch Tools toolbar to invoke the Line tool.

The arrow cursor will be replaced by the line cursor.

c01-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:52 AM41


2. Move the cursor in the first quadrant close to the origin. The coordinates of the pointwill be displayed close to the lower right corner of the screen.

3. Press the left mouse button at the point whose coordinates are 10mm 10mm 0mm andthen move the cursor horizontally toward the right.

You will notice that the symbol of Horizontal relation is displayed below the line cursorand the length of the line is displayed above the line cursor.

Since the length of the first horizontal line at the lower left corner is 10mm, you willmove the mouse until the length of the line is shown as 10 above the line cursor.

4. Press the left mouse button when the length of the line that is displayed above the linecursor shows a value of 10.

The first horizontal line is drawn. Since you are drawing continuous lines, the endpointof the last line will be automatically selected as the startpoint of the next line.

5. Move the line cursor vertically upward. The symbol of Vertical relation will be displayedbelow the line cursor and the length of the line will be displayed above the line cursor.

6. Press the left mouse button when the length of the line displayed above the line cursorshows a value of 10.

A vertical line of length 10mm will be drawn and will be displayed in green color. Also,since this is the line that is selected, the previous line will no more be highlighted andtherefore will be displayed in blue color.

7. Move the line cursor horizontally toward the right. Press the left mouse button when thelength of the line above the line cursor shows a value of 10.

This draws the next horizontal line of 10mm length.

8. Move the line cursor vertically downward and press the left mouse button when thelength of the line on the line cursor shows a value of 10.

9. Move the line cursor horizontally toward the right and press the left mouse button whenthe length of the line on the line cursor shows a value of 30.

10. Move the line cursor vertically upwards and press the left mouse button when the lengthof the line on the line cursor shows a value of 10.

11. Move the line cursor horizontally toward the right and press the left mouse button when

Tip. If by mistake you invoke the arc mode while drawing lines, move the cursorback to the endpoint of previous line and press the left mouse button. The line modewill be invoked again.

c01-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:52 AM42


the length of the line on the line cursor shows a value of 10.

12. Move the line cursor vertically downwards and press the left mouse button when thelength of the line on the line cursor shows a value of 10.

13. Move the line cursor horizontally toward the right and press the left mouse button whenthe length of the line on the line cursor shows a value of 10.

14. Move the line cursor vertically upwards and press the left mouse button when the lengthof the line on the line cursor displays a value of 40.

The next line that you will draw is an inclined line that makes an angle of 135-degree. Todraw this line, you will move the cursor in a direction that makes an angle of 135-degrees.It is not necessary to make sure that the line you draw is exact. You can draw a line atsome other angle and then modify the values from the Line PropertyManager.

The aligned length of the line is not given for this line. Instead, the delta X and delta Yvalues are given. Therefore, you will draw a line at this point such that the delta X anddelta Y value of this line is 10mm. These values can be viewed in the LinePropertyManager. The last spinners in the Line PropertyManager are for the deltavalues.

15. Move the line cursor such that the line is drawn at an angle of 135-degree. The currentangle will be displayed in the spinner above the delta spinners in the Line PropertyManager.

16. Press the left mouse button when the delta X value in the Delta X spinner shows a valueof 10 and the value of delta Y in the Delta Y spinner displays a value of 10 in the LinePropertyManager.

The length of the line will be displayed as 14.14 above the line cursor and also in theLength spinner in the Line PropertyManager.

17. Move the line cursor horizontally toward the left and press the left mouse button whenthe length of the line on the line cursor displays a value of 50.

You will notice that some blue and brown inferencing lines are displayed when you movethe cursor.

18. Move the line cursor in the direction of 225-degree angle.

You will notice that two blue inferencing lines are displayed. The first one originatesfrom the startpoint of the first inclined line and the other one from the startpoint of thefirst line of the sketch.

19. Press the left mouse button at the point where the two inferencing lines intersect.

You will notice that at this point, the length of the line on the line cursor shows a value of

c01-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:52 AM43


14.14. Also, the delta X and delta Y values in the Line PropertyManager are displayedas 10 each and the angle is shown as 225.00-degree.

20. Move the cursor vertically downwards to the startpoint of the first line.

You will notice that when you move the cursor close to the startpoint of the first line, theline cursor turns yellow in color and an orange-colored box is displayed below the linecursor. Also, the length of the line shows a value of 40.

21. Press the left mouse button when the line cursor turns yellow in color. Right-click todisplay the shortcut menu and choose the Select option to exit the Line tool.

This completes the sketch of the outer loop. You will notice a the sketch of a very smallsize is displayed since the display area shows the area in all the four quadrants. Therefore,you need to modify the drawing display area such that the sketch fits the screen. This isdone using the Zoom to Fit tool.

22. Choose the Zoom to Fit button from the View toolbar to fit the current sketch onthe screen.

The outer loop of the sketch is completed and is shown in Figure 1-48.

Drawing CirclesThe circles will be drawn using the Circle tool. You will use the inferencing line generatingfrom the endpoints of the inclined lines to specify the centerpoint of the circles. Thepoint where the inferencing lines meet is the centerpoint of the circle. As mentionedearlier, the cursor in the sketching environment jumps through a distance of 10mm by

Figure 1-48 Outer loop of the sketch

c01-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:52 AM44


default. Therefore, when you move the cursor to define the radius of the arc, the minimumvalue that can be set is 10mm. This is the reason you need to modify the documentsettings so that the cursor jumps through a distance of 5mm.

1. Choose the Grid button from the Sketch toolbar. The Document Properties -Grid/Snap dialog box will be displayed.

2. Set the value of the Major grid spacing spinner to 50 and choose OK.

Setting this value to 50 will force the cursor to jump through a distance of 5mm insteadof 10mm. Therefore, when you move the cursor now, the values shown on the cursor andthe coordinates of the points shown close to the lower right corner of the SolidWorkswindow will be in the increment of 5mm.

3. Choose the Circle button from the Sketch Tools toolbar to invoke the Circletool.

Since the Select tool was active earlier, the cursor earlier was the arrow cursor. But whenyou invoke the Circle tool, the arrow cursor will be replaced by the circle cursor.

4. Move the circle cursor close to the lower endpoint of the right inclined line and thenmove it toward the left. Remember that you will not press the left mouse button at thismoment.

The inferencing line will be displayed generating from the lower endpoint of the rightinclined line. When you move the cursor toward the left, you will notice that at the pointwhere the cursor is vertically in line with the upper endpoint of the right inclined line,another inferencing line will be generated from the upper endpoint of the right inclinedline. This inferencing line will intersect the inferencing line generated from the lowerendpoint of the inclined line.

5. Press the left mouse button at the point where the inferencing lines from both theendpoints of the inclined lines meet and then move the circle cursor toward the left todefine a circle.

6. Press the left mouse button when the radius of the circle displayed above the circle cursorshows a value of 5.

7. Similarly, draw the circle on the left using the inferencing lines generating from theendpoints of the left inclined line. The sketch after drawing the two circles inside theouter loop is shown in Figure 1-49. Exit the Circle tool.

Drawing the Sketch of the Inner CavityNext, you will draw the sketch of the inner cavity. To draw the sketch of the inner cavity,you will start drawing with the lower horizontal line.

1. Choose the Line button from the Sketch Tools toolbar.

c01-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:52 AM45



2. Move the line cursor to a location whose coordinates are 30mm 25mm 0mm.

3. Press the left mouse button at this point and move the cursor horizontally toward theright. Press the left mouse button when the length of the line above the line cursor showsa value of 30.

4. Move the line cursor vertically upward and press the left mouse button when the lengthof the line on the line cursor displays a value of 10.


6. Move the line cursor vertically downward and press the left mouse button when thelength of the line on the line cursor displays a value of 5.



9. Move the line horizontally toward the left and press the left mouse button when thelength of the line on the line cursor displays a value of 10.

10. Move the line cursor vertically downward to the startpoint of the first line. Press the leftmouse button when the line cursor turns yellow in color. The length of the line at thispoint will show a value of 10.

Figure 1-49 Sketch after drawing the two inner circles

c01-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:52 AM46


11. Choose the Select button from the Sketch toolbar. This completes the sketchfor Tutorial 1. The final completed sketch for Tutorial 1 is shown in Figure 1-50.

NoteBy default, the entity points are displayed at the endpoints when you sketch an entity. The entitypoints are dots at the end points of lines, arcs, splines etc. If you do not want the entity points tobe displayed then choose Tools > Options from the menu bar to invoke the System Options -General dialog box. Select the Sketch option from the left of this dialog box to display theoption related to sketch. Select the Display entity points in part/assembly sketches check boxand choose the OK button from this dialog box.

Saving the SketchIt is recommended that you create a separate directory for saving the tutorial files of thisbook. When you invoke the option to save a document, the default directory that isdisplayed is /My Documents. You will create a directory with the name SolidWorks in thisdirectory and then create the directories of each chapter inside the SolidWorks directory.As a result, you can save the tutorials of a chapter in the directory of that chapter.

1. Choose the Save button from the Standard toolbar to invoke the Save As dialog box.Create SolidWorks directory inside the /My Documents directory and then create c01 directoryinside the SolidWorks directory.

2. Enter the name of the document as c01-tut01.sldprt in the File name edit box and choosethe Save button. The file will be saved in the /My Documents/SolidWorks/c01 directory.

3. Close the file by choosing File > Close from the menu bar.

Figure 1-50 Final sketch for Tutorial 1

c01-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:52 AM47


Tutorial 2In this tutorial you will draw the basic sketch for the revolved solid model shown in Figure 1-51.The sketch for the revolved solid model is shown in Figure 1-52. Do not dimension the sketchas the solid model and the dimensions are given only for your reference.

(Expected time: 30 min)

Figure 1-52 Sketch for the revolved model

Figure 1-51 Revolved model for Tutorial 2

Tip. If you open a document that was saved in the sketching environment, it willbe opened in the sketching environment only and not in the part modelingenvironment.

c01-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:52 AM48



a. Open a new part file.b. Maximize the part file document and then switch to the sketching environment.c. Modify the settings of the snap and grid so that the cursor jumps through a distance of

5mm instead of 10mm.d. Draw the sketch of the model using the Line tool, refer to Figure 1-53.e. Save the sketch and then close the file.

Opening a New File1. Choose the New button from the Standard toolbar to invoke the New

SolidWorks Document dialog box.

2. Select the Part option and then choose the OK button from the New SolidWorksDocument dialog box.

A new SolidWorks part document will be opened. But the part document window will notbe maximized in the SolidWorks window.


As mentioned earlier, when you open a new part document, the part modelingenvironment is active by default. However, since you first need to draw the sketch of therevolved model, you need to invoke the sketching environment.


The origin will turn red in color and the Sketch Tools toolbar will be displayed below theSketch toolbar. Also, the confirmation corner will be displayed with the Exit Sketch andthe Delete Sketch options on the upper right corner of the drawing area. This suggeststhat the sketching environment is activated.

Modifying the Snap and Grid Settings and the Dimensioning UnitsBefore you proceed with drawing the sketch, you need to modify the grid and snapsettings so that you can make the cursor jump through a distance of 5mm instead of10mm, which is the default value.

1. Choose the Grid button from the Sketch toolbar. The Document Properties -Grid/Snap dialog box is displayed.

2. Set the value of the Major grid spacing spinner to 50. Make sure the value of theMinor-lines per major spinner is 10.

The coordinates displayed close to the lower left corner of the SolidWorks window will showan increment of 5mm instead of the default increment of 10mm when you exit the dialog box.

c01-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:52 AM49


3. Make sure the Snap to point check box in the Snap area is selected.

If you selected units other than millimeter to measure the length while installingSolidWorks, you need to select the units for the current drawing.

4. Select the Units option from the area on the left of the Document Properties - Grid/Snap dialog box.

5. Select Millimeter from the drop-down list available in the Linear units area and Degreesfrom the drop-down list available in the Angular units area.

6. Choose the OK button after making the necessary settings.

Drawing the SketchAs evident from Figure 1-52, the sketch will be drawn using the Line tool. You will startdrawing the sketch from the lower left corner of the sketch.

1. Choose the Line button from the Sketch Tools toolbar. The arrow cursor will bereplaced by the line cursor.


An inferencing line originating from the origin will be displayed.

3. Press the left mouse button down at this point and move the cursor horizontally towardthe right. Press the left mouse button again when the length of the line above the linecursor shows a value of 20.


5. Move the cursor horizontally toward the left and press the left mouse button when thelength of the line on the line cursor displays a value of 5.


7. Move the line cursor horizontally toward the right and press the left mouse button whenthe length of the line on the line cursor displays a value of 20.



c01-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:52 AM50



11. Move the line cursor horizontally toward the right and press the left mouse button whenthe length of the line on the line cursor displays a value of 20.



14. Move the line cursor vertically downward to the startpoint of the first line. Press the leftmouse button when the line cursor turns yellow in color.

The length of the line at this point will be 20mm.

15. Choose the Select button from the Sketch toolbar.

The sketch is completed but does not fit the screen. Therefore, you need to modify thedisplay area such that the sketch fits the screen.

16. Choose the Zoom to Fit button from the View toolbar to fit the sketch on thescreen. The completed sketch for Tutorial 2 is shown in Figure 1-53.


Tip. You will notice that the bottom horizontal line in the sketch is black in colorand the remaining lines are blue in color. In the next chapter, you will learn aboutthe reason why some entities in the sketch are different in color.

c01-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:52 AM51


Saving the Sketch1. Choose the Save button from the Standard toolbar to invoke the Save As dialog

box.

2. Enter the name of the document as c01-tut02.sldprt in the File name edit box and choosethe Save button.

The document will be saved in the /My Documents/SolidWorks/c01 directory.


Tutorial 3In this tutorial you will draw the basic sketch of the model shown in Figure 1-54. The sketchto be drawn is shown in Figure 1-55. Do not dimension the sketch as the solid model and thedimensions are given only for your reference. (Expected time: 30 min)


a. Start SolidWorks and then open a new part file.b. Maximize the part file document and then switch to the sketching environment.c. Modify the settings of the snap and grid so that the cursor jumps through a distance of

5mm instead of 10mm.d. Draw the outer loop of the sketch using the Line and the Tangent Arc tool, refer to

Figure 1-56.e. Draw the inner circle using the Circle tool, refer Figure 1-57f. Save the sketch and then close the file.


c01-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:52 AM52





A new SolidWorks part document will be opened. However, as mentioned earlier, thepart document window will not be maximized in the SolidWorks window.


Since you first need to draw the sketch of the revolved model, you need to invoke thesketching environment.


The origin turns red in color and the Sketch Tools toolbar is displayed below the Sketchtoolbar. Also, the confirmation corner with the Exit Sketch and Delete Sketch optionswill be displayed on the upper right corner of the drawing area. This suggests that thesketching environment is activated.

Modifying the Snap and Grid Settings and Dimensioning UnitsSince the dimensions in the sketch are in the multiples of 5mm, you need to modify thegrid and snap settings so that you can make the cursor jump through a distance of 5mminstead of 10mm.

Figure 1-55 Sketch for Tutorial 3

c01-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:52 AM53



2. Set the value of the Major grid spacing spinner to 50 and make sure that the value of theMinor-lines per major is 10. Also make sure that the Snap to points check box in theSnap area is selected.

The coordinates displayed close to the lower left corner of the SolidWorks window willshow an increment of 5mm instead of the default increment of 10mm when you close thedialog box.

3. If you selected units other than millimeter to measure the length while installingSolidWorks, select the Units option from the area on the left of the Document Properties- Grid/Snap dialog box. Select Millimeter from the drop-down list available in the Linearunits area and Degrees from the drop-down list available in the Angular units area.

4. Choose OK to close the dialog box.

Drawing the Outer LoopAs evident from Figure 1-55, the sketch will be drawn using the Line, Tangent Arc, andthe Circle tools. You will start drawing from the lower left corner of the sketch. Since thelength of the lower horizontal line is 150mm, therefore, you will have to modify thedrawing display area such that the drawing area in the first quadrant is increased. Thiscan be done using the Pan tool.

1. Choose the Pan button from the View toolbar. The arrow cursor will be replacedby the pan cursor.

2. Press and hold the left mouse button down and drag the cursor toward the bottom leftcorner of the screen.

You will notice that the origin also moves toward the bottom left corner of the screen,thus increasing the drawing area in the first quadrant.

3. After dragging the origin close to the lower left corner, release the left mouse button.


The pan cursor will be replaced by the line cursor.



6. Press the left mouse button down at this point and move the cursor horizontally towardthe right. Press the left mouse button again when the length of the line above the linecursor shows a value of 150.

c01-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:52 AM54



The next entity that has to be drawn is a tangent arc. As mentioned earlier, you can drawthe tangent arc using the Line tool also. Drawing arcs from within the Line tool is arecommended method when you need to draw a sketch that is a combination of lines andarcs. This increases the productivity by reducing the time taken in invoking the tools fordrawing an arc and then invoking the Line tool to draw lines.

8. Move the line cursor away from the endpoint of the last line and then move it back to theendpoint.

The arc mode will be invoked and the line cursor will be replaced by the arc cursor. Also,the Arc PropertyManager will be displayed in place of the Line PropertyManager.

9. Move the arc cursor vertically upward to a small distance. A dotted reference line will bedisplayed.

10. When the dotted line is displayed, move the cursor toward the left.

You will notice that a tangent arc is being drawn. The angle of the tangent arc and itsradius will be displayed above the arc cursor.

11. Press the left mouse button when the angle value above the arc cursor shows a value of180 and the radius shows a value of 30 to complete the arc.

The required tangent arc is drawn. As mentioned earlier, the line mode is automaticallyinvoked after you have drawn the arc using the Line tool. Therefore, the arc cursor willbe replaced by the line cursor and the Arc PropertyManager will be replaced by theLine PropertyManager.






c01-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:52 AM55



18. Move the line cursor to the startpoint of the first line. Press the left mouse button whenthe line cursor turns yellow in color.

The length of the line at this point will be 20mm.

19. Right-click and choose Select from the shortcut menu to exit the Line tool.

20. Choose the Zoom to Fit button to fit the sketch on the screen. This completes theouter loop of the sketch. The sketch after drawing the outer loop is shown inFigure 1-56.

Drawing the CircleThe circle in the sketch will be drawn using the Circle tool. The centerpoint of the circlewill be the centerpoint of the arc, which is displayed by a cross. This cross is automaticallydrawn when you draw the arc. You can select this centerpoint to draw the circle.

1. Choose the Circle button from the Sketch Tools toolbar to invoke the Circletool.

The arrow cursor will be replaced by the circle cursor.

2. Move the circle cursor close to the centerpoint of the arc and when the pencil in thecircle cursor turns yellow in color, press the left mouse button.

3. Move the cursor toward the left and when the radius of the circle above the circle cursorshows a value of 15, press the left mouse button.

Figure 1-56 Sketch after drawing the outer loop

c01-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:52 AM56


A circle of 15mm radius will be drawn.

4. This completes the sketch for Tutorial 3. Right-click and choose the Select option fromthe shortcut menu to exit the Circle tool.

The final sketch for Tutorial 3 is shown in Figure 1-57.

Saving the Sketch1. Choose the Save button from the Standard toolbar to invoke the Save As dialog box.



Tutorial 4In this tutorial you will draw the sketch of the model shown in Figure 1-58. The sketch for themodel is shown in Figure 1-59. Do not dimension the sketch as the dimensions and the solidmodel are given only for your reference. (Expected time: 30 min)


a. Start SolidWorks and then open a new part file.b. Maximize the part file document and then switch to the sketching environment.c. Modify the settings of the snap and grid so that the cursor jumps through a distance of

5mm instead of 10mm.d. Draw the outer loop of the sketch using the Line and the Tangent Arc tool, refer to

Figure 1-60.e. Save the sketch and then close the file.


c01-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:52 AM57







Figure 1-58 Model for Tutorial 4

c01-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:52 AM58


Since you first need to draw the sketch of the model, you need to invoke the sketchingenvironment.


Modifying the Snap and Grid Settings and Dimensioning UnitsAs evident in Figure 1-59, the dimensions in the sketch are in the multiples of 5mm.Therefore, you need to modify the grid and snap settings so that the cursor jumps througha distance of 5mm instead of 10mm.


2. Set the value of the Major grid spacing spinner to 50 and the Minor line per majorspinner to 10. Also, select the Snap to points check box if not selected.

You will notice that the coordinates displayed close to the lower left corner of theSolidWorks window shows an increment of 5mm instead of the default increment of10mm.

3. If you selected units other than millimeter to measure the length while installingSolidWorks, select the Units option from the area on the left of the Document Properties- Grid/Snap dialog box. Select Millimeter from the drop-down list available in the Linearunits area and Degrees from the drop-down list available in the Angular units area.

4. Choose OK to close the dialog box.

Drawing the SketchThe sketch will be drawn using the Line tool. The arc in the sketch will also be drawnusing the same tool. You will start drawing from the lower left corner of the sketch.





3. Press the left mouse button at this point and move the cursor horizontally toward theright. Press the left mouse button again when the length of the line above the line cursorshows a value of 60.

The bottom horizontal line of 60mm length will be drawn.

c01-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:52 AM59


4. Choose the Zoom to Fit button from the View toolbar to increase the display ofthe line that is drawn.

As mentioned earlier, you can invoke the drawing display tools while you are inside a toolalso. After modifying the drawing display, the tool that was active before invoking thedrawing display tool will be restored and you can continue using that tool. Therefore,after the drawing display area is modified, the Line tool will be restored and you cancontinue drawing lines.

5. Move the line cursor along a direction that makes an angle close to 98-degree with thepositive X axis direction. The angle can be checked from the spinner above the Delta Xspinner in the Line PropertyManager.

6. When the Delta X spinner shows a value of 5 and Delta Y spinner shows a value of 35,press the left mouse button.

The length of the line at this point will be 35.36.

7. Move the line cursor horizontally toward the left and press the left mouse button whenthe length of the line above the line cursor shows a value of 10.

8. Move the line cursor vertically downward and press the left mouse button when thelength of the line above the line cursor shows a value of 10.

9 Move the line cursor horizontally toward the left and press the left mouse button whenthe length of the line above the line cursor shows a value of 5.

Next, you need to draw the arc that is normal to the last line.

10. Move the line cursor away from the endpoint of the last line and then move it back closeto the endpoint.

The arc mode will be invoked and the line cursor will be replaced by the line cursor. Also,the Line PropertyManager will be replaced by the Arc PropertyManager.

11. Move the arc cursor vertically downward through a small distance.

A dotted line will be displayed.

12. When the dotted line is displayed, move the arc cursor toward the left.

You will notice that a normal arc is being drawn.

13. Press the left mouse button when the angle value on the arc cursor is 180 and the radiusvalue is 10.

An arc normal to the last line will be drawn and the line mode will be activated.

c01-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:52 AM60


14. Move the line cursor horizontally toward the left and press the left mouse button whenthe length of the line on the line cursor shows a value of 5.

15. Move the line cursor vertically upward and press the left mouse button when the lengthof the line on the line cursor shows a value of 10.

16. Move the line cursor horizontally toward the left and press the left mouse button whenthe length of the line on the line cursor shows a value of 10.

17. Move the line cursor to the startpoint of the first line and when the line cursor turnyellow in color, press the left mouse button.

18. Right-click to display the shortcut menu and choose Select to exit the Line tool.

This completes the sketch. However, you need to modify the drawing display area suchthat the sketch fits the screen.

19. Choose the Zoom to Fit button from the View toolbar to modify the drawingdisplay area. The final sketch for Tutorial 4 is shown in Figure 1-60.

Saving the Sketch1. Choose the Save button from the Standard toolbar to invoke the Save As dialog box.




c01-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:52 AM61


SELF-EVALUATION TESTAnswer the following questions and then compare your answers with the answers given atthe end of this chapter.

1. The base feature of any design is a sketched feature and is created by drawing the sketch.(T/F)

2. You can also invoke the 3Pt Arc tool from within the Line tool. (T/F)

3. By default, the cursor jumps through a distance of 5mm. (T/F)

4. When you save a file in the sketching environment, it is opened in the part modelingenvironment when you open it for the next time. (T/F)

5. You can convert a sketched entity into a construction entity by selecting the __________check box provided in the PropertyManager.

6. To draw a rectangle at an angle, you need to use the __________ tool.

7. The __________ are the temporary lines that are used to track a particular point on thescreen.

8. You can also invoke the __________ tool or exit a sketching tool by pressing the ESC key.

9. When you select a tangent entity to draw a tangent arc, the __________ relation is appliedbetween the startpoint of the arc and the tangent entity.

10. Irrespective of the number of segments in a spline, it will be considered as a __________entity.

REVIEW QUESTIONSAnswer the following questions:

1. The 3 point arcs are the ones that are drawn by defining the startpoint of the arc, theendpoint of the arc, and a point on the arc. (T/F)

2. You can also delete the sketched entities by selecting them and choosing the Deleteoption from the shortcut menu that is displayed upon right-clicking. (T/F)

3. The origin is a blue-colored icon that is displayed in the middle of the sketcher screen.(T/F)

4. In SolidWorks, the circles are drawn by specifying the centerpoint of the circle andthen pressing and entering the radius of the circle in the dialog box that is displayed.(T/F)

c01-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:52 AM62


5. When you open a new SolidWorks document, it is not maximized in the SolidWorkswindow. (T/F)

6. In SolidWorks, a rectangle is considered as a combination of which of the following entities.

(a) Lines (b) Arcs(c) Splines (d) None

7. Which one of the following options is not displayed in the New SolidWorks Documentdialog box?

(a) Part (b) Assembly(c) Drawing (d) Sketch

8. Which one of the following entities will not be considered while converting a sketch intoa feature?

(a) Sketched Circles (b) Sketched Lines(c) Construction Lines (d) None

9. When you select a line of the rectangle, which one of the following PropertyManagerwill be displayed?

(a) Line PropertyManager (b) Line/Rectangle PropertyManager(c) Rectangle PropertyManager (d) None

10. While drawing an elliptical arc, which one of the following PropertyManager will bedisplayed?

(a) Arc PropertyManager (b) Ellipse PropertyManager(c) Elliptical Arc PropertyManager (d) None

c01-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:52 AM63


Figure 1-62 Sketch for Exercise 1

Figure 1-61 Solid model for Exercise 1

EXERCISES

Exercise 1Draw the sketch of the model shown in Figure 1-61. The sketch to be drawn is shown inFigure 1-62. Do not dimension the sketch as the solid model and the dimensions are givenonly for your reference. (Expected time: 30 min)

c01-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:52 AM64




Exercise 2Draw the sketch of the model shown in Figure 1-63. The sketch to be drawn is shown inFigure 1-64. Do not dimension the sketch as the solid model and the dimensions are givenonly for your reference. (Expected time: 30 min)

c01-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:52 AM65


Answers to Self-Evaluation Test1. T, 2. T, 3. F, 4. F, 5. For Construction, 6. Parallelogram, 7. inferencing lines, 8. Select,9. Tangent, 10. single

c01-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:52 AM66

Chapter 2

Editing and Modifyingthe Sketches

After completing this chapter you will be able to:• Edit the sketches using various editing tools.• Create the rectangular patterns of the sketched entities.• Create the circular patterns of the sketched entities.• Modify the sketch entities.• Modify the sketches by dynamically dragging the sketched entities.

Learning Objectives

c02-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:30 AM1


EDITING THE SKETCHED ENTITIESSolidWorks provides you with a number of tools that can be used to edit the sketched entities.These options include trimming the sketched entities, extending the sketched entities, offsettingthe sketched entities, mirroring the sketched entities, copying/moving the sketchedentities, modifying and copying the sketched entities by dynamically dragging, and so on.

Trimming the Sketched Entities

The Sketch Trim tool is used to trim the unwanted entities in a sketch. The Sketch Trimoption is used to trim a line, arc, ellipse, parabola, circle, spline, or center line that isintersecting a line, arc, circle, ellipse, parabola, spline, or center line. To use the trim

option, choose the Trim option from the Sketch Tools toolbar. The cursor will be replaced bythe trim cursor; move the trim cursor near to the portion of the sketched entity to be removed. Ifthe entity will be completely deleted using then trim option then that entity will be highlightedin red and if a portion of the entity will be deleted then that entity will be highlighted in black.Now, choose the left mouse button to remove the entity. Figures 2-1 and 2-2 show the sketchbefore and after trimming the entities.

Using the Trim Option to Extend a Sketched EntityChoose the Sketch Trim button from the Sketch Tools toolbar and move the trim cursor to theentity to be extended. When the sketched entity turns red or black in color, drag the cursor tothe entity upto which the selected entity is to be extended. You can notice the preview of theextended entity in yellow color. Release the left mouse button when you notice the preview of theextended entity in yellow.

Toolbar: Sketch Tools > Sketch TrimMenu: Tools > Sketch Tools > Trim

Figure 2-1 Entities to be selected for trimming Figure 2-2 Sketch after trimming the entities

c02-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:30 AM2

Editing and Modifying the Sketches 2-3

Extending the Sketched Entities

The Sketch Extend tool is used to extend the sketched entity to intersect the nextavailable entity. The Extend option is used to extend a line, arc, ellipse, parabola,circle, spline, or center line to intersect a line, arc, circle, ellipse, parabola, spline, or

center line. The sketched entity is extended up to its intersection with another sketched entity ora model edge. Choose the Sketch Extend button from the Sketch Tools toolbar and move theextend cursor near to the portion of the sketched entity to be extended. The entity to be extendedis displayed in black and the preview of the extended portion of the entity is displayed in yellow.Choose the left mouse button to complete the extend operation. Figure 2-3 shows the sketchedentities before extending and Figure 2-4 shows the sketched entities after extending.

Tip. In SolidWorks all the buttons are not displayed by default in the toolbars.Therefore, you have to customize the toolbars according to your need and specifications.The next topic that is going to be discussed is Extending the Sketched Entities. Thetool button for the Extend option is not available in the Sketch Tools toolbar. Toinsert the Sketch Extend button in the Sketch Tools toolbar you have to follow theprocedure given as under:

1. Choose Tools > Customize from the menu bar to display the Customize dialogbox.2. Choose the Commands tab from the Customize dialog box.3. Choose Sketch Tools from the Categories area of the Customize dialog box.4. Press and hold down the left mouse button to select the Sketch Extendbutton from the Buttons area of the Customize dialog box. You can viewthe description of the Sketch Extend button in the Description area.5. Drag the mouse to the Sketch Tools toolbar and release the left mouse button toplace the Sketch Extend button on the Sketch Tools toolbar.6. Choose OK from the Customize dialog box.

You can insert the other tool buttons in the Sketch Tools toolbar or any othertoolbar by following the same procedure. To remove the tool button from any of thetoolbar you have to invoke the Customize dialog box and using the left mousebutton select the tool button that you want to remove from the toolbar and drop thebutton in the graphics area. You can also move the tool buttons from one toolbar tothe other toolbar. You can also copy the buttons and place them in more than onetoolbar.

Toolbar: Sketch Tools > Sketch Extend (Customize to Add)

Menu: Tools > Sketch Tools > Extend

Tip. If the preview of the sketched entity to be extended is shown in the wrongdirection, move your extend cursor to a position on the other half of the entity andobserve the new preview. Click the sketched entity to accept the new preview line orarc.

c02-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:30 AM3


Filleting the Sketched Entities

Fillet creates an arc tangent at the intersection of two sketched entities. It trims or extendsthe entities to be filleted depending on the geometry of the sketched entity. You canapply fillet between two nonparallel lines, between two arcs, between two splines, between

an arc and a line, between a spline and a line, and between a spline and an arc. The filletbetween two arcs, or between an arc and a line depends upon the compatibility of the geometryto be extended or filleted along a given radius. Hold down the CTRL key and using the leftmouse button select two entities to create fillet. Now, choose the Sketch Fillet button to displaythe Sketch Fillet PropertyManager as shown in Figure 2-5. Set the value of the Fillet Radius

Toolbar: Sketch Tools > Sketch FilletMenu: Tools > Sketch Tools > Fillet

Figure 2-4 Sketched entities after extendingFigure 2-3 Sketched entities before extending

Tip. If you are using the trim or extend tool, then using the right mouse button inthe drawing area invoke the shortcut menu. You can toggle between the trim andextend tools using this shortcut menu.

Figure 2-5 Sketch Fillet PropertyManager

c02-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:30 AM4


spinner and press ENTER or choose the Apply button from the Sketch Fillet dialog box. Youcan also select the sketched entities after invoking the Sketch Fillet PropertyManager. You canalso select the nonintersecting entities for creating fillet. While filleting the nonintersectingentities the selected entities will be extended to form a fillet. If the Keep constrained cornerscheck box is selected, the dimension and geometric relations applied to the sketch will not bedeleted. If you unselect the Keep constrained corners check box then you will be prompted todelete the relations applied to the corners of the sketched entities to be filleted. The Undobutton is displayed in the Sketch Fillet PropertyManager, when you create at least one sketchfillet. Figures 2-6 and 2-7 show the sketched entities before and after applying the radius.

NoteThe fillet creation between two splines, between a spline and a line, and between a spline and anarc depends upon the compatibility of the spline to be trimmed or extended.

The other method of creating a sketched fillet between two entities is to choose the Sketch Filletbutton. The Sketch Fillet PropertyManager is invoked. Set the fillet radius spinner to therequired value. Using the left mouse button drag the cursor to create a window such that theentities to be filleted are enclosed inside the window. As soon as you release the left mousebutton the fillet will be created between the two selected entities. The Keep Visible button isused to pin the Sketch Fillet PropertyManager to create more than one sketch fillets of sameradius or different radius. You can also pin the dialog box using the shortcut menu; use the rightmouse button in the drawing area to invoke the shortcut menu as shown in Figure 2-8. Choosethe Pin Dialog option from the shortcut menu to create more than one sketch fillets. Theconsecutive fillets with the same radius are not dimensioned individually; an automatic equalradii relation is applied to all the fillets. The Close button is available only when you havecreated at least one sketched fillet. The Close button is used to close the dialog box.

Figure 2-6 Sketched entities before and aftercreating fillet.

Figure 2-7 Sketched entities before and aftercreating fillet.

c02-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:30 AM5


Chamfering the Sketched Entities

The Sketch Chamfer tool is used to apply a chamfer to adjacent sketch entities. Thechamfer can be specified by either angle-distance or distance-distance options. You canapply chamfer between two nonparallel lines; the lines may be intersecting lines or

nonintersecting lines. The creation of chamfer between two nonintersecting lines depends uponthe length of the lines and the chamfer distance. To create chamfer hold down the CTRL keyand select two entities using the left mouse button. You can select two entities to create chamferby dragging the left mouse button and creating a window to select the sketched entities. Next,choose the Sketch Chamfer button from the Sketch Tools toolbar. You can also select the twoentities after invoking the Chamfer tool. When you choose the Chamfer button, the SketchChamfer PropertyManager shown in Figure 2-9, is displayed on the left of the drawing area.The options available in the Sketch Chamfer PropertyManager are discussed next.

Toolbar: Sketch Tools > Sketch ChamferMenu: Tools > Sketch Tools > Chamfer

Figure 2-9 Sketch Chamfer Property Manager

Figure 2-8 Shortcut menu

c02-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:30 AM6


Chamfer Parameters AreaVarious parameters that are used to create the sketch chamfer are available in the ChamferParameters area. The various parameters that are used to create the sketched chamfer are discussednext.

Angle-distanceThe Angle-distance radio button is selected to create the sketched chamfer by specifyingthe angle and the distance. The Distance-distance radio button is selectedby default and therefore, to create a sketched chamfer using the Angle-distance option youhave to select the Angle-distance radio button using the left mouse button. When you selectthe Angle-distance radio button the Direction 1 Angle spinner is also displayed below theDistance 1 spinner. The Distance 1 spinner is used to specify the distance and the Direction1 Angle spinner is used to specify the angle.

Distance-distanceThe Distance-distance radio button is selected to create the sketched chamfer by specifyingthe distances in two directions. When you invoke the Sketch Chamfer button, theDistance-distance radio button and the Equal check box are selected by default in theSketch Chamfer PropertyManager. You are provided with the Distance 1 spinner to set thevalue of chamfer distance.

Equal distanceThe Equal distance check box is selected to specify an equal distance in both the directionsfor creating the sketched chamfer. This check box is selected by default when you choose theSketch Chamfer button. If you clear this check box then you can apply two different distancesto the selected entities for creating the sketched chamfer. When you clear this check box theDistance 2 spinner is displayed below the Distance 1 spinner to set the value of distance inthe second direction.

You can also use the shortcut menu shown in Figure 2-10, which is invoked using the rightmouse button in the drawing area, to toggle between the various options that are used tocreate the sketched chamfer such as Angle-distance, Distance-distance, and Equal distance.

Figure 2-10 Shortcut menu

c02-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:30 AM7


NoteIf you apply a sketch chamfer to the entities that are constrained using some relations or dimensionsthen the SolidWorks warning message window will be displayed. This warning message willprompt you that At least one sketch constraint is about to be lost, Chamfer anyway? Choosethe Yes button from this warning message box. You will learn more about the relations anddimensions that constrain the sketch later in this chapter.

The sketched chamfers using various options is shown in Figure 2-11.

Offsetting the Sketched Entities

Offsetting is one of the easiest methods of drawing parallel lines or concentric arcs, andcircles. You can select the entire chain of the entities as a single entity or select anindividual entity to offset. You can offset selected sketched entities, edges, loops, faces,

curves. When you choose the Offset Entities button from the Sketch Tools toolbar the OffsetEntities PropertyManager is displayed as shown in Figure 2-12. The various options availablein the Offset Entities PropertyManager are discussed next.

Parameters areaThe Parameters area of the Offset Entities PropertyManager is used to specify the various

Toolbar: Sketch Tools > Offset EntitiesMenu: Tools > Sketch Tools > Offset Entities

Figure 2-11 Various types of chamfers using the Angle-Distance,Equal distance, and Distance-distance options

Tip. You can add a sketch fillet or a sketch chamfer by invoking the relativePropertyManager and setting the value of sketch fillet or sketch chamfer to becreated. Select the vertex at the intersection of the entities.

c02-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:30 AM8


parameters for creating an offset entity. The parameters that are used to offset an entity arediscussed next.

Offset DistanceThe Offset Distance spinner is used to set the offset distance between the selected entity tobe offset and the entity to be created using the offset tool at a specified distance. You can setthe value of the offset distance manually or you can set the spinner value by dragging theoffset entity in the drawing area using the left mouse button.

ReverseThe Reverse check box is selected to change the direction of the offset. The Reverse checkbox is available only if you set the value of the offset distance using the Offset Distancespinner. If you set the value of the offset distance by dragging the entity using the left mousebutton, the Reverse check box will not be activated.

Select ChainThe Select Chain check box is selected to select the entire chain of continuous sketchedentities. When you invoke the offset tool, the Select Chain check box is selected by default.If you clear this check box, then only the selected sketched entity will get offset.

Bi-directionalThe Bi-directional radio button is selected to create offset entities in two directions. If theBi-directional check box is selected then the Reverse check box will not be available in theParameters area of the Offset Entities PropertyManager.

Figure 2-13 shows a new chain of entities created by offsetting the chain of entities. Figure 2-14shows the offsetting of a single entity.

Figure 2-12 The Offset Entities PropertyManager

c02-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:30 AM9


Mirroring the Sketched Entities

The Mirror tool is used to create the mirror image of the selected entities. The entitiesare mirrored about a center line. When you create the mirrored entity, SolidWorksapplies a symmetric relation between the sketched entities. If you change a mirrored

entity, its mirror image will also change. There are two methods to create the mirrored image ofa sketched entity. The two methods to create a mirrored entity are discussed next.

Mirroring the Existing ItemsCreate the sketch of the entities to be mirrored using the normal sketch tools in the sketchingenvironment. Choose the Centerline button from the Sketch Tools toolbar and create a centerlinealong which the sketched entities will be mirrored. Now, hold down the CTRL key and using theleft mouse button select the entities to be mirrored and select the centerline along which theentities will be mirrored. You can also select the entities by creating a window around the sketchedentities and the centerline. Choose Tools > Sketch Tools > Mirror from the menu bar orchoose the Sketch Mirror button from the Sketch Tools toolbar. The sketched entities aremirrored along the centerline. If you modify the sketch of the sketched entity the same will bereflected on the mirror image. Figure 2-15 shows the sketched entities with the centerline andFigure 2-16 shows the resultant mirror image of the sketched entities.

Mirroring Items While Sketching (Automatic Mirroring)Create a centerline along which the sketched entities will be mirrored. Select the centerline andchoose the Sketch Mirror button from the Sketch Tools toolbar or choose Tools > Sketch Tools> Mirror from the menu bar. The symmetry symbols appear at both ends of the centerline toindicate that automatic mirroring is activated as shown in Figure 2-17. Now, start creating thesketch. The sketched entity that you create on one side of the centerline will automatically becreated on the other side of the mirror line (centerline). In Figure 2-18 the entities are mirroringautomatically while sketching. Figure 2-19 shows the complete sketch with automatic mirroring.

Figure 2-13 Offsetting a chain of entities Figure 2-14 Offsetting a single entity

Toolbar: Sketch Tools > Sketch Mirror (Customize to Add)

Menu: Tools > Sketch Tools > Mirror

c02-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:30 AM10


Figure 2-15 Selecting the sketched entities and thecenterline

Figure 2-16 Sketch after mirroring the geometry

Figure 2-17 Showing the centerline and the symmetry symbols thatindicate that automatic mirroring is activated

Figure 2-18 Sketching using automatic mirroring active

c02-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:30 AM11


NoteAs discussed earlier you create a mirror line to invoke the automatic mirroring option. Afterinvoking the automatic mirroring option you create the sketch on one side of the mirror line, andthe same sketch is also created on the other side of the mirror line. After completing the sketch ifyou have to deactivate the automatic mirroring option, select the mirror line and choose theSketch Mirror button from the Sketch Tools toolbar to delete the mirror line.

Move/Copy the Sketch Entities Using PropertyManagerThe Move/Copy option in the PropertyManager of the FeatureManager design tree is used tomove, rotate, or copy one or more unconstrained sketched entities. To activate the Move/CopyPropertyManager select one or more than one sketched entity. The PropertyManger of thatparticular entity is displayed. Choose the Move/Copy button from the PropertyManager. TheMove/Copy PropertyManager is displayed as shown in Figure 2-20. The various options availablein the Move/Copy PropertyManager are discussed next.

TransformationThe options available in the Transformation area are used to translate or rotate the selectedentity.

TranslateThe Translate option is provided with two spin boxes. The first spin box is named as Deltaspinner and this is used to provide the increment value in the X axis and second spin boxis named as Delta Y and this spin box is used to provide the increment value in the Y axis.Using these spin boxes you can specify the incremental value to move or copy theselected entities.

RotateThe Rotate option is used to specify the incremental angular value to the selected entity forits rotation along a specified centerpoint. The Angle spinner is used to specify the incrementalangular value to the selected entity. Two spin boxes are provided under the Rotate spinner.

Figure 2-19 Complete sketch with automatic mirroring

c02-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:30 AM12


These spin boxes are used to specify the position of the centerpoint along which the selectedentity will be rotated.

Move Selected PointThe Move Selected Point area is used to specify the incremental value in the X and Ydirections for a particular selected point. Two spin boxes are provided in this area. The firstspin box is named as X Point Position spinner. This spin box is used to specify the value ofthe selected point in the X axis. The second spin box is named as Y PointPosition spinner. This spin box is used to specify the value of the selected point in the Y axis.

Solve moveThe Solve move radio button is selected when you need to move or rotate the selected entity,entities, or point and solves the dimensions or relations, if possible.

Figure 2-20 Move/Copy PropertyManager

c02-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:30 AM13


No solve moveThe No solve move option is used when you have to move he sketched entities withoutsolving the dimensions and relations in the sketch.

CopyThe Copy option is used to copy the selected entity and create the new entity at the locationyou define using the values in the Translate and Rotate boxes.

CREATING PATTERNSWhile sketching the base feature of a model, sometimes you may need to place the sketchedentities in a particular arrangement such as along linear edges or around a circle. For example,refer to Figures 2-21 and 2-22. These figures show base features with the slots inside. These slotsare created with the help of the linear and circular patterns of the sketched entities. The toolsthat are used to create linear and circular patterns of the sketched entities are discussed next.

Creating Linear Pattern of the Sketched Entities

In SolidWorks, the linear pattern of the sketched entities is created using the LinearSketch Step and Repeat tool. To create the linear pattern, select the sketched entitiesusing the Select tool and then choose this button from the Sketch Tools toolbar. The

Linear Sketch Step and Repeat dialog box will be displayed as shown in Figure 2-23 and thepreview of the linear pattern will be shown on the screen in the background. Also, the arrowcursor is replaced by the linear pattern cursor. Note that if you have not selected the sketchedentities to pattern before invoking this tool, you will have to select them one by one using thelinear pattern cursor. You cannot define a window to select more than one entity using the linearpattern cursor.

Figure 2-21 Base feature with slots created about linear edges

Menu: Tools > Sketch Tools > Linear Sketch Step and RepeatToolbar: Sketch Tools > Linear Sketch Step and Repeat

c02-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:30 AM14


Figure 2-23 Linear Sketch Step and Repeat dialog box

The options available in this dialog box are discussed next.

Direction 1 AreaBy default, the first direction of a linear pattern is taken along the positive X axis direction. Theoptions under this area are used to set the number of instances, spacing, and the angle along thefirst direction. These options are discussed next.

Figure 2-22 Base feature with slots created around a circle

c02-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:30 AM15


NumberThe Number spinner is used to specify the number of instances in the linear pattern alongthe first direction. As you increase or decrease the value of this spinner, the number ofinstances in the preview of the pattern displayed on the screen will also be modified. Thedefault value of this spinner is 3.

SpacingThe Spacing spinner is used to specify the spacing between each instance along the firstdirection. Remember that the spacing is measured from the center of the entities selectedfor creating the pattern. Figure 2-24 shows the preview of the linear pattern that is displayedin the background. As evident in the figure, the number of instances along direction 1 isthree and the distance is measured between the center of two consecutive entities.

AngleThe Angle spinner is used to specify the angle of the linear pattern along the first direction.Remember that the orientation of the entities selected to be patterned will not change as youenter an angle value for the first direction. The default value of the angle is 0°. Figure 2-25shows a linear pattern at an angle of 30°.

Reverse Direction 1The Reverse Direction 1 button is available on the right of the Angle spinner. Thisbutton is chosen to reverse direction 1.

FixedThe Fixed check box is available below the Spacing spinner. If this check box is selected,the incremental spacing between the instances along direction 1 will be placed as a dimensionbetween the first two instances along this direction after you create the pattern. Also, acenter line will be drawn between the first two instances. Note that this dimension will notbe placed from center to center. It will be displayed from the first entity in the first instancein the pattern to the first entity in the second instance.

Direction 2 AreaBy default, the second direction of a linear pattern is taken along the positive Y axis direction.

Figure 2-24 Preview of the linear pattern with 3 instances along direction1 and 1 along direction 2

c02-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:30 AM16


The options under this area are used to set the number of instances, spacing, and the anglealong the second direction. These options are discussed next.

NumberThe Number spinner is used to specify the number of instances in the linear pattern alongthe second direction. The default value of this spinner is 1. This is the reason the otheroptions in the Direction 2 area are not available. However, as soon as you set the value ofthis spinner to more than 1, the other options in this area will be available.

SpacingThe Spacing spinner is used to specify the spacing between each instance along the seconddirection. As mentioned earlier, the spacing is measured from the center of the entitiesselected for creating the pattern.

AngleThe Angle spinner is used to specify the angle of the linear pattern along the seconddirection. This value will always be measured from the positive X axis direction.As mentioned earlier, the orientation of the entities selected to be patterned will not changeas you enter an angle value for the pattern. The default value of the angle is 90°. Figure 2-26shows a linear pattern with the angle of direction 1 as 0° and the angle of direction 2 as 60°.

Reverse Direction 2The Reverse Direction 2 button is available on the right of the Angle spinner. Thisbutton is chosen to reverse direction 2.

Figure 2-25 Preview of the linear pattern at an angle of 30° alongdirection 1

Tip. You can also specify the spacing and angle value dynamically in the preview ofthe linear pattern. To do this, press the left mouse button on the control pointsdisplayed at the end of the arrow in the preview of the pattern and drag it. Afterplacing the arrow at the desired location, release the left mouse button. The newspacing and angle value will be displayed in their respective spinners.

c02-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:30 AM17


FixedThe Fixed check box is available below the Spacing spinner. If this check box is selected,the incremental spacing between the instances along direction 2 will be placed as a dimensionbetween the first two instances along this direction after you create the pattern. Also, acenter line will be drawn between the first two instances. As mentioned earlier, this dimensionwill be placed from the first entity in the first instance in the pattern to the first entity in thesecond instance and not between the centers of the two instances.

Constrain angle between axesThe Constrain angle between axes check box will be available only if you set the value of theNumber spinner in the Direction 2 area to more than 1. This check box is selected by default.If this check box is selected, the angle between the two directions of the linear pattern will beconstrained and will be placed as the dimension value when you create the pattern. However, ifthis check box is cleared, the angle between the two directions will not be displayed and will notbe related to each other.

Items to repeatThe Items to repeat box displays all the entities selected to pattern. If you want to remove anentity from the selection set, select that entity from this box. The background color of the boxwill be changed to a reddish color and the entity will be highlighted in blue. Now, press theDELETE key from the keyboard. The removed entity will no more be displayed in the preview ofthe pattern and will not be selected in the original entities.

InstancesThe Instances list box displays all the instances of the linear pattern except the original instance.The instances are displayed in a matrix format with the first number indicating the instancesalong direction 1 and the second number indicating the instances along direction 2. Note thatthe matrix [1,1] is not displayed since it is the original instance. If you want to remove aninstance from the pattern, select it in the Instances list box and then press the DELETE key

Figure 2-26 Preview of the linear pattern at an angle of 0° along direction 1and 60° along direction 2

c02-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:30 AM18


from the keyboard. You will notice that the deleted instance is no more displayed in the previewof the pattern. Remember that this instance will not be deleted from the memory of the pattern.It will be displayed in the Instances deleted box.

Instances deletedThe Instances deleted list box displays all the instances that are deleted from the linear pattern.As mentioned earlier, the deleted instances are not removed from the memory of the pattern.They are stored in this list box. If you want to restore the deleted instance, select it in this boxand then press the DELETE key. You will notice that the selected instance is again displayed inthe preview and also in the Instances list box.

UndoThe Undo button is chosen to undo the operations performed in the Linear Step Sketch andRepeat dialog box. All the operations will be undone one by one if you keep choosing thisbutton and the original parameters will be restored. After everything is undone, this button willnot be available.

Creating Circular Pattern of the Sketched Entities

In SolidWorks, the circular pattern of the sketched entities is created using the CircularSketch Step and Repeat tool. To create the circular pattern, select the sketched entitiesusing the Select tool and then choose this button from the Sketch Tools toolbar. The

Circular Sketch Step and Repeat dialog box will be displayed as shown in Figure 2-27 and thepreview of the circular pattern will be shown on the screen in the background. Also, the arrowcursor is replaced by the circular pattern cursor.

The options provided in the Circular Sketch Step and Repeat dialog box are discussed next.

Arc AreaThe options under the Arc area are used to specify the radius and angle of the imaginary circlearound the circumference of which the instances will be arranged. These options are discussednext.

RadiusThe Radius spinner is used to specify the radius of the imaginary circle aroundthe circumference of which the instances of the circular pattern are arranged. As you modifythis value, the centerpoint of the imaginary circle will also change.

Menu: Tools > Sketch Tools > Circular Sketch Step and RepeatToolbar: Sketch Tools > Circular Sketch Step and Repeat

Tip. You can also add entities in the current selection set or remove them from thecurrent selection set by selecting them using the linear pattern cursor. As you add orremove the instances, the effect can be seen dynamically in the preview of the pattern.

c02-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:30 AM19


AngleAs you invoke the Circular Sketch Step and Repeat tool, a reference circle is drawn withdashed lines around which the instances of the circular pattern will be arranged. Also, areference line is drawn from the center of the entities selected to pattern and the center ofthe reference circle. The Angle spinner is used to modify the angle of this reference linedrawn between the center of entities and the center of the reference circle. As you modify thevalue of this spinner, the center of the reference circle will also modify accordingly.

FixedIf you select the Fixed check box, the radius of the reference circle will be placed as a lineardimension value after you create the circular pattern.

Center AreaThere are two spinners that are available in the Center area. They are the X spinner and the Yspinner. These two spinners are used to specify the X and Y coordinates of the centerpoint ofthe reference circle around which the instances of the circular pattern will be arranged. Bydefault, the center of the reference circle is coincident with the origin. Therefore, the value ofboth these spinners will be 0.00mm, 0.00mm. You will notice that an arrow is displayed at thecenterpoint of the reference circle and the tip of the arrow coincides with the origin. You candefine the new coordinates of the center of the reference circle in these spinners. You can alsodefine the center of the reference circle by pressing the left mouse button on the control pointprovided on the tip of the arrow and dragging the arrow to the desired location. The values of

Figure 2-27 Circular Sketch Step and Repeat dialog box

c02-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:30 AM20


the Radius and the Angle spinner in the Arc area and the X and Y spinners in the Center areawill modify accordingly.

NoteDragging the arrow at the center of the reference circle is the recommended method of defining thecenter of the circular pattern.

Step AreaThe options in the Step area are used to specify the parameters such as the number of instancesin the pattern, the angle between the instances, and so on. These options are discussed next.

NumberThe Number spinner is used to specify the number of instances in the circular pattern. Thedefault value of this spinner is 4.

Total angleThe Total angle spinner is used to specify the total angle between all the instances of thecircular pattern. The default value of this spinner is 360°. You can enter the desired value ofthe angle in this spinner.

Reverse RotationThe Reverse Rotation button is chosen to reverse the direction of the pattern. By default,the instances of the circular pattern are arranged in the counterclockwise direction. Whenyou choose this button, the direction is reversed to clockwise direction. To restore thecounterclockwise direction, choose this button again. Figure 2-28 shows the preview of thecircular pattern with 4 instances arranged in the counterclockwise direction.

EqualThe Equal check box is selected to specify the total angle between all the instances of thecircular pattern. If you clear this check box, the Total angle spinner is replaced by theSpacing spinner. You can specify the incremental spacing between two successive instancesof the circular pattern in this spinner. Figure 2-29 shows the preview of the circular patternwith 70° incremental spacing between two successive instances.

Constrain spacingThe Constrain spacing check box is selected to constrain the incremental spacing betweenthe individual instances of the circular pattern. If this check box is selected, the incrementalspacing will be placed as an angular dimension when you create the pattern. Figure 2-30shows a circular pattern with the angle and the radius values placed in the pattern.

Tip. You can modify the total angle between the instances by pressing the left mousebutton on the tip of the direction arrow and dragging it.

c02-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:30 AM21


Figure 2-29 Creating circular pattern by defining incremental anglebetween individual instances

Figure 2-28 Parameters associated with the circular pattern

NoteThe other options in this dialog box are similar to those discussed in the linear pattern.

EDITING PATTERNSYou can edit the patterns of the sketched entities by using the shortcut menu that is displayedwhen you right-click any instance of the pattern. Based on whether you right-clicked the instance

c02-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:30 AM22


Figure 2-30 Radius and angle values placed in the circular pattern

of the linear or the circular pattern, the Edit Linear Step and Repeat or the Edit Circular Stepand Repeat option will be available in the shortcut menu. Figure 2-31 shows the shortcut menuthat is displayed when you right-click one of the instances of a linear pattern.

Figure 2-31 Shortcut menu displayed upon right-clicking an instanceof a linear pattern

c02-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:30 AM23


Depending upon whether you choose the option to edit a linear pattern or a circular pattern, theLinear Sketch Step and Repeat or the Circular Sketch Step and Repeat dialog box will bedisplayed. The options that can be edited will be available. Note that the options that cannot beedited will not be available in these dialog boxes.

MODIFYING SKETCHED ENTITIESIn previous chapters you have learned about drawing the sketched entities. In this chapter youwill learn how to modify them. Modification of various sketched entities is discussed next.

Modifying a Sketched LineYou can modify the sketched lines by using the Line PropertyManager that is displayed whenyou select a sketched line using the Select tool. Note that if the selected line is a part of arectangle, polygon, or a parallelogram then the entire object will be modified as you modify theline. This is because the relations are applied to all the lines of a rectangle, polygon, and aparallelogram.

Similarly, you can also modify the center lines using the Line PropertyManager that is displayedwhen you select a center line.

Modifying a Sketched CircleTo modify a sketched circle, select it using the Select tool to display the Sketched CirclePropertyManager. The coordinate values of the centerpoint of the circle and the value of theradius will be displayed. You can modify the values that you want.

Modifying a Sketched ArcTo modify a sketched arc, select it using the Select tool. The Arc PropertyManager will bedisplayed with the coordinate values of the centerpoint, the startpoint, and the endpoint. Thevalues of the radius and the included angle will also be displayed. You can modify the values thatyou want.

Modifying a Sketched PolygonTo modify a sketched polygon, right-click any one edge of the polygon to display the shortcutmenu. Choose the Edit polygon option from the shortcut menu. The Polygon PropertyManagerwill be displayed. You can modify the selected polygon using the options in the PolygonPropertyManager or draw a new polygon.

NoteIf you right-click the reference circle that is automatically drawn when you draw a polygon, theEdit polygon option will not be available in the shortcut menu.

Tip. The status of the sketched entity that you select for modification is displayed inthe PropertyManager that is displayed. For example, if the selected sketched entityis fully defined, it will be displayed in the PropertyManager and if the entity isunder defined, the PropertyManager will display that the entity is under defined.

c02-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:30 AM24


Modifying a SplineYou can perform four types of modifications on a spline. The first one is the modification of thecoordinates of the selected control point. The second one is adding more control points on thespline. The third one is modifying the spline using the moving frame. The fourth one is addingmore moving frames. These modifications are discussed next.

Modifying the Coordinates of Control PointsTo modify the control points of a spline, select it using the Select tool. The SplinePropertyManager will be displayed. As mentioned in Chapter-1, the options in the SplinePropertyManager will be displayed only when you select it after drawing. All the control pointsof the spline will be displayed and the current control point will be displayed with a filledsquare. The number and the coordinates of the current handle will be displayed in the SplinePropertyManager. You can select any other handle by using the Spline Control Point spinner.

Adding Control PointsTo add control points to the spline, choose Tools > Sketch Tools > Insert Splint Point fromthe menu bar or select the spline using the select tool and right-click to invoke the shortcutmenu and choose the Insert Spline Point option from the shortcut menu. Now, select thepoints on the spline where you want to add the control points. A box will be displayed at thepoint specified on the spline. You can add as many control points as you want to the spline.After adding the required number of control points, invoke the Select tool and then select thespline again. You will notice that the boxes of control points will be displayed on all the pointsyou specified on the spline. You can display the coordinates of a control point using the SplineControl Point spinner available in the Spline PropertyManager.

Modifying the Spline Using the Moving FramesTo modify a spline using the moving frame select a particular control point of the spline usingthe Select tool. The moving frame will be displayed at the selected point. Three handles areprovided on the moving frame to modify the spline. Select one of the handles and drag themouse. The spline will be modified dynamically as you drag the cursor. You can also move themoving frame by dragging the frame point along the spline.

Adding the Moving FramesTo add the moving frame on the spline, select the spline where you want to add the movingframe using the Select tool and right-click to invoke the shortcut menu. Choose the MovingFrame option from the shortcut menu. A moving frame will be displayed at the selected point.You can add as many moving frames as you want to the spline. When a moving frame is notselected it is displayed as a triangle. As you select a moving frame the Frame PointPropertyManager is displayed. The Frame Point PropertyManager is used to display thevalues of X Coordinate, Y Coordinate, Curvature, and Tangency of the selected movingframe. Choose the moving frame and press the DELETE key from the keyboard to delete the moving frame.

Simplifying SplinesTo simply a spline, select the spline using the select tool and right-click to invoke the shortcutmenu. Choose the Simplify Spline option from the shortcut menu. The Simplify Spline dialogbox is invoked as shown in Figure 2-32. Using this option you can simplify a spline by reducing

c02-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:30 AM25


the control points of the spline. Consider a model in which the features are created using thecomplex spline curves. You can increase the performance of the model or simplify the complexsketch using this option. To simplify a spline after invoking the Simplify Spline dialog box,choose the Smooth button to decrease the number of control points. The value of tolerance willdecrease automatically in the Tolerance spinner when you delete the control points using theSmooth button. You can also simplify the spline by specifying the tolerance value in the Tolerancespinner. As you decrease the number of control points the system adjusts the tolerance andcreates a new curve with fewer points. The original spline is displayed in the drawing area andthe preview in the new smooth curve is also displayed. The number of control points of theoriginal curve and the number of control points in the simplified curve is displayed in theNumber of spline points area.

Converting a Sketched Entity into a SplineTo convert a sketched entity into a spline, create a sketched entity using normal sketchingtools. Choose the Tools > Sketch Tools > Fit Spline option from the menu bar to invokethe Fit Spline PropertyManager. You can also invoke the Fit Spline PropertyManager

using the Fit Spline button from the Sketch Tools toolbar added after customize. The Fit SplinePropertyManager is shown in Figure 2-33. Now, select the entities to be converted into a spline

Figure 2-32 The Simplify Spline dialog box

Tip. You can also delete the control points of a spline by selecting the spline and thecontrol point by using the left mouse button. After you have selected the controlpoint to be deleted, press the DELETE key. However, note that the control points atthe start and the endpoint of the spline cannot be deleted. Also, you cannot deletethe last intermediate control point in the spline.

You can display the minimum radius of the spline using the Show MinimumRadius option. Using the Select tool select the spline and right-click to invoke theshortcut menu. Choose the Show Minimum Radius option from the shortcut menu.When you modify the spline the minimum radius will also be modified.

You can also display the inflection points of a spline. The inflection points are thepoints that are displayed at the position where the concavity of the spline changes.To display the inflection points select the spline using the Select tool and right-clickto invoke the shortcut menu. Choose the Show Inflection Points option from theshortcut menu. The symbol of the inflection points is displayed as two arrows pointingtoward each other.

c02-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:30 AM26


using the select tool. Specify the tolerance using the Tolerance spinner. As you specify thetolerance the value of actual deviation is displayed in the Actual Deviation display box below theTolerance spinner. The preview of the spline created is displayed in the drawing area. If youselect the Delete geometry check box then the original sketched entity will be deleted, otherwisethe original sketch will be displayed as a construction geometry. Choose OK from the FitSpline PropertyManager or choose the OK icon from the confirmation corner. Now, select thenewly created spline using the select tool and right-click to invoke the shortcut menu. Choosethe Simplify Spline option from the shortcut menu to invoke the Simplify Spline dialog box.Choose OK from this dialog box to display all the control points of the newly created spline.Figure 2-34 shows the sketched entities. Figure 2-35 shows the spline created using the FitSpline option.

Modifying a Sketched PointTo modify a sketched point, select it using the Select tool. The Sketched Point PropertyManagerwill be displayed. You can modify the coordinates of the sketched point using thisPropertyManager.

Figure 2-33 The Fit Spline PropertyManager

Figure 2-34 Sketched entities to be converted intoa spline

Figure 2-35 Spline created using the Fit Splineoption

c02-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:30 AM27


Modifying an Ellipse or an Elliptical ArcTo modify an ellipse or an elliptical arc, select it using the Select tool. The EllipsePropertyManager will be displayed. If you select an ellipse, the parameters that will be availablefor modification are the coordinates of the centerpoint and the radius of the two axes. However,if you select an elliptical arc, all the options in the Ellipse PropertyManager will be availablesuch as the coordinates of the startpoint, endpoint, and centerpoint of the arc, radius of the twoaxes, and so on.

Modifying a ParabolaTo modify a parabola, select it using the Select tool. The Parabola PropertyManager will bedisplayed. You can modify the parameters of a parabola from this PropertyManager.

Dynamically Modifying and Copying the SketchedEntitiesIn the sketcher environment of SolidWorks you can modify or copy the sketched entities bydynamically dragging them using the left mouse button. For example, consider a case where youcreate a sketch of a rectangle and you want to increase the size of the rectangle. You simply haveto choose the Select button from the Sketch Tools toolbar to deactivate the rectangle command.Using the left mouse button select any of the line of the rectangle or select any of the vertex ofrectangle and hold down the left mouse button to drag the mouse. Drag the sketch according toyour requirement and then release the left mouse button. If you choose Tools > Sketch Setting> Detach Segment on Drag from the menu bar (you can confirm whether the detachment isactive by choosing Tools > Sketch Tools; you will notice a check mark in front of the DetachSegment on Drag option) then if you select a line of the rectangle to drag, and when you releasethe left mouse button after dragging, the line segment will be detached from the rectangle. Todeactivate the detachment of the line segment again choose Tools > Sketch Tools > DetachSegment on Drag from the menu bar (you can confirm whether the detachment is deactivated bychoosing Tools > Sketch Tools; you will notice that the check mark is not available in front ofthe Detach Segment on Drag option).

You can also copy the sketched entities dynamically. Select the sketched entity or entities to becopied using the left mouse button or by creating a window around the entities to be copied.Press and hold down the CTRL key on the keyboard and hold down the left mouse button anddrag the selected entity or entities to be copied. Release the left mouse button to place the newentity. Again hold down the left mouse button and drag the selected entity and release the leftmouse button where you want to place the entities. Repeat the same procedure if you want morecopies of the same entity. After you complete the copying operation release the CTRL key fromthe keyboard.

Splitting the Sketched Entity

Using the Split Curve option you can split a sketched entity into two or more than twoentities by specifying the split points. To split a curve choose the Split Curve button

Menu: Tools > Sketch Tools > Split Curve (Customize to Add)

Toolbar: Sketch Tools > Split Curve

c02-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:30 AM28


from the Sketch Tools toolbar; the current cursor will be replaced by the split curve cursor. Movethe cursor to an appropriate location where you have to split the sketched entity. When thecursor snaps the entity, use the left mouse button to add a split point. Now right click to displaythe shortcut menu and choose the select option from the shortcut menu. Using the select cursorselect the sketched entity. You will notice that the sketched entity is divided in two entitiesbecause a split point is added between the two sketched entities. You can add as many splitpoints as you need. You can also delete the split points to convert the split entity into a singleentity. To delete the split point, use the left mouse button to select the split point and press theDELETE key from the keyboard or right-click to display the shortcut menu and choose theDelete option from the shortcut menu.

NOTEIt is recommended that you should use two split points to split a circle, a full ellipse, or a closedspline.

Modifying the Entire Sketch

The Modify Sketch option is used to move, rotate, or scale the entire sketch. TheModify Sketch button is available in the Sketch toolbar and this button is active onlywhen you have created at least one sketched entity. When you choose the Modify

Sketch button from the Sketch toolbar, the Modify Sketch dialog box is displayed and thecurrent cursor is replaced by the Modify Sketch cursor. You will notice that a moveable origin isalso displayed in the drawing area along with the sketch origin and the document origin. TheModify Sketch dialog box is displayed in Figure 2-36. The various options available in theModify Sketch dialog box are discussed next.

NoteYou will learn more about the document origin in the later chapters.

Scale AboutThe Scale About area of the Modify Sketch dialog box is used to scale the sketch. The optionsin this area are used to select the origin along which you have to scale the sketch by specifying

Figure 2-36 The Modify Sketch dialog box

Menu: Tools > Sketch > Modify Sketch (Customize to Add)

Toolbar: Sketch > Modify Sketch

c02-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:30 AM29


the scale factor. The options available in this area of the Modify Sketch dialog box are discussed next.

Sketch originThe Sketch Origin radio button is selected to scale the sketch with respect to the sketchorigin. The sketch origin is displayed when you enter the sketching environment.

Moveable originThe Moveable origin radio button is selected to scale the sketch with respect to the moveableorigin. The moveable origin is displayed when you invoke the Modify Sketch dialog box.The moveable origin can be moved by dragging using the left mouse button.

FactorThe Factor edit box is used to specify the scale factor. The sketch will be scaled using thescale factor provided in the Factor edit box. Enter a value of scale factor in the Factor editbox and press ENTER.

NoteYou cannot scale a sketch if it is having a reference with some external entity or element. You willlearn more about referring the external entities in the later chapters.

TranslateThe options available in the Translate area are used to move the sketch geometry by specifyingthe incremental values. The options available in the Translate area of the Modify Sketch dialogbox that are used to translate the sketch are discussed next.

X valueThe X value edit box is used to specify the incremental value in the x direction for translatingthe sketch in the x direction. To translate the sketch in the x direction, enter a value in theX value edit box and press ENTER.

Y valueThe Y value edit box is used to specify the incremental value in the y direction for translat-ing the sketch in the y direction. To translate the sketch in the y direction, enter a value inthe y value edit box and press ENTER.

If you want to translate a sketch in both the x direction and the y direction simultaneouslythen enter the incremental value in the X value edit box and the Y value edit box and thenpress ENTER.

Position selected pointThe Position selected point check box is selected to translate a specified point of the sketchto a specific location. Select the Position selected point check box and the Modify Sketch

Tip. If you want to move the moveable origin, move the cursor near the moveableorigin that is displayed in black color. When the cursor snaps the moveable originpress and hold down the left mouse button and drag the cursor to a location whereyou have to place the origin and release the left mouse button to place the moveableorigin.

c02-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:30 AM30


cursor is replaced by the select cursor. By default the sketch origin is selected and you canconfirm it by observing a green rectangle at the origin. Using the left mouse button selectthe point in the sketch that you want to move. Now specify the incremental values in the Xvalue edit box and the Y value edit box and press ENTER.

NoteThe Modify Sketch option translates or moves the entire sketch including the sketch origin. Thesketch geometry does not move relative to the origin of the sketch, which is known as sketchorigin.

You can also translate or move the entire sketch using the left mouse button. Afterinvoking the Modify Sketch dialog box the cursor will be replaced by the modify sketchcursor. The move symbol will be displayed on the left mouse button of the modify sketch

cursor. Press and hold the left mouse button anywhere on the drawing area, and drag thecursor to move or translate the sketch. Release the left mouse button where you have to placethe sketch.

RotateThe Rotate area is used to rotate the entire sketch with moveable origin as the centerpoint for therotation of the sketch. For rotating a sketch, enter a value in the Rotate edit box and pressENTER. To change the centerpoint for the rotation of the sketch, move the moveable origin asdiscussed earlier. The entire sketch will be rotated along with the sketch origin.

You can also rotate the sketch dynamically. Invoke the Modify Sketch dialog box. Thecursor will be replaced by the modify sketch cursor. The rotate symbol will be displayedon the right mouse button of the modify sketch cursor. Press and hold the right mouse

button anywhere on the screen. A rubber-band line will be attached to the cursor and the otherend of the same line will be attached to the moveable origin. Drag the cursor in the clockwisedirection or the counterclockwise direction to rotate the sketch about the moveable origin.

NoteYou cannot move the sketch if the sketch is having multiple external references. The cursor willshow a ? symbol on the left of the cursor. If you press the left mouse button when this symbolappears the SolidWorks warning message window will be displayed. This warning messagewindow will prompt you that you cannot translate the sketch. But you can rotate the referencedsketched entity.

Flipping the SketchYou can flip the sketch using the mouse with respect to the moveable origin. The various optionsfor flipping the sketches using the mouse are discussed next.

Moving the Moveable Origin and Flipping the Sketch DiagonallyWhen you invoke the Modify Sketch dialog box, the cursor will be replaced by themodify sketch cursor. When you move the cursor to the origin of the moveable origin,the cursor with a point symbol will be displayed on the left mouse button of the modify

sketch cursor. The point symbol is used to move the moveable origin. A diagonal flipsymbol will be displayed on the right mouse button of the modify sketch cursor. You can flip

c02-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:30 AM31


the sketch diagonally using the right mouse button with respect to the moveable origin.When you flip the sketch using this option the entire sketch will be flipped diagonally alongwith the sketch origin.

Moving the Sketch and Flipping the Sketch HorizontallyMove the modify sketch cursor to the black square near the horizontal arrow of themoveable origin. The move symbol will be displayed on the left mouse button of themodify sketch cursor. Using the left mouse button you can move the entire sketch along

with the moveable origin and the sketch origin. The horizontal flip symbol will be displayedon the right mouse button of the modify sketch cursor. You can flip the entire sketchhorizontally along with the moveable origin using the right mouse button.

Moving the Sketch and Flipping the Sketch VerticallyMove the modify sketch cursor to the black square near the vertical arrow of the moveableorigin. The move symbol will be displayed on the left mouse button of the modify sketchcursor. As discussed earlier, using the left mouse button you can move the entire sketch

along with the moveable origin and the sketch origin. The vertical flip symbol will bedisplayed on the right mouse button of the modify sketch cursor. You can flip the entiresketch vertically along with the moveable origin using the right mouse button.

TUTORIALS

Tutorial 1In this tutorial you will create the base sketch of the model shown in Figure 2-37. The sketch ofthe model is shown in Figure 2-38. You will have to create the sketch of the base feature using thenormal sketch tools and then modify and edit the sketch using various sketch modifying options.


Figure 2-37 Solid Model for Tutorial 1

c02-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:30 AM32


The steps that will be followed to complete this tutorial are listed next;

a. Start SolidWorks and then open a new part file.b. Maximize the part file document and then switch to the sketching environment.c. Draw the outer loop of the sketch of the given model, refer to Figures 2-39 and 2-40.d. Create the inner cavity using the Centerpoint Arc and the Tangent arc tools, refer to Figure

2-41.e. Use the Circular Sketch Step and Repeat tool to create a circular pattern of the inner

cavity, refer to Figure 2-42.f. Complete the sketch by creating the circles that define the hole in the outer loop.d. Modify and edit the sketch using the Circular Sketch Step and Repeat tools, refer Figure 2-43.

Starting SolidWorks and Opening a New SolidWorks Document1. Start SolidWorks by choosing Start > Programs > SolidWorks 2003 > SolidWorks 2003


The Welcome to SolidWorks window and the Tip of the Day dialog box will be displayed.The Tip of the Day dialog box is overlapping this window. As mentioned earlier, the tipsthat are displayed in this dialog box are very useful in making the best use of SolidWorks.

2. Close the Tip of the Day dialog box by choosing the Close button.

Figure 2-38 The sketch of the base feature

c02-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:30 AM33


3. Choose the New Document option from the Welcome to SolidWorks window.

The New SolidWorks Document dialog box will be displayed.

4. The Part option is selected by default in the New SolidWorks Document dialog box.Choose the OK button from this dialog box.

A new SolidWorks part document will be opened. But the part document window will not bemaximized in the SolidWorks window.


By default, when you open a new part document, the part modeling environment is active.However, since you need to draw the sketch of the feature, you need to invoke thesketching environment.


You will notice that the sketch origin is also displayed along with the document originshown in gray color. This red color origin indicates that the sketching environment isactivated.

Modifying the Snap and Grid Settings and the Dimensioning UnitsBefore you proceed with drawing the sketch, you need to modify the grid and snap settings sothat you can make the cursor jump through a distance of 10mm instead of 25mm, which is thedefault value.

1. Choose the Grid button from the Sketch toolbar. The Document Properties -Grid/Snap dialog box is displayed.

2. Set the value of the Minor-lines per major spinner to 10.

Since by default the Snap to points option is not selected, therefore, you need to select thisoption manually.

3. Select the Snap to points check box from the Snap area of the Document Properties -Grid/Snap dialog box.

The coordinates displayed close to the lower left corner of the SolidWorks window will showan increment of 10mm instead of the default increment of 25mm when you exit the dialogbox.

If by default the grid is displayed when you invoke the sketching environment, you canremove the display of grid. To remove the grid clear the Display grid check box from theGrid area of Document Properties - Grid/Snap dialog box.

c02-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:30 AM34


If you selected units other than millimeter to measure the length while installing SolidWorks,you need to select the units for the current drawing.

4. Select the Units option from the area on the left of the Document Properties - Grid/Snapdialog box.

5. Select Millimeter from the drop-down list available in the Linear units area and Degreesfrom the drop-down list available in the Angular units area.

6. Choose the OK button after making the necessary settings.

Creating the Outer Loop of the SketchFirst, you will create the outer loop of the sketch. As evident from Figure 2-38, the sketch consistsof the outer loop and inner cavities. It is recommended that for complex sketches, you shouldfirst create the outer loop of the sketch. Then you can proceed with the inner cavities.

The origin of the sketcher environment is placed in the middle of the drawing area and youhave to create the sketch in the first quadrant. Therefore, it is recommended that you modify thedrawing area. This can be done using the Pan tool.

1. Choose the Pan button from the View toolbar to invoke the pan tool.

The select cursor is replaced by the pan cursor.

2. Press and hold down the left mouse button near the sketch origin.

3. Drag the cursor to the lower left corner of the drawing area.

You will notice that the sketch origin moves near the lower left corner of the drawing area.

4. Choose the Circle button from the Sketch Tools toolbar. The pan cursor will bereplaced by the circle cursor.

5. Move the cursor to a location where the value of the coordinates is 70mm 70mm 0mm.

6. Using the left mouse button, specify the centerpoint of the circle at this location and movethe cursor horizontally toward the right. When the radius above the circle cursor shows avalue of 50, press the left mouse button.

7. Choose the Zoom to Area button from the View toolbar. Using the left mouse button, createa window such that the sketched circle and the sketch origin are placed in the window.

When you release the left mouse button the display area of the sketch will be increased.

Tip. You can also pan without using the pan tool. Choose CTRL+middle mousebutton to pan or move the sketch origin.

c02-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:30 AM35


8. Choose the Center line button from the Sketch Tools toolbar to draw a horizontalcenter line from the center of the circle toward the right, see Figure 2-39.

9. Choose the Circle button from the Sketch Tools toolbar to invoke the circle tool.

10. Move the cursor at the intersection of the center line and the bigger circle.

11. Using the left mouse button, specify the centerpoint of the circle at this location and movethe cursor horizontally toward the right. When the value of the radius above the circle cursorshows a value of 10, press the left mouse button.

12. Choose the Sketch Trim button from the Sketch Tools toolbar to invoke the trimtool.

13. Trim the part of the sketch so that the sketch looks similar to the one shown in Figure 2-39.

14. Choose the Circular Sketch Step and Repeat button from the Sketch Tools toolbar.

The Circular Sketch Step and Repeat dialog box is displayed and the cursor is replaced bythe circular pattern cursor.

15. Using the circular pattern cursor, select the smaller trimmed circle. The preview of thecircular pattern with default setting is displayed in the drawing area.

You will notice that the center of the circular pattern, which is displayed with an arrow, isplaced at the origin. However, since the origin is not the actual center of the circular pattern,you need to modify the centerpoint of the circular pattern. You can modify the center of the

Figure 2-39 Sketch after trimming the unwanted entities

c02-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:30 AM36


circular pattern by entering the coordinates of the point in the X and Y spinners availablein the Center area of this dialog box. But, the recommended method of modifying thecenter of the circular pattern is by dragging the arrow that is displayed at the center of thepattern.

16. Move the circular pattern cursor at the control point available at the end of the arrow that isdisplayed at the origin.

The circular pattern cursor will turn yellow in color.

17. Press and hold the left mouse button down at the control point and drag it to the center ofthe outer trimmed circle in the sketch. Release the left mouse button when the cursor turnsyellow in color.

You will notice that the X and the Y spinners in the Center area show 70 mm as the values.This is because the center of the outer trimmed circle is located at a distance of 70 mm alongthe X and Y axis directions.

The default value of the number of items in the pattern is 4. But since you need 6 items inthe pattern, you need to modify this value.

18. Set the value of the Number spinner in the Step area to 6. Accept all the other default valuesand choose the OK button to create the pattern.

19. Trim the unwanted portion of the outer trimmed circle using the Sketch Trim tool. Now, theouter loop of the sketch is complete. The sketch should look similar to the one shown inFigure 2-40.


c02-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:30 AM37


Drawing the Sketch of the Inner CavityNow, you need to draw the sketch of the inner cavities. You will draw the sketch of one of thecavities. Next, you will create circular pattern of this cavity. The number of items in thecircular pattern will be 3.

Before creating the sketch of the inner cavity, you need to create a centerline that will act asa reference for creating the sketch of the inner cavity.

1. Choose the Centerline button from the Sketch Tools toolbar.

2. Move the cursor close to the center of the outer circle. When the cursor changes to yellowcolor, specify the startpoint using the left mouse button. Hold the CTRL key down andmove the cursor to a location where the angle of the line is shown close to 30-degree and thelength is 35. Using the left mouse button, specify the endpoint of the line.

3. Exit the Centerline tool and select the centerline. The Line PropertyManager is displayed.Set the value of the Length spinner to 35 and the Angle spinner to 30.

4. Choose the Circle button from the Sketch Tools toolbar.

5. Move the cursor to the upper endpoint of the inclined centerline. When the cursor turnsyellow in color, use the left mouse button to specify the centerpoint of the circle. Move thecursor horizontally toward the right. When the value of the radius is shown close to 5 abovethe circle cursor, use the left mouse button to complete the creation of the circle.

6. Set the value of the radius of the circle to 5 in the Radius spinner of the CirclePropertyManager.

7. Choose the Circular Sketch Step and Repeat button from the Sketch Tools toolbar.

The Circular Sketch Step and Repeat dialog box is displayed and the cursor is replaced bythe circular pattern cursor. You will notice that the center of the circular pattern, which isdisplayed with an arrow, is placed at the origin. Since the origin is not the actual center ofthe circular pattern, you need to modify the centerpoint of the circular pattern. You canmodify the center of the circular pattern by entering the coordinates of the point in the Xand Y spinners available in the Center area of this dialog box. However, the recommendedmethod of modifying the center of the circular pattern is by dragging the arrow that isdisplayed at the center of the pattern.


9. The circular pattern cursor is displayed in yellow color. Now, press and hold down the leftmouse button at the centerpoint and drag the cursor to the centerpoint of the outer trimmedcircle. Release the left mouse when the circular pattern cursor turns yellow.

10. Set the value of the Number spinner to 2.

c02-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:30 AM38


11. Set the value of the Total angle spinner to 45 deg and choose the Reverse Rotationbutton.

12. Choose OK from the Circular Sketch Step and Repeat dialog box.

13. Choose the Centerpoint Arc button from the Sketch Tools toolbar.

14. Move the cursor to the centerpoint of the outer trimmed circle. Use the left mouse button tospecify the centerpoint of the arc. Now, move the cursor to the intersection of the center lineand circle. Specify the startpoint of the arc when the intersection symbol appears.

15. Move the cursor in the counterclockwise direction. When the value of the angle above thearc cursor shows a value of 45-degree, press the left mouse button to specify the endpoint ofthe arc.

Next, you will offset the arc created in the previous step to an offset distance of 10. You willuse the offset tool to offset the arc.

The arc created earlier is displayed in green. This means that the arc is already selected. Ifthe arc is not selected, select the arc using the left mouse button before invoking the offsettool.

16. Choose the Offset Entities button from the Sketch Tools toolbar. The Offset EntitiesPropertyManager is displayed.

17. Set the value of the Offset Distance spinner to 10 and clear the Reverse check box ifselected. Choose the OK button from the Offset Entities PropertyManager.


19. Trim the unwanted portion of the inner cavity using the Trim tool. The sketch after completingthe inner cavity is shown in Figure 2-41.

Creating the Pattern of the Inner CavityNext, you will create the pattern of the inner cavity using the Circular Sketch Step andRepeat tool. The pattern of the inner cavity consists of three instances. The centerpoint ofthe pattern lies at the centerpoint of the outer trimmed circle.

Before invoking this option, press the CTRL key from the keyboard and using the leftmouse button, select all the entities of the inner cavity.

1. Choose the Circular Sketch Step and Repeat button from the Sketch Tools toolbarto invoke the Circular Sketch Step and Repeat dialog box.

The Circular Sketch Step and Repeat dialog box is displayed and the cursor will be replacedby the circular pattern cursor. You will notice that the center of the circular pattern, which is

c02-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:30 AM39


displayed with an arrow, is placed at the origin. Since the origin is not the actual center ofthe circular pattern, you need to modify the centerpoint of the circular pattern.

2. Press and hold the left mouse button down at the control point of the arrow that is displayedat the origin. Drag it to the center of the outer trimmed circle in the sketch. Release the leftmouse button when the cursor turns yellow in color.

You will notice that the X and the Y spinners in the Center area show 70 mm as the values.

The default value of the number of items in the pattern is 4. But since you need 3 items inthe pattern, you need to modify this value.


The sketch after creating the pattern of the inner cavity is shown in Figure 2-42.

Sketching the HolesNext, you need to create the sketch of the holes. The centerpoint of the circle is located atthe centerpoint of the outer trimmed arc. As evident from Figure 2-38, you need to create atotal of six circles. After creating the first circle, you will create the other five circles bycreating a circular pattern of the parent circle.

1. Choose the Circle button from the Sketch Tools toolbar.

2. Move the cursor to the centerpoint of the right trimmed arc.

3. When the circle cursor turns yellow in color, use the left mouse button to specify the centerpoint

Figure 2-41 The sketch of the outer loop and the inner cavity

c02-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:30 AM40


of the circle. Press the CTRL key from the keyboard and move the cursor toward the right.When the value of the radius above the circle cursor shows a close of 5, press the left mousebutton.

4. Set the value of the Radius spinner to 5 in the Circle PropertyManager.

5. Choose the Circular Sketch Step and Repeat button from the Sketch Tools toolbar toinvoke the Circular Sketch Step and Repeat dialog box.

6. Move the circular pattern cursor to the control point of the arrow displayed at the origin.When the cursor turns yellow in color, press and hold the left mouse button and drag thecursor to the centerpoint of the outer trimmed circle. Release the left mouse button when thecursor turns yellow in color.

7. Set the value of the Number spinner to 6 in the Step area of the Circular Sketch Step andRepeat dialog box. Accept all the other default values and choose OK in this dialog box.

The final sketch of Tutorial 1 is shown in Figure 2-43.

Saving the SketchAs mentioned earlier, it is recommended that you create a separate directory for saving thetutorial files of each chapter. When you invoke the option to save the document, the defaultdirectory that is displayed is /My Documents. As you have already created a directory calledSolidWorks in this directory, it will be displayed along with other directories. Double-clickthe SolidWorks directory. Now, you will create another directory inside the SolidWorks directoryand save the document.

Figure 2-42 Sketch after creating the pattern of the inner cavity

c02-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:30 AM41


1. Choose the Save button from the Standard toolbar to invoke the Save As dialogbox.

2. Choose the Create New Folder button from the Save As dialog box. Enter the name of thefolder as c02 and press ENTER.

3. Enter the name of the document as c02-tut01.sldprt in the File name edit box and choose theSave button.



Tutorial 2In this tutorial you will create the base sketch of the model shown in Figure 2-44. The sketch ofthe model is shown in Figure 2-45. You will create the sketch with mirror line and mirror tool.After creating the sketch, you will modify it by dragging the sketched entities.


The steps that will be followed to complete this tutorial are listed below;

a. Open a new part file.b. Maximize the part file document and then switch to the sketching environment.c. Creating the center lines and create a mirror line using one of the center line and the mirror

tool.d. Create the sketch in the third quadrant; the sketch will automatically mirrored to other side,

refer to Figure 2-46e. Mirror the entire sketch along the second mirror line, refer to Figure 2-47.

Figure 2-43 Final sketch

c02-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:30 AM42


f. Modify the sketch by dragging the sketched entities, refer to Figure 2-48.



2. Select the Part option and then choose the OK button from the New SolidWorks Documentdialog box

A new SolidWorks part document will be opened. But the part document window will not bemaximized in the SolidWorks window.


Figure 2-45 Sketch of the model

c02-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:30 AM43



As mentioned earlier, when you open a new part document, the part modeling environmentis active by default. However, since you first need to drag the sketch of the revolved model,you need to invoke the sketching environment.


The origin will turn red in color and the Sketch Tools toolbar will be displayed below theSketch toolbar, suggesting that the sketching environment is activated.

Since the default settings of the snap and grid are not the same as required, therefore, youneed to modify the snap and grid settings.

5. Invoke the Document Properties - Grid/Snap dialog box and clear the Display grid checkbox, if selected. Set the value of the Minor-lines per Major spinner to 10. Select the Snapto points check box to activate the snap option.

It is assumed that you have selected the unit of measuring as millimeter while installingSolidWorks. However, if you have selected any other unit while installation then you need tochange the units.

6. Select the Units option available below the Grid/Snap option in the area provided at the leftof the Document Properties -Grid/Snap dialog box.

7. Select the Units option from the drop-down list available in the Linear units area. Selectthe Degrees option from the drop-down list available in the Angular units area. ChooseOK to exit the dialog box.

Creating the Center Lines and a Mirror LineIn this tutorial you will create the sketch of the given model with the help of a mirror line.The sketches that are symmetrical along any axis are recommended to be drawn using themirror line. The design intent is captured in the sketches drawn using the mirror line or amirror tool because a symmetric relation is established between the parent entity and themirrored image. The mirror line is created using the Centerline and Mirror tools. Aftercreating a mirror line, when you draw the entities on one side of the mirror line, the sameentities will be created automatically on the other side of the mirror line. The entitiescreated on the other side are the mirror image of the entities you draw. A symmetricalrelation is applied to the entities on both sides of the mirror line. Therefore, if you modifyan entity on one side of the mirror line, then the same modification will be applied to themirrored entity and vice versa. First, you need to create a mirror line.


The select cursor will be replaced by the line cursor.

c02-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:30 AM44


2. Move the line cursor to a location where the value of the coordinates is 0mm 100mm 0mm.

3. Use the left mouse button to specify the startpoint of the center line and move the cursorvertically downwards. Use the left mouse button to specify the endpoint of the center linewhen the length of the line cursor shows a value of 200.

4. Now, double-click anywhere on the screen to end the line creation or press the right mousebutton anywhere on the drawing area to invoke the shortcut menu. Choose the End chainoption from the shortcut menu.

5. Move the line cursor to a location where the value of the coordinates is -100mm 0mm 0mm.

6. Use the left mouse button to specify the startpoint of the center line and move the cursorhorizontally toward the right. Use the left mouse button to specify the endpoint of thecenter line when the length of the line cursor shows a value of 200.

7. Right-click to invoke the shortcut menu and choose the Select option. The line cursor willbe replaced by the select cursor.

8. Select the vertical center line. The selected center line will be displayed in green color.

9. Choose Tools > Sketch Tools > Mirror from the menu bar or choose the SketchMirror button from the Sketch Tools toolbar to create the mirror line and activatethe automatic mirror option.

You can confirm the creation of the mirror line and the activation of the automatic mirroroption by observing the symmetrical symbol applied to both the ends of the centerline. Theline cursor is changed to the select cursor as soon as you convert a center line into a mirrorline.

Drawing the SketchNext, you will create the sketch of the base feature. You will create the sketch in the thirdquadrant, which is on one side of the mirror line. The same sketch will be created automaticallyon the other side of the mirror line. The symmetrical relation is applied between the parententity and the mirrored entity.

1. Choose the Line button from the Sketch Tools toolbar to invoke the line tool. Theselect cursor will be replaced by the line cursor.

2. Move the line cursor to a location where the value of the coordinates is 0mm -100mm 0mm.

3. Use the left mouse button at this location to specify the startpoint of the line and move thecursor horizontally toward the left.

4. Use the left mouse button to specify the endpoint of the line when the value of the length ofthe line above the line cursor shows a value of 90.

c02-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:30 AM45


You will notice that as soon as you specify the endpoint of the line, a mirror image isautomatically created on the other side of the mirror line. This line created as the mirrorimage is merged with the line drawn on the left. Therefore, the entire line becomes a singleentity. Note that the lines will merge only if one of the endpoints of the line you draw iscoincident with the mirror line.

A rubber-band line is attached to the cursor with its startpoint attached to the endpoint ofthe previous line.

5. Move the cursor vertically upwards. Use the left mouse button to specify the endpoint of theline when the value of the length of the line above the line cursor shows a value of 30.

You will notice that as soon as you specify the endpoint of a line, a mirror image is automaticallycreated on the other side of the mirror line.

The rubber-band line is still attached to the cursor. The startpoint of the rubber-band line isattached to the endpoint of the previous line.

6. Move the line cursor toward the right. Use the left mouse button to specify the endpoint ofthe line when the length of the line above the line cursor shows a value of 30.

A mirror image is automatically created on the other side of the mirror line.

7. Move the line cursor vertically upwards. Use the left mouse button to specify the endpoint ofthe line when the line cursor snaps the horizontal center line. Exit the Line tool.

The sketch after creating the lines is shown in Figure 2-46.

Figure 2-46 Sketch after creating the lines

c02-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:30 AM46


Mirroring the Entire SketchAfter creating one half of the sketch, you need to mirror the entire sketch about the horizontalcenter line. Before mirroring the sketch, you need to disable automatic mirroring.

1. As evident from the Sketch Tools toolbar the Sketch Mirror button is activated.Choose the Sketch Mirror button to disable automatic mirroring.

Now, the vertical center line will not work as a mirror line.

2. Use the CTRL key from the keyboard and the left mouse button to select all the linessketched earlier and the horizontal center line.

3. Choose the Sketch Mirror button from the Sketch Tools toolbar.

As soon as you select the Sketch Mirror button, the entire sketch will be mirrored along thehorizontal center line. The sketch after mirroring is shown in Figure 2-47.

Modifying the Sketch by DraggingNext, you will modify the sketch by dragging the sketched entities using the left mousebutton. While dragging the entities, you will observe that the corresponding mirrored entitywill also be modified.

1. Select the lower right vertical line. The Line PropertyManager will be displayed on the leftof the drawing area.

You will notice that the value of the length in the Length spinner shows a value of 30. Butthe length of this line should be 20. Therefore, you need to edit this sketch. In this tutorial,you will edit the sketch by dragging. You will observe that when you drag one line, all thedependent lines are also modified.

Figure 2-47 Sketch after mirroring the sketched entities

c02-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:30 AM47


2. Select the top horizontal line and drag the cursor vertically downward. Release the leftmouse button when the value of the Start Y Coordinate spinner and End Y Coordinatespinner decreases by 10.

You will observe that all the sketched entities that are related to the dragged entity are alsomodified because of the symmetric relations applied to them. This is because they arecreated using the Mirror tool. If you create an entity using the mirror tool and modify it, theother entities associated to it will be modified accordingly.

3. Select the lower left vertical line and drag the cursor horizontally toward the right. Releasethe left mouse button when the value of the Start X Coordinate spinner and the End YCoordinate spinner decreases by 10.

4. Select the middle left vertical line and drag the cursor horizontally toward right. Release theleft mouse button when the value of the Start X Coordinate spinner and the End XCoordinate spinner shows a value of -10.

The final sketch after modifying the sketched entities by dragging is shown in Figure 2-48.


box.





c02-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:30 AM48


Tutorial 3In this tutorial you will create the basic sketch of the model shown in Figure 2-49. The sketch isshown in Figure 2-50. You will create the sketch using the various sketching tools. After creatingthe sketch, you will edit the sketch using the sketch mirror, sketch offset, sketch extend, andsketch trim options. The solid model is given only for your reference. (Expected Time: 30 min.)


a. Open a new part file.b. Maximize the part file document and then switch to the sketching environment.



c02-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:30 AM49


c. Create a centerline, which will be used for reference.d. Draw the sketch and edit the sketch using the sketch mirror tool, and the sketch trim tool,

refer to Figure 2-51.e. Offset the entire sketch, refer to Figure 2-52f. Complete the final editing of the sketch using the sketch extend and sketch trim tools, refer

Figures 2-52 and 2-54.

Opening a New File1. Choose the New button from the Standard toolbar to invoke the New SolidWorks

Document dialog box.

2. Select the Part option and then choose the OK button from the New SolidWorks Documentdialog box.

A new SolidWorks part document will be opened. However, as mentioned earlier, the partdocument will not be maximized in the SolidWorks window.



The origin will turn red in color and the Sketch Tools toolbar will be displayed below theSketch toolbar, suggesting that the sketching environment is activated.

5. Using the Document Properties - Grid/Snap dialog box, set the value of the Minor-linesper major spinner to 10. Also, select the Snap to Point check box.

Creating the Center LineBefore creating the sketch, you need to create a center line that will act as a reference for theother sketch entities. This center lines will be used for mirroring.

1. Choose the Center Line button from the Sketch Tools toolbar. The arrow cursorwill be replaced by the line cursor.

2. Move the cursor to a location where the value of the coordinates is -70mm 0mm 0mm.

3. Specify the startpoint of the center line at this location and move the cursor horizontallytoward the right.

4. Specify the endpoint of the centerline when the value of the length of the centerline abovethe line cursor shows a value of 140.

5. Double-click anywhere in the drawing area to end line creation.

c02-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:30 AM50


Drawing the Outer Loop of the SketchAfter creating the center line, you will create the outer loop of the sketch using the sketchtools. As evident from Figure 2-50, the sketch is drawn using the Circle and the Line tools.

1. Choose the Circle button from the Sketch Tools toolbar. The line cursor will bereplaced by the circle cursor.

2. Move the circle cursor to the origin and when the cursor turns yellow in color, press the leftmouse button to specify the centerpoint of the circle.

3. Move the cursor horizontally toward the right and press the left mouse button when theradius of circle above the circle cursor shows a value of 50.

4. Choose the Zoom to Fit button from the View toolbar to increase the display of thesketch.


6. Move the cursor to a location where the value of the coordinates is -60mm 10mm 0mm.Specify the startpoint of the line at this location.

7. Move the cursor horizontally toward the right and press the left mouse button to specify theendpoint of the line when the line cursor snaps the circle. Right-click to invoke the shortcutmenu and choose Select to invoke the select cursor.

8. Press the CTRL key from the keyboard and using the left mouse button, select the horizontalline created in the last step and the horizontal center line. Both the selected entities will bedisplayed in green color.

9. Choose the Sketch Mirror button from the Sketch Tools toolbar. The mirror imageof the left horizontal line will be created on the other side of the center line.


11. Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the upper horizontal line. Specify the startpoint ofthe line when the cursor turns yellow in color.

12. Move the cursor vertically downwards. Specify the endpoint of the line when the cursorsnaps the endpoint of the lower horizontal line.

13. Double-click anywhere in the drawing area to end line creation.

14. Choose the Sketch Trim button from the Sketch Tools toolbar. The line cursor willbe replaced by the trim cursor. Trim the unwanted portion of the circle.

The sketch of the outer loop after trimming the unwanted portion of the sketch is shown inthe Figure 2-51.

c02-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:30 AM51


Offsetting the EntitiesAfter creating the outer loop of the sketch, you will create the inner cavity. The first step increating the inner cavity of the sketch will be offsetting the entire sketch inwards.

1. Choose the Sketch Offset button from the Sketch Tools toolbar; the trim cursor willbe replaced by the select cursor. The Offset Entities PropertyManager is displayedon the left of the drawing area.

2. Set the value of the Offset Distance spinner to 4. Select any one of the entity of the sketchof the outer loop.

When you select the sketch, the preview of the offset sketch is displayed in the drawing area.But the direction of the offset is outside the sketch. The required direction of offset is insidethe sketch. Therefore, you need to flip the direction.

3. Move the cursor inside the sketch and press the left mouse button to create the offset sketchwith reverse direction. A dimension with a value of 4 is displayed with the sketch.

The sketch after offsetting the outer loop is shown in Figure 2-52.

4. Choose the Sketch Extend button from the Sketch Tools toolbar.

If the Sketch Extend button is not available in the Sketch Tools toolbar, then you caninvoke the extend option from Tools > Sketch Tools > Extend. As discussed earlier, youcan insert the Sketch Extend button in the Sketch Tools toolbar using the Customizedialog box.

The select cursor will be replaced by the extend cursor.

Figure 2-51 Sketch of the outer loop

c02-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:30 AM52


5. Move the cursor close to the left end of the lower horizontal line of the inner sketch. You canpreview the extended line in magenta color. (The preview of the extended entity will bedisplayed in magenta if you are working on Windows XP platform. If you are working onWindows 2000 then the preview will be displayed in yellow.) Move the cursor a little bittoward the left if the preview of the extended line appears to the right. Use the left mousebutton to extend the line.

6. Similarly, extend the upper horizontal line of the inner sketch. The sketch after extendingthe lines is shown in Figure 2-53.

Figure 2-53 Sketch after extending the lines

Figure 2-52 Sketch after offsetting the outer loop

c02-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:30 AM53


7. Choose the Sketch Trim button from the Sketch Tools toolbar and the extendcursor will be replaced by the trim cursor.

8. Using the left mouse button trim the unwanted entities. Refer to Figure 2-54.

The final sketch is shown in Figure 2-54.


box.


Tip. Setting the snap and grid parameters for each document is a very tedious andtime-consuming process. To overcome this problem you can create a template inwhich all the snap, grid, and units are set. Whenever you have to create a partdocument you just have to choose that template from the Template tab of the NewSolidWorks Document dialog box. To create and save a template, create a newdocument in the Part mode and set the parameters of units, snap, and grid from theDocument Properties dialog box. Choose the Save button from the Standardtoolbar or choose File > Save from the menu bar. The Save As dialog box will bedisplayed. Browse X:/Program Files/SolidWorks/data/Templates location to savethe file. X: is the drive in which you have installed SolidWorks. Select the PartTemplates (*.prtdot) option from the Save as type drop-down list. Enter the nameof the template file in the File name text area. Choose the Save button from theSave As dialog box. Next time when you create a new part document, select thistemplate from the Template tab of the New SolidWorks Document dialog box.Using the same procedure, you can also create the user-defined templates for drawingand assembly documents. You will learn more about drawing and assembly documentsin later chapters.

c02-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:30 AM54


2. Enter the name of the document as c02-tut03.sldprt in the File name edit box and choose theSave button. Close the file by choosing File > Close from the menu bar.


1. The Trim option is also used to extend the sketched entities. (T/F)

2. In the sketching environment you can apply fillets to two parallel lines. (T/F)

3. You can apply a fillet to two nonparallel and nonintersecting entities. (T/F)

4. You cannot offset a single entity; you have to select a chain of entities to create an entityusing the offset tool. (T/F)

5. Choose Insert > Customize from the menu bar to display the Customize dialog box. (T/F)

6. The design intent is not captured in the sketch created using the mirror line. (T/F)

7. The __________ tool is used to create a linear pattern in the sketcher environment ofSolidWorks.

8. The __________ tool is used to create a circular pattern in the sketcher environment ofSolidWorks.

9. To modify a sketched circle, select it using the __________ tool to display the __________PropertyManager.

10. The __________ origin is displayed when you invoke the Modify Sketch dialog box.


1. You cannot extend the sketched entity using the trim tool. (T/F)

2. The preview of the entity to be extended is displayed in red color. (T/F)

3. You cannot apply a sketch fillet to two nonintersecting entities. (T/F)

4. The sketched entities can be mirrored without using a centerline (T/F)

5. The Fixed check box in the Linear Sketch Step and Repeat dialog box is selected tospecify the dimension between the first two instances along a specified direction after youcreate the pattern. (T/F)

c02-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:30 AM55


6. Which PropertyManager is displayed when you choose the Sketch Fillet button from theSketch Tools toolbar?

(a) Sketch Fillet (b) Fillet(c) Surface Fillet (d) Sketching Fillet

7. When you choose Tools > Sketch Tools > Chamfer from the menu bar to invoke thechamfer tools, which PropertyManager is displayed on the left of the drawing area.

(a) Sketch Chamfer (b) Sketcher Chamfer(c) Sketching Chamfer (d) Chamfer

8. Which dialog box is used for editing the entire sketch?

(a) Edit Sketch (b) Modify Entity(c) Modify Sketch (d) None

9. Which tool is used to break a sketched entity in two or more than two entities?

(a) Split Curve (b) Trim Sketch(c) Break Curve (d) Trim Curve

10. Along which origin the sketch is rotated using the Modify Sketch dialog box.

(a) Sketch origin (b) Document origin(c) Moveable origin (d) None

EXERCISES

Exercise 1Create the sketch of the model shown in Figure 2-55. The sketch is shown in Figure 2-56. Thesolid model and dimensions are given only for reference. Create the sketch on one side andthen mirror it on the other side. Make sure you do not use the mirror line option to draw thissketch. This is because if you draw the sketch using the mirror line, some relations are applied tothe sketch. These relations interfere while creating fillets. (Expected time: 30 min)

c02-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:30 AM56




Exercise 2Create the sketch of the model shown in Figure 2-57. The sketch is shown in Figure 2-58. Thesolid model and dimensions are given only for reference. Create the sketch using the sketchingtools and then edit the sketch using the circular pattern tool and the trim tool.


c02-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:30 AM57



Exercise 3Create the sketch of the model shown in Figure 2-59. The sketch is shown in Figure 2-60. Thismodel is created using a revolved feature; therefore, you will create the sketch on one side of thecenterline. The solid model and dimensions are given only for reference.



c02-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:30 AM58




Exercise 4Create the sketch of the model shown in Figure 2-61. The sketch is shown in Figure 2-62. Thismodel is created using a revolved feature; therefore, you will create the sketch on one side of thecenterline. The solid model and dimensions are given only for reference.


c02-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:30 AM59




Answers to Self-Evaluation Test1. T, 2. F, 3. T, 4. F, 5. F, 6. F, 7. Linear Sketch Step and Repeat, 8. Circular Sketch Step andRepeat, 9. Select, Circle, 10. Moveable

c02-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:30 AM60

Chapter 3

Adding Relations andDimensions to the

Sketches

After completing this chapter you will be able to:• Add geometric relations to the sketch.• Dimension the sketches.• Modify the dimensions of the sketch.• Understand the concept of fully defined sketch.• View and examine the relations applied to the sketches.• Open an existing file.

Learning Objectives

c03-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:44 AM1


ADDING GEOMETRIC RELATIONS TO THE SKETCHAs discussed earlier, the geometric relations are the logical operations that are performed to adda relationship (such as tangent or perpendicular) between the sketched entities, planes, axes,edges, or vertices. The relations applied to the sketched entities are used to capture the designintent. The geometric relations constrain the degree of freedom of the sketched entities. Thereare two methods to apply the relations to the sketch. These two methods are

1. Add Relations PropertyManager2. Automatic Relations

Adding Relations Using the Add Relations PropertyManager

The Add Relations PropertyManager is widely used to apply relation to the sketch inthe sketcher environment of SolidWorks. The Add Relations PropertyManager is invokedusing the Add Relation button from the Sketch Relations toolbar. The Add Relations

PropertyManager is displayed on the left of the drawing area as soon as you choose the AddRelation button. You can also invoke the Add Relations PropertyManager by right-clicking inthe drawing area and choosing the Add Relation option from the shortcut menu. The AddRelations PropertyManager is invoked as shown in Figure 3-1. The confirmation corner is alsodisplayed at the top right corner of the drawing area. The various options available in the AddRelations PropertyManager are discussed next.

Figure 3-1 The Add Relations PropertyManager

Toolbar: Sketch Relations > Add RelationMenu: Tools > Relations > Add

c03-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:44 AM2

Adding Relations and Dimensions to the Sketches 3-3

Selected EntitiesThe Selected Entities rollout displays the name of the entities that are selected to apply therelations. The entities are added in the area under the Selected Entities rollout by selectingthem from the graphics area. The selected entities are displayed in green color. You can removethe selected entity from the selection set by selecting the same entity from the drawing area usingthe left mouse button. You will notice that the color of the entity is changed from green to blue.

Existing RelationsThe Existing Relations rollout displays the relations that are already applied to the selectedsketch entities. It also shows the status of the sketch entities. You can delete the already existingrelation from the Existing Relations rollout. Select the already existing relation from the selectionarea and right-click to display the shortcut menu. Choose the Delete option from this shortcutmenu to delete the selected relation. If you choose the Delete All option from the shortcutmenu, all the relations displayed in the selection area of the Existing Relations rollout will bedeleted. The status of the sketch entity is displayed below the selection area. You will learn moreabout the status of the selected sketch entity and the status of the entire sketch later in thischapter.

Add RelationsThe Add Relations rollout is used to apply the relations to the selected entity. The list ofrelations that can be applied to the selected entity or entities is shown in the Add Relationsrollout. Note that only the relations that can be applied to the selected entity or entities aredisplayed in the list. The most appropriate relation for the selected entities appears in boldletters.

You will learn more about projected sketch curves and planes in the later chapters.

The relations that can be applied to the sketches using the Add Relations rollout are discussed next.

HorizontalThe Horizontal relation forces the selected line or lines to become horizontal.A line can be a line, or center line in the sketch, or an external entity such asan edge, plane, axis, or sketch curve on an external sketch that projects as a

line in the sketch. Using the Horizontal relation you can also force two or more points tobecome horizontal. A point can be a sketch, a centerpoint, an endpoint, a control point of

Tip. You can also remove the selected entity from the selection set by choosing thatentity in the Selected Entities rollout and use the right mouse button to invoke theshortcut menu. Choose the Delete option from this menu to remove the entity fromthe selection set. If you choose the Clear Selections option from the shortcut menuthen all the entities will be removed from the selection set.

Tip. You can apply a relation to a single entity or a relation between two or morethan two entities. For applying a relation between two or more than two entities atleast one entity should be a sketched entity. The other entity or entities can be sketchentities, edges, faces, vertices, origins, plane, or axes. The sketch curves from othersketches that form lines or arcs when projected on the sketch plane can also beincluded in the relation.

c03-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:44 AM3


a spline, or an external entity such as origin, vertex, axis, or point in an external sketch thatprojects as a point. To use this relation, choose the Add Relation button from the SketchRelations toolbar to display the Add Relations PropertyManager. Select the entity orentities to apply the Horizontal relation. Choose the Horizontal button from the AddRelations rollout provided in the Add Relations PropertyManager. You will notice thatthe name of the horizontal relation is displayed in the Existing Relations rollout.

VerticalThe Vertical relation forces the selected line or lines to become vertical. Usingthe Vertical relation you can also force two or more points to become vertical. Touse this relation, choose the Add Relation button from the Sketch Relations

toolbar to display the Add Relations PropertyManager. Select the entity or entities toapply the Vertical relation. Choose the Vertical button from the Add Relations rolloutprovided in the Add Relations PropertyManager. You will notice that the name of thevertical relation is displayed in the Existing Relations rollout.

CollinearThe Collinear relation forces the selected lines to lie on the same infinite line.To use this relation invoke the Add Relations PropertyManager. Select theline to apply the Collinear relation. Choose the Collinear button from the

Add Relations rollout.

CoradialThe Coradial relation forces the selected arcs to share the same radius and thesame centerpoint. An arc can be an arc or a circle in a sketch, or an externalentity that projects as an arc or a circle in the sketch. To use this relation,

invoke the Add Relations PropertyManager. Select two arcs or circles, or an arc and acircle to apply the Coradial relation. Choose the Coradial button from the Add Relations rollout.

PerpendicularThe Perpendicular relation forces the selected lines to becomeperpendicular to each other. To use this relation, invoke the Add RelationsPropertyManager. Select two lines to apply the Perpendicular relation.

Choose the Perpendicular button from the Add Relations rollout. Figure 3-2 shows twolines before and after applying the perpendicular relation.

ParallelThe Parallel relation forces the selected lines to become parallel to each other.To use this relation, invoke the Add Relations PropertyManager. Select twolines to apply the Parallel relation. Choose the Parallel button from the Add

Relations rollout to apply the parallel relation. Figure 3-3 shows two lines before and afterapplying this relation.

ParallelYZThe ParallelYZ relation forces a line in the 3D sketch to become parallel tothe YZ plane with respect to the selected plane. To use this relation, invokethe Add Relations PropertyManager. Select the line in the 3D sketch and

c03-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:44 AM4


a plane and choose the ParallelYZ button from the Add Relations rollout.

ParallelZXThe ParallelZX relation forces a line in the 3D sketch to become parallel tothe ZX plane with respect to the selected plane. To use this relation, invokethe Add Relations PropertyManager. Select the line in the 3D sketch and

a plane and choose the ParallelZX button from the Add Relations rollout.

AlongZThe AlongZ relation forces a line in the 3D sketch to become normal to theselected plane. To use this relation, invoke the Add Relations PropertyManager.Select the line in the 3D sketch and a plane and choose the AlongZ button from

the Add Relations rollout.

TangentThe Tangent relation forces the selected arc, circle, spline, or ellipse to becometangent to other arc, circle, spline, ellipse, line, or edge. To use this relation,invoke the Add Relations PropertyManager. Select two entities to apply the

Tangent relation. Choose the Tangent button from the Add Relations rollout. Figures 3-4and 3-5 show the entities before and after applying this relation.

ConcentricThe Concentric relation forces the selected arc or circle to share the samecenterpoint with other arc, circle, point, vertex, or a circular edge. To usethis relation, invoke the Add Relations PropertyManager. Select the required

entity to apply the Concentric relation. Choose the Concentric button from the Add Relationsrollout.

MidpointThe Midpoint relation forces the selected point to move at the midpoint of theselected line. To use this relation, invoke the Add Relations PropertyManager.

Figure 3-3 Entities before and after applying theParallel relation

Figure 3-2 Entities before and after applying thePerpendicular relation

c03-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:44 AM5


Select the required entity to apply the Midpoint relation. Choose the Midpoint button fromthe Add Relations rollout.

IntersectionThe Intersection relation forces the selected point to move at theintersection of the two selected lines. To use this relation, invoke the AddRelations PropertyManager. Select the required entity to apply the

Intersection relation. Choose the Intersection button from the Add Relations rollout.

CoincidentThe Coincident relation forces the selected point to be coincident with theselected line, arc, circle, or ellipse. To use this relation, invoke the AddRelations PropertyManager. Select the required entity to apply the

Coincident relation. Choose the Coincident button from the Add Relations rollout.

EqualThe Equal relation forces the selected lines to have equal length and selectedarcs, circles, or an arc and a circle to have equal radii. To use this relation, invokethe Add Relations PropertyManager. Select the required entity to apply the

Equal relation. Choose the Equal button from the Add Relations rollout.

SymmetricThe Symmetric relation forces two selected lines, arcs, points, and ellipsesto remain equidistant from a center line. This relation also force the arcs tohave the same radii. To use this relation, invoke the Add Relations

PropertyManager. Select the required entity to apply the Symmetric relation and select acenterline. Choose the Symmetric button from the Add Relations rollout.

FixThe Fix relation forces the selected entity to fix at the specified position. If youapply this relation to a line or an arc, its location is fixed but you can change its sizeby dragging the endpoints. To use this relation, invoke the Add Relations

Figure 3-5 Entities before and after applying theTangent relation

Figure 3-4 Entities before and after applying theTangent relation

c03-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:44 AM6


PropertyManager. Select the required entity to apply the Fix relation. Choose the Fixbutton from the Add Relations rollout.

PierceThe Pierce relation forces a sketch point to be coincident where an axis, line,arc, edge, or spline pierce the sketch plane. To use this relation, invoke the AddRelations PropertyManager. Select the required entities to apply the Pierce

relation. Choose the Pierce button from the Add Relations rollout.

Merge PointsThe Merge Points relation forces two sketch points or endpoints to merge in asingle point. To use this relation, invoke the Add Relations PropertyManager.Select the required entities to apply the Merge Points relation. Choose the Merge

Points button from the Add Relations rollout.

Automatic RelationsThe automatic relations are applied automatically to the sketch while drawing. You can activatethe automatic relations option if it is not available. Invoke the System Options - Sketch dialogbox by choosing Tools > Options > System Options > Sketch. The System Options - Sketchdialog box is displayed. Select the Automatic Relations check box from the System Options -Sketch dialog box and choose the OK button.

The automatic relations are applied to the entities while sketching. For example, you will noticethat when you specify the startpoint of the line and move the cursor horizontally toward theright or left, a symbol H is displayed below the line cursor. This is the symbol of the Horizontalrelation that is applied to the line while drawing. If you move the cursor vertically downwards orupwards, the V symbol for Vertical relation is displayed below the line cursor. If you move thecursor to the intersection of two or more than two sketched entities, the intersection symbolappears below the cursor. Similarly, other relations are also automatically applied to the sketchwhile creating the sketch. The relations that are applied automatically are listed below:

1. Horizontal2. Vertical3. Coincident

Tip. You can also apply the relations using the Properties PropertyManager.Using the left mouse button select the entities to add relation. When you select theentities, the Properties PropertyManager will be displayed. If you select a singleentity then the PropertyManager of that particular entity will be displayed. Thepossible relations for the selected geometry will be displayed in the Add Relationsrollout. Choose the relation that you want to apply to the selected geometry. Theexisting relation will be displayed in the Existing Relations rollout.

Another method of applying relations to the sketches is by selecting the entity orentities on which you have to apply the relation and then right-clicking to displaythe shortcut menu. The relation that can be applied to the selected entities will bedisplayed in the shortcut menu. Choose the relation from the shortcut menu.

c03-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:44 AM7


4. Midpoint5. Intersection6. Tangent7. Perpendicular

DIMENSIONING THE SKETCH

After drawing the sketches and adding the relations, dimensioning is the most importantstep in creating a design. As mentioned earlier, SolidWorks is a parametric software.The parametric nature of SolidWorks ensures that irrespective of the original size, the

selected entity is driven by the dimension value that you specify. Therefore, when you apply andmodify a dimension on an entity, it is forced to change its size in accordance with the specifieddimension value. The type of dimension that will be applied depends on the type of entityselected. For example, if you select a line, linear dimension will be applied and if you select acircle, diametric dimension is applied. Similarly, if you select an arc, a radial dimension isapplied. While dimensioning, you can set the priority to edit the dimension value as soon as youplace it. To set this priority, choose Tools > Options to display the System Options - Generaldialog box. Select the Input dimension value check box and choose OK.

Now, when you select an entity to apply the dimension, the Modify dialog box will be displayed,as shown in Figure 3-6, as soon as you place the dimension. You can enter a new value in this boxto modify the dimension.

You can modify the default dimension value using the spinner arrows or by entering a new valuein the text box available in the Modify dialog box. The buttons available in the Modify dialogbox are discussed next.

The Save the current value and exit the dialog button is used to accept the current value andexit the dialog box. The Restore the original value and exit the dialog button is used to restore

Tip. You will observe that while sketching, two types of inferencing lines are displayed.One is displayed in blue and the second in brown. The brown inferencing lineindicates that relation is applied automatically to the sketch. The blue inferencingline indicates that no automatic relation is applied.

Toolbar: Sketch > DimensionMenu: Tools > Dimension

Figure 3-6 Modify box

c03-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:44 AM8


the last dimensional value applied to the sketch and exit the dialog box. The Regenerate themodel with the current value button is used to preview the geometry of the sketch with the newmodified dimensional value. The Reset spin increment value button is used to enter a newspin increment value. This is the value that is added or subtracted from the current value whenyou click once on the spinner arrow. When you choose this button the Increment dialog box isdisplayed as shown in Figure 3-7.

Insert a new value in the text box provided in the Increment dialog box and press ENTER. Ifyou select the Make Default check box, the new increment value will become the default spinincrement value. By default, 10 mm is the default increment value while working with metricunits. Next time when you modify the dimension using the spin increment arrows, the dimensionwill increase or decrease with the increment value that you saved as the default value.

Linear DimensioningLinear dimensions are defined as the dimensions that define the shortest distance between twopoints. You can apply the linear dimension directly to a line, two points, or two objects. Thepoints can be the endpoints of lines or arcs, or the centerpoints of circles, arcs, ellipses, orparabolas. You can dimension a vertical or a horizontal line by directly selecting them. Choosethe Dimension button from the Sketch toolbar or right-click in the drawing area. Choose theDimension option from the shortcut menu to activate the Dimension tool. When you move thecursor on the line, it is highlighted and turns red in color. As soon as you select the line, it turnsto green, and the dimension is attached to the cursor. Move the cursor and place the dimensionat an appropriate place using the left mouse button. Since you have already set the priority ofediting the dimension as it is placed, the Modify dialog box is displayed with the default valuein it. Enter the new value of dimension in the Modify dialog box and press ENTER. Figure 3-8shows linear dimensioning of horizontal and vertical lines.

Figure 3-7 Increment box

Tip. You can also enter the arithmetic symbols directly into the text box to calculatethe dimension. For example, if you have a dimension as a complex arithmetic functionsuch as (220*12.5)-3+150, which is equal to 1247, you do not need to calculatethis using the calculator. Just enter the statement in the text box provided in theModify Dimension dialog box and press ENTER. SolidWorks will automaticallysolve the function to get the value of the dimension.

c03-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:44 AM9


If the dimension is selected in the drawing area, the Dimension PropertyManager is displayedat the left of the drawing area as shown in Figure 3-9. The various options available in theDimension PropertyManager are discussed next.

Part FavoriteThe Part Favorite rollout is used to create, save, delete, and retrieve the dimension style in thecurrent document. You can also retrieve the dimensions styles saved earlier using this rollout.The Part Favorite rollout is shown in Figure 3-10. The options available in this rollout arediscussed next:

Apply the default attributes to selected dimensionsThe Apply the default attributes to selected dimensions button is used to apply the defaultattributes to the selected dimension or dimensions. The attributes include the tolerance,precision, arrow style, dimension text, and so on. This option is generally used when youhave modified the settings applied to a dimension and then you want to restore the defaultsettings on that dimension.

Add or Update a FavoriteThe Add or Update a Favorite button is used to add a dimension style to the currentdocument for a selected dimension. After invoking the Dimension PropertyManager, setthe attributes using various options provided in this PropertyManager. Now choose theAdd or Update a Favorite button. The Add or Update a Favorite dialog box is displayed inFigure 3-11. Enter the name of the dimension style in the edit box and press ENTER orchoose the OK button from this dialog box. The dimension style will be added to thecurrent document.

You can apply the new dimension style to the selected dimension by selecting the dimensionstyle from the drop-down list in the Part Favorite rollout. You can also update the dimensionstyle. To update a dimension style, select the dimension and set the options of the dimensionstyle according to your need and then choose the Add or Update a Favorite button toinvoke the Add or Update a Favorite dialog box. Select the dimension style to update fromthe drop-down list provided in the dialog box. The two radio button in this dialog box areenabled. Select the Update all the annotations linked to this favorite radio button and

Figure 3-8 Linear dimensioning of lines

c03-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:44 AM10


Figure 3-9 The Dimension PropertyManager

Figure 3-10 The Part Favorite rollout

c03-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:44 AM11


choose the OK button to update all the dimensions linked with the selected favorite. If youselect the Break all links to this favorite radio button and choose the OK button to updatethe dimension style used in the selected dimension, then the link between the otherdimensions having the same favorite and the selected favorite will be broken.

Delete a FavoriteThe Delete a Favorite button is used to delete a dimension style. Select the dimension styleor favorite from the Set a current Favorite drop-down list and choose the Delete a Favoritebutton. Note that even after you delete the dimension style, the properties of the dimensionswill be the same as with the deleted favorite. You can set the properties of a dimension to thedocument default using the Apply the default attributes to the selected dimension button.

Save a FavoriteThe Save a Favorite button is used to save a dimension style so that it can be retrieved insome other document. Select the dimension style or favorite from the Set a current Favoritedrop-down list and choose the Save a Favorite button. The Save As dialog box will bedisplayed. Browse the folder in which you want to save the favorite and enter the name ofthe favorite in the File name edit box. Choose the Save button from the Save As dialog box.The extension for the file in which the favorite is saved is .sldfvt.

Load FavoriteThe Load Favorite button is used to open a saved favorite in the current document and theproperties of that favorite will be applied to the selected dimension. To load a favorite,choose the Load favorite button to invoke the Open dialog box. Browse the folder in whichthe favorite is saved. Now, select the file with the extension .sldfvt and choose the Openbutton. The Add or Update a Favorite dialog box is displayed. Choose the OK button fromthis dialog box.

Tolerance/PrecisionThe Tolerance/Precision rollout is used to specify the tolerance and precision in the dimensions.This rollout is shown in Figure 3-12. The various options available in the Tolerance/Precisionrollout are discussed next.

Tip. You can load more than one favorite by pressing the CTRL key and selecting thefavorites from the Open dialog box. All the favorites will be displayed in the Set acurrent Favorite drop-down list.

Figure 3-11 The Add or Update a Favorite dialog box

c03-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:44 AM12


Tolerance TypeThe Tolerance Type drop-down list is used to apply the tolerance to the dimension.Various tolerance methods are available in this list. By default, the None option is selected,which means that tolerance is not applied to the dimension. The other tolerance methodsavailable in the Tolerance Type drop-down list are discussed next.

BasicThe Basic option is used to display the basic dimension. To display a basic dimension,select a dimension that you want to display as a basic dimension and then select theBasic option from the Tolerance Display drop-down list. You will notice that thedimension is enclosed in a rectangle, suggesting that it is a basic dimension. The basicdimension is shown in Figure 3-13.

BilateralThe Bilateral option is used to display the bilateral tolerance along with the dimension.This type of tolerance provides the maximum and the minimum variation in the valueof the dimension that is acceptable in the design. For applying the bilateral tolerance,select the dimension and then select the Bilateral option from the Tolerance Typedrop-down list. The Maximum Variation and the Minimum Variation edit boxes areenabled. These edit boxes are used to apply the value of the maximum and minimumvariation to a dimension. If you select the Show parentheses check box, the bilateraltolerance will be displayed with parentheses. This check box is available when youapply the bilateral tolerance. The dimension with bilateral tolerance is shown inFigure 3-14.

NoteThe dimension standard used in the drawings in this book is the ISO standard.

LimitThe Limit option is used to display the limits with the dimension. In the limit dimension,the dimension is displayed as its maximum and minimum values that are allowed in thedesign. Select the dimension to display as limit dimension and select the Limit option.The Maximum Variation and the Minimum Variation edit boxes are enabled to enterthe value of maximum and minimum variation. The dimension along with limit toleranceis shown in Figure 3-15.

Figure 3-12 The Tolerance/Precision rollout

c03-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:44 AM13


SymmetricThe Symmetric option is used to display the symmetric dimensional tolerance. Thistype of tolerance is displayed with plus and minus sign. To use this tolerance, select thedimension and select the Symmetric option. The Maximum Variation edit box will bedisplayed to enter the value of tolerance. You can select the Show parentheses checkbox to show the tolerance in parentheses. The dimension along with the symmetrictolerance is shown in Figure 3-16.

MINThe MIN option in the Tolerance Type drop-down list is used to display the minimumallowable value of the dimension. In this type of dimensional tolerance, the min. symbolis added to the dimension as a suffix. This implies that the dimensional value is theminimum value that is allowable in the design. To display this dimensional tolerance,select the dimension and select the MIN option from the Tolerance Type drop-downlist. The dimension along with the minimum tolerance is shown in Figure 3-17.

Figure 3-15 Limit tolerance Figure 3-16 Symmetric tolerance

Figure 3-14 Bilateral toleranceFigure 3-13 Basic dimension

c03-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:44 AM14


MAXThe MAX option in the Tolerance Type drop-down list is used to display the maximumallowable value of the dimension. In this type of dimensional tolerance, the max. symbolis added to the dimension as suffix. This implies that the dimensional value is themaximum value that is allowable in the design. To display this dimensional tolerance,select the dimension and select the MAX option from the Tolerance Type drop-downlist. The dimension along with the maximum tolerance is shown in Figure 3-18.

FitThe Fit option is used to apply the fit according to the Hole Fit and the Shaft Fitsystem. The Tolerance/Precision rollout with the Fit option selected isshown in Figure 3-19. Specify the type of fit from the Classification drop-down list.The Classification drop-down list is used to define User Defined fit, Clearance fit,Transitional fit, and Press fit. To apply the fit using the hole fit system or the shaft fitsystem, select the dimension and select the Fit option from the Tolerance Type drop-down

Figure 3-17 Minimum tolerance Figure 3-18 Maximum tolerance

Figure 3-19 The Tolerance/Precision rollout with the Fit option selected from theTolerance Type drop-down list.

c03-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:44 AM15


list. The Classification drop-down list, the Hole Fit drop-down list, and the Shaft Fitedit drop-down list are displayed below the Tolerance Type drop-down list. Choose thetype of fit from the Classification drop-down list and select the standard of fit from theHole Fit drop-down list or the Shaft Fit drop-down list. If you choose the Clearance,Transitional, or Press option from the Classification drop-down list and you choosethe standard of fit from the Hole Fit drop-down then only the standards that matchwith the selected hole fit will be displayed in the Shaft Fit drop-down list and vice-versa.If you choose the User Defined option from the Classification drop-down list then youcan choose any standard from the Hole Fit and the Shaft Fit drop-down lists.

The Stacked with line display button provided under the Shaft Fit drop-down list isselected by default. You will notice that the tolerance is displayed as stacked with a line.You can also display the tolerance as stacked without a line using the Stacked withoutline display button. If you choose the Linear display button, the tolerance will bedisplayed in linear form. The dimension along with the hole fit and the shaft fit isshown in Figure 3-20.

Fit with toleranceThe Fit with tolerance option in the Tolerance Type drop-down list is used to displaythe tolerance along with the hole fit and shaft fit in a dimension. To apply the fit withthe tolerance, select the dimension and select the Fit with tolerance option from theTolerance Type drop-down list. Choose the type of fit from the Classification drop-downlist. Now, select the fit standard from the Hole Fit drop-down list or the Shaft Fitdrop-down list. The tolerance will be displayed with the fit standard only if you selectonly one fit system either from the hole drop-down list or from the shaft drop-down list.The tolerance will be displayed along with the fit standard in the drawing area. In thisrelease of SolidWorks the tolerance is calculated automatically depending upon thetype of fit selected and the standard of fit selected. The show parentheses check box isavailable, and you can select this check box if you want to show the parentheses. Thedimension along with fit and tolerance is shown in Figure 3-21.

NoteThe diametrical dimension will be discussed later in this chapter.

Figure 3-21 Fit with toleranceFigure 3-20 Hole fit and shaft fit

c03-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:44 AM16


Primary Unit PrecisionThe Primary Unit Precision drop-down list is used to specify the precision of the numberof places after the decimal for dimensions. By default, the selected precision is two placesafter the decimal.

Tolerance PrecisionThe Tolerance Precision drop-down list is used to specify the precision of the number ofplaces after the decimal for tolerance. By default, the selected precision is two places afterthe decimal.

ArrowsThe Arrows rollout is used to specify the arrow style in the dimensions. The Arrows rollout isshown in Figure 3-22. Various options available in this rollout are discussed next.

OutsideThe Outside button available in the Arrows rollout is used to display the arrows outside thedimension line. Select a dimension from the drawing area and choose the Outside buttonfrom the Arrows rollout.

InsideThe Inside button available in the Arrows rollout is used to display the arrows inside thedimension line. Select a dimension from the drawing area and choose the Inside buttonfrom the Arrows rollout.

SmartThe Smart button available in the Arrows rollout is used to display the dimension inside oroutside the dimension line, depending on the surrounding geometry. The Smart button isselected by default in the Arrows rollout.

StyleThe Style drop-down list is used to select the arrowhead style. The unfilled triangular arrowis select by default. You can select any arrow style for a particular dimension or dimensionstyle. To change the arrow style, select the dimension from the drawing area and choose thearrow style from the Style drop-down list.

Dimension TextThe Dimension Text rollout is used to add the text and symbols in the dimension. The DimensionText rollout is displayed in Figure 3-23. Three text boxes are provided in this rollout. These

Figure 3-22 The Arrows rollout

c03-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:44 AM17


three text boxes are the three lines in which the text or symbolscan be added. The first text box in this rollout is used to enter thetext or symbols in the first line, which is above the dimensionvalue. The second text box is used to enter the text or symbols inthe second line, in which the dimension is also displayed in thesecond line. The third text box is used to enter the text or symbolsin the third line, which is below the dimension value.

In this rollout various buttons are provided to add the symbolssuch as Diameter, Degree, Plus/Minus, Centerline, and so on tothe dimension text. You can invoke the Symbols dialog box to addmore symbols by choosing the More Symbols button from theDimension Text rollout. The Symbols dialog box is displayed inFigure 3-24.

The More Properties button is used to invoke the Dimension Properties dialog box to modifythe properties of the dimension. All the options available in the Dimension PropertyManagerare available in the Dimension Properties dialog box with some additional options. You canmodify the dimension properties from the Dimension PropertyManager or from theDimension Properties dialog box.

Linear Dimensioning Between PointsYou can add a linear dimension between two points; one point can be a sketch point, an endpoint,or a centerpoint and the second point can be a sketch point, an endpoint, a centerpoint, anorigin, or a vertex. For creating the linear dimension between two points, choose the Dimensionbutton from the Sketch toolbar. Select the first point, and then select the second point. Movethe cursor to the right or left of the sketched entities to get the vertical dimension or move thecursor to the top or bottom of the sketched entities to get the horizontal dimension. Specify apoint to place the dimension. The Modify dialog box will be displayed. Enter a new dimensionvalue in this dialog box and press ENTER. Figures 3-25 and 3-26 show the horizontal andvertical linear dimensioning between points.

Figure 3-24 The Symbols dialog box

Figure 3-23 Dimension Textrollout

c03-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:44 AM18


Linear Dimensioning of a CircleYou can also dimension a circle using the linear dimensioning method. Sketch the circle andchoose the Dimension button from the Sketch toolbar. Using the left mouse button, select thecircle. The dimension will be attached to the cursor. If you want to create the verticaldimension, move the cursor to the right or left of the sketch. If you want to create the horizontaldimension, move the cursor to the top or bottom of the sketch. Using the left mouse button,place the dimension and enter a new value in the Modify dialog box. The linear dimensioningof the circle is shown in Figure 3-27.

Aligned DimensioningAligned dimensions are used to dimension lines that are at an angle with respect to the X axisand the Y axis. This type of dimensioning measures the actual distance of the inclined lines.You can directly select the inclined line to apply this dimension or select two points. The pointsthat can be used to apply aligned dimension include the endpoints of line, arc, parabolic arc, orspline and the centerpoints of arcs, circles, ellipse, or parabolic arc. To apply an aligneddimension to an inclined line, choose the Dimension button from the Sketch toolbar and selectthe line. Move the cursor at an angle such that the dimension line is parallel to the inclinedline. Using the left mouse button place the dimension at an appropriate place and enter a newvalue in the Modify dialog box.

To apply an aligned dimension between two points, choose the Dimension button and select thefirst point to which you have to apply the dimension. Now select the second point to apply thedimension. The dimension will be attached to the cursor. Move the cursor such that the dimensionline is parallel to the imaginary line that joins two points. Now, using the left mouse buttonplace the dimension at an appropriate location and enter a new value in the Modify edit boxand press ENTER. Figure 3-28 shows the aligned dimensioning of a line and an aligned dimensionbetween two points.

Angular DimensioningAngular dimensions are used to dimension angles. You can select two line segments to apply theangular dimensions or use three points to apply the angular dimensions. You can also use angulardimensioning to dimension an arc. All these options of angular dimensioning are discussed next:

Figure 3-26 Linear dimensioning of linesFigure 3-25 Linear dimensioning between points

c03-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:44 AM19


Angular Dimensioning Using Two Line SegmentsYou can select two line segments to apply angular dimensions. Choose the Dimension buttonfrom the Sketch toolbar and select the first line segment using the left mouse button. A dimensionis attached to the cursor. Now, select the second line segment. An angular dimension will beattached to the cursor. Place the angular dimension and enter the new value of angular dimensionin the Modify edit box. You have to be very careful while placing the angular dimension. This isbecause depending upon the location of the dimension placement, the interior angle, exteriorangle, major angle, or minor angles are displayed. Figures 3-29 through 3-32 illustrate variousangular dimensions depending upon the dimension placement point.

Angular Dimensioning Using Three PointsYou can also apply angular dimensions using three points. Choose the Dimension button fromthe Sketch toolbar. Select the first point using the left mouse button. This is the angle vertexpoint. Select the second point. A linear dimension is attached to the cursor. Next, select thethird point; an angular dimension is attached to the cursor. Place the angular dimension andenter a new value of angular dimension in the Modify edit box. The points that can be used toapply the angular dimensions include the endpoints of lines or arcs, centerpoint of circles, and

Figure 3-29 Angular dimension displayedaccording to the dimension placement point


Figure 3-27 Linear dimensioning of circle Figure 3-28 Aligned dimensioning

c03-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:44 AM20


endpoints of ellipse, parabola, and so on. Figure 3-33 shows the angular dimensioning usingthree points.

Angular Dimensioning of an ArcYou can use angular dimensions to dimension an arc. In case of arcs, the three points thatshould be used are the endpoints of the arc and the centerpoint of the arc.Figure 3-34 shows the angular dimensioning of an arc.

Diameter DimensioningDiameter dimensions are applied to dimension a circle or an arc in terms of its diameter. Forcreating a diameter dimension, choose the Dimension button from the Sketch toolbar andselect the entity to add the diametrical dimension. Now, using the left mouse button, place thedimension. In SolidWorks, when you select a circle to dimension by default, the diameterdimension is applied to it. However, when you select an arc, the radius dimension is displayedto an arc. To apply the diameter dimension to an arc, select the arc and place the radiusdimension. Next right-click to display the shortcut menu and choose the Properties optionfrom the shortcut menu. The Dimension Properties dialog box is displayed. Select the Diameter





c03-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:44 AM21


dimension check box and choose OK. Figure 3-35 shows a circle and an arc with the diameterdimension.

Radius DimensioningRadius dimensions are applied to dimension a circle or an arc in terms of its radius. As mentionedearlier, by default the dimension applied to a circle is in the diameter form and the dimensionapplied to an arc is a radius dimension. To apply radius dimension, choose the Dimensionbutton from the Sketch toolbar and select the arc. A radius dimension will be attached to thecursor. Using the left mouse button place the dimension at an appropriate place. To convertthe radius dimension to the diameter dimension you need to select the Diameter dimensioncheck box from the Dimension Properties dialog box. Figure 3-36 illustrates the radialdimensioning of a circle and an arc.

Linear Diameter DimensioningLinear dimensioning is used to dimension the sketch of a revolved component. An example ofa revolved component is shown in Figure 3-37. The sketch for a revolved component is drawnusing simple sketcher entities as shown in Figure 3-38. If you dimension the sketch of the basefeature of the given model using the linear dimensioning method then the same dimensions willbe generated in drawing views. This may be confusing because in the shop floor drawing, youneed diameter dimension of a revolved model. To overcome this problem, it is recommendedthat you create a linear diameter dimension as shown in Figure 3-38. For creating the lineardiameter dimension, choose the Dimension button from the Sketch toolbar. Select the entity tobe dimensioned and then select the center line around which the sketch will be revolved. Movethe cursor to the other side of the centerline. A linear diameter dimension is displayed. Usingthe left mouse button place the dimension and enter a new value in the Modify dialog box.

Additional Dimensioning OptionsIn SolidWorks, you are also provided with some other dimensioning options other than thosediscussed earlier. The main additional dimensioning option is discussed next.

Figure 3-36 Radial dimensioning of a circle andan arc

Figure 3-35 Diametrical dimensioning of a circleand an arc

c03-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:44 AM22


Dimensions Between Arcs or CirclesBy default, the dimension between two arcs, two circles, or between an arc and a circle is placedfrom centerpoint to centerpoint. For dimensioning two circles, choose the Dimension buttonfrom the Sketch toolbar and using the left mouse button select the first circle. A diameterdimension is attached to the cursor. Now, select the second circle. A linear dimension betweenthe centerpoints of two circles is attached to the cursor; place the dimension using the left mousebutton. Enter a new value of dimension in the Modify edit box and press ENTER. Figure 3-39shows the dimensioning of two circles using this method.

Now, right-click to display the shortcut menu. Choose the Properties option from the shortcutmenu to display the Dimension Properties dialog box. You will notice that in the Dimension

Figure 3-37 A revolved componentFigure 3-38 Sketch for the revolved feature andlinear diameter dimension

Figure 3-39 Dimension with first arc condition asCenter and second arc condition as Center

Tip. You can also choose Tools > Dimension > Parallel / Horizontal / Verticalto add the dimensions to the sketch instead of using the Dimension button from theSketch toolbar. But it is recommended that you use the Dimension button becauseusing this button you can create any type of dimension whether it is a parallel,horizontal, vertical, diametrical, or radial dimension. In this book you will beusing the Dimension button to dimension the sketches.

c03-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:44 AM23


Properties dialog box, the Center radio buttons are selected in the First arc condition : andSecond arc condition : areas. Therefore, the dimension displayed using this combination is thedimension between the centerpoint between two circles or arcs. If you choose the Min radiobutton from the First arc condition : area and the same from the Second arc condition : area,the resultant dimensioning will be displayed as the minimum distance between two circles orarcs as shown in Figure 3-40. If you select the first arc condition Max and also the second arccondition as Max, the dimensional value will be displayed as the maximum distance betweentwo circles as shown in Figure 3-41. Similarly, you can adjust the first end condition and thesecond end condition accordingly.

CONCEPT OF FULLY DEFINED SKETCHIt is very necessary for you to understand the concept of fully defined sketches. While creating amodel, first you have to draw the sketch for the base feature and then proceed further forcreating other features. This is the reason sketching is the basic concept of modeling. Aftercreating the sketches, you have to add the required relations and dimensions to constrain thesketch with respect to the surrounding environment. After creating the sketch and adding therequired relations and dimensions, the sketch may exist in one of the six states. The six states ofthe sketch are discussed below:

1. Fully Defined2. Over Defined3. Under Defined4. Dangling5. No Solution Found6. Invalid Solution Found

Fully DefinedA fully defined sketch is a sketch in which all the entities of the sketch and their positions arefully defined by the relations or dimensions, or both. In the fully defined sketch, all the degreesof freedom of a sketch are constrained using relations and dimensions and the sketched entitiescannot move or change their size and location unexpectedly. If the sketch is not fully defined, it

Figure 3-40 Dimension with first and secondarc condition as Min

Figure 3-41 Dimension with first and secondarc condition as Max

c03-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:44 AM24


can change its size or position at any time during the design because all the degree of freedomare not constrained. A fully defined sketch is displayed in black.

Over DefinedAn over defined sketch is a sketch in which some of the dimensions, relations, or both areconflicting or the dimension or relations in the sketch have exceeded the required number. Theover defined sketch is displayed in red. The over defined sketch geometry is constrained by toomany dimensions and/or relations. Therefore, you need to delete the extra and conflictingrelations or dimensions. It is recommended that you do not proceed further for creating thefeature with an over defined sketch. The over defined sketch is solved to fully defined or underdefined sketch by deleting the conflicting relations or dimensions. Deleting the over definingrelations or dimension is discussed later in this chapter.

Under DefinedAn under defined sketch is a sketch in which some of the dimensions or relations are notdefined and the degree of freedom of the sketch is not fully constrained. In the under definedsketch, the dimensions and relations are not defined adequately and entities may move orchange size unexpectedly. The sketched entities of the under defined sketch are displayed inblue. This is the reason the sketch is displayed in blue while drawing. This means the sketch isunder defined and it needs some relations and dimensions to constrain its degree of freedom.When you add the relations and dimensions, the sketch changes to black color, suggesting thatthe sketch is fully defined. If the entire sketch is in black and only some of the entities are shownin blue, this means that the entities in blue require some dimension or relation.

NoteFrom this chapter onwards, you will work with fully defined sketches. Therefore, follow the aboveprocedure to use the fully defined sketches in future.

DanglingIn the dangling sketch, the dimensions or relations lose their reference because of the deletionof an entity from which it was referenced. These entities are displayed dashed in brown color.You need to delete the dangling entities, dimensions, or relations that conflict.

No Solution FoundIn the no solution found state, the sketch is not solved with the current constraints. Therefore,you need to delete the conflicting dimensions or relations and add other dimensions or relations.

Tip. In SolidWorks, it is not necessary that you fully dimension or define thesketches before you use them to create the features of the model. However, it isrecommended that you fully define the sketches before you proceed further for creatingthe feature.

If you want to always use fully defined sketches before proceeding further, you canset the option by choosing Tools > Options from the menu bar to display theSystem Option - General dialog box. Choose the Sketch option from the SystemOptions tab. Select the Use fully defined sketches check box and choose OK fromthis dialog box.

c03-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:44 AM25


The sketched entity, dimension, or relation will be displayed in pink.

Invalid Solution FoundIn the invalid solution found state, the sketch is solved but the sketch will result in invalidgeometry such as a zero length line, zero radius arc, or self-intersecting spline. The sketchentities for this state are displayed in yellow.

Sketch Dimension or Relation StatusIn SolidWorks when you are applying the dimensions and relations to the sketches, sometimesyou apply the dimensions or relations that are not compatible with the geometry of the sketchedentities or that make the dimensioned entity over defined. The sketch dimensions or relationsmay have any of the following states:1. Dangling2. Satisfied3. Over Defining4. Not Solved5. Driven

DanglingA dangling dimension or relation is the one that cannot be resolved because the entity to whichit was referenced is deleted. The dangling dimension appears in brown color.

SatisfiedA satisfied dimension is the one that is completely defined and is displayed in black.

Over DefiningAn over defining dimension or relation overdefines one or more entities in the sketch. The overdefining dimension appears in red.

Not SolvedThe not solved dimension or relation is not able to determine the position of the sketchedentities. A not solved dimension appears in pink.

DrivenThe driven dimension’s value is driven by other dimensions in the sketch that solve the sketch.The driven dimension appears in gray.

Tip. The status bar of the SolidWorks window is divided into four areas whileworking in the sketching environment. The Sketch Definition area of the statusbar always displays the status of the sketch, dimension, and relation. If the sketch isunder defined the status area will display the Under Defined message; if the sketchis over defined then the message displayed in the status area will be Over Defined;if the sketch is fully defined then the message displayed in the status area will beFully Defined.

c03-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:44 AM26


DELETING THE OVER DEFINING DIMENSIONSIn SolidWorks, when you add a dimension that over defines a sketch, the sketch and dimensionturns red. Also, the SolidWorks warning window is displayed as shown in Figure 3-42.

Choose the OK button from this window. The Make Dimension Driven? dialog box is displayedas shown in Figure 3-43. If you select the Make This Dimension Driven radio button from thisdialog box and choose OK, then that dimension will become a driven dimension. The drivendimension is displayed in gray and you cannot modify a driven dimension. Its value dependsupon the value of the driver dimension. If you change the value of the driver dimension, thevalue of the driven dimension will be automatically changed.

If you select the Leave This Dimension Driving radio button from the Make Dimension Driven?dialog box and choose OK, then some of the entities and dimension in the sketch will bedisplayed in red. You need to delete either the red sketched entity or the red dimension to makesure the sketch is no more over defined. The SolidWorks information dialog box will be displayedas shown in Figure 3-44 when you delete the over defining entity or dimension. The messagedisplayed in this dialog box is The sketch is no longer over defined. Choose OK from theSolidWorks information dialog box. The sketch will be displayed in black, which indicates thatthe sketch is fully defined.

Figure 3-42 The box warning you about over defined dimensions

Figure 3-43 The Make Dimension Driven? dialog box

Figure 3-44 The SolidWorks information dialog box

c03-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:44 AM27


You can also prevent the sketch from being over defining by choosing the Cancel button fromthe Make Dimension Driven? dialog box. If you choose Cancel from the Make DimensionDriven? dialog box, then the SolidWorks information dialog box will be displayed, as shownabove, with a message displaying The sketch is no longer over defined.

Displaying and Deleting Relations

If the sketch is over defined after adding the dimensions and relations, then you need todelete some of the over defining, dangling, or not solved relations or dimensions. Youcan view the relations applied to the sketch using the Sketch Relations PropertyManager.

You can also delete the unwanted relations using this PropertyManager. To invoke the SketchRelations PropertyManager, choose the Display/Delete Relations button from the SketchRelations toolbar. You can also right-click in the drawing area to display the shortcut menu andchoose the Display/Delete Relations option. The Sketch Relations PropertyManager will bedisplayed as shown in Figure 3-45. The confirmation corner is also displayed at the upper rightcorner of the drawing area. The options available in the Sketch Relations PropertyManagerare discussed next.

RelationsThe Relations rollout is used to check, delete, and suppress the unwanted and conflictingrelations. The status of the sketch or the selected entity is displayed in the Information area ofthis rollout. The various options of the Relations rollout are discussed next.

FilterThe Filter drop-down list is used to select the filter to show the relations in the SketchRelation PropertyManager. The various options available in the Filter drop-down list arediscussed next.

All in this sketchThe All in this sketch option is used to display all the relations applied to the sketch.This option is selected by default in the Filter drop-down list. The first relation displayedin the list will be selected by default and will appear with blue background. The status ofthe selected relations is displayed in the Information area of the Relations rollout. Theoverdefined relations are highlighted in red color. If you select a relation highlightedred in color in the Relations area, you will notice that the status of the selected relationis displayed as Over Defining. The dangling relation is highlighted in brown. Whenyou select the dangling relation, the status of the relation will be displayed as Danglingin the Information area. Similarly, the not solved relation will be highlighted in yellowand the driven relation in gray.

Tip. When you move the cursor on the relations displayed in the Relations area ofthe Relations rollout, the tooltip will inform you about the type of relation.

Toolbar: Sketch Relations > Display/Delete RelationsMenu: Tools > Relations > Display/Delete

c03-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:44 AM28


DanglingThe Dangling option is used to display only the dangling relations applied to thesketch.

Overdefining/Not SolvedThe Overdefining/Not Solved option is used to display only the over defining and notsolved relation. The dangling relations are also not solved relations. Therefore, theywill also be displayed.

ExternalThe External option is used to display the relations that have a reference with an entityoutside the sketch. This entity can be an edge, vertex, or origin within the same modelor it can be an edge, vertex, or origin of a different model within an assembly.

Design In ContextThe Design In Context option is used to display only the relations that are in thecontext of a design. They are the relations between the sketch entity in one part and an

Figure 3-45 The Sketch Relations PropertyManager

c03-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:44 AM29


entity in another part. These relations are defined while working with the top-downassemblies.

LockedThe Locked option is used to display only the locked relations.

BrokenThe Broken option is used to display only the broken relations.

NoteThe Locked and the Broken relations are applied while creating a part within the assemblyenvironment. You will learn more about these relations in the later chapters.

Selected EntitiesThe Selected Entities option is used to select the entities to display the relations. Whenyou select this option from the Filter drop-down list, the Selected Entities area isdisplayed in the Relations rollout. When you select an entity to display the relations,the name of the selected entity is displayed in the Selected Entities area and therelation applied to this entity is displayed in the relation. To remove the selected entityfrom the selection set, select the entity to be removed and right-click to display theshortcut menu. Choose the Delete option from the shortcut menu. If you choose theClear Selections option, all the entities will be removed from the selection set.

SuppressedThe Suppressed check box is selected to suppress the selected relation of the currentconfiguration. When you suppress a relation, the relation is displayed in gray in the Relationsarea. The status of the suppress relation is displayed as Satisfied or Driven in the informationarea. If you suppress over defining dimensions the SolidWorks information dialog box willbe displayed with a message that The sketch is no longer over defined. Choose the OKbutton from this dialog box.

NoteThe configurations used in the part and assembly modeling will be discussed in the later chapters.

DeleteThe Delete button is used to delete the relation selected in the Relations area.

Delete AllThe Delete All button is used to delete all the relations that are displayed in the Relationsarea.

Undo last relation changeThe Undo last relation change button is used to undo the Delete, Replace, and Suppressedoptions used earlier. The replace option is discussed later in this chapter.

EntitiesThe Entities rollout is used to display the entities that are referred to in the selected relation.

c03-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:44 AM30


This rollout is also used to display the status of the selected relationand the external reference, if any. By default, the Entities rolloutis closed. Move the cursor to the black triangle at the right of theEntities rollout. The Entities rollout is shown in Figure 3-46. Thevarious options in the Entities rollout are discussed next.

Entities used in the selected relationThe Entities used in the selected relation area is used todisplay the information about entities used in the selectedrelation. The information about the name of the entity, thestatus of the entity, and the place where the entity is defined isprovided. This area is divided in three columns. The threecolumns available in the Entities rollout are discussed next.

Entity.The Entity column is used to display the entity or entitieson which the selected relation is applied.

Status.The Status column is used to display the status of the selected relation. The statusdisplayed in the Status column can be Fully Defined, Dangling, Over Defined, or NotSolved.

Defined In.The Defined In column is used to display the placement of the entity. The entity can beplaced in any of the following places:

Current Sketch.The Current Sketch option is displayed in the Defined In column when the entityis placed in the same sketch.

Figure 3-46 The Entitiesrollout

Tip. By default the Override Dims on Drag option is selected from Tools >Sketch Settings menu in the menu bar. As a result, if you drag a sketched entity, thevalue of dimension applied to the sketched entity will be changed automatically. Ifyou clear this option you cannot change a dimensioned sketched entity by draggingbecause it will not override the dimension. However, if the sketch is not fullydefined, the entities that are not properly dimensioned or constrained will move.

By default, the Automatic Solve option is selected from the Tools > Sketch Settingsmenu in the menu bar. This option helps you to solve the relations and dimensionsautomatically when you drag or modify a sketched entity. If you clear this option, amessage that The sketch cannot be dragged because Auto Solve Mode is off. Todrag the sketch, please turn the Auto Solve Mode on. appears. If you modifythe dimension value using the Modify dialog box, the dimension will not updateautomatically, and you have to update the new dimension manually. To update andsolve the dimension you have to choose the Rebuild button from the Standardtoolbar or press CTRL+B using the keyboard.

c03-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:44 AM31


Same Model.The Same Model option is displayed in the Defined In column when the entity isdefined as placed in the same model. This means that the entity is placed in thesame model but outside the sketch. This entity can be an edge, vertex, or an originof the same model.

External Model.The External Model option is displayed in the Defined In column when theentity is placed in some other model but within the assembly. This entity can be theedge, vertex, or the origin of a different model but in the same assembly.

EntityThe Entity display box is used to display the name of the entity and the name of the part inwhich the selected entity is placed. This entity is selected in the Entity column of theEntities used in the selected relation area. The selected entity is also highlighted in thedrawing area.

OwnerOwnerOwnerOwnerOwnerThe Owner display box is used to display the name of model in which the entity is placedwhen the External Model option is displayed in the Defined In column.

AssemblyThe Assembly display box is used to display the path of the assembly in which the entity isplaced when the External Model option is displayed in the Defined In column.

ReplaceThe Replace button is used to replace the selected entity from the Entity column with someother entity from the drawing area. When you select the entity from the drawing area, theentity will be displayed in the display box provided below the Replace button. Choose theReplace button to replace the entity. If the sketch is overdefined, you will be given a warningmessage. Sometimes after replacing the entity, the status of the entity is changed to notsolved or overdefining. You need to undo the last operation. The Replace in all relationscheck box is selected to replace the entity in all the relations.

VIEWING AND EXAMINING RELATIONSYou can view and examine the relations applied to the sketch. To view and examine the relationsapplied to a particular entity, select that entity. The PropertyManager of that entity will bedisplayed. The Existing Relations area will display the relations that are already applied to theselected entity. The Information area will inform you about the status of the sketch. Select therelations one by one from the Existing Relations area. The callout of the relations will bedisplayed in the drawing area as shown in Figure 3-47. The callout that is displayed in thedrawing area is divided in two parts. The first part displays the symbol of the relation applied tothe selected entity and the second part displays the name of the entity. If you double-click therelation symbol then the Sketch Relations PropertyManager will be displayed. You can analyze,examine, and delete the unwanted, over defining, dangling, and not solved relations using thisoption.

c03-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:44 AM32


NoteTo exit the callout, click anywhere on the screen.

OPENING AN EXISTING FILE

The Open dialog box is used to open an existing SolidWorks part, assembly, or drawingdocument. You can also use this dialog box to import files from other applications savedin some standard file formats. Choose the Open button from the Standard toolbar, or

press CTRL+O keys to invoke the Open dialog box. The Open dialog box is shown inFigure 3-48. Various options available in this dialog box are discussed next.

Look in drop-down listThe Look in drop-down list is used to specify the drive or directory in which the file is saved.The location of the file and the folder that you browse is shown in this drop-down list.

File nameThe name of the file selected is shown in the File name edit box. You can also enter the name ofthe file to open in this edit box.

Tip. You can also display the relation callouts in the drawing area without invokingthe Sketch Relations PropertyManager. Double-click on the sketched entity andthe relation callouts will be displayed in the drawing area.

Figure 3-47 Callout of relations displayed in the drawing area

Toolbar: Standard > OpenMenu: File > Open

c03-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:44 AM33


Files of typeThe Files of type drop-down list is used to specify the type of file to open. Using this drop-downlist, you can select a particular type of file type such as the part file, assembly file, drawing file,all SolidWorks files, and so on. You can also define the file standard format in this drop-downlist to import the files saved in those file formats. You will learn more about importing the filesin the later chapters.

Open as read-onlyThe Open as read-only option is selected to open the document as a read only file. This optionis available after invoking the flyout by selecting the down arrow available at the right of theOpen button. If you modify the design in a read-only file, the changes are saved in a new file.The original file is not modified. This also allows another user to access the document whilethe document is open on your system.

PreviewThe Preview check box is selected to display the Preview area in this dialog box. In thePreview area you can preview the selected part, assembly, or drawing document before opening.

AdvancedThe Advanced check box is selected to display the configurations available in the selected file.The configurations available in the selected file are displayed in the Configurations area. Youwill learn more about configurations in the later chapters.

View-OnlyThe View-Only check box is selected to open a SolidWorks document in the view only format.When you open a view-only file, only the tools related to viewing the models are enabled. Rest ofthe tools are not available. This is the reason you cannot do any modification in the view-onlydocument. You can only use the zoom, pan, or dynamically rotate tools. If you want to edit thedesign, right-click in the drawing area and choose the Edit option from the shortcut menu toedit the design.

Figure 3-49 The Open dialog box

c03-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:44 AM34


LightweightThe Lightweight check box is selected to open the assembly document using the lightweightparts. You will learn more about the lightweight parts in the later chapters.

TUTORIALS

Tutorial 1In this tutorial you will draw the sketch of the model shown in Figure 3-49. This is the samesketch that was drawn in Tutorial 1 of Chapter 1. In this tutorial you will draw the sketch usingthe mirror line and then add the required relations and dimensions. The sketch is shown inFigure 3-50. The solid model is given only for reference. (Expected time: 30 min)


a. Start SolidWorks and then open a new part file.b. Maximize the part file document and then switch to the sketching environment.c. Create a mirror line using the Centerline and the Mirror tool.d. Draw the sketch of the model on one side of the mirror line so that it is automatically drawn

on the other side, refer to Figure 3-51 through Figure 3-56.e. Add the required relations to the sketch, refer to Figures 3-57 and Figure 3-58.f. Add the required dimensions to the sketch and fully define the sketch, refer Figure 3-59.g. Save the sketch and then close the file.

Starting SolidWorks and Opening a New Part Document1. Start SolidWorks by choosing Start > Programs > SolidWorks 2003 > SolidWorks 2003


The Welcome to SolidWorks 2003 window is displayed and also the Tip of the Day dialogbox. As mentioned earlier, the tips that are displayed in the Tip of the Day dialog are veryuseful in making the best use of SolidWorks.

Figure 3-49 Solid Model for Tutorial 1 Figure 3-50 Sketch of the model

c03-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:44 AM35


2. Close the Tip of the Day dialog box by choosing the Close button and then choose the NewDocument option from the Welcome to SolidWorks window.

The New SolidWorks Document dialog box is displayed.


A new SolidWorks part document is opened. But the part document window is not maximizedin the SolidWorks window.



6. Set the units for measuring linear dimensions to Millimeters and the units for angulardimensions to Degree using the Document Properties - Detailing dialog box. If youselected Millimeters as units while installing SolidWorks, then you can skip this point.

Drawing the Mirror LineIn this tutorial, you will draw the sketch of the given model with the help of a mirror line. Asmentioned earlier, the sketches that are symmetrical along any axis are recommended to bedrawn using the mirror line. The mirror line is drawn using the Centerline and Mirrortools. When you draw an entity on one side of the mirror line, the same entity is drawnautomatically on the other side of the mirror line. The entity drawn on the other side is themirror image of the entity you draw. A symmetrical relation is applied to the entities on boththe sides of the mirror line. Therefore, if you modify an entity on one side of the mirrorline, the same modification is reflected in the mirrored entity and vice versa. First, you needto create a mirror line.

The origin of the sketcher environment is placed in the center of the drawing area and youhave to create the sketch in the first quadrant. Therefore, it is recommended that you modifythe drawing area such that the area in the first quadrant in increased. This can be doneusing the Pan tool.

1. Choose the Pan tool button from the View toolbar. The select cursor will be replacedby the pan cursor.

2. Press and hold the left mouse button down and drag the cursor toward the bottom leftcorner of the screen.

You will notice that the origin also moves toward the bottom left corner of the screen. Thisincrease the drawing area in the first quadrant.

3. After dragging the origin close to the lower left corner, release the left mouse button.

c03-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:44 AM36



The pan cursor is replaced by the line cursor.

5. Move the line cursor to a location whose coordinates are close to 45mm 70mm 0mm. You donot need to move the cursor to exactly this location. You can move it to a point close to thislocation.

6. Specify the startpoint of the centerline and move the line cursor vertically downward. Specifythe endpoint of the centerline when the length of the line cursor shows a value close to 80.

As soon as you specify the endpoint of the center line, a rubber-band line is attached to theline cursor. Double-click any where in the drawing area or right-click to display the shortcutmenu and choose the End chain option from the shortcut menu to end line creation.

7. Choose the Zoom to Fit button from the View toolbar to fit the sketch on the screen.

8. Choose the Select button from the Sketch toolbar to toggle back to the selectionmode and select the center line.

9. Choose the Sketch Mirror button from the Sketch Tools toolbar to convert thecenter line into a mirror line and invoke the automatic mirror option.

Drawing the SketchYou will draw the sketch on the right side of the mirror line and the same sketch will beautomatically drawn on the other side of the mirror line.


The arrow cursor is replaced by the line cursor.

2. Move the line cursor to a location where the coordinates are close to 45mm 10mm 0mm.The line cursor turns yellow in color and an orange bulb is displayed. This suggests that thecursor snaps the mirror line.

3. Specify the startpoint of the line at this point and move the cursor horizontally toward theright. Specify the endpoint of the line when the length of the line above the line cursorshows a value close to 15. As soon as you press the left mouse button to specify the endpointof the line, a line of the same length is drawn automatically on the other side of the mirrorline. Figure 3-51 shows the mirror image created automatically on the other side of themirror line. A rubber-band line is attached to the cursor.

You will notice that the mirror image that is automatically created on the left of the mirrorline is merged with the line drawn on the right. Therefore, the entire line becomes a singleentity. As mentioned earlier, the mirror image of the line is merged with the line that youdraw only if one of the endpoints of the line you draw is coincident with the mirror line.

c03-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:44 AM37


4. Move the cursor vertically upward. Specify the endpoint when the length of the line on theline cursor displays a value close to 10. Figure 3-52 shows the sketch after drawing thevertical lines.

A rubber-band line is attached to the cursor.

5. Move the line cursor horizontally toward the right. Specify the endpoint of the line whenthe length of the line on the line cursor displays a value close to 10.

6. Move the line cursor vertically downward. Specify the endpoint when the length of the lineon the line cursor displays a value close to 10.

7. Move the line cursor horizontally toward the right. Specify the endpoint when the length ofthe line on the line cursor displays a value close to 10.

8. Move the line cursor vertically upward. Specify the endpoint when the length of the line onthe line cursor displays a value close to 40.

9. Move the line cursor such that the line is drawn at an angle close to 135-degree, see Figure 3-53.Specify the endpoint when the value of the length of the line is close to 14.14.

10. Move the line cursor horizontally toward the left. Specify the endpoint when the cursorsnaps to the mirror line and the line cursor turns yellow in color. A rubber-band line isattached to the cursor. Double-click anywhere on the screen to end line creation. The sketchafter completing the outer loop is shown in Figure 3-54.

Next, you will draw the sketch of the inner cavity. To draw the sketch of the inner cavity, youwill start drawing the lower horizontal line.

11. Move the line cursor to a location whose coordinates are around 45mm 25mm 0mm.

12. Specify the startpoint of the line at this point and move the cursor horizontally toward the

Figure 3-51 After releasing the left mouse button Figure 3-52 After releasing the left mouse button

c03-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:44 AM38


right. Specify the endpoint when the length of the line above the line cursor shows a valueclose to 15.

13. Move the line cursor vertically upwards. Specify the endpoint when the length of the line onthe line cursor displays a value close to 10.

14. Move the line cursor horizontally toward the left. Specify the endpoint when the length ofthe line on the line cursor displays a value close to 10.

15. Move the line cursor vertically downwards. Specify the endpoint when the length of the line

Figure 3-53 Sketch after drawing the aligned line

Figure 3-54 Sketch after completing the outer profile of the sketch

c03-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:44 AM39


on the line cursor displays a value close to 5.

16. Move the line cursor horizontally toward the left. Specify the endpoint when the line cursorsnaps to the mirror line.

17. Double-click anywhere on the screen to end line creation. The sketch after completing theinner cavity is shown in Figure 3-55.

Next, you will draw the circles using the Circle tool from the Sketch Tools toolbar.

18. Choose the Circle button from the Sketch Tools toolbar to invoke the circle tool.

When you invoke the circle tool the select cursor will be replaced by the circle cursor.

19. Move the circle cursor to the point where the inferencing line originating from the endpointsof the right inclined line meet.

20. Specify the center of the circle at this point and move the circle cursor toward the left todefine the circle. Press the left mouse button when the radius of the circle above the circlecursor shows a value close to 5.

The mirror image of the circle is automatically drawn on the other side of the mirror line.The sketch after drawing the circle is shown in Figure 3-56.

Adding the Required RelationsAfter drawing the sketch, you need to add the relations using the Add RelationsPropertyManager. The relations are applied to a sketch to constrain its degree of freedom,

Figure 3-55 Sketch after drawing the inner cavity Figure 3-56 Sketch after drawing the circle

Tip. Sometimes unwanted inferencing lines are displayed when you are drawing asketch. You can remove the unwanted inferencing lines by choosing View > Redrawfrom the menu bar. You can also redraw the screen by pressing CTRL+R key.

c03-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:44 AM40


to reduce the number of dimensions in the sketch, and also to capture the design intent inthe sketch.

1. Choose the Select button from the Sketch toolbar to remove the circles createdpreviously from the selection set.

2. Choose the Add Relation button from the Sketch Relations toolbar to invoke theAdd Relations PropertyManager. The confirmation corner is also displayed at theupper right corner of the drawing window.

3. Select the centerpoint of the circle on the right and then select the lower endpoint of theright inclined line. The name of the selected entities are displayed in the Selected Entitiesarea of the Add Relations PropertyManager.

The relations that can be applied to the two selected entities are displayed in the AddRelations area of the Add Relations PropertyManager as shown in Figure 3-57. TheHorizontal option is highlighted, suggesting that the horizontal relation is the mostappropriate relation for the selected entities.

Figure 3-60 Add Relations PropertyManager

c03-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:44 AM41


NoteThe name of the entities displayed in the Selected Entities area of the Add RelationsPropertyManager may be different from those displayed on your screen.

4. Choose the Horizontal button from the Add Relations area to apply the Horizontal relationto the selected entities.

5. Move the cursor to the drawing area and right-click to invoke the shortcut menu. Choose theClear Selections option to remove the selected entities from the selection set.

6. Select the centerpoint of the circle on the right and the upper endpoint of the right inclinedline.

The relations that can be applied to the selected entities are displayed and the Verticaloption is highlighted.

7. Choose the Vertical button from the Add Relation area of the Add RelationsPropertyManager. Right-click in the drawing area and choose the Clear Selection option.

8. Select the entities shown in Figure 3-58. Choose the Equal button from the Add Relationsarea of the Add Relations PropertyManager.

9. Choose the OK button from the Add Relations PropertyManager or choose the OK iconfrom the confirmation corner to close the PropertyManager. Specify a point on the screento clear the selected entities.

Applying the Dimensions to the SketchNext, you will apply the dimensions to the sketch and fully define the sketch. As mentionedearlier, the sketched entities are shown in blue, suggesting that the sketch is under defined.

Figure 3-58 Entities to be selected to apply the equal relation

c03-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:44 AM42


It will be changed to black after applying the required dimensions to the sketch, suggestingthat the sketch is fully defined.

1. Choose Tools > Options from the menu bar to display the System Options - Generaldialog box. Select the Input dimension value check box if cleared and choose OK from theSystem Options - General dialog box. This check box is selected to invoke the modifydialog box to enter a new dimension value and modify the sketch as you place the dimension.

2. Choose the Dimension button from the Sketch toolbar or right-click in the drawingarea to display the shortcut menu. Choose the Dimension option to invoke thedimension option.

The cursor is replaced by the dimension cursor.

3. Move the dimension cursor to the lower right horizontal line. The lower right horizontalline is highlighted in red color.

4. Select the line. A linear dimension is attached to the cursor.

5. Move the cursor downwards and using the left mouse button, place the dimension below theline, refer to Figure 3-59.

As you place the dimension, the Modify dialog box is displayed.

6. Enter the dimension value of 10 in this dialog box and press ENTER. The dimension isplaced and the length of line is also modified to 10.

7. Move the dimension cursor to the lower middle horizontal line. Select the line when theline changes to red. A dimension is attached to the cursor.

8. Move the cursor downwards and place the dimension using the left mouse button. Enter avalue of 30 in the Modify edit box and press ENTER.

9. Move the cursor to the outer left vertical line and when the color of the line changes to red,select the line. A dimension is attached to the cursor.

10. Move the cursor to the left and use the left mouse button to place the dimension. Enter avalue of 40 in the Modify dialog box and press ENTER.

11. Select the right inclined line. A dimension is attached to the cursor. Move the cursor verticallyupwards to apply the horizontal dimension to the selected line. Using the left mouse buttonplace the dimension at an appropriate place, see Figure 3-59.

12. Enter a value of 10 in the Modify dialog box and press ENTER.

13. Again, select the right aligned line. A dimension is attached to the cursor. Move the cursorhorizontally toward the right to apply the vertical dimension for the selected line. Using the

c03-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:44 AM43


left mouse button place the dimension at an appropriate place, see Figure 3-59.


19. Move the cursor to the left circle and when the circle is highlighted in red, select it. Adiameter dimension is attached to the cursor. Move the cursor outside the sketch.

20. Place the diameter dimension. Enter a value of 10 in the Modify dialog box and pressENTER.

21. Select the lower horizontal line of the inner cavity. A linear dimension is attached to thecursor. Select the lower horizontal line of the outer loop.

A vertical dimension between the lower horizontal line of the inner cavity and the lowerhorizontal line of the outer sketch is attached to the cursor.

22. Move the cursor horizontally toward the right and place the dimension. Enter a value of 15in the Modify dialog box and press ENTER.

23. Select the inner right vertical line of the cavity and place the dimension outside the sketch.Enter a value of 5 in the Modify dialog box and press ENTER.

24. Select the lower horizontal line of the outer sketch and the origin using the left mousebutton.

25. Move the cursor horizontally toward the left and place the dimension. Enter a value of 10 inthe Modify dialog box.

Notice, that some of the entities are displayed in black. This suggests that these entities arenow fully defined. But you have to fully define the entire sketch. So you need to add somemore dimensions.

26. Select the outer left vertical line of the outer sketch and the origin.

27. Move the cursor vertically downward and place the dimension using the left mouse button.Enter a value of 10 in the Modify dialog box.

Notice that all the entities are displayed in black. This suggests that the sketch is fullydefined. If the sketch is not fully defined then you have to add a dimension between theouter right vertical line and the outer left vertical line. The value of the dimension should bemaintained 70. The fully defined sketch, after applying all the required relations anddimensions, is shown in Figure 3-59.

Saving the Sketch

1. Choose the Save button from the Standard toolbar to invoke the Save As dialog box.

c03-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:44 AM44


2. Double-click the SolidWorks directory. Choose the Create New Folder button fromthe Save As dialog box. Enter the name of the folder as c03 and press ENTER.


The document will be saved in the \My Documents\SolidWorks\c03 directory.


Tutorial 2In this tutorial you will draw the sketch of the model shown in Figure 3-60. You will draw thesketch using the mirror line and then add the required relations and dimensions. The sketch isshown in Figure 3-61. The solid model is given only for reference. (Expected time: 30 min)

Figure 3-59 Fully defined sketch after applying all the required relations and dimensions

Figure 3-60 Solid Model Figure 3-61 Sketch of the solid model

c03-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:44 AM45



a. Start SolidWorks and then open a new part file.b. Maximize the part file document and then switch to the sketching environment.c. Create a mirror line.d. Draw the sketch on one side of the mirror line, refer to Figure 3-62.e. Trim the arcs and circles and add the fillets, refer to Figure 3-63 through Figure 3-65.f. Add the required relations.g. Add the dimensions and fully define the sketch, refer Figure 3-66.




A new SolidWorks part document is opened.


Drawing the Mirror LineSimilar to the last tutorial, you will draw the sketch of the given model with the help of a mirrorline.


2. Move the line cursor to a location whose coordinates are close to -102mm 0mm 0mm. Youdo not need to move the cursor to exactly this location. You can move it to a point close tothis location.

3. Specify the startpoint of the centerline at this point and move the line cursor horizontallytoward the right. Specify the endpoint of the center line when the length of the line showsa value close to 204. Double-click anywhere in the drawing area to end line creation.

4. Choose the Zoom to Fit button from the View tollbar to fit the sketch on the screen.

5. Invoke the Select tool and select the centerline. Choose the Sketch Mirror buttonfrom the Sketch Tools toolbar to create the mirror line and enable the automaticmirror option.

Drawing the SketchYou will draw the sketch on the upper side of the mirror line and the same sketch will beautomatically drawn on the other side of the mirror line.

c03-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:44 AM46


1. Choose the Centerpoint Arc button from the Sketch Tools toolbar.

The arrow cursor is replaced by the arc cursor.

2. Move the arc cursor close to the origin. Specify the centerpoint of the arc when the cursorturns yellow in color. Move the cursor horizontally toward the right. The cursor snaps to themirror line. As you move the cursor, a reference circle is drawn. Specify the startpoint of thearc when the radius of the arc on the arc cursor shows a value close to 82.

3. Move the arc cursor in the counterclockwise direction. Specify the endpoint of the arc whenthe value of the angle above the arc cursor shows a value close to 30-degree. The mirrorimage of the sketched entity is automatically created on the other side of the mirror line.

4. Move the arc cursor to the origin. Specify the centerpoint of the arc. Move it horizontallytoward the right. The cursor snaps to the mirror line and a reference circle is drawn. Specifythe startpoint of the arc when the radius of the arc on the arc cursor shows a value close to56.

5. Move the arc cursor in the counterclockwise direction. Specify the endpoint of the arc whenthe value of the angle above the arc cursor shows a value close to 30-degree. The mirrorimage of the sketched entity is automatically created on the other side of the mirror line.

6. Choose the Tangent Arc button from the Sketch Tools toolbar.

7. Move the cursor to the upper endpoint of the left arc and when cursor turns to yellow,specify the first point of the tangent arc. Move the cursor close to the upper endpoint of theright arc and when the cursor turns yellow, specify the second point of the tangent arc.

A rubber-band arc is attached to the cursor. Double-click anywhere in the drawing area toend arc creation.

8. Choose the Circle button from the Sketch Tools toolbar. The arc cursor will bereplaced by the circle cursor

9. Move the cursor to the centerpoint of the upper arc and when the cursor turns yellow,specify the centerpoint of the circle. Move the cursor horizontally toward the right. Pressthe left mouse button when the radius of the circle above the circle cursor shows a value closeto 7.5.

10. Move the cursor to the origin and when the cursor turns yellow, specify the centerpoint ofthe circle. Move the cursor horizontally toward the right. Press the left mouse button whenthe radius of the circle above the circle cursor shows a value close to 6.5.

The SolidWorks warning dialog box is displayed. This warning message will inform you“Unable to create the symmetric element”. This message is displayed because the circle iscreated on both sides of the mirror line. Therefore, a symmetric element is not created inthis case.

c03-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:44 AM47


11. Choose OK from the SolidWorks warning dialog box.

12. Move the cursor to the origin and when the cursor turns yellow in color, specify the centerpointof the circle. Move the cursor horizontally toward the right. Press the left mouse buttonwhen the radius of the circle above the circle cursor displays a value close to 13. TheSolidWorks warning dialog box will be displayed.

13. Choose OK from the SolidWorks warning dialog box.


15. Move the line cursor to a location whose coordinates are close to 55mm 10mm 0mm. Thecursor snaps to the left arc.

16. Specify the startpoint of the line at this point and move the cursor horizontally toward theleft. Specify the endpoint of the line when the line cursor snaps the outer circle. Double-clickanywhere in the drawing area to end line creation.

17. Move the cursor to a location whose coordinates are close to -10mm 10mm 0mm.

18. Specify the startpoint of the line on this location and move the cursor horizontally towardthe left. Specify the endpoint when the length of the line above the line cursor shows a valueclose to 42.

19. Move the line cursor such that the line is drawn at an angle close to 105º. Specify theendpoint when the length of line is close to 15.

NoteYou may need to scroll down the Line PropertyManager to view the angle. Move the cursor tothe scroll bar, press and hold down the left mouse button, and drag the cursor vertically downwardsto scroll down the Line PropertyManager.

20. Move the line cursor horizontally toward the left. Specify the endpoint when the length ofthe line above the line cursor shows a value close to 34.

21. Move the line cursor vertically downwards. Specify the endpoint when the length of the lineabove the line cursor shows a value close to 10.

22. Move the line cursor such that the line is drawn at an angle close to 346-degree. Specify theendpoint when the length of the line is around 27.

23. Move the line cursor vertically downwards. Specify the endpoint when the line cursor snapsthe mirror line. Double-click anywhere in the drawing area to end line creation.

The sketch after drawing the required arcs, circles, and lines is shown in Figure 3-62.

c03-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:44 AM48


Trimming the unwanted entitiesAfter creating the sketch, you need to trim some of the unwanted sketched entities using theSketch Trim tool.


The line cursor is replaced by the trim cursor.

2. Select the entities to be trimmed as shown in Figure 3-63. The entities are dynamicallytrimmed.

Adding the Fillets to the SketchNext, you need to add fillets to the sketch. The fillets are generally applied to avoid thestress concentration at sharp corners.

1. Choose the Sketch Fillet button from the Sketch Tools toolbar.

The Sketch Fillet PropertyManager is displayed and the trim cursor is replaced by theselect cursor.

Figure 3-62 Complete sketch

Figure 3-63 Entities to be trimmed

c03-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:45 AM49


2. Set the radius spinner to 5.

3. Using the left mouse button, select the entities shown in Figure 3-64 to apply the fillet.

4. Choose the OK button from the Sketch Fillet PropertyManager to exit the Fillet tool.

The sketch after applying the fillets to the sketch is shown in Figure 3-65.

Figure 3-64 Entities to be selected to apply fillet

Figure 3-65 Sketch after creating the fillets

c03-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:45 AM50


Adding the Relations to the SketchNext, you need to add the required relations to the sketch.

1. Choose the Add Relations button from the Sketch Relations toolbar to invoke theAdd Relations PropertyManager.

2. Select the lower left arc and the lower tangent arc. The Tangent button is highlighted boldin the Add Relations rollout of the Add Relations PropertyManager. This suggests thatthe Tangent relation is the most appropriate relation for the selected entities.

3. Choose the Tangent button from the Add Relations PropertyManager.

4. Right-click in the drawing area and choose the Clear Selections option from the shortcutmenu to clear the selections from the selection set. Select the right arc and the lower tangentarc. The Tangent button is highlighted.

5. Choose the Tangent button from the Add Relations PropertyManager. Clear the currentselections from the selection set.

6. Select the right horizontal line and the left horizontal line that are coincident with thetrimmed circle. Choose the Collinear button from the Add Relations PropertyManager.

7. Choose the OK button from the Add Relations PropertyManager or choose the OK iconfrom the confirmation corner.

Adding the Dimensions to the SketchNext, you will apply the dimensions to the sketch and fully defined it.

1. Choose the Dimension button from the Sketch toolbar to invoke thedimension tool. The arrow cursor is replaced by the dimension cursor.

2. Select the right arc. A radius dimension is attached to the cursor. Move the cursor away fromthe sketch toward the right and place the dimension.


4. Select the left upper arc. A radius dimension is attached to the cursor. Move the cursor awayfrom the sketch toward the right and place the dimension.


6. Select the Origin and the centerpoint of the upper circle. A dimension is attached to thecursor. Next, select the right endpoint of the mirror line. An angular dimension is attachedto the cursor. Place the angular dimension outside the sketch.


c03-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:45 AM51


8. Select the upper right circle and a diameter dimension is attached to the cursor. Place thedimension outside the sketch.


10. Select the upper right horizontal line that coincides the trimmed circle and the lower righthorizontal line that coincides the trimmed circle. A linear dimension is attached to thecursor. Move the cursor vertically downwards and using the left mouse button place thedimension.

11. Enter a value of 20 in the Modify dialog box.

12. Select the smaller circle at the center. A diameter dimension is attached to the cursor. Movethe cursor upwards and place the dimension outside the sketch.


14. Select the outer trimmed circle and place the radius dimension outside the sketch.


16. Select the upper left inclined line. A dimension is attached to the cursor. Now, select theupper left horizontal line. An angular dimension is attached to the cursor. Place the dimensionabove the horizontal line.


18. Select the origin and the lower endpoint of the lower left inclined line. Move the cursorvertically downwards and place the dimension.


20. Select the origin and the middle left vertical line. Move the cursor vertically downwards andplace the dimension below the last dimension.


22. Select the origin and select the lower endpoint of the outer left vertical line. Move the cursorvertically downwards and place the dimension below the last dimension.


24. Select the upper left inclined line, and the lower left inclined line, refer to Figure 3-66. Anangular dimension is attached to the cursor. Move the cursor horizontally toward the leftand place the dimension.


c03-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:45 AM52


26. Select the upper left horizontal line and the lower left horizontal line. A linear dimension isattached to the cursor. Move the cursor horizontally toward the left and place the dimension.


28. Select the lower endpoint of the upper left vertical line and the upper endpoint of the lowerleft vertical line. A linear dimension is attached to the cursor. Move the cursor horizontallytoward the left and using the left mouse button place the dimension.


All the entities are displayed in black, suggesting that the sketch is fully defined. The fullydefined sketch is shown in Figure 3-66.

Saving the SketchNext, you need to save the document in the \My Documents\SolidWorks\c03 directory.

1. Choose the Save button from the Standard toolbar to invoke the Save As dialog box.


The document will be saved.


Tutorial 3

In this tutorial you will draw the sketch of a revolved model shown in Figure 3-67. The sketch isshown in Figure 3-68. The solid model is given only for your reference.


Figure 3-66 Sketch after applying all relations and dimensions

c03-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:45 AM53



a. Open a new part file and then switch to the sketching environment.b. Create a center line that will act as the axis of revolution when you will create the base feature

using this sketch.c. Create the sketch using the various sketching tools.d. Use the offset tool to offset the required lines, refer to Figure 3-69.e. Draw the arcs and trim the unwanted entities, refer Figure 3-70.f. Add the required relations.g. Add the required dimensions and fully define the sketch, refer Figure 3-71.

Opening a New Part File1. Choose the New button from the Standard toolbar and open a new part file using

the New SolidWorks Document dialog box.

2. Choose the Sketch button from the Sketch toolbar to switch to the sketchingenvironment for drawing the sketch.

Creating a Center lineYou need to create a center line around which the sketch of the base feature will be revolved.


2. Move the cursor to the origin and specify the startpoint when the line cursor turns yellow.Move the cursor vertically upwards. Specify the endpoint when the length of the line cursorshows a value close to 120.

Drawing the SketchNext, you will draw the sketch of the piston.

1. Right-click in the drawing area and choose the Line option from the shortcut menu. Movethe cursor to a location whose coordinates are close to 58mm 0mm 0mm.

Figure 3-67 Solid model of the piston Figure 3-68 The sketch of the base feature

c03-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:45 AM54


2. Draw a vertical line of dimension close to 100. Choose the End chain option from theshortcut menu.

3. Move the cursor to the lower endpoint of the line created earlier. Specify the startpoint ofthe line when the cursor turns yellow. Move the cursor horizontally toward the left andcreate a horizontal line of dimension close to 8.

4. Move the line cursor vertically upwards and create a vertical line of dimension close to 30.

5. Move the cursor horizontally toward the left and create a horizontal line of dimension close to 7.

6. Move the line cursor vertically upwards and create a vertical line of dimension close to 70.

7. Right-click and choose the 3 Point Arc option from the shortcut menu. Move the cursornear the upper endpoint of the right vertical line.

8. Specify the first point of the arc when the cursor changes to yellow color. Move the cursorhorizontally toward the left. The reference arc is attached to the cursor. Specify the secondpoint of the arc when the value of the length is close to 116.

9. Move the cursor vertically upwards. Specify the third point of the arc when the value of theradius is close to 170.

10. Right-click and choose the Line option from the shortcut menu. Move the line cursor toa location whose coordinates are close to 58mm 90mm 0mm. Specify the startpoint of theline at this location and move the cursor horizontally toward the left to create a line ofdimension close to 5. Double-click anywhere in the drawing area.

11. Choose the Zoom To Fit button from the View toolbar to fit the sketch to the drawing area.

Offsetting the linesUsing the Offset Entities tool you will offset the entities created earlier.

1. Select the line created previously using the select tool.

2. Choose the Offset Entities button from the Sketch Tools toolbar to invoke theOffset Entities PropertyManager. The confirmation corner is also displayed at theupper right corner of the drawing area.

3. Choose the Keep Visible button from the Offset Entities PropertyManager to pin thePropertyManager.

4. Set the value of Offset Distance spinner to 5. Now, select the Reverse check box becauseyou need to offset the entity in the reverse direction.

As soon as you select the Reserve check box you will observe that the preview of the entityto be offset is modified in the drawing area.

c03-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:45 AM55


5. Choose the OK button from the Offset Entities PropertyManager. You will notice that anentity is created at an offset distance of 5 from the original entity.

You will notice that a dimension is also attached to the newly created entity and the originalentity with a value of 5. This dimension is the offset distance between the two entities.

6. Select the newly created entity. Move the cursor vertically downwards. The preview of theentity and the direction of offset creation is also displayed. Press the left mouse button tooffset the selected line.

Repeat this procedure of offsetting the entities unless you get the eight entities includingthe original entity.

7. Set the value of Offset Distance spinner to 7 and clear the Select chain check box. Selectthe upper arc. The preview of the offset arc is shown in the background.

8. Choose the OK button twice on the Offset Entities PropertyManager.

Completing the Remaining SketchNext, you will complete the remaining sketch using the line tool.

1. Right-click and choose the Line option from the shortcut menu. Move the line cursor to theleft endpoint of the upper smaller right horizontal line. When the cursor turns yellow incolor, create a vertical line that snaps the endpoint of the last offseted line. Double-click toend line creation.

2. Move the cursor to the intersection point of the upper arc and the centerline. When thecursor snaps the intersection, create a vertical line that snaps the intersection point of thelower arc and the centerline.

The sketch after creating the entities using the various sketch tools and the offset tool isshown in Figure 3-69.

Trimming the Unwanted EntitiesNext, you will trim the unwanted entities using the trim tool.

1. Choose the Trim button from the Sketch Tools toolbar.

2. Using the left mouse button trim the unwanted entities. The sketch after trimming theunwanted entities is shown in Figure 3-70.

Adding the Required RelationsNow, you will add the required relations to the sketched entities.

1. Right-click and choose the Select option from the shortcut menu. Press and hold down theCTRL key from the keyboard and select one of the endpoints of the lower horizontal line

c03-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:45 AM56


and then select the origin. Release the CTRL key after selection. Right-click and choose theMake Horizontal option from the shortcut menu to add the horizontal relation to theselected entities. Click anywhere in the drawing area to clear the selection set.

2. Press and hold down the CTRL key and select the small horizontal lines in the right of thesketch. Release the CTRL key after making the selection and right-click to display theshortcut menu. Move the cursor to two down arrows displayed at the end of the shortcutmenu. Keep the cursor on this location for a couple of seconds to expand the shortcutmenu. Choose the Make Equal option from the shortcut menu to apply the equal relation.

3. Similarly, apply the Equal relation to all the small vertical lines.

The SolidWorks warning message window will be displayed. This warns you that the solutioncannot be determined for the sketch. You will notice that some the entities of the sketch turnred. This indicates that the sketch is over defined.

4. Choose OK from this dialog box.

Another SolidWorks dialog box is displayed. This warns you that applying this relation willresult in over defining the sketch.

5. Choose OK from this dialog box.

As discussed earlier, the overdefined sketch is not used to create any feature; therefore, youhave to delete the conflicting relations. The sketch is over defined after applying the previousrelation. Therefore, if you delete the last applied relation using the Undo button from theStandard toolbar then the sketch will not be over defined.

6. Choose the Undo button from the Standard toolbar. Click anywhere in the drawingarea to clear the selections from the selection set.

Figure 3-69 Sketch after creating various entities Figure 3-70 Sketch after trimming the unwantedentities

c03-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:45 AM57


As evident from the color of the entities, which is green, you still have to add some morerelations or dimensions to fully define the sketch. The fully defined sketch is displayed inblack color.

7. Zoom in using the Zoom In/Out tool and apply the coincident relation between thecenterpoint of the upper arc and the centerline.

Adding the Dimensions to the SketchAfter creating, editing, and applying the relations to the sketch, you will add the requireddimensions to the sketch to fully define the sketch.

1. Select the dimension with a value of 7 that is placed between the upper arcs and press theDELETE key from the keyboard.

The SolidWorks dialog box is displayed. This warns you that if you delete the offset dimension,the offset relation will also be deleted from the sketch.

2. Choose the Yes button from this dialog box.

You have to delete this dimension because during the design and manufacturing practicesthe dimension between the tangents should be avoided.

3. Right-click and choose the Dimension option from the shortcut menu to invoke theDimension tool.

4. Select the outer upper right vertical line. A dimension is attached to the cursor. Now, selectthe centerline and move the cursor to the other side of the centerline. You will notice thatthe diameter dimension is displayed along the cursor.

5. Using the left mouse button place the dimension above the sketch and enter a value of 116in the Modify edit box and press ENTER.

6. Now, select the inner left vertical line and then select the centerline. Move the cursor to theother side of the centerline and place the dimension using the left mouse button below thesketch.

7. Enter a value of 86 in the Modify edit box and press ENTER.

Add the remaining dimensions to fully defined the sketch. Refer to Figure 3-71. Using theleft mouse button select one of the dimensions that are created after offsetting the entitiesand drag the cursor toward the right and using the left mouse button place the dimension atan appropriate place. Arrange all the dimensions using the above method. The fully definedsketch is shown in Figure 3-71.

Saving the SketchSince the document has not been saved once until now, therefore, when you choose the Save

c03-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:45 AM58


button from the Standard toolbar, the Save As dialog box will be displayed. You can enterthe name of the document in this dialog box.

1. Choose the Save button from the Standard toolbar and save the model with thename given below:

\My Documents\SolidWorks\c03\c03-tut02.SLDPRT.

2. Choose File > Close from the menu bar to close the file.


1. The Trim option is also used to extend the sketched entities. (T/F)

2. In the sketching environment you can apply fillets to two parallel lines. (T/F)

3. You can apply a fillet to two nonintersecting entities. (T/F)

4. You cannot offset a single entity; you have to select a chain of entities to create an entityusing the offset tool. (T/F)

5. You can do modifications in the view-only file. (T/F)

Figure 3-71 Fully defined sketch after applying all the relations and dimensions

c03-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:45 AM59


6. The __________ PropertyManager is displayed using the Add Relation button from theSketch Relations toolbar.

7. The __________ dimension is used to dimension a line that is at an angle with respect tothe X axis or the Y axis.

8. The __________ defined sketch is a sketch in which all the entities of the sketch and theirpositions are described by the relations or dimensions, or both.

9. The __________ dimensions or relations are not able to determine the position of one ormore sketched entities.

10. The __________ option is displayed in the Defined In column when the entity is definedas placed in the same sketch.


1. You can invoke the Sketch Relations PropertyManager using the Display/Delete Relationsbutton from ___________ toolbar.

2. The Document Properties - Grid/Snap dialog box is displayed using the __________button from the Sketch toolbar.

3. The ___________ option is used to display all the relations of the sketch in the SketchRelations PropertyManager.

4. The __________ sketch geometry is constrained by too many dimensions and/or relations.Therefore, you have to delete the extra and conflicting relations or dimensions.

5. The __________ relation forces two selected lines, arcs, points, or ellipses to remainequidistant from a centerline.

6. In SolidWorks, by default, the dimensioning between two arcs, two circle, or between an arcand a circle is done from

(a) Centerpoint to centerpoint (b) Centerpoint to tangent(c) Tangent to tangent (d) None

7. Which relation forces the selected arc to share the same centerpoint with another arc or apoint?

(a) Concentric (b) Coradial(c) Merge points (d) Equal

c03-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:45 AM60


8. Which PropertyManager is displayed when you choose the Fillet button from the SketchTools toolbar?

(a) Sketch Fillet (b) Fillet(c) Surface Fillet (d) Sketching Fillet

9. Which dialog box is displayed when you modify a dimension?

(a) Modify Dimensional Value (b) Insert a value(c) Modify (d) None

10. When you add an extra dimension to a sketch or add an extra relation that over defines thesketch, then which dialog box is displayed?

(a) Over defining (b) Delete relation(c) Make Dimension Driven? (c) Add Geometric Relations

EXERCISES

Exercise 1Create the sketch of the model shown in Figure 3-72. Create the sketch and apply the requiredrelations and dimensions and fully define the sketch. The sketch is shown in Figure 3-73. Thesolid model is given only for reference. (Expected time: 30 min)


Figure 3-72 Solid model for Exercise 1 Figure 3-73 Sketch for Exercise 1

c03-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:45 AM61


Figure 3-75 Sketch for Exercise 2Figure 3-74 Solid model for Exercise 2

Figure 3-76 Solid model for Exercise 3 Figure 3-77 Sketch for Exercise 3


Answers to Self-Evaluation Test1. T, 2. F, 3. T, 4. F, 5. T, 6. Add Relations, 7. aligned, 8. fully defined, 9. Dangling, 10. All inthis sketch

c03-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:45 AM62

Chapter 4

Advance Dimensioningand

Base Feature Options

After completing this chapter you will be able to:• Dimension the sketch using the autodimension sketch tool.• Dimension the sketch using the ordinate dimensioning.• Dimension the true length of arc.• Measure Distances and View Section Properties• Create solid base extruded features.• Create thin base extruded features.• Create solid base revolved features.• Create thin base revolved features.• Dynamically rotate the view to display the model from all directions.• Modify the orientation of the view.• Change the display modes of the solid model.

Learning Objectives

c04-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:48 AM1


ADVANCE DIMENSIONING TECHNIQUESIn this chapter, you will learn about some of the advance dimensioning techniques used indimensioning the sketches in SolidWorks. With this release of SolidWorks, you are able to applyall the possible dimensions to a sketch using a single option. This option is known asAutodimension Sketch. The other dimensions options discussed in this chapter arehorizontal dimensioning, vertical dimensioning, ordinate dimensioning, and dimensioningtrue length of an arc. The advanced dimensioning techniques are discussed next.

Autodimension the Sketches

The Autodimension Sketch option is used to automatically apply the dimensions to thesketch. You can apply the absolute dimension, incremental dimension, and ordinatedimension using this option. To apply autodimensions to a sketch, create the sketch

using standard sketching tools and then apply the required relations to the sketch. Now, chooseTools > Dimensions > Autodimension Sketch from the menu bar. The Autodimensionsketch PropertyManager is displayed as shown in Figure 4-1. The various options available inthe Autodimension Sketch PropertyManager are discussed next.

Entities to DimensionThe Entities to Dimension rollout is used to specify the entities on which the dimension has tobe applied. The All entities in sketch radio button is selected to apply the dimension to all theentities drawn in the current sketching environment. This radio button is selected by default ifyou do not select any entity before invoking the Autodimension sketch PropertyManager. TheSelected entities radio button is selected if you have to dimension only the selected entities.When you select this radio button, the Selected Entities to Dimension display area is displayedin the Entities to Dimension rollout. Select the entities to dimension using the select cursor.The name of the selected entities is displayed in the Selected Entities to Dimension displayarea. If you select any entity or entities before invoking the Autodimension sketchPropertyManager, then the Selected entities radio button is selected by default and the nameof the selected entities will be displayed in the Selected Entities to Dimension display area.

Horizontal DimensionsThe Horizontal Dimensions rollout is used to specify the type of horizontal dimension, referencefor the horizontal dimension, and the dimension placement. The various options available inthe Horizontal Dimensions rollout are discussed next.

SchemeThe Scheme area is used to specify the type of dimension to be applied to the sketch. Thevarious types of dimensioning schemes available in the Horizontal Dimensioning Schemedrop-down list are discussed next.

ChainThe Chain option is used for the relative or incremental horizontal dimensioning ofthe sketch. When you invoke the Autodimension sketch PropertyManager and select

Toolbar: Sketch Relations > Autodimension Sketch (Customize to Add)Menu: Tools > Dimensions > Autodimension Sketch

c04-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:48 AM2

Advance Dimensioning and Base Feature Options 4-3

this scheme, a point or a vertical line is selected as the reference entity. This referenceentity is used as a datum for the generation of dimension. The name of selected referenceentity is displayed in the Point or Vertical Line on Baseline display area and thereference entity is displayed in red color in the drawing area. You can also specify auser-defined reference entity.

NoteChain dimensioning should be avoided if the tolerances relative to a common datum are requiredin the part.

BaselineThe Baseline option is used for absolute or datum vertical dimensioning of the sketch.In this dimensioning method, the dimensions are applied to the sketch with respect tothe common datum. When you invoke the Autodimension sketch PropertyManagerand select this option, a point or a vertical line is selected as the reference entity, whichis used as a datum for the generation of dimension. The name of selected referenceentity is displayed in the Point or Vertical Line on Baseline display area and the

Figure 4-1 The Autodimension sketch PropertyManager

c04-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:48 AM3


reference entity is displayed in red color in the drawing area. You can also specify a userdefined reference entity.

OrdinateThe Ordinate option is used for the ordinate dimensioning of the sketch. When youinvoke the Autodimension Sketch PropertyManager and select this option, a point ora vertical line is selected as the reference entity, which is used as a datum for the generationof dimension. The name of selected reference entity is displayed in the Point or VerticalLine on Ordinate Datum display area and the reference entity is displayed in red colorin the drawing area. You can also specify a user defined reference entity.

Dimension placementThe Dimension Placement area of the Horizontal Dimensions rollout is used to define theposition where the generated dimensions will be placed. Two radio buttons are available inthis area. The first radio button is the Above sketch radio button and is selected by default.If you use this option, the horizontal dimensions generated using the Autodimension Sketchtool will be placed above the sketch. If you select the Below sketch radio button, the generateddimensions will be placed below the sketch.

Vertical DimensionsThe Vertical Dimensions rollout is used to specify the type of vertical dimension, reference forthe vertical dimension, and the dimension placement. The various options available in theScheme area are similar to those discussed under the Horizontal Dimensions rollout. Theremaining options are discussed next.

Dimension placementThe Dimension Placement area of the Vertical Dimensions rollout is used to define theposition where the generated dimensions will be placed. The Left of the Sketch radiobutton is selected to place the dimensions on the left of the sketch. The Right of the Sketchradio button is selected to place the dimensions on the right of the sketch. The Right of theSketch radio button is selected by default.

After specifying all the parameters in the Autodimension Sketch PropertyManager, choose theOK button or choose the OK icon from the Confirmation Corner. The dimension will becreated with the selected dimension scheme. Figure 4-2 shows the autodimension created usingthe Chain scheme. Figure 4-3 shows the autodimension created using the Baseline scheme.Figure 4-4 shows the autodimension created using the Ordinate scheme.

NoteAs evident in Figures 4-2 through 4-4, the dimensions added using the Autodim option are notproperly arranged. You need to manually place them at their proper location.

Ordinate Dimensioning of Sketches

The Ordinate option of dimensioning is extensively used in industry for the dimensioning ofshop floor drawings. This is because this type of drawing interprets the drawing in the coordinate

Menu: Tools > Dimensions > Ordinate

c04-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:48 AM4


form and the coordinates are required as input for the NC and CNC machines. In the ordinatedimensioning you have to define a zero (datum); and all the dimensions will be created withrespect to that zero.

NoteIf you want ordinate dimensions in the drawing views then you have to create the ordinatedimensions in the sketch itself, because the dimensions created in the sketches and in part mode aregenerated in drawing mode when you opt for generative dimensioning.

Figure 4-2 Chain dimension created using autodimension option

Figure 4-3 Baseline dimension created using autodimension option

c04-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:48 AM5


After creating the sketch and applying the required relations to the sketch, choose Tools >Dimensions > Ordinate from the menu bar. The select cursor is replaced by the ordinatedimension cursor. For creating the horizontal ordinate dimension, select a vertical line or apoint where you have to define the zero or datum. As soon as you select the line or a point, adimension is attached to the cursor. Now, move the cursor and place the dimension. This datumdimension is a reference dimension; therefore, you cannot change the value of this dimension.Now, select the line or point using the ordinate dimension cursor; the dimension is automaticallyplaced. Continue selecting points or lines to place ordinate dimensions. After creating all thehorizontal ordinate dimensions, choose the Select button. Now, again choose Tools > Dimensions> Ordinate from the menu bar to create the vertical ordinate dimensions. Select a point or ahorizontal line to define the zero and then apply the ordinate dimensions to the sketch. Figure 4-5shows a sketch with ordinate dimensions.

Figure 4-4 Ordinate dimension created using autodimension option

Tip. Choose Tools > Dimensions > Parallel from the menu bar to create theparallel dimension. Using this option you can create the horizontal as well as thevertical dimensions. But you cannot create a aligned dimension using the paralleloption.

Choose Tools > Dimensions > Horizontal from the menu bar to create the horizontaldimension. Using this option you can create only the horizontal dimensions. Generally,this option is used to create a horizontal dimension of an aligned line or a horizontaldimension between two points.

Choose Tools > Dimensions > Vertical from the menu bar to create the verticaldimension. Using this option you can create only the vertical dimensions. Generally,this option is used to create a vertical dimension of an aligned line or a verticaldimension between two points.

c04-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:48 AM6


Dimensioning of the True Length of an ArcIn SolidWorks you can also create the dimension of the true length of an arc, which is one of theadvantages of the sketching environment of SolidWorks. To create the dimension of the truelength, invoke the dimension tools and select the arc using the dimension cursor. Aradial dimension is attached to the cursor. Move the cursor to any of the endpoints of the arc.When the cursor snaps the endpoint, use the left mouse to specify the first endpoint of the arc.A linear dimension is attached to the cursor; move the cursor to the second endpoint of the arcand when the cursor snaps the endpoint, select it. A dimension is attached to the cursor. Movethe cursor to an appropriate place to place the dimension. The dimension of the true length ofthe arc is shown in Figure 4-6.

MEASURING DISTANCES AND VIEWING SECTIONPROPERTIESSolidWorks allows you to measure the distance of the entities and also view the section properties.These tools are discussed next.

Figure 4-5 Ordinate dimension of a sketch

Tip. Using Tools > Dimensions > Ordinate you can create either horizontal orvertical ordinate dimensions. If you want to create only horizontal ordinatedimensions then choose Tools > Dimensions > Horizontal Ordinate. To createvertical ordinate dimensions choose Tools > Dimensions > Vertical Ordinate.

When you are in the selection mode, right-click in the drawing area to invoke theshortcut menu and choose the Dimension option from the shortcut menu to invokethe dimension tool. Now, again right-click to invoke the shortcut menu and choosethe Ordinate Dimension option from the shortcut menu to invoke the ordinatedimension tool. You can choose the Horizontal Ordinate, Vertical Ordinate,Horizontal Dimension, and Vertical Dimension tools from the same shortcut

c04-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:48 AM7


Measuring Distances

The measure tools is used to measure perimeter, angle, radius, and distance betweenlines, points, surfaces, and planes in sketches, 3D models, assemblies, or drawings. Touse the measure tools, you have to invoke the Measure dialog box by choosing Tools >

Measure from the menu bar or by choosing the Measure button from the Tools toolbar. Whenyou choose the Measure button, the Measure dialog box is displayed. The name of the documentin which you are working is displayed at the top of the Measure dialog box. The Measuredialog box is displayed in Figure 4-7. The current cursor is replaced by the measure cursor.Using the measure cursor select the entity or entities to measure. The various options in theMeasure dialog box are discussed next.

Output coordinate system drop-down listIn the Measure dialog box you are provided with an Output coordinate system drop-down list.Using this drop-down list you can specify in reference to which coordinate system you want tomeasure the selected entities. By default, the default option is selected in the drop-down list. Ifyou create a coordinate system, then you can also select that coordinate system from this drop-downlist. Creation of the coordinate system is discussed in the later chapters.

Select items AreaThe Select items area consists of a display box that displays the entities that are selected usingthe measure cursor. When you select the entities using the measure cursor, the name of theselected entity is displayed in the Select items area. You can remove all the entities from theselection set, and select one of the entity from the Select items display area. Select theClear Selections option from the shortcut menu. If you select the Delete option from theshortcut menu then only the selected entity is removed from the selection set.

Figure 4-6 Dimensioning the true length of an arc

Toolbar: Tools > MeasureMenu: Tools > Measure

c04-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:48 AM8


Projection onThe Projection on area is used to specify where the selected entity should be projected. You canproject the selected entity either on the screen or on the specific plane. Then the system willcalculate the measurement of the true projection. This area is provided with two radio buttons;the first radio button is the Screen radio button and the second radio button is the Plane/Faceradio button. You will learn more about planes in the later chapters.

Show output coordinate system in corner of windowThe Show output coordinate system in corner of window check box is selected to display thecoordinate system at the corner of the screen. This check box is selected by default; if you clearthis check box then you will notice that the coordinate system is placed at the origin in thedrawing area.

Measurements AreaAfter selecting the entity or entities to be measured using the measure cursor, you are providedwith the appropriate values of the length, angle, perimeter, and so on displayed in theMeasurements area. New measurements update dynamically when you change the selection ofentities. If the combination of selected entities is not appropriate for the measure function, thena message is displayed in the Measurements area. This message prompts you that the selectionis invalid. If two selected entities are intersecting lines then you are provided the value of theangle between the intersecting entities and the message prompts you that the selected itemsintersect.

Figure 4-7 The Measure dialog box

c04-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:48 AM9


OptionsThe Options button is used to invoke the Measurement Options dialog box. In this dialog boxyou can specify the units for linear measurement, units for angular measurement, materialproperties, and the accuracy level. The Measurement Options dialog box is shown in Figure 4-8.The options in the Measurement Options dialog box are discussed next.

Units AreaThe Units area of the Measurement Options dialog box is used to set the linear and theangular units for measurement. By default, the linear units are selected as millimeters withdecimal upto two places, and the angular units are selected as with decimal upto two decimal.The various options in the Units area are discussed next.

Length unit AreaThe Length unit area is used to set the units and options of linear dimensions formeasuring the entities. The Unit drop-down list is provided at the top right corner ofthe Length unit area. In this drop-down list you can select any type of unit such asAngstroms, Nanometers, Microns, Millimeters, Centimeters, Meters, Microinches,Miles, Inches, Feet, and Feet and Inches. By default, the units selected in the

Figure 4-8 The Measurement Options dialog box

c04-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:48 AM10


drop-down list are Millimeters because during installation you had selected millimetersas the default units. A Decimal places spin box is provided to control the decimalplaces. The other options in the Length unit area are discussed next.

Decimal. The Decimal radio button is available only when you choose the units asMicroinches, Miles, Inches, or Feets and Inches from the Unit drop-down list.This radio button is selected to display the dimension in the decimal form. You canalso specify the decimal places using the Decimal places spin box provided at theright of the Decimal radio button.

Fractions. The Fractions radio button is available only when you choose the unitsas Microinches, Miles, Inches, or Feets and Inches from the Units drop-downlist. This radio button is selected to display the dimension in the fraction form. Youcan also set the value of the denominator using the Denominator spin box providedat the right of the Fractions radio button.

Round to nearest fraction. The Round to nearest fraction check box is selected todisplay the value in fractions by rounding the value to the nearest fraction.

Scientific notation. The Scientific notation check box is selected to display thevalue in the scientific notation units.

Angular unit AreaThe Angular unit area is used to set the angular units for measurement. The Angularunit area is provided with a drop-down list to specify the angular measurement unitsuch as Degrees, Deg/Min, Deg/Min/Sec, and Radians. A Decimal places spin box isalso provided under the drop-down list to specify the decimal places.

Mass Properties

View measurement settingsThe View measurement settings radio button is selected to activate a temporary systemof units. After selecting this radio button if you change the units, it will not affect theunits specified for the document, or the default units of the system for new documents.

View global settingsThe View global settings radio button is selected to display the units specified for theactive document. If you change the unit setting in the Length unit and Angular unitareas and choose the View global settings radio button then the units will be reset to thedefault units of the active document.

View system defaultsThe View system defaults radio button is selected to displays the default units of thesystem for new documents. If you change the unit setting in the Length unit andAngular unit areas and choose the View system defaults radio button then the unitswill be reset to the default units of the system and when you create a new document thedefault units will be displayed.

c04-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:48 AM11


Material Properties areaIn the Material Properties area you can change the density of the material for thecurrent document. You can enter the density value using any units. For example, if the unitsof the part are grams and millimeters, you can enter a density value using pounds andinches. The SolidWorks converts the value to the document’s units when you choose OKfrom the Measurement Options dialog box.

Accuracy levelThe Accuracy level area of the Measurement Options dialog box is used to specify theaccuracy level provided by SolidWorks for the measurement. The Default mass/sectionproperty precision radio button is selected by default; this option calculates faster but theprecision is not very high. The Maximum property precision (Slower) radio button isselected to increase the accuracy and precision for measuring. This option when used slowsthe working of the computer but gives a very precise output result.

Section PropertiesThe Section Properties tool enables you to calculate the section properties of the sketch in thesketching environment or of selected planar face in the part mode and assembly mode. Thesection properties include the area, centroid relative to sketch origin, centroid relative to partorigin, moment of inertia, polar moment of inertia, angle between the principle axes and sketchaxes, and principle moment of inertia. To calculate the section properties, create the sketch. Thesketch must be a closed loop. Choose Tools > Section Properties. The Section Propertiesdialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 4-9.

Figure 4-9 The Section Properties dialog box

c04-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:48 AM12


When you invoke the Section Properties dialog box a red 3D triad is placed at the centroid ofthe sketch. The mass properties of the sketch are displayed in the Section Properties dialogbox. The Output coordinate system drop-down list is used to select the coordinate systemalong which you want to calculate the section properties. By default, the calculation is done withrespect to the default coordinate system. The Selected Items display box is used to display thename of the selected planar face whose section properties are to be calculated. When you are inthe part mode select the face to calculate the section properties, and choose the Recalculatebutton to display the properties. If you want to calculate the section properties of some otherface, clear the previously selected face from the selection set and select the new face and choosethe Recalculate button. The Print button available in the Section Properties dialog box is usedto print the section properties. Using the Options button you can invoke the MeasurementOptions dialog box. This dialog box is used to set the units, density, and accuracy level. Thisdialog box was discussed previously. The Show output coordinate system in the corner ofwindow check box is selected to display the coordinate system at the corner of the drawing area;if you clear this check box then the coordinate system will shift to the origin.

CREATING BASE FEATURES BY EXTRUDING THESKETCHES

The sketches that you have drawn until now can be converted into base features byextruding using the Extruded Boss/Base tool. This tool is available in the Featurestoolbar. After drawing the sketch, as you choose this tool, you will notice that the sketching

environment is closed and the part modeling environment is invoked and the confirmationcorner is displayed. Based on the options and the sketch selected for extruding, the resultantfeature can be a solid feature or a thin feature. If the sketch is closed, it can be converted into asolid feature or a thin feature. However, if the sketch is open, it can be converted into a thinfeature only. The solid and thin features are discussed next.

Creating Solid Extruded FeaturesAfter you have completed drawing and dimensioning the closed sketch and converted it into afully defined sketch, choose the Extrude Boss/Base button from the Features toolbar. You willnotice that the view is automatically changed to a 3D view, the confirmation corner appears onthe top right of the drawing area, and the Extrude PropertyManager is displayed as shown inFigure 4-10.

You will notice that the preview of the base feature will be displayed in temporary graphics andan arrow will appear on the sketch. The arrow appears on the front of the sketch and is transparent.Figure 4-11 shows the preview of the sketch being extruded. Note that if the sketch consists ofsome closed loops inside the outer loop, they will be automatically subtracted from the outerloop while extruding. The various options available in the Base-Extrude PropertyManager arediscussed next.

Toolbar: Features > Extruded Boss/BaseMenu: Insert > Base > Extrude

c04-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:48 AM13


Figure 4-10 Extrude PropertyManager

Figure 4-11 Preview of the feature being extruded using the Extrude-Base PropertyManager

Direction 1The Direction 1 rollout is used to specify the end condition for extruding the sketch in onedirection from the sketch plane. The various options available in the Direction 1 drop-down listare discussed next.

c04-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:48 AM14


End ConditionThe End Condition drop-down list provides the options to define the termination of theextruded feature. Note that since this is the first feature, some of the options available in thisdrop-down list will not be used at this stage. Also, some additional options will be availablelater in this drop-down list. The options that are available to define the termination of thebase feature are discussed next.

BlindThe Blind option is selected by default and this option is used to define the terminationof the extruded base feature by specifying the depth of extrusion. The depth of extrusioncan be specified in the Depth spinner that is displayed below this drop-down list whenyou select the Blind option. Since the Blind option is selected by default, the Depthspinner is also displayed by default. You can reverse the extrusion by selecting theReverse Direction button provided on the left of this drop-down list. Figure 4-12shows the preview of the feature being created by extruding the sketch using the Blindoption.

You can also extrude a sketch to a blind depth by dynamically dragging the featureusing the mouse. Invoke the Extrude-Base PropertyManager and move the mouse tothe transparent arrow and when the color of the arrow changes to red use the left mousebutton. Move the cursor to specify the depth of extrusion and when you specify thedepth of extrusion use the left mouse button to specify the termination of extrudedfeature. The preview of the sketch being dragged is shown in Figure 4-13. The selectcursor will be replaced by the mouse cursor. Use the right mouse button to complete thefeature creation or choose the OK button from the Base-Extrude PropertyManager.

Mid PlaneThe Mid Plane option is used to create the base feature by extruding the base sketchequally in both the directions of the plane on which the sketch is drawn. For example,

Figure 4-12 Preview of the feature being extruded

c04-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:48 AM15


if the total depth of the extruded feature is 30mm, it will be extruded 15mm toward thefront of the plane and 15mm toward the back. The depth of the feature can be definedin the Depth spinner that is displayed below this drop-down list.

Figure 4-14 shows the preview of the feature being created by extruding the sketch usingthe Mid Plane option.

Draft On/OffThe Draft On/Off button is used to specify a draft angle while extruding the sketch. Applyingthe draft angle will taper the resultant feature. This button is not chosen by default. Therefore,the resultant base feature will not have any taper. However, if you want to add a draft angleto the feature, choose this button. The Draft Angle spinner and the Draft outward checkbox will be available. You can enter the draft angle for the feature in the Draft Angle spinner.By default, the feature will be tapered inward as shown in Figure 4-15. If you want to taperthe feature outward, select the Draft outward check box that is displayed below the DraftAngle spinner. The feature created with outward taper is shown in Figure 4-16.

Figure 4-13 Preview of the feature being extruded by dynamically dragging

Tip. Right-click in the drawing area to display the shortcut menu. Using the leftmouse button choose the Mid Plane option from the shortcut menu. Move themouse and use the left mouse button to specify the depth of extrusion.

Tip. You can also extrude an under defined or an over defined sketch. However, ifyou extrude an under defined sketch, a - sign is displayed on the left of the sketch inthe Feature Manager. Similarly, if you extrude an over defined sketch, you willfind a + sign on the left of the sketch in the Feature Manager. To check thesesigns, click the + sign available on the left of Base-Extrude in the FeatureManager. The sketch will be displayed and you can see the + or the - signs.

c04-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:48 AM16


NoteThe Selection Contours rollout is discussed in the later chapters of this book.

Direction 2The Direction 2 check box is selected to invoke the Direction 2 rollout and this rollout is usedto extrude the sketch with different values in the second direction of the sketching plane. Thischeck box will not be available if you select the Mid Plane termination type. Unlike the MidPlane termination option, the depth of extrusion and other parameters in both the directionscan be different. For example, you can extrude the sketch to a blind depth of 10mm and aninward draft of 35° in front of the sketching plane and to a blind depth of 15mm and an outward

Figure 4-14 Preview of the feature being extruded using the Mid Plane option

Figure 4-15 Feature created with outward draft

c04-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:48 AM17


draft of 0° behind the sketching plane as shown in Figure 4-17. When you select the Direction2 check box the Direction 2 rollout is activated. Using the various options available in theDirection 2 rollout you can specify the termination condition for extrusion in the second direction.When you invoke this rollout the preview of direction 2 is displayed on the screen with thedefault values. After setting the values for both the directions, choose the OK button or choosethe OK icon from the confirmation corner. The feature will be created with different values inboth the directions.

NoteThe draft will not be displayed in the preview of the feature that is displayed when you invoke theBase-Extrude PropertyManager unless you extrude the sketch by dynamically dragging.

Figure 4-17 Feature created in both directions with different values

Figure 4-16 Feature created with inward draft

c04-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:48 AM18


Creating Thin Extruded FeaturesThe thin extruded features can be created using a closed or an open sketch. If the sketch isclosed, it will be offsetted inside or outside to create a cavity inside the feature as shown inFigure 4-18.

If the sketch is open, as shown in Figure 4-19, the resultant feature will be as shown in Figure 4-20.Note that you can also apply fillets at all the sharp corners of the open loop while creating thinfeatures.

To convert a closed sketch into a thin feature, choose the Thin Feature checkbox to invoke theThin Feature rollout. The Thin Feature rollout, shown in Figure 4-21, is used to create a thinfeature. However, if the sketch to be extruded is open, then the Thin Feature rollout will bedisplayed when you invoke Base-Extrude PropertyManager.

The options under the Thin Feature rollout of the Extrude PropertyManager are discussednext.

TypeThe options provided in the Type drop-down list are used to select the method to define thethickness of the thin feature. These options are discussed next.

One-DirectionThe One-Direction option is used to add the thickness on one side of the sketch. Thethickness can be specified in the Thickness spinner provided below this drop-down list.

Tip. Select the direction 2 arrow from the drawing area and move the cursor tospecify the depth of extrusion in the second direction and use the left mouse buttonto complete the feature creation.

Figure 4-18 Thin feature created using a closed loop

c04-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:48 AM19


Figure 4-20 Resultant thin feature created with fillets at sharp corners

Figure 4-21 The Thin Feature rollout

Figure 4-19 Open loop to be converted into thin feature

c04-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:49 AM20


For the closed sketches, the direction can be inside or outside the sketch. Similarly, for opensketches, the direction can be below or above the sketch. You can reverse the direction ofthickness using the Reverse check button available on the right of this drop-down list. Thischeck box will be available only when you select the One-Direction option from thisdrop-down list.

Mid-PlaneThe Mid-Plane option is used to add the thickness equally on both the sides of the sketch.The value of the thickness of the thin feature can be specified in the Thickness spinnerprovided below this drop-down list.

Two-DirectionThe Two-Direction option is used to create a thin feature by adding different thickness onboth the sides of the sketch. The thickness values in direction 1 and direction 2 can bespecified in the Direction 1 Thickness spinner and the Direction 2 Thickness spinnerrespectively. These spinners are displayed below the Type drop-down list automaticallywhen you select the Two-Direction option from this drop-down list.

Cap EndsThe Cap Ends check box is displayed only when the sketch selected to convert into a thinfeature is closed. This check box is selected to cap the two ends of the thin extruded feature.Both the ends will be capped with a face of the thickness you specify. When you select this checkbox, the Cap Thickness spinner is displayed on the right of this check box. The thickness ofthe end caps can be specified using this spinner.

Auto-fillet cornersThe Auto-fillet corners check box is displayed only when you select an open sketch to convertinto a thin feature. If you select this check box, all the sharp vertices in the sketch will beautomatically filleted while converting into a thin feature. The radius of the fillet can be specifiedin the Fillet Radius spinner that is displayed below the Auto-fillet corners check box when youselect this check box.

Figure 4-22 shows the thin feature created by extruding an open sketch in both the directions.Notice that a draft angle is applied to the feature while extruding in the front direction and theAuto Fillet option is selected while creating this thin feature.

NoteOnly the corners of the thin features that can accommodate the given radius will be filleted; othercorners that do not accommodate the given radius will not be filleted.

CREATING BASE FEATURES BY REVOLVING THESKETCHESThe sketches that you have drawn until now can also be converted into base features by revolvingusing the Revolved Boss/Base tool. This tool is available in the Features toolbar. However, notethat a sketch can be revolved only if you draw a centerline in the sketch around which the sketchwill be revolved. Also, the sketch must be drawn on one side of the centerline. The Revolved

c04-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:49 AM21


Boss/Base tool will be available only after you draw the centerline in the sketch. Note that thecenterline around which you want to revolve the sketch should not cross the sketch.

After drawing the sketch, as you choose this tool, you will notice that the sketching environmentis closed and the part modeling environment is invoked. Similar to extruding the sketches, theresultant feature can be a solid feature or a thin feature based on the sketch and the optionsselected to revolve. If the sketch is closed, it can be converted into a solid feature or a thinfeature. However, if the sketch is open, it can be converted into a thin feature only. The solid andthin features are discussed next.

Creating Solid Revolved Features

After you have completed drawing and dimensioning the closed sketch and converted itinto a fully defined sketch, choose the Revolve Boss/Base button from the Featurestoolbar. You will notice that the view is automatically changed to a 3D view, the

Revolve PropertyManager will be displayed as shown in Figure 4-23, and the confirmationcorner will also be displayed. Also, the preview of the base feature, as it will be created using thedefault options, will be displayed in temporary shaded graphics. The direction arrow will alsobe displayed in gray color. The various options available in the Revolve Parameters rollout ofthe Revolve PropertyManager are discussed next.

Revolve TypeThe Revolve Type drop-down list provides the options to define the termination of therevolved feature. The options that are available in this drop-down list to terminate the revolvedfeature are discussed next.

Figure 4-22 Thin feature created in both the directions

Toolbar: Features > Revolved Boss/BaseMenu: Insert > Base > Revolve

c04-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:49 AM22


One-DirectionThe One-Direction option is used to revolve the sketch on one side of the plane on whichit is sketched. The angle of revolution can be specified in the Angle spinner displayedbelow this drop-down list. The default value of the Angle spinner is 360deg. Therefore, ifyou revolve the sketch using this value, a complete round feature will be created. You canalso reverse the direction of revolution of the sketch by choosing the Reverse Directionbutton that is displayed when you select this option. Figure 4-24 shows the sketch and thecenterline used to revolve the sketch and Figure 4-25 shows the piston created by revolvingthe sketch through an angle of 360°.

Figure 4-26 shows a piston created by revolving the same sketch through an angle of 270°.

Mid-PlaneThe Mid-Plane option is used to revolve the sketch equally on both the sides of the plane onwhich it is sketched. The angle of revolution can be specified in the Angle spinner. Whenyou choose this option the Reverse Direction button will be unavailable.

Two-DirectionThe Two-Direction option is used to create a revolve feature by revolving the sketch usingdifferent values on both the sides of the plane on which it is sketched. The angle values indirection 1 and direction 2 can be specified in the Direction 1 Angle spinner and theDirection 2 Angle spinner respectively. These spinners are displayed below the RevolveType drop-down list automatically when you select the Two-Direction option from thisdrop-down list.

Figure 4-23 The Revolve PropertyManager

Tip. If the preview of the revolved feature is not complete in the current display ofthe screen, choose the Zoom to Fit button from the View toolbar or choose the F keyfrom the keyboard. The display will be modified such that the preview is displayed inthe current view.

c04-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:49 AM23


NoteIf you create the centerline of the sketch feature for creating a revolve feature from right to left,the sketch will be revolved in the clockwise direction when you create the revolve feature. If youcreate the centerline of the sketch feature from left to right, then the resultant revolve feature willrevolve in counterclockwise direction.

Figure 4-25 Feature created by revolving the sketch through an angleof 360°

Figure 4-24 Sketch to be revolved and the centerline around whichthe sketch will be revolved

c04-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:49 AM24


Creating Thin Revolved FeaturesSimilar to the thin extruded features, the thin revolved features can be created using a closed oran open sketch. If the sketch is closed, it will be offsetted inside or outside to create a cavityinside the feature as shown in Figure 4-27. In this figure, the sketch is revolved through an angleof 180°.

Figure 4-26 Feature created by revolving the sketch through an angleof 270°

Figure 4-27 Thin feature created by revolving the sketch through anangle of 180°

c04-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:49 AM25


If the sketch is open, as shown in Figure 4-28, the resultant feature will be as shown in Figure 4-29.

To convert a closed sketch into a thin feature, select the Thin Feature check box fromBase-Revolve PropertyManager to invoke the Thin Feature rollout. However, if the sketch tobe revolved is open and you invoke the Revolve Boss/Base tool, then the SolidWorks informationbox will be displayed and you will be informed that the sketch is currently open and a nonthin

Figure 4-28 The open sketch to be revolved and the centerline to revolve the sketch

Figure 4-29 Thin feature created by revolving the open sketch throughan angle of 180°

Tip. You can dynamically specify the angle in a revolve feature by dragging thedirection arrows. You can also use the right mouse button to display the shortcutmenu; all the options available in the PropertyManager are also available in theshortcut menu.

c04-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:49 AM26


revolve feature requires a closed sketch. You will be given an option of automatically closing thesketch. If you choose Yes from this dialog box, a line segment will be automatically drawnbetween the first and the last segment of the sketch and the Base-Revolve PropertyManagerwill be displayed. However, if you choose No from this dialog box, the Base-RevolvePropertyManager will be displayed and the Thin Feature rollout will be displayed automatically.The options under the Thin Feature rollout of the Base-Revolve PropertyManager, shown inFigure 4-30, are discussed next.

TypeThe options provided in the Type drop-down list are used to select the method to define thethickness of the thin feature. These options are discussed next.

One-DirectionThe One-Direction option is used to add the thickness on one side of the sketch. Thethickness can be specified in the Direction 1 Thickness spinner provided below thisdrop-down list. For the closed sketches, the direction can be inside or outside the sketch.Similarly, for open sketches, the direction can be below or above the sketch. You can reversethe direction of thickness using the Reverse Direction button available on the right of thisdrop-down list. This button will be available only when you select the One-Direction optionfrom this drop-down list.

Mid-PlaneThe Mid-Plane option is used to add the thickness equally on both the sides of the sketch.The value of the thickness of the thin feature can be specified in the Direction 1 Thicknessspinner provided below this drop-down list.

Two-DirectionThe Two-Direction option is used to create a thin feature by adding different thickness onboth the sides of the sketch. The thickness values in direction 1 and direction 2 can bespecified in the Direction 1 Thickness spinner and the Direction 2 Thickness spinnerrespectively. These spinners are displayed below the Type drop-down list automaticallywhen you select the Two-Direction option from this drop-down list.

Tip. While defining the wall thickness of a thin revolved feature, remember that thewall thickness should be added such that the centerline does not intersect with thesketch. If the centerline intersects with the sketch, the sketch will not be revolved.


c04-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:49 AM27


DYNAMICALLY ROTATING THE VIEW OF THE MODELSolidWorks allows you to dynamically rotate the view in the 3D space so that the solid models inthe current file can be viewed from all directions. This allows you to visually maneuver aroundthe model so that all the features in the model can be clearly viewed. This tool can be invokedeven when you are inside some other tool. For example, you can invoke this tool when theExtrude Feature dialog box is displayed. You can freely rotate the model in the 3D space orrotate it around a selected vertex, edge, or face. Both the methods of rotating the model arediscussed next.

Rotating the View Freely in 3D Space

To rotate the view freely in 3D space, choose the Rotate View button from the Viewtoolbar. You can also invoke this tool by choosing the Rotate View option from theshortcut menu that is displayed when you right-click in the drawing window. When you

are inside some other tool use the right mouse button in the drawing area and choose the View> Rotate View option from the shortcut menu to invoke the rotate view tool. When you invokethis tool, the cursor will be replaced by the rotate view cursor. Now, press the left mouse buttonand drag the cursor to rotate the view. Figure 4-31 shows a model being viewed from differentdirections by rotating the view.

Rotating the View Around a Selected Vertex, Edge, or FaceTo rotate the view around a selected vertex, edge, or face, invoke this tool and move the rotateview cursor close to the vertex, edge, or the face around which you want to rotate the view. When

Figure 4-31 Rotating the view to display the model from differentdirections

Toolbar: View > Rotate ViewMenu: View > Modify > Rotate

c04-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:49 AM28


Tip. To resume rotating the view freely after you have completed rotating it arounda selected vertex, edge, or face, double-click anywhere in the drawing area. Nowwhen you drag the cursor, you will notice that the view is rotated freely in 3D space.

If a 3 button mouse is configured to your system, you can press and drag the middlemouse button to rotate the model freely in 3D space. Note that in this case the rotateview cursor will not be displayed.

it is highlighted, select it using the left mouse button. Next, drag the cursor to rotate the viewaround the selected vertex, edge, or face.

MODIFYING THE VIEW ORIENTATIONAs mentioned earlier, when you invoke the Extrude Boss/Base tool or the Revolve Boss/Basetool, the view is automatically changed to a 3D view and the preview of the model is displayed.SolidWorks allows you to manually change the view orientation using some predefined standardviews or user-defined views. The standard views are available in the Standard View toolbarshown in Figure 4-32. The various tools available in this toolbar are discussed next.

FrontThe Front button is chosen to reorient the view to the front view. This is the default view that iscurrent when you open a new file. The hotkey for the front view is CTRL+1.

BackThe Back button is chosen to reorient the view to the back view. The hotkey for the back view isCTRL+2.

LeftThe Left button is chosen to reorient the view to the left view. The hotkey for the left view isCTRL+3.

RightThe Right button is chosen to reorient the view to the right view. The hotkey for the right viewis CTRL+4.

Figure 4-32 Standard View toolbar

c04-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:49 AM29


TopThe Top button is chosen to reorient the view to the top view. The hotkey for the top view isCTRL+5.

BottomThe Bottom button is chosen to reorient the view to the bottom view. The hotkey for the bottomview is CTRL+6.

IsometricThe Isometric button is chosen to reorient the view to the isometric view. You can view themodel with all three axes in this view. The hotkey for the isometric view is CTRL+7.

Normal ToThe Normal To button is chosen to reorient the view normal to a selected face or plane. Thisbutton will be available only in the sketching environment or when you select a planar face or aplane.

View OrientationYou can also invoke these standard views using the Orientation dialog box. This dialogbox is invoked by choosing the View Orientation button from the View toolbar. Thisdialog box can also be invoked by pressing the SPACEBAR from the keyboard. Note

that when you invoke this dialog box by pressing the SPACEBAR, the dialog box will be displayedat the location where the cursor is placed currently. The Orientation dialog box is shown inFigure 4-33.

You can invoke the view from this dialog box by double-clicking it. You will notice that inaddition to the standard views, two more additional views are displayed. These are the trimetricview and the dimetric view. These options can be used to change the current view to trimetric ordimetric. The buttons that are available on top of this dialog box are discussed next.

Figure 4-33 Orientation dialog box

c04-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:49 AM30


Push-PinYou will notice that the Orientation dialog box is automatically closed when you selecta view, select a point somewhere on the screen, or invoke a tool. If you want that thisdialog box should be retained on the screen, you can pin it at a location by choosing the

Push-Pin button. This is the first button on top of this dialog box. Move the dialog box to thedesired location and then choose this button. The dialog box will be pinned to that locationand will not close when you perform any operation.

New ViewThe New View button is chosen to create a user-defined view and save it in the list of theviews in the Orientation dialog box. Using the various drawing display tools and theRotate View tool, modify the current view and then choose this button. When you

choose this button, the Named View dialog box will be displayed. Enter the name of the view inthe View Name edit box and then choose the OK button. You will notice that a user-definedview is created and it is saved in the list available in the Orientation dialog box.

Update Standard ViewsThe Update Standard Views button is chosen to modify the orientation of the standardviews. For example, if you want that the view that is displayed when you invoke the Backoption from this dialog box should be the front view, then change the current view to

the back view by double-clicking it in the Orientation dialog box. Now, select the Front optionfrom the list of the views available in the Orientation dialog box and then choose the UpdateStandard Views button. The SolidWorks warning box will be displayed and you will be informedthat if you change the standard view, all the other named views in the model will also be changed.If you make the change using the Yes button then the current view that was originally the backview will become the front view. Also, all the other views will be modified automatically.

Reset Standard ViewsThe Reset Standard Views button is chosen to reset the standard settings of all thestandard views in the current drawing. When you choose this button, the SolidWorkswarning box will be displayed and you will be prompted to confirm whether you want to

reset all the standard views to their original settings or not. If you choose Yes, all the standardviews will be reset to their default settings.

Previous ViewThe Previous View option is used to display the previous orientation of the model. Youcan undo upto last 10 views. This option is used only when you change the view of themodel or a drawing or a sketch one or more than one time.

DISPLAY MODES OF THE MODELSolidWorks provides you with various predefined modes to display the model. You can selectany of these display modes from the View toolbar. These modes are discussed next.

c04-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:49 AM31


ShadedThe Shaded mode is the default mode in which the model is displayed. When you opena new file and create a base feature, you will notice that it is automatically shaded. Thisis because the Shaded button is chosen by default in the View toolbar.

Fast HLR/HLVSometimes when you rotate the view of a large assembly, or a model with large number offeatures with Shaded or the Hidden Lines Removed shading modes, the regenerationof the model takes a lot of time. This can be avoided by choosing the Fast HLR/HLG

button in combination with the other shading modes. Choosing this button speeds up theregeneration time and you can easily rotate the view. This is a toggle mode and is turned onwhen you choose this button. This button is chosen in combination with any of the other displaymodes.

Hidden Lines RemovedWhen you choose the Hidden Lines Removed button, the hidden lines in the modelwill not be displayed. Only those edges will be displayed that should be displayed inthe current view.

Hidden Lines VisibleWhen you choose the Hidden Lines Visible button, the model is displayed in thewireframe and the hidden lines in the model will be displayed as dashed lines.

WireframeWhen you choose the Wireframe button, all the hidden lines will be displayed alongwith the visible lines in the model. If you set this display mode for complex models,sometimes it becomes difficult to recognize the visible lines and the hidden lines.

PerspectiveYou can display the perspective view of a model using the Perspective button from theView toolbar. You can create the perspective view of any type of view such as Shaded,Wireframe, Hidden In Gray, or Hidden Lines Removed. You can also save the perspective

view as a named view. Choose View > Modify > Perspective from the menu bar to invoke thePerspective View PropertyManager. Using this PropertyManager you can modify the observerposition using the Object Sizes Away spinner. Figure 4-34 shows a perspective view.

Tip. When you rotate the view with the current display mode set to Hidden LinesRemoved, the hidden lines in the model are automatically displayed while the viewis being rotated. If you do not want to display the hidden lines, choose the FastHLR/HLV button in combination with the Hidden Lines Removed button in theView toolbar and then rotate the view. You will notice that the hidden lines are nomore displayed in the model.

c04-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:49 AM32


Display HLR Edges In Shaded ModeThis button is not available in the View toolbar by default. You will have to add thisbutton to the View toolbar using the Customize dialog box. You can also invoke thisdisplay mode by choosing View > Display > HLR Edges In Shaded Mode from the

menu bar. If this button is chosen, the model will be displayed in shaded mode and the visibleedges of the model are also highlighted.

Shadows In Shaded ModeThe Shadows In Shaded Mode button is used to display the shadow of the model. Alight appears from the top of the model to display the shadow in the current view. Whenyou activate the shadow in the shaded mode then the performance of the system is

affected during the dynamic orientation. The position of the shadow is not changed when yourotate the model in the 3D space. To change the placement of shadow first remove the shadow inthe shaded model using the Shadow in Shaded Mode button and rotate the model; after rotatingthe model use the same button to activate the shadow in the shaded mode. Figure 4-35 shows amodel with shadow in the shaded mode.

Figure 4-34 Perspective view of a model

c04-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:49 AM33


TUTORIALS

Tutorial 1In this tutorial you will open the sketch drawn in Tutorial 2 of Chapter- 3. You will then convertthis sketch into an extruded model by extruding it in two directions as shown in Figure 4-36.The parameters for extruding the sketch are given next.


Figure 4-35 Shadow in active shaded mode

c04-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:49 AM34


Direction 1Depth = 10mmDraft angle = 35°

Direction 2Depth = 15mmDraft angle = 0°

After creating the model, you will rotate the view using the Rotate View tool and then modifythe standard views such that the front view of the model becomes the top view. You will then savethe model with the current settings. (Expected time: 30 min)

The steps that will be followed to complete this tutorial are given next:

a. Open the file of Tutorial 2 of Chapter- 3, refer to Figure 4-37.b. Save this file in the c04 directory with a new name.c. Invoke the Extrude Boss/Base tool and convert the sketch into a model, refer to Figures 4-38

and 4-39.d. Rotate the view using the Rotate View tool to view the model from all the directions, refer to

Figure 4-40.e. Invoke the Orientation dialog box and then modify the standard view, refer to Figure 4-41.

Opening the File of Tutorial 2 of Chapter- 3Since the file that you require is saved in the \My Documents\SolidWorks\c03 directory, youwill have to select this directory and then open the c03-tut2.SLDPRT file.

1. Start SolidWorks by double-clicking its shortcut icon at the desktop of your computer. Closethe Tip of the Day dialog box.

2. Choose the Open Document option from the Welcome to SolidWorks 2003 window.

3. Select the \My Documents\SolidWorks\c03 directory.

All the files that were created in Chapter 3 will be displayed in this directory.

4. Select the c03-tut02.SLDPRT file and then choose the Open button.

Since the sketch was saved in the sketching environment in Chapter 3, it will open in thesketching environment.

Saving the File in the c04 DirectoryIt is recommended that when you open a file of some other chapter, you should save it in thedirectory of the current chapter with some other name before you proceed with modifyingthe file. This is because if you save the file in the current directory, the original file of theother chapter will not be modified.

1. Choose File > Save As from the menu bar to display the Save As dialog box.

c04-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:49 AM35


Since the c03 directory was selected last to open the file, it will be the current directory.

2. Choose the Up One Level button available on the right of the Save in drop-downlist to move to the \SolidWorks directory.

3. Create a new directory with the name c04 using the Create New Folder button.

4. Make the c04 directory current by double-clicking it.

5. Enter the new name of the drawing as c04-tut01.SLDPRT in the File name edit box andthen choose the Save button to save the document.

The file will be saved with the new name and the new file will now be opened on the screen.The sketch that will be displayed on the screen is shown in Figure 4-37.

Extruding the SketchNext, you will invoke the Extrude Boss/Base tool and extrude the sketch using the parametersgiven in the tutorial description.

1. Choose the Extrude Boss/Base button from the Features toolbar to invoke theExtrude PropertyManager as shown in Figure 4-38.

Since the sketch is closed, therefore, only the Direction 1 rollout will be displayed in theExtrude PropertyManager. You will notice that the view is automatically changed to a 3Dview. The preview of the feature, in the temporary shaded graphics with the default values,is shown in the drawing area.

2. Choose the Draft On/Off button from the Direction 1 rollout and then set the value of theDraft Angle spinner to 35.

Figure 4-37 Sketch that will be opened on the screen

c04-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:49 AM36


These are the settings in direction 1. Now, you need to specify the settings for direction 2.

3. Select the Direction 2 check box to invoke the Direction 2 rollout.

You will notice that the default values in this rollout are the same as you specified in theDirection 1 rollout.

Since the Draft On/Off button is selected when you invoke the Direction 2 rollout, therefore,you need to turn this button off. This is because you do not require the draft angle in thesecond direction.

4. Choose the Draft On/Off button from the Direction 2 rollout. Set the value of the Depthspinner to 15 since the depth in the second direction is 15mm.

This completes all the settings for the model in both the directions.

5. Choose the OK button to create the feature or choose the OK icon from the confirmationcorner.

It is recommended that you change the view to isometric view after creating the feature sothat you can properly view the feature.

6. Choose the Isometric button from the Standard Views toolbar. The isometric viewof the resultant solid model is shown in Figure 4-39.

Rotating the ViewAs mentioned earlier, you can rotate the view so that you can view the model from all thedirections.

Figure 4-38 Extrude Feature dialog box

c04-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:49 AM37


1. Choose the Rotate View button from the View toolbar.

The arrow cursor will be replaced by the rotate view cursor.

2. Press and hold down the left mouse button and drag the cursor on the screen to rotate theview as shown in Figure 4-40.

You will notice that the model is being displayed from different directions. Note that whenyou rotate the view, the model is not being rotated. The camera that is used to view themodel is being rotated around the model.

Figure 4-39 Isometric view of the solid model

Figure 4-40 Rotating the view to display the model from different directions

c04-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:49 AM38


3. After viewing the model from all the directions, choose the Isometric button againfrom the Standard Views toolbar to change the current view to the isometric view.

Modifying the Standard ViewsAs mentioned in the tutorial description, you need to modify the standard views such thatthe front view of the model becomes the top view. This is done using the Orientation dialogbox.

1. Press the SPACEBAR on the keyboard to invoke the Orientation dialog box.

The orientation dialog box is automatically closed as soon as you perform any other operation.Therefore, you will have to pin this dialog box so that it is not closed automatically.

2. Hold the Orientation dialog box by selecting it on the blue bar at top of this dialog box andthen drag it to the top right corner of the drawing window.

3. Choose the Push Pin button to pin this dialog box at the top right corner of thedrawing window. Pinning the dialog box ensures that the dialog box is notautomatically closed when you perform any other operation.

4. Double-click the Front option in the list box of the Orientation dialog box.

The current view will be automatically changed to the front view and the model will now bedisplayed from the front.

5. Select the Top option from the list box by selecting it once.

Make sure you do not double-click this option. This is because if you double-click thisoption, the model will be displayed from the top.

6. Now, choose the Update Standard Views button to update the standard views.

The SolidWorks warning box will be displayed and you will be warned that modifying thestandard views will change the orientation of any named view in the drawing.

7. Choose Yes from this dialog box to modify the standard views.

8. Now, double-click the Isometric option provided in the list box of the Orientation dialogbox. You will notice that the isometric view is different now, see Figure 4-41.

9. Choose the Push Pin button in the Orientation dialog box again and pick apoint anywhere in the drawing area to close the dialog box.

Saving the ModelSince the name of the document was specified at the beginning, you just have to choose thesave button now to save the file.

c04-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:49 AM39


1. Choose the Save button from the Standard toolbar to save the model.

The model will be saved with the name \My Documents\SolidWorks\c04\c04-tut01.SLDPRT.


Tutorial 2In this tutorial you will open the sketch drawn in Exercise 1 of Chapter- 3. You will then createa thin feature by revolving the sketch through an angle of 270-degree as shown in Figure 4-42.You will offset the sketch outwards while creating the thin feature.

Figure 4-42 Revolved model for Tutorial 2

Figure 4-41 Model displayed from modified isometric view

c04-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:49 AM40


After creating the model you will set the display type to Hidden Lines Removed and will rotatethe view to display the model from all the directions. (Expected time: 30 min)

The steps that will be followed to complete this tutorial are given next:

a. Open the sketch of Exercise 1 of Chapter- 3, refer to Figure 4-43.b. Save it in the current directory.c. Invoke the Revolve Boss/Base tool and revolve the sketch through an angle of 270-degree,

refer to Figure 4-45.d. Change the current view to isometric view and then change the display type to Hidden

Lines Removed, refer to Figure 4-46.e. Rotate the view using the Rotate View tool to display the model from different directions,

refer to Figure 4-47.

Opening the file of Exercise 1 of Chapter- 3Since the file that you require is saved in the \My Documents\SolidWorks\c03 directory, youwill have to select this directory and then open the c03-exr1.SLDPRT file.

1. Choose the Open button from the Standard dialog box to display the Open dialogbox.

The c04 directory will be current in this dialog box.

2. Select the \My Documents\SolidWorks\c03 directory.

All the files that were created in Chapter 3 will be displayed in this directory.

3. Select the c03-exr01.SLDPRT file and then choose the Open button.

The file will be opened in the sketching environment. Also, you will notice that the file ismaximized in the SolidWorks window. This is because in the previous tutorial you selectedthe option to maximize the files when opened.

Saving the File in the c04 DirectoryAs mentioned earlier, it is recommended that you save the file with a new name so that theoriginal file is not modified.

1. Choose File > Save As from the menu bar to display the Save As dialog box.

Since the c03 directory was selected last to open the file, it will be the current directory.

2. Choose the Up One Level button available on the right of the Save in drop-down list tomove to the \SolidWorks directory.

3. Make the c04 directory current by double-clicking it.

c04-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:49 AM41


4. Enter the name of the document in the File name edit box as c04-tut02.SLDPRT. Choosethe Save button to save the file. The sketch that will be displayed on the screen is shown inFigure 4-43.

Revolving the SketchThe sketch consists of two centerlines. The first centerline was used to mirror the sketchedentities and the other one was drawn to revolve the sketch. However, if you choose theRevolve Boss/Base button, the Revolve PropertyManager will not be displayed. Instead,the SolidWorks warning box will be displayed and you will be informed that the sketchshould have either a single centerline or you should select a centerline before invoking thistool. Therefore, to revolve the sketches that have more than one centerlines, you need tofirst select the centerline and then invoke the Revolve Boss/Base tool.

1. Select the horizontal centerline and choose the Revolve Boss/Base button from theFeatures toolbar.

The current view will be changed to a 3D view and the Revolve PropertyManager will bedisplayed. The confirmation corner will also be displayed. Since the sketch is closed, therefore,only the Revolve Parameters rollout will be displayed in this PropertyManager. Thepreview of a complete revolved feature in temporary shaded graphics will be displayed onthe screen. Since the preview of the model is not displayed properly in the current view,therefore, you have to use the zoom to fit option. Also, since you need to create a thinfeature, you need to select the Thin Feature check box from the Revolve PropertyManager.

2. Choose the Zoom to Fit button from the View toolbar or press the F key from thekeyboard.

3. Set the value of the Angle spinner to 270.

Figure 4-43 Sketch for the revolved model

c04-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:49 AM42


The preview of the revolved model will also be modified accordingly. Note that if thehorizontal centerline was drawn from left to right, then the direction of revolution has to bereversed.

4. Select the Thin Feature check box to invoke the Thin Feature rollout as shown in Figure 4-44.

5. Set the value of the Wall Thickness spinner to 5.

You will notice that the preview of the thin feature is shown outside the original sketch.

6. Choose the OK button to create the revolved feature or choose the OK icon from theconfirmation corner.

You will notice that the revolved feature is created. As evident from the model, the thinfeatures are hollowed inside and have some wall thickness.

7. Choose the Isometric button from the Standard Views toolbar to change the viewto isometric view. The revolved feature is shown in Figure 4-45.

NoteIf you are working on Windows XP operating system, the shadow will be automatically displayed.

Figure 4-44 Thin Feature rollout

Figure 4-45 Model created by revolving the sketch

c04-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:49 AM43


Changing the Display TypeAs mentioned in the tutorial description, you need to change the display type to HiddenLines Removed. In this type of display mode, the model will be shown with hidden linesremoved. You can set this display type by choosing its button available in the View toolbar.

1. Choose the Hidden Lines Removed button from the View toolbar.

You will notice that the model is no more shaded. However, at the same time the hiddenlines in the model will be suppressed and will not be displayed. The model with this displaytype is shown in Figure 4-46.

Rotating the ViewNext, you need to rotate the view so that you can view the model from all the directions. Asmentioned earlier, the view can be rotated using the Rotate View tool.

1. Choose the Rotate View button from the View toolbar.


2. Press the left mouse button and drag the cursor on the screen to rotate the view. Figure 4-47shows the model being rotated with hidden lines removed.

NoteIf the hidden lines are displayed while rotating the model, you need to set the hidden line displayoption. Choose View > Display > Use Fast HLR/HLV from the menu bar.

3. Choose the Isometric button from the Standard Views toolbar to change the currentview to isometric view.

Figure 4-46 Model displayed in Hidden Lines Removed mode

c04-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:49 AM44


Saving the SketchSince the name of the document was specified at the beginning, you just have to choose thesave button now to save the file.

1. Choose the Save button from the Standard toolbar to save the model.

The model will be saved with a name \My Documents\SolidWorks\c04\c04-tut02.SLDPRT.


Tutorial 3In this tutorial you will create the model shown in Figure 4-48. The dimensions of the model areshown in Figure 4-49. The extrusion depth of the model is 20mm. After creating the model,rotate the view and then change the view back to isometric view before saving the model.


The steps that will be used to complete this tutorial are given next:

a. Open a new part file and then switch to the sketching environment.b. Draw the outer loop of the sketch and then draw the sketch of three inner cavities. Finally,

draw the six circles inside the outer loop, refer to Figures 4-50 through 4-54.c. Invoke the Extrude Boss/Base tool and extrude the sketch through a distance of 20mm,

refer to Figure 4-55.d. Rotate the view using the Rotate View tool.e. Change the current view to isometric view and then save the model.

Figure 4-47 Rotating the model with hidden lines suppressed

c04-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:49 AM45


Figure 4-49 Dimensions of the model for Tutorial 3

Opening a New Part File1. Choose the New button from the Standard toolbar and open a new part file using

the New SolidWorks Document dialog box.

2. Choose the Sketch button from the Sketch toolbar to switch to the sketchingenvironment for drawing the sketch.

Drawing the Outer LoopWhen the sketch consists of more than one closed loop, it is recommended that you addrelations and dimensions to the outer loop first so that it is fully defined. Next, draw the


c04-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:49 AM46


inner loops one by one and add relations and dimensions to them. Therefore, you will firstdraw the outer loop first and then add the relations and dimensions to it.

1. Draw a circle in the first quadrant and then dimension it so that it is forced to a diameter of100mm.

2. Locate the center of the circle at a distance of 70mm along X and Y directions fromthe origin by adding dimensions in both the directions. Choose the Zoom to Fitbutton to fit the display on the screen.

3. Draw a horizontal centerline from the center of the circle.

4. Draw a circle at the intersection of the centerline and the bigger circle.

5. Trim the part of the sketch so that the sketch looks similar to the one shown in Figure 4-50.

6. Dimension the smaller arc so that it is forced to a radius of 10mm.

7. Add the Coincident relation to the centerpoint of the smaller arc and the circumference ofthe outer arc.

You will notice that as you add the dimension and relations to the sketch, it turns black incolor. This suggests that the sketch is fully defined.

Next, you will create a circular pattern of the smaller arc. The total number of instances inthe pattern is 6 and the total angle is 360-degree.

Figure 4-50 Sketch after trimming the unwanted portion

c04-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:49 AM47


8. Select the smaller arc using the Select tool and then choose the Circular SketchStep and Repeat button from the Sketch Tools toolbar.

The Circular Sketch Step and Repeat dialog box will be displayed and the cursor will bereplaced by the circular pattern cursor.


The circular pattern cursor will turn yellow in color.

10. Press and hold the left mouse button down at the control point and then drag it to thecenter of the outer arc in the sketch. Release the left mouse button when the cursor turnsyellow in color.


You will notice that all the instances of the pattern are black in color. This is because youhave already applied the dimensions and relations to the original instance and so the otherinstances are also fully defined.

12. Trim the unwanted portion of the outer arc using the Sketch Trim tool. This completes theouter loop. The sketch at this stage should look similar to the one shown in Figure 4-51.

Drawing the Sketch of the Inner SlotsNow, you need to draw the sketch of the inner cavities. You will draw the sketch of one of thecavities and then add the required relations and dimensions to it. Next, you will create acircular pattern of this cavity. The number of instances in the circular pattern will be 3.


c04-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:49 AM48


1. Using the Centerpoint Arc tool, draw an arc with the center at the centerpoint of the outerarc of 100mm diameter.

2. Dimension this arc such that it is forced to a radius of 30mm. Also, add the angular dimensionsto the arc, refer to Figure 4-52. The arc will turn black in color, suggesting that it is fullydefined.

3. Offset the last arc outward through a distance of 10mm using the Offset Entities tool.

The new arc created using the Offset tool is also black in color. Also, a dimension with thevalue 10mm will be created between the two arcs.

4. Close the two ends of the arc using the Tangent Arc tool. This completes the sketch of oneof the inner cavities. All the entities in the sketch at this stage should be displayed in blackcolor as shown in Figure 4-52.

Next, you will create a circular pattern of the inner slot. This is done using the CircularSketch Step and Repeat tool.

5. Select all the entities in the sketch of the inner slot and then choose the CircularSketch Step and Repeat button from the Sketch Tools toolbar.

The Circular Sketch Step and Repeat dialog box will be displayed and the center of thecircular pattern is again placed at the origin.

6. Hold the left mouse button down at the control point provided at the end of the arrowdisplayed at the origin and drag it to the center of the outer arc in the sketch.

Figure 4-52 Sketch after drawing the sketch of the inner cavity

c04-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:49 AM49


7. Set the value of the Number spinner in the Step area to 3 and then choose the OK buttonto create the circular pattern.

This completes the sketch of the inner cavities. The sketch after creating the circular patternof the inner cavities is shown in Figure 4-53.

Drawing the Sketch for the HolesNext, you need to draw the sketch for the holes. You will draw one of the circles and thenadd dimension to it. Then you will create a circular pattern of the circle.

1. Taking the centerpoint of one of the arcs on the outer arc of 100mm diameter, draw a circleand then dimension it to force it to a diameter of 10mm.

The circle will turn black in color when you dimension it.

2. Select the circle using the Select tool and then choose the Circular Sketch Stepand Repeat button from the Sketch Tools toolbar.

3. Drag the center of the circular pattern to the center of the outer arc.

4. Set the value of the Number spinner in the Step area to 6. Choose OK to create the pattern.All the instances in the pattern will be displayed in black color.

This completes the sketch of the model. The final sketch of the model is shown in Figure 4-54.

Extruding the SketchThe next step after drawing the sketch is to extrude it. The sketch will be extruded using theExtrude Boss/Base tool.

Figure 4-53 Sketch after creating the circular pattern

c04-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:49 AM50


1. Choose the Extrude Boss/Base button from the Features toolbar to invoke theExtrude PropertyManager.

The current view will be changed to a 3D view and the Extrude PropertyManager will bedisplayed. Also, the preview of the model as it will be created using the default values will bedisplayed on the screen.

2. Set the value of the Depth spinner to 20 and then choose the OK button to extrude thesketch.

3. Choose the Isometric button from the Standard Views toolbar to change the viewto isometric view. The completed model for Tutorial 3 is shown in Figure 4-55.

Rotating the View1. Choose the Rotate View button from the View toolbar.


2. Press the left mouse button and drag the cursor on the screen to rotate the view.

3. Choose the Isometric button from the Standard Views toolbar.

Saving the SketchSince the document has not been saved even once until now, therefore, when you choose theSave button from the Standard toolbar, the Save As dialog box will be displayed. You canenter the name of the document in this dialog box.

Figure 4-54 Final sketch of the model

c04-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:49 AM51






1. In SolidWorks, a sketch is revolved using the Base-Extrude PropertyManager. (T/F)

2. You can also specify the depth of extrusion dynamically in the preview of the extrudedfeature. (T/F)

3. You can invoke the drawing display tools such as Zoom to Fit while the preview of a modelis displayed on the screen. (T/F)

4. When you rotate the view with the current display mode set to Hidden Lines Removed, thehidden lines in the model are automatically displayed while the view is being rotated. (T/F)

5. __________ tool is used to display the perspective view of a model.

6. The Cap Ends check box is displayed in the Extrude Thin Feature dialog box only whenthe sketch selected to create a thin feature is __________.

Figure 4-55 Final model for Tutorial 3

c04-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:49 AM52


7. The __________ check box is used to create a feature with different values in both thedirections of the sketching plane.

8. The __________ check box is used to apply the automatic fillets while creating a thinfeature.

9. The ___________ button is used to display the shadow in the shaded mode.

10. To resume rotating the view freely after you have completed rotating it around a selectedvertex, edge, or face, __________ any where in the drawing area.


1. You can also invoke the Rotate View tool by choosing the Rotate View option from the__________ that is displayed when you right-click in the drawing window.

2. When you choose the Wireframe button, all the __________ lines will be displayed alongwith the visible lines in the model.

3. You can also modify the parallel view to perspective view by choosing __________ from themenu bar.

4. When you invoke the Extrude Boss/Base tool or the Revolve Boss/Base tool, the view isautomatically changed to a __________.

5. The thin revolved features can be created using a __________ or an __________ sketch.

6. Which one of the following buttons is chosen to modify the orientation of the standardviews?

(a) Update Standard Views (b) Reset Standard Views(c) None (d) Both

7. Which one of the following buttons is not available in the View toolbar by default?

(a) Hidden Lines Removed (b) Hidden In Gray(c) Shaded (d) Display HLR Edges In Shaded Mode

8. Which one of the following parameters will not be displayed in the preview of the model?

(a) Depth (b) Draft angle(c) None (d) Both

c04-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:49 AM53


9. If the sketch is open, it can be converted into

(a) Thin feature (b) Solid feature(c) None (d) Both

10. In SolidWorks, the circular pattern of the sketched entities is created using which one of thefollowing tools?

(a) Circular Pattern (b) Circular Sketch Step and Repeat(c) None (d) Both

EXERCISES

Exercise 1Create the model shown in Figure 4-56. The sketch of the model is shown in Figure 4-57. Createthe sketch and dimension the sketch using the autodimension option. The extrusion depth ofthe model is 15mm. After creating the model, rotate the view. (Expected time: 30 min)

Figure 4-56 Model for Exercise 1

c04-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:49 AM54


Figure 4-57 Sketch of the model for Exercise 1

Exercise 2Create the model shown in Figure 4-58. The sketch of the model is shown in Figure 4-59. Createthe sketch and dimension the sketch using the autodimension tool. The extrusion depth of themodel is 25mm. Modify the standard view such that the current front view of the model shouldbe displayed when you invoke the top view. (Expected time: 30 min)


c04-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:49 AM55


Figure 4-59 Sketch of the model for Exercise 2

Answers to Self-Evaluation Test1. F, 2. T, 3. T, 4. T, 5. Perspective, 6. closed, 7. Both Directions, 8. Instance deleted, 9.shortcut menu, 10. double-click

c04-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 9:49 AM56

Chapter 5

Creating ReferenceGeometries

After completing this chapter you will be able to:• Create reference plane.• Create reference axis.• Create reference coordinate system.• Create model using other Boss/Base options.• Create model using the contour selection technique.• Create a cut feature.• Create multiple disjoint bodies.

Learning Objectives

c05-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 10:13 AM1


Figure 5-1 A multifeatured model

IMPORTANCE OF THE SKETCHING PLANESIn the previous chapter you created the basic models by extruding or revolving the sketches.All of these models were created on a single sketching plane, the Front plane. But most of themechanical designs consist of various features such as the sketched features, referencedgeometries, and placed features. These features are integrated together to complete a model.Most of these features lie on different planes. When you open a new SolidWorks documentand enter the sketching environment and create a sketch, the sketch is created on the defaultplane, which is the Front plane. This is because the Front plane is selected by default whenyou enter the sketching environment. You can also create the base feature on a plane otherthan the default plane. To create additional features, you need to select an existing plane, ora planar surface, or you have to create a plane that will be used as a sketching plane to createthe sketch. Consider the model shown in Figure 5-1, which is created using various features.

The base feature of this model is shown in Figure 5-2. The sketch for the base feature isdrawn on the Top plane. After creating the base feature you will have to create the otherfeatures, which include sketched features, placed features, and referenced features, seeFigure 5-3. The boss features, and cut features, are the sketched features that require sketchingplanes where you can draw the sketch of the features.

It is evident from Figure 5-3 that the features added to the base feature are not created on thesame plane on which the sketch for the base feature is created. Therefore, to draw the sketchesof other sketched features you will need to define other sketching planes.

REFERENCE GEOMETRYThe reference geometry features are the features that consist of no mass and no volume.These are available only to assist you in the creation of the models. They act as a reference fordrawing the sketches for features, defining the sketch plane, assembling the components,references for various placed features and sketched features, and so on. The reference geometry

c05-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 10:13 AM2

Creating Reference Geometries 5-3

is widely used in creating complex models; therefore, one must have a good understandingof reference geometry. In SolidWorks reference geometry exists as reference planes or planes,reference axis, and reference coordinate system.

Reference PlanesGenerally, all the engineering components or designs are multifeatured models. Also, asdiscussed earlier, all the features of a model are not created on the same plane on which thebase feature is created. Therefore, you have to select one of the default planes or create a newplane that will be used as the sketching plane for the second feature. It is clear from theabove discussion that either you can use the default planes as the sketching plane or you cancreate a plane that can be used as a sketching plane. The default planes and the creation of anew plane are discussed next.

Figure 5-2 Base feature for the model

Figure 5-3 Model after adding other features

c05-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 10:13 AM3


Tip. You can display the default planes in the drawing area using the followingprocedure:

Press and hold the CTRL key from the keyboard and one by one select the Front,Top, and the Right planes from the FeatureManager Design Tree. Right-clickto display the shortcut menu and choose the Show option from this shortcut menuto display the planes in the drawing area. Choose the Isometric button from theStandard Views toolbar. The default planes are transparent and the boundary ofthe planes is displayed in gray color. Generally, it is not recommended that youdisplay the planes because sometimes may interfere while selecting entities.

To display the shaded planes, choose Tools > Options from the menu bar to invokethe System Options - General dialog box. Choose the Display/Selection optionfrom the left of this dialog box; the name of the dialog box will be displayed as theSystem Options - Display/Selection dialog box. Select the Display shadedplanes check box from this dialog box and choose the OK button.

After displaying the planes in shaded form, invoke the Rotate View tool and dragthe Rotate view cursor to rotate the shaded planes. You will observe that one side ofthe plane is displayed in green color and the other side of the plane is displayed inred color. The green side of the plane symbolizes the positive side and the red side ofthe plane symbolizes the negative side. This means that when you create a extrudefeature, the depth of extrusion will be assigned to the positive side of the plane bydefault. When you create a cut feature the depth of the cut feature is assigned to thenegative direction by default.

Default PlanesWhen you create a new SolidWorks part document, SolidWorks provides you with three defaultplanes. These there planes are

1. Front plane2. Top plane3. Right plane

The orientation of the component depends on the sketch of the base feature. Therefore, it isrecommended that you carefully select the sketching plane for creating the sketch for thebase feature. The sketch plane for drawing the sketch of the base feature can be one of thethree datum planes provided by default. If you invoke the sketcher environment withoutselecting any sketching plane, the sketch is created on the Front plane by default. You canselect the sketching planes before invoking the sketcher environment from theFeatureManager Design Tree available on the left of the graphics screen. The FeatureManagerDesign Tree with three default planes is displayed in Figure 5-4.

When you work in Assembly mode of SolidWorks, you will also find three default assemblyplanes. The default assembly planes will be discussed in the later chapters.

c05-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 10:13 AM4


Tip. When you have to create any multifeatured solid model, first try to visualizethe number of features in that model and then decide which feature in the modelcan be considered as the base feature.

Figure 5-4 FeatureManagerDesign Tree with default planes

Creating New Planes

Reference planes or planes are used to draw sketches for the sketched features. Theseplanes are also used to create a placed feature like holes, reference an entity or afeature, and so on. The plane can also be selected to draw the sketch for a sketched

feature and these planes are known as sketch planes. You can also select a planar face of afeature that will be used as a sketching plane. Generally, it is recommended that you use theplanar faces of the features as the sketching planes. However, sometimes you have to create asketch at a plane that is at some offset distance from a plane or a planar face. In this case youhave to create a new plane at an offset distance from a sketching plane or a planar face.

Consider another case where you have to define a sketching plane tangent to a cylindricalface of a shaft. You have to create a plane tangent to the cylindrical face of the shaft and thisplane will be used as a sketching plane. In SolidWorks, there are six method to create planes.Choose the Plane button from the Reference Geometry toolbar to invoke the PlanePropertyManager. The confirmation corner is also displayed at the top right corner of thedrawing area. The Plane PropertyManager is displayed in Figure 5-5. Various options availablein the Plane PropertyManager to create new planes are discussed next.

Creating a Plane Using Through Lines/PointsThe Through Lines/Points option is used to create a plane that passes through an edgeand a point, an axis and a point, or a sketch line and a point. Using this option you canalso create a plane that passes through three points. The selected point can be a sketchedpoint or a vertex. To create a plane using this option, invoke the Plane PropertyManagerand choose the Through Lines/Points button and select the required entities from thedrawing area. The name of the selected entities will be displayed in the Reference Entities

Toolbar: Reference Geometry > PlaneMenu: Insert > Reference Geometry > Plane

c05-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 10:13 AM5


Figure 5-5 Plane PropertyManager

selection list. Choose the OK button from the Plane PropertyManager. Figure 5-6 showsan edge and a vertex selected to create a plane. The resultant plane is displayed inFigure 5-7. The creation of a new plane by selecting three points is displayed inFigures 5-8 and 5-9.

Creating a Plane Parallel to an Existing Plane or Planar FaceThe Parallel Plane option is used to create a plane that is parallel to another plane or aplanar surface and passes through a point. To create a plane using this option, invoke the

Figure 5-6 Selecting the edge and vertex Figure 5-7 Resultant plane

c05-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 10:13 AM6


Figure 5-8 Selecting the vertices Figure 5-9 Resultant plane

Plane PropertyManager and then choose the Parallel Plane button from thisPropertyManager. Now, select the plane or a planar face to which the newly createdplane will be parallel. Then select a sketched point or midpoint of an edge. The newlycreated plane will pass through this point. Choose the OK option. Figure 5-10 shows aplanar face and the point selected to create the parallel plane. Figure 5-11 shows theresultant plane.

Creating a Plane at an Angle to an Existing Plane or a Planar FaceThe At Angle option is used to create a plane at an angle to the selected plane or aplanar face and passes through an edge, axis, or sketched line. To create a plane at anangle, choose the At Angle button from the Plane PropertyManager. The Angle spinneris invoked. The Reverse direction check box and Number of Plane to Create spinnerappear below the Distance spinner in the Plane PropertyManager as shown inFigure 5-12. Now, using the left mouse button select an edge, an axis, or a sketched linethrough which the plane will pass. Next, you have to select a planar face or a plane todefine the angle. Now, set the angle value using the Angle spinner. You can reverse thedirection of plane creation by selecting the Reverse direction check box. You can also

Figure 5-10 Selecting the planar face and edge Figure 5-11 Resultant plane

c05-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 10:13 AM7


Figure 5-13 Selecting the edge and the planar face Figure 5-14 Resultant plane

Figure 5-12 Plane PropertyManager with At Angle option selected

create multiple planes by increasing the value of the Number of Planes to Create spinner.Figure 5-13 shows a planar face and edge selected. Figure 5-14 shows the resultant planecreated at an angle of 45º to the selected plane.

Creating a Plane Using Offset DistanceThe Offset Distance option is used to create a plane at an offset distance from a selectedplane or planar face. To create a plane using this option, choose the Offset Distancebutton from the Plane PropertyManager. When you invoke this option, the Distancespinner is invoked. Also, the Reverse direction check box and the Number of Planes toCreate spinner are displayed below the Distance spinner in the Plane PropertyManager.Select a plane or a planar face and set the value of distance in the Distance spinner andchoose the OK button from the Planar PropertyManager. You can reverse the directionof plane creation by selecting the Reverse direction check box. You can also create multipleplanes by increasing the value of the Number of Planes to Create spinner. Figure 5-15shows a plane selected to create parallel plane and Figure 5-16 shows the resultant planecreated at the required offset.

c05-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 10:13 AM8


Figure 5-15 Selecting the plane Figure 5-16 Resultant plane

Creating a Plane Normal to CurveThis option is used to create a plane normal to a curve. To create a plane normal to acurve, choose the Normal to Curve button from the Plane PropertyManager. When youchoose the Normal to Curve button, the Set origin on curve check box is displayed.Now, select a curve such as a sketched arc, circle, spline, or circular edge. As soon as youselect the curve, the preview of the plane is displayed in the drawing area. Choose theOK button from the Plane PropertyManager or choose the OK icon from the confirmationcorner. Figure 5-17 shows a curve to create the plane. The Set origin on curve check boxis selected to place the origin on curve. By default, this check box is clear. Figure 5-18shows the resultant plane created normal to the selected curve.

Note If you select the curve near the first endpoint to create a plane normal to the curve, the planewill be created at the first endpoint of the curve. If you select the curve near the second endpoint,the plane will be created normal to that curve near the second endpoint.

Tip. You can also create the planes by dynamically dragging an existing plane. Forcreating a plane by dragging, you do not need to invoke the PlanePropertyManager. Using the left mouse button select the plane from the FeatureManager Design Tree or Drawing area. Press and hold down the CTRL key onthe keyboard. Now, move the cursor to the selected plane and when the cursor isreplaced by the move cursor, press and hold down the left mouse button and dragthe cursor. You will notice that the value of distance in the Distance spinner of thePlane PropertyManager will modify and the preview of the plane is displayed inthe drawing area. After dragging the plane to a required location release the leftmouse button. Right-click and choose the OK option or choose the OK button fromthe Plane PropertyManager.

You can also create a plane at an angle by dragging. To create a plane at an angleby dragging, select an edge or an axis and an existing plane. Now, hold the CTRLkey and drag the mouse. Enter the angle value in the Angle spinner.

c05-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 10:13 AM9


Figure 5-17 Edge to be selected Figure 5-18 Resultant plane

Creating a Plane On SurfaceThe On Surface option is used to create a plane passing through a point on the selectedplane or planar surface. To create a plane on surface, choose the On Surface button fromthe Plane PropertyManager and select the surface on which you want to create theplane. Next, select the sketched point. The preview of the plane is displayed in thedrawing area and you have to right-click to choose the OK option. If the sketch is createdon a plane at an offset distance from the selected surface, the Project to nearest locationon surface and Project onto surface along sketch normal radio buttons, and the OtherSolutions button are displayed on the Plane PropertyManager. Select any of the radiobuttons according to requirement. You can also view the other solutions of the planecreation using the Other Solutions button from the Plane PropertyManager. Figure 5-19shows the selection of references for the plane creation and Figure 5-20 shows the resultantplane created.

Figure 5-19 References to be selected Figure 5-20 Resultant plane

c05-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 10:13 AM10


Creating Reference Axis

The Reference Axis option is used to create a reference axis or construction axis.These axis are the parametric lines passing through a model, feature, or referenceentity. A reference axis is used to create reference planes, coordinate systems, circular

patterns, and for applying mates in the assembly. These are also used as reference whilesketching, or creating features. The reference axes are displayed in the model as well as inthe Feature Manager Design Tree. When you create a circular feature, a temporary axis isautomatically created. You can display the temporary axis by choosing View > TemporaryAxis from the menu bar. In SolidWorks you have to invoke the Reference Axis dialog box tocreate the reference axis. You can invoke the Reference Axis dialog box using the Axisbutton from the Reference Geometry toolbar or by choosing Insert > Reference Geometry> Axis from the menu bar. The Reference Axis dialog box is displayed in Figure 5-21. Thevarious options available in this dialog box are discussed next.

Creating a Reference Axis Using One Line/Edge/AxisThe One Line/Edge/Axis option available in the Defined by area of the Reference Axisdialog box is used to create a reference axis by selecting a sketched line or construction line,edge, or temporary axis. To use this option, invoke the Reference Axis dialog box; the OneLine/Edge/Axis radio button is selected by default. Select a sketched line, edge, or a temporaryaxis. The name of the selected entity is displayed in the Selected items display area and thepreview of the reference axis is displayed in the drawing area. Now, choose the OK buttonfrom the Reference Axis dialog box. Figure 5-22 shows a construction line selected as areference for creating the axis. Figure 5-23 shows an axis created using this option.

Toolbar: Reference Geometry > AxisMenu: Insert > Reference Geometry > Axis

Figure 5-21 The Reference Axis dialog box

Tip. If the axis is not displayed in the drawing area, choose View > Axes from themenu bar.

c05-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 10:13 AM11


Figure 5-22 Line to be selected Figure 5-23 Resultant reference axis

Creating a Reference Axis Using Two PlanesUsing the Two Planes option you can create a reference axis at the intersection of two planes.To create a reference axis using this option, invoke the Reference Axis dialog box. Select theTwo Planes option and then select two planes, two planar faces, or a plane and a planar face.The preview of the axis is displayed in the drawing area. Choose the OK button from theReference Axis dialog box. Figure 5-24 shows two planes selected and Figure 5-25 shows theresultant reference axis created using this option.

Creating a Reference Axis Using Two Points/VertexUsing the Two Points/Vertex you can create a reference axis that passes through two pointsor two vertices. To create a reference axis using this option, invoke the Reference Axis dialogbox. Select the Two Points/Vertex radio button from this dialog box and then select twopoints or two vertices using the left mouse button. The preview of the reference axis is displayedin the drawing area. Choose the OK button from the Reference Axis dialog box. Figure 5-26shows two vertices to be selected and Figure 5-27 shows the resultant reference axis createdusing this option.

Figure 5-24 Planes to be selected Figure 5-25 Resultant reference axis

c05-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 10:13 AM12


Figure 5-26 Vertices to be selected Figure 5-27 Resultant reference axis

Creating a Reference Axis Using Cylindrical/Conical SurfaceUsing the Cylindrical/Conical Surface option you can create a reference axis that passesthrough the center point of a cylindrical or a conical surface. To create a reference axis usingthis option, invoke the Reference Axis dialog box. Select the Cylindrical/Conical Surfaceradio button from this dialog box. Select the cylindrical or the conical surface using the leftmouse button. The preview of the reference axis is displayed in the drawing area. Choose theOK button from the Reference Axis dialog box. Figure 5-28 shows a cylindrical surfaceselected and Figure 5-29 shows the resultant reference axis created using this option.

Creating a Reference Axis Using Point and SurfaceUsing the Point and Surface option you can create a reference axis that passes through apoint and is normal to the selected surface. If the selected surface is a nonplanar surface, theselected point should be created on the surface. To create a reference axis using this option,invoke the Reference Axis dialog box. Select the Point and Surface radio button from thisdialog box. Now, select a point, vertex, or midpoint and then select a surface. The preview ofthe axis will be displayed in the drawing area. Choose the OK button from the ReferenceAxis dialog box. The newly created axis will be normal to the selected surface. Figure 5-30

Figure 5-28 Cylindrical surface to be selected Figure 5-29 Resultant reference axis

c05-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 10:13 AM13


shows the point and surface selected and Figure 5-31 shows the resultant axis created usingthis option.

Creating Reference Coordinate System

In SolidWorks you may need to define some reference coordinate systems other thanthe default coordinate system for creating features, analyzing the geometry, analyzingthe assemblies, and so on. The Coordinate System dialog box is used to create the

reference coordinate systems. You can invoke this dialog box using the Reference Axis buttonfrom the Reference Geometry tool bar or by choosing Insert > Reference Geometry >Coordinate System from the menu bar. The Coordinate System dialog box is shown inFigure 5-32.

As soon as you invoke this dialog box a coordinate system in red color is displayed at theorigin of the current document. For creating a new coordinate system you need to select apoint that will be selected as the origin for the new coordinate. Therefore, after invoking this

Figure 5-30 Point and surface to be selected Figure 5-31 Resultant reference axis

Toolbar: Reference Geometry > Coordinate SystemMenu: Insert > Reference Geometry > Coordinate System

Figure 5-32 The Coordinate System dialog box

c05-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 10:13 AM14


dialog box, select a point, vertex, or endpoint to define the origin of the coordinate system.The name of the selected entity will be displayed below the Origin display area. You will alsoobserve that the coordinate system displayed in red color at the origin will be shifted to thenewly selected point. If the default orientation of the coordinate system is according to therequirement, choose the OK button from the Coordinate System dialog box.

You can also select the edges, points, axis, and so on to define the X, Y, and Z directions. Todefine the X direction, select the X Axis display area in the dialog box. It changes to redcolor. Now, select the edge, axis, vertex, or point to define the direction of the X axis. Usingthe Flip check box available under the X Axis display area, you can reverse the X direction.Similarly, you can define Y and Z directions. After defining all the references, choose the OKbutton from the Coordinate System dialog box. Figure 5-33 displays a reference coordinatesystem created using the Coordinate System dialog box.

OTHER BOSS/BASE OPTIONSSome of the boss/base extrusion options were discussed in previous chapters. In this chapter,the remaining boss/base extrusion option are discussed.

End ConditionThe various options available in the End Condition drop-down list are discussed next.

Through AllThe Through All option is available in the End condition drop-down list only after youcreate a base feature. After creating a base feature, select or create a plane and choose theSketch button from the Sketch toolbar. The sketching environment is invoked. Create thesketch using the standard sketching tools. Now, choose the Extruded Boss/Base button fromthe Features toolbar to invoke the Extrude PropertyManager. The confirmation corner isalso displayed. The preview of the extruded feature is displayed in temporary graphics in the

Figure 5-33 A coordinate system created using the Coordinate System dialog

c05-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 10:14 AM15


drawing area with Blind option selected by default in the End Condition drop-down list.Select the Through All option from the End Condition drop-down list and the preview ofthe extruded feature extends from the sketching plane through all existing geometric entities.You can also reverse the direction of extrusion using the Reverse Direction button availableon the left of the End Condition drop-down list. While creating an extruded feature usingthe Through All option, the sketch extrudes through all the existing geometries. You willobserve that the Merge result check box is displayed in the Extrude PropertyManager. Thischeck box is selected by default. Therefore, the newly created extruded feature will mergewith the base feature. If you clear this check box, this extruded feature will not merge withthe existing base feature, resulting in the creation of another body. The creation of a newbody can be confirmed by observing the Solid Bodies folder in the Feature Manager DesignTree. The value of the number of disjoint bodies in the model is displayed in the bracket onthe right of the Solid Bodies folder. You can click the (+) sign on the left of the Solid Bodiesfolder to expand the folder. To collapse the folder back, click the (-) sign. Figure 5-34 showsthe expanded Solid Bodies folder with two bodies.

Figure 5-35 displays a sketch created on the sketching plane at an offset distance from theright planar face of the model. Figure 5-36 displays the feature created by extruding thesketch using the Through All option.

Up To NextThe Up To Next option is used to extrude the sketch from the sketching plane to the nextsurface that intersects the feature. To create an extruded feature using the Up To Next option,you must have a base feature. After creating a base feature, create a sketch by selecting orcreating a sketching plane. Invoke the Extrude PropertyManager; the preview of the base

Figure 5-34 The Feature Manager DesignTree displaying expanded Solid Bodies folder

Tip. It is recommended that while creating additional features after the base feature,always select the Merge results check box in the Feature PropertyManager.

The feature created from a multiple disjoint closed contours results in creation ofdisjoint bodies.

c05-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 10:14 AM16


feature is displayed with default options. Select the Up To Next option from the EndCondition drop-down list. You can also reverse the direction of feature creation using theReverse Direction button. The preview of the feature will be modified and the sketch will bedisplayed as extruded from the sketching plane to the next surface that intersects the featuregeometry. Figure 5-37 shows the sketch that will be extruded using the Up To Next optionand Figure 5-38 shows the resultant feature.

Up To VertexThe Up To Vertex option is used to define the termination of the extruded feature at avirtual plane parallel to the sketching plane and passing through the selected vertex. You canalso select a point on an edge, or vertices of a sketch. To create an extruded feature using theUp To Vertex option create a sketch and invoke the Extrude PropertyManager. Select theUp To Vertex option from the Extrude PropertyManager; the Vertex display area is displayed.You can reverse the direction of the extrusion using the Reverse Direction button. You areprompted to select a vertex. Using the left mouse button select a vertex; the default preview

Figure 5-36 Sketch extruded using the ThroughAll option

Figure 5-35 A sketch created at an offset dis-tance from the right planar surface

Figure 5-38 Sketch extruded using the Up ToNext option

Figure 5-37 A sketch created on the right planeas the sketching plane

c05-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 10:14 AM17


Figure 5-40 Sketch extruded using the Up ToVertex option.

Figure 5-39 Sketch created on a plane created atan offset distance and vertex to be selected

of the feature is modified and you can observe that the feature is terminated at the selectedvertex. Figure 5-39 shows a sketch created on a plane at an offset distance and Figure 5-40shows the model in which the sketch is extruded upto the selected vertex.

Up To SurfaceThe Up To Surface option is used to define the termination of the extruded feature to theselected surface. To create an extruded feature using this option, create a sketch using thenormal sketching options and then invoke the Extrude PropertyManager. Select the Up ToSurface option from the End Condition drop-down list. The preview of the extruded featureis displayed in temporary graphics. The Face/Plane display area is displayed and you areprompted to select a face or a surface. Using the left mouse button select a surface up towhich you want to extrude the feature. Figure 5-41 shows the sketch created at an offsetdistance and the surface to be selected. Figure 5-42 shows the sketch being extruded up tothe selected surface.

Figure 5-42 Sketch extruded using the Up ToSurface option.

Figure 5-41 Sketch created on a plane created atan offset distance and surface to be selected

c05-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 10:14 AM18


Offset From SurfaceThe Offset From Surface option is used to define the termination of the extruded feature ona virtual surface created at an offset distance from the selected surface. To create an extrudedfeature using the Offset From Surface option, create a sketch and invoke the ExtrudePropertyManager. Select the Offset From Surface option from the End Condition drop-downlist. The Face/Plane display area is displayed along with the Offset Distance spinner. You areprompted to select a face or a surface. Select the surface and set the offset distance in theOffset Distance spinner. You can reverse the direction of offset by selecting the Reverseoffset check box from the Direction 1 rollout. If the Translate surface check box is cleared,the virtual surface created for the termination of the extruded feature will have a concentricrelation with the selected surface. Therefore, it reflects the true offset of the selected surface.If the Translate surface check box is selected, the center of the virtual surface is at the offsetdistance from the selected surface. Therefore, a reference surface is created to define thetermination of the extruded feature and it does not reflect the true offset of the selectedsurface. Figure 5-43 shows the front view of the sketch extruded with termination at an offsetdistance from the selected cylindrical surface with the Translate surface check boxcleared. Figure 5-44 shows the front view of the extruded feature with the Translate surfacecheck box selected.

Up To BodyThe Up To Body option available in the End Condition drop-down list is used to define thetermination of the extruded feature to another body. As discussed earlier, if you clear theMerge results check box in the Extrude PropertyManager, it results in the formation ofanother body. For creating an extruded feature using the Up To Body option, invoke theExtrude PropertyManager after creating the sketch and select the Up To Body option fromthe End Condition drop-down list. The Vertex display area is displayed. Select body toterminate the feature and choose the OK button. Figure 5-45 shows the sketch for the extrudedfeature and a body up to which the sketch will be extruded. Figure 5-46 shows the sketchextruded using the Up To Body option.

Figure 5-44 Sketch extruded using the OffsetFrom Surface option with Translate surfacecheck box selected

Figure 5-43 Sketch extruded using Offset FromSurface option with Translate surface check boxcleared

c05-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 10:14 AM19


Figure 5-46 Sketch extruded using the Up ToBody option.

Figure 5-45 Sketch to be extruded and the bodyto be selected for the extrude feature

Modeling Using the Contour Selection MethodModeling using the contour selection method allows you to use the partial sketches for creatingthe features. Using this method, you can create sketches of the entire model in a singlesketching environment and then manipulate the sketches by sharing them between variousfeatures. To understand this concept, consider the multi-featured solid model shown inFigure 5-47.

For a multi-featured model as shown above, ideally you first need to create the sketch for thebase feature and convert that sketch into the base feature. After that, you have to create thesketch for the second sketched feature and so on. In other words, you have to create thesketch for each sketched feature. But using the contour selection method, you can share thecontour created using the sketch for creating features. Figure 5-48 shows the sketch to becreated for modeling using the contour selection method.

Figure 5-47 Multi-featured solid model

c05-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 10:14 AM20


Figure 5-48 Sketch created for creating the model

After creating the entire sketch right-click in the drawing area to invoke the shortcut menu.Choose the Contour Selection Tool option from the shortcut menu. The select cursor isreplaced by the contour selection cursor and contour selection confirmation corner isdisplayed. Using the left mouse button select the outer contour of the left larger circle usingthe contour selection cursor as shown in Figure 5-49.

Figure 5-49 Contour selected for creating the extruded feature

c05-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 10:14 AM21


Now, invoke the Extrude PropertyManager and extrude the selected contour using the MidPlane option as shown in Figure 5-50.

Now, right-click in the drawing area and choose the Contour Selection Tool option from theshortcut menu. Using the contour selection cursor select any entity in the sketch and thenselect the middle contour of the sketch as shown in Figure 5-51. Invoke the ExtrudePropertyManager and extrude the selected contour using the mid plane option. Again, invokethe contour selection tool and select an entity in the sketch. Next, select the outer contour ofthe right circle and extrude the same using the mid plane option.

As the sketches are displayed in the model, you need to hide them. Click the +sign to expandany of the extruded features. Select the sketch icon and right click to invoke the shortcut

Tip. When you move the contour selection cursor in the sketch, the areas where thecontour selection is possible are dynamically highlighted in pink color. When youselect a specific area using this cursor, the selected contour is displayed in yellowcolor.

Figure 5-50 Isometric view of the feature created by extruding theselected contour

Tip. When you select the contour using the contour selection tool and invoke theExtrude PropertyManager, you can observe the name of the selected contour inthe display area of the Contour Selection rollout.

You can select the contours for all the sketched features such as revolve, cut, sweep,loft, and so on.

You can also select the single sketched entity from sketch using the contour selectiontool instead of selecting the contour for creating the sketched features.

c05-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 10:14 AM22


Figure 5-51 Contour selected for creating second feature.

Figure 5-52 Final model.

menu. Choose the Hide Sketch option. The final model after creating all the features isshown in Figure 5-52.

If you click the +sign to expand the extruded feature in the FeatureManager Design Treeyou will notice that instead of showing a sketch it will show you a contour selected sketchsymbol as shown in Figure 5-53.

c05-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 10:14 AM23


Figure 5-53 The FeatureManager Design Tree

CREATING CUT FEATURESThe cut is a material removal process. You can define a cut feature by extruding a sketch,revolving a sketch, sweeping a section along a path, lofting sections, or using a surface. Youwill learn more about sweep, loft, and surface in later chapters. The cut feature can be createdonly if a base feature exists. The cut operation using the extrude and revolve feature is discussednext.

Extruded Cut

To create an extruded cut feature, create a sketch for the cut feature and then choosethe Extruded Cut button from the Features toolbar. You can also choose Insert >Cut > Extrude from the menu bar to invoke the Cut-Extrude PropertyManager. As

soon as you invoke this PropertyManager, the preview of the cut feature with default optionsis displayed in the drawing area. The Cut-Extrude PropertyManager is shown in Figure 5-54.

Figure 5-55 shows the preview of the cut feature when you invoke the Cut-ExtrudePropertyManager after creating a sketch for the cut feature. The material to be removed is

Toolbar: Features> Extruded CutMenu: Insert > Cut > Extrude

c05-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 10:14 AM24


Figure 5-54 The Cut-Extrude PropertyManager

displayed in temporary graphics. Figure 5-56 shows the model after adding the cut feature.The various options available in the Cut-Extrude PropertyManager are discussed next.

Direction 1The Direction 1 rollout available in the Extrude-Cut PropertyManager is used to define thetermination of the extrude in the first direction. The various options available in the Direction 1rollout are discussed next.

Figure 5-55 The preview of the cut feature

c05-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 10:14 AM25


End ConditionThe End Condition drop-down list available in the Direction 1 rollout is used to specifythe type of termination option available. The feature termination options available inthis drop-down list are Blind, Through All, Up To Next, Up To Vertex, Up To Surface,and Mid Plane. These option are the same as those discussed for boss/base options. Bydefault, the Blind option is selected in the End Condition drop-down list. Therefore,the Distance spinner is displayed to specify the depth. If you choose the Through All orthe Through Next options, the spinner will not be displayed. The type of spinner or thedisplay area depend on the option selected from the End Condition drop-down list. TheReverse Direction button is used to reverse the direction of feature creation. If youchoose the Mid Plane option from the End Condition drop-down list, the ReverseDirection button is not available.

Flip Side to CutThe Flip side to cut check box is selected to define the side of material removal. Bydefault, the Flip side to cut check box is cleared. Therefore, the material will be removedfrom inside the profile of the sketch drawn for the cut feature. If you select this checkbox, the material will be removed from outside the profile of the sketch. Figure 5-57shows a cut feature with Flip side to cut check box cleared and Figure 5-58 shows a cutfeature with Flip side to cut check box selected.

Draft On/OffThe Draft On/Off button available in the Direction 1 rollout of the Cut-ExtrudePropertyManager is used to apply the draft angle to the extruded cut feature. The Draft

Tip. You can flip the direction of material removal by clicking the arrow availableon the sketch while creating the cut feature.

Figure 5-56 Cut feature added to the model

c05-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 10:14 AM26


Figure 5-57 Cut feature with Flip side tocut check box cleared

Figure 5-58 Cut feature with Flip side to cutcheck box selected

Figure 5-59 Cut feature with Draft outwardcheck box cleared

Figure 5-60 Cut feature with Draft outwardcheck box selected

Angle spinner available on the right of the Draft On/Off button is used to set the value ofthe draft angle. By default, the Draft outward check box is cleared. Therefore, the draftis created inwards with respect to the direction of feature creation. If you select this checkbox, the draft added to the cut feature will be created outwards with respect to the directionof feature creation. Figure 5-59 shows the draft added to the cut feature with the Draftoutward check box cleared and Figure 5-60 shows the draft added to the cut feature withthe Draft outward check box selected.

The Direction 2 rollout is used to specify the termination of feature creation in the seconddirection. The options available in the Direction 2 rollout are the same as those discussed forthe Direction 1 rollout. The Selected Contour rollout is used to add the feature to the selectedcontours.

c05-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 10:14 AM27


Thin FeatureThe Thin Feature rollout is used to create a thin cut feature. When you create a cut feature,you have to apply the thickness to the sketch in addition to the end condition. This rollout isused to specify the parameters to create the thin feature. To create a thin cut invoke the cuttool after creating the sketch and specify the end conditions in the Direction 1 and Direction2 rollouts. Now, select the check box available in the Thin Feature rollout to activate theThin Feature rollout. The Thin Feature rollout is shown in Figure 5-61. The options availablein this rollout are the same as those discussed for the thin boss feature.

Handling Multiple Bodies in Cut FeatureWhile creating the cut feature, sometimes because of geometric conditions, feature termination,or end conditions the cut feature results in the creation of multiple bodies. Figure 5-62 showsa sketch created on the top planar surface of the base feature to create a cut feature. Figure 5-63shows the cut feature created with the end condition as Through All. Using this type ofsketch and end condition, if you choose OK from the Extrude-Cut PropertyManager theBodies to Keep dialog is displayed. As multiple bodies are created while applying the cutfeature, this dialog box is used to define which body do we want to keep.

Figure 5-62 Sketch created for the cut feature. Figure 5-63 Cut feature is applied to the sketchwith end condition as Through All


Tip. The sketch used for the cut feature can be a closed loop or an open sketch.Note that if the sketch is an open sketch, the sketch should completely divide themodel in two or more than two parts.

c05-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 10:14 AM28


Figure 5-65 The Bodies to Keep dialog box withthe Selected bodies option selected

The Bodies to Keep dialog box is displayed in Figure 5-64. As the body is displayed intemporary graphics, when you invoke this dialog box, the edges of the model are displayedin yellow color.

By default, the All Bodies radio button is selected. Therefore, if you choose OK from thisdialog box, all the bodies created after the cut feature will remain in the model. If you wantthe cut feature to consume any of the body, select the Selected bodies radio button from theBodies to Keep dialog box. When you select the Selected bodies radio button, a selectionand display area will be displayed as shown in Figure 5-65. You can select the check boxprovided on the left of the name of the body to keep that body. The selected body is displayedin green in temporary graphics. Select the bodies to keep and choose the OK button fromthe Bodies to Keep dialog box. Figure 5-66 shows a sketch created for the cut feature usingthe thin feature. Figure 5-67 shows the cut feature created using the thin option and the Allbodies option selected from the Bodies to Keep dialog box.

IMPORTANCE OF THE FEATURE SCOPEAs discussed earlier, in SolidWorks you can create different disjoint bodies in a single partfile. After creating two or more than two disjoint bodies, when you create another feature, aFeature Scope rollout is displayed in the PropertyManager. This rollout is used to define thebodies that will be affected by the creation of the feature. The feature scope option is usedwith the following features:

Figure 5-64 The Bodies to Keep dialog box

c05-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 10:14 AM29


1. Extrude boss and cut2. Revolve boss and cut3. Sweep boss and cut4. Loft boss and cut5. Boss cut and thicken6. Surface cut7. Cavity

In the Feature Scope rollout, the Selected bodies radio button and the Auto-select checkbox are selected by default. With the Auto-select check box selected, all the disjoint bodiesare selected and are affected by the feature creation. If you clear the Auto-select check box,a selection display area is invoked. You can select the bodies that you want to be affected. Thename of the selected body is displayed in the display area. If you select the All bodies radiobutton then all the bodies available in the part file are selected and will be affected by thecreation of the feature.

TUTORIALS

Tutorial 1In this tutorial you will create the model shown in Figure 5-68. You will create the model bydrawing the sketch of the front view of the model and then select the contours to extrudethem. As a result, in this tutorial you will learn the procedure of modeling using the contoursselection method. The dimensions of the model are shown in Figure 5-69.

( Expected time: 30 min)

It is clear from the figures that the given model is a multifeature model. It consists of variousextrude features; therefore, all these features are sketched features. You first need to drawthe sketch for each feature and then convert that sketch into the feature. In conventionalmethods you have to create a separate sketch for each sketched feature. But in this tutorial,you will use the contour selection technique. Using this method you have to create only one

Figure 5-66 Sketch to create a cut featureusing the thin option

Figure 5-67 A thin cut feature created with theAll bodies option selected

c05-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 10:14 AM30


sketch and you will select the contours and share the same sketch for creating all the features.The steps to be followed to complete this tutorial are given next:

a. Create the sketch on the default plane and apply the required relations and dimensions,refer to Figure 5-70.

Figure 5-69 Dimensions and views for Tutorial 1


c05-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 10:14 AM31


b. Invoke the extrude option and extrude the selected contour, refer to Figures 5-71 and 5-72.c. Select the second set of contour and extrude it to the required distance, refer to

Figures 5-73 and 5-74.d. Select the third set of contour and extrude it to the required distance, refer to Figures 5-75 and 5-76.e. Save the file and then close the file.

Creating the Sketch of the Model1. Start SolidWorks and then open a new part file from the Template tab of the New


As discussed earlier, you need to choose the Sketch button from the Sketch toolbar afteropening a new part file to start sketching. You will sketch on the front plane because thefront plane is selected by default. In this tutorial you will have to create the sketch on thefront plane.

2. Draw the sketch of the front view of the model using the automatic mirroring option tocapture the design intent of the model.

3. Add the required relations and dimensions to the sketch as shown in Figure 5-70.

Selecting and Extruding the Contours of the SketchAs discussed earlier, in this tutorial you will use the contour selection method to create themodel. Therefore, first you need to select one of the contours from the given sketch andextrude it. For a better representation of the sketch, you will also orient the sketch to isometric view.

1. Choose the Isometric button from the Standard Views toolbar to orient thesketch in the isometric view.

2. Right-click in the drawing area to invoke the shortcut menu. Now, choose the Contour

Figure 5-70 Fully defined sketch for creating the model

c05-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 10:14 AM32


Figure 5-71 Lower rectangle selected as a contour

Select Tool option from the shortcut menu. The select cursor will be replaced by thecontour selection cursor and selection confirmation corner is displayed.

3. Move the cursor to the lower rectangle of the sketch. When you move the cursor to thelower rectangle of the sketch, the area of rectangle will be highlighted in pink. Thisindicates that this rectangle is a closed profile.

4. Now, select the lower rectangle. The selected area is displayed in yellow. Right-click orchoose OK from the contour selection confirmation corner. You can also right-clickimmediately after selecting the contour to confirm the selection and choose the EndSelect Contours option from the shortcut menu. Figure 5-71 shows the lower rectangleselected using the contour selection tool.

5. Choose the Extruded Boss/Base button from the Features toolbar. TheExtrude PropertyManager is invoked and the preview of the base feature isdisplayed in the drawing area in temporary graphics.

The name of the selected contour is displayed in the display area of the Selected Contoursrollout.

6. Right-click in the drawing area and choose the Mid Plane option from the shortcutmenu. The preview of the feature is modified dynamically when you choose the MidPlane option.

7. Set the value of the Depth spinner to 52 and choose OK button from the ExtrudePropertyManager.

The base feature of the model by extruding the selected contour is shown in Figure 5-72.

c05-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 10:14 AM33


8. Right-click in the drawing area and choose the Contour Select Tool option from theshortcut menu.

The select cursor is replaced by the contour selection cursor.

9. Using the contour selection cursor select any entity of the sketch to invoke the selectionmode of the sketch.

10. Using the left mouse button select the middle contour of the sketch. The selected regionwill be displayed yellow in color. Right-click in the drawing area to exit the contourselection process.

The selected middle contour is shown in Figure 5-73.

11. Choose the Extrude button from the Features toolbar to invoke the ExtrudePropertyManager.

12. Right-click in the drawing area and choose the Mid Plane option from the shortcutmenu.

13. Set the value of the Depth spinner to 40 and choose the OK button from the ExtrudePropertyManager.

The feature created by selecting the middle contour is shown in Figure 5-74.

14. Now, again invoke the Contour Select Tool and select a sketch entity. Next, select theright contour of the sketch. Press and hold down the CTRL key and select the left contourof the sketch.

Figure 5-72 Base feature of the model

c05-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 10:14 AM34


Figure 5-74 Second feature created by extruding the middle contour

The two selected contours are shown in Figure 5-75.

15. Invoke the Extrude PropertyManager. Right-click and choose the Mid Plane optionfrom the shortcut menu.

16. Set the value of the spinner to 8 and choose the OK button from the ExtrudePropertyManager.

Figure 5-73 Middle contour is selected using the contour selection tool

c05-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 10:14 AM35


The model is completed. But, the sketch is also displayed in the model. Therefore, youneed to hide the sketch.

17. Move the cursor to any of the sketched entity and when the entity turns red in color,select the entity. The selected sketched entity will be displayed in green. Now, right-clickand choose the Hide Sketch option from the shortcut menu.

The final model with hidden sketch is shown in Figure 5-76. The FeatureManager DesignTree of the model is shown in Figure 5-77.

Saving the ModelNext, you need to save the model.




Figure 5-75 The right and the left contours selected using the contourselection tool

c05-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 10:14 AM36


Tutorial 2In this tutorial you will create a model shown in Figure 5-78. You will use a combination of theconventional model method and the contour selection modeling methods to create this model.The dimensions of the model are given in Figure 5-79. (Expected time: 30 min.)

The steps that will be used to complete the model are discussed next:

a. Create the sketch of the front view of the model, refer to Figure 5-80.b. Extrude the selected contours, refer to Figures 5-81 through 5-82.c. Add a cut feature to the model by creating the sketch on the left planar surface, refer to

Figures 5-84 and 5-85.d. Create four holes using the cut feature on the top face of the base feature, refer to

Figures 5-86 and 5-87.

Figure 5-76 Final solid model


c05-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 10:14 AM37


Figure 5-79 Drawing views of the solid model


c05-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 10:14 AM38


Creating the Sketch for Contour Selection ModelingYou need to create the sketch by referring the front view of the model. The contours will beselected from this sketch and the selected contour will be extruded.

1. Draw the sketch of the front view using the standard sketching tools.

2. Apply the required relations and dimensions to fully define the sketch. The fully definedsketch is shown in Figure 5-80.

Orient the view to isometric view because it will help you in the selection of contours.

3. Choose the Isometric button from the Standard Views toolbar to orient the viewto isometric view.

4. Right-click and choose the Contour Select Tool option from the shortcut menu. Theselect cursor is replaced by the contour selection cursor.

5. Using the contour selection cursor select the area enclosed by the lower rectangle asshown in Figure 5-81.

6. Choose the Extruded Boss/Base button from the Features toolbar to invoke theExtrude PropertyManager.


The base feature created after extruding the selected contour is shown in Figure 5-82.

Figure 5-80 Fully defined sketch

c05-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 10:14 AM39


8. Using the contour selection tool and the extrude tool create the other features by extrudingthe selected contours and then hide the sketch. The model created after extruding allthe contours is shown in Figure 5-83.

Creating the Recess at the Base of the ModelAfter creating the extruded features of the model, you have to create the recess provided atthe base of the model. The recess will be created by extruding a sketch using the cut optioncreated at the right planar face of the model.

Figure 5-82 Base feature created after extruding the selected contour

Figure 5-81 Lower rectangle selected as contour

c05-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 10:14 AM40


Figure 5-83 Model created after extruding the selected contour

1. Select the right planar face of the base feature as the sketching plane. The selected facewill be displayed in green color.

2. Right-click in the drawing area and choose the Insert Sketch option from the shortcutmenu to invoke the sketching environment.

Now you need to orient the view such the selected face is normal to your eye view.

3. Choose the Normal To button from the Standard Views toolbar to orient theselected face normal to the eye view.

4. Using the standard sketching tools create the sketch for the recess and apply the requiredrelations and dimensions to the sketch. The fully defined sketch for the cut feature isshown in Figure 5-84.

5. Choose the Extruded Cut button from the Features toolbar to invoke theCut-Extrude PropertyManager.

The preview of the cut feature will be displayed in the drawing area in temporary graphics.

6. Right-click in the drawing area and choose the Through All option from the shortcutmenu.

7. Choose the OK button from the Cut-Extrude PropertyManager to complete the featurecreation.

The model after creating the cut feature is shown in Figure 5-85.

c05-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 10:14 AM41


Creating the HolesAfter creating the recess provided at the bottom of the base, you need to create the holes onthe base of the model. You will create the sketch of the hole feature on the top planar face ofthe base feature of the model. For creating the sketch of the holes you will first draw a circleand then using the Linear Sketch Step and Repeat option create the remaining circles. Afterthat use the cut option to complete the hole feature.

1. Select the top planar face of the base feature as the sketching plane. Right-click andchoose the Insert Sketch option from the shortcut menu.

Figure 5-84 Sketch for the cut feature


c05-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 10:14 AM42


Figure 5-86 Holes sketched for the cut feature

2. Click anywhere in the drawing area to exit the selection mode.

3. Choose the Normal To button from the Standard Views toolbar to orient theview normal to the eye view.

4. Using the standard sketching tools create a circle and then using the Linear Sketch Stepand Repeat create a pattern of the remaining circles.

5. Apply the required relations and dimensions to fully define the sketch. You may need toapply horizontal relation between the centers of the top two circles to fully define it.

The fully defined sketch is shown in Figure 5-86.


7. Right-click in the drawing area and choose the Through All option from the shortcutmenu.

8. Choose the OK button from the Cut-Extrude PropertyManager.

The final model is shown in Figure 5-87 and the FeatureManager Design Tree of themodel is shown in Figure 5-88.

c05-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 10:14 AM43


Figure 5-88 The FeatureManager Design






c05-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 10:14 AM44


Tutorial 3In this tutorial you will create the model shown in Figure 5-89. The dimensions of the modelare given in Figure 5-90. (Expected Time: 30 min)

The steps that will be followed to complete this tutorial are discussed next:

a. Create the base feature by extruding the sketch created on the front plane, refer toFigures 5-91 and 5-92.

b. Extrude the sketch created on the top plane to create a cut feature, refer toFigures 5-93 and 5-94.

c. Create a plane at an offset distance of 150 from the top plane, refer to Figure 5-95.d. Create the sketch on the newly created plane and extrude it to a selected surface, refer to

Figures 5-96 and 5-97.e. Create a contour bore using the cut revolve option, refer Figures 5-98 and 5-99.f. Create the holes using the cut feature, refer Figure 5-100 and 5-101.

Creating the Base FeatureIt is evident from the model that the base of the model comprises complex geometry.Therefore, you need to create the base feature and then apply the cut feature to the base ofthe model to get the desired shape. You will create the base feature on the Front plane asthe sketching plane. After creating the sketch, you will extrude the sketch using the midplane option to complete feature creation.

1. Open a new SolidWorks document in the part mode and invoke the sketching environmentto draw the sketch for the base feature.

2. Using the standard sketching tools create the sketch of the base feature and then applythe required relations and dimensions to the sketch as shown in Figure 5-91.


c05-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 10:14 AM45


Figure 5-91 Sketch of the base feature

Figure 5-90 Top view, front section view, and right section view of the model

c05-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 10:14 AM46


Figure 5-92 Base feature of the solid model


4. Right-click in the drawing area and choose the Mid Plane option from the shortcut menu.


The isometric view of the base feature of the model is shown in Figure 5-92.

Creating the Cut FeatureNow, you need to create a sketch on the top plane and then you will create a cut feature usingthat sketch. After creating this feature you will be able to get the base of the model.

1. Select the Top plane from the FeatureManager Design Tree and invoke the sketchingenvironment.

2. Create the sketch for the cut feature using the standard sketching tools and then applythe required relations and dimensions to the sketch as shown in Figure 5-93.

NoteTo change the radial dimension to the diametrical dimension, select the dimension and invokethe shortcut menu. Choose the Properties option from the shortcut menu to display the DimensionProperties dialog box. Select the Diameter dimension check box from this dialog box. Choosethe OK button from the Dimension Properties dialog box.

To change the diameter dimension to the radial dimension, invoke the Dimension Propertiesdialog box and clear the Diameter dimension check box and choose the OK button from thedialog box.

c05-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 10:14 AM47




Since the preview of the cut feature is not displayed in the current view, therefore, youneed to orient the model in the isometric view to preview the cut feature.

4. Choose the Isometric button from the View toolbar to orient the model in theisometric view.

It is evident from the preview of the cut feature that the direction of feature creation isopposite to the required direction. Therefore, you need to change the direction of featurecreation.

5. Choose the Reverse Direction button provided at the left of the End Condition drop-downlist in the Cut-Extrude PropertyManager.

You will also observe that direction of material removal is not in the required direction.Therefore, you will have to flip the direction of material removal.

6. Select the Flip side to cut check box. You will observe that the direction of materialremoval is also changed in the preview.

7. Right-click in the drawing area and choose the Through All option from the shortcutmenu and choose the OK button from the Cut-Extrude PropertyManager.

The model after creating the base feature is shown in Figure 5-94.

Creating a Plane at an Offset DistanceAfter creating the base of the model you will create a plane at an offset distance from the topplane. This newly created plane will be used as a sketching plane for the next feature.

c05-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 10:14 AM48


1. Choose the Plane button from the Reference Geometry toolbar to invoke thePlane PropertyManager. The Plane PropertyManager is displayed on the leftof the drawing area.

2. Choose the Offset Distance button from the Plane PropertyManager. The Distancespinner, Reverse Direction check box, and Number of Planes to Create spinner aredisplayed in the Plane PropertyManager.

Since the planes are not displayed in the drawing area, therefore, you will invoke theFeatureManager Design Tree flyout to select the Top plane from the same.

3. Move the cursor to the top of the Plane PropertyManager where the name of thePropertyManager is displayed. The tool tip will show you the name of that area as ShowFeatureManager.

4. Use the left mouse button at that location to invoke the FeatureManager Design Treeflyout.

5. Select the Top plane from the FeatureManager Design Tree.

When you choose the Top plane, the preview of the newly created plane at an offsetdistance using a default value is displayed in the drawing area.

6. Set the value of the Distance spinner to 150 and choose the OK button from the PlanePropertyManager.

The newly created plane is shown in Figure 5-95.

Figure 5-94 Cut feature added to the base feature

c05-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 10:14 AM49


Figure 5-95 Plane created at an offset distance from the top plane

Creating the Extruded FeatureAfter creating the plane at an offset distance from the top plane, you will create the nextfeature, which is an extruded feature. The sketch of the next feature is created on the newlycreated plane and the sketch is extruded upto a selected surface.

Since the newly created plane is selected, therefore, you do not need to select the plane.

1. Invoke the sketching environment and click anywhere in the drawing area to remove theplane from the selection set.

2. Choose the Normal To button from the Standard Views toolbar to orient theselected plane normal to the eye view.

The model will be oriented such that the sketch plane is oriented normal to the eye view.

4. Draw the sketch of the circle and apply the required relations to the sketch as shown inFigure 5-96.

5. Choose the Extruded Boss/Base button from the Features toolbar. The previewof the feature is displayed in the drawing area.

You need to orient the model in the isometric view because the preview of feature creationis not clear in the current view.

6. Orient the model in the isometric view.

You will observe from the preview that the direction of feature creation is opposite to therequired direction. Therefore, you need to change the direction of feature creation.

c05-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 10:14 AM50


7. Choose the Reverse Direction button provided at the left of the End Condition drop-downlist to reverse the direction of feature creation.

You will observe that the preview of the feature is also changed when you reverse thedirection of feature creation.

8. Right-click in the drawing area and choose the Up To Surface button from the shortcutmenu. You are prompted to select a face or a surface to complete the specification of endcondition in Direction 1.

The Face/Plane display area is displayed under the End Condition drop-down list.

9. Select the upper curved surface of the model using the left mouse button. You will observethat the preview shows the feature extruded upto the selected surface.

10. Choose the OK button from the Extrude PropertyManager or right-click to choose theOK option.

Since the plane is displayed in the drawing area, you need to turn its display off.

11. Select Plane 1 from the FeatureManager Design Tree or from the drawing area andinvoke the shortcut menu. Choose the Hide option from the shortcut menu.

The model created after creating the extruded feature is shown in Figure 5-97.

Creating the Counterbore HoleNext, you have to create the counterbore hole by revolving a sketch created on the frontplane using the cut option.

Figure 5-96 Sketch created on the newly created plane

c05-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 10:14 AM51


Figure 5-98 Fully defined sketch for the contour bore

Figure 5-97 Sketch extruded upto a selected surface

1. Invoke the sketching environment by selecting the Front plane as the sketching planeand orient the front plane normal to the eye view.

2. Create the sketch of the counterbore hole using the standard sketching tools. As discussedearlier the sketch will be revolved along a centerline using the cut option. Therefore,after creating the sketch and applying the required relations you will dimension thesketch using the diametrical dimensioning along the centerline.

The sketch after applying the required relations and dimensions is shown in Figure 5-98.

c05-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 10:14 AM52


3. Choose the Revolved Cut button from the Features toolbar to display theCut-Revolve PropertyManager. The preview of the cut feature is displayed inthe drawing area in temporary graphics. The value of the angle in the Anglespinner is set to 360 by default. Therefore, you do not need to set the value of the Anglespinner.

4. Choose the OK button from the Cut-Revolve PropertyManager.

Figure 5-99 shows the model after creating the revolve cut feature.

Creating the HolesAfter creating all the features, you will create the holes using the cut feature to complete themodel. The sketch for the cut feature will be created using the top planar surface of the basefeature as the sketching plane.

1. Select the top planar surface of the base feature and invoke the sketching environment.Orient the model so that the selected face of the model is oriented normal to the eyeview.

2. Create the sketch using the standard sketching tools and apply the required relationsand dimensions as shown in Figure 5-100.


4. Right-click and choose the Through All option from the shortcut menu and choose theOK button from the Cut-Extrude PropertyManager or invoke the shortcut menu andchoose the Through All option from the shortcut menu.


c05-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 10:14 AM53


Figure 5-100 Fully defined sketch for cut feature

Orient the model in the isometric view. The final model is shown in Figure 5-101. TheFeatureManager Design Tree of the model is shown in Figure 5-102.



Figure 5-101 Final model

c05-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 10:14 AM54





1. When you create a sketch for the first time in the sketching environment, the sketch iscreated on the default plane, which is Front plane. (T/F)

2. When you create a new SolidWorks part document, SolidWorks provides you with twodefault planes. (T/F)

3. You can choose the Plane button from the Features toolbar to invoke the PlanePropertyManager. (T/F)

4. You cannot create a plane at an offset distance by dynamically dragging. (T/F)

5. When you create a circular feature a temporary axis is automatically created. (T/F)

6. The ___________ option is used to extrude a sketch from the sketching plane to the nextsurface that intersects the feature.

7. The __________ option available in the End Condition drop-down list is used to definethe termination of the extruded feature upto another body.

8. The __________ check box is used to merge the newly created body with the parent body.

Figure 5-102 FeatureManager Design Tree of the model

c05-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 10:14 AM55


9. Using the __________ option you can create a reference axis that passes through thecenter point of a cylindrical or a conical surface.

10. Sometimes multiple bodies are created while applying the cut feature; therefore, the__________ dialog box is displayed that allows you to define which body do we want to keep.


1. If the ___________ check box is cleared, then the virtual surface created for the terminationof the extruded feature will have a concentric relation with the selected surface.

2. The __________ option is selected from the shortcut menu to select the contours.

3. The __________ option is available in the End condition drop-down list only after youcreate the base feature.

4. The __________ check box is used to define the side of material removal.

5. The __________ check box is used to create an outward draft in a cut feature.

6. Which check box is selected while creating any other feature in a single body modeling?

(a) Combine results (b) Fix bodies(c) Merge results (d) Union results

7. Which button is used to add a draft angle to a cut feature?

(a) Add Draft (b) Create Draft(c) Draft On/Off (c) None of these

8. Which PropertyManager is invoked to create a cut feature by extruding a sketch?

(a) Extruded Cut (b) Cut-Extrude(c) Extrude-Cut (d) Cut

9. The option used to define the termination of feature creation at an offset distance to aselected surface is

(a) Distance To Surface (b) Normal From Surface(c) Distance From Surface (d) Offset From Surface

10. The option used to define the termination of feature creation to the selected surface is

(a) To Surface (b) Selected Surface(c) Up To Surface (d) None of these

c05-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 10:14 AM56


EXERCISES

Exercise 1Create the model shown in Figure 5-103 . The dimensions of the model are given inFigure 5-104. (Expected time: 30 min)


c05-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 10:14 AM57


Figure 5-104 Dimensions of the model for Exercise 1

Exercise 2Create the model shown in Figure 5-105 . The dimensions of the model are given inFigure 5-106. (Expected time: 30 min)

c05-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 10:14 AM58


Figure 5-106 Dimensions for Tutorial 2


c05-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 10:14 AM59


Answers to Self-Evaluation Test1. T, 2. F, 3. T, 4. F, 5. T, 6. Up To Next, 7. Up To Body, 8. Merge results, 9.Cylindrical/Conical Surface, 10. Bodies to Keep

c05-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 10:14 AM60

Chapter 6

Advanced ModelingTools-I

After completing this chapter you will be able to:• Create holes using the Simple Hole option.• Create standard holes using Hole Wizard.• Apply simple and advanced fillets.• Understand various selection methods.• Chamfer the edges and vertices of the model.• Create the Shell feature.

Learning Objectives

c06-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 4:59 PM1


ADVANCED MODELING TOOLSThis chapter discusses various advanced modeling tools available in SolidWorks that assistyou in creating a better and accurate design by capturing the design intent in the model.For example, in the previous chapters you learned how to create a hole using the cut option.But in this chapter you will create holes using the Simple Hole option and Hole Wizardoption. Using the hole wizard, you can create the standard holes classified on the bases ofthe industrial standard, screw type, and size. Hole wizard of the SolidWorks is one of thelargest standard industrial virtual hole generation machine available in any CAD package.You will also learn about some other advanced modeling tools such as fillet, chamfer, andshell in this chapter.

Creating Simple Hole

The Simple Hole option is used to apply simple hole feature. In previous chapteryou learned to create holes by sketching a circle and then using the cut option tocomplete hole creation. But using the simple hole option you do not need to create

a sketch of the hole. This is the reason the holes created with this option act as a placedfeature. To create a hole using this option, first you need to select the plane on which youwant to place the hole feature. This is because this option is available only after you select theplacement plane. Now, choose the Simple Hole button from the Features toolbar or chooseInsert > Features > Hole > Simple from the menu bar. The Hole PropertyManager isdisplayed as shown in Figure 6-1. Confirmation corner is also displayed in the drawing area.

When you invoke the Hole PropertyManager, the preview of the hole feature is displayed inthe drawing area in temporary graphics with the default values. The preview of the holefeature with default value is shown in Figure 6-2. Using the End Condition drop-down list,specify the termination type and set the value of the hole diameter in the Hole Diameterspinner. You can also specify a draft angle in the hole feature using the Draft On/Off button

Toolbar: Features > Simple Hole (Customize to Add)

Menu: Insert > Features > Hole > Simple

Figure 6-1 The Hole PropertyManager

c06-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 4:59 PM2

Advanced Modeling Tools-I 6-3

Figure 6-2 Preview of the hole being created using the Simple Hole option

and you can set the value of the draft angle using the Draft Angle spinner. The preview of thedraft angle is also displayed in the drawing area in temporary graphics. After setting all theparameters choose the OK button from the Hole PropertyManager or choose the OK optionfrom the confirmation corner.

The hole feature created using this option is placed on the selected plane but the placementof the hole is not yet defined. Therefore, select the hole feature from the FeatureManagerDesign Tree and right-click to display the shortcut menu. Choose the Edit Sketch optionfrom the shortcut menu. The sketching environment is invoked and you can apply the relationsand dimensions to define the placement of the hole feature on the selected face and exitthe sketching environment.

Creating the Standard Holes Using Hole Wizard

The Hole Wizard option is used to add standard holes to the model. The holesapplied using the hole wizard include the standard counterbore, countersink, drilled,tapped, and pipe tap holes. You can also create a user-defined counterbored drilled

hole, counter-drilled drilled hole, counterbored hole, counterdrilled hole, countersunkhole, countersunk drilled hole, simple hole, simple drilled hole, tapered hole, and tapereddrilled hole. You can control all the parameters of the holes including the termination optionsand you can also modify the holes according to your requirement after placing them. Thus,

Tip. It is recommended that before creating the hole feature, you create a point thatwill define the placement of the hole feature. While creating the hole feature, youcan dynamically move the hole feature by selecting the center point of the sketchand dragging the cursor to the point sketched earlier. The cursor will snap to thatpoint and coincident relation will be appiled between the sketched point and thecenter point of the hole.

Toolbar: Features > Hole WizardMenu: Insert > Features > Hole > Wizard

c06-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 4:59 PM3


Figure 6-3 The Counterbore tab of the Hole Definition dialog box

it results in the placement of standard parametric holes using this option. There are twomethods to place a hole feature using the hole wizard. The first method is the preselectionmethod. In this method you have to select a placement face or a placement plane beforeinvoking this tool. The placement face can be a planar face or a curved face. Then choose theHole Wizard button from the Features toolbar or choose Insert > Features > Hole > Wizardfrom the menu bar to invoke the Hole Definition dialog box. The preview of the hole featureis displayed in the graphics area. If the preview is not visible properly then move the HoleDefinition dialog box to see the preview. If you change the settings and parameters or thetype of hole, the preview of the hole will also get modified dynamically. The various optionsavailable in the Hole Definition dialog box are discussed next.

Counterbore TabThe Counterbore tab, as shown in Figure 6-3, available in the Hole Definition dialog box isused to define the parameters of a counterbore hole. You can also add the frequently usedcounterbore holes in the favorites list options in this tab. The various options available in theCounterbore tab are discussed next.

PropertyThe Property column of the Hole Definition dialog box is used to define the variousproperties of the standard hole. The properties include the description, standard, screwtype, size, and so on. The parameters available for all the properties are divided in two

c06-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 4:59 PM4


columns. The name of the columns are Parameter 1 and Parameter 2. These two columnsare used to define the values and other related information to create the hole. The variousoptions available in the Property column are discussed next.

DescriptionThe Description option is used to display the name and the description of the standardhole.

StandardThe Standard option is used to specify the industrial dimensioning and hole standard.You can select the standard from the Standard drop-down list available in theParameter 1 column. By default, the Ansi Inch standard is selected. Various otherdimensioning standards are available in this drop-down list such as Ansi Metric,BSI, DIN, ISO, JIS, DME Mould Bases, Hasco Metric Mould Bases, PCS MouldBases, Progressive Mould Bases, and Superior Mould Bases.

Screw typeThe Screw type option is used to define the type of fastener to be inserted in thehole. The standard holes created using the Hole Wizard depend on the fastener tobe inserted in that hole and the size of the fastener. Therefore, creation of a holebased on the fastener to be used in that hole is a good practice and is the uniquefeature of SolidWorks. You can select the screw type from the Screw Type drop-downlist available in the Parameter 1 column. The types of screws available in the drop-downlist depend on the standard selected from the Standard drop-down list.

SizeThe Size option is used to define the size of the fastener that will be inserted in thehole that is created using the Hole Wizard. The size of the fastener is selected fromthe Size drop-down list available in the Parameter 1 column. The sizes of the fastenersavailable in the Size drop-down list depend on the standard selected from theStandard drop-down list.

End Condition and DepthThe End Condition and Depth option is used to define the end condition of featuretermination. To define the end condition for feature termination, select the endcondition option from the End Condition drop-down list available in the Parameter 1area. By default, the Blind option is selected in this drop-down list. Therefore, if theend condition is Blind you have to specify the depth of feature termination. This isthe reason the Depth area available on the right of the End Condition drop-downlist in the Parameter 2 column is replaced by the edit box when clicked once. You canspecify the depth of feature termination in this edit box.

NoteA preview area is provided on the top right of the Hole Definition area. You can observe thepreview of the hole being created. The preview of the hole feature is changed dynamically as youchange the parameters of the hole feature.

c06-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 4:59 PM5


Selected Item and OffsetThe Selected Item and Offset option is used to define the surface for featuretermination. The Selected Item display area in the Parameter 1 column is activeonly when the Up To Vertex, Up To Surface, or Offset From Surface option isselected from the End Condition drop-down list. The Offset area available on theright of the Select Item display area is replaced by the Offset edit box and you canenter the value of offset in this edit box. This option is available only when you selectthe Offset From Surface option from the End Condition drop-down list.

Hole Fit and DiameterThe Hole Fit and Diameter option is used to specify the type of Fit to be applied inthe hole to be created. The types of fits are available in the Hole Fit drop-down list inthe Parameter 1 column. The types of fits available in the Hole Fit drop-down listare Close, Normal, and Loose. The Diameter area on the right of the Hole Fitdrop-down list in the Parameter 2 area is replaced by the Diameter edit box byclicking once in this area. The value of the diameter in this area is the default valueaccording to the standard. The value changes depending upon the type of hole fitselected from the Hole Fit drop-down list. You can also modify this value accordingto the requirement.

Angle at BottomThe Angle at Bottom option is used to specify the angle at the bottom of the holefeature. The Angle at Bottom area available in the Parameter 1 column is replacedby the Angle at Bottom edit box by clicking once. You can modify the default valuefor the angle at bottom by entering a new value in this edit box.

C’Bore Diameter and DepthThe C’Bore Diameter and Depth option is used to specify the diameter of thecounterbore and the depth of the counterbore. The C’Bore Diameter area is availablein the Parameter 1 column and is replaced by the C’Bore Diameter edit box byclicking once to modify the default value. The Depth area available on the right ofthe C’Bore Diameter area is replaced by the Depth edit box by clicking once and youcan modify the default depth of the counterbore.

Head ClearanceThe Head Clearance option available in the Property column is used to specify theclearance distance between the head of the fastener and the placement plane of thehole feature. The Head Clearance area available in the Parameter 1 column isreplaced by the Head Clearance edit box by clicking once and you can modify thedefault head clearance value.

Near Side C’Sink Dia. and AngleThe Near Side C’Sink Dia. and Angle option is used to specify the diameter and theangle for the countersink on the upper face, which is the placement plane of thehole feature. The diameter is specified in the Near Side C’Sink Dia. area of theParameter 1 column and the angle is specified in the Angle area of the Parameter 2column.

c06-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 4:59 PM6


Under Hd C’Sink Dia. and AngleThe Under Hd C’Sink Dia. and Angle option is used to specify the diameter and theangle for the countersink to be applied at the end of the counterbore head. Thediameter is specified in the Under Hd C’Sink Dia. area in the Parameter 1 columnand the angle is specified in the Angle area in the Parameter 2 column.

Far Side C’SinkDia. and AngleThe Far Side C’Sink Dia. and Angle option is used to specify the diameter and theangle for the countersink to be applied at the end of the hole feature. This option isavailable only if the Through All or the Up To Next option is selected from the EndCondition drop-down list. The diameter is specified in the Far Side C’Sink Dia. areain the Parameter 1 column and the angle is specified in the Angle area in theParameter 2 column.

FavoritesThe Favorites area available in the Hole Definition dialog box is used to add the frequentlyused holes to the favorite list. If you add a hole to the favorite list, you will not have toperform the same settings to add similar types of holes every time. To add a particularhole to the favorite list, choose the Add button available in the Favorite area of theHole Definition dialog box. The New Favorite Name dialog box is displayed with thedefault name of the hole in the Favorite Name edit box as shown in Figure 6-4.

You can enter a new name in the Favorite Name edit box and choose the OK button toadd the hole to the favorite list. If you have to apply a hole feature from the favorite list,you just need to select the name of the hole feature from the Favorites drop-down list.The current parameters of the hole will be changed to the parameters of the hole featurethat is selected from the Favorites drop-down list. Figure 6-5 shows the counterboreholes created using the Hole Wizard.

Countersink TabThe Countersink tab, as shown in Figure 6-6, available in the Hole Definition dialog box isused to define the parameters of the countersink hole. Most of the options available in theProperty column are the same as those in the Property column of the Counterbore tab.However, there are some additional options to define the angle and diameter of thecountersink. These options of the Property column of the Countersink tab are discussednext.

Figure 6-4 The New Favorite Name dialog box

c06-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 4:59 PM7


Figure 6-5 A model with counterbore holes

Figure 6-6 The Countersink tab of the Hole Definition dialog box

c06-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 4:59 PM8


PropertyThe Property column of the Hole Definition dialog box is used to define the parametersof the countersink hole. As mentioned earlier, most of the options are the same as discussedin the Property column of the Counterbore tab. The options that have been discussedearlier are not included here. Some options that are not used to create only a counterboreand are not used in countersink are not available in this tab. Only the additional optionsavailable in the Property column of the Countersink tab are discussed next.

C’Sink Diameter and AngleThe C’Sink Diameter and Angle option is used to define the diameter and the angleof the countersink. The C’Sink Diameter area in the Parameter 1 column is changedto the C’Sink Diameter edit box when clicked once. The value of the countersinkdiameter is specified in this edit box. The Angle area available in the Parameter 2area is replaced by the Angle edit box when clicked once. The value of the angle ofcountersink is specified in this edit box.

Head Clearance and TypeThe Head Clearance and Type option is used to define the head clearance distancebetween the placement surface of the hole feature and the top face of the fastenerand to define the type of the counter to be added. The Head Clearance area availablein the Parameter 1 column is replaced by the Head Clearance edit box when clickedonce. The value of the clearance distance is specified in this edit box. The Typedrop-down list available on the right of the Head Clearance area is used to specify ifthe clearance distance is compensated by extending the countersink or by adding acounterbore.

Figure 6-7 shows the countersink holes created using the Hole Wizard.

Figure 6-7 A model with countersink holes

c06-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 4:59 PM9


Hole TabThe Hole tab, shown in Figure 6-8, available in the Hole Definition dialog box is used todefine the parameters to add a standard drilled hole to the model. Using this tab you canadd simple holes that can be drilled using the standard drills available in the market. Theoptions available in the Property column of this tab are used to specify the parameters forcreating a standard drilled hole.

Figure 6-9 shows the drilled holes created using the Hole Wizard.

Tap TabThe Tap tab, shown in Figure 6-10, available in the Hole Definition dialog box is used todefine the parameters to add a tapped hole to the model. Tap hole is basically a hole in whichinternal threading (also known as tapping) is shown. Therefore, using this tab you can addthe standard tapped holes in your design. Almost all the options available in the Propertycolumn of this tab are same as discussed earlier. The additional options are discussed next.

Thread Type and DepthThe Thread Type and Depth option is used to define the type of depth and the value ofthe depth of the thread. The Thread Type drop-down list available in the Parameter 2column is used to specify the type of thread depth. The options available in the ThreadType drop-down list depend on the feature termination option selected from the Tap

Figure 6-8 The Hole tab of the Hole Definition dialog box

c06-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 4:59 PM10


Drill Type drop-down list. The depth of the thread is specified in the Depth area in theParameter 2 column.

Figure 6-9 A model with drilled holes

Figure 6-10 The Tap tab of the Hole Definition dialog box

c06-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 4:59 PM11


Tip. In the modern modeling practice, the creation of threads is avoided in modelsbecause it results in the creation of complex geometry. When you generate the viewsfrom that model, the views generated contain the complex geometry, which is difficultto understand. Therefore, it is a better practice to avoid the creation of threads inthe model and add the cosmetic threads. Using the cosmetic threads you will get thethread convention in the drawing views, which is recommended, instead of creatingcomplete thread.

Add Cosmetic ThreadThe Add Cosmetic Thread option is used to add the cosmetic threads while creating atapped hole. The Add Cosmetic Thread drop-down list is available in the Parameter 1column. If you select the No Cosmetic thread option from this drop-down list, the cosmeticthread will not be added to the tapped hole. If you select the Add Cosmetic thread withthread callout option from this drop-down list, the cosmetic thread and the thread calloutwill be added to the tapped hole feature. The Add Cosmetic Thread without threadcallout option is used to add only the cosmetic thread to the hole feature.

Figure 6-11 shows the tapped holes created using the Hole Wizard.

Pipe Tap TabThe Pipe Tap tab, shown in Figure 6-12, is used to specify the parameters for the taperedpipe tap hole. The options available in this tab are the same as discussed in earlier tabs.

Legacy TabThe Legacy tab of the Hole Definition dialog box, shown in Figure 6-13, is used to add auser-defined hole feature. The options available in this tab are discussed next.

Hole typeThe Hole type drop-down list is used to specify the type of hole you want to create. Thetypes of holes available in this drop-down list are C-Bored Drilled, C-Drilled Drilled,

Figure 6-11 Model with tapped holes

c06-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 4:59 PM12


Counterbored, Counterdrilled, Countersunk, C-Sunk Drilled, Simple, Drilled, Tapered,and Tapered Drilled. The preview of the selected hole type is displayed in the previewarea provided at the right of the Hole Definition dialog box.

Section dimensionsThe Section dimensions area is used to display the various dimensions of the selectedhole and their default values. You can also modify the values by replacing the Value areaby the Value edit box.

End conditionThe Type drop-down list available in the End condition area is used to specify the endcondition of feature termination.

As discussed earlier, the preview of the hole feature is dynamically updated in the drawingarea while you are setting the parameters of the hole feature. This is because you had alreadyselected the placement plane for the placement of the hole feature. If you do not select aplacement plane for the placement of the hole feature, the preview of the hole feature is notdisplayed in the drawing area. After setting all the parameters of the hole feature, choosesthe Next button. The Hole Placement dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 6-14.

Figure 6-12 The Pipe Tap tab of the Hole Definition dialog box

c06-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 4:59 PM13


Figure 6-14 The Hole Placement dialog box

The select cursor is replaced by the placement cursor. Using the placement cursoryou can place more holes in the current hole features. As discussed earlier, if theplacement plane is selected earlier, the hole is already placed on the selected placement

plane. If the placement plane is not selected earlier then you can specify a point to place thehole feature. You can also constrain the placement of the placement point of the hole featureusing the relations and dimensions. Choose the Finish button to complete featurecreation. Figure 6-15 shows a base plate with holes created using the hole wizard.

Figure 6-13 The Legacy tab of the Hole Definition dialog box

c06-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 4:59 PM14


Figure 6-15 Base Plate with holes created using the Hole Wizard option

Tip. The hole feature created using the hole wizard consists of two sketches. Thefirst sketch is the sketch of the placement point and the second sketch is the sketch ofthe profile of hole feature. If you preselect the placement plane before invoking theHole Definition dialog box, the resulting placement sketch will be a 2D sketch.Instead of preselecting the placement plane if you select the placement point afterinvoking the Placement Point dialog box, the resulting placement sketch is a 3Dsketch. You will learn more about 3D sketches in the later chapters.

If a cosmetic thread is added in a tapped hole, the cosmetic thread is also displayedalong with the placement and hole profile sketches. You can edit the cosmetic threadsby selecting it from the FeatureManager Design Tree and right-clicking to displaythe shortcut menu. Choose the Edit Definition option to display the CosmeticThread dialog box. The Cosmetic Thread dialog box and the cosmetic threadsare discussed in later chapters.

You can also view the convention of the thread if the cosmetic thread is added to atapped hole feature. Orient the model to the top view to observe the thread conventionfrom the top view. Orient the model in the front view, back view, or any side viewto observe the thread convention from the side views.

c06-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 4:59 PM15


Figure 6-16 The Fillet PropertyManager

Creating Fillets

In SolidWorks, you can add fillets as a feature in the model using the Fillet tool. Asdiscussed earlier you can also add fillets within the sketch. But adding the fillets in asketch is not a good practice according to the design point of view. This is because

you have to keep the sketch as simple as possible. Using the fillet tool you can round aninternal or external face or edge of a model. You can also use the advanced fillet options toadd advanced fillets to the model. You can preselect the face, edge, or feature on which thefillet has to be applied. You can also select the entity to be filleted after invoking the fillettool. Choose the Fillet button from the Features toolbar or choose Insert > Features >Fillet/Round from the menu bar to invoke the Fillet PropertyManager. The FilletPropertyManager is shown in Figure 6-16. The preview of the fillet feature is also displayed

in the drawing area if the entities to be filleted are selected. If preselection is not done, youare prompted to select the edges, faces, features, or loops to add the fillet feature. Using the

Toolbar: Features > FilletMenu: Insert > Features > Fillet/Round

c06-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 4:59 PM16


Figure 6-17 Preview of the fillet feature

select cursor, select the entity to be filleted. A fillet callout is also displayed along the previewof the fillet. Figure 6-17 shows the preview of the fillet feature with fillet callout.

Using the fillet tool you can create various types of fillets. Types of fillets that can be createdusing the fillet tool are given below.

1. Constant radius fillet2. Variable radius fillet3. Face Fillet4. Full round fillet

All the above mentioned fillets are discussed next.

Constant Radius FilletThe constant radius fillet option creates a fillet of constant radius along the selected entity.This is the default option selected in the Fillet Type rollout. You can set the value of the filletradius using the Fillet spinner provided in the Items To Fillet rollout or click the value areaof the fillet callout. The value area of the callout will be changed to the radius edit box. Enterthe value of the radius and choose the ENTER key from the keyboard. The preview of thefillet will be changed dynamically when the value of the radius of the fillet is changed. Thenames of the selected entities are displayed in the Edges, Faces, Features, and Loops displayarea. The entities that you can select to add the fillet feature are faces, edges, features, andloops. Now, choose the OK button from the Fillet PropertyManager. Figures 6-18 through6-23 show the selection of different entities and the resultant fillet creation from the selectedentities.

c06-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 4:59 PM17


Figure 6-22 Selecting the feature Figure 6-23 Resultant fillet

Figure 6-20 Selecting the face Figure 6-21 Resultant fillet

Figure 6-18 Selecting the edges Figure 6-19 Resultant fillet

c06-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 4:59 PM18


Multiple Radius FilletUsing the Multiple radius fillet option provided in the Fillet PropertyManager you canspecify a fillet with different radii to all the selected edges. For creating a fillet feature usingthe multiple radius option, preselect the edges, faces, or features or select them after invokingthe Fillet PropertyManager. After invoking the Fillet tool, select the Multiple radius filletcheck box. The preview of the fillet feature with the default value is displayed in the drawingarea. You will notice that you are provided with different callouts for each selected entity.Figure 6-24 shows the preview of the fillet feature with Multiple radius fillet check boxselected. The names of the selected entities are displayed in the Edges, Faces, Features andLoops display box. The boundaries of the currently selected entity in the display box arehighlighted in yellow color. You can set the value of each selected entity by using the Radiusspinner or specify the value of fillet radius in the radius callout as shown in Figure 6-25. Asyou modify the value of the radius, the preview of the fillet feature modifies dynamically inthe drawing area. Figure 6-26 shows the fillet created using the multiple radius fillet.

Fillet With and Without Tangent PropagationIn SolidWorks you can add a fillet feature to a model with or without the tangent propagation.

Tip. You can preselect a feature for adding a fillet feature on that feature or selectthe feature after invoking the fillet tool. For postselection of the feature to fillet,invoke the FeatureManager Design Tree flyout and select the feature from theFeatureManager Design Tree. You can also select the feature from the drawingarea. For selecting the feature from the drawing area, select any face of the featurefrom the drawing area and move the cursor away from the feature. Now, move thecursor back to the selected face and right-click to invoke the shortcut menu. Choosethe Select Feature option from the shortcut menu to select the feature. The previewof the filleted feature is displayed in the drawing area.

Figure 6-24 Preview of the fillet feature with Multiple radiusfillet check box selected

c06-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 4:59 PM19


Figure 6-25 Different radii specified in eachradius callout

Figure 6-26 Resultant fillet

Tip. The Full preview radio button available in the Fillet PropertyManager isused to preview the fillet feature before actually creating the feature. The Fullpreview radio button is selected by default. If you select the Partial previewradio button, then you can view only the partial preview of the fillet feature. If youselect a face to add a fillet feature and select the Partial preview radio button thenyou cannot preview the fillet feature created to all the edges adjacent to the selectedface. You can preview only the fillet on the single edge of the selected face. Use theA key from the keyboard to cycle the preview of the fillet feature on other edges of theselected face. If you select the No preview radio button, you cannot see the previewof the fillet feature.

When you invoke the Fillet PropertyManager, you can observe that by default the Tangentpropagation check box is selected. Therefore, if you select an edge, face, feature, or loop tofillet, then it will automatically select other entities that are tangential to the selected entity.Thus, it will apply the fillet feature to all the entities that are tangential to the selected one.If you clear the Tangential propagation check box, the fillet is applied only to the selectedentity. Figure 6-27 shows the entity to be selected to add a fillet feature. Figures 6-28 and 6-29show the fillet feature created with the Tangent propagation check box cleared and selectedrespectively.

c06-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 4:59 PM20


Setback FilletsThe setback fillet is created where three or more than three edges are merged into a vertex.This type of fillet is used to smoothly blend transition surfaces generated from the edges tothe fillet vertex. This smooth transition is created between all the selected edges and thevertex selected for the setback type of fillet. To create a setback fillet, invoke the FilletPropertyManager and select three or more than three edges to apply the fillet. Note that the

Figure 6-27 Edge to be selected to apply the fillet feature

Figure 6-28 Fillet feature created with theTangent propagation check box cleared

Figure 6-29 Fillet feature created with theTangent propagation check box selected

Tip. You can also drag and drop the fillet features created on one edge to the otheredge. Using the left mouse button select the fillet feature from the FeatureManagerDesign Tree or from the drawing area and hold down the left mouse button anddrag the cursor and release the left mouse button to drop the feature on the requirededge or face. You can also copy the fillet feature and paste it on the selected entity.

c06-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 4:59 PM21


edges should share the same vertex. The preview of the fillet will be displayed in the drawingarea. Now, use the left mouse button at the black arrow on the Setback Parameters rollout toexpand the rollout. The SetBack Parameters rollout is displayed as shown in Figure 6-30.This rollout will be used to specify the setback parameters.

Using the left mouse button click once in the Setback Vertices display area to invoke thesetback vertex selection command. Now, select the vertex where the edges meet. Figure 6-31shows the selected edges and the vertex assigned the setback parameters.

When you select the vertex for the setback fillet, you will observe that callouts with unassignedsetback distances are displayed in the drawing area. The name of the selected vertex isdisplayed in the Setback Vertices display area. The names of the selected edges are displayedin the Setback Distances edit box. Select the name of the edge in the Setback Distances editbox to assign a setback distance to that edge. A red color arrow is displayed along that edge.

Figure 6-30 The Setback Parameters rollout

Figure 6-31 Edges and vertex to be selected to apply the set back fillet feature

c06-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 4:59 PM22


Using the Distance spinner provided in the Setback Parameters rollout, assign a setbackdistance. Similarly, assign the setback distance to all the edges. You can also assign the setbackdistance directly by specifying the value in the setback callouts displayed in the drawing area.As discussed earlier, the preview of the fillet is updated automatically when you assign anyvalue. The Set Unassigned button available in the Setback Parameters rollout is used toassign the setback distance displayed in the Distance spinner to all the unassigned edges.The Set All button is used to assign the setback distance displayed in the Distance spinner toall the edges. Figure 6-32 shows the preview of the setback fillet and Figure 6-33 shows asetback fillet on the right of the model and a normal fillet on the other side of the model.

Other Fillet OptionsYou are also provided with various other fillet options using which you can create an accurateand aesthetic design. The other fillet options available in the Fillet PropertyManager areKeep features, Round corners, Controlling the Overflow type, and so on. There optionsare discussed next.

Keep featureIf you have boss or cut features in a model and the fillet created is large enough toconsume those features, it is recommended that you select the Keep features check boxavailable in the Fillet Options rollout. This check box is selected by default, but youshould confirm before creating any fillet feature. If you clear this check box, the filletfeature will consume the features that will obstruct its path. Note that the features thatare consumed by the fillet feature are not deleted from the model. They disappear fromthe model because of some geometric inconsistency. When you rollback, suppress, ordelete the fillet, the consumed features will reappear. You will learn more about rollbackand suppress in later chapters. Figure 6-34 shows the model and the edge to be selectedfor fillet. Figure 6-35 shows the fillet feature with Keep features check box cleared.Figure 6-36 shows the fillet feature with Keep features check box selected.

Figure 6-32 Preview of the setback fillet Figure 6-33 Simple and setback fillet features

c06-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 4:59 PM23


Figure 6-35 Fillet feature created with theKeep features check box cleared

Figure 6-36 Fillet feature created with the Keepfeatures check box selected

Round cornersThe Round corners option is used to round the edges at the corners of the fillet feature.To create a fillet feature with round corners, select the Round corners check box fromthe Fillet Options rollout after specifying all the parameters of the fillet feature. Figure6-37 shows a fillet feature created with the Round corners check box cleared and Figure6-38 shows a fillet feature created with the Round corners check box selected.

Overflow typeThe Overflow type area is used to specify the physical condition that the fillet featureshould adopt when it extends beyond an area. By default, SolidWorks automatically adoptsthe best possible flow type to accommodate the fillet, depending on the geometricconditions. This is because the Default option is selected by default in the Overflow typearea. The other two options available in this area are discussed next.

Figure 6-34 Edge to be selected to apply the fillet feature

c06-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 4:59 PM24


Figure 6-37 Fillet feature created with theRound corners check box cleared

Figure 6-38 Fillet feature created with the Roundcorners check box selected

Figure 6-39 Fillet feature created with theoverflow type as Keep edge

Figure 6-40 Fillet feature created with theoverflow type as Keep surface

Keep edgeThe Keep edge radio button is selected when the fillet feature extends beyond aspecified area. Therefore, to accommodate the fillet feature this option will dividethe fillet into multiple surfaces and the adjacent edges are not disturbed. A dip iscreated at the top of the fillet feature. Figure 6-39 shows a fillet feature created withthe Keep edge radio button selected from the Overflow type area.

Keep surfaceThe Keep surface radio button available in this area is selected to accommodatedthe fillet feature by trimming the fillet feature. This will maintain the smooth roundedfillet surface but it disturbs the adjacent edges. As this option maintains the smoothfillet surface, it extends the adjacent surface. Figure 6-40 shows a fillet feature createdwith the Keep surface radio button selected from the Overflow type area.

c06-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 4:59 PM25


Variable Radius FilletThe variable radius fillet is created by specifying different radii along the length of selectededge at specified intervals. Depending on the options, you can create a smooth transition ora straight transition between the vertices to which the radii are applied. To create a variableradius fillet invoke the Fillet PropertyManager. Select the Variable radius radio button fromthe Fillet Type rollout. The Variable Radius Parameters rollout is automatically displayedin the Fillet PropertyManager as shown in Figure 6-41.

You are prompted to select the edge to fillet. Using the left mouse button select the edge oredges that you want to fillet. The name of the selected edge is displayed in the Edges,Faces, Features and Loops display area. By default, the radius is applied at the startpointand the endpoint. The variable radius callouts are displayed at the ends of the selected edgeas shown in Figure 6-42.

Figure 6-41 The Variable Radius Parameters rollout

Figure 6-42 Variable radius callouts displayed at the vertices of the selected edge

c06-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 4:59 PM26


The names of the vertices on which the callouts are added are displayed in the AttachedRadii display box. You will find three red points on the selected edge because the value ofthe control point in the Add Control Points spinner is set to 3. You can create the number ofcontrol points using the Add Control Points spinner. These control points are also calledmovable points because you can change the position of these control points. The additionalradii are specified on these points on the selected edge.

Using the left mouse button select the three control points available on the selected edge. Asyou select the control point the Radius and Position callouts are displayed for each controlpoint as shown in Figure 6-43. The name of the selected point is also displayed in the AttachedRadii display box.

You will observe that the position of three points is described in terms of percentage. You canmodify the position of the points by modifying the value of percentage in the Position area ofthe Radius and Position callout. By following this procedure you can also modify the placementof other points. You will observe that radius value is not assigned to any of the callouts.Therefore, you need to specify the value of the radius in the callouts. Using the left mousebutton select the name of the vertex or point; the name of the selected item is highlighted inyellow in its respective callout. Using the Radius spinner set the value of the radius for theselected item. You can also specify the value of the radius in the radius area of the callout. Setthe value of each unassigned radius. You can also use the Set Unassigned button to assignthe value displayed in the Radius spinner to all the unassigned radii. The Set All button isused to assign the same value that is displayed in the Radius spinner to all the radii. Figure6-44 shows the preview of the fillet feature with modified positions of the control points withradius values specified to all the points and vertices. Figure 6-45 shows the resultant filletfeature.

Figure 6-43 Radius and Position callouts are displayed afterselecting the control points

c06-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 4:59 PM27


Figure 6-44 Preview of the variable radiusfillet

Figure 6-45 Resultant fillet

Smooth transitionThe Smooth transition radio button when selected creates a smooth transition by smoothlyblending the points and vertices on which you have defined the radius on the selected edge.

Straight transitionThe Straight transition radio button when selected creates a linear transition by blendingthe points and vertices on which you have defined the radius on the selected edge. Inthis case the edge tangency is not maintained between one fillet radius and the adjacent face.

Figures 6-46 and 6-47 show the fillets created with smooth transition and straight transitionoptions respectively.

Face FilletUsing the Face Fillet you can add a fillet between two sets of faces. It blends the first set offace with the second set of face. It adds or removes the material according to the geometric

Figure 6-46 Variable radius fillet with smoothtransition

Figure 6-47 Variable radius fillet with straighttransition

c06-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 4:59 PM28


conditions. It can also completely or partially remove the faces to accommodate the filletfeature. To create a face fillet feature, invoke the Fillet PropertyManager and select the Facefillet radio button from the Fillet Type rollout. The Item To Fillet rollout is modified andprovides the Face Set 1 and Face Set 2 display areas. The Fillet PropertyManager is shown inFigure 6-48 with the Face fillet radio button selected.

You are prompted to select the faces to fillet for face set 1 and face set 2. Using the left mousebutton select the first set of faces. You can select even more than one face in a set. The nameof the selected faces is displayed in the Face Set 1 display box and the selected faces aredisplayed in green color. The Face Set 1 callout with radius is displayed in the drawing area.Click in the Face Set 2 display area to invoke the selection tool and select the second set offaces. The second set of selected faces is displayed in red color and the Face Set 2 callout isdisplayed in the drawing area. Now, set the value of the radius in the Radius spinner. TheTangent propagation check box is used to create the face fillet tangent to the adjacent faces.This check box is selected by default. If you clear this check box, the fillet is not forced to betangent to the adjacent faces. Figure 6-49 shows the faces to be selected to apply the facefillet. Figure 6-50 displays the resultant fillet with three faces of the slot completely eliminatedafter applying the fillet.

Figure 6-48 The Fillet PropertyManager with Face fillet radiobutton selected

c06-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 4:59 PM29


Face Fillet Using the Hold LineUsing the face fillet created with the hold line you can specify the radius and the shape of thefillet by determining a hold line. A hold line can be a set of edges, or a split line projected ona face. You will learn more about split lines in the later chapters. The radius of the fillet isdetermined by the distance between the hold line and the edges or faces selected to befilleted. To create a face fillet using the hold line invoke the Fillet PropertyManager. Usingthe left mouse button click on the black arrow available at the top right of the Fillet Optionsrollout to display the rollout as shown in Figure 6-51.

The selection mode is active in the Face Set 1 display area and you are prompted to select thefaces to fillet for face set 1 and face set 2. Using the left mouse button select the faces for theface set 1. The names of the selected faces are displayed in the Face Set 1 display area and theselected face is displayed in green. Now, click in the Face Set 2 display area to activate theselection mode and select the faces to add in the face set 2. The selected faces are displayedin red color. By default, the Tangent propagation check box is selected. Therefore, you donot need to select the tangent faces in both the face sets. This is because it will automatically

Figure 6-49 Faces to be selected Figure 6-50 Resultant fillet

Figure 6-51 The Fillet Options rollout

c06-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 4:59 PM30


select the faces tangent to the selected face. Now, using the left mouse button click in theHold line display box and select the hold line or lines. Now, choose the OK button from theFillet PropertyManager. Figure 6-52 shows an example in which the faces and the hold lineare selected. Figure 6-53 shows the resultant face fillet using the hold line.

Curvature Continuous in the Face Fillet with Hold LineThe Curvature continuous check box is selected to apply the face fillet feature with continuouscurvature throughout the fillet feature. Note that fillet with continuous curvature is possibleonly by creating a face fillet feature with hold line. You have to specify the hold lines on bothset of faces. Figure 6-54 shows a model in which face fillet using the hold line is created onboth the pillars. On the right pillar the face fillet is created with the Curvature continuouscheck box cleared and on the left pillar the face fillet is created with the Curvature continuouscheck box selected.

Figure 6-52 Faces and hold line to be selected Figure 6-53 Resultant fillet

Figure 6-54 Face fillet created with the Curvature continuouscheck box selected and cleared

c06-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 4:59 PM31


Full Round FilletThe full round fillet is used to add a semicircular fillet feature. To create a full round filletinvoke the Fillet PropertyManager and select the Full round fillet radio button. The ItemTo Fillet rollout is modified as shown in Figure 6-55. The selection mode is active in the SideFace Set 1 display area and you are prompted to select faces for the center and side face sets.Select the first face for the side face set 1. The selected face is displayed in green. Now, clickin the Center Face display area and select the center face. The selected face is displayed inbrown color. Next, click in the Side Face Set 2 display area and select the face for the side faceset 2. Choose the OK button from the Fillet PropertyManager. Figure 6-56 shows the twofaces being selected; the third face to be selected is the left face parallel to the first selectedface. Figure 6-57 shows the resultant full round fillet.

Figure 6-55 The Item to Fillet rollout when the Full round filletradio button is selected from the Fillet Type rollout

Figure 6-56 Faces selected to create full roundfillet.

Figure 6-57 Resultant full round fillet

c06-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 4:59 PM32


Selection MethodsAs you have learned about basic and advanced modeling tools, it is necessary for you to learnabout some selection methods using which you can increase your productivity and speed ofmodeling. The selection methods that can increase your speed of creating fillets andchamfers are discussed next.

Select OtherThe Select Other option is the most common tool to cycle through the entities for selection.This option is used when the selection is difficult in a multi-featured complex model. Beforeinvoking any other tool, select any entity and right-click to invoke the shortcut menu. Choosethe Select Other option from the shortcut menu. The select cursor is replaced by the cyclethrough cursor. Also, any one face of the model is selected and the boundary of the face ishighlighted in green. You can cycle through the other faces using the right-click and whenthe required face is selected, use the left mouse button to confirm the selection.

Select LoopThe Select Loop option is used to select the loops and using this tool you can also cyclethrough various loops before confirming the selection. This option is very useful when youare working with a complex model and you have to select a loop from that model. Using theselect cursor, select any of the edge of the loop and right-click to invoke the shortcut menu.Choose the Select Loop option from the short cut menu. The loop that is possible by selectingthat edge will be highlighted in green and an arrow will be displayed in yellow color. Movethe cursor on that arrow and when the arrow is displayed in red, use the left mouse button tocycle through the loops. Repeat this until you select the required loop. Figure 6-58 shows aloop selected using the Select Loop option. Figure 6-59 shows the second loop selected whenthe left mouse button is used on the arrow to cycle through the loops.

Figure 6-58 Loop selected using the Select Looptool

Figure 6-59 Second loop is selected while cyclingthrough the loops

Tip. The Select Midpoint option available in the shortcut menu is generally usedin the sketching environment or while creating 3D sketches. You will learn moreabout 3D sketches in the later chapters.

c06-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 4:59 PM33


Select TangencyThe Select Tangency option is used to automatically select the edges or faces that are tangentto the selected face. This option is available in the shortcut menu only when a face or edge istangent to the selected face or edge. For using this option select any face or edge using theselect tool and right-click to invoke the shortcut menu and choose the Select Tangencyoption from the shortcut menu.

Creating Chamfer

Chamfering is defined as a process in which the sharp edges are bevelled in order toreduce the area of stress concentration. This process also eliminates the sharp edgesand corners that are not desirable. In SolidWorks chamfer is created using the Chamfer

tool. This tool is invoked by using the Chamfer button available in the Features tool bar. You canalso choose Insert > Features > Chamfer from the menu bar to invoke this tool. When youinvoke the chamfer tool, the Chamfer PropertyManager is displayed as shown in Figure 6-60.Various types of chamfers created using the Chamfer PropertyManager are discussed next.

Edge ChamferThe chamfers that are applied to the edges are known as edge chamfer. To create an edgechamfer invoke the Chamfer PropertyManager and then select the edges to chamfer. Whenyou select an edge to chamfer, the preview of the chamfer feature with a distance and anglecallout is displayed in the drawing area. The name of the selected edge is displayed in theEdges and Faces or Vertex display area. Also, the selected entity is highlighted in yellowcolor and a yellow arrow is also displayed in the preview. Figure 6-61 shows the edge to beselected for chamfering and Figure 6-62 shows the preview of the chamfer feature.

By default, the Angle distance radio button is selected. Therefore, the distance and anglecallout is displayed in the drawing area. You can set the value of the distance and angle usingthe Distance spinner and the Angle spinner or you can insert the value of distance and angledirectly in the distance and angle callout. The Flip direction check box is used to specify thedirection of distance measurement. If you select the Flip direction check box, the arrow isalso flipped in the preview in the drawing area. You can also flip the direction by clicking thearrow in the drawing area.

Tip. For creating a fillet or a chamfer feature if you select a face, the fillet orchamfer is applied to all the edges of that face. Consider a case in which you havea blind cut feature on the top face of a block. You want to fillet only the upper edgesof the cut feature. You can use the Select Loop option to execute feature creation.If you select the top face of the model, then all the edges of the top of the block andthe edges of the cut will be filleted. Therefore, after selecting the top face of the blockpress and hold down the CTRL key and select any one upper edge of the cut. Now,apply the fillet feature to this combination of selection. You will observe that onlythe upper loop of edges of the cut will be filleted instead of the whole upper face. Inthe same way you can also fillet only the edges of the block when you are alsohaving a slot on the top face of the model.

Toolbar: Features > ChamferMenu: Insert > Features > Chamfer

c06-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 4:59 PM34


Figure 6-60 The Chamfer PropertyManager

Figure 6-61 Edge selected to chamfer Figure 6-62 Preview of the chamfer feature

If you select the Distance distance radio button from the Chamfers Parameters callout,the Flip direction check box is replaced by the Equal distance check box. The angle anddistance callout is replaced by distance 1 and distance 2 callouts. By default, the Equaldistance check box is selected. Set the value of the chamfer distance in the Distance 1check box or specify the value in the callout. If you want to specify different distances forcreating the chamfer, clear the Equal distance check box. The Distance 2 spinner isdisplayed in the Chamfer Parameters rollout.

c06-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 4:59 PM35


After specifying all the parameters choose the OK button from the ChamferPropertyManager. Figure 6-63 shows the chamfer created on a base plate.

Vertex ChamferUsing the chamfer tool you can also add chamfer to a selected vertex. It will chop theselected vertex to the specified distance. To create the vertex chamfer invoke the ChamferPropertyManager and select the Vertex radio button from the Chamfer Parameters rollout.The preview of the chamfer is displayed in the drawing area with distance callouts. Figure 6-64shows the vertex to be selected and Figure 6-65 shows the preview of the vertex chamfer.

Figure 6-63 Chamfer created on a base plate

Tip. You can also select the face for applying the chamfer feature. If you select theface for applying the chamfer, then the chamfer is applied to all the edges of theselected face.

Figure 6-55 Vertex to be selected Figure 6-56 Preview of the vertex chamfer

c06-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 4:59 PM36


Set the value of the chamfer distance along each edge in the Distance 1, Distance 2,Distance 3 spinners. You can also specify the value of chamfer distance in the distancecallouts. If you want to specify equal distance to all the edges then select the Equaldistance check box. After specifying all the parameters choose the OK button from theChamfer PropertyManager. Figure 6-66 shows the vertex chamfer feature applied tothe base feature.

Chamfer with and without Keep Feature optionIf you have boss or cut features in a model and the chamfer created is large enough toconsume those features, it is recommended that you select the Keep features check box.If this check box is cleared, the chamfer feature will consume the features that will obstructits path. Note that the features that are consumed by the chamfer feature are not deletedfrom the model. They are removed from the model because of some geometricinconsistency. When you rollback or delete that chamfer, the consumed features willreappear. Figure 6-67 shows the chamfer feature with the Keep features check box cleared.Figure 6-68 shows the chamfer feature with the Keep features check box selected.

Creating the Shell Feature

Shelling is defined as the process in which the material is scooped out from a modeland the resultant model is hollowed from inside. The resultant model will be a hollowmodel with walls of specified thickness and cavity inside. The selected face or faces of

the model are also removed in this operation. If you do not select any face to remove, it willcreate a closed hollow model. You can also specify multiple thickness to the walls. You cancreate shell feature using the Shell tool. Use the Shell button from the Features toolbar orchoose Insert > Features > Shell from the menu bar to invoke the Shell tool. The Shell1

Figure 6-66 Vertex chamfer created on a base feature

Toolbar: Features > ShellMenu: Insert > Features > Shell

c06-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 4:59 PM37


Figure 6-67 Chamfer feature with Keep fea-tures check box cleared

Figure 6-68 Chamfer feature with Keep featurescheck box selected

PropertyManager is invoked and the confirmation corner is also displayed. The Shell1PropertyManager is displayed as shown in Figure 6-69.

You are prompted to select the faces to remove. Select the face or faces from the model thatyou want to remove. The selected faces will be highlighted in green color and their names aredisplayed in the Faces to Remove display area. Set the value of the wall thickness in theThickness spinner and choose the OK button from the Shell1 PropertyManager. Figure 6-70shows the face selected to remove and Figure 6-71 shows the resultant shell feature created.

If none of the faces are selected to be removed, then the resultant model will be hollowedfrom inside with no face removed. Figure 6-72 shows a model in the Hidden Line Visiblemode with a shell feature in which faces are not selected to be removed.

Figure 6-69 The Shell1 PropertyManager

c06-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 4:59 PM38


Figure 6-70 Face selected to be removed Figure 6-71 The resultant shell feature

The in-built artificial intelligence of shelling command in SolidWorks enables the shell featureto decide how much quantity of material to be removed depending upon the geometricconditions. Refer to Figure 6-73 in which the wall thickness of the shell feature is less foruniform shelling of the entire model. Refer to Figure 6-74 in which the wall thickness is morebecause of which it cannot accommodate the uniform shelling of the entire model. Therefore,the shell feature will not remove the material from those area where the material removalis not possible.

Figure 6-72 Shell feature with faces not selected to remove

Tip. If the thickness of the shell feature is more than the radius of the fillet featurethen the fillet will not be included in the shell feature. Therefore, it results in sharpedges after adding the fillet. Same is with the chamfer feature.

c06-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 4:59 PM39


Figure 6-73 Shell feature with smaller shellthickness

Figure 6-74 Shell feature with larger shellthickness

Multi-thickness ShellUsing this option available in the shell tool you can specify different thickness values tothe selected faces. To use this option, invoke the Shell PropertyManager and select theface to remove and then specify the uniform thickness in the Thickness spinner of theParameters rollout. Now, select the blue arrow on the top right of the Multi-thicknessSettings rollout to open this rollout. Click in the Multi-thickness Faces display area toactivate the selection mode. The Multi-thickness Settings area with the selection modeactive is displayed in Figure 6-75.

Now, you are prompted to specify multi-thickness(es). Select the faces on which you wantto specify the special thickness. Set the value of the thickness using the Multi-thickness(es)spinner and choose the OK button. Figure 6-76 shows the faces to be selected to specifythe multi-thickness shell. Figure 6-77 shows the resultant shell feature.

Tip. The Shell outward check box is selected to create the shell feature on theouter side of the model.

The faces selected to be removed in the shell feature can be a planar face or a curvedface. But creating a shell by removing a curved face depends upon the geometry of thecurved face to adopt the specified shell thickness and other geometric conditions.

Figure 6-75 The Multi-thickness Settings rollout

c06-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 4:59 PM40


TUTORIALS

Tutorial 1In this tutorial you will create the model shown in Figure 6-78. The dimensions of the modelare shown in Figure 6-79. (Expected time: 30 min)

The steps to be followed to complete this tutorial are given next:

a. Create the base feature of the model on the default plane, refer to Figures 6-80 and 6-81.b. Create the second feature, which is a cut feature, on the top planar face of the base

feature, refer to Figures 6-82 through 6-84.

Figure 6-76 Faces to be selected to applymulti-thickness shell

Figure 6-77 Resultant multi-thickness shell


c06-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 4:59 PM41


Figure 6-79 Top view, Front broken-out section view, and Side view with dimensions

c. Create the rectangular recess at the bottom of the base as a cut feature, refer to Figure 6-85.d. Create the square cuts, which act as the recess of square head bolt, refer to Figure 6-85.e. Create a hole feature using the Hole PropertyManager and modify the placement of the

hole feature, refer to Figure 6-86.f. Create the cut feature on the second top planar face of the base feature, refer to Figure 6-87.g. Create the fillet feature on the solid model, refer to Figures 6-88 and 6-89.h. Apply the chamfers to the solid model, refer to Figures 6-90 and 6-91.

Creating the Base Feature1. Start SolidWorks and then open a new part file from the Template tab of the New


2. Draw the sketch of the front view of the model using the automatic mirroring option tocapture the design intent of the model.

3. Add the required relations and dimensions to the sketch as shown in Figure 6-80.

c06-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 4:59 PM42


NoteAs shown in the above figure, tolerances are applied to some dimensions. After adding thedimensions to the sketch, select the dimension and add the tolerance to the dimension using theDimension PropertyManager as discussed in the earlier chapters.

Using the Dimension Properties dialog box change the radial dimension of the arc to thediameter dimension.

Next, you need to extrude the sketch to a distance of 46mm using the mid plane option.You will extrude the sketch using the midplane option because it is recommended thatparts that are to be assembled should have default planes in the center of the model.


5. Right-click in the drawing area and choose the Mid Plane option from the shortcutmenu to extrude the sketch symmetrically to both the sides of the sketching plane.


7. Choose the Isometric button from the Standard Views toolbar.

The base feature created after extruding the sketch to a given depth is shown in Figure 6-81.

Creating the Second FeatureThe second feature of the model is a cut feature. This feature is created by extruding a sketch

Figure 6-80 Fully defined sketch of the base feature

c06-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 4:59 PM43



created on the top planar face of the base feature using the cut option. The cut feature will beextruded upto the selected surface.

1. Selected the top planar face of the base feature as the sketching plane and invoke thesketching environment.

2. Orient the model normal to the sketching plane and using the standard sketching toolscreate the sketch for the cut feature and apply the required relations to the sketch.

The sketch of the second feature is shown in Figure 6-82.


The preview of the cut feature is displayed in the drawing area with the default values ofthe blind option. You need to extrude the cut feature upto the selected surface. Therefore,orient the model in the isometric view because the selection of feature termination surfaceis very easy in the isometric view.

4. Choose the Isometric button from the Standard Views toolbar to orient themodel in the isometric view.

Tip. Refer to Figure 6-79; you will observe that the dimension that reflects thedepth of the extruded feature has a tolerance applied to it. Therefore, double-clickthe extruded feature in the FeatureManager Design Tree or in the drawingarea. All the dimensions applied to the model are displayed. Select the dimensionthat reflects the depth of the extruded feature and apply the tolerance using theDimension PropertyManager.

c06-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 4:59 PM44


Figure 6-82 Sketch of the second feature

You will observe that the preview of the cut feature is inside the model, but you need toremove the outer part of the sketch profile. Therefore, you need to change the side of thecut feature.

5. Select the Flip side to cut check box. The preview of the cut feature is modifieddynamically.

6. Right-click in the drawing area and choose the Up To Surface option from the shortcutmenu.

You are prompted to select a face or a surface to complete the specification of Direction 1.

7. Select the surface for feature termination shown in Figure 6-83 and right-click to endfeature creation.

The model after adding the cut feature is shown in Figure 6-84.

Creating the Rectangular RecessThe third feature to be added in the model is the rectangular recess. This rectangular recessis created as a rectangular cut feature added on the bottom face of the model.

1. Orient the model using the Rotate tool and select the bottom face of the base feature asthe sketching plane.

2. Invoke the sketching environment and orient the model normal to the sketching plane.

3. Using the standard sketching tool create the sketch of the rectangular recess, which is inthe form of a rectangle of 195 x 35 mm. Apply the required relations and dimensions tothe sketch.

c06-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 4:59 PM45


Figure 6-83 Surface to be selected for the cutfeature


4. Choose the Extruded Cut button from the Features toolbar.

5. Set the value of the Depth spinner to 2 and choose OK from the Cut-ExtrudePropertyManager.

Creating the Recess for the Head of Square Head BoltIt is clear from Figure 6-79 that the bolt to be inserted in the part will be a square head bolt.Therefore, you need to create the recess for the head of the bolt. It will be created by extrudingthe square sketch to a given distance using the cut option.

1. Rotate the model and select the upper face of the recess as the sketching plane. Invokethe sketching environment and orient the model normal to the sketching plane.

2. Using the standard sketching tools create the sketch. The sketch includes two squares oflength 26 and the distance between the centers of the squares is 78. Refer to Figure 6-79.Apply the required relations and dimensions.

3. Using the Cut-Extrude PropertyManager extrude the sketch to the given distance. Fordistance refer to Figure 6-79.

The rotated model after adding this cut feature is shown in Figure 6-85.

Creating the Hole FeatureAfter creating the recess for the head of the square head bolt, you need to create the holeusing the hole tool.

For creating a hole using the hole tool, you first need to create a sketched point. Thesketched point will be created on the placement plane of the hole feature. After creatingthe sketched hole select the hole placement plane.

1. Select the right top planar surface of the base feature as the sketch plane.

c06-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 4:59 PM46



2. Create two sketched points on the right and the left top planar faces of the base feature.

Next, you need to define the placement of the sketched point. It is clear from Figure 6-79that the centerpoint hole is coincident with the center point of the square recess feature.Therefore, you will coincide the sketched points with the center of the squares. First youwill have to change the model view display from Shaded to Hidden Lines Visible so thatthe square recess feature is visible.

3. Choose the Hidden Lines Visible button from the View toolbar.

4. Choose the Centerline button from the Sketch Tools toolbar and move the cursorto the lower left corner of the square. When the cursor is displayed in yellowcolor, specify the startpoint of the line. Move the cursor to the upper right cornerof the square and when the cursor is displayed in yellow color, specify the endpoint of theline.

5. Right-click in the drawing area and choose the Select option from the shortcut menu.This will end line creation and also exit the Line tool. A centerline is created as a diagonalof the square.

6. Press and hold down the CTRL key from the keyboard and select the centerline createdpreviously. Now select the left sketched point.

The Properties PropertyManager is displayed. Using this you will add the relationbetween the centerpoint of the circle and the centerline. Since the centerline is createdas the diagonal of the square and it is a general geometric fundamental that the midpointof the diagonal of a square or a rectangle lies at the center, therefore, you will add arelation such that the centerpoint of the circle will be placed at the midpoint of the diagonal.

c06-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 4:59 PM47


7. Choose the Midpoint button from the Add Relations rollout of the PropertiesPropertyManager. Choose the OK button from the Properties PropertyManager.

8. Similarly, create the diagonal centerline coincident to the right square. Add the midpointrelation between the centerline and the sketched point.

9. Exit the sketcher environment and change the model display mode to shaded. Select theright top planar surface of the base feature as the placement plane for the hole feature.

As you select the placement plane, the Simple Hole option is enabled in the menu bar.

10. Choose Insert > Features >Hole > Simple Hole from the menu bar to invoke theHole PropertyManager.

As you invoke the Hole PropertyManager the preview of the hole feature with defaultsettings is displayed in the drawing area. The confirmation corner is also displayed.

11. Right-click in the drawing area and choose the Through All option from the shortcutmenu to define feature termination.

12. Set the value of the Hole Diameter spinner to 12 and choose the OK button from theHole PropertyManager.

13. Select the centerpoint of the hole and drag the cursor to the right sketched point. Releasethe left mouse button when the cursor turns yellow in color.

14. Using the same procedure create the second hole feature on the left side of the model.The model after creating the hole features is displayed in Figure 6-86.

15. The next feature of the model is a cut feature. To create this feature you will have tocreate the sketch on the second top planar face of the base feature. The model afteradding the cut feature is shown in Figure 6-87.

Creating the Fillet FeatureAfter creating all the other features, you will now add the fillet feature to the model.

1. Choose the Fillet button from the Features toolbar to invoke the FilletPropertyManager.

After invoking the Fillet PropertyManager you are prompted to selected edges, faces,

Tip. Refer to Figure 6-79; you will find that the dimension of the cut feature isgiven from the center of the sketch. For creating this dimension create a diagonalcenterline between the right endpoint of the lower horizontal line and the leftendpoint of the upper horizontal line. Create a sketched point and apply the midpointrelation between the centerline and the sketched point. Using this sketched pointyou can dimension the sketch from the center of the dimension.

c06-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 4:59 PM48


Figure 6-86 Model after adding the hole features

features, or loops to fillet. As evident from the model you will select only the edges toapply the fillet feature.

2. Using the select tool select the edges shown in Figure 6-88.

As soon as you select the edges the preview of the fillet feature with the default values isshown in the drawing area. A radius callout is also displayed along the selected edge.Now, you need to modify the default value of the fillet feature.

Figure 6-87 Model after adding the cut feature

c06-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 4:59 PM49


NoteIf the preview of the fillet feature is not displayed in the drawing area then select the FullPreview radio button available in the Item To Fillet rollout of the Fillet PropertyManager.

3. Set the value of the Radius spinner to 8 and choose the OK button from the FilletPropertyManager.

The model after adding the fillet feature is shown in Figure 6-89.

Figure 6-88 Edges to be selected for the fillet feature

Figure 6-89 Fillet feature is added to the model

c06-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 4:59 PM50


Creating the Chamfer FeatureThe next feature of this model is the chamfer feature.

1. Choose the Chamfer button from the Features toolbar to invoke the ChamferPropertyManager.

2. Using the select tool select the edges of the cut features as shown in Figure 6-90. Theedges that are tangent to the selected edges are selected automatically because the selectionmode of the chamfer feature uses tangent selection.

As soon as you select the edges the preview of the chamfer feature is displayed in thedrawing area with the default values. The angle and distance callout is also displayed.Now, you will set the required value of chamfer.

The required chamfer parameters are 1mm and 45-degree. The Angle distance radiobutton is selected by default in the Chamfer Parameters rollout. The value of angle inthe Angle spinner is set as 45-degree, therefore, you do not need to modify this value.You will set only the value of the distance in the Distance spinner.

3. Set the value of the distance in the Distance spinner to 1 and choose the OK button fromthe Chamfer PropertyManager.

Following the same procedure add the chamfer feature to the semicircular edge of thebase feature. Refer to Figure 6-79 for the parameters of the chamfer feature.

The final solid model is shown in Figure 6-91. The FeatureManager Design Tree of themodel is shown in Figure 6-92.

Figure 6-90 Edges to be selected

c06-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 4:59 PM51





Figure 6-92 The FeatureManager Design Tree of the model

c06-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 4:59 PM52




Tutorial 2In this tutorial you will create the model shown in Figure 6-93. For better understanding ofthe model the section view of the model is shown in Figure 6-94. The dimensions of modelare shown in Figure 6-95. (Expected time: 30 min)


Figure 6-94 Section view of the model

c06-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 4:59 PM53


Figure 6-95 Top view, Front section view, and right-side view with dimensions

The steps to be followed to complete this tutorial are discussed next:

a. Create the base feature of the model by extruding a rectangle of 100x70mm to a distanceof 20mm.

b. Add the fillet features to the base feature, refer to Figures 6-96 through 6-99.c. Add the shell feature to create a thin walled part and remove some of the faces, refer to

Figures 6-100 and 6-101.d. Create a reference plane at an offset distance from the top planar face of the base feature

and extrude the sketch created on the new plane, refer to Figure 6-102.e. Using the Hole Wizard add the countersink hole feature to the model, refer to Figure 6-103.f. Add the fillet feature to the extruded feature, refer to Figures 6-104 and 6-105.g. Create the lip of the component by extruding the sketch, refer to Figure 6-106.

Creating the Base FeatureCreate a new SolidWorks part document. First you need to create the base feature of themodel. The base feature of the model will be created by extruding a rectangle of 100x70mmto a distance of 20mm. It is clear from the model that the sketch of the base feature will becreated on the top plane. Therefore, you have to select the top plane as the sketching plane.

c06-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 4:59 PM54



2. Orient the view normal to eye view.

3. Using the standard sketching tools create the sketch of the base feature and add therequired relations and dimensions to the sketch.

4. Choose the Extruded Boss/Base button from the Features toolbar and extrudethe base feature to a depth of 20mm.

Creating the Fillet FeaturesAfter creating the base feature, you need to add the fillet features to the model. In this modelyou will add three fillet features. Two fillet features will be added at this stage of the designprocess and the remaining one fillet feature will be added at a later stage of the design process.


2. Select the edges of the model as shown in Figure 6-96.

As soon as you select the edges of the model, the preview of the fillet with the defaultvalues and the radius callout are displayed in the drawing area.

3. Set the value of the Radius spinner to 15 and choose the OK button from the FilletPropertyManager.

Figure 6-97 shows the model after adding the first fillet feature.

Now, you will add the second fillet feature to the model.

4. Invoke the Fillet PropertyManager and set the value of the Radius spinner to 5.

Figure 6-96 Edges to be selected Figure 6-97 Fillet added to the base feature

c06-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 4:59 PM55


5. Select the edges of the model as shown in Figure 6-98 and right-click to complete featurecreation.

The model after adding the second fillet feature is shown in Figure 6-99.

Creating the Shell FeatureIt is clear from Figures 6-93 and 6-94 that this model will need a shell feature. Therefore, nowyou will add the shell feature to the model. As discussed earlier, the shell feature is used toscoop out the material from the model, leaving behind a thin-walled hollow part.

1. Choose the Shell button from the Features toolbar to invoke the ShellPropertyManager. The confirmation corner is also displayed.

You are prompted to select the faces to remove.

2. Rotate the model and select the faces to remove as shown in Figure 6-100. The names ofthe selected faces are displayed in the Faces to Remove display area.

3. Set the value of the Thickness spinner to 2 and choose the OK button from the ShellPropertyManager.

The model after adding the shell feature is shown in Figure 6-101.

Creating the Extruded FeatureThe next feature that you are going to create is an extruded feature. But, before creating thisextruded feature, you need to create a reference plane at an offset distance from the topplanar face of the base feature.

Figure 6-98 Edges to be selected Figure 6-99 Second fillet added to the model

Tip. The edges tangent to the selected edges are filleted automatically because bydefault, the Tangent propagation check box is selected in the FilletPropertyManager.

c06-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 4:59 PM56


Figure 6-100 Face to be selected to remove Figure 6-101 Shell feature added to the model

1. Invoke the Plane PropertyManager and create a plane at an offset distance of 15 fromthe top planar face of the base feature. You have to select the Reverse direction checkbox from the Plane PropertyManager to create the plane.

2. Select the newly created plane as the sketching plane and create the sketch using thestandard sketching tools. The sketch consists of two circles of diameter 6. For otherdimensions refer to Figure 6-85.

3. Extrude the sketch using the Up To Next option and add an outward draft of 5-degree.Hide the newly created plane.

Figure 6-102 shows the rotated model after adding the extruded feature.

Figure 6-102 Model after adding the extruded feature

c06-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 4:59 PM57


Adding the Countersink Hole using the Hole WizardThe next feature that you are going to create is a countersink hole, refer to Figure 6-85. You willobserve that the hole callout displayed for countersink is generally used to accommodate theM3.5 Flat Head Machine Screw. In SolidWorks you are provided with one of the largest standardhole generating technique known as Hole Wizard. Therefore, using the Hole Wizard you willadd the standard holes to the model that can accommodate standard fasteners.

1. Rotate the model and select the top planar face of the base feature and thenchoose the Hole Wizard button from the Features toolbar.

The Hole Definition dialog box is displayed and the preview of the hole feature on theselected face with the default values is shown in the drawing area.

2. Choose the Countersink tab of the Hole Definition area.

Now, you will set the parameters to define the standard hole. The preview of the standardhole will be modified dynamically as you set the parameters for the hole feature.

3. Choose the Ansi Metric option from the Standard drop-down list.

4. Choose the Flat Head option from the Screw Type drop-down list

5. Choose the M3.5 option from the Size drop-down list and choose the Through All optionfrom the End Condition drop-down list.

6. Choose the Next button from the Hole Definition dialog box. The Hole Placementdialog box is displayed and the sketcher environment is invoked. The select cursor isreplaced by the point cursor.

7. Using the point cursor specify another point anywhere on the top planar face of the basefeature to create another hole.

Since both the placement points are not properly placed, you need to add the requiredrelations or dimensions to define the placement of the placement points. For adding therelation to fully define the placement first change the model display from Shaded toHidden Lines Visible.

8. Choose the Hidden Lines Visible button from the View toolbar to display the modelwith hidden lines visible.

9. Right-click in the drawing area and choose the Select option from the shortcut menu toinvoke the select tool.

Tip. If you select the placement plane for the placement of the hole feature beforeinvoking the Hole Definition dialog box then the placement sketch will be a 2Dsketch. If you select the placement plane after invoking the Hole Definition dialogbox then the hole placement sketch will be a 3D sketch. You will learn more about3D sketches in the later chapters.

c06-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 4:59 PM58


10. Right-click in the drawing area and choose the Add Relation option from the shortcutmenu. The Add Relations PropertyManager is displayed.

11. Select the first sketch point and then select the first upper hidden circle. Choose theConcentric button from the Add Relations rollout.

12. Click anywhere in the drawing area and select the second sketch point and the secondupper hidden circle and apply the concentric relation as done earlier. Choose the OKoption from the confirmation corner.

13. Choose the Finish button from the Hole Placement dialog box and choose the Shadedbutton from the View toolbar.

The isometric view of the model after adding the hole feature is shown in Figure 6-103.

Adding the Fillet FeatureNow, you will add a fillet feature to the edges of the extruded feature that was created earlier.

1. Rotate the model and invoke the Fillet PropertyManager. Select the edges of the modelas shown in Figure 6-104.

2. Set the value of the Radius spinner to 1 and choose the OK button to end feature creation.

The model after adding the fillet feature is shown in Figure 6-105.

Figure 6-103 Model after adding the hole feature using the Hole Wizard

c06-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 4:59 PM59


Adding a Lip to the ModelThe last feature that you will add to the model is a lip. It will be created by extruding an opensketch using the thin option.

1. Select the bottom face of the base feature as the sketching plane and invoke the sketchingenvironment.

2. Using the select tool select any one of the lower inner edge of the model and right-clickto display the shortcut menu. Now, choose the Select Tangency option from the shortcutmenu.

3. Choose the Convert Entities button from the Sketch Tools toolbar.

The selected edges are converted into sketched entities.

4. Choose the Extruded Boss/Base button from the Features toolbar. The Thin Featurerollout is invoked automatically because you are extruding an open profile.

5. Set the value of Distance spinner in the Direction 1 rollout to 1 and set the value of theThickness spinner in the Thin Feature rollout to 1.

6. Choose the OK button from the Extrude PropertyManager.

The rotated view of the final model is shown in Figure 6-106. The FeatureManager DesignTree of the model is shown in Figure 6-107.



Figure 6-104 Edges to be selected Figure 6-105 Fillet feature added to the model

c06-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 4:59 PM60





Figure 6-106 Final model rotated to display the maximum features


c06-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 4:59 PM61


1. Using the Hole PropertyManager you can create counterbore, countersink, and tappedholes. (T/F)

2. The hole features created using the Hole Wizard and the Hole PropertyManager arenot parametric. (T/F)

3. You cannot define a user-defined hole using the Hole Wizard. (T/F)

4. You cannot preselect the edges or faces for creating a fillet feature. (T/F)

5. In SolidWorks you can create a multi-thickness shell feature. (T/F)

6. The __________ check box is selected to create the shell feature on the outer side of themodel.

7. The __________ is created by specifying different radii along the length of selected edgeat specified intervals.

8. The names of the faces to be removed in the shell features are displayed in the __________display area.

9. If you want to specify different distances while creating the chamfer then clear the__________ check box.

10. The __________ check box is selected to apply the face fillet feature with continuouscurvature throughout the fillet feature.


1. The __________ option is used to add the standard holes to the model.

2. After specifying all the parameters to a hole feature using the Hole Definition dialogbox, the __________ dialog box is displayed to specify the placement of the hole feature.

3. The __________ radio button is selected to create a smooth transition by smoothly blendingthe points and vertices on which you have defined the radius on the selected edge.

4. The __________ tab available in the Hole Definition dialog box is used to define theparameters to add a standard drilled hole.

5. By default, the __________ radio button is selected in the Chamfer PropertyManager.

c06-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 4:59 PM62


6. If you preselect the placement surface for creating a hole feature using the Hole Wizardthen the resultant placement sketch will be a

(a) 2D sketch (b) Planar sketch(c) Basier spline (d) 3D sketch

7. Using which options you do not use radius while creating a fillet feature?

(a) Face fillet with hold line (b) Constant radius fillet(c) Variable radius fillet (d) Full round fillet

8. Which radio button from the Variable Radius Parameters rollout is used to create smoothtransition while creating a variable radius fillet?

(a) Straight transition (b) Parametric transition(c) Smooth transition (d) Surface transition

9. If you do not select any face to be removed while creating a shell feature, then what willbe the resultant model?

(a) Remains complete solid model (b) Thin walled hollow model(c) Automatically removed one face (d) None of these

10. Which dialog box is displayed when you choose the Hole Wizard button from the Featurestoolbar?

(a) Hole (b) Hole Definition(c) Hole Wizard (d) Hole Parameters

EXERCISES

Exercise 1Create the model shown in Figure 6-108. The dimensions of the model are shown inFigure 6-109. (Expected time: 30 min)

c06-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 4:59 PM63



Figure 6-109 Views and dimensions of the model for Exercise 1

c06-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 4:59 PM64



Exercise 2Create the model shown in Figure 6-110. The dimensions of the model are shown inFigure 6-111. (Expected time: 30 min)

c06-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 4:59 PM65


Figure 6-111 Views and dimension of the model for Exercise 2

Answers to Self-Evaluation Test1. T, 2. F, 3. F, 4. F, 5. T, 6. Shell outward, 7. Variable radius fillet, 8. Faces to Remove, 9.Equal distance, 10. Curvature continuous

c06-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 4:59 PM66

Chapter 7

Advanced ModelingTools-II

After completing this chapter you will be able to:• Mirror the features, faces and bodies.• Create Linear Pattern.• Create Circular Pattern.• Create Sketch Driven Pattern.• Create Curve Driven Pattern.• Create Table Driven Pattern.• Create Rib Feature.• Create Dome Feature.• Display the section view of the model.

Learning Objectives

c07-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:06 PM1


ADVANCED MODELING TOOLSSome of the advanced modeling options were discussed in Chapter 6, Advanced ModelingTools-I. In this chapter you will learn about some more advanced modeling tools using whichyou can capture the design intent of the model. The rest of the advanced modeling tools arediscussed in later chapters.

Creating Mirror Feature

The Mirror tool is used to create a mirror image of the selected feature, face, or bodyusing a mirror plane. The mirror plane that is used to mirror a feature, face, or bodycan be a reference plane or a planar face. To use this tool, choose the Mirror button

from the Features toolbar or choose Insert > Pattern/Mirror > Mirror to invoke theMirror PropertyManager. The confirmation corner is also displayed in the drawing area.The Mirror PropertyManager is displayed in Figure 7-1.

Using this tool you can mirror features, faces, and bodies. The options that are used to mirrorfeatures, faces, and bodies are discussed next.

Mirroring FeaturesUsing this option you can mirror the selected feature along the specified mirror plane orface. To mirror the features, invoke the Mirror PropertyManager. You are prompted to selecta plane or a planar face about which to mirror, followed by the features to mirror. Select aplane or a planar face that will act as mirror plane or mirror face. After selecting the mirror

Toolbar: Features > MirrorMenu: Insert > Pattern/Mirror > Mirror

Figure 7-1 The Mirror PropertyManager

c07-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:06 PM2

Advanced Modeling Tools-II 7-3

Figure 7-2 The features and the plane to be selected

plane or face, the selection mode of the Features to Mirror display area is invoked and youare prompted to select features to mirror. Select the feature or features from the display areaor display the FeatureManager Design Tree flyout and select the features from the designtree. When you select the features to be mirrored, the preview of the mirrored image is displayedin the drawing area. After selecting all the required features, choose the OK button from theMirror PropertyManager. Figure 7-2 shows the mirror plane and features to be mirrored andFigure 7-3 shows the resultant mirrored features.

Figure 7-3 The resultant mirror feature

Tip. You can also preselect the mirror plane or mirror face and the features to bemirrored before invoking the Mirror PropertyManager.

c07-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:06 PM3


Mirroring with and without Geometric PatternWhen you are creating a mirror feature you are provided with an option known as geometricpattern. This option is available in the Options rollout as shown in Figure 7-4.

By default, the Geometry Pattern check box is cleared. Therefore, if you create a mirrorimage of a feature that is related to some other entity, the same relationship will beapplied to the mirrored feature. Consider a case in which an extruded cut is created usingthe Offset From Surface option. If you mirror the cut feature along a plane, the samerelationship will be applied to the mirrored cut feature. The mirrored cut feature will becreated with the same end condition of termination of feature creation at an offset distancefrom the selected surface. Figure 7-5 shows a hole feature created on the right and mirroredalong Plane 1 with the Geometry Pattern check box cleared.

If you select the Geometry Pattern check box, the mirror feature created will not dependon the relational references. It will just create a replica of the selected geometry. Figure 7-6shows the mirror feature created with the Geometry Pattern check box selected.

Mirroring FacesUsing this option you can mirror the faces along a mirror plane or mirror face. To use thisoption, invoke the Mirror PropertyManager. You are prompted to select a plane or a planarface about which to mirror. Select the planar face or a plane about which the selected faceswill be mirrored. Now, open the Faces to Mirror rollout and select the faces to be mirrored.The selected faces must form a closed body. If the selected faces do not form a closed body,

Figure 7-5 Mirror feature created with Geometry Pattern check box cleared

Figure 7-4 The Options rollout

c07-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:06 PM4


Figure 7-6 Mirror feature created with Geometry Pattern check box selected

Figure 7-7 Plane and faces selected to mirror

feature creation is not possible. Use the OK button from the Mirror PropertyManager to endfeature creation. Figure 7-7 shows the faces and the mirror plane to be selected. Figure 7-8shows the resultant mirror feature creation.

c07-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:06 PM5


Figure 7-8 The resultant mirror creation

NoteFollowing are some of the factors that should be considered while creating a mirror feature bymirroring the faces along the selected plane or planar face:

1. If the replica of the faces is not coincident to the parent part body, SolidWorks will give errorwhile creating the mirror feature.

2. If the replica of the faces exists on the faces other than the original face, SolidWorks will giveerror while creating the mirror feature.

3. If the selected faces form a complex geometry, SolidWorks will give error while creating themirror feature.

4. If the mirrored faces exist on more than one face, SolidWorks will give error while creating themirror feature.

5. The selected faces should form a closed body. If the selected faces do not form a closed body,SolidWorks will give error while creating the mirror feature.

Mirroring BodiesAs discussed in the earlier chapters, the multi-bodies environment is supported in SolidWorks.Therefore, using the mirror tool you can also mirror the disjoint bodies. To mirror a bodyalong a plane, invoke the Mirror PropertyManager and select a plane or a planar face thatwill act as mirror plane. Open the Bodies to Mirror rollout and select the body from thedrawing area or invoke the FeatureManager Design Tree flyout and select the body to mirrorfrom the Solid Bodies folder. The name of the selected body is displayed in the Solid/SurfaceBodies to Mirror display area. The preview of the mirrored body is displayed in the drawing

c07-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:06 PM6


Figure 7-9 Selecting the mirror plane and body to be mirrored

Figure 7-10 Resultant mirror feature

area. Choose the OK button from the Mirror PropertyManager. Figure 7-9 shows the planeand the body selected to mirror. Figure 7-10 shows the resultant mirror feature.

The options available in the Options rollout, as shown in Figure 7-11, while mirroring thebodies are discussed next.

Merge solidsThe Merge solids option is used to merge the mirrored body with the parent body. Forexample, consider a case in which you mirror a body along a selected plane or a planarface of the same body and the resultant mirrored body is joined to the parent body. In this

c07-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:06 PM7


case if you select the Merge solids check box, the resultant mirrored body will merge withthe parent body to become a single body. If the Merge solids check box is cleared, theresultant body will be joined with the parent body but it will not merge with the parentbody and results in two separate bodies.

Knit surfacesIf you mirror a surface body, then the Knit Surface check box is selected to knit themirrored and the parent body together. You will learn more about surfaces and surfacebodies in the later chapters.

Creating Linear Pattern Feature

As discussed in earlier chapters, you can arrange the sketched entities in a particulararrangement or pattern. In the same manner you can also arrange the features, faces,and bodies in a particular pattern. In SolidWorks, you are provided with various types

of patterns such as linear patterns, circular patterns, sketch driven pattern, curve drivenpattern, and table driven pattern. In this section you will learn how to create linear patterns.The other type of patterns are discussed later in this chapter.

To create a linear pattern, choose the Linear Pattern button from the Features toolbar orchoose Insert > Pattern/Mirror > Linear Pattern from the menu bar. The Linear PatternPropertyManager is invoked and the confirmation corner is also displayed. The Linear PatternPropertyManager is displayed in Figure 7-12.

The various options available in the Linear Pattern PropertyManager are discussed next.

Linear Pattern in One DirectionWhen you invoke the Linear Pattern PropertyManager, the Direction 1 rollout and theFeatures rollout are invoked by default. Also, you are prompted to select edge or axis fordirection reference and face of feature for pattern features. Therefore, first you need to select


Tip. As discussed earlier, the design intent is captured in the model using themirror option. Therefore, if you modify the parent feature, face, or body the samewill be reflected on the mirrored feature, face, or body.

If you want to mirror all the features of the model using the Features to Mirroroption, you have to select all the features. But if you use the Bodies to Mirroroption, you have to select the body from the Solid Bodies folder. By selecting thebody, all the features are added to the mirror image.

Toolbar: Features > Linear PatternMenu: Insert > Pattern/Mirror > Linear Pattern

c07-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:06 PM8


Figure 7-12 The Linear Pattern PropertyManager

an edge or an axis as a direction reference. Select an edge or an axis as the direction reference.The name of the selected reference will be displayed in the Pattern Direction display area ofthe Direction 1 rollout. The selected reference is displayed in yellow and the Direction 1callout is attached to the selected reference. The Direction 1 callout has two edit boxes todefine the number of instances and the spacing. You are also provided with the ReverseDirection arrow along with the selected reference. Now, select a face of the feature to bepatterned. The name of the selected feature will be displayed in the Features to pattern areaof the Features to Pattern rollout. The preview of the pattern is displayed in the drawing areawith the default values. Set the value of the center to center spacing between the patterninstances in the Spacing spinner. Set the value of the number of instances to be patterned inthe Number of Instances spinner. You can also set these values in the Direction 1 callout.Using the Reverse Direction button from the PropertyManager or using the Reverse Direction

Tip. When you select the feature to be patterned, the dimensions of the feature arealso displayed in the drawing area. You can also select the dimensions as thedirectional reference.

As discussed earlier that you can mirror the faces and bodies, you can also patternthe faces and bodies. It should be noted that the selected faces must form a closedbody, otherwise the patterning of faces will give an error.

c07-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:06 PM9


Figure 7-13 Edge and the feature to be selected

Figure 7-14 Linear pattern created using the Direction 1 option

arrow from the drawing area you can reverse the direction of pattern feature creation.Figure 7-13 shows the model before pattern and Figure 7-14 shows the model after pattern.

Linear Pattern in Two DirectionsAs discussed earlier you can create a linear pattern of features, faces, and bodies by defininga single direction using the Direction 1 rollout. You can also define the parameters in theDirection 2 rollout to define the pattern in the second direction. The Direction 2 rollout isshown in Figure 7-15. When you define the pattern in the second direction the entire rowcreated by specifying the parameters in the first direction is patterned in the second direction.

c07-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:06 PM10



Figure 7-16 References and feature to be selected

To create a pattern by specifying the parameters in both the directions, invoke the LinearPattern PropertyManager. Select the feature to be patterned and select the first directionalreference. Next, specify the parameters in the Direction 1 rollout. Now, select the seconddirectional reference. The Direction 2 callout is also displayed. If the Direction 2 rollout isnot invoked in the Linear Pattern PropertyManager, the black arrow in the Direction 2callout is used to invoke the rollout. The options available in the Direction 2 rollout are thesame as those discussed in the Direction 1 rollout. Figure 7-16 shows the directional referencesand feature to be selected. Figure 7-17 shows the linear pattern created using the Direction 1and Direction 2 rollouts.

By default, all the rows of the instances created in the first direction are patterned in thesecond direction also. This is because the Pattern seed only check box in the Direction 2rollout is cleared. You can select this check box to pattern only the original selected feature(also called seed feature) in the second direction. Figure 7-18 shows the pattern created withthe Pattern seed only check box selected.

c07-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:06 PM11


Figure 7-17 Linear pattern created using the Direction 1 andDirection 2 rollouts

Instances to SkipUsing the Instances to Skip option you can skip some of the instances from the pattern. Theinstances that are skipped are not actually deleted. These are only skipped from the patternfeature and you can resume these instances at any time of your design cycle. To skip thepattern instances, invoke the Instances to Skip rollout from the Linear PatternPropertyManager. The Instances to Skip rollout is displayed in Figure 7-19. As soon as youinvoke this rollout, yellow dots are displayed at the center of all pattern instances except theparent instance. Therefore, you cannot skip the parent instance. Now, move the cursor to theyellow dot of the instance to be skipped. The cursor will be replaced by the instance to skip

Figure 7-18 Linear pattern created with the Pattern to seed check box selected

c07-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:06 PM12


Figure 7-19 The Instances to Skip rollout

cursor and the position of that instance in the form of matrix is displayed in tooltip below thiscursor. Use the left mouse button to skip that instance. The yellow dot will be replaced by asred dot and the preview of that instance will disappear from the drawing area. The position ofthe skipped instance is displayed in the Instances to Skip display area of the Instances toSkip rollout. Figure 7-20 shows a pattern created with some instances skipped.

You can resume the skipped instances by deleting the position of the instance from theInstances to Skip display area or select the red dot from the drawing area.

Pattern Using Varying SketchThe Vary Sketch option is used in pattern where the shape and size of each pattern instanceis controlled by the relations and dimension of the sketch of that feature. In this type ofpattern, the dimension of the sketch of the feature to be patterned is selected as thedirectional reference. The dimension selected as the dimensional reference drives the shapeand size of the sketch of the feature to be patterned. In Figure 7-21 a cut feature is created onthe base feature. Figure 7-22 shows the linear pattern created using the varying sketch option.For creating this type of pattern, the sketch of the feature to be patterned should be in relationwith the geometry along which it will vary. The dimensions of the sketch should allow thesketch to change the shape and size easily. You should also provide a linear dimension thatwill drive the entire sketch and will be the directional reference. From the FeatureManagerDesign Tree select the feature to be patterned and then invoke the Linear Pattern

Figure 7-20 Linear pattern created with some instances skipped

c07-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:06 PM13


Figure 7-21 Cut feature created on the base feature

Figure 7-22 Linear pattern created with the Vary sketch check box selected

PropertyManager. Now, select the dimension to specify the directional reference and set thevalue of spacing and the number of instances. Invoke the Options rollout and select the Varysketch check box. As you select the Vary sketch check box, the preview of the pattern disappearsfrom the drawing area. Choose the OK button from Linear PropertyManager to end featurecreation.

The Geometry pattern option available in the Options rollout of the Linear PatternPropertyManager is the same as discussed earlier in Mirror PropertyManager.

c07-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:06 PM14


Creating Circular Pattern Feature

As discussed in earlier chapters, you can arrange the sketched entities in a circularpattern using the Circular Sketch Step and Repeat option. In this section, you willlearn how to create the circular pattern of a feature, face, or a body. You can create the

circular pattern of a feature, face, or a body using the Circular Pattern tool. To invoke thistool, choose the Circular Pattern button from the Features toolbar or choose Insert >Pattern/Mirror > Circular Pattern from the menu bar. The Circular Pattern PropertyManageris invoked and the confirmation corner is displayed as shown in Figure 7-23.

After invoking the Circular Pattern PropertyManager, you are prompted to select an edgeor an axis for direction reference, and a face of the feature to be patterned. If the base featureof the model is a circular feature, the temporary axis is created automatically at the center ofthe model. Choose View > Temporary Axes from the menu bar to display the temporaryaxis. Otherwise, before invoking the circular pattern tool, you have to create an axis. Now,select the axis that will act as the pattern axis. The preview of the pattern feature with thedefault values is displayed in the drawing area. The Direction 1 callout is displayed with the

Figure 7-23 The Circular Pattern PropertyManager

Toolbar: Features > Circular PatternMenu: Insert > Pattern/Mirror > Circular Pattern

c07-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:06 PM15


Figure 7-24 The reference to be selected for creating circular pattern

Reverse Direction arrow in the drawing area. By default, the Equal Spacing check box isselected. Therefore, you have to set the value of the total angle in the Total Angle spinner. Setthe value of number of instances to pattern in the Number of Instances spinner. As the EqualSpacing check box is selected and you have entered the value of total angle, therefore, it willautomatically calculate the angular spacing between the instances. If you clear the EqualSpacing check box, the Total Angle spinner is replaced by the Angle spinner. You have toenter the angular spacing between instances in the Angle spinner. The Reverse Directionbutton available on the left of the Pattern Axis display area is used to change the direction ofrotation while creating the pattern feature. By default, the direction of pattern creation isclockwise. If you choose this button then the resultant pattern will be created in thecounterclockwise direction. You can also change the direction of pattern creation using theReverse Direction arrow from the drawing area. Figure 7-24 shows the feature and thetemporary axis being selected. Figure 7-25 shows the resultant pattern feature.

Tip. Instead of setting the value of angle and number of instances in the respectivespinners, you can also enter the values in the callout. To enter the values in thecallout is a better and time-saving practice.

It is always a good practice to create pattern of features instead of creating complexsketches or repeatedly creating the same feature again and again. It also helps incapturing the design intent of the model. The patterns created in Part mode arevery useful in the assembly modeling. You will learn more about assembly modelingin later chapters.

c07-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:06 PM16


Figure 7-25 Resultant circular pattern

Figure 7-26 Dimensions displayed after selecting the feature to be patterned

Circular Pattern Using Dimensional ReferenceYou can also create circular pattern by selecting an angular dimension as angular reference.For create a pattern using this option you have to create an angular dimension in the sketchof the feature that is to be patterned. Invoke the Circular Pattern PropertyManager andselect the feature to be patterned. The dimensions of the feature to be patterned will bedisplayed in the drawing area as shown in Figure 7-26. Now, select the angular dimension andset the value of total angle and spacing in the Circular Pattern PropertyManager. Figure 7-27shows the pattern created by selecting the angular dimension as angular reference.

c07-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:06 PM17


The other options available in the Circular Pattern PropertyManager are the same asthose discussed earlier for the Linear Pattern PropertyManager.

Creating Sketch Driven Pattern

The sketch driven pattern is created when the features, face, or bodies are to bearranged in a nonuniform manner, which is neither rectangular nor circular. Forcreating a sketch driven pattern, first you have to create an arrangement of the sketch

points in a single sketch. This arrangement of sketch points will drive the instances in thepattern feature. After creating the sketch and the feature to pattern, invoke the Sketch DrivenPattern PropertyManager as shown in Figure 7-28. You are prompted to select a sketch forpattern layout, and face of feature to pattern.

Select the feature or features to be patterned. Now, click in the Reference Sketch display boxin the Selections rollout and select any one of the sketched point from the drawing area. Youcan also invoke the flyout and select the sketch from the FeatureManager Design Tree toselect the sketch for the pattern layout. Choose the OK button from the Sketch Driven PatternPropertyManager.

Figure 7-27 Circular pattern created by selecting the angulardimension as the angular reference

Toolbar: Features > Sketch Driven PatternMenu: Insert > Pattern/Mirror > Sketch Driven Pattern

c07-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:06 PM18


Figure 7-28 The Sketch Driven Pattern PropertyManager

Figure 7-29 The feature and the sketch point to be selected

Figure 7-29 shows the feature and the sketch point selected and Figure 7-30 shows the resultantpattern.

c07-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:06 PM19


Figure 7-30 The resultant pattern feature

The options available in the Sketch Driven Pattern PropertyManager are discussed next.

Sketch Driven Pattern Using CentroidWhen you invoke the Sketch Driven Pattern PropertyManager, the Centroid radio button isselected by default in the Reference Point area of the Selections rollout. Therefore, thepattern created is with reference to the centroid.

Sketch Driven Pattern Using Selected pointIf you select the Selected point radio button from the Reference Point area of the Selectionsrollout, the pattern created is with reference to the selected point. When you select this radiobutton, a Reference Vertex display area is displayed. Select a vertex; the pattern will becreated in reference to that vertex.

Creating Curve Driven Pattern

The Curve Driven Pattern option is used to pattern the features, faces, or bodiesalong a selected reference curve. The reference curve can be a sketched entity or anedge and can be an open profile or a closed loop. To create a pattern using this

option, choose the Curve Driven Pattern button from the Features toolbar or choose Insert> Pattern/Mirror > Curve Driven Pattern from the menu bar. When you choose this button,the Curve Driven Pattern PropertyManager is displayed as shown in Figure 7-31. Figure 7-32shows the feature and the curve that will be used to create the pattern. Figure 7-33 shows thecurve driven pattern created.

After invoking the Curve Driven Pattern PropertyManager, you are prompted to select edge,curve or sketch segment for pattern layout and select face of feature to be patterned. Select

Toolbar: Features > Curve Driven PatternMenu: Insert > Pattern/Mirror > Curve Driven Pattern

c07-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:06 PM20


Figure 7-31 The Curve Driven Pattern PropertyManager

Figure 7-32 The feature and curve to be usedto create the curve driven pattern

Figure 7-33 The resultant pattern feature

c07-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:06 PM21


the reference curve along which the feature, face, or body will be patterned. When you selectthe reference curve, the name of curve is displayed in the Pattern Direction display area andthe Direction 1 callout is displayed. As discussed earlier, the Direction 1 callout is divided intwo areas. Select the feature to pattern; the preview of the pattern is displayed in the drawingarea. Set the various parameters available in the Direction 1 rollout and choose the OKbutton from the Curve Driven Pattern PropertyManager.

The various options available in the Direction 1 rollout are discussed next.

Equal SpacingThe Equal Spacing check box is used to accommodate all the instances of the pattern alongthe selected curve. By default, this check box is cleared. Therefore, you have to specify thedistance between the instances and the total number of instances to be created along theselected curve. When you select this check box, the Spacing spinner is not available and youhave to specify only the total number of instances. The distance between the instances iscalculated automatically.

Curve method and Alignment methodThe Curve method area of the Direction 1 rollout is used to specify the type of curve methodto be followed while patterning along the curve. The two options available in this area are inthe form of radio buttons. The option are Transform curve method and the Offset curvemethod. The Alignment method area of the Direction 1 rollout is used to specify the type ofalignment method to be applied. The two alignment methods are the Tangent to curvemethod and the Align to seed method. Figure 7-34 shows the curve driven pattern createdwith the Transform curve and Tangent to curve radio buttons selected. Figure 7-35 showsthe curve driven pattern created with the Transform curve and Align to seed radio buttonsselected.

Figure 7-36 shows the curve driven pattern created with the Offset curve and Tangent tocurve radio buttons selected. Figure 7-37 shows the curve driven pattern created with theOffset curve and Align to seed radio buttons selected.

Figure 7-34 Pattern created with Transformcurve and Tangent to curve radio buttons selected

Figure 7-35 Pattern created with Transformcurve and Align to seed radio buttons selected

c07-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:06 PM22


Figure 7-36 Pattern created with Offset curveand Tangent to curve radio buttons selected

Figure 7-37 Pattern created with Offset curveand Align to seed radio buttons selected

Other options available in the Curve Driven PropertyManager are the same as those discussedearlier for the mirror and other pattern features. By selecting the check box available in theDirection 2 rollout you can also specify the parameters in the second direction. Figure 7-38shows the curve driven pattern feature created with pattern defined in direction 1 and indirection 2.

Figure 7-38 A curve driven pattern created by specifying parametersin both the directions

Tip. In SolidWorks you can pattern a pattern feature. You can also pattern amirror feature. The mirror of the pattern feature is also possible in SolidWorks.

c07-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:06 PM23


Figure 7-39 The Table Driven Pattern dialog box

Creating Table Driven Pattern

The Table Driven Pattern is created by specifying the X and Y coordinates withreference to a coordinate system. The instances of the selected features, faces, orbodies are created at the points specified using the X and Y coordinates. For creating

this type of pattern, you first need to create a coordinate system using the Coordinate Systembutton from the Reference Geometry toolbar. The coordinate system defines the directionalong which the selected feature will be patterned. Choose the Table Driven Pattern buttonfrom the Features toolbar or choose Insert > Pattern/Mirror > Table Driven Pattern fromthe menu bar. The Table Driven Pattern dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 7-39.

Select the feature to be patterned and the coordinate system from the drawing area or fromthe FeatureManager Design Tree. Enter the coordinates for creating the instances in theCoordinate points area of the Table Driven Pattern dialog box. As you enter the coordinatesfor the instances, the preview of the pattern is displayed in the drawing area. After entering

Toolbar: Features > Table Driven PatternMenu: Insert > Pattern/Mirror > Table Driven Pattern

c07-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:06 PM24


Figure 7-40 Feature and the coordinate systemto be selected for creating a table driven pattern

Figure 7-41 Resultant pattern after specifyingthe coordinate points

all the coordinate points, choose the OK button from the Table Driven Pattern dialog box.Figure 7-40 shows the feature and the coordinate system to be selected. Figure 7-41 shows thetable driven pattern created after entering the coordinate values in the Table Driven Patterndialog box.

You can also save the table driven pattern file and retrieve the same coordinates by simplybrowsing the saved file using the Browse button from the Table Driven Pattern dialog box.You can also simply write the coordinates in a text file and browse the same file while creatinga table driven pattern. The other options available in this dialog box are the same as discussedearlier.

Creating the Rib Feature

Ribs are defined as thin walled structures that are used to increase the strength of theentire structure of the component so that it does not fail under an increased load. InSolidWorks, the ribs are created using an open sketch as well as a closed sketch. To

create a rib feature, draw a sketch for the rib feature and invoke the Rib tool without exitingthe sketching environment. The Rib tool is invoked by choosing the Rib button from theFeatures toolbar or by choosing Insert > Features > Rib from the menu bar. When youinvoke this tool, the Rib PropertyManager is displayed as shown in Figure 7-42.

Toolbar: Features > RibMenu: Insert > Features > Rib

Tip. If you exit the sketching environment after creating the sketch for a rib feature,you have to first select the sketch from the FeatureManager Design Tree. TheRib button in the Features toolbar is available only when you select a sketch. Afterselecting the sketch invoke the Rib PropertyManager to create the rib feature.

c07-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:06 PM25


Figure 7-43 Sketch for the rib feature Figure 7-44 Resultant rib feature

When you invoke the Rib PropertyManager the preview of rib feature with direction arrowand the confirmation corner are displayed in the drawing area. Figure 7-43 shows the sketchcreated for the rib feature and Figure 7-44 shows the resultant rib feature. The various optionsavailable in the Rib PropertyManager are discussed next.

ThicknessThe Thickness area of the Parameters rollout is used to specify the side of the rib thicknessand the thickness of the rib feature. The buttons available in this area are used to control theside on which you want to add the rib thickness. By default, the Both Sides button is chosen.Therefore, the rib is created on both the sides of the sketch. The Rib Thickness spinner inthis area of the Parameters rollout is used to specify the rib thickness. You can choose theFirst Side or Second Side buttons to create ribs on either side of the sketch. The thickness ofthe rib is specified using the Rib Thickness spinner.

Figure 7-42 The Rib PropertyManager

c07-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:06 PM26



Extrusion directionThe Extrusion direction area of the Parameters rollout is used to specify the method ofextruding the closed or open sketch. When you invoke the Rib PropertyManager, by defaultthe option that is suitable for creating the rib feature will be active, depending on the geometricconditions. The options available in this area are discussed next.

Parallel to SketchThe Parallel to Sketch option is used to extrude the sketch in a direction that is parallelto the sketch as well as parallel to the sketching plane. When you invoke the RibPropertyManager and the sketch created for the rib feature is a continuous single entityopen sketch, then this option is selected by default. Figure 7-45 shows an open sketchsuitable for creating a rib using the Parallel to Sketch option. Figure 7-46 shows the ribfeature created using that sketch.

Normal to SketchThe Normal to Sketch option is generally used to create a rib feature when the sketch ofthe rib feature is a closed loop sketch or it consists of multiple sketched entities. Thesketch with multiple entities can be closed loops or open profiles. If you create a sketchwith a closed loop or a sketch with multiple sketched entities and invoke the rib tool, theNormal to Sketch button will be selected by default. You can also choose the Normal toSketch button from the Extrusion Direction area to use this option. Figure 7-47 shows amultiple entity sketch for the rib feature. Figure 7-48 shows the resultant rib feature.

When this option is selected, the Type area is displayed under the Draft Angle spinner.The options available in the Type area are discussed next.

TypeThe Type area is available only when you choose the Normal to Sketch button fromthe Extrusion direction area of the Parameters rollout. The Type area is providedwith two radio buttons: Linear and Natural. These options are used if the endpointsof the open sketch for the rib are not coincident with the faces of the existing feature.If the Linear Radio button is selected, the rib is created by extending the sketch

c07-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:06 PM27


Figure 7-49 Sketch for the rib feature

normal to the sketched entity direction. The sketch will be extended up to a pointwhere it meets a boundary.

On the other hand, if the Natural radio button is selected, the rib feature is createdby extending the sketch along the direction of sketched entities. For example,consider the sketch shown in Figure 7-49. This figure shows a multiple entity sketchcreated for the rib feature.

Figure 7-50 shows a rib feature created by extending the sketch normal to the arc andthe line. This is because the Linear radio button is selected. Similarly, in Figure 7-51,

Tip. You will observe that the endpoints of the sketched lines created in Figure 7-47do not merge with the model edges. But the rib created using this sketch merges withthe model edges. This is because while creating the sketch for the rib feature you donot have to create a complete sketch. The ends of the rib feature automaticallyextend to the next surface.


c07-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:06 PM28


the feature is created by extending the sketch along the line and arc using the Naturalradio button. This is the reason a circular feature is created at the end where thesketch has the arc.

Flip material sideThe Flip material side check box is selected to reverse the direction of material additionwhile creating the rib feature. You can also reverse the direction of material addition usingthe Flip material side arrow available in the drawing area.

Draft On/OffThe Draft On/Off button is used to add the taper to the faces of the rib feature. When youchoose the Draft On/Off button, the Draft Angle spinner is invoked. If you are creating a ribfeature using multiple sketch entities, you can add only a simple draft to the rib feature.Figure 7-52 shows the draft angle added to the rib feature. By default, the draft is addedinwards to the rib feature.

Figure 7-50 Rib feature created with Linearradio button selected from the Type area of theRib PropertyManager

Figure 7-51 Rib feature created with Naturalradio button selected from the Type area of theRib PropertyManager

Figure 7-52 Draft angle added to the rib feature

c07-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:06 PM29


Figure 7-55 Arrow displaying the reference foradding the draft angle

Figure 7-56 Resultant rib feature

Using the Draft outward check box you can add the draft outwards. If the rib feature to becreated consists of a single continuous sketch and if you choose the Draft On/Off button, theNext Reference button is displayed below the Draft Angle spinner. A reference arrow is alsodisplayed in the drawing area. Using the Next Reference button you can cycle through thereference along which you want to add the draft angle.

Figure 7-53 shows the preview of the rib feature and the arrow displaying the reference foradding the draft angle. Figure 7-54 shows the resultant rib feature.

Figure 7-55 shows the preview of the rib feature and the arrow displaying the reference foradding the draft angle. Figure 7-56 shows the resultant rib feature.

Figure 7-53 Arrow displaying the reference foradding the draft angle

Figure 7-54 Resultant rib feature

c07-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:06 PM30


Toolbar: Features > Dome (Customize to Add)Menu: Insert > Features > Dome

Figure 7-58 Planar face to be selected Figure 7-59 Resultant dome feature

Creating the Dome Feature

Using the Dome tool you can create a dome feature on the selected planar face. Thedome is a material addition and material removal process depending upon the optionsselected. To create a dome feature choose the Dome button from the Features toolbar

or choose Insert >Features > Dome from the menu bar. When you choose this button theDome dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 7-57. The various options available in theDome tool are discussed next.

After invoking the Dome dialog box, select a planar face on which you want to add the domefeature. The name of the selected face will be displayed in the Dome face display area. Thepreview of dome feature is also displayed in the drawing area. Using the Height spinner youcan set the height of the dome feature. The preview of the dome feature modifies dynamicallywhen you modify the height using the Height spinner. The height of the dome feature iscalculated from the centroid of selected face to the top of the dome feature. After specifyingall the parameters, choose the OK button from the Dome dialog box. Figure 7-58 shows theplanar face to be selected for the dome feature. Figure 7-59 shows the resultant dome featurecreated.

Figure 7-57 The Dome dialog box

c07-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:06 PM31


Figure 7-62 A dome feature created with the Reverse direction check box

If the selected planar face belongs to a circular or an elliptical feature, the Elliptical domecheck box is displayed below the Dome face display area. If you select this check box then youcan create an elliptical dome. Figure 7-60 shows the circular dome created by selecting acircular planar face. Figure 7-61 shows the elliptical dome created by selecting a circularplanar face.

The Reverse direction check box available in the Dome dialog box is used to remove thematerial by creating a cavity in the form of a dome. For removing the material using the domefeature, select the Reverse direction check box. Figure 7-62 shows the dome feature createdwith the Reverse direction check box selected.

Figure 7-60 Circular dome Figure 7-61 Elliptical dome

c07-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:06 PM32


Displaying the Section View of the Model

The Section View option is used to display the section view of the model by cuttingthe model using a plane or face. You can also create the section of the model usingthe current viewing plane. To create the section of a model choose the Section View

button from the View toolbar or choose View > Display > Section View from the menu bar.When you invoke this tool the Section View dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 7-63.

When you invoke the Section View dialog box, the Front plane is selected by default as asection plane. The name of the Front view is displayed in the Section Plane(s)/Face(s) displayarea. The various options available in this dialog box are discussed next.

Section PositionThe Section Position spinner available in the Section View tab of the Section View dialogbox is used to specify the distance of the section plane from the selected plane or face.

Section Plane(s)/Face(s)The Section Plane(s)/Face(s) display area is used to select the planes or faces to create thesection view. The selected planes or faces are displayed in this area.

Flip the Side to ViewThe Flip the Side to View check box is selected to reverse the direction of creating the sectionview.

Use viewing planeThe Use viewing plane check box is selected to section the model using the current viewingplane. The viewing plane is an imaginary plane parallel to the screen and normal to the eyeview. When you select this check box, the Section Plane(s)/Face(s) display area is not available.If you rotate the model, the viewing plane is replaced by the current viewing plane. But thepreview is displayed when you choose the Display button.

Toolbar: View > Section View (Customize to Add)

Menu: View > Display > Section View

Figure 7-63 The Section View dialog box

c07-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:06 PM33


Tip. You can view the half section view of the model by selecting two planes or facesof the model that intersect each other.

Figure 7-64 Section view of a model

PreviewThe Preview check box is selected to display the preview of the section view before confirmingthe creation of the section view.

DisplayThe Display button is used to preview the section view with the current settings.

After setting all the parameters in the Section View dialog box, choose the OK button tocreate the section view. You will observe that the Section View button is still chosen. If youwant to toggle back to the full view, you have to choose the Section View button again.Figure 7-64 shows the section view of a model.

TUTORIALS



a. Create the base feature of the model by extruding a rectangle of 69mm x 45mm createdon Right plane to a depth of 10mm, refer to Figure 7-67.

c07-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:06 PM34



Figure 7-66 Views and dimensions of the model for Tutorial 1

c07-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:06 PM35



b. Create the second feature, which is created by extruding the sketch created on the backface of the base feature, refer to Figure 7-68 (a).

c. The third feature of the model is a circular feature, refer to Figure 7-68 (b).d. Create a hole feature placed concentric to the circular feature.e. Create the hole on the specified BCD and then pattern the hole feature using the circular

pattern option.f. Create the hole feature on the base feature, refer to Figure 7-69.g. Create a fillet feature to add the required fillets, refer to Figures 7-70 and 7-71.h. Create the rib feature, refer to Figures 7-72 and 7-73.

Creating the Base Feature1. Start SolidWorks and then open a new part file from the Template tab of the New


It is evident from the model that the sketch of the base feature of model is created on theright plane. Therefore, using the left mouse button select the Right plane from theFeatureManager Design Tree and invoke the sketching environment.

2. Draw the sketch of the base feature of the model. The sketch of the base feature consistsof a rectangle of dimensions 69mm x 45mm.

3. Add the required relations and dimensions to the sketch. After creating the sketch of thebase feature you need to extrude the sketch to the given distance.

4. Invoke the Extrude PropertyManager and extrude the sketch to a depth of 10mm.

The base feature of the model is shown in Figure 7-67.

c07-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:06 PM36


Creating the Second Feature of the ModelThe second feature of the model is also an extruded feature. Create the sketch for thesecond feature on the back face of the base feature and extrude this sketch to the givendepth.

1. Select the back face of the base feature as the sketching plane and invoke the sketchingenvironment.

2. Create the sketch of the second feature and add the required relations and dimensions.

3. Invoke the Extrude PropertyManager and select the Reverse Direction button fromthe PropertyManager.

4. Set the value of the Depth spinner to 38 and end feature creation.

The model created after adding the second feature is shown in Figure 7-68 (a).

NoteYou can also create the first and second feature using the contour selection method.

Creating the Third FeatureThe third feature of this model is a circular extruded feature. This feature is created by extrudinga circular sketch on both the sides of the sketching plane. The sketch for this feature is createdon the right planar face of the second feature.

1. Select the right planar face of the second feature as the sketching plane and invoke thesketching environment.

2. Create the sketch using the circle tool. Add the required relations and dimensions to thesketch.

3. Invoke the Extrude PropertyManager and set the value of the Depth spinner availablein the Direction 1 rollout to 12. Since you have to extrude the sketch in both the directionswith variable values, therefore, you have to invoke the Direction 2 rollout. Set the value ofthe Depth spinner available in the Direction 2 rollout to 13 and end feature creation.

Figure 7-68 (b) shows the model after adding the third feature.

Creating the FFFFFourth Fourth Fourth Fourth Fourth FeatureeatureeatureeatureeatureThe fourth feature of this model is a hole feature. You will create a hole using the SimpleHole option on the right face of the third feature. To create a hole using this option, youfirst need to create a point on which the hole will be placed.

1. Select the right face of the third feature as the sketch plane for creating the sketchedpoint and invoke the sketching environment. The center point of the hole that will becreated using the Hole PropertyManager will be placed coincident to sketched point.

c07-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:06 PM37


2. Create a point on the right face of the circular feature.

3. Add the Concentric relation between the sketched point and the circular edge of thethird feature and exit the sketching environment.

4. Now, select the face on which the point is placed. Choose the Simple Hole buttonfrom the Features toolbar or choose Insert > Features > Hole > Simple fromthe menu bar to invoke the Hole PropertyManager.

5. Choose the Through All option from the End Condition drop-down list and set thevalue of the Hole Diameter spinner to 16.

6. Select the centerpoint of the hole feature and drag the cursor to the sketched pointcreated earlier. Release the left mouse button when the cursor is displayed in yellow color.

7. Choose the OK button from the Hole PropertyManager.

Creating the Fifth Feature1. Using the procedure given in previous sections, create the fifth feature, which is also a

hole feature placed on the same placement plane. This hole feature is created using theThrough All option with the diameter of the hole as 4. After creating the hole featuredefine the placement of the feature by adding the required relations and dimensions.

Patterning the Hole FeatureAfter creating the fifth feature, which is a hole feature, you will pattern it using the CircularPattern tool.

1. Choose the Circular Pattern button from the Features toolbar to invoke theCircular Pattern PropertyManager.

You are prompted to select an edge or an axis for direction reference; select a face of thefeature for pattern features.

Figure 7-68 (a) Second feature added to the Figure 7-68 (b) Third feature added to the model

c07-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:06 PM38


As discussed in the earlier chapters, when you create a circular feature a temporary axisis automatically created passing through the center of the circular feature. The temporaryaxis can be displayed by choosing View > Temporary Axes from the menu bar. Therefore,first you will display the temporary axis.

2. Choose View > Temporary Axes from the menu bar.

Temporary axes are displayed in the model.

3. Select the temporary axis that passes through the center of the first hole feature.

The Direction 1 callout is displayed and is attached to the selected axis.

4. Click in the Features to Pattern display area to invoke the selection mode.

5. Select the smaller hole from the drawing area or invoke the FeatureManager DesignTree flyout and select the Hole2 feature from the flyout.

The preview of the pattern feature is displayed with the default settings.

6. Click anywhere on the drawing area to exit the flyout.

7. Select the Equal spacing check box if cleared and set the value of the Number ofInstances spinner to 6. Choose the OK button from the PropertyManager.

8. Choose View > Temporary Axes to hide the temporary axes.

Creating the Seventh Feature1. The seventh feature of this model is also a hole feature. This hole feature will be placed

on the right planar face of the base feature. Therefore, after selecting the right planarface of the base feature, place the hole feature. After placing the hole feature define theplacement of the hole feature by adding the required relations and dimensions.Figure 7-69 shows the model after adding the hole features.

Creating the Fillet FeatureNext, you need to add the fillet feature to the model. It is evident from the model that thefillets to be added to the model are of different radii. In SolidWorks you can specifydifferent radii to individual selected edges, faces, or loops in a single fillet feature.


You are prompted to select edges, faces, features, or loops to fillet.

2. Select the Multiple radius fillet check box from the Items to Fillet rollout of the FilletPropertyManager.

c07-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:06 PM39


Figure 7-70 Edges to be selected Figure 7-71 Model after adding fillet feature

3. Select the edges to fillet as shown in Figure 7-70. As the Multiple radius fillet check boxis selected, therefore, each selected edge is having a separate radius callout.

4. Modify the value of the radii as required in the radius callouts attached to the selectededges.

5. Choose the OK button from the Fillet PropertyManager.

The isometric view of the model after adding the fillet feature is shown in Figure 7-71.

Creating the Rib FeatureThe next feature that you are going to create is a rib feature. The sketch of the rib featurewill be created on a sketching plane created at an offset distance from the back planar

Figure 7-69 Model after adding all the hole features

c07-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:06 PM40


face of the model. Therefore, first you need to create a reference plane at an offset distancefrom the back planar face of the model.

1. Choose the Plane button from the Reference Geometry toolbar or choose Insert> Reference Geometry > Plane from the menu bar to invoke the PlanePropertyManager.

2. Rotate the model and select the back planar face of the model. Choose the Reversedirection check box under the Distance spinner and set the value of the Distance spinnerto 19.

3. Choose the OK button from the Plane PropertyManager to end feature creation.

A new plane is created at an offset distance from the back planar face of the model.

4. Using the newly created plane as the sketching plane, invoke the sketching environment.

5. Create the sketch for the rib feature and add the required relations and dimensions to thesketch as shown in Figure 7-72.

6. Choose the Rib button from the Features toolbar or choose Insert > Features > Ribfrom the menu bar to invoke the Rib PropertyManager.

The preview of the rib feature is displayed in the drawing area and you will observe thatthe direction of material addition is displayed using the arrow in the drawing area. Thedirection of material addition is opposite to the required direction. Therefore, you needto flip the direction of material addition.


c07-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:06 PM41


7. Select the Flip material side check box to flip the direction of material addition.

Since the default value of the rib thickness is 10, which is the required value, you do notneed to change the value of the rib thickness.

8. Choose OK from the Rib PropertyManager. Also, hide the newly created plane.

The last feature of the model is the fillet feature. Add the fillet feature on the left edge ofthe rib using the fillet tool. Figure 7-73 shows the isometric view of the final model. TheFeatureManager Design Tree of the model is shown in Figure 7-74.

Saving the Model1. Choose the Save button from the Standard toolbar and save the model with the

name given below:



Figure 7-73 The final solid model

c07-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:06 PM42





c07-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:06 PM43


Figure 7-76 Front view and aligned section view with dimensions


a. Create the base feature of the model. The base feature will be created by revolving thesketch along a centerline, refer to Figures 7-77 and 7-78.

b. Create the second feature by extruding the sketch from the sketching plane to a selectedsurface, refer to Figures 7-79 and 7-80.

c. Place a counterbore hole feature using the hole wizard.d. Pattern the second and third features along the temporary axis using the circular pattern

tool, refer to Figure 7-81.e. Create the rib feature, refer to Figure 7-82.f. Pattern the rib feature along a temporary axis using the circular pattern tool, refer to

Figure 7-83.

Creating the Base FeatureCreate a new SolidWorks part document. First you need to create the base feature of themodel. The base feature of the model will be created by revolving the sketch along thecenterline. The sketch for the base feature will be drawn on the Right plane.

1. Select the Right plane as the sketching plane and invoke the sketching environment.

2. Create the sketch for the base feature and add the required relations and dimensions tothe sketch as shown in Figure 7-77.

3. Invoke the Revolve PropertyManager and set the value of the Angle spinner to 360.

c07-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:06 PM44


4. Choose the OK button from the Revolve PropertyManager.

The base feature created after revolving the sketch is shown in Figure 7-78.

Creating the Second FeatureThe second feature is an extruded feature created by extruding a sketch upto the selectedsurface.

Figure 7-77 Sketch for the base feature


c07-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:06 PM45


Figure 7-79 Face to be selected Figure 7-80 Surface to be selected

1. Select the face shown in Figure 7-79 as the sketching plane and invoke the sketchingenvironment.

2. Create the sketch of the second feature and add the required relations and dimensions tothe sketch.

3. Using the Up To Surface option extrude the sketch. The surface to be selected is shownin Figure 7-80.

4. Choose the OK button from the Extrude PropertyManager.

Creating the Hole FeatureIt is evident from Figure 7-76 that a counterbore hole needs to be added to the model.The counterbore hole will be added using the Hole Wizard. Before invoking this tool,first you need to select the placement plane for the hole feature.

1. Select the top face of the second feature as the placement plane for the hole feature.

2. Choose the Hole Wizard button from the Features toolbar to invoke the HoleDefinition dialog box.

The preview of the hole feature with the default settings in the Hole Definition area isdisplayed in the drawing area.

3. Invoke the Counterbore tab and select the Ansi Metric option from the Standarddrop-down list to specify the standard to be used.

4. Select the M3 option from the Size drop-down list to specify the size of the fastener to beused in the hole. Leave all the default options as they are and choose the Next buttonfrom the Hole Definition dialog box.

The Hole Placement dialog box is displayed.

c07-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:06 PM46


5. Invoke the Add Relations PropertyManager and apply a concentric relation between thecenterpoint of the hole feature and the circular edge of the second feature.

6. Choose the Finish button from the Hole Placement dialog box to end feature creation.

Patterning the FeaturesAfter creating the second feature and the third feature, you need to pattern both thefeatures around the temporary axis using the circular pattern tool.

1. Choose the Circular Pattern button from the Features toolbar to invoke theCircular Pattern PropertyManager.

Since you are creating a circular pattern, you need to define an axis as the directionalreference. Therefore, display the temporary axis by choosing View > Temporary Axesfrom the menu bar.

2. Select the temporary axis and invoke the selection mode in the Features to Pattern area.The Direction 1 callout is displayed.

3. Select the second and third features from the drawing area or from the FeatureManagerDesign Tree flyout.

4. Set the value of the Number of Instances spinner to 3 and make sure the Equal spacingcheck box is selected. Choose the OK button from the Circular Pattern PropertyManager.

The model after patterning the features is shown in Figure 7-81.

Figure 7-81 Model after patterning the features

c07-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:06 PM47



Creating the Rib FeatureThe next feature is a rib. The sketch for the rib feature will be created on the Front plane.

1. Select the Front plane from the FeatureManager Design Tree and invoke the sketchingenvironment.

2. Set the display model to wireframe and create the sketch for the rib feature and add therequired relations as shown in Figure 7-82.

3. Choose the Rib button from the Features toolbar and set the value of the Rib Thicknessspinner to 2. Leave all the other default options as they are and choose the OK buttonfrom the Rib PropertyManager.

4. Change the model display mode to shaded.

5. Using the Circular Pattern tool, pattern the rib feature with 6 instances of the rib feature.The final model after creating all the features is shown in Figure 7-83. The FeatureManagerDesign Tree of the model is shown in Figure 7-84.

Saving the Model1. Choose the Save button from the Standard toolbar and save the model with the

name given below:



c07-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:06 PM48


Tutorial 3In this tutorial you will create the cylinder head of a two-stroke automobile engine shown inFigure 7-85. The dimensions of the model are shown in Figure 7-86. After creating the modelyou will also create a section view of the model using the section view tool.

(Expected time: 1 hr)


a. Create the base feature of the model by extruding a polygon to the given depth, refer toFigure 7-87.

b. Add the fillet features to the base feature.



c07-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:06 PM49


Figure 7-86 Top view and the section front view with dimensions

Figure 7-85 Cylinder head of a two-stroke automobile engine

c07-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:06 PM50


c. Create the circular feature at the bottom face of the base feature.d. Create the revolve cut feature to create the dome of the cylinder head, refer to Figures 7-88

and 7-89.e. Create the leftmost fin of the cylinder head by extruding the sketch. The sketch for this

feature should be carefully dimensioned and defined, refer to Figure 7-90.f. Pattern the fin to get the required number of fins. This pattern feature will be created

using the vary sketch option, refer to Figure 7-91.g. Create other cut and extrude features to complete the creation of the model, refer to

Figure 7-92.h. Add a tap hole using the hole wizard, refer to Figure 7-93.i. Create the section view of the model, refer to Figure 7-94.

Creating the Base Feature1. Create a new SolidWorks part document.

The base feature of the model will be created by extruding the sketch created on theTop plane.

2. Select the Top plane as the sketching plane and invoke the sketching environment.

3. Create the sketch for the base feature and add the required relations and dimensions tothe sketch as shown in Figure 7-87.

4. Invoke the Extrude PropertyManager and extrude the sketch to a depth of 4mm.

Creating the Second FeatureThe second feature of the model is the fillet feature. You have to fillet the vertical edgesof the base feature using the given radius.


c07-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:06 PM51


1. Invoke the Fillet PropertyManager and set the value of the Radius spinner to 15 andselect the vertical edges of the base feature to add the fillet feature.

2. Choose the OK button from the Fillet PropertyManager.

Creating the Third FeatureAfter creating the base and adding the fillet to the base, now you will create the thirdfeature of the model, which is a circular extruded feature. This feature will be created byextruding a sketch created on the bottom face of the base feature. The sketch will beextruded to the given depth.

1. Select the bottom face of the base feature as the sketching plane and invoke the sketchingenvironment.

2. Create a circle of 55mm diameter and add the required relations.

3. Extrude the sketch to a depth of 4mm.

Creating the Fourth FeatureThe fourth feature is a revolved cut feature. The sketch for the revolved cut feature will becreated on the Front plane. After creating the sketch, apply the required relations anddimensions to the sketch.

1. Select the Front plane from the FeatureManager Design Tree and then invoke thesketching environment.

2. Create the sketch for the revolved cut feature and add the required relations and dimensionsas shown in Figure 7-88. You may need to apply the vertical relation between the center ofthe arc and the origin to fully define the sketch.

Figure 7-88 Sketch for the revolve cut feature

c07-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:06 PM52


NoteWhen you create the sketch for the revolved cut feature, create a horizontal centerline such thatthe start point of the centerline will be merged with the upper endpoint of the arc. After creatingthe centerline add a tangent relation between the arc and the centerline. This is done to maintainthe tangency of the arc.

3. Select the vertical centerline and invoke the Cut-Revolve PropertyManager. Set the valueof the Angle spinner to 360.

4. Choose the OK button from the Cut-Revolve PropertyManager.

The rotated model after creating the fourth feature is shown in Figure 7-89.

Creating the Fifth FeatureNext, you will create the leftmost fin of the cylinder head. It will be created by extrudinga sketch to both the directions. The sketch of this feature is created on the Front planeand the sketch will be dimensioned and defined such that the length of the fin is drivenby a construction arc and a horizontal dimension. The procedure of creating, dimensioning,and defining the sketch is discussed next in detail.

1. Select the Front plane from the FeatureManager Design Tree and invoke the sketchingenvironment.

2. Using the line tool create the triangle and then create a vertical centerline that passesthrough the upper vertex to the triangle, refer to Figure 7-90.

3. Choose the 3 Pt Arc button from the Sketch Tools toolbar and create the arc as

Figure 7-89 Cut revolve feature added to the model

c07-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:06 PM53


Figure 7-90 Sketch for the fin of the cylinder head

shown in Figure 7-90. Select the arc and select the For Construction check box from theOptions rollout of the Arc PropertyManager.

4. Invoke the Add Relations PropertyManager and add the coincident relation betweenthe upper vertex of the triangle and the centerline.

5. Add the midpoint relation between the lower endpoint of the centerline and the horizontalline of the triangle. Also, add the vertical relation to the centerline, if it is missing.

6. Add the coincident relation between the upper vertex of the triangle and the arc.

7. Add the required dimensions and relations to fully define the sketch as shown inFigure 7-90.

8. Invoke the Extrude PropertyManager and extrude the sketch in both the directionsusing the Through All option. You will notice that the feature extends out of the basefeature at both the ends. This error will be removed later in this tutorial.

Patterning the Fifth FeatureNow, you will pattern the fin created earlier using the Linear Pattern tool. This patternfeature will be using the vary sketch option. In this type of pattern feature, the geometryof each instance of the pattern vary according to the driven dimension and the relationadded to the sketch of the feature to be patterned.

Tip. It is evident from Figure 7-86 that one of the horizontal dimension is havinga value of 6.155. By default the primary unit precision is set to two decimal places.Therefore, for defining a dimension with a value in which the decimal places aremore you have to select that dimension and select the precision value from thePrimary Unit Precision drop-down list from the Dimension PropertyManager.

c07-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:06 PM54


Figure 7-91 Model after patterning the fin of the cylinder head

1. Choose the Linear Pattern button from the Feature toolbar to invoke the LinearPattern PropertyManager.

You are prompted to select the directional reference.

2. Invoke the selection mode in the Features to Pattern rollout and select the fifth feature,which is an extrude feature, from the drawing area.

3. Select the horizontal dimension with the value of 6.155 as the directional reference.

4. Set the value of the Spacing spinner to 9. Set the value of the Number of Instancesspinner to 13. Choose the Reverse Direction button.

5. Invoke the Options rollout and select the Vary Sketch check box from this rollout.

The preview of the pattern will not be displayed in the drawing area when you choose theVary Sketch check box from the Options rollout.

6. Choose the OK button from the Linear Pattern PropertyManager.

The model after adding the pattern feature is shown in Figure 7-91.

Creating the Cut FeatureThe next feature that you are going to create is a cut feature. Using the rotate tool rotatethe solid model and you will observe that the fins of the cylinder head that you patternedin the last feature are extending beyond the boundary of the base feature. Therefore, inorder to trim the extended portion of the fins you will create a cut feature and trim theextended portion.

c07-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:06 PM55


1. Select the top planar face of the base feature as the sketching plane and invoke the sketchingenvironment.

2. Create the sketch using the standard sketch tools. The sketch for this feature will be theouter profile of the base feature.

3. Invoke the Cut-Extrude PropertyManager. Choose the Reverse Direction button fromthe Direction 1 rollout and select the Through All option from the End Conditiondrop-down list.

Since the direction of the side from which material has to be removed is the opposite tothe required direction, therefore, you need to flip the direction of material removal.

4. Select the Flip side to cut check box from the Direction 1 rollout and choose the OKbutton from the Cut-Extrude PropertyManager.

5. Using the cut and extrude options, shape the model as shown in Figure 7-92.

Figure 7-92 Model after adding other extrude and cut features

Tip. The sketch sharing option is also available in SolidWorks. You can use thesketch used to create a sketch feature to create any other sketch feature. For sharingthe sketch select the sketch from the FeatureManager Design Tree. You need toexpand the sketched feature to select the sketch from the FeatureManager Design

Tip. You can create the sketch using the outer profile of the base feature using theConvert Entities tool. Select the lower flat face of the base feature and choose theConvert Entities button from the Sketch Tools toolbar. You will notice that thesketch similar to the outer boundary of the base feature will be placed on the sketchingplane.

c07-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:06 PM56


Patterning the Remaining FeaturesAfter creating all the features now you have to pattern the cut, extrude, and hole featurescreated at the lower left corner of the model.

1. Invoke the Linear Pattern PropertyManager and select the cut, extrude, and hole features,created on the lower left corner of the model.

2. Select the two directional references to pattern the features in both the directions and setthe values of the distances between the instances and the number of instances.

3. Choose the OK button from the Linear PropertyManager.

Creating a Tapped HoleThe last feature of the model is a hole feature. You will create a tapped hole using the HoleWizard and then define the placement of the hole.

1. Select the top face of the middle circular extrude feature as the placement plane for thehole feature.

2. Invoke the Hole Definition dialog box and select the Tap tab from the Hole Definitiondialog box. Select ANSI Metric from the Standard drop-down list.

3. Select the M18x1.5 option from the Size drop-down list to define the size of the tap hole.

4. Select the Through All option from the Tap Drill Type drop-down list. Also, select theThrough All option from the Thread Type and Depth drop-down list.

5. Select the Add Cosmetic thread with thread callout option from the Add CosmeticThread drop-down list. Choose the Next button from the Hole Definition dialog box.The Hole Placement dialog box is displayed.

The tapped hole will be placed by default on the placement plane; therefore, you willdefine the placement of the tapped hole.

6. Invoke the Add Relations PropertyManager and add the Concentric relation betweenthe centerpoint of the tapped hole and the circular extruded feature in the middle of themodel.

Tip. You will observe that the cosmetic thread is displayed with the tapped holefeature. If you orient the model in the top view you will observe the thread conventionin the top view. If you orient the model in the front, back, right, or left views thenyou will view the side convention of the thread.

You can also hide the cosmetic thread by selecting the cosmetic thread from thedrawing area and invoking the shortcut menu. Choose the Hide option from theshortcut menu to hide the cosmetic thread.

c07-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:06 PM57



7. Choose the Finish button from the Hole Placement dialog box to end feature creation.

The rotated final model is shown in Figure 7-93.

Displaying the Section View of the ModelNext, you will display the section view of the model. The section view of the model iscreated using the Section View dialog box.

1. Orient the model in the isometric view.

2. Choose View > Display > Section View from the menu bar to invoke the Section Viewdialog box.

The Front view is selected by default. The name of the Front view is also displayed in theSelection Plane(s)/Face(s) display area.

3. Select the Preview check box to display the preview of the section view.

Since side to view the section view is opposite to the required side, therefore, you have toflip the side of viewing the section view.

4. Select the Flip the Side to View check box. The preview of the section view is modifiedautomatically.

5. Choose the OK button from the Section View dialog box to create the section view.

6. Click anywhere in the drawing area to remove the Front plane from the selection set. Thesection view of the model is shown in Figure 7-94.

c07-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:06 PM58



7. Choose the Section View option again from the View menu to return to the full viewmode. The FeatureManager Design Tree is shown in Figure 7-95.


c07-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:06 PM59


Saving the ModelSince the document has not been saved once until now, therefore, when you choosethe Save button from the Standard toolbar, the Save As dialog box will bedisplayed. You can enter the name of the document in this dialog box.

1. Choose the Save button from the Standard toolbar and save the model with the namegiven below:




1. To invoke the Mirror PropertyManager choose View > Pattern/Mirror > Mirror fromthe menu bar. (T/F)

2. If you modify the parent feature then the same change will not reflect on the mirroredfeature. (T/F)

3. You cannot preselect the mirror plane and the feature to pattern before invoking themirror tool. (T/F)

4. You can mirror single face using the mirror tool. (T/F)

5. You can also pattern a pattern feature. (T/F)

6. The __________ dialog box is used to view the section view.

7. Using __________ check box you can remove the material using the dome tool.

8. __________ option is used to create a pattern by specifying the coordinates.

9. __________ option is used to create a pattern with respect to the sketched points.

10. Using the __________ rollout you can delete the pattern instances.


1. The __________ check box is used to accommodated all the instances of pattern alongthe selected curve.

c07-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:06 PM60


2. Enter the coordinates for creating the instances in the __________ area of the TableDriven Pattern dialog box.

3. You have to invoke __________ to create a rib feature.

4. __________ check box is selected to create an elliptical dome feature.

5. Using __________ check box from the Section View dialog box you can create a sectionusing an invisible plane normal to the eye view as the section plane.

6. When you choose the Mirror button from the Features tool, which PropertyManager isdisplayed?

(a) Mirror Feature PropertyManager (b) Mirror All PropertyManager(c) Mirror PropertyManager (d) Copy/Mirror PropertyManager

7. Which option is used to mirror the exact geometry of the feature independent of therelationships between the geometries?

(a) Same Mirror (b) Geometry Pattern(c) Geometry Copy (d) Copy Geometry

8. Which pattern is created along the sketched lines, arcs, or splines?

(a) Curve driven pattern (b) Sketch driven pattern(c) Geometry driven pattern (d) Linear Pattern

9. Which dialog box is invoked to create a pattern by specifying the coordinate points?

(a) Sketch Driven Pattern (b) Table Driven Pattern(c) Mirror (d) None of these

10. Which plane is selected by default when you invoke the Section View dialog box to createa section view?

(a) Right (b) Top(c) Front (d) Plane 1

c07-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:06 PM61


EXERCISES

Exercise 1Create the model shown in Figure 7-96. The dimensions of the model are shown in Figure 7-97.



c07-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:06 PM62





c07-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:06 PM63




c07-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:06 PM64




Exercise 3Create the model shown in Figure 7-100. After creating the model create the section view ofthe model using the Right plane. Figure 7-101 shows the section view of the model. Thedimensions of the model are shown in Figure 7-102. (Expected time: 45 min)

c07-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:06 PM65



Answers to Self-Evaluation Test1. F, 2. F, 3. F, 4. F, 5. T, 6. Section View, 7. Reverse Direction, 8. Table Driven Pattern, 9.Sketch Driven Pattern, 10. Instances to Skip

c07-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:06 PM66

Chapter 8

Editing Features

After completing this chapter you will be able to:• Edit the Features.• Edit the Sketches of the Sketched Feature.• Edit the Sketch Plane.• Edit using the Move/Size Features option.• Cut, Copy, and Paste the Features and Sketches.• Copy Features using the Drag and Drop Method.• Delete the Features.• Delete the Bodies.• Suppress and Unsuppress the Features.• Move/Copy Bodies.• Reorder the Features.• Roll Back the Model.• Rename the Features.• Create the Folders.• Use What’s Wrong? Functionality.

Learning Objectives

c08-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 11:54 AM1


EDITING THE FEATURES OF THE MODELEditing is one of the most important aspect of the product design cycle. Almost all the designsrequire editing either during their creation or after they are created. As discussed earlier,SolidWorks is a feature-based parametric software. Therefore, the design created in SolidWorksis a combination of individual features integrated together to form a solid model. All thesefeatures can be edited individually. For example, Figure 8-1 shows a base plate with someholes.

Now, if you have to replace the four inner holes with four counterbore holes, all you need todo is to use one editing operation. Using the editing operation, you will change the drilledholes to the counterbore holes. For editing the holes, you have to select the hole feature andright-click to invoke the shortcut menu. Then you will have to choose the Edit Definitionoption from the shortcut menu to invoke the Hole Definition dialog box. Finally you have toset the new parameters and end feature creation. The drilled holes will be automaticallyreplaced by the counterbore holes. Figure 8-2 shows the base plate with drilled holes modifiedto the counterbore holes.

Similarly, you can also edit reference geometry and the sketches of the sketched features.The feature created using the reference geometry also modify automatically when you modifythe reference geometry. For example, if you create a feature on a plane at some angle andthen edit the angle of the plane, the resultant feature is automatically modified. In SolidWorks,you can perform editing tasks using various methods. All the methods of editing are discussedas under.

Editing Using Edit Definition OptionThe editing using the Edit Definition option is the most commonly used method of editingin SolidWorks. To edit any feature of the model using this option, select that feature eitherfrom the FeatureManager Design Tree or from the drawing area. After selecting the feature,right-click to invoke the shortcut menu and choose the Edit Definition option from the shortcutmenu as shown in Figure 8-3. Depending on the feature selected, the PropertyManager ordialog box will be invoked and you can modify the parameters of that feature. The

Figure 8-1 Base plate with drilled holes Figure 8-2 Modified base plate

c08-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 11:54 AM2

Editing Features 8-3

PropertyManager will also have the sequence number of the feature. The ExtrudePropertyManager is displayed in Figure 8-4 with sequence number 1. After editing theparameters, choose the OK button to complete feature creation. The feature will be modifiedautomatically.

Figure 8-3 Selecting the Edit Definition option from the shortcut menu

Figure 8-4 The Extrude PropertyManager

c08-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 11:54 AM3


Editing the Sketches of the Sketched FeaturesIn SolidWorks, you can also edit the sketches of the sketched entities using the Edit Sketchoption. To edit the sketch of a sketched feature select the feature either from theFeatureManager Design Tree or from the drawing area and right-click to invoke the shortcutmenu. Choose the Edit Sketch option from the shortcut menu. When you choose this option,you will enter the sketching environment. Using the standard sketching tools, edit the sketchof the sketched feature. After editing the sketch, exit the sketching environment. To exit thesketching environment you can also select the Rebuild button from the Standard toolbar orchoose View > Rebuild from the menu bar. Using this you will exit the sketching environmentand the model will also be rebuilt. You can also choose CTRL+B to rebuild the model.

Changing the Sketch Plane of the SketchesYou can also change the sketch plane of the sketches of the sketched features. To edit thesketch plane, expand the sketched feature by clicking on the + sign on the left of that featurein the FeatureManager Design Tree. Select the sketch icon in the FeatureManager DesignTree. Right-click to invoke the shortcut menu and choose the Edit Sketch Plane option fromthe shortcut menu. Figure 8-5 shows the Edit Sketch Plane option being chosen from theshortcut menu. The Sketch Plane PropertyManager will be displayed as shown in Figure 8-6.The name of the current sketch plane is displayed in the Sketch Plane/Face display area.Now, select any other plane or face as the sketching plane. After selecting the new sketchingplane, choose the OK button from the Sketch Plane PropertyManager.

Editing by Double-Clicking the Entities and FeaturesYou can also edit a feature, a reference geometry, or a sketch by double-clicking the featureeither from the FeatureManager Design Tree or from the drawing area. For example, if youdouble-click an extrude feature, all the dimensions of the feature and the sketch of the featureare displayed in the drawing area. Remember that all the dimensions of the sketch will bedisplayed in black color and all the dimensions of the feature will be displayed in blue color.Move the cursor on the dimension to be modified, the dimension will be displayed enclosedin a red box. Double-click the dimension to invoke the Modify dialog box. Set the new valuein the Modify dialog box and press the ENTER key from the keyboard or choose the Save thecurrent value and exit the dialog button from the dialog box. You will notice that the valueof the dimension is modified but the model is not modified relative to the modified value.Therefore, you have to rebuild the model using the Rebuild option. To rebuild the model,choose the Rebuild button from the Standard toolbar or choose Edit > Rebuild from themenu bar. You can also rebuild the model using CTRL+B from the keyboard.

Tip. You can also use the + sign available on the left of a sketched feature toexpand that sketched feature in the FeatureManager Design Tree. The sketchicon will be displayed when you expand a sketched feature. Select the sketch iconand invoke the shortcut menu. Select the Edit Sketch option from the shortcut

Tip. If you select a sketch plane on which the relations and dimensions do not findany reference to be placed, the Rebuild Errors dialog box will be displayed. You,will have to undo the last step using the Undo button from the Standard toolbar,invoke the Sketch Plane PropertyManager again, and then select the appropriateplane. You will learn more about the Rebuild Errors dialog box later in thischapter.

c08-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 11:54 AM4


Figure 8-5 The Edit Sketch Plane option being selected

Figure 8-6 The Sketch Plane PropertyManager

Editing Using the Move/Size Features

Using this option you can dynamically modify the feature and the sketch of the sketchedfeature without invoking the sketching environment. To edit the feature or sketchusing this option, choose the Move/Size Features button from the Features toolbar.

You will notice that the Move/Size Features button is chosen in the Features toolbar. Selectany face of the feature to modify. The selected face will be highlighted in green and if theselected feature is a sketched feature then the sketch of that feature will also be highlighted in

Toolbar: Features > Move/Size Features

c08-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 11:54 AM5


green. You will be provided with the resize handle, rotate handle, and the move handle.Figure 8-7 shows the move handle, resize handle, and the rotate handle provided for theselected feature.

To resize the feature, move the cursor to the resize handle; the select cursor will be replacedby the resize cursor and the name of the resize cursor will be displayed as the tooltip. Pressand hold down the left mouse button at this location and drag the cursor to resize the feature.The feature will be resized with an increment of 10. Release the left mouse button when youhave resized the feature. You will notice that the feature will be dynamically resized. Figure 8-8shows the cursor being dragged to resize the feature. Figure 8-9 shows the resultant modifiedfeature.

Figure 8-7 Feature selected with Move/Size Features button selected

Figure 8-8 Dragging the resize handle to resizethe feature

Figure 8-9 Resultant modified feature

c08-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 11:54 AM6


Figure 8-11 Preview of feature being rotated Figure 8-12 Resultant rotated feature

Figure 8-10 The Move Confirmation dialog box

The rotate handle is used to rotate the selected feature. To rotate the feature using the rotatehandle, move the cursor to the rotate handle and press and hold down the left mouse button.Drag the cursor to rotate the feature. You can drag the feature clockwise or counterclockwise.The preview of the feature will be displayed in the drawing area. The feature will be rotatedwith an increment of 10º. Release the left mouse button after rotating the feature to a specifiedlocation.

NoteIf you rotate a sketched feature in which the sketch of the feature is fully defined or partiallydefined using relations and dimensions, the Move Confirmation dialog box will be displayed.The Move Confirmation dialog box is displayed in Figure 8-10. This dialog box informs youthat the external constraints in the feature are being moved, do you want to delete those constraintsor keep the constraints by recalculating or make them dangling. Those relations or dimensionsthat do not find the external reference after the placement are made dangling.

After rotating the feature, if the Move Confirmation dialog box is invoked then you have tochoose either the Delete button or the Keep button, based on the geometric and dimensionalconditions. Figure 8-11 shows the preview of rotating the feature. Figure 8-12 shows the resultantrotated feature.

c08-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 11:54 AM7


To move a feature using the move handle, select a face of the feature and move the cursor tothe move handle. Press and hold down the left mouse button and drag the cursor to move thefeature. Release the left mouse button after moving the feature to the required position. If thedimensions or relation of the feature are not able to be defined after moving the feature, theMove Confirmation dialog box will be displayed. Choose the options available in this dialogbox. Using this option, you can also change the placement plane of the feature or the sketchplane of the feature. Figure 8-13 shows the feature being moved to another face. Figure 8-14shows the resultant moved feature.

You can also modify the sketches of the sketched feature using this option. To modify thesketch, move the cursor to the sketch highlighted in light green color. A vertical line appearson the right of the cursor. Press and hold down the left mouse button and drag the cursor.After modifying the sketch to the required size, release the left mouse button. Figure 8-15shows the preview of the sketch being modified. Figure 8-16 shows the resultant modifiedmodel.

Figure 8-13 The feature being moved Figure 8-14 Resultant moved feature

Tip. When you resize, move, or rotate a feature using the Move/Size Featurestool, the feature(s) that has a relationship with that feature will also be modified. Inother words, if a child-parent relationship is established between the features, thechild features will also be modified when you modify the parent feature.

Tip. To unselect the selected feature, click once anywhere in the drawing area orchoose the ESC key from the keyboard. You will notice that the Move/Size Featuresbutton is still chosen in the Features toolbar, which indicates that the dynamicmove/size features option is still active. To exit this option you have to choose theMove/Size Features button again.

c08-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 11:54 AM8


Figure 8-15 Preview of the sketch being modified Figure 8-16 Resultant modified model

Figure 8-17 Preview of the sketch being modified

Editing the Sketches With the Move/Size Features ToolActiveWhen the Move/Size Features tool is active and you choose the Edit Sketch option to edit thesketch of the sketched feature you will enter the sketching environment. The feature whosesketch you have to modify will be displayed in transparent yellow temporary graphics asshown in Figure 8-17.

Now, modify the sketch according to the requirement. Consider a case in which two circles areadded to the model and the height of the inclined line is increased. The model shown intemporary graphics will be modified dynamically in the sketcher environment. Therefore,you can have a better understanding of the model, that how it will be displayed after modifying

c08-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 11:54 AM9


the sketch. Note that the temporary graphic will show the preview of the feature created bythe section you add only if you drag one of the entity in the sketch. Otherwise, the newaddition will not be display as a preview in the temporary graphics. It is recommended thatyou invoke the Modify/Size Features button before modifying the sketch. After modifyingthe sketch exit the sketcher environment. If the sketch of the model is dimensioned then youcan modify the sketch by modifying the dimension. Figure 8-18 shows two circles added to themodel and the length of the inclined line being increased. Figure 8-19 shows the resultantmodified model.

Editing the Features and Sketches by Cut, Copy, and PasteSolidWorks allows you to adapt the windows functionality of cut, copy, and paste to copy andpaste the features. The method of using this functionality is the same as used in otherwindows-based applications. Select the feature or sketch to cut or copy. To cut the selecteditem, choose Edit > Cut from the menu bar or use the shortcut key, CTRL+X. The DeleteConfirmation dialog box is displayed because when you cut the selected item, it is deletedfrom the document. Choose Yes button from this dialog box. You will learn more about deletinglater in this chapter. After you cut an item, select the placement plane or placement referencewhere you want to place the feature. Choose Edit > Paste from the menu bar or use theshortcut key CTRL+V from the keyboard. Sometimes the Copy Confirmation dialog box isdisplayed as shown in Figure 8-20. In that dialog box, you are prompted either to delete theexternal constraints or leave them dangling. This dialog box is displayed only when the itemto paste has some external references in the form of relations and dimensions. The featurewill be pasted on the selected reference.

Figure 8-18 Sketch being modified Figure 8-19 Resultant modified model

Tip. If you want to modify the sketch by dragging and the sketch is fully or partiallydefined using dimensions, the Override Dims on Drag/Move option should beselected. To select this option choose Tools > Sketch Settings > Override Dimson Drag/Move from the menu bar. If this option is not selected, you cannot moveor drag a dimensioned sketched entity.

c08-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 11:54 AM10


Figure 8-20 The Copy Confirmation dialog box

If you copy and paste an item, the selected item will remain at its position and a copy of thatitem will be pasted on the selected reference. To copy an item, select the feature or sketch.Choose Edit > Copy from the menu bar or press CTRL+C from the keyboard. Select thereference where you want to paste the selected item and choose Edit > Paste from the menubar or press CTRL+V from the keyboard to paste. You can paste the selected item any numberof times. If you select another item and copy on the clipboard, the last copied item will bedeleted from the memory of the clipboard.

Cut, Copy, and Paste Features and Sketches from OneDocument to the OtherYou can also cut or copy the features and sketches from one document and paste them inanother document. For example, you have to copy a sketch created in the current documentand paste it in a new document. You just need to select the sketch and use CTRL+C fromkeyboard to copy the item to the clipboard. Create a new document in the Part mode andselect the plane on which you want to paste the sketch. Press CTRL+V from the keyboard topaste the sketch on the selected plane. Using the same procedure, you can also copy featuresfrom one document to the other.

Copying Features Using Drag and DropSolidWorks also provides you with drag drop functionality of windows to copy and paste theitem within the document. Press and hold down the CTRL key from the keyboard and selectand drag that item from the drawing area or from the FeatureManager Design Tree. Dragthe cursor to a location where you want to paste the item and release the left mouse button onthat location. If the item to be pasted is defined using the dimensions or relations, the CopyConfirmation dialog box will be displayed to delete or make those constraints dangle.Figure 8-21 shows the feature being dragged. Figure 8-22 shows the resultant pasted feature.

Dragging and Dropping Features from One Document to OtherYou can also drag and drop features and sketches from one document to the other. For pastingthe items from one document to the other, you should open both the documents in the

Tip. For pasting a selected sketch, you have to select a plane or a planar face as thereference. For pasting a sketched feature, a simple hole, or a hole created using thehole wizard, you have to select a plane or a planar face as the reference. For pastingchamfers and fillets, you have to select an edge or edges as the references.

c08-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 11:54 AM11


Figure 8-23 Fillet feature being dragged to be pasted in the second document

SolidWorks session. Choose Windows > Tile Vertical/Tile Horizontal from the menu bar.Display both the documents at the same time in the SolidWorks window. Press and hold downthe CTRL key from the keyboard, select and drag the feature or sketch to the other document,and place it on the required reference. Figure 8-23 shows the fillet feature being dragged tobe applied on the edge of the model in the second document.

Figure 8-21 Feature being dragged Figure 8-22 Resultant pasted feature

c08-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 11:54 AM12


Figure 8-24 The Confirm Delete dialog box

Deleting the FeaturesYou can delete the unwanted features from the model by selecting the feature either from theFeatureManager Design Tree or from the drawing area. After selecting the feature to bedeleted, choose the DELETE key from the keyboard or right-click to invoke the shortcutmenu and choose the Delete Feature option. If you delete a sketched feature or a feature thatacts as the parent feature for the other feature, the Confirm Delete dialog box is displayed asshown in Figure 8-24. This dialog box informs you that all the dependent features to thisparent feature will also be deleted. Choose the Yes button if you want to delete all the featuresor else choose the No button to cancel the delete operation. You can also delete a selectedfeature by choosing Edit > Delete from the menu bar. When you delete a feature, the absorbedfeature related to that feature will not be deleted. For example, if you delete a boss feature thesketch feature is not deleted. If you need to delete the absorbed feature when you delete theparent feature select the Also delete absorbed features check box from the Confirm Deletedialog box.

Deleting the Bodies

As discussed earlier, the multi-body environment is supported in SolidWorks.Therefore, you can create multiple disjoint bodies in SolidWorks. You can also deletethe unwanted bodies. The bodies to be deleted can be solid bodies or surface bodies.

You will learn more about surface bodies in later chapters. To delete a body, choose theDelete Solid/Surface button from the menu bar or choose Insert > Features > Delete Bodyfrom the menu bar. The Delete Body PropertyManager is invoked as shown in Figure 8-25.You are prompted to select the solid and/or surface bodies to be deleted. Select the body orbodies to be deleted from the drawing area or from the Solid Bodies folder available in theFeatureManager Design Tree flyout. The selected body is displayed in green and the edgesof the selected body are highlighted in yellow. The name of the selected body is displayed in

Toolbar: Features > Delete Solid/Surface (Customize to Add)

Menu: Insert > Features > Delete Body

c08-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 11:54 AM13


the Bodies to Delete display area. Choose the OK button from the Delete BodyPropertyManager. A new item with the name Body-Delete1 appears in the FeatureManagerDesign Tree. This item stores the deleted bodies. Therefore, at any point of your design cycleyou can delete or suppress this item to resume the deleted body back in your design. You willlearn more about suppressing the feature later in this chapter.

Suppressing the Features

Sometimes, you do not want a feature to be displayed in the model or in the drawingviews of that model. Instead of deleting those features, they can be suppressed. Whenyou suppress a feature, it is neither visible in the model nor in the drawing views. If

you create an assembly using that model, the suppressed feature will not be displayed even inthe assembly. You can anytime resume the feature by unsuppressing it. When you suppress afeature, the features that are dependent on the suppressed feature are also suppressed. Tosuppress a feature, select it from the FeatureManager Design Tree or from the drawing area.Choose the Suppress button from the Features toolbar or right-click and choose the Suppressoption from the shortcut menu. The suppressed feature will be removed from the model andthe icon of the feature will be displayed in gray in the FeatureManager Design Tree.

NoteYou can work with different configurations in a single document of SolidWorks. Therefore, youhave to specify in which configuration you are suppressing a feature. This is specified when youchoose the suppress option from the menu bar. You will learn more about configurations later inthis book.

Toolbar: Features > Suppress (Customize to Add)

Menu: Edit > Suppress > This Configuration

Tip. You can also choose the Delete Body option from the shortcut menu. To deletea body using the shortcut menu select the body and right-click to invoke the shortcutmenu. Choose the Delete Body option from the shortcut menu. The Delete BodyPropertyManager will be displayed. Choose the OK button from the Delete BodyPropertyManager to delete the body.

Figure 8-25 The Delete Body PropertyManager

c08-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 11:54 AM14


Toolbar: Features > Unsuppress (Customize to Add)

Menu: Edit > Unsuppress > This Configuration

Toolbar: Features > Unsuppress with Dependents (Customize to Add)

Menu: Edit > Unsuppress with Dependents > This Configuration

Unsuppressing the Features

The suppressed features can be unsuppressed using this option. To resume thesuppressed feature, select the suppressed feature from the FeatureManager DesignTree and choose the Unsuppressed button from the Features toolbar or choose Edit

> Unsuppressed from the menu bar. You can also choose this option from the shortcut menuafter selecting the suppressed feature. As discussed earlier, when you suppress a feature, thedependent features are also suppressed. But when you resume a suppressed feature, thedependent features remain suppressed. Therefore, you have to unsuppress all the featuresindependently. Resuming the parent feature and the dependent features using a single optionis discussed next.

Unsuppressing Features With Dependents

Using this option you can resume the suppressed feature along with the dependentsof the suppressed parent feature. To resume the suppressed feature using this option,select the suppressed feature from the FeatureManager Design Tree. Choose

Unsuppress with Dependents > This Configuration from the Features toolbar. You willobserve that the dependent suppressed features are also unsuppressed.

Hiding the BodiesWhile working in the multibody environment, you can also hide the bodies. The hidden bodyis not displayed in the model and assembly, and drawing views. The bodies that are dependenton the hidden body do not hide. To hide a body, expand the Solid Bodies folder available inthe FeatureManager Design Tree and select the body to hide. Right-click to invoke the shortcutmenu and choose the Hide Solid Body option from the shortcut menu. The selected bodywill disappear from the drawing area. The icon of the hidden body is displayed in wireframein the Solid Bodies folder. Select the hidden body from that folder and choose the ShowSolid Body option from the shortcut menu to show the hidden body.

Move/Copy Bodies

In SolidWorks you can also move or copy the bodies. To move or copy the bodieschoose the Move/Copy Bodies button from the Features toolbar or choose Insert >Features > Move/Copy Bodies from the menu bar. The Move/Copy Body

PropertyManager will be displayed as shown in Figure 8-26. The confirmation corner is alsodisplayed in the drawing area. You will observe a filled square at the document origin. Thevarious options available in the Move/Copy Body PropertyManager are discussed next.

Toolbar: Features > Move/Copy Bodies (Customize to Add)

Menu: Insert > Features > Move/Copy Bodies

c08-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 11:54 AM15


Figure 8-26 The Move/Copy Body PropertyManager

Bodies to Move/CopyThe Bodies to Move/Copy rollout is used to define the body to copy or move. When youinvoke the Move/Copy Body PropertyManager, you are prompted to select the bodies tomove/copy and set the options. Move the cursor to the body to be selected. The cursor will bereplaced by the body selection cursor and the edges of the body are highlighted in red. Thename of the body is also displayed in the tooltip. Use the left mouse button to select the body.The selected body is highlighted in green and the edges of the body are displayed in yellow.The name of body is displayed in the Solid and Surface or Graphics Bodies to Move/Copydisplay area. You can also select the body from the Solid Bodies folder after invoking theFeatureManager Design Tree flyout.

CopySince the Copy check box is cleared by default, you can move the selected body only aftersetting the options. If you select the Copy check box, you can create the copies of theselected body. When you select this check box the Number of Copies spinner is displayedbelow the Copy check box. Set the number of copies using this spinner.

TranslateThe Translate rollout available in the Move/Copy Body PropertyManager is used to definethe translational parameters to move the selected body. Set the value of the destination in theDelta X, Delta Y, and Delta Z spinners. When you set the value, the preview of moved body isdisplayed in temporary graphics in the drawing area. You can also move or copy the selectedbody between points. To move or copy a body by specifying two points, select the TranslationReference (Linear Entity, Coordinate System, Vertex) display area. The selection mode inthis area is active. Select the vertex from which you want the translation to start. When you

c08-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 11:54 AM16


select the first vertex as translation reference, the Delta X, Delta Y, and Delta Z spinners arereplaced by the To Vertex display area. The selection mode in the To Vertex display area isactive. Select the second translation reference. You will observe the preview of the body movebetween two selected vertices. The placement of the body also depends on the sequence ofselection of vertices. Therefore, you have to be very careful while selecting the two vertices.Figure 8-27 shows the sequence for the selection of references. Figure 8-28 shows the resultantcopied body.

RotateThe Rotate spinner available in the Move/Copy Body PropertyManager is used to define theparameters to rotate the body. To open this rollout, click once on the black arrow provided atthe right of this rollout. The Rotate rollout is shown in Figure 8-29.

As discussed earlier, a filled square is placed at the origin when you invoke the Move/CopyPropertyManager. This filled square is clearly visible if you hide the origin by choosing View> Origin from the menu bar. It indicates the origin along which the selected body will berotated. You can adjust the position of this temporary moveable origin using the X RotationOrigin spinner, Y Rotation Origin spinner, Z Rotation Origin spinner. The X Rotation

Figure 8-29 The Rotate rollout

Figure 8-27 Sequence of selection Figure 8-28 Resultant copied feature

c08-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 11:54 AM17


Figure 8-30 The SolidWorks warning message dialog box

Angle spinner is used to set the value of the angular increment to rotate or copy the bodyalong x-axis. The Y Rotation Angle spinner is used to rotate or copy the body along y-axis.The Z Rotation Angle spinner is used to rotate or copy the body along z-axis.

To rotate or copy the selected body along an edge, click once in the Rotation Reference(Linear Entity, Coordinate System, Vertex) display area to invoke the selection. Select theedge along which you want to rotate the selected body. When you select an edge, all the otherspinners disappear from the rollout and the Angle spinner is invoked in the Rotate rollout.Set the value of the angular increment in this spinner.

Instead of selecting an edge, you can also select a vertex along which the body will rotate orcopy. Then you have to specify the axis along which you want to rotate the body.

Reordering the FeaturesReordering the features is defined as a process of changing the position of the features createdin the model. Sometimes, after creating a model it may be required to change the order inwhich the features of the model were created. For reordering the features, the features aredragged and placed before or after another feature in the FeatureManager Design Tree.

For reordering the features, select the feature in the FeatureManager Design Tree and dragthe feature to the required position. When you drag the feature to reorder, the bend arrowpointer is displayed, that suggests that feature dragging is possible. If you drag the childfeature above the parent feature, the reorder error pointer will be displayed. If you draga child feature above a parent feature, the SolidWorks warning message dialog box will bedisplayed as shown in Figure 8-30. Choose OK from this dialog box.

c08-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 11:54 AM18


Figure 8-32 Shell feature added to the model

Figure 8-31 Model created creating a pattern of the holes on the base feature

Consider a case in which you have created a rectangular block and a pattern of through holesare created on the base feature as shown in Figure 8-31. Now, if you create a shell feature andremove the top face, the front face, and the right face of the model, the model will appear asshown in Figure 8-32. But this was not the desired result. This, is the reason you need toreorder the shell feature before the holes. Select the shell feature in the FeatureManagerDesign Tree and drag it above the holes. All the features will be automatically adjusted in thenew order as shown in Figure 8-33.

c08-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 11:54 AM19


Figure 8-34 The rollback bar of theFeatureManager Design Tree

Rolling Back the ModelRolling back the model is defined as a process in which you rollback the model to an earlierstage. When you rollback a feature or features, those features are suppressed and you can addnew features when the model is in the rollback state. The newly added features are addedbefore the features that are rolled back. While working with a multifeatured model you wantto edit a feature that was created at the starting of the design cycle of the model. It isrecommended that you should rollback the model up to that feature. This is because aftereach editing operation the time of regeneration will be minimized. Rolling back is done usingthe Rollback Bar available in the FeatureManager Design Tree as shown in Figure 8-34.

Figure 8-33 Model after reordering the features.

c08-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 11:54 AM20


Using the select tool select the Rollback Bar; after selection it will be changed to blue colorand the select cursor will be replaced by the hand pointer Drag the hand pointer to thefeature upto which you want to rollback the model and release the pointer. To resume or rollthe model, drag the Rollback Bar to the last feature of the model. You can also rollback usingthe menu bar. Select the feature up to which you want to rollback the model and choose Edit> Rollback from the menu bar.

Renaming the FeaturesThe name of the features is displayed in the FeatureManager Design Tree. By default thenaming of the features is done according to the sequence in which the features are created.You can also rename the features according to your convenience. To rename a feature, selectthe feature from the FeatureManager Design Tree and click once on the selected feature. Anedit box will be displayed in the FeatureManager Design Tree. Enter the name of the featureand press the ENTER key or anywhere on the screen.

Creating Folders in the FeatureManager Design TreeYou can also add the folders in the FeatureManager Design Tree and the features displayedin the FeatureManager Design Tree are added in the folder. This is done to reduce thelength of the FeatureManager. Consider a case in which the base of the model consists ofmore than one feature. You can add a folder named Base Feature and add all the featuresused to create the base in that folder. To add a folder in the FeatureManager Design Treeselect any feature and right-click to invoke the shortcut menu. Choose the Create New Folderoption from the shortcut menu. A new folder is created above the selected feature. Now, youcan drag and drop the features to the newly created folder. You can also rename the folder byselecting it and then clicking it once. Now, enter the name in the edit box and press theENTER key.

To add the selected feature in a new folder, choose Add to New Folder from the shortcutmenu. A new folder will be created in the FeatureManager Design Tree and the selectedfeature will be added to the newly created folder. You can also delete the folder by selectingthe folder and invoking the shortcut menu. Select the Delete option from the shortcut menu.Using the options in this shortcut menu you can also rollback and suppress the featuresavailable in the selected folder.

What’s Wrong? FunctionalityWhen you modify a sketch or a feature and rebuild the model, sometimes the model does notrebuild properly because of the geometric errors resulting the modification. Therefore, youare provided with a Rebuild Errors dialog box as shown in Figure 8-35. The possible error inthe feature are displayed in this dialog box.

Tip. If you want to roll the model to the previous step choose Edit > Roll toPrevious from the menu bar. If you want to roll the entire model to its originalposition, choose Edit > Roll to End from the menu bar.

You can also choose Roll Forward, Roll Previous, Roll End options from theshortcut menus invoked by selecting the features placed below the Rollback Bar.These options are used to control the roll and rollback of the model.

c08-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 11:54 AM21


Figure 8-36 The FeatureManager Design Tree with a feature having errors

The Display errors at every rebuild check box is selected by default and is used to displaythe errors at every rebuild of the model unless the error is fixed. The Display full messagecheck box is used to display the complete error message in the Rebuild Errors dialog box.After reading the error from this dialog box, choose the Close button to exit the dialog box.The errors are also displayed in the FeatureManager design Tree. The FeatureManagerDesign Tree with an error in a feature is displayed in Figure 8-36.

Figure 8-35 The Rebuild Errors dialog box

c08-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 11:54 AM22



Tip. You can also invoke the Rebuild Errors dialog box by selecting the featurehaving errors from the FeatureManager Design Tree and choose the What’sWrong? option from the shortcut menu. To view all the errors in a model, select thename of the document from the top of the FeatureManager Design Tree andinvoke the Rebuild Errors dialog box. All the errors in the model are displayed inthe Rebuild Errors dialog box.

While creating the features, if there are some geometrical constraints in creatingthe feature, the Rebuild Errors dialog box is displayed.

TUTORIALS

Tutorial 1In this tutorial you will create the model shown in Figure 8-37. After creating some of thefeatures of the model you will dynamically modify the model and then undo the modification.The dimensions of the model are shown in Figure 8-38. (Expected time: 30 min)

The steps to be followed to create the model are discussed next:

a. Create the base feature of the model by extruding the profile to a given distance, refer toFigures 8-39 and 8-40.

b. Add the fillets to the base feature, refer to Figures 8-41 and 8-42.c. Add the shell feature to the model and remove the top face of the base feature, refer to

Figures 8-43 and 8-44.d. Dynamically modify the model, refer to Figures 8-45 through 8-47.e. Create the cuts on the sides of the model, refer to Figure 8-48.

c08-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 11:54 AM23


f. Create the slots on the lower part of the base and add the fillet to the slots feature, referto Figure 8-48.

g. Pattern the slots and the fillet feature, refer to Figure 8-48.h. Create a plane at an offset distance from the Top plane.i. Create the standoffs of the soap case using the extrude and fillet tool and pattern the

same, refer to Figure 8-49.

Creating the Base FeatureFirst, you will create the base feature of the model by extruding a sketch using the Mid Planeoption created on the Front plane.

1. Start SolidWorks and open a new part document from the Template tab of the NewSolidWorks Document dialog box.

2. Draw the sketch of the base feature on the Front plane and add the required relations anddimensions to the sketch as shown in Figure 8-39.


c08-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 11:54 AM24




3. Extrude the sketch to a distance of 35mm using the Mid Plane option.

The base feature of the model is shown in Figure 8-40.

Filleting the Edges of the Base FeatureAfter creating the base feature you will fillet the lower edges of the base feature.

1. Invoke the Fillet PropertyManager, rotate the model, and select the edges of the basefeature as shown in Figure 8-41.

c08-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 11:54 AM25


Figure 8-43 Face to be selected Figure 8-44 Shell feature added to the model

2. Set the value of the radius spinner to 2.5 and choose the OK button from the FilletPropertyManager.

The model after filleting the edges of the model is shown in Figure 8-42.

Shelling the ModelAfter creating the fillet feature, you need to shell the model using the Shell tool.

1. Orient the model in the isometric view and invoke the Shell PropertyManager.

2. Select the top planar face of the model as shown in Figure 8-43.

3. Set the value of the Thickness spinner to 1 and choose the OK button from the ShellPropertyManager.

The model after adding the shell feature is shown in Figure 8-44.

Figure 8-41 Edges to be selected Figure 8-42 Fillet added to the model

c08-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 11:54 AM26


Figure 8-45 Editing handles for editing the base feature

Dynamically Editing the FeaturesAfter creating and shelling the base of the model you will learn how to edit the featuresdynamically using the Move/Size Features tool.

1. Choose the Move/Size Features button from the Features toolbar to invoke thedynamic dragging tool.

2. Select the right planar face of the base feature from the drawing area. The selected facewill be highlighted in green. The sketch of the selected feature is also displayed in thedrawing area along with various editing handles as shown in Figure 8-45.

3. Select the Resize handle from the drawing area and drag the cursor to resize the feature.

The preview of the resized feature and the dimension of the feature is displayed in thedrawing area. As you drag the cursor the preview and the dimension updates automatically.

4. Release the left mouse button after dragging the feature to some distance.

Figure 8-46 shows the preview of the dragged feature. Figure 8-47 shows the edited feature.

5. Select the Move/Size Features button again to disable the dynamic editing tool and click

Tip. You can also select the feature to be edited from the FeatureManager DesignTree.

If you want to edit the sketches using the Move/Size Features tool, then you needto select the Override Dimension option by choosing Tools > Sketch Settings >Override Dims on Drag/Move from the menu bar. If a check mark is displayed atthe left of this option in the menu bar, then the option is already selected.

c08-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 11:54 AM27


anywhere in the drawing area to clear all the selections from the selection set.

You have edited the model by dynamically dragging, the feature needs to have the requireddimension of 35mm. Therefore, now you will again edit the feature to retain the depth ofthe feature.

6. Double-click the base feature in the FeatureManager Design Tree or from the drawingarea. All the dimensions of the feature are displayed in the drawing area.

7. Double-click the dimension that reflects the depth of the base feature.

8. The Modify dialog box will be displayed. Set the value of the Dimension spinner to 35and press the ENTER key from the keyboard.

9. Choose the Rebuild button from the Standard toolbar or choose CTRL+B from thekeyboard to rebuild the model.

Using the Cut-Extrude, Fillet, and Linear Pattern tools create the remaining features ofthe model. The model after creating the features using these tools is displayed inFigure 8-48.

Creating the Standoffs of the ModelAfter creating all the features of the model, you need to create the standoffs of the model.It is created by extruding a sketch created on a sketch plane at an offset distance from theTop plane. You also need to specify a draft angle while creating this feature.

1. Create a reference plane at an offset distance of 10.5mm from the Top plane. You need toselect the Reverse direction check box from the Plane PropertyManager.

2. Select the newly created sketching plane and create the sketch of the standoff and applythe required relations and dimensions. The sketch consists of a circle of diameter 1mm.For more dimensions refer to Figure 8-38.

Figure 8-46 Dragging the Resize handle Figure 8-47 Resultant edited feature

c08-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 11:54 AM28


Figure 8-48 Model after creating other features

Figure 8-49 Rotated and zoom view of the model

3. Extrude the sketch using the Up To Next option with an outward draft angle of 10-degree.Hide the newly created plane.

4. Rotate the model and add a fillet of radius 0.25 to the extruded feature.

The rotated and zoom view of complete standoff is displayed in Figure 8-49.

c08-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 11:54 AM29



5. Pattern the extruded and filleted feature using the Linear Pattern tool. The isometricview of the final model is shown in Figure 8-50. The FeatureManager Design Tree of themodel is shown in Figure 8-51.


c08-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 11:54 AM30






Tutorial 2In this tutorial you will create the model shown in Figure 8-52. After creating the model youwill edit the model with Move/Size Features option selected. The views and dimensions of themodel are shown in Figure 8-53. (Expected time: 45 min)


a. Create the base feature of the model by revolving the sketch along the central axis of thesketch, refer to Figures 8-54 and 8-55.

b. Create the sketch of the second feature on the top face of the base feature and extrude it to the given distance, refer to Figures 8-56 and 8-57.

c. Create the revolve cut feature, refer to Figures 8-58 and 8-59.d. Create the holes using the Simple Hole tool and pattern the hole using the Circular

Pattern tool, refer to Figure 8-59.e. Create a drilled hole feature using the Hole Wizard tool, refer to Figure 8-59.f. Mirror the hole feature along the Right plane, refer to Figure 8-59.g. Create the fillet feature, refer to Figure 8-59.

Figure 8-52 The dimetric view of the model for Tutorial 1

c08-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 11:54 AM31


Creating the Base FeatureFirst, you will create the base feature of the model by revolving the sketch created on theFront plane.



3. Invoke the Revolve PropertyManager.

Since the default value in the Angle spinner is the same as required, therefore you do notneed to set any parameters in this PropertyManager.


c08-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 11:54 AM32


4. Choose the OK button from the Revolve PropertyManager.

The base feature created after revolving the sketch is shown in Figure 8-55.

Creating the Second FeatureThe second feature of this model is an extruded feature. This feature is created by extrudinga sketch created on the top planar face of the base feature.

1. Select the top planar face of the base feature and invoke the sketching environment.

2. Create the sketch of the second feature and apply the required relations and dimensionsto the sketch as shown in Figure 8-56. Make sure the sketch is symmetrical about the axis.If it is not, the sketch will not be properly mirrored.

Figure 8-55 Dimetric view of the base featureFigure 8-54 Sketch for the base feature

Figure 8-56 Sketch for the second feature

c08-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 11:54 AM33


Figure 8-57 Second feature added to the model

3. Extrude the sketch to a distance of 75mm.

The isometric view of the model after creating the second feature is displayed inFigure 8-57. Make sure the skectch is symmetrical about the axis. If it is not, the sketchwill not be properly mirrored.

Creating the Third FeatureThe third feature of the model is created by revolving a sketch using the cut option. Thesketch for this feature will be created on the Front plane.

1. Select the Front plane and invoke the sketching environment.

2. Create the sketch for the revolve cut feature and apply the required relations anddimensions to the sketch as shown in Figure 8-58.

3. Invoke the Cut-Extrude PropertyManager and create a revolved cut feature by specifyingan angle on 360-degree.

Creating the Remaining Features1. Create the other features of the model by referring to Figure 8-53.

The isometric view of the model after creating all the other features is displayed inFigure 8-59.

c08-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 11:54 AM34


Figure 8-58 Sketch for the revolve cut feature

Editing the Sketch of the Model With the Move/Size Features OptionActive

After creating the model, you will edit the sketch of the second feature with the Move/Size Features option active. Therefore, before proceeding further you have to invoke thisoption.

1. Choose the Move/Size Features button from the Features toolbar to invoke theMove/Size Features option.


c08-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 11:54 AM35


Figure 8-60 Sketch and the preview of the second feature

2. Select the second feature from the drawing area and right-click to invoke the shortcutmenu.

3. Choose the Edit Sketch option from the shortcut menu.

The sketch of the second feature with the preview of the feature in temporary graphics isdisplayed in the drawing area as shown in Figure 8-60.

Now, you will modify the sketch by dragging the sketch entities. You will observe that thepreview of the second feature that is displayed in temporary graphics is also modified.

4. Choose Tools > Sketch Settings > Override Dims on Drag/Move option from the menubar, if it is not selected.

5. Select the centerpoint of the right arc of sketch and drag the cursor towards the right. Asyou drag the cursor the preview of the feature is also modified dynamically. Release theleft mouse button. The new dimension appears on the sketch. Continue this process untilthe value of the distance between the center of the arcs shows a value close to 135.

Figure 8-61 shows the sketch being dragged. Figure 8-62 shows the final dragged sketch.

After modifying the sketch by dragging, now you will retain the previous dimensions.

5. Double-click the linear dimension and enter 75 in the Modify edit box and press theENTER key.

Similarly, edit the other two dimensions using the Modify edit box.

c08-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 11:54 AM36


Figure 8-61 Dragging the sketch Figure 8-62 Sketch after dragging

6. Use CTRL+B from the keyboard to rebuild the model.

The FeatureManager Design Tree of the model is shown in Figure 8-63.

Saving the ModelNow, you need to save the model.





c08-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 11:54 AM37



Tutorial 3In this tutorial you will create the model shown in Figure 8-64. While creating the model youwill also perform some editing operations to the model. The views and dimensions of themodel are displayed in Figure 8-65. (Expected time: 45min)


a. Create a base feature of the model by revolving the sketch created on the Front plane,refer to Figures 8-66 and 8-67.

b. Shell the model using the Shell tool, refer to Figure 8-68c. Create the sketch on the Top plane and extrude it to the given distance, refer to Figure 8-69.d. Pattern the extrude feature using the Circular Pattern tool, refer to Figure 8-70.e. Edit the circular pattern, refer to Figure 8-71.f. Create a cut feature on the top planar face of the base feature, refer to Figure 8-72.g. Pattern the cut feature using the Linear Pattern tool, refer to Figure 8-73.h. Unsuppress the suppressed features and create the remaining features of the model.

refer to Figures 8-74 and 8-75.

Creating the Base FeatureFirst, you need to create the base feature of the model by revolving the sketch created onthe Front plane.


c08-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 11:54 AM38



3. Using the Revolve tool create the base feature of the model. The base feature of themodel is shown in Figure 8-67.

Shelling the Base FeatureAfter creating the base feature, you need to shell the model using the Shell tool. You willalso remove the bottom face of the base feature, leaving behind a thin walled model.

1. Invoke the Shell PropertyManager and set the value of the Thickness spinner to 2.5 mm.

2. Rotate the model and select the bottom face of the model to remove.


c08-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 11:54 AM39


Figure 8-68 Shell feature added to the model

3. Choose the OK button from the Shell PropertyManager. The shelled model is displayedin Figure 8-68.

Creating the Third FeatureAfter adding the shell feature to the model, you need to create the third feature of themodel, which is an extruded feature. The sketch for this feature will be created on theTop plane.


2. Orient the model in the top view using the View toolbar.

Figure 8-66 Sketch for the base feature Figure 8-67 Base feature of the model

c08-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 11:54 AM40


Figure 8-69 Sketch of the third feature

3. Create the sketch of the third feature and add the required relations and dimensions tothe sketch as shown in Figure 8-69.

4. Extrude the sketch to the a depth of 5mm.

Patterning the Third FeatureAfter creating the third feature of the model, you need to pattern this feature. This featurewill be patterned using the Circular Pattern tool. Before proceeding further you need todisplay the temporary axis. The central temporary axis of the model will be selected aspattern axis.

1. Choose View > Temporary Axes from the menu bar to display the temporary axis.

2. Invoke the Circular Pattern PropertyManager and select the central axis of the model asthe pattern axis.

3. Select the third feature created earlier from the drawing area. The preview of the patternfeature is displayed in the drawing area.

4. Set the value of the Number of Instances spinner to 5 and choose OK from the CircularPattern PropertyManager.

5. Choose View > Temporary Axes from the menu bar to remove the temporary axis fromthe current display.

The model after creating the pattern feature is displayed in Figure 8-70.

c08-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 11:54 AM41


Editing the Pattern FeatureThe pattern created is not the same as required, refer to Figure 8-65. As a result you needto edit the pattern feature.

1. Select CirPattern1 from the FeatureManager Design Tree or select any one of the patterninstance other than the parent instance from the drawing area. Right-click and choosethe Edit Definition option from the shortcut menu.

The CirPattern1 PropertyManager is displayed. Presently, the number of instances inthe pattern feature is 5, but the required number of instances is 3. Therefore, you will editthe number of instances.

2. Set the value of the Number of Instances spinner to 3 and choose the OK button fromthe FeatureManager Design Tree.

The model after editing the features is shown in Figure 8-71.

Suppressing the FeaturesAs discussed earlier, sometimes you may need to suppress some features to reduce thecomplications in the model. The suppressed features are actually not deleted; their displayis just turned off. When you suppress a feature, the child features associated with thatfeature are also suppressed.

1. Select the Extrude1 feature, which is the third feature of the model, from theFeatureManager Design Tree. Right-click and choose the Suppress option from theshortcut menu.

Figure 8-70 Pattern feature added to the model

c08-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 11:54 AM42


Figure 8-71 The edited pattern feature

The circular pattern feature is the child feature of the extrude feature, therefore, it is alsosuppressed. Both the features are not displayed in the drawing area. The Extrude1 andthe CirPattern1 features are displayed in gray in the FeatureManager Design Tree,indicating that both the features are suppressed.

Creating the Cut FeatureThe next feature that you are going to create is a cut feature. The sketch for this featurewill be created on the top planar face of the base feature.

1. Select the top planar face of the base feature as the sketching plane and invoke the sketchingenvironment.

2. Create the sketch of the cut feature and add the required relations and dimensions to thesketch as shown in Figure 8-72.

3. Invoke the Cut-Extrude PropertyManager and extrude the sketch using the ThroughAll option.

4. Choose the OK button from the Cut-Extrude PropertyManager.

c08-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 11:54 AM43


Figure 8-73 Model after patterning the cut feature

5. Now, using the Linear Pattern tool create a linear pattern of the cut feature. You canselect the dimension 18 as the directional reference. The model after creating the linearpattern is shown in Figure 8-73.

6. Create the other features of the model. For dimensions, refer to Figure 8-65. The modelafter creating the other features is shown in Figure 8-74.


c08-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 11:54 AM44


Unsuppressing the FeaturesAfter completing the model, you need to unsuppress the features that you suppressedearlier.

1. Press and hold down the CTRL key from the keyboard and select the suppressed featuresfrom the FeatureManager Design Tree.

NoteIf you select only the parent suppressed feature and unsuppress it then the child feature will notbe unsuppressed. Therefore, you have to select the parent feature and the suppressed child features.

Instead of selecting all the features from the FeatureManager Design Tree select only theparent feature and choose Edit > Unsuppress with Dependents > All Configurations fromthe menu bar. You will learn more about the configurations in the later chapters.

If you unsuppress the child feature then the parent feature will be unsuppressed automatically.

2. Right-click and choose the Unsuppress option from the shortcut menu.

The suppressed features will be restored in the model. The final model after unsuppressingthe features is shown in Figure 8-75. The FeatureManager Design Tree of the model isshown in Figure 8-76.

Saving the ModelNow, you need to save the model.



Figure 8-74 Model after creating other features.

c08-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 11:54 AM45




1. You cannot edit the sketch of a sketched feature. (T/F)

Figure 8-75 The final model


c08-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 11:54 AM46


2. The Edit Definition option is used to edit any feature. (T/F)

3. You cannot rename the feature in the FeatureManager Design Tree. (T/F)

4. You cannot edit the sketch plane of the sketch of a sketched feature. (T/F)

5. Using the Move/ Size Features option you cannot edit the sketches. (T/F)

6. The __________ dialog box is displayed when you edit a dimension.

7. The process of changing the position of a feature in the FeatureManager Design Tree isknown as __________.

8. Using __________ PropertyManager you can delete the bodies.

9. The __________ PropertyManager is used to move or copy the bodies.

10. The __________ dialog box is displayed when there is any error in a feature.


1. The __________ PropertyManager is invoked to delete a body.

2. You can rotate a body using __________ PropertyManager.

3. __________ key is used from the keyboard to copy a feature or a sketch.

4. The __________ key is used from the keyboard to cut a feature or sketch.

5. When __________ tool is active then the preview of the feature is displayed in temporarygraphics while editing the sketches.

6. The __________ PropertyManager is displayed to edit the sketch plane of a sketch.

7. To add the selected feature in a new folder choose Add to New Folder from the shortcutmenu. (T/F)

8. For reordering the features, select the feature in the FeatureManager Design Tree anddrag the feature to the required position. (T/F)

9. The Modify dialog box is invoked using a single click on the dimension to modify. (T/F)

10. If you want to modify the sketch by dragging the fully or partially defined sketch theOverride Dims on Drag/Move option should be selected. (T/F)

c08-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 11:54 AM47



EXERCISES

Exercise 1Create the model that is shown in section in Figure 8-77. The dimensions of the model arealso given in the same figure. The complete model is shown in Figure 8-78.


c08-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 11:54 AM48






c08-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 11:54 AM49


Answer to Self-Evaluation Test1. F, 2. T, 3. F, 4. F, 5. F, 6. Modify, 7. Reordering, 8. Delete Body, 9. Move/Copy Body, 10.Rebuild Errors


c08-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 11:54 AM50

Chapter 9

Advanced ModelingTools-III

After completing this chapter you will be able to:• Create Sweep Feature.• Create Loft Feature.• Create 3D Sketches.• Edit 3D Sketches.• Create Curves.• Create Draft Feature.

Learning Objectives

c09-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:46 PM1


ADVANCED MODELING TOOLSSome of the advanced modeling tools were discussed in earlier chapters. The remainingadvanced modeling tool are discussed in this chapter. The advanced modeling tools that arediscussed in this chapter include sweep, loft, draft, extruding the text, curves, 3D sketches,and so on.

Creating the Sweep Feature

One of the most important advanced modeling tool is the Sweep tool. This tool isused to extrude a closed profile along an open or closed path. Therefore, to create asweep feature you need at least two sketches. The first sketch is the section for the

sweep feature and the second section is the path along which the section will be swept. Anexample of the sketches for creating the sweep feature is shown in Figure 9-1. Choose theSweep button from the Features toolbar to invoke the Sweep PropertyManager. You can alsoinvoke this tool by choosing Insert > Bose/Base > Sweep from the menu bar. The SweepPropertyManager is shown in Figure 9-2.

After invoking the Sweep PropertyManager, you are prompted to select the sweep profile.Select from the drawing area the sketch that is created as the profile for the sweep feature. Assoon as you select the sketch, the sketch is highlighted in green and the profile callout isdisplayed. Now, you are prompted to select the path for the sweep feature. Select the sketchthat is created as the path of the sweep feature. When you select the sketch, it is highlighted inred and the path callout is displayed in the drawing area. The sweep feature is displayed intemporary graphics in the drawing area. Choose the OK button from the SweepPropertyManager to end feature creation. Figure 9-3 shows a sweep feature.

Toolbar: Features > SweepMenu: Insert > Bose/Base > Sweep

Figure 9-1 Sketches to create a sweep feature

c09-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:46 PM2

Advanced Modeling Tools-III 9-3

Figure 9-2 The Sweep PropertyManager

Figure 9-3 Sweep feature

It is not necessary that the sketch created for the profile of the sweep feature intersect thesketch created for the path of the sweep feature. However, the plane on which the profile isdrawn should lie at one of the endpoints of the path. Figure 9-4 shows the nonintersectingsketches of profile and path. Figure 9-5 shows the resultant sweep feature. Figure 9-6 showsthe sketch of the profile and the closed path. Figure 9-7 shows the resultant sweep feature.

c09-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:46 PM3


The various other options available in the Sweep PropertyManager to create advanced sweepfeatures are discussed next.

Sweep Using the Follow Path and Keep Normal Constant optionsWhen you are creating a sweep feature, by default, the Follow Path option is selected in theOrientation/Twist Control drop-down list available in the Options rollout. When you createa sweep feature using this option, the section will follow the path to create the sweep feature.If you select the Keep normal constant option from the Orientation/Twist Control drop-downlist, the section will be swept along the path with a normal constraint. The section will notchange its orientation along the sweep path. Therefore, the starting face and the end face ofthe sweep feature will be parallel. Figure 9-8 shows the sketches of the path and profile for thesketch feature. Figure 9-9 shows the sweep feature created using the Follow Path option.Figure 9-10 shows the sweep feature created using the Keep normal constant option. Theother options available in the Orientation/Twist Control drop-down list are discussed later inthis chapter.

Figure 9-4 Nonintersecting sketches of profile andpath

Figure 9-5 The resultant sweep feature

Figure 9-6 Sketch of the profile and the closed path Figure 9-7 The resultant sweep feature

c09-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:46 PM4


Maintain TangencyThe Maintain Tangency check box is available in the Orientation/Twist Type area of theOptions rollout. This option is used when the sweep section has tangent entities and youwant the corresponding surfaces to be tangent in the resultant sweep feature.

Figure 9-7 Sweep feature with the Follow Pathoption selected from the Orientation/TwistControl drop-down list

Figure 9-10 Sweep feature with the Keepnormal constant option selected from theOrientation/Twist Control drop-down list

Tip. The model edges can also be selected as a path for creating the sweep feature.When you select a model edge as the sweep path, the Tangent Propagation checkbox is displayed in the Options rollout. If this check box is selected, the edgestangent to the selected edge are selected automatically as the path of the sweepfeature.

Figure 9-8 Sketches for the sweep feature

c09-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:46 PM5


Figure 9-11 Sketches for the sweep feature

Advanced SmoothingThe Advanced smoothing check box is available in the Orientation/Twist Type area of theOptions rollout. This option is used if the sweep section has circular or elliptical arcs and youwant a smooth surface to be created in the sweep feature.

Show PreviewThe Show preview check box available in the Options rollout is used to display the preview ofthe sweep feature in the drawing area. This check box is selected by default. If you clear thischeck box, the preview of the sweep feature will not be displayed in the drawing area.

Merge ResultsThe Merge results check box is available only when you have at least one feature in thecurrent document. This check box is selected by default. If you clear this check box, it willresult in creating the sweep feature as a separate body.

Align with End FacesThe Align with end faces option is available in the Options rollout only when at least onefeature has already been created in the current document. When this option is selected, thesweep feature is extended or trimmed to align with end faces. Figure 9-11 shows the profileand path for creating the sweep feature. Figure 9-12 shows the resultant sweep feature createdwith the Align with end faces check box cleared. Figure 9-13 shows the resultant sweepfeature created with the Align with end faces check box selected.

NoteIf the sweep feature does not merge, you need to reduce the size of the profile.

c09-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:46 PM6


Figure 9-12 Resultant sweep feature with theAlign with end faces check box cleared

Figure 9-13 Resultant sweep feature with theAlign with end faces check box selected

Sweep with Guide CurvesThe sweep using guide curves is the most important option in the Advanced Modeling tools.In this sweep feature, the section of the sweep profile varies according to the guide curvesalong the sweep path. To create this type of feature, you need to create the sketch of theprofile, path, and the guide curves. A Pierce relation must be applied between the guidecurves and the profile of the sweep feature. The Pierce relation allows the profile to changeshape and size along the sweep path. After creating the sketch of profile, path, and guidecurves, invoke the Sweep PropertyManager. Select the sketches of the profile and the path;the preview of the sweep feature is displayed in the drawing area. Click on the black arrow onthe right of the Guide Curves rollout to open this rollout. The Guide Curves rollout is shownin Figure 9-14.

Select the sketch of the guide curve; the selected guide curve is displayed in brown and aGuide Curve callout is also displayed attached to the guide curve. The preview of the sweepfeature is also displayed in the drawing area in temporary graphics. Choose the OK buttonfrom the Sweep PropertyManager. Figure 9-15 shows the sketch for the sweep feature withguide curve. Figure 9-16 shows the resultant sweep feature creation.

In the previous case the path of the sweep feature is a straight line and the guide curve is an

Figure 9-14 The Guide Curves PropertyManager

c09-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:46 PM7


Figure 9-17 Sketches for the sweep feature Figure 9-18 Resultant sweep feature

arc. In the next case, the arc is selected as the path of the sweep feature and the straight lineis selected as the guide curve. Figure 9-17 shows the sketches for the sweep feature. Figure 9-18shows the resultant sweep feature.

Move Up and Move DownThe Move Up button and the Move Down button available on the left of the GuideCurves display area are used to change the sequence of the selected guide curve.

Merge smooth facesThe Merge smooth faces check box available in the Guide Curves rollout is selected bydefault. This option is used to merge all the smooth faces together, resulting in a smoothsweep feature. When you clear this check box, the Sweep Preview Warning dialog box isdisplayed as shown in Figure 9-19. In this dialog box you are prompted that the featureyou are creating may fail because of change in smooth face option. Choose Yes from thisdialog box if you want to accept the change option. When you create a sweep feature withguide curves and this option cleared, the resulting feature do not merge the smooth faces

Figure 9-15 Sketches for the sweep feature withguide curves

Figure 9-16 Resultant sweep feature

c09-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:46 PM8


Figure 9-19 The Sweep Preview Warning dialog box

Figure 9-20 Sweep feature with the Merge smoothfaces check box selected

Figure 9-21 Sweep feature with the Mergesmooth faces check box cleared

together. This results in a sweep feature with noncontinuous curvature surface. Figure 9-20shows a sweep feature created with the Merge smooth faces check box selected. Figure 9-21shows the same sweep feature with the Merge smooth faces check box cleared.

NoteRemember that the if you create the sweep feature with the Merge smooth faces check boxcleared, the resultant feature will be generated faster and the adjacent faces and edges are easilymerged. Also the lines and arcs in the guide curve match accurately while creating the sweepfeature.

Show SectionsThe Show Sections button available in the Guide Curves rollout is used to display theintermediate sections while creating the sweep feature with guide curves. To display theintermediate profiles or sections along the sweep path, choose the Show Section buttonfrom the Guide Curves rollout. The Section Number spinner is invoked. Using thisspinner you can view the sections of the profile along the sweep path. Figure 9-22 showsa section being displayed using the Show Section tool along the sweep path.

Sweep Feature Using the Follow Path and 1st Guide Curve OptionWhen you create a sweep feature with guide curve using the Follow path and 1st guide curveoption, the profile follows the path and the 1st guide curve to create the feature. For creating

c09-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:46 PM9


a sweep feature using this option invoke the Sweep PropertyManager and select the profile,path, and guide curve(s). By default, the Follow path option is selected in the Orientation/Twist Control drop-down list. Select the Follow path and 1st guide curve option from theOrientation/Twist Control drop-down list. Choose the OK button from the SweepPropertyManager to end feature creation.

Sweep Feature Using the Follow 1st and 2nd Guide Curves OptionUsing this option, the profile of the sweep feature follows the 1st and 2nd guide curves tocreate the resultant sweep feature. For creating this type of sweep feature select the Follow 1stand 2nd guide curves option from the Orientation/Twist Control drop-down list. Choosethe OK button from the Sweep PropertyManager to end feature creation.

Figure 9-23 shows the sketches of the profile, path, and guide curves for creating a sweepfeature. Figure 9-24 shows the sweep feature created using the Follow path and 1st guidecurves option. Figure 9-25 shows the sweep feature created using the Follow 1st and 2ndguide curves option.

Start/End TangencyThe Start/End Tangency rollout available in the Sweep PropertyManager is used to definethe tangency conditions on the start and the end of the feature. This rollout is invoked byclicking one of the arrow provided on the right of the rollout. The Start/End Tangency rolloutis displayed in Figure 9-26. The various options available in the Start/End Tangency rolloutare discussed next.

Start tangency typeThe Start tangency type drop-down list is used to specify the options to define the tangencyat the start of the sweep feature. The various options available in this drop-down list arediscussed next.

Figure 9-22 Section being displayed using the Show Section tool

c09-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:46 PM10


Figure 9-23 Sketches or profile, path, and guide curves

Figure 9-24 Sweep feature using the Follow pathand 1st guide curve option

Figure 9-25 Sweep feature using the Follow1st and 2nd guide curves option

Figure 9-26 The Start/End Tangency rollout

NoneThe None option is selected by default and is used to create a sweep feature withoutapplying any start tangency.

c09-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:46 PM11


Figure 9-27 Profile, path, and references for tangency using theDirection Vector option

Path TangentThe Path Tangent option is used to maintain the sweep feature normal to the path atthe start.

Direction VectorWhen you use the Direction Vector option, the starting of the sweep feature will betangent to a virtual normal created from the selected entity. When you select thisoption a display area is also displayed and you need to select a linear edge, axis,planar face, or plane.

All FacesThe All Faces option is used to sweep the feature tangent to the adjoining faces ofthe existing geometry at the start. This option is available only when the sweep featureis attached to a surface or existing feature or geometry.

The options available in the End tangency type drop-down list are the same asthose discussed above. The only difference is that the options in this drop-down listare applied to the end of the sweep feature. Figure 9-27 shows the sketches and thereferences to create the sweep feature with start and end tangency using the DirectionVector option. Figure 9-28 shows the resultant sweep feature.

Creating a Thin Sweep FeatureYou can also create a thin sweep feature by specifying the thickness using the Thin Featurerollout. This rollout is invoked by selecting the check box provided at the left of the ThinFeatures rollout. The Thin Features rollout is shown in Figure 9-29. The options available inthis rollout are the same as those discussed in the earlier chapters in which extruding andrevolving thin features have been discussed. Figure 9-30 shows a thin sweep feature.

c09-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:46 PM12


Figure 9-28 Resultant sweep feature


Figure 9-30 Thin sweep feature

c09-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:46 PM13


Creating Cut Sweep Features

You can also remove material from an existing feature or model using the sweep feature. Tocreate a cut-sweep feature, choose Insert > Cut > Sweep from the menu bar to invoke theCut-Sweep PropertyManager as shown in Figure 9-31. The options available in the Cut-SweepPropertyManager are the same as those discussed in the Sweep PropertyManager with theonly difference being that it is meant for cut operation. Figure 9-32 shows the sketched profileand path. Figure 9-33 shows the resultant sweep feature created using the Cut-SweepPropertyManager.

Figure 9-31 The Cut-Sweep PropertyManager

Menu: Insert > Cut > Sweep

Tip. As discussed earlier, the Pierce relation should be applied between the profileand the guide curves. If the profile consists of a line or an arc then the coincidentrelation will also serve the purpose of the Pierce relation. If the profile is createdusing spline or ellipse then you have to apply the Pierce relation.

c09-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:46 PM14


Figure 9-32 Sketches for the cut sweep feature

Creating the Loft Feature

The lofted features are created by blending more than one similar or dissimilargeometries together to get a free form type of shape. These similar or dissimilargeometries may or may not be parallel to each other. The sketches for lofts should be

closed sketches.

Figure 9-33 Resultant cut sweep feature

Toolbar: Features > LoftMenu: Insert > Bose/Base > Loft

c09-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:46 PM15


In SolidWorks, the loft features are created using the Loft PropertyManager. The LoftPropertyManager is invoked by choosing the Loft button from the Features toolbar or bychoosing Insert > Boss/Base > Loft from the menu bar. The Loft PropertyManager is shownin Figure 9-34.

After creating the sketches when you invoke the Loft PropertyManager, you are prompted toselect at least two profiles. Select the profiles from the drawing area. As you select the profiles,the preview of the loft feature is displayed in the drawing area in temporary graphics. Choosethe OK button from the Loft PropertyManager to end feature creation.

Figure 9-34 The Loft PropertyManager

c09-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:46 PM16


Figure 9-35 Three sketches for the loft feature Figure 9-36 Resultant loft feature

NoteThe geometry and the shape of the loft feature depends on the sequence of selection and theselection point of the sketches.

Figures 9-35 and 9-37 show the sequence and the selection point for selecting the sections tocreate a loft feature. Figures 9-36 and 9-38 show the resultant loft features.

Start/End TangencyThe Start/End Tangency rollout available in the Loft PropertyManager is used to define thetangency at the start and end sections of the loft feature. This rollout is invoked by clickingonce on the black arrow provided at the left of this rollout. By default, the None option isselected. This means that tangency is not applied to the loft feature. The other options availablein this rollout are discussed next.

Normal to ProfileThe Normal to Profile option is used to define the tangency normal to profile. When youinvoke this option, you are provided with a spinner to specify the length of tangent. A

Figure 9-37 Sketches for the loft feature Figure 9-38 Resultant loft feature

c09-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:46 PM17


Figure 9-39 The Start/End Tangency rollout with the Normal to Profile option selected

Figure 9-40 The Start/End Tangency rollout with the Direction Vector option selected

Reverse Direction button is also provided to flip the direction of tangent. The Start/EndTangency rollout with Normal to Profile options selected in the Start Tangency Typeand the End Tangency Type drop-down list is shown in Figure 9-39.

Direction VectorThe Direction Vector option is used to define the tangency at the start and at the end ofthe loft feature by defining a direction vector. When you invoke this option you are providedwith the Direction Vector display area and the spinners to define the length of tangents.You need to select the direction vectors to specify the tangent at the start and at the endof the loft feature. You can also specify the length of the tangents using the spinnersprovided in the Start/End Tangent rollout. The Start/End Tangent rollout with theDirection Vector option selected is displayed in Figure 9-40.

Figure 9-41 shows the section for the loft feature. Figure 9-42 shows the initial preview ofthe loft feature. Figure 9-43 shows the preview of the loft feature with tangent at the startof the loft. Figure 9-44 shows the tangent at the start and at the end of the loft. Figure 9-45shows the final loft feature.

c09-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:46 PM18


Figure 9-41 Sections, selection points, and sequence of selection

Figure 9-42 Preview of the loft feature Figure 9-43 Tangent applied at the start

Figure 9-44 Tangent applied at start and end Figure 9-45 The final loft feature

c09-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:46 PM19


Guide CurvesYou can also define the guide curve between the profiles of the loft feature to define the pathof transition of the loft feature. The sketches created for the guide curve must have a piercerelation with the sketches that define the loft section. All the other options available in theGuide Curves rollout are the same as those discussed earlier. The Guide Curves rollout isdisplayed in Figure 9-46.

Figure 9-47 shows the profiles and the guide curves for creating a loft feature with guidecurves. Figure 9-48 shows the resultant loft feature created using the guide curves.

OptionsThe Options rollout of the Loft PropertyManager is provided with many options to improvethe creation of the loft feature. All the options available in this rollout are the same asthose discussed earlier while discussing the sweep option. An additional option provided inthis rollout is discussed next.

Figure 9-46 The Guide Curves rollout

Tip. You can also define the tangent length dynamically by dragging the red arrowsprovided at the start and at the end of the loft feature. As you drag the arrow thepreview of the tangent and the value in the spinner modify dynamically.

Figure 9-47 Profiles and guide curves Figure 9-48 Resultant loft feature

c09-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:46 PM20


Figure 9-49 Loft feature with the Close Loftcheck box cleared

Figure 9-50 Loft feature with the Close loftcheck box selected

Close LoftThe Close loft option is used to created a close loft feature. A closed loft feature is createdby joining the end section with the start section of the loft feature. Figure 9-49 shows a loftfeature created with the Close loft check box cleared. Figure 9-50 shows the loft featurecreated with the Close loft check box selected.

Centerline ParametersThe Centerline Parameters rollout is used to create a loft feature by blending two or morethan two sections along a specified path. The path that specifies the transition is calledcenterline. You can invoke this rollout by clicking once on the arrow provided at the right ofthis rollout. The Centerline Parameters rollout is displayed in Figure 9-51.The various options available in this rollout are discussed next.

CenterlineAfter invoking the Centerline Parameters rollout you need to define the centerline.Therefore, select the sketch that defines the centerline for the loft feature. The name ofthe sketch will be displayed in the Centerline display area.

Figure 9-51 The Centerline Parameters rollout

c09-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:46 PM21


Number of sectionsThe Number of sections slider bar provided in the Centerline Parameters rollout isused to define the number of intermediate sections. These intermediate sections definethe accuracy and the smoothness of the surfaces generated to create the loft feature.

The Show Sections button and the Section Number spinner available in the CenterlineParameters rollout are used to display the intermediate sections as discussed earlier.Figure 9-52 shows the sketches of the profiles and the centerline used to create the loftfeature. Figure 9-53 shows the resultant loft feature.

You can also create a thin loft feature by defining the thin parameters using the Thin Featurerollout. Figure 9-54 shows a thin loft feature created using the Thin Features rollout availablein the Loft PropertyManager.

The Cut Loft PropertyManager is used to create a cut loft feature. This option is invoked bychoosing Insert > Cut > Loft from the menu bar.

Figure 9-52 Sketches of profiles and thecenterline

Figure 9-53 The resultant loft feature

Tip. Create a loft feature such that one profile is created using the circle and theother is created using a polygon. Since, circles and ellipses do not have any endpointand the polygons do have endpoints, the loft feature will blend the polygon andcircle or ellipse approximately. But for better accuracy for blending you can splitthe sketch using the Split Curve option. After splitting the circle or ellipse, you cancreate a more accurate loft feature.

c09-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:46 PM22


Figure 9-54 A thin loft feature

Creating 3D Sketches

In previous chapters you have learned how to create 2D sketches. In this chapteryou will learn how to create 3D sketches. The 3D sketches are used to create 3D pathsfor the sweep features, 3D curves, and so on. Figure 9-55 shows a chair frame created

by sweeping a profile along a 3D path.

Toolbar: Sketch > 3DSketchMenu: Insert > 3D Sketch

Figure 9-55 A chair frame created by sweeping a profile along a 3D path

c09-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:46 PM23


To create a 3D sketch choose the 3D Sketch button from the Sketch toolbar or choose Insert> 3D Sketch from the menu bar. When you choose this option, the 3D sketching environmentis invoked and the origin is displayed in red color. For creating a 3D sketch, you do not needto select a sketching plane. When you invoke the 3D sketching environment some of thesketching tools are activated in the Sketch Tools toolbar. You can use only some of the sketchingtools in the 3D sketching environment. The sketching tools that can be used in the 3D sketchingenvironment are discussed next.

LineFor creating lines in the 3D sketching environment, first you have to orient the drawingarea in the isometric view. Choose the Isometric button from the Standard Viewstoolbar to orient the drawing area to isometric. Now, choose the Line button from the

Sketching Tools toolbar to invoke the line tool. The select cursor will be replaced by the linecursor with XY displayed at the bottom of the line cursor. This means that the sketch will becreated in the XY plane by default. You can toggle between the planes using the TAB keyfrom the keyboard. Move the cursor to the origin to start the sketch or to the location fromwhere you want to start the sketching. Press and hold down the left mouse button at thislocation and you are provided with a space handle. The space handle includes a coordinatesystem in the current plane.

If you toggle the plane using the TAB key then the coordinate system will change with respectto the current plane. Now, drag the cursor to a location where you want to define the endpointof the line. Release the left mouse button at this location. Once you complete sketching thefirst line, move the cursor to the endpoint of the line created earlier. When the line cursorturns yellow in color, toggle the plane using the TAB key. Drag the cursor to create anotherline. Figures 9-56 through 9-58 show sketching in different planes in the 3D sketchingenvironment.

Figure 9-56 Sketching in the XY plane Figure 9-57 Sketching in the YZ plane

c09-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:46 PM24


Figure 9-58 Sketching in the ZX plane

Figure 9-59 shows an example of a 3D sketch.

SplineYou can also create a spline in the 3D sketching environment. To create a 3D splinechoose the Spline button from the Sketching Tools toolbar. The select cursor will bereplaced by the spline cursor. Move the cursor to the desired location from where you

want to start the sketching. Specify the start point of the spline; the space handle is displayed.You can toggle between the planes using the TAB key. Move the cursor where you want tospecify the second point of spline and specify the second point of spline. As you specify thesecond point of spline, the space handle will be displayed and you toggle between the planesusing the TAB key. After creating the spline, right-click and choose the Select option fromthe shortcut menu to end spline creation. Figure 9-60 shows a power cord with a knot; thecable of the power cord is created using the spline in the 3D sketching environment.

Figure 9-59 A 3D sketch created using the line tool

c09-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:46 PM25


Figure 9-60 Power cord with a knot

PointYou can also create points in the 3D sketching environment of SolidWorks. To createa 3D point, first you have to invoke the 3D sketching environment and orient thedrawing area to isometric view. Choose the Point button from the Sketch Tools toolbar

to invoke the point tool. The select cursor will be replaced by the point cursor. Use the leftmouse button to create points.

CenterlineYou can also create centerlines in the 3D sketching environment. Invoke the 3Dsketching environment and orient the drawing view to isometric view. Choose theCenterline button from the Sketch Tools toolbar to create a centerline. The select

cursor will be replaced by the line cursor. The procedure of creating the centerline is the sameas that discussed for creating the lines.

The dimensioning of 3D sketches is the same as the dimensioning of 2D sketches.

Editing the 3D SketchesThe editing operations that can be performed on 3D sketches are discussed next

Jog LineThe Jog Line tool is used to jog the sketched lines. When you create a jog line,automatic parallel and perpendicular relations are applied to the parent sketch. Tocreate a jog line, choose the Jog Line button from the Routing toolbar or choose

Tools > Sketch Tools > Jog Line from the menu bar. Now, select the start point of the jogline; a rectangle will be attached to the cursor. Using the TAB key you can toggle between theplane in which the jog line is being created. Move the cursor to define the size of the jog lineand specify the endpoint of the jog line. You can also create jog lines in the 2D sketching

c09-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:46 PM26


Tip. If the Routing toolbar is not available in the SolidWorks window then youneed to display the toolbar. To display the toolbar, choose View > Toolbars >Routing from the menu bar. The Routing toolbar will be displayed in the SolidWorkswindow. The other method of invoking the Routing toolbar is to move the cursor toany toolbar and right-click to invoke the shortcut menu. Choose the Routing toolbarfrom the shortcut menu.

Using the above method you can invoke any toolbar that is not displayed in theSolidWorks window.

Figure 9-61 Selecting the start point of thejog line

Figure 9-62 Moving the mouse to specify thesize of the jog line

Figure 9-63 The resultant jog line

environment. Figure 9-61 shows the start point of the jog line. Figure 9-62 shows the cursorbeing moved to create the jog line. Figure 9-63 shows the resultant jog line.

c09-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:46 PM27


Other Editing OperationsYou can perform a number of editing operations on 3D sketches. These editing operationsinclude Convert Entities, Intersection Curves, Sketch Chamfer, Sketch Trim, Fit Spline,Sketch Trim, Sketch Extends, and Split Curve. All these tools except Intersection Curvesare discussed in the earlier chapters. The Intersection Curves tool will be discussed later.

Creating CurvesYou can also create different types of curves in SolidWorks. Curves are used to create complexshapes generally using the sweep and loft tools. The types of curves that can be created inSolidWorks are discussed next.

Creating Projection Curve

This option allows you to project a sketched entity on one or more than one planar orcurved faces. You can also project a sketched entity on another sketched entity tocreate a 3D curve. To create a projected curve, you first need to create at least two

sketches or a sketch and at least one feature and then choose the Projection button from theCurves toolbar or choose Inset > Curve > Projected from the menu bar. When you choosethe Projection button, the Projected Curve PropertyManager is displayed as shown inFigure 9-64. The confirmation corner is also displayed in the drawing area. The two differentoptions to create projected curves are discussed next.

Sketch onto SketchWhen you invoke the Projected Curve PropertyManager, the Sketch onto Sketch optionis selected by default in the Projection Type drop-down list. You are prompted to selecttwo sketches to project onto one another. Select two sketches to project them onto oneanother. When you select the sketches, the names of the sketches are displayed in theSketches to Project display area. The preview of the projected curve is also displayed inthe drawing area. Choose the OK button from the Projected Curve PropertyManager orchoose the OK option from the confirmation corner. Figure 9-65 shows the two

Figure 9-64 The Projected Curve PropertyManager

Toolbar: Curves > ProjectionMenu: Insert > Curve > Projected

c09-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:46 PM28


Figure 9-65 Sketches to be selected Figure 9-66 Preview of the projected curve

Figure 9-67 Resultant projected curve

sketches selected to create a projected curve. Figure 9-66 shows the preview of the projectedcurve. Figure 9-67 show the resultant projected curve.

Sketches onto FacesThe Sketches onto Faces option is available in the Projection Type drop-down list. Thisoption is used to project a sketch on a planar or a curved face. When you choose thisoption, the Sketch to Project and the Projection Faces display areas are displayed in theSelections rollout. You are also provided with a Reverse Projection check box in theSelections rollout. The Projected Curve PropertyManager with Sketches onto Facesoption selected is displayed in Figure 9-68. When you choose this option, you are promptedto select a sketch to project and the face on which to project. Now, you need to select thesketch from the drawing area and the face or faces on which you want to project thesketch. The selected sketch is highlighted in green and the selected face is highlighted in

c09-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:46 PM29


Figure 9-68 The Projected Curve PropertyManager with theSketches onto Faces option selected

Figure 9-69 Sketch and the face to be selected Figure 9-70 Resultant projected curve

red. You are also provided with a Reverse Projection arrow in the drawing area. Thisarrow is used to reverse the direction of projection. You can also reverse the directionof projection using the Reverse Projection check box. Choose the OK button from theProjected Curve PropertyManager or choose the OK option from the confirmation corner.Figure 9-69 shows the sketch to be selected for projection and the face to be selected onwhich the sketch will be projected. Figure 9-70 shows the resultant projected sketch.

c09-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:46 PM30


Figure 9-71 The Split Line PropertyManager

Toolbar: Curves > Split LineMenu: Insert > Curve > Split Line

Creating Split Lines

The Split Line tool is used to project a sketch on a planar or a curved face and in turnit splits or divides the single face into two or more than two faces. To create a split lineto divide the faces, you need to invoke the Split Line PropertyManager. Choose the

Split Line button from the Curves toolbar or choose Insert > Curve > Split Line from themenu bar to invoke the Split Line PropertyManager as shown in Figure 9-71. There are twomethods of creating a split line, which are discussed next.

SilhouetteUsing this option you can split a cylindrical or circular face by creating the silhouette lineat the intersection of the projection of plane and the cylindrical face. When you invokethe Split Line PropertyManager, the Silhouette option available in the Types of Splitrollout is selected by default. You are prompted to change the type or select the directionof pull and faces to split. You need to select a plane that defines the direction of pull.Select the plane; the selected plane will be highlighted in red color. Now, select thecylindrical or circular face; the selected face will be highlighted in green color. Choosethe OK button from the Split Line PropertyManager or choose the OK option from theconfirmation corner. The cylindrical or circular face will be divided in two or more faces.Figure 9-72 shows the plane and the face to be selected. Figure 9-73 shows the resultantsplit line created to split the selected face.

ProjectionUsing this option you can project a sketched entity onto a planar or a curved face tocreate a split line on that face. The split line tends to split the selected face on which thesketch is projected. To use this option invoke the Split Line PropertyManager and choose

c09-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:46 PM31


Figure 9-72 Plane and the face to be selected Figure 9-73 Resultant split line

Figure 9-74 The Split Line PropertyManager withthe Projection option selected

the Projection option from the Types to Split rollout. The Split Line PropertyManagerwith the Projection option selected is shown in Figure 9-74. You are prompted to change

the type or select the sketch to project, direction, and faces to split. Select the sketch and theselected sketch will be displayed in green. Now, you need to select the face to split. Select the face;the selected face will be displayed in green and the preview of the split line will also be displayedin the drawing area. Choose the OK button from the confirmation corner. The selected face orfaces will split into two or more than two faces. Figure 9-75 shows the sketch and face to be selected.Figure 9-76 shows the resultant split line created to split the selected face.

c09-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:46 PM32


Figure 9-75 Sketch and the face to be selected Figure 9-76 Resultant split line

The other options available in the Selections rollout of the Split Line PropertyManagerare discussed next.

Single directionWhile creating a split on a cylindrical face, if the sketching plane on which the sketchis created lies within the model, the split line will be created on two sides of thecylindrical face. The Single direction check box available in the Selections rollout isused to create the split line only in one direction. The Reverse direction check box isavailable only if the Single direction check box is selected. The Reverse directioncheck box is used to reverse the direction in which the split line should be created.Figure 9-77 shows the split line created on both sides of the model. Figure 9-78 showsthe split line created on single side of the model.

Figure 9-77 Split line created on both sides Figure 9-78 Split line created on single side

c09-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:47 PM33


Figure 9-79 The Composite Curve PropertyManager

Creating Composite Curve

The Composite Curve option is used to create a curve by combining other curves,sketched entities, and edges into a single curve. The composite curve is mainly usedwhile creating a sweep or a loft feature. To create a composite curve you need to

invoke the Composite Curve PropertyManager. Choose the Composite Curve button fromthe Curves toolbar or choose Insert > Curve > Composite from the menu bar to invoke theComposite Curve PropertyManager. The Composite Curve PropertyManager is shown inFigure 9-79.

When you invoke the Composite Curve PropertyManager you are prompted to select acontinuous set of sketches, edges, and/or curves. Select the edges, curves, or sketched entitiesto create a continuous curve. Choose the OK button to end curve creation. The entities to beselected should form a continuous chain, otherwise the composite curve will not be created.

Creating Curve Through Free Points

The Curve Through Free Points option is used to create a curve by specifying thecoordinate points. To create a curve using this option, choose the Curve ThroughFree Points button from the Curves toolbar or choose Insert > Curve > Curve

Through Free Points from the menu bar. The Curve File dialog box is displayed as shown inFigure 9-80. Double-click the first column under the X area to invoke the first row to enter thecoordinates for the start point for the curve. Double-click in the column below the first columnto enter the coordinates for the second point for creating the curve. Similarly, specify thecoordinates of the other points of the curve, see Figure 9-81. When you enter the coordinatesof the points the preview of the curve is displayed in the drawing area. Choose the OK buttonfrom the Curve File dialog box to complete the feature creation, see Figure 9-82.

You can also save the current set of coordinates using the Save button available in the CurveFile dialog box. When you choose this button to save the current set of coordinates, the Save

Toolbar: Curves > Composite CurveMenu: Insert > Curve > Composite

Toolbar: Curves > Curve Through Free PointsMenu: Insert > Curve > Curve Through Free Points

c09-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:47 PM34


Figure 9-80 The Curve File dialog box

Figure 9-81 Coordinates entered in the CurveFile dialog box

Figure 9-82 Resultant 3D curve

As dialog box is displayed. Browse the directory in which you need to save the coordinatesand enter the name of the file in the File name message area and choose the Save button.The curve file is saved with extension .sldcrv. Using the Save As button you can save thecurrent set of coordinates with some other name.

Using the Browse button, you can open an existing curve file. Invoke the Curve File dialogbox and choose the Browse button. The Open dialog box will be displayed. You can browsethe previously saved curve file to specify the coordinate points. You can also write thecoordinates in a text (notepad) file and save it. In the Open dialog box, choose the Text Files(*.txt) option from the Files of type drop-down list and browse the text file to specify thecoordinates.

Tip. You can select a row and using the DELETE key from the keyboard you candelete the entire row. Using the SHIFT key select the entire row and using theInsert button, you can add a row between two rows.

c09-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:47 PM35


Creating Curve Through Reference Points

The Curve Through Reference Points option enables you to create a curve by selectingthe sketched points, vertices, origin, endpoints, or center points. To create a curvethrough reference points, you have to invoke the Curve Through Reference Points

PropertyManager. Choose the 3D Curve button from the Curves toolbar or choose Insert >Curve > Curve Through Reference Points from the menu bar. The Curve Through ReferencePoints PropertyManager is shown in Figure 9-83.

When you invoke this tool, you are prompted to select vertices to define the through pointsfor the curve. Select the points to define the curve. As you define the points, the preview ofthe resultant curve created using the selected points is displayed in the drawing area. Afterspecifying all the points, choose the OK button or choose the OK option from the confirmationcorner. You can also use the Closed curve check box to create a closed curve. Figure 9-84shows the vertices to be selected to create the curve through reference points. Figure 9-85shows the resultant 3D curve.

Toolbar: Curves > 3D CurveMenu: Insert > Curve > Curve Through Reference Points

Figure 9-83 The Curve Through Reference PointsPropertyManager

Figure 9-84 Vertices to be selected Figure 9-85 Resultant 3D curve

c09-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:47 PM36


Creating Helical Curve

The Helical Curve option is used to create a helical curve or a spiral curve. Thehelical or spiral curve is used as the sweep path to create springs, threads, spiral coils,and so on. Figure 9-86 shows a spring created by sweeping a profile along a helical

path. Figure 9-87 shows a spiral coil created by sweeping a profile along a spiral path.

To create a helix in SolidWorks you first have to create a sketch of the circle that defines thediameter of the helical curve. If you are creating a spiral, the sketch will define the startingdiameter of the spiral curve. You can invoke the Helix tool while you are in the sketchingenvironment. If you are not in the sketching environment, you first have to select the sketchand then invoke this tool. Choose the Helix button from the Curves toolbar or choose Insert> Curve > Helix/Spiral from the menu bar. The Helix Curve dialog box will be displayed asshown in Figure 9-88.

Toolbar: Curves > HelixMenu: Insert > Curve > Helix/Spiral

Figure 9-86 Spring Figure 9-87 Spiral coil

Figure 9-88 The Helix Curve dialog box

c09-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:47 PM37


The preview of the helix curve is displayed in the drawing area with the default values. Thereare various methods to specify the parameters of the helical curve. These methods are discussednext.

Pitch and RevolutionThe Pitch and Revolution option available in the Defined by drop-down list is selectedby default. Using this option, you can specify the pitch of the helical curve and the numberof revolutions. When this option is selected, the Pitch spinner and the Revolution spinnerare available in the Helix Curve dialog box to define the value of pitch and number ofrevolutions.

Height and RevolutionThe Height and Revolution option available in the Defined by drop-down list is used todefine the parameters of the helix curve in the form of the total helix height and thenumber of revolutions. When you choose this option, the Height and Revolution spinnersare displayed to specify the required parameters.

Height and PitchThe Height and Pitch option available in the Defined by drop-down list is used to definethe parameters of the helix curve in terms of the height and the pitch of the helix. Whenyou select this option, the Height and Pitch spinners are displayed to specify the requiredparameters.

When you specify the parameters to create the helix curve, the preview in the drawingarea modifies dynamically. Figure 9-89 shows a helix.

You can also create a tapered helix using the Taper Helix check box available in theHelix Curve dialog box. The procedure of creating a taper helical curve is discussed next.

Taper HelixThe Taper Helix check box is selected to create a tapered helical curve. To create atapered helical curve, select the Taper Helix check box from the Helix Curve dialogbox. The Angle spinner and the Taper outward check box are enabled. Using the Anglespinner you can specify the value of the angle of taper. The Taper outward check box isused to create an outward taper. When you specify the parameters to create a taperedhelical curve, the preview of the helical curve updates automatically in the drawing area.Figure 9-90 shows a tapered helical curve. Figure 9-91 shows a tapered helical curvecreated with the Taper outward check box selected.

Using the Start angle spinner you can specify the start angle of the helical curve. TheReverse direction check box is selected to reverse the direction of helical curve creation.

By default, the helical curve is created in the clockwise direction. Therefore, the Clockwiseradio button is selected in the Helix Curve dialog box. If you need to create the helicalcurve in the counterclockwise direction, you need to select the Counterclockwise radiobutton. After setting all the parameters, choose the OK button from the Helix Curvedialog box.

c09-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:47 PM38


Figure 9-90 Tapered helical curve Figure 9-91 Tapered helical curve with the Taperoutwards option selected

Figure 9-89 Helical Curve

Creating the Spiral CurveFor creating a Spiral Curve first you have to create a sketched circle. The circle will definethe inner diameter of the spiral coil. Select the Spiral option from the Defined bydrop-down list available in the Helix Curve dialog box. The preview of the spiral curvewill be displayed in the drawing area. You can define the pitch and the number ofrevolutions in the Pitch spinner and the Revolution spinner, respectively. The otheroptions except Taper Helix are available while creating a spiral curve. These options arethe same as those discussed earlier. After specifying all the required parameters, choosethe OK button. Figure 9-92 shows a spiral curve.

c09-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:47 PM39


Creating Draft Features

The Draft tool is used to taper the selected faces of the model. One of the mainapplication of the draft feature is to taper the faces of the parts to be moulded orcasted so that it is easier to remove them from the mould or die. To create a draft

feature you need to invoke the Draft PropertyManager. Choose the Draft button from theFeatures toolbar or choose Insert > Features > Draft from the menu bar to invoke the DraftPropertyManager. The Draft PropertyManager is shown in Figure 9-93.

After invoking this tool, you are prompted to select a neutral plane and the faces to draft. Youwill notice that the Neutral Plane option is selected by default in the Types of Draft drop-downlist in the Types of Draft rollout. Therefore, you need to select a neutral plane for creatingthe draft feature. Select a planar face or a plane that acts as a neutral plane. The selected facewill be displayed in red with the Neutral Plane callout. A Reverse Direction arrow is alsodisplayed in the drawing area. Now, click in the Faces to Draft display area in the Faces toDraft rollout to activate the selection mode. Select the faces to apply the draft. The selectedfaces will be displayed green in color with the Draft Face callout. Now, set the value of thedraft angle in the Draft Angle spinner available in the Draft Angle rollout. Choose the OKbutton from the Draft PropertyManager or choose the OK option from the confirmationcorner.

Figure 9-94 shows the neutral face and the faces to be selected to add the draft. Figure 9-95shows the resultant draft feature. The other options in the Draft PropertyManager arediscussed next.

Figure 9-92 Spiral curve

Toolbar: Features > DraftMenu: Insert > Features > Draft

c09-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:47 PM40


Figure 9-93 The Draft PropertyManager

Figure 9-94 Faces to be selected Figure 9-95 Resultant draft feature

Reverse DirectionThe Reverse Direction button available on the left of the Neutral Plane display area inthe Neutral Plane rollout is used to reverse the direction of draft creation. You can alsoreverse the direction of draft creation by selecting the Reverse Direction arrow from thedrawing area.

c09-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:47 PM41


Face propagationThe options available in the Face Propagation drop-down list are used to extend thedraft feature to the other faces. The options available in this drop-down list are discussed next.

NoneThe None option is selected by default. This option is used when you do not need toapply any type of face propagation.

Along TangentThe Along Tangent option is used to apply the draft to the faces tangent to theselected face.

All FacesThe All Faces option is used to apply the draft to all the faces attached to the neutralplane or face.

Inner FacesThis option is used to draft all the faces inside the model that are attached to theneutral plane or face.

Outer FacesThis option is used to draft all the outside faces of the model that are attached to theneutral plane or face.

Creating the Draft Using the Parting LineTo create a draft feature using the Parting Line option, you first need to create a partingline using the split curve option. The Split Curve option was discussed earlier in thischapter. You can also select the model edges as split curve. Now, invoke the DraftPropertyManager and select the Parting Line option from the Type of Draft drop-downlist. The Draft PropertyManager with the Parting Line option selected is displayed inFigure 9-96. You are prompted to select the direction of pull and the parting lines.

Select a planar face, plane, or an edge as the pull direction for creating the draft feature.The Direction of Pull callout and the Reverse Direction arrow are displayed in thedrawing area. Click once in the Parting Line area to invoke the selection mode and selectthe parting lines. The direction arrows will be displayed with the selected parting lines.Using the Other Face button, you can reverse the direction of the selected parting line.Set the value of the angle in the Draft Angle spinner and end feature creation.

Figure 9-97 shows the pull direction and the parting lines to be selected. Figure 9-98shows the resultant draft feature creation.

Allow reduced angleWhen applying the draft feature using the Parting Line, a smaller draft angle isapplied to some portions of the draft feature because of geometric conditions.Therefore, the Allow reduced angle check box available in the Type of Draft rolloutis used to maintain the consistency in the draft feature.

c09-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:47 PM42


Figure 9-96 The Draft PropertyManager with the Parting Lineoption selected from the Type of Draft drop-down list

Figure 9-97 Face and the parting lines to be selected Figure 9-98 Resultant draft feature

c09-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:47 PM43


Creating the Step DraftThe Step Draft option available in the Type of Draft drop-down list is used to create astep draft. The Draft PropertyManager with the Step Draft option selected is shown inFigure 9-99.

You are prompted to select the direction of pull and the parting line. Select the directionof pull; the Reverse Direction arrow and the Direction of Pull callout are displayed.Select the parting lines to create the step draft. As discussed you can change the directionof the parting lines using the Other Face option. Set the value of the angle in the DraftAngle spinner and choose the OK button from the Draft PropertyManager. Figure 9-100shows the face selected to define the direction of pull. Figure 9-101 shows the step draftfeature created.

You will notice that the Tapered steps radio button is selected by default in the Type ofDraft rollout. Some of the faces of the step draft created will include a taper. If you selectthe Perpendicular steps radio button, the steps created will be perpendicular. Figure 9-102

Figure 9-99 The Draft PropertyManager with the Step Draftoption selected from the Type of Draft drop-down list

c09-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:47 PM44


Figure 9-100 Face and the parting lines to be selected Figure 9-101 Resultant step draft feature

Figure 9-102 Step draft created with theTapered steps radio button selected

Figure 9-103 Step draft created with thePerpendicular steps radio button selected

shows the step draft created with the Tapered steps radio button selected. Figure 9-103shows the step draft created with the Perpendicular steps radio button selected.

TUTORIALS

Tutorial 1In this tutorial you will create the model shown in Figure 9-104. The dimensions of model areshown in Figure 9-105. (Expected time: 45 min)

The steps to be followed to complete this tutorial are given next:

a. The base feature of the model is a sweep feature. First, you need to create the path of thesweep feature on the front plane. Next, you need to create a plane normal to the path ofthe sweep feature. Select the newly created plane as the sketching plane and create the

c09-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:47 PM45




c09-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:47 PM46


profile of the sweep feature. You will create a thin sweep feature because the base featureof the model is a hollow feature, refer to Figures 9-106 through 9-108.

b. Create the extrude features on both ends of the sweep feature, refer to Figure 9-109.c. Create a plane at an offset distance from the right face of the model. Create the circular

feature by extruding the feature using the Up To Next option.d. Create the hole using the Simple Hole PropertyManager, refer to Figure 9-109.e. Create the pattern of the hole feature, refer to Figure 9-109.f. Create the counterbore hole using the cut revolve option, refer to Figure 9-109.

Creating the Path for the Sweep FeatureAs discussed earlier, the base feature of the model is a sweep feature. To create the sweepfeature, you first need to create the path of the sweep feature. This path will be created onthe Front plane.


2. Draw the sketch of the path of the sweep feature on the Front plane and add the requiredrelations and dimensions to the sketch as shown in Figure 9-106. Exit the sketchingenvironment and change the view to isometric view.

Creating the Profile of the Sweep FeatureAfter creating the path of the sweep feature, you will create the profile of the sweepfeature. For creating the profile, first you need to create a reference plane normal to thepath. The newly created plane will be selected as the sketching plane for creating theprofile of the sweep feature.

1. Invoke the Plane PropertyManager and using the Normal to Curve option, createa plane normal to the path as shown in Figure 9-107.

Figure 9-106 Sketch of the path Figure 9-107 Plane created normal to path

c09-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:47 PM47


2. Invoke the sketching environment by selecting the newly created plane as the sketchingplane.

3. Create the sketch of the profile of the sweep feature using the circle tool. The diameter ofthe profile of the sweep feature is 97.

4. After creating the profile of the sweep feature exit the sketching environment.

Creating the Sweep FeatureThe sweep feature that you are going to create is a thin sweep feature. You will use theThin Feature rollout to specify the parameters of the thin feature.

1. Choose the Sweep button from the Features toolbar. The Sweep PropertyManageris invoked and you are prompted to select the sweep profile.

2. Select the profile of the sweep feature. The selected profile will be highlighted in greenand the Profile callout will also be displayed.

After selecting the profile, you are prompted to select the path.

3. Select the path of the sweep feature. The selected path will be highlighted in red and thePath callout is also displayed. The preview of the sweep feature is also displayed in thedrawing area.

4. Select the Thin Feature check box available on the left of the rollout. The Thin Featurerollout is invoked.

5. Set the value of thickness in the Thickness spinner to 16.

Since the wall thickness added to the model is reverse to the required direction, therefore,you need to reverse the direction of creation of thin feature.

6. Choose the Reverse Direction button from the Thin Features rollout. Choose the OKbutton from the Sweep PropertyManager or choose OK from the confirmation corner.

The base feature created by sweeping a profile along a path is shown in Figure 9-108.

Creating the Remaining FeaturesCreate the remaining join features of the model using the extrude option. Using theSimple Hole PropertyManager create the holes and pattern them using the circularpattern tool. Create the counterbore hole using the Hole Wizard or using the revolve cutoption.

Tip. Instead of creating a thin sweep feature, you can also create a solid sweepfeature and then add a shell feature to hollow the base feature.

c09-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:47 PM48



The final solid model of Tutorial 1 is shown in Figure 9-109. The model tree of the modelis shown in Figure 9-110.



Figure 9-109 Final model of Tutorial 1

c09-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:47 PM49


Figure 9-110 The FeatureManager Design Tree for the model



Tutorial 2In this tutorial you will create the chair frame shown in Figure 9-111. The dimensions of thechair frame are shown in Figure 9-112. (Expected time : 30 min)


a. The chair frame is created by sweeping a profile along a 3D path. The 3D path will becreated in the 3D sketching environment. Therefore, you need to invoke the 3D sketchingenvironment and then create the sketch of the 3D path. You will create only the left halfof the 3D path in the 3D sketching environment, refer to Figure 9-113.

b. Create a plane normal to the 3D path. Selecting the newly created plane as the sketchingenvironment create the sketch of the profile.

c. Sweep the profile along the 3D path using the Thin Feature option, refer to Figure 9-114.d. Mirror the sweep feature using the Front plane, refer to Figure 9-115.

Creating the Path of Sweep Feature Using 3D SketchingEnvironment

It is evident from Figure 9-111 that the model is created by sweeping a profile along a 3Dpath. Therefore, you need to create a path of the sweep feature in the 3D sketchingenvironment.

c09-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:47 PM50



Figure 9-111 Model of Tutorial 2

c09-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:47 PM51


1. Create a new document in the Part mode.

2. Create a plane at an offset distance of 40mm from the Front plane.

3. Change the current view to isometric using the Isometric button from the StandardViews toolbar.

4. Choose Insert > 3D Sketch from the menu bar to invoke the 3D sketchingenvironment. You can also use the 3D Sketch button from the Sketch toolbar toinvoke the 3D sketching environment. You will need to customize this buttonusing the Customize toolbar.

The 3D sketching environment is invoked and the sketch origin is displayed in red. Youare also provided with the confirmation corner on the top right of the drawing area. Thesketching tools that can be used in the 3D sketching environment are also invoked.

5. Invoke the Line tool. The select cursor is replaced by the line cursor. The XYthat is displayed below the line cursor suggests that by default it will sketch in the XYplane.

The first line you need to create is in the ZX plane. Therefore, you will toggle the planebefore you start creating the sketch.

6. Choose the TAB key from the key board twice to switch to ZX plane.

7. Move the line cursor to the origin. When the cursor turns yellow in color, press and holddown the left mouse button. A space handle will be displayed at the origin that indicatethe direction of X, Y, and Z.

8. Drag the cursor toward the left. You will notice that the Z symbol is displayed below thecursor as you drag the cursor. This indicates that you are creating the line in the Zdirection. Release the left mouse button when the value of the length of line displays avalue close to 40.

9. Move the cursor to the endpoint of the previous line and when the cursor turns yellow incolor, press and hold down the right mouse button.

10. Drag the cursor to the right. The X symbol is displayed below the cursor, which indicatesthat the line is being created in the X direction. Release the left mouse button when thelength of the line above the line cursor shows a value close to 100.

11. Move the cursor to the endpoint of the previous line. When the cursor snaps to theendpoint, press and hold down the left mouse button.

12. Press the TAB key to switch to the XY plane. Drag the cursor vertically upwards. The Ysymbol will be displayed below the cursor, suggesting that the line is being created in theY direction.

c09-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:47 PM52


Figure 9-113 Sketch of the 3D path

13. Release the left mouse button when the value above the cursor shows a value close to 85.

14. Similarly, create the remaining sketch and add the required relations and dimensions tothe sketch. The final sketch is displayed in Figure 9-113.

15. Add a Coincident relation between the upper point of the 3D sketch and Plane1.

16. Exit the sketching environment.

Creating the Profile of the Sweep FeatureAs discussed earlier, the sweep feature will be created by sweeping the profile along a 3Dpath. You have created the path and now you need to create the profile of the sweepfeature.

1. Select the Front plane as the sketching plane and invoke the sketching environment.

Since the Front plane is normal to the 3D path, therefore, you do not need to create areference plane. If any one of the default plane is not normal to the sweep profile, thenyou need to create a reference plane normal to the path.

2. Create the sketch of the profile of sweep feature and add the required dimension to thesketch. Refer to Figure 9-112.


Sweeping the Profile Along the 3D PathAfter creating the 3D path and the profile of the sweep feature, you need to sweep theprofile along the 3D path using the Sweep tool.

c09-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:47 PM53


1. Choose the Sweep button from the Features toolbar. The Sweep PropertyManageris invoked and you are prompted to select the sweep profile.

2. Select the sketch of the profile. The selected profile will be displayed green in color andthe profile callout is also displayed.

You are prompted to select the path of the sweep feature.

3. Select the path of the sweep feature. The path will be displayed in red color and the pathcallout is also displayed. The preview of the sweep feature is also displayed in the drawingarea.

As evident from Figure 9-112, the frame of the chair is made from a hollow pipe. Therefore,you need to create a thin sweep feature to create a hollow chair frame.

4. Invoke the Thin Feature rollout and set the value of the Thickness spinner to 1.

5. Choose the Reverse Direction button from the Thin Features rollout to reverse thedirection of thin feature creation.

6. Choose the OK button from the Sweep PropertyManager to end feature creation.

The model after creating the sweep feature is displayed in Figure 9-114.

7. Using the mirror tool, mirror the sweep feature along the Front plane. The model aftermirroring is displayed in Figure 9-115. The FeatureManager Design Tree of the modelis shown in Figure 9-116.

Figure 9-114 Sweep feature created by sweeping a profile along a 3D path

c09-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:47 PM54


Figure 9-115 The final model


1. Choose the Save button from the Standard toolbar and save the model with thename given below and close the file


Tutorial 3In this tutorial you will create the spring shown in Figure 9-117. The dimensions of the springare shown in Figure 9-118. (Expected time: 45 min)


Figure 9-116 The FeatureManager Design Tree forTutorial 2

c09-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:47 PM55




c09-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:47 PM56


a. First you need to create the helical path of the spring, refer to Figure 9-119.b. Create the side clips of the spring, refer to Figure 9-122.c. Combine the end clips and the helical curve to create a single curve using the Composite

Curve option, refer to Figure 9-123.d. Create the profile on the plane normal to the curve and sweep the profile along the

curve, refer to Figures 9-124 and 9-125.

Creating the Helical CurveFor creating this model first you need to create the helical path of the spring. For creatingthe helical path first you need to create a circular sketch. This sketch will define thediameter of the spring.

1. Start a new SolidWorks document in the Part mode and invoke the sketching environment.

2. Draw a circle of diameter 50. Change the view to isometric view.

3. Choose the Helix button from the Curves toolbar or choose Insert > Curve >Helix from the menu bar.

The Helix Curve dialog box is displayed and the preview of the helical curve with thedefault values is displayed in the drawing area.

4. Select the Height and Pitch option from the Defined by drop-down list of the HelixCurve dialog box.

5. Set the value of the Height spinner to 72.5 and the value of the Pitch spinner to 10.

You will observe that the preview of the helical curve is updated automatically when youmodify the values in the spinners.

6. Set the value of the Starting angle spinner to 0 and choose the OK button from the HelixCurve dialog box.

The helical curve created using the above steps is shown in Figure 9-119.

Creating the Sketch of the End Clips of the SpringAfter creating the helical curve, you need to create the sketch that defines the path of theend clips. There are two end clips in this spring, and each end clip is created using twosketches. First, you will create the right end-clip and then the left end-clip.

1. Select the Front plane as the sketching plane and invoke the sketching environment.

The first sketch of the right end-clip consists of two arcs. The first arc will be created usingthe Centerpoint Arc tool and the second arc will be created using the 3 Pt Arc tool.

2. Choose the Centerpoint Arc button from the Sketch Tools toolbar and specifythe centerpoint of the arc at the origin.

c09-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:47 PM57


3. Move the cursor toward the right and specify the start point of the arc when the radius ofthe reference circle shows a value close to 25.

4. Move the cursor in the counterclockwise direction. Specify the endpoint of thearc when the value of the angle above the cursor shows a value close to 75.

5. Choose the 3 Pt Arc button from the Sketch Tools toolbar. Specify the start point of thearc on the endpoint of the previous arc. Create the arc as shown in Figure 9-120.

6. Add the Pierce relation between the start point of the first arc and the helical path. Addthe other relations and the dimensions to fully define the sketch. The fully defined sketchis shown in Figure 9-120.


After creating the first sketch of the right end-clip, you need to create the second sketchof the right end-clip. The second sketch of the right end-clip will be created on the Rightplane.

8. Select the Right plane and invoke the sketching environment.

9. Create the sketch as shown in Figure 9-121. You need to apply the Pierce relation betweenthe helical curve and the end point of left arc of the sketch.

10. Add a Tangent and Coincident relation between the left arc of the sketch and the sketchcreated previously. Add the required relations and dimensions to the sketch. Sketch afterapplying all the relations and dimensions is shown in Figure 9-121.

Figure 9-119 Helical curve

c09-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:47 PM58


Figure 9-120 First sketch of right end-clip

Similarly, create the sketch of the left end-clip. Figure 9-122 shows the path of the springafter creating the helical curve, right end-clip, and the left end-clip.

Creating the Composite CurveAfter creating all the required sketches and the helical curve, you need to combine themfrom a single curve. This is done because while creating the sweep feature you cannotselect more than one curve or sketch as a path.

1. Choose the Composite Curve button from the Curves toolbar or choose Insert> Curve > Composite from the menu bar. The Composite CurvePropertyManager is displayed and the confirmation corner is also available.

Figure 9-121 Second sketch of right end-clip

c09-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:47 PM59


2. Select all the sketches and the helical curve either from the drawing area or from theFeatureManager Design Tree flyout.

3. Choose the OK button from the Composite Curve PropertyManager or choose OKfrom the confirmation corner.

The composite curve is created. The composite curve created is displayed in Figure 9-123.

Creating the Profile for the Sweep FeatureNow, you need to create the profile of the sweep feature. The profile of the sweep featurewill be created on a plane normal to the curve on the endpoint of the right end-clip.

1. Create a plane normal to the path and at the endpoint of the right end-clip.

2. Create the profile of the sweep feature and add the Pierce relation between the center ofthe circle and the composite curve. Add the required dimension to the sketch.

3. Exit the sketching environment. Figure 9-124 shows the profile and path of the sweepfeature.

Creating the Sweep FeatureYou will create a sweep feature to complete the creation of spring.

1. Invoke the Sweep PropertyManager and you are prompted to select the sweep profile.

2. Select the sweep profile from the drawing area.

You are prompted to select the sweep path.

3. Select the path and choose the OK button from the Sweep PropertyManager.

Figure 9-122 Final path of the spring Figure 9-123 Composite curve

c09-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:47 PM60


The spring created after sweeping the profile along the path is shown in Figure 9-125.The FeatureManager Design Tree of the spring is shown in Figure 9-126.


1. Choose the Save button from the Standard toolbar and save the model with the namegiven below and close the file


Figure 9-124 Profile and path of the sweep feature


c09-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:47 PM61



1. You need a profile and a path to create a sweep feature. (T/F)

2. The loft feature need at least two sections to create the feature. (T/F)

3. You cannot sweep a closed profile along a closed path. (T/F)

4. You cannot create a thin sweep feature. (T/F)

5. You can also create a loft feature using open sections. (T/F)

6. The __________ PropertyManager is used to create a loft feature.

7. The __________ option is used to create a curve by joining the continuous chain of existingsketches, edges, or curves.

8. You have to apply __________ relation between the sketch and the guide curve whilesweeping a profile along a path using guide curves.

9. __________ option is used to create a curve by defining coordinates.

10. __________ PropertyManager is invoked to create a cut sweep feature.


1. Using the ___________ rollout you can define the tangency at the start and end in thesweep feature.

Figure 9-126 FeatureManager Design Tree

c09-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:47 PM62


2. The __________ rollout is used to create a thin loft feature.

3. You need to invoke __________ dialog box to create a spiral curve.

4. The __________ PropertyManager is invoked to create a curve projected on a surface.

5. The __________ dialog box is used to specify the coordinates to create the curve.

6. Which button is selected to invoke the 3D sketching environment?

(a) 2D Sketch (b) 3D Sketching Environment(c) 3D Sketch (d) Sketch

7. Which rollout available in the Sweep PropertyManager is used to define the tangency?

(a) Start/End Tangency (b) Tangency(c) Options (d) None of these

8. Which button available in the Features PropertyManager is used to invoke the DraftPropertyManager?

(a) Draft (b) Taper Angle(c) Draft Feature (c) Draft Angle

9. In which rollout you can define the pull direction while creating a draft feature using theparting line option?

(a) Pull Direction (b) Direction of Pull(c) Reference Direction (d) Options

10. Which button available in the Guide Curves rollout is used to display the sections whilecreating the sweep feature with guide curves.

(a) Preview Sections (b) Show Sections(c) Sections (d) Preview

EXERCISES

Exercise 1Create the model shown in Figure 9-127. The dimensions of the model are shown inFigure 9-128. (Expected time: 1 hr)

c09-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:47 PM63



Figure 9-128 Views and Dimensions of the model for Exercise 1

c09-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:47 PM64


Tip. This model is divided in three major parts. The first part is the base and iscreated by extruding the sketch to a distance of 80mm using the Mid Plane option.

The second part of this model is the right portion of the discharge venturi. Thisportion is created using the sweep feature. The path of the sweep feature will becreated on the right plane. You need to create a plane at the left endpoint of the pathand will be normal to the path.

The third part of this model is the left portion of the discharge venturi. This will becreated using the loft feature. You need to create the first section of the loft featureon the planar face of the sweep feature created earlier. The second section will becreated on a plane at an offset distance from the planar face of the sweep featurecreated earlier. Create a loft feature using the two section created earlier. The otherfeatures needed to complete the model are fillets, hole, circular pattern and so on.

Exercise 2Create the model shown in Figure 9-129. The dimensions of the model are shown inFigure 9-130. (Expected time: 1 hr)


c09-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:47 PM65



Answer to Self-Evaluation Test1. T, 2. T, 3. F, 4. F, 5. T, 6. Loft, 7. Composite Curve, 8. Pierce, 9. Curve Through Free Points,10. Cut-Sweep

c09-solidworks-2003.p65 5/11/2003, 5:47 PM66

Chapter 10

Assembly Modeling-I

After completing this chapter you will be able to:• Create Bottom-up Assemblies.• Add the Mates to the Assemblies.• Create Top-down Assemblies.• Move the Individual Components.• Rotate the Individual Components.

Learning Objectives

c10-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:01 PM1


ASSEMBLY MODELINGAn assembly design is defined as a design consisting of two or more components assembledtogether at their respective work positions. The components are assembled together in theAssembly mode using parametric relations. In SolidWorks, these relations are called mates.These mates allow you to constrain the degrees of freedom of the components on theirrespective work positions. To proceed to the Assembly mode of SolidWorks, invoke the NewSolidWorks Document dialog box and select the Assembly template from the Templates tabas shown in Figure 10-1. Choose the OK button to create a new assembly document.

The assembly environment will be activated. The screen display of SolidWorks in theAssembly mode is shown in Figure 10-2. The Assembly toolbar is also invoked as displayedin Figure 10-2.

NoteWhen you invoke the Assembly mode, you will notice that some of the options in the Assemblytoolbar are not available. All these options will be available once you insert a component orcreate a component in the assembly file.

Types of Assembly Design ApproachIn SolidWorks, the assemblies are created using two types of design approaches. The firstdesign approach is the bottom-up approach, and the second design approach is the top-downapproach. Both these design approaches are discussed next.

Figure 10-1 The New SolidWorks Document dialog box

c10-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:01 PM2

Assembly Modeling-I 10-3

Figure 10-2 Screen display in the Assembly mode

Bottom-up Assembly Design ApproachThe bottom-up assembly design approach is the traditional and the most widely preferredapproach of assembly design. In this assembly design approach, all the components are createdas separate part files and these parts are placed and referenced in the assembly as externalcomponents. In this type of approach, the components are created in the Part mode as (.sldprt)file. After creating all the components of the assembly, you will open an assembly file (.sldasm)and insert all the components using the tools provided in the Assembly mode. After insertingthe components, they are assembled using the assembly mates.

The main advantage of this assembly design approach is that as the components are designedindividually, you can maintain the relationships between the features easily. Hence, thisapproach allows you to pay more attention and to focus more on the individual components.This approach is preferred while handling large assemblies.

Top-down Assembly Design ApproachIn the top-down assembly design approach, all the components are created in the sameassembly file. Therefore, the top-down assembly design approach is entirely different fromthe bottom-up design approach. In this approach you will start your work in the assembly fileand the geometry of one part helps you to define the geometry of the other.

c10-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:01 PM3


NoteYou can also create an assembly with a combination of the bottom-up and the top-down assemblyapproaches.

CREATING BOTTOM-UP ASSEMBLIESAs mentioned earlier, the bottom-up assemblies are the assemblies in which, the componentsare created as separate part files in the Part mode. After creating the components, they areinserted in the assembly and then assembled using the assembly mates. For starting an assemblydesign with this approach, you need to insert the first component in the assembly. It isrecommended that the first component should be placed at the origin of the assembly file.The default planes of the assembly and the part will coincide and the component will be inthe same orientation. When you place the first component in the assembly, that component isfixed at its placement position. The techniques used to place the components in the assemblyfile are discussed next.

Placing Components in the Assembly FileIn SolidWorks, there are various options to place the components in the assembly. Theseoptions are discussed next.

Placing the Components Using the Open Dialog Box

The first method of placing the components in the assembly is using the Open dialog box. Toinsert a component, choose Insert > Component > From File from the menu bar. The Opendialog box is displayed; browse the location where the component is saved. Select thecomponent and choose the Open button. The cursor is replaced by the component cursorand you are prompted to select a point in the assembly view to place the component. It isrecommended that the origin of the first component should be aligned with the assemblyorigin. Sometimes the assembly origin is not displayed in the drawing area. Therefore, youneed to choose View > Origins from the menu bar to display the origin. Move the cursor tothe assembly origin in the drawing area. A symbol appears below the component cursor. Thissymbol implies that the origin of the component is coincident with the assembly origin. Pressthe left mouse button to place the component.

To place the second component, choose Insert > Component > From File from the menubar. Select the component from the Open dialog box. You are again prompted to select a

Menu: Insert > Component > From File

Tip. Only the information about the mates is stored in the assembly file. The featureinformation of the parts is stored in the individual part files. Therefore, the size ofthe assembly file is small.

It is recommended that all the parts of an assembly be saved in the same directory inwhich the assembly is saved. This is because if the location of the parts is changed,the component will not be displayed in the assembly and assembly file will showerrors.

c10-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:01 PM4


point in the assembly view to place the component. Select a point anywhere in the drawingarea to place the second component. Similarly, place the remaining components in the assembly.

Placing the Components Using the Opened Document WindowThe second and the most widely used method of adding the components in the assembly isusing the existing opened document windows. For example, the assembly that you are goingto create consists of three components. Open the part documents of all the parts in theSolidWorks window and create a new assembly document. Now, choose Window > TileHorizontally or Tile Vertically from the menu bar. All the SolidWorks document windowswill be tilled vertically or horizontally, depending on the option selected. You first need toplace the first component in the assembly and this need to be placed at the origin of theassembly. Move the select cursor on the name of the first component to be placed in theFeatureManager Design Tree of the window of that component. Press and hold down the leftmouse button at this location. Drag the cursor to the assembly origin in the assembly window.When the coincident symbol appears below the component cursor, place the component inthe assembly. Similarly, place the other components in the assembly. Figure 10-3 displaysplacing a first component from an existing opened document window to the assembly documentwindow. If another existing assembly document is opened, you can also drag and drop thepart from that assembly document.

Figure 10-3 Placing a component in the assembly file from an existing window

c10-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:01 PM5


Placing the Components by Dragging from Windows ExplorerYou can also place the components in the assembly file by dragging them from WindowsExplorer. Open Windows Explorer and browse the location where the part documents aresaved. Tile the Windows Explorer window and the SolidWorks window such that you can viewboth the windows. Move the cursor on the icon of the part document in Windows Explorer.Press and hold down the left mouse button and drag the cursor to the assembly documentwindow. Drop the part in the assembly document. Similarly, place the other parts by draggingfrom Windows Explorer and dropping them in the assembly document. When you place thecomponents using this method, the part origin will not coincide with the assembly origin. Youneed to manually add the constraint to coincide the origin of the part with the assemblyorigin. Figure 10-4 shows the part being dropped in the assembly window.

Placing the Components from Internet ExplorerYou can also place the components from Internet Explorer. For placing the components fromInternet Explorer, you need Internet Explorer 4.0 or later. Browse the location of theSolidWorks part file link on the Web. Drag the hyperlink and drop it in the drawing area ofthe assembly document. The Save As dialog box will be displayed; save the part document atthe desired location.

Placing the Additional Instances of Existing Component in theAssemblySometimes, you need more than one instance of the component to be placed in the assemblydocument. Press and hold down the CTRL key from the keyboard. Select the component inthe assembly file and drag the cursor to the location where you want to place the instance ofthe selected component. Release the left mouse button to drop the new instance of thecomponent. Similarly, you can place as many instances of the existing component as you wantby following the above-mentioned procedure.

Tip. When you place the first component in the assembly, the component is displayedin the FeatureManager Design Tree. The nomenclature of the name of the firstcomponent is displayed as (f) Name of Component <1>. In this nomenclature(f) implies that the component is fixed. You cannot move a fixed component. Youwill learn more about fixed and floating components later in this chapter. After thisthe name of the component is displayed. After the name of the component, <1>symbol is displayed. This implies the serial number of the same component in theassembly.

The (-) symbol implies the component is floating and is under defined. And youneed to apply the required constraints to that component to fully define the component.You will learn more about constraints later in this chapter.

The (+) symbol implies that the component is fully defined.

If no symbol appears before the name of the component, the component is fullydefined.

c10-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:01 PM6


Figure 10-4 Dropping the part in the assembly window

Placing the Component Using the Feature Pallet WindowYou can also place a component in the assembly file from the Feature Pallet window. If youhave saved components in the Feature Pallet window, you can place that component bydragging and dropping from this window. Feature Pallet window is invoked by choosingInsert > Feature Pallet from the menu bar. You will learn more about the Feature Palletwindow in later chapters.

Assembling the ComponentsAfter placing the components in the assembly document, you need to assemble them. Byassembling the components, you will constrain the degree of freedom of the components. Asmentioned earlier, the components are assembled using the mates. Mates help you to preciselyplace and position the component with respect to the other components and the surroundingsin the assembly. You can also define the linear and rotatory movement of the component withrespect to the other components. In addition, you can create a dynamic mechanism andcheck the stability of the mechanism by precisely defining the combination of mates. Thereare two methods of adding mates to the assembly. The first method is using theMate PropertyManager. The second and the most widely used method of adding the matesto the assembly is Smart Mates. Both methods are discussed next.

c10-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:01 PM7


Assembling Components Using the Mate PropertyManager

In SolidWorks, the mates can be applied using the Mate PropertyManager. Choosethe Mate button available in the Assembly toolbar or choose Insert > Mate from themenu bar. The Mate PropertyManager is invoked as shown in Figure 10-5. You are

prompted to select two entities to be mated.

Select a planar face, curved face, axis, or point on the first component and then select theentity from the second component. The selected entities will be highlighted in green. Thenames of the selected entities are displayed in the Entities to Mate display area. The mostsuitable mates to be applied to the current selection set are displayed in the Mate Settingsrollout of the Mate PropertyManager. The most appropriate mate will be selected by default.You can select the mates from the given list of the most appropriate mates. After selecting thebutton of the required mate choose the preview button to view the effect of the mate applied.Choose the OK button to apply the selected mate. The various types of mates that can beapplied are discussed next.

Toolbar: Assembly > MateMenu: Insert > Mate

Figure 10-5 The Mate PropertyManager

Tip. If you choose the Keep Visible button from the Mate PropertyManager, theMate PropertyManager will not disappear after you select the OK button.

c10-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:01 PM8


Figure 10-6 Table displaying the combinations for applying Coincident mate

CoincidentThe Coincident mate is generally applied to make the two planar faces coplanar.But you can also apply the Coincident mate to other entities. The details of thegeometries on which the Coincident mate can be applied is shown in Figure 10-6.

When you choose the Coincident button from the Mate Settings rollout, the Closestradio button is selected by default. This radio button automatically orients the model inthe aligned or anti-aligned direction, depending on the current orientation of the model.Choose the Preview button to display the preview of the coincident mate on the selectedentities. The Anti-Aligned or the Aligned radio button will be selected automaticallydepending on the orientation of the model after applying the Coincindent mate.Figure 10-7 displays the faces to be selected to apply the coincident mate. Figure 10-8shows the resultant mate applied with the default option, that is, Anti-Aligned selected.Figure 10-9 shows the coincident mate applied with the Aligned radio button selected.

ConcentricThe Concentric mate is generally used to align the central axis of one componentwith the central axis of the other. You generally need to select the circular faces toapply the concentric mate. You can also apply the Concentric mate between a

point and a circular face or edge. The other combinations of applying the Concentric

c10-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:01 PM9


Figure 10-7 Faces to be selected

Figure 10-8 Coincident mate applied with theAnti-Aligned radio button selected

Figure 10-9 Coincident mate applied with theAligned radio button selected

mate are displayed in the table given in Figure 10-10. For applying a Concentric mate,invoke the Mate PropertyManager. Select the two entities from two different components.The names of the selected entities will be displayed in the Entities to Mate display area. TheConcentric button will be chosen in the Mate Settings rollout. If the Concentric buttonis not chosen by default, you need to manually select this button. Choose the Previewbutton from the Mate Settings rollout. You can toggle between the Aligned andAnti-Aligned radio button according to the requirement. Choose the OK button fromthe Mate PropertyManager.

c10-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:01 PM10


Figure 10-10 Table displaying the combinations for applying Concentric mate


Figure 10-11 shows the faces to be selected to apply the concentric mate. Figure 10-12shows the concentric mate applied with the Aligned radio button selected. Figure 10-13shows the concentric mate applied with the Anti-Aligned radio button selected.

c10-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:01 PM11


Figure 10-12 Concentric mate applied with theAligned radio button selected

Figure 10-13 Concentric mate applied with theAnti-Aligned radio button selected

Figure 10-14 Table displaying the combinations for applying Distance mate

DistanceThe Distance button is chosen to apply the Distance mate between thecomponents. To apply the Distance mate, invoke the Mate PropertyManagerand select the entities from both the components. Choose the Distance button

from the Mate Settings rollout. Set the value of the distance in the Distance spinner.Choose the Preview button to display the preview of the Distance mate. If needed,toggle between the Aligned radio button and the Anti-Aligned radio button. Figure 10-14shows the combinations of components to apply the distance mate. Figure 10-15 showsthe faces to be selected. Figure 10-16 shows the Distance mate applied between twocomponents. You can also toggle between the Aligned and Anti-Aligned options.

c10-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:01 PM12


Figure 10-15 Concentric mate applied with theAligned radio button selected

Figure 10-16 Concentric mate applied with theAnti-Aligned radio button selected

Figure 10-17 Table displaying the combinations for applying Angle mate

AngleThe Angle button is used to apply the Angle mate between two components. TheAngle mate is used to specify the angular position between the selected plane,planar face, or edges of two components. To apply this mate, invoke the Mate

PropertyManager and select the entities from two components. Choose the Angle buttonfrom the Mate Settings rollout. The Angle spinner is invoked and you can set the value ofthe angle in this spinner. Choose the Preview button to preview the Angle mate appliedto the selected entities. You can also toggle between the Aligned radio button and theAnti-Aligned radio button. Choose the OK button from the Mate PropertyManager.Figure 10-17 shows the table of combinations for applying the angle mate.

c10-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:01 PM13


Figure 10-18 shows the faces to be selected to apply the angular mate. Figure 10-19 showsthe assembly after applying the Angular mate with the angle value of 90º.

ParallelThe Parallel button available in the Mate Settings rollout is used to apply theParallel mate between the two components. To apply the Parallel mate, invokethe Mate PropertyManager and select the two entities from the two components.

Choose the Parallel button to apply the mate constraint. You can also toggle between theAlign radio button and the Anti-Aligned radio button. Choose the OK button from theMate PropertyManager. Figure 10-20 shows the combination of components on whichyou can apply the Parallel mate. Figure 10-21 shows the entities to be selected to applythe Parallel mate. Figure 10-22 shows the assembly after applying the parallel mate.

Figure 10-18 Face to be selected to apply theangle mate

Figure 10-19 Assembly after applying the anglemate

c10-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:01 PM14


Figure 10-20 Table displaying the combinations for applying Parallel mate

Figure 10-21 Entities to be selected to apply theparallel mate

Figure 10-22 Assembly after applying the parallelmate

c10-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:01 PM15


Figure 10-23 Entities and the plane to be selectedto apply the symmetric mate

Figure 10-24 Assembly after applying thesymmetric mate

SymmetricThe Symmetric button available in the Mate Settings rollout is used to apply theSymmetric mate between two components. Using this mate, a symmetric relationis applied between two components. To apply the Symmetric mate, invoke the

Mate PropertyManager. Next, you need to select a plane or a planar face as a symmetryplane. The Symmetry Plane callout is attached to the symmetry plane. Now, select twoentities from two components. You can select edges, vertices, planar faces, or planes.The Symmetric button will be selected in the Mate Settings rollout. Choose the Previewbutton to preview the Symmetric mate applied to the assembly. Choose the OK buttonfrom the Symmetric PropertyManager. Figure 10-23 shows the entities and the plane tobe selected to apply the Symmetric mate. Figure 10-24 shows Symmetric mate appliedto the assembly.

PerpendicularThe Perpendicular button available in the Mate Settings rollout is used to applythe Perpendicular mate between two components. Invoke the MatePropertyManager and select two entities from two components. Choose the

Perpendicular button from the Mate Settings rollout. You can also toggle between theAligned radio button and the Anti-Aligned radio button. Choose the OK button fromthe Mate PropertyManager. Figure 10-25 shows the table displaying the combinationsfor applying the Perpendicular mate. Figure 10-26 shows the entities to be selected.Figure 10-27 shows the Perpendicular mate applied to the assembly.

c10-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:01 PM16


Figure 10-25 Table displaying the combinations for applying Perpendicular mate

Figure 10-26 Entities to be selected to apply theperpendicular mate

Figure 10-27 Assembly after applying theperpendicular mate

c10-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:01 PM17


Figure 10-29 Entities to be selected to apply thetangent mate

Figure 10-30 Assembly after applying thetangent mate

TangentThe Tangent button available in the Mate Settings rollout is used to apply theTangent mate between the two components. Figure 10-28 shows the tabledisplaying the combination for applying the tangent mate. Figure 10-29 shows

the entities to be selected to apply the tangent mate. Figure 10-30 shows the tangentmate applied to the assembly.

Figure 10-28 Table displaying the combinations for applying Tangent mate

c10-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:01 PM18


Assembling Components Using Smart Mates

The Smart Mates is the most attractive feature of the assembly design environmentof SolidWorks. The Smart Mates technology is the patent of SolidWorks Corporation.This also speeds up the design process in the assembly environment of SolidWorks.

To add smart mates to the components that are placed in the assembly, choose the SmartMates button from the Assembly toolbar. The SmartMates PropertyManager is displayed asshown in Figure 10-31.

The select cursor is replaced by the move cursor. The SmartMates button is chosen by defaultin the Move rollout. You need to double-click the entity of the first component to add a mate.The component will be displayed in transparent. The cursor will be replaced by the smartmates cursor. Press and hold down the left mouse button on the selected entity and drag thecursor to the entity with which you want to mate the previously selected entity. The symbol ofthe constraint that can be applied between two entities will be displayed below the smartmates cursor. You can use the TAB key to toggle between the aligned and the anti-alignedoption while applying Smart Mates. When the symbol of the mate is displayed below thecursor, release the left mouse button. Figure 10-32 shows the face to be selected to applysmart mate. Figure 10-33 shows the component being dragged.

Toolbar: Assembly > SmartMates

Figure 10-31 The SmartMates PropertyManager

c10-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:01 PM19


Figure 10-32 Face to be selected to apply smartmate

Figure 10-33 Component being dragged to applysmart mate

Figure 10-34 Concentric symbol appears below the smart matescursor

Figure 10-34 shows that the coincident symbol appears below the smart mates cursor whenthe cursor is placed near a circular face of the other component.

Figure 10-35 shows a planar face selected to apply smart mate. You can use the TAB key totoggle between the aligned and anti-aligned mates. Figure 10-36 shows that the concentricsymbol appears below the cursor after the component being dragged. Figure 10-37 shows theassembly after applying coincident mate using the smart mate.

NoteYou cannot define a Distance mate using smart mates. In other words, you cannot give anoffset distance between two mating surfaces using smart mates.

c10-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:01 PM20


Figure 10-35 Planar face to be selected to applya mate using smart mates

Figure 10-36 Coincident symbol appears afterdragging the component near another planar face

Figure 10-37 Coincident mate applied to the assembly using smartmates

Tip. You can also add smart mates without dragging the component. To add asmart mate without dragging, choose the Smart Mates button from the Assemblytoolbar. Double-click the entity from the first component. The component will bedisplayed in transparent. Now, select the entity from the second component. Themost appropriate mate will be applied between the two components.

NoteWhen you drag a component for applying a smart mate, the selected entity of the first componentwill snap all the corresponding entities of the second component. You can press the ALT key fromthe keyboard to exit the snap. To again enter the snap mode press the ALT key from the key board.

c10-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:02 PM21


Tip. You can add the geometry-based mates between two linear edges, two planarfaces, two vertices, two conical faces, two axes, between an axis and a conical face,and between two circular edges.

Geometry-Based MatesIn the assembly design environment of SolidWorks, you can also add geometry-based mates.Geometry-based mates are also a type of smart mates, and are applied while you are placinga component in the assembly environment. Consider a case in which the first component isalready placed in the assembly environment. Now, open the part document of the secondcomponent. Choose Window > Tile Horizontal or Tile Vertical from the menu manager.

Suppose, you need to insert the revolved feature of the second component in the circular slotof the first component. Also, the same time you also need to align the larger bottom face ofthe second component with the upper face of the first component. Press and hold down theleft mouse button on the edge of the second component as shown in Figure 10-38. Drag thecursor to the assembly window near the upper edge of the circular slot of the first component.The second component mated with the first component will be displayed in temporary graphicsas shown in Figure 10-39. The coincident symbol is also displayed below the smart matescursor. You can also toggle the direction of placement of the component. Figure 10-40 showsthat the direction of placement is flipped using the TAB key. Again press the TAB key toreturn to the default direction. Release the left mouse button to place the component. If youexpand the Mates option from the FeatureManager Design Tree, you will notice that twomates are applied to the assembly. One is the coincident mate and the second is the concentricmate. Figure 10-41 shows the assembly after adding the geometry-based smart mates.

Feature-Based MatesIn the assembly design environment of SolidWorks, you can also add feature-based mates. Foradding feature-based mates, one of the feature of first component must be a circular base or

Figure 10-38 Edge of the second component to beselected.

Figure 10-39 Component being dragged intothe assembly window for applying geometry-basedmates

c10-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:02 PM22


Figure 10-40 The placement direction ofcomponent is flipped using the TAB key

Figure 10-41 Assembly after adding ageometry-based mate

boss feature and the second component must have a hole or a circular cut feature. The featurecan be an extruded or a revolved feature. In the assembly document one of the feature mustbe placed earlier. Open the part document of the component to be placed using feature-basedmates. Tile both the document windows horizontally or vertically. In the FeatureManagerDesign Tree of the part document select the extruded or revolved feature and drag it to theassembly window. Place the cursor at a location where you need to place the component. Themate symbol will be displayed below the cursor. The preview of the part mates with the secondcomponent will be displayed in temporary graphics. You can also change the alignment ordirection of placement using the TAB key. Release the left mouse button to drop the component.Figure 10-42 shows the component being dragged by selecting the revolved feature from theFeatureManager Design Tree of part document. Figure 10-43 shows the preview of thecomponent being inserted into the hole of the second component using feature-based mates.Figure 10-44 shows the component assembled using feature-based mates.

Pattern-Based MatesPattern-based mates are used to assemble the components that have a circular pattern createdon the circular feature. The best example of this type of component is the flange or a shaftcoupling. Remember that to create pattern-based mates, all the components that willbe assembled must have a circular pattern on the mating faces. To create pattern-based mates,select the outer edge of the second component and drag it to the circular edge of the firstcomponent that is already placed in the assembly document. The preview of the component

Tip. Feature-based mates are applied only to the components having cylindrical orconical features. You cannot add feature-based mates using features other thancylindrical or conical geometry. If you are adding feature-based mates to a componenthaving a conical face, the second component must have a conical face. You cannotadd a feature-based mate if the geometry of the feature of one component is cylindricaland that of the second component is conical.

If you are adding feature-based mates using the features having conical geometry,there must be a planar face adjacent to the conical face of both features.

c10-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:02 PM23


Figure 10-42 Component being dragged by selecting the revolved feature

Figure 10-43 Preview of the component beinginserted using feature-based mates

Figure 10-44 Component assembled usingfeature-based mates

assembled with the first component will be displayed. Using the TAB key you can switch thepart with respect to the pattern instances. Release the left mouse button to drop the part.Figure 10-45 shows the component being dragged to the assembly document window.Figure 10-46 shows the preview of the component being assembled. Figure 10-47 shows thecomponent assembled using pattern-based mates.

Assembling Components Using Mate ReferenceIn SolidWorks you can define the mate reference to the Part in the part mode or in theAssembly mode. The mate references allow you to define the mating references such asplanar surfaces, axis, edges, and so on before assembling the component.

If is recommended that the mate reference should be added to the component in the Part

c10-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:02 PM24


Figure 10-45 Component being dragged into the assembly document

Figure 10-46 Preview of the component beingassembled using pattern-based mates

Figure 10-47 Component assembled usingpattern-based mates

mode. The mate references are created using the Mate Reference PropertyManager. TheMate Reference PropertyManager is invoked by choosing Insert > Mate Reference fromthe menu bar. The Mate Reference PropertyManager is shown in Figure 10-48.

The Mate Reference Name edit box is used to define the name of the mate reference. ThePrimary Reference Entity rollout is used to define the primary mate reference. The MateReference Type drop-down list is used to define the type of mate. The Mate ReferenceAlignment drop-down list is used to define the type of alignment.

The Secondary Reference Entity rollout is used to define the secondary mate reference. TheTertiary Reference Entity rollout is used to define the tertiary mate reference.

To assemble a component using the mate reference, you need to define the mate reference to

c10-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:02 PM25


both the components. The names of the mate reference should be the same for both thecomponents. After defining mate references to both the components, you need to place thefirst component coincident with the origin in the assembly document. Now, drag the secondcomponent and you will notice that the second component is aligned to the references thatwere defined as mate references. Therefore, you do not need to apply mates in the assemblyenvironment.

CREATING THE TOP-DOWN ASSEMBLIESAs mentioned earlier, top-down assemblies are the assemblies in which all the componentsare created in the same assembly file. However, to create the components, you require anenvironment in which you can draw the sketches or the sketched features and the environmentwhere you can convert the sketches into features. In other words, you can say that to create thecomponents in the assembly file you need a sketcher environment as well as a part modelingenvironment in the assembly file. In SolidWorks, you can invoke the sketcher environmentand the part modeling environment in the assembly document itself. The basic procedure tocreate the components in the assembly or in other words to create the top-down assembly isdiscussed next.

Figure 10-48 The Mate Reference PropertyManager

c10-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:02 PM26


Creating the Component in the Top-Down AssemblyBefore creating the first component in the top-down assembly, you first need to save theassembly document. After creating a new assembly document, choose the Save button fromthe Standard toolbar to save the assembly file. It is recommended that you create a new folderand save the assembly file and the other referenced file in the same folder.

Now, choose Insert > Component > New Part from the menu bar. The Save As dialog box isdisplayed and you need to specify the name and location to save the new component. Enterthe name of the new component in the File name edit box and choose the Save button. Theselect cursor will be replaced by the new component cursor. Now, you need to place the newcomponent in the assembly document. Using the left mouse button place the component oneither one of the three default assembly planes displayed in the FeatureManager DesignTree. The plane on which you place the component is selected as the sketching plane and thesketcher environment is invoked automatically. You will notice that the Edit Part button availablein the Assembly toolbar is selected. This means that the part modeling environment isinvoked in the assembly document. You can draw the sketch of the base feature in thecurrent sketching environment or you can also exit the sketching environment and select anyother sketching plane to create the sketch. After creating the sketch of the base feature, exitthe sketching environment. Now, as the Features toolbar is not available by default in thesketching environment, you need to invoke it. Use the tools in the Features toolbar to convertthe sketch into a model. Similarly, create the remaining features in the model.

After creating all the features, choose the Edit Part button from the Assembly toolbar to exitthe part modeling environment. The newly created component will have an Inplace matewith the default assembly plane on which it was placed earlier. Therefore, the newly createdcomponent is fixed. Using the procedure mentioned above, create other components.

Whenever you create a component in a top-down assembly, the component is fixed using theInplace mate. You can also delete this mate by selecting the Inplace mate by expanding theMates option available in the FeatureManager Design Tree. After selecting the mate use theDELETE key to delete the mate. Now, this component is floating, and you can move thiscomponent. You can also assemble this component according to your requirement. You willlearn more about fixed and floating components later in this chapter.

NoteAs discussed earlier, when you place the first component in the assembly in bottom-up assemblydesign approach, that component is fixed by default. Therefore, you cannot apply any mates toa fixed component. If you need to add some mates to that component, you first need to float that

component. Select the component either from the drawing area or from the FeatureManagerDesign Tree. Right-click to invoke the shortcut menu and choose the Float option from theshortcut menu. When you place the components other than the first component, the componentis a floating component by default. If you need to fix that component, select the component andinvoke the shortcut menu. Choose the Fix option from the shortcut menu.

c10-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:02 PM27


MOVING THE INDIVIDUAL COMPONENTS

SolidWorks allows you to move the individual unconstrained components in theassembly document without affecting the position and location of the othercomponents. The Move Component tool is used to move components. Choose the

Move Component button from the Assembly toolbar or choose Tools > Component > Movefrom the menu bar. The Move Component PropertyManager is invoked. You will notice thatthe Free Drag option is selected in the Move drop-down list. Therefore, you are prompted toselect a component and drag it to move. The select cursor is replaced by the move cursor;select the component and drag the cursor to move the component. Release the left mousebutton to drop the component on the desired location. The other options available in theMove drop-down list to move the component are discussed next.

Along Assembly XYZUsing the Along Assembly XYZ option from the Move drop-down list, you can move thecomponent dynamically along the X, Y, and Z axis of assembly document. Choose the AlongAssembly XYZ option from the Move drop-down list. An assembly coordinate system in redcolor is displayed in the drawing area and you are prompted to select a component and dragparallel to an assembly axis to move along that axis. Select the component and drag to moveit along any of the assembly axis.

Along EntityThe Along Entity option available in the Move drop-down list is used to move the componentalong the direction of the selected entity. When you invoke this option, the Selected itemdisplay area is displayed. You are prompted to select an entity to drag along and then selecta component and drag to move it. Select an entity to define the direction in which you needto move the component. The name of the selected entity is displayed in the Selected itemdisplay area. Now, select and drag the component to move.

By Delta XYZThe By Delta XYZ option available in the Move drop-down list is used to move the selectedcomponent to a given distance in a specified direction. When you select this option, theDelta X, Delta Y, and Delta Z spinners are invoked and you are prompted to select a componentand enter the distance to move in the PropertyManager. Select the component to move andspecify the distance in the spinners in the direction in which you need to move the component.Choose the Apply button to move the component.

To XYZ PositionThe To XYZ Position option is used to specify the coordinates of the origin of the part wherethe component will be placed after moving. When you select this option, the X Coordinate,Y Coordinate, and the Z Coordinate spinners are invoked and you are prompted to select acomponent and enter the XYZ coordinates for the part’s origin. Select the component andenter the coordinates in the spinners and choose the Apply button.

Toolbar: Assembly > Move ComponentMenu: Tools > Component > Move

c10-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:02 PM28


ROTATING THE INDIVIDUAL COMPONENTS

SolidWorks allows you to rotate the individual unconstrained components in theassembly document without affecting the position and location of the othercomponents. The Rotate Component tool is used to rotate component. Choose the

Rotate Component button from the Assembly toolbar or choose Tools > Component >Rotate from the menu bar. The Rotate Component PropertyManager is invoked. You willnotice that the Free Drag option is selected in the Rotate drop-down list. Therefore, you areprompted to select a component and drag to rotate it. The select cursor is replaced by therotate cursor; select the component and drag the cursor to rotate the component. The otheroptions available in the Rotate drop-down list to rotate the component are discussed next.

Along EntityThe Along Entity option available in the Rotate drop-down list is used to rotate the componentwith respect to the selected entity. The selected entity is defined as the rotational axis. Whenyou invoke this option, the Selected item display area is displayed and you are prompted toselect an axis entity to rotate about. Select an entity to define the rotational axis. The name ofthe selected entity is displayed in the Selected item display area. Now, select and drag thecomponent around the selected axis.

By Delta XYZThe By Delta XYZ option available in the Rotate drop-down list is used to rotate the selectedcomponent to a given incremental angle along the specified axis. When you select this option,the Delta X, Delta Y, and Delta Z spinners are invoked and you are prompted to select acomponent and enter the desired rotation in the PropertyManager. Select the component torotate and specify the rotation angle in the spinners in the direction in which you need torotate the component. Choose the Apply button to rotate the component.

Toolbar: Assembly > Rotate ComponentMenu: Tools > Component > Rotate

Tip: You can toggle between the Move PropertyManager, RotatePropertyManager, and the SmartMates PropertyManager. If you invoke theMove PropertyManager, invoke the Rotate rollout to switch to the RotatePropertyManager. If you select the SmartMates button, then the system willswitch you to the SmartMates PropertyManager. From the Rotate orSmartMates PropertyManager, if you invoke the Move rollout, the system willswitch you to the Move PropertyManager

c10-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:02 PM29


TUTORIALS

Tutorial 1In this tutorial you will create all the components of the Bench Vice and then assemble them.The bench vice assembly is shown in Figure 10-49. The dimensions of the various componentsare given in Figures 10-50 through 10-53. (Expected time: 2 hrs 45 min)

Figure 10-50 Views and dimensions of the Vice Body

Figure 10-49 Bench Vice assembly

c10-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:02 PM30


Figure 10-51 Views and dimensions of Vice Jaw

c10-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:02 PM31


Figure 10-52 Views and dimensions of Clamping plate, oval fillister, Set screw 1, and Set screw 2

The steps to be followed to complete the assembly are listed below:

a. Create all the components in individual part documents and save them. The partdocuments will be saved in /My Documents/SolidWorks/c10/Bench Vice.

b. Open Vice Body and Vice Jaw part documents and define the mate references in both thepart documents.

c. Create a new assembly document and open all the part documents. Place the firstcomponent, which is Vice Body, by dragging and dropping from the part document window.Now, drag and drop the Vice Jaw in the assembly document. It will automatically assemblewith the Vice Jaw because the mate references are already defined in both the partdocuments, refer to Figures 10-57 and 10- 58.

d. Drag and drop the jaw screw in the assembly document. Apply the required mates, referto Figures 10-60 through 10-65.

e. Next, analyze the assembly for degrees of freedom.f. After analyzing the assembly, apply the required mates to constrain all the degrees of

freedom, refer to Figures 10-66 and 10-67.

c10-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:02 PM32


g. Next, assemble the Clamping Plate, refer to Figure 10-69 through Figure 10-71.h. Next, assemble the Oval Fillister using the feature based mates, refer to Figure 10-72.i. Similarly, assemble the other components.

Creating the Components1. Create all the components of the Bench Vice assembly as separate part documents. Specify

the names of the files as shown in Figures 10-50 through 10-53. The files should be savedin the directory /My Documents/SolidWorks/c10/Bench Vice.

Creating the Mate ReferencesIn this tutorial you will assemble the first two components of the assembly using the matereferences. For assembling the components using the mate references, first you need tocreate the mate reference. Therefore, you need to open the part documents in which youwill add the mate references.

Figure 10-53 Views and dimensions of Clamping plate, Jaw screw, Screw bar, and Bar globes

c10-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:02 PM33


1. Choose the Open button from the Standard toolbar. The Open dialog box isdisplayed.

2. Double click the vice body.

The vice-body part document is opened in the SolidWorks window.

3. Choose Insert > Mate Reference from the menu bar.

The Mate Reference PropertyManager is invoked. The selection mode in the PrimaryReference Entity display area is active.

4. Select the planar face shown in Figure 10-54 of the model as the primary reference. Theselected planar face will be highlighted in green.

5. Select the Coincident option from the Mate Reference Type drop-down list.

The selection mode in the Secondary Reference Entity display area is active.

6. Select the planar face shown in Figure 10-54 of the model as the secondary reference.The selected face will be highlighted in red.

7. Select the Coincident option from the Mate Reference Type drop-down list.

The selection mode in the Tertiary Reference Entity display area is active.

8. Select the planar face of the model shown in Figure 10-54 as the tertiary reference. Theselected face will be highlighted in brown.

Figure 10-54 Faces to be selected as mate references

c10-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:02 PM34


Figure 10-55 Faces to be selected as mate references

9. Select the Parallel option from the Mate Reference Type drop-down list.

10. Enter Vice Mate Reference as the name of mate reference in the Mate Reference editbox available in the Reference Name rollout.

11. Choose the OK button from the Mate Reference PropertyManager.

12. Similarly, create the mate reference in the Vice Jaw part document. The faces to be selectedas reference are displayed in Figure 10-55. The names of the mate references should besame in both the part documents.

Assembling First Two Components of the AssemblyAfter creating the mate references to the part documents, you need to assemble thecomponents. For assembling the components you need to create a new assembly document.After creating the new assembly document open all the part documents of bench viceassembly and tile all the documents vertically or horizontally.

1. Create a new assembly document. If the origin is not displayed in the drawing area,choose View > Origin from the menu bar to display the origin.

2. Open the part documents of Vice Body and Vice Jaw and choose Window > TileHorizontal/Vertical.

As discussed earlier, the first component should be placed coincident to the origin of theassembly document. Therefore, you will drag and drop the first component at the originof the assembly.

3. Move the cursor on the name of the vice body part document in the FeatureManager

c10-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:02 PM35


Figure 10-56 First component being dropped at the origin of the assembly document

Design Tree and press and hold down the left mouse button.

4. Drag the cursor in the drawing area of the assembly document. Release the left mousebutton to drop the part when the cursor snaps to the origin of the assembly document.

Figure 10-56 shows the part being dropped into the assembly document.

Next, you need to place the second component in the assembly. As discussed earlier, thesecond component of the assembly, which is the Vice Jaw, will be assembled with the vicebody using the mate references.

5. Expand the assembly document window. Move the cursor to the title bar of the assemblydocument. The cursor will be replaced by the window expand cursor. Drag the cursor toexpand the assembly document window.

6. Move the cursor on the name of the vice jaw part document in the FeatureManagerDesign Tree. Press and hold down the right mouse button and drag the cursor to theassembly document.

c10-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:02 PM36


Figure 10-57 Second component being dragged

When you drag the cursor close to the vice body in the assembly document, the previewof the vice jaw assembled with the vice body is displayed in the assembly document.

7. Drag the component at the required location. The mates specified in the mate referenceswill be applied between the vice jaw and the vice body.

Figure 10-57 shows the second component being dragged in the assembly document.Figure 10-58 shows the vice jaw assembled with the vice body.

It is recommended that you close the part documents from which the parts are placed inthe assembly document.

8. Close the part document windows of the parts that are placed in assembly document.

Tip. The mates that are defined in the mate reference are applied to the componentswhen you place the components in the assembly. You can view the mates applied toboth the components by expanding the Mates option from the FeatureManagerDesign Tree of the assembly document.

c10-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:02 PM37


Figure 10-58 Vice jaw assembled with the Vice Body

Assembling the Jaw screwNow, you need to place the Jaw Screw in the assembly document.

1. Open the part file of Jaw Screw and drag and drop the Jaw Screw in the assembly document.

2. Close the part document and maximize the assembly document.

Figure 10-59 shows the Jaw Screw placed arbitrarily in the assembly document. Next, youneed to add the assembly mates to assemble the components placed in the assembly.

3. Choose the SmartMates button from the Assembly toolbar or invoke the shortcut

Figure 10-59 Jaw Screw placed in the assembly document

c10-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:02 PM38


Figure 10-60 Face to be selected Figure 10-61 Jaw screw being dragged

Figure 10-62 Concentric mate applied between the Jaw Screw and the Vice Body

menu, and choose the SmartMates option from the shortcut menu. The SamrtMatesPropertyManager is displayed and the select cursor is replaced by the move cursor.

4. Move the cursor to the cylindrical face of the jaw screw as shown in Figure 10-60.Double-click the face. The jaw screw is displayed as transparent.

The move cursor is replaced by the smart mates cursor.

5. Hold the Jaw Screw close to the bottom end and drag it to the hole in the vice body asshown in Figure 10-61. The symbol of concentric mate will be displayed below the cursor.

6. Drop the jaw screw at this location to add a concentric mate between the cylindrical faceof the Jaw Screw and the hole on the Vice Body. Figure 10-62 shows the Jaw Screw assembledto the Vice Body.

c10-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:02 PM39


Figure 10-63 Face to be selected Figure 10-64 Face to be selected

Next, you need apply the coincident mate between the planar faces of the jaw screw andthe vice jaw.

7. Choose the Mate button from the Assembly toolbar to invoke the MatePropertyManager. You are prompted to select the entities to be mated.

8. Rotate the model and select the face of the vice jaw as shown in Figure 10-63. Next, selectthe face of the jaw screw as shown in Figure 10-64.

As soon as you select the faces, the Coincident button is displayed as selected in the MatePropertyManager.

9. Choose the OK button from the Mate PropertyManager. The assembly after addingthe Coincident mate is displayed in Figure 10-65.

In real world, there are two types of assemblies. First one is the fully defined assembly inwhich all the degrees of freedom of all components are restricted. The other type ofassemblies are those in which some degrees of freedom of the components are left free sothat they can move or rotate. This type of assemblies are used for mechanism, which youwill learn in the next chapter.

After adding the Coincident mate, you need to move the assembly to analyze the degreeof freedom of the assembly. After analyzing the assembly you will add the mates toconstrain that degree of freedom.

10. Choose the Move button from the Assembly toolbar. The Move PropertyManageris displayed.

11. Select the jaw screw from the drawing area and drag the cursor.

You will notice that the jaw screw is rotating on its axis and moving along the X axis. Also,it is forcing the Vice Jaw to move along the X axis. Originally, this degree of freedom of

c10-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:02 PM40


Vice Jaw and Jaw Screw needs to be left free so that the assembly can function. But in thischapter you will restrict this degree of freedom also to create a fully defined assembly.

12. Invoke the Mate PropertyManager and select the faces shown in Figures 10-66 and 10-67.

13. Choose the Distance button from the Mate Settings rollout and set the Distance spinnervalue to 10.

14. Choose the Keep Visible button from the Mate PropertyManager and then choose theOK button.

15. Invoke the FeatureManager Design Tree flyout and select the Top assembly plane. Now,expand the jaw-screw from the FeatureManager Design Tree and select the Top plane.

Figure 10-66 Face to be selected Figure 10-67 Face to be selected

Figure 10-65 After applying the coincident mate to the jaw screw

c10-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:02 PM41


16. Choose the Angle button from the Mate Settings rollout and set the value of the Anglespinner to 45.

17. Choose the Keep Visible button and then choose the OK button from the MatePropertyManager to close it.

Assembling the Clamping PlateNow, you need to assemble the Clamping Plate with the assembly.

1. Open the part document of the Clamping Plate and drag and drop it into the assemblydocument.

2. Rotate the assembly such that the bottom face of the assembly is displayed as shown inFigure 10-68.

3. Choose the Rotate button from the Assembly toolbar and select the clampingplate.

4. Drag the cursor to rotate the clamping plate as shown in Figure 10-69.

5. Apply the Concentric mate between the two cylindrical faces of the clamping plate andthe two holes of the vice jaw, refer to Figure 10-70. You may have to move the ClampingPlate after applying the first mate.

Figure 10-68 Rotated assembly Figure 10-69 Clamping after rotating

Tip. If you need two or more than two instances of a component in the assembly,press and hold down the CTRL key and select the component. Now, drag the cursorand place the instance at a suitable location in the assembly document.

While adding the mates to the assembly, if a component is placed inside anothercomponent or in the assembly, choose the Move button and select the componentfrom the FeatureManager Design Tree and drag the cursor to move the component.

c10-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:02 PM42


Figure 10-71 Faces to be selected to apply mate

Using the Move Component tool, move the Clamping Plate. Now, apply the Coincidentmate between the faces of the clamping plate and the vice jaw as shown in Figure 10-71.

Similarly, assemble the Screw Bar, Support Plates, and Bar Globes. The assembly afterassembling all these components is shown in Figure 10-72.

Figure 10-70 Faces to be selected to apply mate

Tip. While assembling the Screw Bar you need to apply a coincident mate betweenthe Right plane of the Screw Bar and the Top plane of the Jaw Screw. For applyingthis mate you need to invoke the FeatureManager Design Tree flyout for selectingthe planes.

c10-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:02 PM43


Assembling the Remaining ComponentsNext, you need to assemble the Oval Fillister, Set Screw 1, and Set Screw 2. These fastenerswill be assembled using feature-based mates.

1. Close the part file of all the components, if open.

2. Open the part files of Oval Fillisters, Set Screw 1, and Set Screw 2.

3. Choose Window > Tile Horizontal from the menu bar to rearrange the windows.

4. Select the Revolve feature from the FeatureManager Design Tree of the Oval fillisterpart document. Drag the cursor to place the component in the assembly as shown inFigure 10-73.

5. Drop the component when the coincident symbol is displayed below the cursor.

Similarly, assemble the Set Screw 1 and Set screw 2 using feature-based mates. You mayhave to use the TAB key to reverse the directions. The assembly after assembling all thecomponents is shown in Figure 10-74.

6. Choose the Save button to save the assembly.

Figure 10-72 Assembly after assembling the Vice Body, Vice Jaw,Jaw Screw, Screw Bar, Clamping Plate, Base Plate, Bar Globes

c10-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:02 PM44


Figure 10-74 Final assembly

Figure 10-73 Dragging the Oval Fillisters in the assembly using feature-based mates

c10-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:02 PM45


Tutorial 2In this tutorial you will create all the components of the Pipe Vice and then assemble them.The pipe vice assembly is shown in Figure 10-75. The dimensions of the various componentsare given in Figures 10-76 and 10-77. (Expected time: 2 hrs 45 min)

Figure 10-75 Pipe vice assembly

c10-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:02 PM46


Figure 10-76 Views and dimensions of the base

The steps to be followed to complete the assembly are listed below:

You need to create all the components of the Pipe Vice assembly as separate part documents.After creating the parts you will assemble the parts in the assembly file. Therefore, in thistutorial you are using the bottom-up approach for creating the assembly.

a. Create all the components in individual part documents and save them. The partdocuments will be saved in /My Documents/SolidWorks/c10/Pipe Vice.

b. Open an assembly document. Place the base at the origin of the assembly.c. Place the Moveable Jaw and the screw in the assembly. Apply the mates between Moveable

Jaw and the Screw, refer to Figures 10-78 through 10-80.d. Now, assemble the Screw with the Base.e. Place the other components in the assembly and apply the required mates to the assembly,

refer to Figure 10-81.

c10-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:02 PM47


Creating the Components1. Create all the components of the Pipe Vice assembly as separate part documents. Specify

the names of the files as shown in Figures 10-76 and 10-77. The files should be saved inthe directory /My Documents/SolidWorks/c10/Pipe Vice.

Inserting the First Component in the AssemblyAfter creating all the components of the pipe vice assembly, you need to create a newassembly document and place the first component using the Insert menu. In this tutorial,you will add the components using the Insert menu.

1. Create a new assembly document and choose View > Origins from the menu bar todisplay the origin.

Figure 10-77 Views and dimensions of the screw, handle, moveable jaw, and handle screw

c10-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:02 PM48


2. Choose Insert > Component > From File from the menu bar. The Open dialog box isdisplayed. Double click on Base.SLDPRT.

3. The select cursor will be replaced by the part cursor. Move the cursor to the origin; thesymbol of coincident mate is displayed below the cursor. Place the component at thislocation.

4. Choose the Isometric button from the Views toolbar to set the current view to isometricview.

5. Choose View > Origins from the menu bar to turn off the display of origin.

Inserting and Assembling the Moveable Jaw and the ScrewAfter placing the first component in the assembly document, you need to place themoveable jaw and the screw in the assembly document. After placing these componentsyou will apply the required mates.

1. Choose Insert > Component > From File from the menu bar. The Open dialog box isdisplayed.

2. Double-click on Moveable Jaw.SLDPRT. Place the component anywhere in the assemblydocument such that it does not interfere with existing components.

3. Similarly, place the screw in the assembly document. Figure 10-78 shows the Moveable Jawand screw placed in the assembly document.

First, you need to assemble the Screw with the Moveable Jaw. Therefore, for assemblingthe Screw with the Moveable Jaw you need to fix the Moveable Jaw.

Figure 10-78 The Moveable Jaw and Screw placed in the assembly document

c10-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:02 PM49


4. Select the Moveable Jaw from the drawing area or from the FeatureManager DesignTree. Right-click to invoke the shortcut menu.

5. Choose the Fix option from the shortcut menu. The Moveable Jaw is fixed and youcannot move or rotate the Moveable Jaw.

6. Choose the SmartMates button from the Assembly toolbar. Double-click the lowermostcylindrical face of the Screw. The Screw will be displayed in transparent.

7. Drag the cursor to the hole located on the top of the Moveable Jaw. Release the leftmouse button as soon as the concentric symbol is displayed below the cursor.

8. Select the Screw and move it up so that it is not inside the Moveable Jaw.

9. Right-click in the drawing area and choose Clear Selections to clear the current selection.

10. Rotate the model and double-click the lower flat face of the Screw; the Screw will bedisplayed in transparent.

11. Again, rotate the model and select the top planar face of the Moveable Jaw. Choose theOK button from the SmartMates PropertyManager. Figure 10-79 shows the Screw afterapplying the mates.

Next, you need to assemble the Screw and the Moveable Jaw with the Base.

12. Select the Moveable Jaw and invoke the shortcut menu. Choose the Float option from theshortcut menu.

Now, the Moveable Jaw and the Screw assembled to it can be moved.

13. Using smart mates, mate the cylindrical face of the screw and the hole created at the topface of the Base.

14. Invoke the Mate PropertyManager and select the front planar face of the Moveable Jawand the front planar face of the base.

15. Choose the Parallel button from the Mate Settings rollout.

16. Choose the Keep Visible button from the Mate PropertyManager and then choose theOK button.

17. Next, select the faces as shown in the Figure 10-80.

18. Choose the Distance button from the Mate Settings rollout. Set the value of the Distancespinner to 35.

c10-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:02 PM50


19. Choose the Keep Visible button from the Mate PropertyManager and then choose theOK button to close it.

Similarly, assemble the other components of Pipe Vice. Figure 10-81 shows the final pipevice assembly.

20. Choose the Save button to save the assembly file.

Figure 10-80 Faces to be selectedFigure 10-79 The screw assembled to the moveablejaw

Figure 10-81 Final pipe vice assembly

c10-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:02 PM51



1. The bottom-up assembly design approach is the traditional and the most widely preferredapproach of assembly design. (T/F)

2. In the top-down assembly design approach, all the components are created in the sameassembly file. (T/F)

3. The Coincident mate is generally applied to make the two planar faces coplanar. (T/F)

4. The most suitable mates that can be applied to the current selection set are displayed inthe Mate Settings rollout of the Mate PropertyManager. (T/F)

5. Feature-based mates are applied only to the components having cylindrical or conicalfeatures. (T/F)

6. Pattern-based mates are used to assemble the components that have a circular patterncreated on the circular feature. (T/F)

7. Choose the __________ button from the Assembly toolbar to invoke the Rotate ComponentPropertyManager.

8. The __________ option available in the Rotate drop-down list is used to rotate the selectedcomponent to a given incremental angle along the specified axis.

9. The __________ mate is generally used to align the central axis of one component withthe central axis of the other.

10. The __________ option available in the Move drop-down list is used to move the componentalong the direction of the selected entity.


1. The names of the selected entities are displayed in the __________ display area of theMate PropertyManager.

2. Choose __________ from the menu bar to place a component in the assembly document.

3. Using the __________ option from the Move drop-down list, you can move the componentdynamically along the X, Y, and Z axis of assembly document.

4. The __________ button available in the Mate Settings rollout is used to make the twoselected entities normal to each other.

c10-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:02 PM52


5. The __________ option is used to specify the coordinates of the origin of the part wherethe component will be placed after moving.

6. If you are adding feature-based mates using the features having conical geometry, thenthere must be a __________ face adjacent to the conical face of both the features.

7. The most widely used method of adding the mates to components in the assembly inSolidWorks is

(a) Smart Mates (b) Mate PropertyManager(c) By dragging from part document (d) None of these

8. Which button is used to make the Mate PropertyManager available after applying a mateto the selected entities?

(a) Help (b) OK(c) Keep Visible (d) Cancel

9. Which option available in the Rotate drop-down list is used to rotate the component withrespect to the selected entity?

(a) Along Entity (b) Selected Edge(c) Reference Entity (d) None of these

10. Which option is used to specify the coordinates of the origin of the part where thecomponent will be placed after moving?

(a) To XYZ Position (b) Reference Position(b) Along Entity (c) None of these

EXERCISE

Exercise 1Create the Plummer Block assembly as shown in Figure 10-82. The dimensions of thecomponents of this assembly are shown in Figure 10-83 through Figure 10-85.

c10-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:02 PM53


Figure 10-82 Plummer Block assembly

Figure 10-83 Views and dimensions of Casting

c10-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:02 PM54


Figure 10-84 Views and dimensions of Cap

c10-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:02 PM55


Figure 10-85 Views and dimensions of Brasses, Nut, Lock Nut, and Bolt

Answers to Self-Evaluation Test1. T, 2. T, 3. T, 4. T, 5. T, 6. T, 7. Rotate Component, 8. By Delta XYZ, 9. Coincident, 10.Along Entity

c10-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:02 PM56

Chapter 11

Assembly Modeling-II

After completing this chapter you will be able to:• Create Subassemblies.• Delete the Components and Subassemblies.• Edit the Assembly Mates.• Replace the Mate Entities.• Edit Components and Subassemblies.• Dissolve Subassemblies.• Replace Components in Assemblies.• Create Patterns of the Components in the Assembly.• Create Mirrored Components.• Hide and Suppress Components in Assemblies.• Change the Transparency Condition of the Assembly.• Create Assembly Envelope• Check the Interference in the Assembly.• Create Assemblies for Mechanism.• Detect the Collision while the Assembly is in Motion.• Create the Exploded State of the Assembly.• Create the Explode Line Sketch.

Learning Objectives

c11-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:05 PM1


CREATING SUBASSEMBLIESIn the previous chapter, you learnt to place the components in the assembly document andapply the assembly mates to the components. In this chapter you will learn how to create thesubassemblies and place the subassemblies in the main assembly.

For placing the subassemblies in the main assembly, there are two approaches that are followedin the assembly design environment. These two approaches are discussed next.

Bottom-up Subassembly DesignIn the Bottom-up Subassembly design approach, the subassembly is created in the assemblyenvironment and then it is saved as an assembly file. When you need to place the subassemblyin the main assembly, open the main assembly document and choose Insert > Component >From File from the menu bar. The Open dialog box is displayed; choose Assembly (*.asm,*.sldasm) from the Files of Type drop-down list. All the assemblies saved in the current locationwill be displayed in the display area. Select the subassembly from the display area and choosethe Open button from the Open dialog box. Select a point in the drawing area to place thesubassembly. Now, using the assembly mates, assemble the subassembly with the main assembly.Figure 11-1 shows a subassembly of piston and articulated rod. Figure 11-2 shows the mainassembly of the piston and master rod. Figure 11-3 shows the main assembly after assemblingthe subassembly with the main assembly.

Top-down Subassembly DesignThe Top-down Subassembly design approach is the most flexible subassembly designapproach. In this, you create a new subassembly in the main assembly document. This approachis generally used in conceptual design or while managing a large assembly. To create a newsubassembly in the assembly document, choose Insert > Component > New Assembly fromthe menu bar. The Save As dialog box is displayed; save the subassembly in the currentlocation. You can drag and place the components in the new subassembly from theFeatureManager Design Tree. You will learn more about this approach while discussing theediting of assemblies and subassemblies.

Figure 11-1 A subassembly Figure 11-2 A main assembly

c11-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:05 PM2

Assembly Modeling-II 11-3

Figure 11-3 Main assembly after assembling the subassemblies

Tip. You can also place a subassembly in the main assembly using the drag anddrop method that was discussed in the previous chapter.

When you place a subassembly in the main assembly, an assembly icon will bedisplayed with the name of the subassembly in the FeatureManager Design Tree.If you expand the subassembly in the FeatureManager Design Tree, all the partsassembled in the subassembly will be displayed.

You can also create a subassembly of the components that are already placed in anassembly file. Press and hold down the CTRL key and select the components eitherfrom the drawing area or from the FeatureManager Design Tree. Invoke theshortcut menu and choose Form New Sub-assembly Here from the menu bar orchoose Assembly from [Selected] Components from the menu bar. The Save Asdialog box is displayed; you need to enter the name of the subassembly and save itin the current location. You will observe that the selected components will be combinedand an assembly icon will be displayed in the FeatureManager Design Tree.

DELETING COMPONENTS AND SUBASSEMBLIESAfter creating the assembly, at a certain stage of your design cycle you may need to delete anycomponent or the subassembly. To delete a component of the assembly, select the componenteither from the drawing area or from the FeatureManager Design Tree. Invoke the shortcutmenu and expand it; choose the Delete option from the shortcut menu. You can also deletethe selected component by pressing the DELETE key from the keyboard. When you delete acomponent, the Confirm Delete dialog box is displayed. The name of the component andthe items dependent on that component are displayed in this dialog box. Choose the Yesbutton from the Confirm Delete dialog box.

c11-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:05 PM3


If you need to delete the subassembly, select the subassembly from the FeatureManager DesignTree and press the DELETE key. The Confirm Delete dialog box is displayed, choose theYES button from this dialog box. You should note that when you delete the subassembly, allthe components of the subassembly are deleted.

EDITING ASSEMBLY MATESGenerally, after creating the assembly or during the process of assembling the components,you need to edit the assembly mates. The editing operations that can be performed on theassembly mates are modifying the type of assembly mate, modifying the angle and offsetvalues, changing the component to which the mate was applied, and so on. In SolidWorks,for editing the mates, you first need to expand the Mates option available at the bottom ofthe FeatureManager Design Tree. Now, select the mate that you need to modify and invokethe shortcut menu. Choose the Edit Definition option from the shortcut menu. The MatePropertyManager will be displayed. The name of the Mate PropertyManager will dependon the name and sequence of the mate applied. Figure 11-4 shows the Mate PropertyManagerto edit the Concentric mate. You can edit the entities to mate, type of mate, value of offset,value of angle, and so on using this PropertyManager.

Figure 11-4 The Mate PropertyManager to edit the Concentric mate

c11-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:05 PM4


Replacing the Mated Entities

As discussed, you can edit the mate entities using the Mate PropertyManager. Themate entities can also be modified using the Mated Entities PropertyManager. Selectthe Mate option from the FeatureManager Design Tree and invoke the shortcut

menu. Choose the Replace Mate Entities option from the shortcut menu. The Mated EntitiesPropertyManager is displayed as shown in Figure 11-5. You can customize the Assemblytoolbar and place the Replace Mate Entities button in the Assembly toolbar.

Figure 11-5 The Mated Entities PropertyManager

Tip. When you move the cursor on a mate in the FeatureManager Design Tree,the entities used in the mate are highlighted in red color in the drawing area. Whenyou select the mate from the FeatureManager Design Tree, the entities used inthe selected mate will be highlighted in green color in the drawing area.

Toolbar: Assembly > Replace Mate Entities

c11-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:05 PM5


When you invoke the Mated Entities PropertyManager, you are prompted to select the entityto be replaced. Select the entity from the Mate Entities display area. You can also expand theentity tree to edit the individual mate. After selecting, the selected face will be highlighted ingreen color in the drawing area. The name of the selected the entity will be displayed in theReplacement Mate Entity display area. You are prompted to select entity to be mated. Selectthe entity that will replace the previously selected entity. If the selected entity overdefines themate, or the mating is not possible between the entities then the SolidWorks dialog box willbe displayed. You will be informed about the possible cause of error.

The Flip Mate Alignment button is used to flip the direction of mate. The Disable Previewbutton is used to disable the preview of the assembly after replacing the mate entity. TheShow All check box is used to display all the mated entities.

EDITING THE COMPONENTS

After placing and mating the components in the assembly document, at some stageof design cycle you may need to edit the components. The editing of componentsincludes editing the features, editing the sketches, and editing the sketch planes. For

editing the components, you first need to select the component and invoke the part modelingenvironment in the assembly document. Select the component either from the drawing areaor from the FeatureManager Design Tree. Now, choose the Edit Part button from the Assemblytoolbar. The part modeling environment will be invoked and the complete assembly exceptthe selected component will be displayed in transparent. The name of the component to beedited will be displayed in red in the FeatureManager Design Tree. Select the desired featureto edit, and invoke the shortcut menu. The PropertyManager relative to that feature will bedisplayed and you can easily edit the parameters of the feature. You can also add new featuresto the component. This type of edit is technically termed as Editing in the Context of Assembly.After editing the component, again choose the Edit Part button from the Assembly tool toreturn to the assembly environment.

NoteIf you need to edit components separately in their part documents, select the component andinvoke the shortcut menu. Choose Open“part name” from the shortcut menu. The part documentof the selected component will be opened. You can edit the component individually in the partdocument. After editing the component, save the part and close the part document and return tothe assembly document. The SolidWorks 2003 dialog box will be displayed as shown inFigure 11-6. This dialog box prompts you that the models contained within the assembly havechanged. Would you like to rebuild the assembly now? Choose the Yes button from this dialog box.

Tip. Select the Mate option from the FeatureManager Design Tree, and invokethe shortcut menu. Choose the Parent/Child Relationship option from the shortcutmenu. The Parent Child Relationship dialog box will be displayed. You candisplay the child and parent relationship of any component placed in the assemblyusing the Parent Child Relationship dialog box.

Toolbar: Assembly > Edit PartMenu: Edit > Part

c11-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:05 PM6


Figure 11-6 The SolidWorks 2003 dialog box

EDITING THE SUBASSEMBLIES

To edit the subassemblies, select the subassembly from the FeatureManager DesignTree and choose the Edit Part button from the Assembly toolbar. The entire assemblyexcept the selected subassembly will be displayed in transparent. You can add

components in the subassembly, modify the mates, and replace the components while inthe editing mode. After editing the subassembly, choose the Edit Part button to exit the editing mode.

NoteFor editing a component of the subassembly, select the component from the drawing area andinvoke the shortcut menu. Choose the Edit Part option from the shortcut menu. The partediting mode will be invoked in the assembly document.

To select the component of the subassembly from the FeatureManager Design Tree, you needto expand the subassembly. All the components assembled in that subassembly will be displayedwhen you expand the subassembly.

DISSOLVING THE SUBASSEMBLYDissolving the subassembly means the components of the subassembly become the componentsof the current assembly. When you dissolve a subassembly, the subassembly is removed fromthe main assembly and the components of the subassembly become the components of themain assembly. To dissolve a subassembly, select the subassembly from the FeatureManager

Tip. You can also modify the dimensions of a component assembled or placed in theassembly by double-clicking the feature of that component. All the dimensions ofthat feature will be displayed in the drawing area. Invoke the Modify dialog box bydouble-clicking the dimension to modify. Enter the new dimension in the Modifydialog box and choose the ENTER key from the key board. Since the dimension ismodified, but the geometry of the feature has not changed, therefore, you need torebuild the assembly. Choose the Rebuild button from the Standard toolbar torebuild the entire assembly. You can also rebuild the assembly using CTRL+B keyfrom the keyboard.

While in the part editing mode in the assembly document, you can use the Move/SizeFeatures tool to edit the features dynamically using editing handles.

Toolbar: Assembly > Edit PartMenu: Edit > Part

c11-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:05 PM7


Design Tree and invoke the shortcut menu. Choose the Dissolve Sub-assembly option fromthe shortcut menu. The subassembly will be removed from the FeatureManager Design Treeand the components of the subassembly will be displayed as the components of the mainassembly in the FeatureManager Design Tree.

REPLACING THE COMPONENTS

Sometimes, in the assembly design cycle you may need to replace a component ofthe assembly with some other component. To replace a component, select thecomponent to replace and invoke the shortcut menu. Choose the Replace option

from the shortcut menu. The Replace PropertyManager will be displayed as shown inFigure 11-7. You can also invoke the Replace PropertyManager by choosing the Replacebutton from the Assembly toolbar after customizing it.

When you invoke the Replace PropertyManager, you are prompted to select components tobe replaced. Select the component to be replaced. If the component is already selected beforeinvoking this tool, then that component will be selected automatically. The name of the selectedcomponent is displayed in the Components to be Replaced display area. Next, you need tospecify the replacement component. Choose the Browse button from the Selection rollout;the Open dialog box will be displayed. Select the replacement component and choose the

Figure 11-7 The Replace PropertyManager

Toolbar: Assembly > Replace (Customize to Add)

c11-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:05 PM8


Open button from the Open dialog box. The name and location of the replacement componentis displayed in the Replacement Component area.

The Re-attach mates check box is selected by default. This option is used to invoke the MateEntities PropertyManager after you choose the OK button from the ReplacePropertyManager. Using the Mate Entities PropertyManager, you can replace the mate entities.

If this check box is cleared, the Rebuild Errors dialog box is displayed after you exit theReplace PropertyManager. The Rebuild Errors dialog box informs you the name of themates that contain errors. Therefore, you need to redefine the mates. For redefining themates, expand the Mates option from the FeatureManager Design Tree. Select the mate thatcontains symbol on the left. Invoke the shortcut menu and choose the Edit Definitionoption. The Mate PropertyManager will be displayed and you can edit the mate entities.

The All instances check box available in the Selection rollout is used to replace all the instancesof the selected component. The options available in the Configuration area are used to definethe selection procedure of the configurations. You will learn more about configurations later.

Figure 11-8 shows the assembly in which the bolt is to be replaced by a pin. Figure 11-9 showsthe faces of the pin to be used as mate entities after replacing the component. Figure 11-10shows the isometric view of the assembly after bolts are replaced by pins.

Figure 11-8 Bolt to be replaced by a pin Figure 11-9 Mating entities to be replaced

c11-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:05 PM9


Figure 11-10 Bolt replaced by pin in the assembly

Tip. If symbol is displayed on the Mates option in the FeatureManagerDesign Tree, this means that this mate group has some errors. Expand the mategroup; the mate that displays sign will have some errors. Select that mate andinvoke the shortcut menu. Choose Whats Wrong? from the shortcut menu to displaythe Rebuild Errors dialog box. The possible cause of error will be displayed in theRebuild Errors dialog box.

If you select the Mate Diagnostic option from the shortcut menu, the DiagnosticsPropertyManager will be displayed. The Analyze button is used to display theentities that are the cause of errors in the mate. Choose the Analyze button; thename of the mate and the entity will be displayed in the Analyze Problem rollout.

Select the Mates mategroup with error symbol from the FeatureManager DesignTree and invoke the shortcut menu. You can choose the Whats Wrong? or MateDiagnostics option to analyze all the mates having errors.

CREATING PATTERNS OF THE COMPONENTS IN ANASSEMBLY

While working in the assembly design environment of SolidWorks, you may need to assemblemore than one instance of the component about a specified arrangement. Consider the caseof a flange coupling where you have to assemble eight instances of the nut and bolt to fastenthe coupling. Therefore, you need to make the instances of the nut and bolt and then assembleall the eight nuts and the eight bolts manually. However, this is a very tedious andtime-consuming precess. Therefore, to reduce the time in the assembly design cycle,

Menu: Insert > Component Pattern

c11-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:05 PM10


Figure 11-11 The Pattern Type dialog box

SolidWorks has provided a tool to create the patterns of the components. There are two typesof component patterns provided in SolidWorks. These are discussed next.

Derived PatternThe Derived Pattern option is used to pattern the instances of the components using anexisting pattern feature. For creating a derived pattern, choose Insert > Component Patternfrom the menu bar. The Pattern Type dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 11-11 andthe Use an existing feature pattern (Derived) radio button is selected by default.

Choose the Next button from the Pattern Type dialog box. The Derived Component Patterndialog box will be displayed as shown in Figure 11-12. The selection mode is active in theSeed Component(s) area. Select the component or components to pattern from the drawingarea or from the FeatureManager Design Tree. Now, click once in the Pattern Feature area toinvoke the selection mode and select any one instance of an existing pattern feature. Choosethe Finish button from the Derived Component Pattern dialog box.

Figure 11-13 shows the components to be selected to pattern and an instance of an existingpattern feature to be selected. Figure 11-14 shows the assembly after creating the derivedpattern feature.

c11-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:05 PM11


Figure 11-13 Components and the instance ofthe pattern feature to be selected

Figure 11-14 Assembly after creating the derivedcomponent pattern

Figure 11-12 The Derived Component Pattern dialog box

NoteIf you change the number of instances of the pattern feature using which the derived componentpattern is created, the number of instances of the component pattern are automatically modified.This displays the associative and parametric nature of the derived component pattern.

After editing the number of entities in the pattern feature, you may have to choose the Rebuildbutton.

Remember that if the feature that was used to assemble the seed component is deleted whilereducing the number of features in the pattern, you will have to modify the mates. This isbecause the original feature on which the mates were applied does not exist any more and so themates give an error.

c11-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:05 PM12


Tip. If you need to skip some instances while creating the pattern of a component,then first create the component pattern as discussed above. After creating the patternyou will observe that the DerivedCirPattern1 feature will be displayed in theFeatureManager Design Tree. If the derived pattern creates a rectangular patternof the components, the name of the feature will be DerivedLPattern1. The numberat the last of the feature display the sequence number of the derived pattern feature.

When expand this feature, all the instances of the patterned component are displayed.Select the instance to be deleted from the FeatureManager Design Tree and pressthe DELETE key. The Confirmation dialog box will be displayed; choose the Yesbutton from the dialog box.

If you need to restore the deleted pattern instance, then select the derived patternfrom the FeatureManager Design Tree and invoke the shortcut menu. Choosethe Edit Definition option from the shortcut menu. The Derived ComponentPattern dialog box will be displayed. The number of the deleted instance will bedisplayed in the Positions To Skip area. Select the instance from the Position ToSkip area and press the DELETE key to restore the deleted pattern instance. Choosethe Finish button from the Derived Component Pattern dialog box.

Local PatternYou can also create the patterns of the components individually even if there is no patternfeature. This type of component pattern is known as local pattern. You can create two types oflocal pattern: first is the linear pattern and the other is the circular pattern. Both the types oflocal patterns are discussed next.

Linear PatternFor creating the local linear pattern, invoke the Pattern Type dialog box. Select the Defineyour own pattern (Local) radio button from the Pattern Type dialog box. The Arrange instraight lines (Linear) radio button and the Arrange in a circular fashion (Circular) radiobuttons are invoked. The Arrange in straight lines (Linear) radio button is selected by default.Choose the Next button from the Pattern Type dialog box. The Local Component Patterndialog box for the linear pattern is displayed as shown in Figure 11-15.

The options available in this dialog box are used to create a linear local component pattern.The options of creating the linear pattern are the same as those discussed in Chapter 9.

Circular PatternFor creating a local circular component pattern, invoke the Pattern Type dialog box. Selectthe Define your own pattern (local) radio button; next select the Arrange in a circularfashion (Circular) radio button. The Local Component Pattern dialog box for creating acircular component pattern will be displayed as shown in Figure 11-16.

The options available in this dialog box to create a circular pattern are the same as thosediscussed in Chapter 7 to create a circular pattern feature.

c11-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:05 PM13


Figure 11-16 The Local Component Pattern dialog box for circular pattern

Tip. If one instance of the component pattern is modified or edited, the other instancesof the component will also be modified.

You can also create the component pattern of a component pattern feature.

Figure 11-15 The Local Component Pattern dialog box for linear pattern

c11-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:05 PM14


Menu: Insert > Mirror Components

MIRRORING THE COMPONENTS

In the assembly design environment of SolidWorks, you can also mirror a component to placethe new instance of the component in the assembly document. For mirroring the component,choose Insert > Mirror Components from the menu bar. The Mirror ComponentsPropertyManager is displayed as shown in Figure 11-17.

Select the planar face or plane that act as mirror plane as shown in Figure 11-18. Now, selectthe component to mirror; you will observe that the name of the component with a check boxis displayed in the Components to Mirror area. Leave this check box cleared and choose theNext button from the Mirror Components PropertyManager. The preview of the mirrored

Figure 11-17 The Mirror Components PropertyManager

c11-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:05 PM15


component is displayed as shown in Figure 11-19. The Orientation rollout is displayed andusing the options available in this rollout you can change the orientation of the mirroredcomponent. Choose the OK button from the Mirror Components PropertyManager. Themirrored instance of the selected component is displayed in the drawing area as shown inFigure 11-20.

If you select the check box available with the name of the selected component in theComponents to Mirror area, a new component that is mirrored along the selected mirrorplane and saved in a specified location is created. Select the check box available along thename of the selected component and choose the Next button. The Filenames rollout isdisplayed; choose the Browse button available in the Filenames rollout. This button is usedto specify the name and location where the file will be saved. Using the Place files in onefolder check box, you can save all the mirrored instances in one folder. Using the Adddrop-down list, you can add a suffix or a prefix to the file name.

Figure 11-20 Instance created by mirroring the component

Figure 11-18 Face to be selected as mirror plane Figure 11-19 Preview of the mirrored component

c11-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:05 PM16


SIMPLIFYING THE ASSEMBLIES USING VISIBILITYOPTIONSWhen you are assembling the components, whether it be a large assembly or a small assembly,you may need to simplify the assembly using the visibility options. By simplifying, you canhide the components at any stage of the design cycle. You can also set the transparency of anycomponent for simplifying the assembly. You can also suppress and unsuppress the componentsat any stage of the design cycle. The various methods of simplifying the assembly are discussednext.

Hiding the Components

If you need to hide the component placed in the assembly, choose the componentfrom the drawing area or from the FeatureManager Design Tree. Using the CTRLkey you can select more than one component to hide. Right-click to invoke the shortcut

menu and choose the Hide Components option from the shortcut menu. The componentwill disappear from the drawing area. The icon of the component is displayed in transparentin the FeatureManager Design Tree. To unhide the hidden component, select the icon of thecomponent from the FeatureManager Design Tree and invoke the shortcut menu. Choosethe Show Components option from the shortcut menu. The hidden component will beredisplayed in the drawing area. You can also use the Hide/Show Component button fromthe Assembly toolbar to hide or show the components. But if this button is not available bydefault, then you have to customize the Assembly toolbar to add this button.

Tip. You will observe that the Lightweight check box is provided in the Opendialog box. If you select this check box before opening the assembly file, the assemblywill be opened with lightweight components.

A lightweight component is a component in which the feature information is availablein the part document and only the graphical representation of the component isdisplayed in the assembly document. Therefore, the assembly environment becomeslight. An icon of a lightweight component is displayed as a feather attached to thecomponent icon in the FeatureManager Design Tree.

To get the feature information of the lightweight component, you need to resolve thecomponent to normal state. Therefore, select the component from the drawing areaor from the FeatureManager Design Tree and invoke the shortcut menu. Choosethe Set to Resolve option from the shortcut menu. If you need to set a resolvedcomponent to a lightweight component, select the component and invoke the shortcutmenu. Choose Set to Lightweight from the shortcut menu.

Toolbar: Assembly > Hide/Show ComponentMenu: Edit > Hide > This Configuration

c11-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:05 PM17


Suppressing the Components

You can also suppress the components placed in the assembly to simplify the assemblyrepresentation. To suppress a component, select the component from the drawingarea or from the FeatureManager Design Tree. Invoke the shortcut menu and choose

Suppress. The component will not be displayed in the assembly document and the icon ofthe suppressed component will be displayed in grey in the FeatureManager Design Tree. Tounsuppress the suppressed component, select the component to be resolved from theFeatureManager Design Tree and invoke the shortcut menu. Choose the Set to Resolveoption from the shortcut menu.

You can also suppress the component using the Change Suppression State button from theAssembly toolbar. If this button is not available in the Assembly toolbar, you need to customizethe toolbar. Using the Change Suppression State button, you can suppress the selectedcomponent as well as set the selected component to lightweight. When you select thecomponent and choose the Change Suppression State button from the Assembly toolbar, aflyout is displayed. This flyout has three buttons. The first button is the Suppress button, thesecond button is the Lightweight button, and the third button is the Resolve button. TheResolve button is used to set the suppressed or lightweight components to resolve state.

Changing the Transparency ConditionsIn SolidWorks you can change the transparency of the components or selected faces to simplifythe assembly. First, you will learn how to change the transparency of the components. Selectthe component to change its transparency and invoke the shortcut menu. Choose theComponent Properties option from the shortcut menu. The Component Properties dialogbox will be displayed. Choose the Color button available in this dialog box. The AssemblyInstance Color dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 11-21.

Figure 11-21 The Assembly Instance Color dialog box

Toolbar: Assembly > Change Suppression StateMenu: Edit > Suppress > This Configuration

c11-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:05 PM18


Figure 11-22 The Advanced Properties dialog box

Choose the Advanced button from this dialog box. The Advanced Properties dialog box isdisplayed as shown in Figure 11-22. You can set the transparency of the component from theTransparency slider. You can also set the various other advanced color settings such as Ambient,Diffuse, Specularity, Shininess, and Emission from this dialog box.

You can also change the transparency of a selected face. To set the transparency of a face,select the face and invoke the shortcut menu and choose the Face Properties option from theshortcut menu. The Entity Property dialog box is displayed. Choose the Advanced buttonfrom this dialog box to invoke the Advanced Properties dialog box. Using this dialog boxyou can set the transparency of the selected face.

CREATING THE ASSEMBLY ENVELOPE

The assembly envelope is an option that is used to simplify the selection of the components ina complex assembly. An envelope is basically a box that is created around a specified component,see Figure 11-23. You can select all the components that lie in and around this box. To createan assembly envelope, choose Insert > Envelope > New from the menu bar. The Save Asdialog box is displayed; save the envelope in the location where all the other components ofthat assembly are saved. The select cursor is replaced by the part placement cursor. Place thecomponent on any one of the assembly default planes or on a planar face of the componentsof the assembly. The Edit Part button is chosen and the entire assembly is changed totransparent. The sketching environment is invoked with the placement plane or face of theassembly envelope as the sketching plane. You can exit the sketching plane and selectanother sketching plane for creating the sketch of the envelope. Create the sketch of the

Menu: Insert > Envelope > New/ From File

Tip. The face that is made transparent cannot be selected by clicking. You need toselect some other faces and then choose the Select Other option from the shortcutmenu. Right-click until the desired face is highlighted. Once the desired face ishighlighted, left-click to select it. Now, right-click anywhere in the drawing windowto display the shortcut menu.

c11-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:05 PM19


envelope. Generally, the envelope is in the form of a cube or a cuboid, i.e., an extrudedrectangle or extruded square. Create the sketch of the envelope and extrude the sketch. Thesketch will be extruded on one side or on both the sides of the sketching plane, depending onthe geometry of the assembly. Choose the Edit Part button from the Assembly toolbar to exitthe part modeling environment. The assembly envelope will be displayed in the transparentblue color. The icon of the envelope is displayed with the name of the envelope in theFeatureManager Design Tree. Figure 11-23 shows an assembly with an assembly envelope.

Selecting the Components Using the Assembly EnvelopeFor selecting the components using the assembly envelope, choose the ConfigurationManagertab from the bottom of the FeatureManager Design Tree to invoke the ConfigurationManager.Select Envelope1 from the ConfigurationManager and invoke the shortcut menu. Choosethe Select using envelope option from the shortcut menu. The Apply Envelope dialog boxis displayed as shown in Figure 11-24. The various options available in this dialog box arediscussed next.

Figure 11-23 An assembly with an assembly envelope

Figure 11-24 The Apply Envelope dialog box

c11-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:05 PM20


Inside envelopeThe Inside envelope check box is selected to select the components that are placed completelyinside the assembly envelope.

Outside envelopeThe Outside envelope check box is selected to select the components that are placedcompletely outside the assembly envelope.

Crossing envelopeThe Crossing envelope check box is selected to select the components that are placed partiallyinside the envelope or that cross the boundary of the assembly envelope.

Select Components in Top Assembly OnlyThe Select Components in Top Assembly Only check box is selected to select the componentsof the top assembly only. In this case it considers the subassemblies as a single component.For example, consider a case in which a single part of subassembly is outside the assemblyenvelope. Now, if you select Inside envelope from the Apply Envelope dialog box, the entiresubassembly will be selected.

Advanced Hide/Show the Components Using the EnvelopeYou can hide the components displayed in the assembly environment and also show thehidden components using the envelope. To hide/show the components using the envelope,select the envelope from the ConfigurationManager and invoke the shortcut menu. Choosethe Show/Hide using envelope option from the shortcut menu. The Apply Envelope dialogbox will be displayed as shown in Figure 11-25.

By default, the Show part components radio button is selected in the Apply Envelope dialogbox. The Hide it radio button is selected by default in the If a component does not meetcriteria, then area. You can select the options from the Criteria area to define the componentsthat should be affected. The options available in this area are discussed earlier. Therefore,with the current combination of selections the components that meet the criteria of the option

Figure 11-25 The Apply Envelope dialog box

c11-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:05 PM21


selected in the Criteria area will be shown as the other components will be defined in thehidden state. The Hide part components radio button is used to hide the components thatmeet the criteria of the option selected in the Criteria area. If the Leave its show/hide stateas it is radio button available in the If component does not meet criteria, then area is selected,the current hide/show state of the components is maintained for the components that do notmeet the option selected in the Criteria area.

CHECKING THE INTERFERENCES IN THE ASSEMBLYAfter creating the assembly design, the first and the most essential step is to check theinterference between the components of the assembly. If there is interference between thecomponents, the components may not assemble properly after the they are out from themachine shop or tool room. Therefore, before sending the part file and assembly for thedetailing and drafting purpose, it is essential to check the interference. To check theinterference, choose Tools > Interference Detection from the menu bar. The InterferenceVolumes dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 11-26.

The name of the current assembly is displayed in the Selected components display area. Youcan also check the interference between two or more than two components. To select thecomponents, first clear the current selection set and select the components from the assembly.Choose the Check button from this dialog box to check the interference. If there is anyinterference between the components in the assembly, it will be displayed in the assembly andall the interferences are also displayed in the Interference results area. Select the interferencefrom the Interference results area; the components between which the interference is detectedwill be displayed in the Component 1 and Component 2 display area. Also, as you selectthe interference, the components are highlighted in the assembly and the amount of interferingcomponent is displayed in the assembly. The Treat coincidence as interference check box isused to display the coincident mates as interference. After analyzing the assemblyyou can edit or modify the part.

Figure 11-26 The Interference Volumes dialog box

c11-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:05 PM22


CREATING THE ASSEMBLIES FOR MECHANISMAs mentioned earlier, there are two types of assemblies. The first one is a fully defined assemblyin which the relative movement of all the components is contained. The second type of assemblyis that in which the components are not fully defined and some degree of freedom is keptunconstrained. As a result they can move in certain direction with respect to the surroundingsof the assembly. This flexibility in turn helps you to create the mechanisms and then you canmove the assembly to check the mechanism that you have designed. Consider the case of aBench Vice in which you are assembling the vice jaw with the vice body. For this assembly towork, the linear movement of the Vice Jaw when placed on the vice body should be free.Therefore, while creating this assembly for mechanism, you should not apply the mates forconstraining the linear motion of the Vice Jaw with respect to the vice body. Figure 11-27shows the degree of freedom that has to be free to create an assembly for motion.

After creating the assembly for mechanism by defining minimum mates, invoke the Movetool. Select one of the face of the component that you need to move and drag the cursor tomove the assembly. While moving the assembly for mechanism design, there are some optionsavailable for analyzing the assembly. These options of analyzing the assembly are discussed next.

Analyzing the Collisions Using the Collision Detection ToolIn SolidWorks, you can also analyze if there is any collision between the components of theassembly while the assembly is in motion. To analyze the collision when the assembly is inmotion, invoke the Move PropertyManager and invoke the Options rollout as shown in

Figure 11-27 Direction in which the degree of freedom should be free

Tip. You can also select a part created earlier as an envelope and place and assembleit in the assembly file for advanced selection or show/hide options. Choose Insert> Envelope > From File from the menu bar. The Open dialog box is displayed;browse and open the part to be used as envelope and assemble using the assemblymates.

c11-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:05 PM23


Figure 11-28 The Options rollout of theMove PropertyManager

Figure 11-28. Select the Collision Detection radio button from the Options rollout. TheCheck between area is displayed; the options available in this area are used to specify thecomponents between which the collision will be detected. The options available in the Checkbetween area are discussed next.

All componentsThe All components radio button is selected to check the collision between all the componentswhen the assembly is in motion.

These componentsThe These components radio button is selected to check the collision only between the selectedcomponents when the assembly is in motion. When you select the These components radiobutton, the Components for Collision Check display area and the Resume Drag button aredisplayed in the Options rollout as shown in Figure 11-29. After selecting the componentsbetween which the collision has to be detected, the name of the components is displayed inthe Components for Collision Check display area. After selecting the components, choosethe Resume Drag button from the Options rollout and drag the cursor to move the assembly.

Stop at collisionThe Stop at collision check box is selected to stop the motion of the assembly when one ofthe component collides with another component during the assembly motion.

Dragged part onlyThe Dragged part only check box is selected when you need to detect the collision onlybetween the components that you selected to move. If you do not select this check box, thecomponents that you selected to move and any other component that moves because of mateswith the selected components are detected for collision.

After setting the options in the Options rollout, drag the assembly either using the Move toolor using the Rotate tool. You can also use the Rotate tool to move the assembly. To use the

c11-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:05 PM24


Figure 11-29 The Options rollout of theMove PropertyManager with the These componentsradio button selected from the Check between area

Rotate tool invoke the Rotate rollout and drag the assembly to move. If a component of theassembly collides with another component while the assembly is in motion, the faces of thecomponents that collide with each other will be displayed in green color. If the Stop at collisioncheck box is selected, the motion of the assembly will be stopped when one of the componentscollides with another component of the assembly.

Consider the assembly shown in Figure 11-30. In this assembly you need to move the slider inthe given direction. Invoke the Move PropertyManager and select the Collision Detectionradio button from the Options rollout. Drag the slider to move in the given direction.Figure 11-31 shows that the slider collides with the extrusion feature created in the verticalcolumn of the base component. The faces of the component that collides is displayed ingreen color. If the Stop at collision check box is selected, you cannot move the componentfurther after it collides with one of the components of the assembly.

Once the collision is detected in the assembly, you can edit and modify the components thatcollide during the assembly motion.

c11-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:05 PM25


CREATING THE EXPLODED STATE OF THE ASSEMBLYIn SolidWorks, you can also create an exploded state of the assembly. The explode state of theassembly is created using the Assembly Exploder dialog box. To invoke this dialog box, firstyou need to invoke the ConfigurationManager. Select the Default option from theConfigurationManager and invoke the shortcut menu. Choose the New Explode View optionfrom the shortcut menu. The Assembly Exploder dialog box will be displayed as shown inFigure 11-32.

There are two options to create an exploded state of the assembly. The first option is to createthe exploded state automatically. To create an automatic explode state, choose the AutoExplode button from the Assembly Exploder dialog box. The components of the assemblywill be exploded and will be placed arbitrarily in the assembly document. Figure 11-33 showsan automatic exploded view of an assembly.

Creating the Systematic Explode StateTo create a systematic explode state of the assembly, choose the New button from theAssembly Exploder dialog box. The Assembly Exploder dialog box will expandand some more options are displayed as shown in Figure 11-34.

Figure 11-32 The Assembly Exploder dialog box

Figure 11-30 Direction in which the slider will bemoved inside the base

Figure 11-31 The faces of the componentshighlighted in green after collision

c11-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:05 PM26


As you expand this dialog box, you are prompted to create a new explode step. The selectionis active in the Direction to explode along display area. Therefore, you need to select thedirection in which you need to explode the component. Select an edge, face, plane, axis, or asketch to define the direction along which the components will be exploded. After selectingthe explode direction, the selection mode in the Components to explode area is activated.Select the components to be exploded in the current direction. Specify the explode distanceusing the Explode spinner. You can also reverse the direction of explode using the Reverse

Figure 11-34 The expanded Assembly Exploder dialog box

Figure 11-33 An assembly exploded using the Auto Explode tool

c11-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:05 PM27


direction check box. The Explode related components together check box is selected toexplode all the components that related with the selected component using the assemblymates.

After exploding the components in a particular direction with same distance, you need toexplode the other components. Therefore, you need to create another explode step. Choosethe New button from the Assembly Exploder dialog box. Now, using the same procedure,explode the other set of components. You can create as many explode steps as you wantwhile exploding the assembly.

After creating all the explode steps choose the OK button from the Assembly Exploderdialog box to complete the explode state creation. If you need to switch back to the unexplodestate, expand the Default option from the ConfigurationManager and select ExplView1.Invoke the shortcut menu and choose Collapse from the shortcut menu. You can also editeach explode step by expanding ExplView1 and select the explode step to be modified.Invoke the shortcut menu and choose the Edit Definition option from the shortcut menu.The Assembly Exploder dialog box is displayed and you can modify the parameters of theexplode step. Figure 11-35 shows the systematic exploded view of an assembly.

Creating the Explode Line Sketch

Explode lines are the parametric axes that display the direction of explosion of thecomponents in the exploded state. Figure 11-36 shows an exploded assembly withexplode lines.

To create the explode line sketch, choose the Explode Line Sketch button from the Drawing

Figure 11-35 The systematic exploded state of an assembly

Toolbar: Assembly > Explode Line SketchMenu: Insert > Explode Line Sketch

c11-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:05 PM28


Figure 11-37 The RouteLine PropertyManager

toolbar or choose Insert > Explode Line Sketch from the menu bar. The Route LinePropertyManager is displayed as shown in Figure 11-37. You are prompted to select cylindricalface, planar face, vertex, point, arc, or line entities. One by one select the cylindrical faces ofthe two components to create an explode line between them. For example, to create an explodeline between the oval fillister and the vice jaw, select the cylindrical face of the oval fillisterthat goes inside the vice jaw. Now, select the cylindrical hole of the vice jaw. The preview ofthe explode line appears. Choose OK to create the explode line. The names of the selectedfaces are displayed in the Items To Connect display area. As you select an entity to create an

Figure 11-36 Explode line sketch created on an exploded assembly

c11-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:05 PM29


explode line, an arrow is also displayed with the line. You can use that arrow to reverse thedirection of explode line creation. You can also choose the Reverse check box from the Optionsrollout of the Route Line PropertyManager to reverse the direction of the explode line creation.After creating the explode line in all the components, choose the OK button from the ExplodeLine Sketch PropertyManager.

TUTORIALS

Tutorial 1In this tutorial you will create the assembly shown in Figure 11-38. This assembly will becreated in two parts, one will be the main assembly and the second will be the subassembly.You will also create the exploded state of the assembly and then create the explode linesketch. The explode state of the assembly is displayed in Figure 11-39. The views anddimensions of all the components of this assembly are displayed in Figures 11-40 through11-43. (Expected time: 3 hrs)

Figure 11-38 The radial engine subassembly

Tip. After creating all the explode lines, you need to exit the sketching environmentusing the Confirmation Corner.

You can add jog lines using the Jog Line tool.

c11-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:05 PM30


Figure 11-40 Views and dimensions of Master rod

Figure 11-39 Exploded view of the assembly

c11-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:05 PM31


Figure 11-42 Views and dimensions of the Piston


Since this assembly is a large assembly, therefore, you need to divide this assembly in twoparts. One will be the master assembly and the second will be the subassembly. First, you needto create the subassembly, which consists of Articulation Rod, Piston, Piston Rings, PistonPin, Rod Bush Upper, Rod Bush Lower, and Piston Pin Plug. After creating this subassemblyyou will create the master assembly in which you will assemble the Master Rod with the Piston,Piston Rings, Piston Pin, Rod Bush Upper, and Piston Pin Plug. After assembling thecomponents in the master assembly you will insert the subassembly in the master assemblyand assemble it.

a. Create all the components of the assembly in the Part mode and save the components ina directory named Radial Engine Subassembly.

c11-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:05 PM32


Figure 11-43 Views and dimensions of other components

b. Open a new assembly file and assemble the components to create a subassembly.c. Open a new assembly file and assemble the components of the master assembly.d. Insert the subassembly in the master assembly and assemble it with the master assembly.e. Create the exploded view of the assembly and then create the explode lines.

Creating the Components1. Create a directory with the name Radial Engine Subassembly in the /My Documents/

SolidWorks/C11 directory. Create all the components in the individual part files and savethem in this directory.

c11-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:05 PM33


Figure 11-41 Views and dimensions of the Articulated rod

NoteWhen you create the Master Rod, remember that the holes on the left of the Master Rod shouldbe created using the sketch-driven pattern. This is done because while assembling the Link Pinyou will create the derived pattern of the Link Pin using the sketch driven pattern feature.

Creating the SubassemblyAs discussed earlier, you will first create the subassembly. After that, you will assemble thesubassembly with the master assembly.

1. Open a new assembly document and save it with the name Piston Articulation RodSubassembly in the same directory in which the parts are created.

2. First place the Articulated Rod at the origin of the assembly and then place the othercomponents such as Piston, Piston Pin, Piston Pin Plug, Rod Bush Upper, and Rod BushLower in the assembly document.

3. Apply the required mates to assemble these components. The assembly after assemblingthe Articulated Rod, Piston, Piston Pin, Piston Pin Plug, Rod Bush Upper, and Rod BushLower is shown in Figure 11-44.

It is clear from the assembly that you need to assemble four instances of Piston Ring. You

c11-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:05 PM34


will only assemble one instance of the Piston Ring at the uppermost groove of the ring.After assembling this instance, you will create the local pattern of the Piston Ring.

4. Insert the Piston Ring in the assembly document and assemble the Piston Ring at theuppermost groove of the Piston using the assembly mates, see Figure 11-45. In this figure,the color of Piston Ring is changed by selecting it and choosing the Component Propertiesoption from the shortcut menu. From the Component Properties dialog box, choose theColor button to change the color.

Figure 11-44 Assembly of Articulated Rod, Piston, Piston Pin, PistonPin Plug, Rod Bush Upper, and Rod Bush Lower

Figure 11-45 First instance of the Piston Ring assembled with the Piston

c11-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:05 PM35


Figure 11-46 Subassembly after patterning the Piston ring

Next, you need to create the local pattern of the Piston Ring.

5. Choose Insert > Component Pattern from the menu bar. The Pattern Type dialog box isdisplayed.

6. Select the Define your own pattern (Local) radio button from this dialog box.

7. The Arrange in straight lines (Linear) radio button is selected by default. Choose theNext button from the Pattern Type dialog box. The Local Component Pattern dialogbox will be displayed.

8. Select the Piston Ring from the assembly document; the name of the Piston Ring isdisplayed in the Seed Component(s) display area.

9. Now, click once in the Along Edge/Dim display area to activate the selection mode in thisarea.

10. Select any one of the horizontal edges of the Articulation Rod to define the direction ofpattern creation.

11. Select the Reverse Direction check box to reverse the direction of pattern creation.

12. Set the value of the Spacing spinner to 5 and set the value of the Instances spinner to 4.

13. Choose the Finish button from the Local Component Pattern dialog box.

The subassembly after patterning the Piston Ring is shown in Figure 11-46

c11-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:05 PM36


The subassembly is completed. Save the assembly document.

Creating the Master AssemblyNext, you will create the master assembly. After creating the master assembly you willplace and assemble the subassembly with the master assembly.

1. Open a new assembly document and save it with the name Radial Engine Subassemblyin the same directory in which the parts are created.

2. First, place the Master rod at the origin of the assembly and then place the Piston, PistonPin, Piston Pin Plug, Piston Ring, Rod Bush Upper, and Master Rod Bearing in the assemblydocument.

3. Using the assembly mates and local pattern option assemble all the components of themaster assembly.

The components after assembling in the master assembly are displayed in Figure 11-47.

Assembling the Subassembly With the Master AssemblyNow, you will place the subassembly in the mater assembly and then assemble it with thesubassembly.

1. Choose Insert > Component > From File from the menu bar. The Open dialog box isdisplayed.

2. Choose Assembly (*.asm, *.sldasm) from the Files of type drop-down list.

3. Double-click on Piston Articulated Rod Subassembly.SLDASM and place the subassembly inthe master assembly.

Figure 11-47 Components assembled in the Master assembly.

c11-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:05 PM37


Figure 11-49 Assembly structure

Figure 11-48 shows the subassembly placed in the master assembly.

4. Using the assembly mates assemble the subassembly with the master assembly. Refer toFigure 11-49, which shows you the assembly structure that will help you in assembling theinstances of the subassembly.

Figure 11-48 Subassembly placed in the master assembly

Tip. You can create more than one instance of the subassembly by holding down theCTRL key; select and drag the subassembly from the FeatureManager DesignTree. Release the left mouse button to place the assembly in the assembly document.

c11-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:05 PM38


Figure 11-50 shows all the instances of the subassembly assembled with the master assembly.

Assembling the Link PinAfter assembling the other components you need to assemble the Link Pin with the masterassembly.

1. Place the Link Pin in the assembly document and using the assembly mates, assemble theLlink Pin with the master assembly. Figure 11-51 shows the first instance of Link Pinassembled with the master assembly.

Figure 11-50 Subassembly assembled to the Master assembly

Figure 11-51 First instance of the Link pin assembled with themaster assembly

c11-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:05 PM39


Figure 11-52 The final assembly

As discussed earlier, the other instances of the Link Pin will be assembled as derivedpattern using the sketch-driven pattern feature of the holes created on the left of themaster rod.

2. Choose Insert > Component Pattern from the menu bar. The Pattern Type dialog boxwill be displayed.

The Use an existing feature pattern (Derived) radio button is selected by default in thePattern Type dialog box.

3. Choose the Next button from the Pattern Type dialog box. The Derived ComponentPattern dialog box is displayed.

The selection mode is active in the Seed Component(s) display area.

4. Select the Link Pin from the master assembly. The name of the Link Pin is displayed inthe Seed Component(s) display area.

5. Click once in the Pattern Feature display area to activate the selection mode in this area.

6. Select any one of the hole instance created using the sketch-driven pattern. The name ofthe sketch pattern feature will be displayed in the Pattern Feature display area.

7. Choose the Finish button from the Derived Component Pattern dialog box.

Figure 11-52 displays the final assembly.

c11-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:05 PM40


Exploding the AssemblyAfter creating the assembly you need to explode the assembly using theAssembly Exploder tool.

1. Invoke the ConfigurationManager. Select the Default option from theConfigurationManager and invoke the shortcut menu. Choose the New Exploded Viewoption from the shortcut menu.

The Assembly Exploder dialog box is displayed.

2. Choose the New button from the Assembly Exploder dialog box.

3. Select any vertical edge from the assembly to define the direction in which the componentswill be exploded.

4. Select the Component part only radio button on the right of the Components to explodearea.

5. Select all the Piston Pin Plugs from the assembly.

6. Set the value of the Distance spinner to 170 and choose the Apply button fromthe Assembly Exploder dialog box.

All the instances of the Piston Pin Plug are exploded.

7. Choose the New button from the Assembly Exploder dialog box to create anew assembly exploder step.

8. Select any vertical edge from the assembly to define the direction of explode.

9. Select all the instances of the Piston Pin from the assembly.

10. Set the value of the Distance spinner to 140 and choose the Apply button to endthe explode step creation.

Similarly, explode the other components of the assembly. The assembly after explodingthe components is shown in Figure 11-53.

Creating the Explode Line SketchAfter exploding the assembly, you need to create the explode line sketch of the explodedstate of the assembly.

1. Choose the Explode Line Sketch button from the Assembly toolbar. The RouteLine PropertyManager is displayed and you are prompted to select cylindricalface, planar face, vertex, point, arc, or line entities.

c11-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:05 PM41


Figure 11-54 Faces to be selected to create explode line sketch

2. Choose the Keep Visible button from the Route Line PropertyManager if it is not chosenautomatically to keep it visible on the screen.

3. Select the cylindrical face as shown in Figure 11-54 as the first selection. The name of theselected face will be displayed in the Items To Connect display area. The preview of theexplode line sketch is displayed at the center of the selected face.

4. Refer to Figure 11-54 and select the cylinderical faces to create the explode line sketch.

Figure 11-53 Final assembly

c11-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:05 PM42


5. After selecting all the faces, choose the OK button. An exploded line will be created.

Similarly, create the explode lines to connect the other parts of the assembly. Figure 11-55shows the assembly after adding the explode line sketch.

6. Invoke the ConfigurationManager and expand the Default option. Select ExplView1and invoke the shortcut menu. Choose the Collapse option from the shortcut menu toswitch back to the collapse state of the assembly.

7. Save the assembly.

Tutorial 2In this tutorial you will modify the assembly created in Tutorial 1 (Bench vice) of Chapter 10,Assembly Modeling-I. You will modify the design of the components of the assembly and thensuppress some mates that enable the assembly to move along a particular degree of freedom.After that you will check the assembly for collision detection when the assembly is in motionand then you will modify the assembly and check the interference. (Expected time: 1 hr)

The steps that will be followed to complete this tutorial are discussed next:

a. Save the Bench Vice assembly directory in c11 directory and then open the Bench Viceassembly.

b. Modify the design of the components within the context of assembly.c. Suppress the mate to enable the vice jaw to move along the slide ways of the vice jaw.d. Check the new assembly design for collision detection when the assembly is in motion.

Modify the design if there is any collision between the components.e. Check the interference in the modified assembly.

Figure 11-55 Explode line sketch added to the exploded state of the assembly

c11-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:05 PM43


Opening the Bench Vice AssemblyThe assembly created in the Tutorial 1 of Chapter 10 is the Bench vice assembly; Youneed to copy and save that assembly in the current directory of Chapter 11.

1. Copy the directory in which the Bench vice assembly is saved and then paste it in the c11directory.

2. Invoke the Open dialog box and browse the Bench Vice assembly document. Double-clickon it to open the assembly document.

Modifying the Design of the Components of Bench Vice AssemblyBecause of some alteration in the design of some of the components of the assembly, youneed to modify the components of the assembly. You will modify and edit the componentsin the context of assembly.

Before you start modifying the components, it is recommended that you hide some of thecomponents to simplify the assembly. Hiding the components will simplify the assemblyand facilitate in selection while editing and modifying the components.

1. Hold down the CTRL key from the keyboard and select the Clamping Plate, Base Plate,Set Screw 1, Set Screw 2, Oval Fillister, Screw Bar, and Jaw Screw from the FeatureManagerDesign Tree.

2. Invoke the shortcut menu and choose the Hide components option from the shortcutmenu.

The selected components are hidden and are not displayed in the assembly document.

With the design alteration, you need to create a through slot on the right face of the ViceJaw. For modifying the design of the Vice Jaw, first you need to enable the part editingenvironment.

3. Select the Vice Jaw from the assembly and then choose the Edit Part button fromthe Assembly toolbar. The part modeling environment is invoked in the assemblydocument and the Vice Body is displayed in transparent as shown in Figure 11-56.

4. Select the right face of the Vice jaw and invoke the sketching environment.

5. Create the sketch of the slot as shown in Figure 11-57.

6. Choose Insert > Cut > Extrude from the menu bar. The Cut-Extrude PropertyManageris displayed.

7. Create the cut feature using the Through All option.

8. Choose the Edit Part button to exit the edit part environment.

c11-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:05 PM44


Figure 11-58 shows the assembly after modifying the design of the Vice jaw.

9. Similarly modify the design of the Vice body. You need to create an extruded boss featureon the right face of the component.

Figure 11-56 Vice Jaw in the part edit mode in the assembly document

Figure 11-57 Sketch of the slot

c11-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:05 PM45


Figure 11-58 Modified Vice Jaw

Figure 11-59 Sketch of the extruded boss feature Figure 11-60 Modified assembly

The sketch of the feature is shown in Figure 11-59. You need to extrude the sketch to adistance of 60. Figure 11-60 shows the assembly after exiting the edit part environment.

10. Choose the Save button from the Standard toolbar. The SolidWorks information box isdisplayed and you are informed that some models referenced in the document are modifiedand they must be saved. Choose Yes to save the referenced models also.

Suppressing the Mate to Make the Movement of Vice jaw Free in aSpecified Direction

To analyze the movement of the Bench vice assembly, you need to make the movement ofthe Vice jaw free in the X direction. By doing so the Vice Jaw will slide on the sideways ofthe Vice body.

c11-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:05 PM46


1. Expand the Mates mategroup from the FeatureManager Design Tree and select Distance1mate. The planar faces of the Vice jaw and the Vice body are highlighted in green becausethis mate is applied to these faces.

2. Select this mate and invoke the shortcut menu. Choose the Suppress option from theshortcut menu.

Now, the degree of freedom in the X direction is free.

3. Choose the Move button from the Assembly toolbar and select a horizontal edge of theVice jaw. When you drag the cursor, you will observe that you can move the Vice jaw in theX direction.

4. Drag the Vice jaw back to its original position.

Analyzing the Collision Between the Components When theAssembly is in MotionNext, you will analyze the collision between the components of the assembly when the assemblyis in motion.

1. Choose the Move Component button from the Assembly toolbar. The MoveComponent PropertyManager is displayed. Select the Collision Detection radiobutton from the Options rollout.

2. Select Vice jaw and drag the cursor to move it in the direction as shown in Figure 11-61.

3. When you move the Vice jaw in the specified direction, you will observe that the right faceof the Vice jaw and the extrusion feature of the Vice body are highlighted in green asshown in Figure 11-62.

Figure 11-61 Direction in which the Vice jaw will be moved

c11-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:06 PM47


Figure 11-62 Faces of the Vice jaw and the Vice body highlighted in green

This indicates that the Vice jaw collides with the Vice body. Leave the assembly at thislocation.

4. Choose the OK button from the Move Component PropertyManager.

Since the collision is detected in the assembly, you need to modify the design of one ofthe components. In this case, you will modify the dimensions of the extruded boss feature.

5. Double-click the newly created extruded boss feature of the Vice body. The dimensions ofthe newly created feature will be displayed.

6. Double-click the dimension that has a of value 6; the Modify dialog box is displayed; setthe value of the dimension to 4 and choose the ENTER key.

7. Press CTRL+B to rebuild the assembly.

8. Choose Tools > Interference Detection from the menu bar. The Interference Volumesdialog box is displayed. Choose the Check button from the Interference Volumes dialogbox.

9. You will observe that 0 Interference is displayed in the Interference results display area.

10. Choose the Close button from the Interference Volumes dialog box.

Next, you need to need to unhide all the components.

11. Hold the CTRL key and select the hidden components from the FeatureManager DesignTree and invoke the shortcut menu. Choose the Show components option from theshortcut menu.

c11-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:06 PM48


12. Save the assembly document and all the referenced part documents.


1. You can create subassemblies in the assembly environment of SolidWorks. (T/F)

2. You cannot create a subassembly of the components that are already placed in an assemblyfile. (T/F)

3. When you move the cursor on a mate in the FeatureManager Design Tree, the entitiesused in the mate are highlighted in red color in the drawing area. (T/F)

4. You cannot edit the assembly mates. (T/F)

5. While in the part editing mode in the assembly document, you can use the Move/SizeFeatures tool to edit the features dynamically using editing handles. (T/F)

6. The component patterns created individually without the use of any existing patternfeature are known as __________ pattern.

7. The component patterns created using an existing pattern feature are known as __________pattern.

8. In __________ component, the feature information is available in the part document andonly the graphical representation of the component is displayed in the assembly document.

9. After selecting the component, choose the _________ option from the shortcut menu tochange the transparency condition of the selected component.

10. To create the explode line sketch, choose the __________ button from the Drawing toolbar.


1. When you select the component and invoke the shortcut menu and choose the Open“part name” from the shortcut menu, which option is used to edit a component separatelyin its part document?

(a) Modify “part name” (b) Edit “part name”(c) Open “part name” (d) None of these

c11-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:06 PM49


2. Which option is used to define whether a component collides with another component ofthe assembly or not?

(a) Collision Detection (b) Interference Detection(c) Mass Properties (d) None of these

3. Which check box is selected in the Open dialog box to open an assembly with lightweight parts?

(a) Lightweight (b) Open Lightweight(c) Lightweight parts (d) Lightweight assembly

4. Which button available in the Assembly toolbar is used to suppress a component?

(a) Change Suppression State (b) Suppress(c) Hide/Show Component (d) Move Component

5. Which option is used to select the component placed partially inside and partially outsidethe assembly envelope?

(a) Inside Envelope (b) Outside Envelope(c) Crossing Envelope (d) None of these

6. The __________ radio button is used to create a local linear pattern.

7. To unhide the hidden component, select the icon of the component from theFeatureManager Design Tree and invoke the shortcut menu. Choose the __________option from the shortcut menu.

8. The __________ option is used to pattern the instances of the components using an existingpattern feature.

9. The explode state of the assembly is created using the ___________ dialog box.

10. The __________ check box is selected to stop the motion of the assembly when one of thecomponent collides with another component when the assembly is in motion.

EXERCISE

Exercise 1Create the assembly as shown in Figure 11-63. Make sure that when you create this assembly,the back plate should be fixed and the entire assembly can move in the Y direction withrespect to the back plate. Keep the rotational degree of freedom of the screw rod free so thatit can also rotate on its axis. After creating the assembly you need to explode the assemblyand create the explode line sketch. The exploded view of the assembly with explode line

c11-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:06 PM50


sketch is shown in Figure 11-64. The dimensions of the model are given in Figures 11-65thought 11-69. (Expected time: 4 hrs)

Figure 11-64 Exploded view of the Shaper tool holder assembly with explode lines

Figure 11-63 Shaper tool holder assembly

c11-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:06 PM51


Figure 11-65 Views and dimensions of Back Plate

c11-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:06 PM52


Figure 11-66 Views and dimensions of Vertical Slide

c11-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:06 PM53


Figure 11-67 Views and dimensions of Swivel Plate

c11-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:06 PM54


Figure 11-68 Views and dimensions of the components

c11-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:06 PM55


Figure 11-69 Views and dimensions of the components

Answers to Self-Evaluation Test1. T, 2. F, 3. T, 4. F, 5. F, 6. Local, 7. Derived, 8. Lightweight, 9. Component Properties, 10.Explode Line Sketch

c11-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:06 PM56

Chapter 12

Working With DrawingViews-I

After completing this chapter you will be able to:• Generate standard three views.• Generate Named Views.• Generate Relative Views.• Generate Predefined Views.• Generate Empty Views.• Generate Projected Views.• Generate Section Views.• Generate Aligned Section Views.• Generate Broken-out Section Views.• Generate Auxiliary Views.• Generate Detail Views.• Generate Crop Views.• Generate Broken Views.• Generate Alternate Position Views.• Generate the View of an Assembly in Exploded State.• Work with Interactive Drafting.• Edit the Drawing Views.• Change the Scale of the Drawing Views.• Delete Drawing Views• Modify the Hatch Pattern of the Section Views.• Apply Hatch Patterns to the Section Views.

Learning Objectives

c12-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 8:23 AM1


THE DRAWING MODEAfter you have created the solid models of the parts, or an assembly, you will have to generate thedrawing views. A 2D drawing is the life line of all the manufacturing systems because at the shopfloor or machine floor, the machinist mostly needs the 2D drawing for manufacturing. Therefore,SolidWorks has provided a specialized environment known as the Drawing mode. The Drawingmode has all the tools that are required to generate the drawing views, modify the drawing views,and add dimensions and annotations to the drawing views. In other words, you can get the finalshop floor drawing using this mode of SolidWorks. You can also create the 2D drawings in theDrawing mode of SolidWorks using the sketching tools provided in this mode. In other words,there are two types of drafting methods available in SolidWorks: Generative drafting and Interactivedrafting. Generative drafting is a technique of generating the drawing views using a solid modelor an assembly. Interactive drafting is a technique in which you use the sketching tools to sketcha drawing view in the Drawing mode. In this chapter, you will learn about generating the drawingviews of parts or assemblies. One of the major advantage of working in SolidWorks is that thissoftware is bidirectionally associative in nature. This property ensures that if the modificationsare made in a model in the Part mode, the same modification will be reflected in the Assemblymode and the Drawing mode, and vice versa.

For creating a new document in the Drawing mode, invoke the New SolidWorks Documentdialog box. Choose the Drawing template from the Templates tab as shown in Figure 12-1and choose the OK button.

Figure 12-1 The New SolidWorks Document dialog box

Tip. When you select the Drawing template from the Templates tab, the CreateRapidDraft Drawing check box is displayed at the lower right corner of thedialog box. You will learn more about rapid draft drawings later.

c12-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 8:23 AM2

Working With Drawing Views-I 12-3

When you choose the OK button from the New SolidWorks Document dialog box, a newDrawing document is invoked. The Sheet Format To Use dialog box is also displayed.Figure 12-2 shows the initial screen of the drawing document with the Sheet Format to Usedialog box.

The Sheet Format To Use dialog box is used to specify the sheet and the format of sheet to beused. The options available in the this dialog box are discussed next.

Standard sheet formatThe Standard sheet format radio button is selected by default. Using this option you canselect the predefined standard sheet formats available in SolidWorks. You can select the sheetsize from the drop-down list available below the Standard sheet format radio button.

Custom sheet formatThe Custom sheet format radio button is used to add a user-defined sheet format to thedrawing sheet. Select the Custom sheet format radio button and choose the Browse buttonto invoke the Open dialog box. From the Open dialog box, you can select and open a

Figure 12-2 The initial screen of the drawing document with the Sheet Format To Use dialog box

c12-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 8:23 AM3


user-defined sheet format. You will learn more about creating a user-defined sheet format inlater chapters.

No sheet formatThe No sheet format radio button is selected if you want to use an empty sheet, without anymargin lines or title block. Select this radio button and select the size of sheet from thedrop-down list available below the No sheet format radio button and choose the OK button.

Figure 12-3 shows a drawing document created using A4 standard sheet format from thedrop-down list available below the Standard sheet format radio button.

Figure 12-3 Drawing document with A4 standard sheet format

Tip. If you choose the Cancel button from the Sheet Format To Use dialog box, ablank sheet of B size in landscape orientation will be inserted in the drawingdocument.

c12-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 8:23 AM4


TYPE OF VIEWSIn SolidWorks, you can generate nine types of views. Generally, you first need to generate astandard view such as the top view or the front view and then use this view to derive theremaining views. After generating a standard view, you can generate or derive the followingviews from the standard view(s).

Projected ViewThe projected view is generated by taking an existing view as the parent view. This view isgenerated by projecting the lines normal to the parent view. The resultant view will be anorthographic view.

Section ViewA section view is generated by chopping a part of an existing view using a plane and thenviewing the parent view from a direction normal to the section plane.

Aligned Section ViewAn aligned section view is used to section those features that are created at a certain angle tothe main section planes. Align sections straighten these features by revolving them about anaxis that is normal to the view plane. Remember that the axis about which the feature isstraightened should lie on the cutting planes.

Auxiliary ViewAn auxiliary view is generated by projecting the lines normal to a specified edge of an existingview.

Detail ViewA detail view is used to display the details of a portion of an existing view. You can select theportion whose detailing has to be shown in the parent view. The portion that you have selectedwill be magnified and will be placed as a separate view. You can control the magnification ofthe detail view.

Broken ViewA broken view is used to display a component by removing a portion of it from between,keeping the ends of the drawing view intact. This type of view is used to display the componentswhose length to width ratio is very high. This means that either the length is very large ascompared to the width or the width is very large as compared to the length. The broken viewwill break the view along the horizontal or vertical direction such that thedrawing view fits the area you require.

Broken-out SectionA broken-out section view is used to remove a part of the existing view and display the area ofthe model or the assembly that lies behind the removed portion. This type of view is generatedusing a closed sketch that is associated with the parent view.

c12-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 8:23 AM5


Crop ViewA crop view is used to crop an existing view enclosed in a closed sketch associated to that view.The portion of the view that lies inside the associated sketch is retained and the remainingportion is removed.

Alternate Position ViewThe alternate position view is used to create a view in which you can show the maximum andminimum range of motion of the assembly. The main position is displayed in the drawingview in continuous lines and the alternate position of the assembly is shown in the same viewin dashed lines (phantom lines).

GENERATING THE DRAWING VIEWSThe methods of generating various types of drawing views are discussed next.

Generating the Standard Drawing ViewsThe various options of generating the standard views are discussed next.

Generating the Three Standard Views

Using the Standard 3 View option, you can generate three default orthographic viewsof the part or the assembly. For creating the three standard views, choose the Standard3 View button from the Drawing toolbar or choose Insert > Drawing View > Standard

3 View from the menu bar. The Standard View PropertyManager will be displayed as shownin Figure 12-4 and the select cursor is replaced by the part selection cursor. The Messagerollout available in the Standard View PropertyManager lists the various options that youcan use to select the model whose views are to be generated. The various options of selectingthe model whose views are to be generated are discussed next.

From FileAfter invoking the Standard View PropertyManager, right-click in the drawing area toinvoke the shortcut menu. Choose the Insert From File option from the shortcut menu.The Open dialog box will be displayed. Browse and select the part or assembly documentto generate the drawing views and choose the Open button from the Open dialog box.The Tangent Edge Display dialog box is displayed. Choose OK from this. You will learnmore about this dialog box later. The three standard orthographic views of the selectedmodels are generated.

Selecting the model from the graphics area of another windowTo select the model for generating the three drawing views using this option, you firstneed to open the part document from which you need to generate the views. ChooseWindow > Tile Horizontally/Tile Vertically to tile the part and the drawing documents.If the drawing document is not active, select the title bar of the drawing window onceto activate it. Now, choose the Standard 3 View button from the Drawing toolbar, and

Toolbar: Drawing > Standard 3 ViewMenu: Insert > Drawing View > Standard 3 View

c12-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 8:23 AM6


Figure 12-4 The Standard View PropertyManager

move the cursor in the drawing area of the part document and pick a point. Choose OKfrom the Tangent Edge Display dialog box that is displayed. The three standard views ofthe selected model are generated in the drawing document. You can also generate thethree standard views of an assembly using the same procedure.

Selecting the model from the FeatureManager Design Tree of another windowOpen the part document whose drawing views are to be generated and tile the windowhorizontally or vertically. Now, choose the Standard 3 View button from the Drawingtoolbar, and move the cursor to the FeatureManager Design Tree of the part window.Select the name of the part displayed on the top of the FeatureManager Design Tree andchoose OK from the Tangent Edge Display dialog box. The three standard orthographicviews are generated in the drawing document.

Selecting a view containing the modelThis option is used only if another view is generated on the drawing view. If one view isavailable in the drawing view, choose the Standard 3 View button from the Drawingtoolbar and select the view from the drawing area. The three standard orthographic viewswill be generated in the drawing document.

Figure 12-5 shows the three standard views of a model created using the Standard 3 Viewtool.

c12-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 8:23 AM7


Figure 12-5 Three standard views created using the Standard 3 View tool

Tip. If the generated view overlaps the title block, you need to move it. To move aview, move the cursor over it. The bounding box of the view is displayed in graycolor. At this point, left-click to select the view. Now, move the cursor to the boundaryof the selected view; the cursor is replaced by the move cursor. Press and hold downthe left mouse button and drag the cursor to move the view. Remember that if youmove the front view, all the views are moved.

If the bounding box of the view appears in red dashed lines, you need to set thedynamic view activation option from the System Options dialog box. Choose Tools> Options from the menu bar to display the System Options - General dialogbox. Select the Drawing option to display the settings related to the Drawingmode. Select the Dynamic drawing view activation check box.

NoteYou will observe that the name of the part document whose drawing views are generated isdisplayed in the DWG NO. text box of the title block. The size of the sheet is also displayed at thelower right corner of the title block. You will also learn to generate all the information like drawby, check by, and so on as you generate the drawing views later.

c12-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 8:23 AM8


Generating the Standard View Using the Named View Tool

The Named View tool is used to create a standard view, such as front, right, top,bottom, isometric, and so on. The type of view is defined while placing the view in thedrawing document. To create a named view, open the part or assembly document and

drawing document and tile the windows horizontally or vertically. Choose the Named Viewbutton from the Drawing toolbar or choose Insert > Drawing View > Named View from themenu bar. The Named View PropertyManager is invoked, which lists the various methods of

Figure 12-6 Standard views generated in third angle projection

Toolbar: Drawing > Named ViewMenu: Insert > Drawing View > Named View

Tip. By default, the views in the drawing document of SolidWorks are generatedusing the First Angle projection. If you need to create the views in the ThirdAngle projection, then before generating the views select Sheet 1 from theFeatureManager Design Tree and invoke the shortcut menu. Choose theProperties option; the Sheet Setup dialog box is displayed. Select the Thirdangle radio button from the Type of projection area and choose OK. You willlearn more about the other options available in the Sheet Setup dialog box later.Figure 12-6 shows the standard orthographic views in the Third Angle projection.

c12-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 8:23 AM9


Figure 12-7 The Named PropertyManager

selecting the part, and the select cursor is replaced by the part selection cursor. Select the partor the assembly from the document window. Select the Maximize button from the drawingdocument to maximize the drawing document. The cursor is replaced by the place viewcursor. The View Orientation and the Custom Scale rollouts are displayed in the NamedView PropertyManager as shown in Figure 12-7.

By default, the Isometric option is selected in the View Orientation area. Therefore, if youplace the view in the drawing document, the isometric view will be generated. If you need thefront view of the model, select the Front option from View Orientation area and place theview in the drawing view. The other options available in this PropertyManager will be discussedlater.

Tip. If you suppress the features of a model whose drawing views are generated, thesuppressed features will not be displayed in the drawing views. As you unsuppressthe feature, it will be displayed in the drawing views.

When you hide or suppress the components of an assembly, the hidden or suppressedcomponents are not displayed in the drawing views.

c12-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 8:23 AM10


NoteIf you select the Preview button available in the View Orientation rollout, the preview of theview to be placed will be displayed in the drawing area.

If you choose the Current Model View option from the View Orientation area, the view of thecurrent orientation of the model in the part document will be placed in the drawing document.When you place the view using the Current Model View option, the SolidWorks dialog boxwill be displayed. This dialog box prompts you that this view may need Isometric (True) dimensionsinstead of standard Projected dimensions. Do you want to switch the view to use Isometricdimensions? It is always recommended to use isometric dimensions in a 3D view. You will learnmore about dimensions in the later chapters.

Generating the Standard View Using the Relative View Tool

The Relative View tool is used to generate an orthographic view. The orientation ofthe view is defined by selecting the reference planes or the planar faces of the model.This option is very useful if you need the orientation of the parent view other than

the default orientations. To create a relative view open the documents and tile themvertically or horizontally. Choose the Relative button from the Drawing toolbar or chooseInsert > Drawing View > Relative To Model from the menu bar. If the Relative buttonis not available in the Drawing toolbar, you need to customize the toolbar. The RelativeView PropertyManager is displayed, which prompts you to select the model.

Select the model or the assembly using the face that you want to use to orient the resultantview. The Drawing View Orientation dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 12-8.

Now from the drop-down list in this dialog box select the option toward which the selectedface will be oriented. Choose the OK button. Next, select another face and then select theoption toward which the second selected face will be oriented. Move the cursor in thedrawing document; the cursor will be replaced by the place view cursor. The preview ofthe view of is also displayed in the drawing document. Place the view at an appropriateplace in the drawing document.

Figure 12-9 shows the faces of the model selected to generate a standard view andFigure 12-10 shows the resultant view.

Toolbar: Drawing > Relative View (Customize to Add)Menu: Insert > Drawing View > Relative To Model

Figure 12-8 The Drawing View Orientation dialog box

c12-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 8:23 AM11



Figure 12-10 Resultant view

Generating the Standard View Using the Predefined View Tool

The Predefined View tool is used to create empty views with the specified orientation.After creating all the predefined views, populate them by dragging the part from theother window. All the predefined views will be populated. This option is basically

used to add the empty views in the drawing document and then save it as a drawing template.Next time when you open a new drawing document using that template, you just need to dragand drop the part from other window; all the predefined views will be populated. You will

Toolbar: Drawing > Predefined ViewMenu: Insert > Drawing View > Predefined

c12-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 8:23 AM12


Figure 12-11 The Predefined View PropertyManager

learn more about creating a drawing template in the later chapters. To create the predefinedviews, choose the Predefined View button from the Drawing toolbar or choose Insert >Drawing > Predefined from the menu bar. An empty view is attached to the cursor. Specify apoint in the drawing document to place the predefined view. The view will be placed in thedrawing document and the Predefined View PropertyManager is displayed as shown inFigure 12-11.

Select the view orientation from the View Orientation area of the View Orientation rolloutand choose the OK button from the Predefined View PropertyManager. To add the nextpredefined view, you need to define the alignment option while placing the view. To createadditional predefined view, invoke the Predefined View tool and place the view in the drawingsheet. The bounding box of the view is displayed. Right-click inside the bounding box andchoose Alignment > Align Horizontal by Center/Align Vertical by Center. Now select theprevious predefined view to align the corresponding view. Similarly, add other predefinedviews using this tool.

After creating all the predefined views open a part or an assembly document and tile thedocuments windows horizontally or vertically. Now, drag the component from the partdocument and drop in the drawing document; all the predefined views will be populated.

c12-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 8:23 AM13


Figure 12-13 Views created after populating the predefined views

Figure 12-12 Different predefined views

Tip. You can add the views of different parts and assemblies in each predefinedview. In this way, you can have the dimensions of different parts and assemblies ina single drawing document. For adding different parts in each predefined view,select the predefined view and choose the Browse button from the Insert Modelrollout of the Predefined View PropertyManager. The Open dialog box isdisplayed and you can select the part or the assembly to be inserted in the selectedpredefined view.

Figure 12-12 shows the selected predefined views with the orientation in which the views arecreated. Figure 12-13 shows the drawing document after drooping the part in the drawingdocument. Note that in these figures, the views are not aligned to each other.

c12-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 8:23 AM14


NoteWhen you generate the views in the Drawing mode of SolidWorks, the views are scaledautomatically depending upon the size of the sheet.

In case of predefined view, if the drawing contains more than one predefined view, the views willbe scaled automatically.

If only one predefined view is placed in the drawing document, the view will be scaled withrespect to the Custom Scale value if specified. Otherwise, the view will be scaled with thedefault scale factor of the drawing sheet. You can change the view scale using the Sheet Setupdialog box. You will learn more about scaling the views in later chapters.

Empty View

The Empty View tool is used to create an empty view. The empty views are used tocreate the sketches in the drawing document. This option is used in interactive drafting.Interactive drafting is discussed later in this chapter. To create an empty view, choose

the Empty View button from the Drawing toolbar or choose Insert > Drawing View >Empty option from the menubar. If the Empty View button is not available in the Drawingtoolbar, then you need to customize the toolbar. An empty view is attached to the cursor.Select a point at the desired location in the drawing document to place an empty view.

Generating the Derived ViewsAll the views that are generated from a view already placed in the drawing document areknown as derived views. The various types of derived views that are generated from the standardviews are

1. Projected view2. Section view3. Aligned Section view4. Broken-out Section view5. Auxiliary view6. Detail view7. Crop view8. Broken view9. Alternate Position view

The methods of generating the various derived drawing views are discussed next.

Toolbar: Drawing > Empty View (Customize to Add)Menu: Insert > Drawing View > Empty

c12-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 8:23 AM15


Generating Projected Views

As mentioned earlier, the projected views are generated by projecting the normallines from an existing view. To generate a projected view, choose the Projected Viewbutton from the Drawing toolbar or choose Insert > Drawing View > Projected

from the menu bar. The Projected View PropertyManager is displayed and it prompts you toselect a drawing view from which you need to project the normal lines. The select cursor isreplaced by the view cursor. Select the parent view and move the cursor vertically to generatea top view or a bottom view or move the cursor toward the left or right to create a right viewor left view. Specify a point on the drawing sheet to place the view. For creating more than oneprojected view, choose the Keep Visible button to pin the Projected View PropertyManager.Figure 12-14 shows the front view generated from the top view.

Toolbar: Drawing > Projected ViewMenu: Insert > Drawing View > Projected

Figure 12-14 Front view generated from the top view

Tip. When you generate a projected drawing view, the drawing view is aligned tothe parent view. To place the projected view that is not in alignment with the parentview, press and hold down the CTRL key before placing the view. Now move thecursor to the desired location and place the view.

All the standard views and derived views that include projected views, sectionview, detailed view, and so on are linked to their parent view by a Parent-Childrelationship. If you select the child view, the boundaries of the parent view will bedisplayed in yellow.

Select the child view and invoke the shortcut menu and choose the Jump to ParentView option from the shortcut menu. The parent view will be selected automatically.

c12-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 8:23 AM16


Toolbar: Drawing > Section ViewMenu: Insert > Drawing View > Section

Generating Section Views

As mentioned earlier, section views are generated by chopping a portion of an existingview using a cutting plane and then viewing the parent view from the direction normalto the cutting plane. To create a section view, you first need to activate the view in

which you need to create the section line or cutting plane. To invoke the drawing view, movethe cursor to the drawing view. The view symbol will be displayed below the cursor and thebounding box of the view is displayed. Left-click to activate the drawing view. Now, choose theSection View button from the Drawing toolbar or choose Insert > Drawing > Section fromthe menu bar. The Section View PropertyManager is displayed and it prompts you to sketcha line to continue view creation. You can zoom using the Zoom tool to increase the displayarea of the activated view. Draw a line that will define the section plane. As soon as you specifythe endpoint of the section line the Section View PropertyManager is displayed. The sectionview is also displayed in the drawing area and the name of the section view is displayed on thesection line. Move the cursor and specify a point on the drawing sheet to place the sectionview. The name and the scale factor of the drawing view is displayed below the section view.The Section View PropertyManager is still available in the drawing document as shown inFigure 12-15.

You can use the Flip direction check box to flip the direction of the section view. The view willbe automatically modified in the drawing sheet. The Scale with model check box is used to

Figure 12-15 The Section View PropertyManager

c12-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 8:23 AM17


Figure 12-16 The section view

scale the drawing view if the model is scaled in the part document. You will learn more aboutscaling the model in the later chapters. Choose OK from the Section View PropertyManager.Figure 12-16 shows the top view and the section view of a model.

To create a half section view, make the section lines extended beyond the parent view, seeFigure 12-17.

Figure 12-17 The half section view

c12-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 8:23 AM18


NoteYou will observe that by default the spacing of the hatch is not what is required. Therefore, youmay need to increase the spacing of the hatch pattern. You will learn more about editing thehatch pattern later in this chapters.

There are some other options available in the Section View PropertyManager using whichyou can create partial section view and the surface section view. The options are discussed next

Creating the Partial Section ViewIf the section line does not cut through the model, the SolidWorks information box willbe displayed. This dialog box prompts you that the section line does not completely cutthrough the bounding box of the model in this view. Do you want this to be a partialsection cut? For creating the partial section view, choose the Yes button from this dialogbox. If you choose the No button from this dialog box, then the complete section viewwill be created. Figure 12-18 shows a partial section view generated from the top view.

Creating the Surface Section ViewA surface section view is the one in which only the sectioned surface is displayed in thesection view. All the other edges or faces are not displayed in the surface section view. Forcreating a surface section view first you need to create the section view and then choosethe Display only surface check box from the Section View PropertyManager. Choosethe OK button from the PropertyManager. You can also replace the section view by a

Tip. When you create a section view and move the cursor to place the section view,you will observe that the view is aligned to direction of arrows on the section line.If you need to remove this alignment to place the section view, press and hold downthe CTRL key and move the view to the desired location. Select a point in thedrawing sheet to place the view.

Figure 12-18 A partial section view

c12-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 8:23 AM19


Figure 12-19 A surface section view

surface section view by selecting the view to invoke the Section View PropertyManager.Select the Display only surface check box from the Section View PropertyManager.Figure 12-19 shows a surface section view.

Generating the Section View of an AssemblyAccording to the drawing standards when you create the section view of an assembly, somecomponents such as fasteners, shafts, keys, and so on should not be sectioned. Therefore,when you create the section view of an assembly, the Section View dialog box is displayed asshown in Figure 12-20. Select the components that should not be sectioned from the parentview. You can also select the component by invoking the FeatureManager Design Tree flyoutand expanding the parent drawing view. Then expand the assembly to display all thecomponents of the assembly. The name of the selected component is displayed in the Excludedcomponents display area. The Auto hatching check box is used to automatically define thehatch patterns. You can even change the hatch pattern. Applying the hatch pattern andchanging the hatch pattern is discussed later.

If you have more than one instance of the component in the assembly, and you need toexclude all the instances of the components from the section view, select the component fromthe drawing sheet and select the name of the component from the Exclude componentsdisplay area. Click two times the Don’t cut all instances check box from the Section Scopetab. All the instances of the selected component will be excluded from the sectionview, see Figure 12-21.

c12-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 8:23 AM20


Figure 12-20 The Section View dialog box

Figure 12-21 Section view of an assembly with some of thecomponents excluded from the section scope

Tip. You can add or remove the components that are sectioned by right-clicking thedrawing view and choosing Properties from the shortcut menu. Now, choose theSection Scope tab and add or remove the components.

c12-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 8:23 AM21


Figure 12-22 Aligned section view

Toolbar: Drawing > Aligned View (Customize to Add)Menu: Insert > Drawing View > Aligned Section

Generating Aligned Section Views

This tool is used to generate a section view of the component in which at least one ofthe feature is at an angle. In the aligned section view, the section portion revolvesabout an axis normal to the viewing plane such that it is straightened. For example,

refer to Figure 12-22. This figure explains the concept of an aligned section view of a model.Notice that the inclined feature that is sectioned in this view is straightened. As a result, thesection view is longer than the parent view. To create the aligned section view, activate theview. Choose the Aligned Section button from the Drawing toolbar or choose Insert > DrawingView > Aligned Section from the menu bar. Draw the sketch that defines the section line.The aligned section view will be attached to the cursor; place the view at an appropriatelocation in the drawing sheet. Note that the resultant view will be projected normal to the linethat is drawn in the end in the section sketch. Therefore, to get the aligned section viewsimilar to that shown in Figure 12-22, the inclined line in the section sketch should be drawnfirst than the vertical line. Figure 12-23a shows the aligned section view in which the verticalline in the section sketch is drawn first. This is the reason the section view is projected normalto the inclined line that is drawn last. On the other hand, Figure 12-23b shows the views inwhich the inclined line is drawn first.

c12-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 8:23 AM22


NoteYou can also create a sketch associated to a view. This sketch can be selected as the section planefor generating the section view. To create an associated sketch, active the view and draw thesketch that defines the section plane using the Line tool.

If you create a sketch to define the section plane for the aligned section view before invoking theAligned Section View tool, the view will be projected normal to the line that you select last.However, if you select the sketch to define section plane by dragging a window around it, theview will be projected normal to the line that was drawn last.

Generating Broken-out Section Views

This tool is used to create a broken-out section view. A broken-out section view is usedto remove a part of the existing view and display the area of the model or the assemblybehind the removed portion. This type of view is generated using a closed sketch that

is associated with the parent view. To create a broken-out section view, activate the view onwhich you need to create the broken out section view. Choose the Broken-out Section buttonfrom the Drawing toolbar or choose Insert > Drawing View > Broken-out Section from themenu bar. The Broken-out Section PropertyManager is displayed and it prompts you tocreate the closed spline to continue section creation. The cursor will be replaced by thespline cursor. Create a closed sketch using the spline cursor. If you do not want a splineprofile, select a closed profile before choosing the Broken-out Section button. Figure 12-24shows an associated sketch created for creating a broken-out section view.

When you create a closed sketch, some options are displayed in the Broken-out SectionPropertyManager as shown in Figure 12-25 and it prompts you to specify the depth of thebroken-out section. Choose the Preview check box to preview the broken-out section view.

Figure 12-23a Aligned section view Figure 12-23b Aligned section view

Toolbar: Drawing > Broken-out SectionMenu: Insert > Drawing View > Broken-out Section

c12-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 8:23 AM23


The Auto hatching check box is used to define the hatch pattern automatically to thesection drawing view of the assembly. If you are creating the broken-out section view of a part,then the Auto hatching check is not available in the Broken-out Section PropertyManager.Figure 12-26 shows the preview of the broken-out section view.

Figure 12-24 Sketch for creating the broken-out section view

Figure 12-25 The Broken-out Section PropertyManager

c12-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 8:23 AM24


Set the value of the depth of the broken-out section in the Depth spinner. The preview of thesection will be modified dynamically in the drawing view. After setting the value of the depthof the broken-out section, choose the OK button from the Broken-out SectionPropertyManager. Figure 12-27 shows a broken-out section view.

Figure 12-27 Broken-out section view

Figure 12-26 Preview of the broken-out section view

c12-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 8:23 AM25


Figure 12-28 The Auxiliary View PropertyManager

Generating Auxiliary Views

This tool is used to generate an auxiliary view. An auxiliary view is a drawing view thatis generated by projecting the lines normal to a specified edge of an existing view. Tocreate an auxiliary view, choose the Auxiliary View button from the Drawing toolbar

or choose Insert > Drawing View > Auxiliary from the menu bar. The Auxiliary ViewPropertyManager is displayed and it prompts you to select a reference edge to continue.Select the edge that will be the reference to generate the auxiliary view. A view will be attachedto the cursor and some options are displayed in the Auxiliary View PropertyManager asshown in Figure 12-28. Now, the Auxiliary PropertyManager prompts you to select a locationof new view. Select a point on the drawing sheet to place the auxiliary view.

The Display View Arrow check box available in the Display View Arrow rollout is used todisplay the arrow of the viewing plane in the drawing views. The name of the auxiliary view isspecified in the Label edit box. Using the Flip Direction check box you can flip the viewingdirection for creating the auxiliary view. Figure 12-29 shows the reference edge to be selectedto create the auxiliary view. Figure 12-30 shows the auxiliary view created with the defaultviewing direction. Figure 12-31 shows the auxiliary view created with the Flip Direction checkbox selected.

NoteYou can also create a sketch using the sketch tools available in the Sketch Tools toolbar to selectas a reference edge for generating the auxiliary view.

Toolbar: Drawing > Auxiliary ViewMenu: Insert > Drawing View > Auxiliary

c12-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 8:23 AM26


Figure 12-29 Reference edge to be selected to create the auxiliary view

Figure 12-30 Auxiliary view created with theFlip Direction check box cleared

Figure 12-31 Auxiliary view created with theFlip Direction check box selected

Generating Detail Views

This tool is used to generate the detail view. A detail view is used to display the detailsof a portion of an existing view. You can select the portion whose detailing has to beshown in the parent view. The portion that you select will be magnified and placed as

a separate view. You can control the magnification of the detail view. To create a detail view,you first need to activate the view from which you will generate the detail view. Choose theDetail View button from the Drawing toolbar or choose Insert > Drawing View > Detail

Toolbar: Drawing > Detail ViewMenu: Insert > Drawing View > Detail

c12-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 8:23 AM27


Figure 12-32 The Detail View PropertyManager

from the menu bar. The Detail View PropertyManager is displayed and it prompts you tosketch a circle to continue view creation. The cursor is replaced by a circle cursor. Create thecircle on the portion of the view that is to be displayed in the detail view.

As soon as you draw the circle, the detail view is attached to the cursor and some options aredisplayed in the Detail View PropertyManager as shown in Figure 12-32. You are also promptedto select a location for the new view. Specify a point on the drawing sheet to place the view.The options available in the Detail View PropertyManager are discussed next.

Tip. You can also create closed profile other than circle for creating the detail view.For this you need to create the closed profile in the current active view before invokingthe Detail View cursor. After creating the closed profile, select the profile andinvoke the Detail View tool.

c12-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 8:23 AM28


Circle OptionsThe Circle Options rollout is used to define the options to display the circle of the detailview. Using the options available in the rollout, you can also apply the leader to the detailview. The options available in this rollout are discussed next.

StyleThe Style area has the Style drop-down list to specify the style of the closed profile.By default, the Circle radio button is selected below the Style drop-down list.Therefore, the portion of the parent view that is shown in the detail view is highlightedin circle. If you have created a closed profile for defining the portion to be shown inthe detail view, select the Profile radio button. The options available in the Styledrop-down list are discussed next.

Per Standard. The Per Standard option is used to create the detail view as perdefault standards.

Broken Circle. The Broken Circle option is used to display the area of the parentview to be displayed in the detailed view in a broken circle.

With Leader. The With Leader option is used to add the leader to the callout ofthe detail view.

No Leader. The No Leader option is used to remove the leader from the calloutof the detail view.

Connected. This option is used to create a line that connects the detail view withthe closed profile in the parent view.

View OptionsThe View Options rollout is used to set the parameters of the detail view. The variousoptions available in this rollout are discussed next.

Full outlineThe Full outline check box is used to display the complete outline of the closedprofile in the detail view.

Pin positionThe Pin position check box is used to pin the position of the detail view.

Scale hatch patternThe Scale hatch pattern check box is used to scale the hatch pattern with respect tothe scale factor of the detail view when you create a detail view of a section view.

Figure 12-33 shows the detail view created using the Detail View tool.

c12-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 8:23 AM29


Figure 12-33 Detail views

Toolbar: Drawing > Crop View (Customize to Add)

Tip. When you create a detail view, by default the detail view is scaled as 1:1. Youcan define the scale factor in the System Options dialog box so that whenever youcreate a detail view, it will be created with the scaling factor provided by you. Tospecify the scale factor for the detail view, invoke the System Options dialog boxand select the Drawings option from the left of this dialog box. Set the value of thescale factor of the detail view in the Detail View Scaling edit box and choose theOK button. Hence forth, the detail view will be created of the scale factor defined inthe System Options dialog box.

If you need to scale a detail view in the current drawing sheet, select the view andselect the Custom Scale check box. Specify the scale factor in the Custom Scalerollout and choose the OK button from the Detail View PropertyManager. Thescaling of other views is discussed later in this chapter.

Cropping Drawing Views

This tool is used to crop an existing view using a closed sketch associated to that view.The portion of the view that lies inside the associated sketch is retained and theremaining portion is removed. To crop the view, you first need to create a closed

profile associated to the view that defines the area of the view that will be displayed. The areaof the view outside this closed profile will not be displayed when you crop the view. Select theclosed profile and choose the Crop View (Customize to Add) button from the Drawing toolbar.Figure 12-34 shows the closed profile used to crop the view. Figure 12-35 shows a crop view.

c12-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 8:23 AM30


Broken ViewA broken view is used to display a component by removing a portion of it from between,keeping the ends of the drawing view intact. This type of view is used for displaying thecomponents whose length to width ratio is very high. This means that either the length is verylarge as compared to the width or the width is very large as compared to the length. Thebroken view will break the view along the horizontal or vertical direction such that the drawingview fits the area you require. To create a broken view, you first need to define the break line.Select the view you need to break and choose Insert > Horizontal Break/Vertical Breakdepending on the direction in which you need to break the component. Two break lines willbe displayed on the selected view as shown in Figure 12-36.

After adding the break lines, you need to move the break lines to define the gap in the brokenview. Select the break lines and move them away from each other as shown in Figure 12-37.Now, select the view and invoke the shortcut menu. Choose the Break View option from theshortcut menu. The broken view will be created as shown in Figure 12-38.

Tip. You can remove the cropping of view by selecting the crop view and invokingthe shortcut menu. Choose Crop View > Remove Crop from the shortcut menu.The initial view will be displayed in the drawing sheet.

If you need to edit the closed profile of the crop view, select the crop view and invokethe shortcut menu. Choose Crop View > Edit Crop from the shortcut menu. Thesketch of the closed profile and the complete view is displayed in the drawing sheet.Edit the closed profile and choose the Rebuild button from the Standard toolbaror use CTRL+B from the keyboard.

Figure 12-34 Closed profile to crop the view Figure 12-35 Resultant crop view

c12-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 8:23 AM31


Figure 12-37 Extended gap between break lines Figure 12-38 Resultant broken view

NoteSelect the break line to increase or decrease the gap between the broken view. As you move thebreak line, the broken view is modified dynamically.

If you generate a projected view from a broken view, the resultant projected view is also a brokenview.

You can also break an isometric view; the procedure of breaking an isometric view or any 3Dview is the same as discussed earlier. Figure 12-39 shows a broken isometric view.

If you break a 3D view placed horizontally, the two parts of the view as a result of the BrokenView tool will lose their alignment.

Figure 12-36 Break lines added to the view

c12-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 8:23 AM32


Alternate Position View

The alternate position view is used to create a view in which you can show the maximumand minimum range of motion of an assembly. The main position is displayed withcontinuous lines in the drawing view and the alternate position of the assembly is

shown in the same view with dashed (phantom) lines. To create an alternate position view,first you need to activate and select the view of the assembly drawing on which you need tocreate the alternate position view. Choose the Alternate Position View (Customize to Add)button from the Drawing toolbar or choose Insert > Drawing View > Alternate Positionfrom the menu bar. The Alternate Position PropertyManager is displayed as shown inFigure 12-40.

Tip. You can change the style of the break line by selecting the break line andinvoking the shortcut menu. The various break line styles available are straightcut, curve cut, zig zag cut, and small zig zag cut.

To unbreak the broken view, select the view and invoke the shortcut menu. Choosethe Un-Break View option from the shortcut menu.

Select the view and invoke the shortcut menu. Choose the Break View option toagain break the view.

If you select the break lines and press the DELETE key from the keyboard, thebroken view will be replaced by the parent view.

Figure 12-39 A broken isometric view

Toolbar: Drawing > Alternate Position View (Customize to Add)

Menu: Insert > Drawing View > Alternate Position

c12-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 8:23 AM33


Figure 12-40 The Alternate Position PropertyManager

The Alternate Position PropertyManager prompts you to select New configuration, click OKor Enter and define the new configuration parameters. Or Select Existing configuration andclick OK or Enter. But you have not created any configurations yet. Therefore, the NewConfiguration radio button is automatically selected to create a new configuration. Enter thename of the configuration in the edit box given below. Choose the OK button from theAlternate Position PropertyManager to create a new configuration. Choose OK from theTangent Edge Display dialog box

The assembly document is invoked and the Move Component PropertyManager is displayedin the assembly document. The Move Component PropertyManager prompts you to movethe desired components to the position to be shown in the alternate view. Note that thecomponent or components that you need to move to show in the alternate view should havethat particular degree of freedom free to move. These components should not be fully definedin the assembly. Select and drag the cursor to move the components to the desired location.After defining the alternate position of the components, choose the OK button from theMove Component PropertyManager. You will return to the drawing document automatically.The alternate position of the components that are moved will be displayed in phantom linesin the drawing view, see Figure 12-41.

You can also create the alternate position view of an isometric view or of any 3D view. Theprocedure of creating the alternate position view of a 3D view is the same as that discussedearlier. Figure 12-42 shows the alternate position view of an isometric view.

c12-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 8:23 AM34


NoteWhen you create an alternate view of an assembly, a new configuration is created inside theassembly document with the same name that is specified to the configuration while creating thealternate position view. Open the assembly document and invoke the ConfigurationManager;you will observe that a new configuration is created along with the default configuration. Bydefault, the newly created configuration is selected. Therefore, the assembly is displayed with thecomponent moved to their extreme positions. To switch back to the default configuration, selectDefault from the ConfigurationManager and invoke the shortcut menu. Choose the ShowConfiguration option from the shortcut menu. You will observe that the assembly will be displayedwith the moved components back at their original positions. If the Show Configuration optionis not available in the shortcut menu, the assembly is at the default configuration.

Figure 12-41 Alternate position view

Figure 12-42 Alternate view of an isometric view.

c12-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 8:23 AM35


Figure 12-43 Drawing view of the exploded state with explode lines

Tip. If currently the assembly in the assembly document is in the exploded state,then if you drag and drop the assembly to generate the drawing views, all the viewsof the assembly will be generated in the exploded state.

If you need to switch to the collapse state in the drawing view, select the model andclear the Show in exploded state check box from the Drawing View Propertiesdialog box.

Creating the Drawing view of the Exploded State of the AssemblyYou can create the drawing view of the exploded state of the assembly. To generate the view ofthe exploded state of an assembly, you need to have an exploded state defined in the assemblydocument. Generate the isometric view of the assembly on the drawing sheet. Select the viewand invoke the shortcut menu. Choose the Properties option from the shortcut menu. TheView Properties tab of the Drawing View Properties dialog box is displayed. Select the Showin exploded state check box from the Configuration information area and choose the OKbutton from the Drawing View Properties dialog box. Figure 12-43 shows the drawing viewof the exploded state of assembly with explode lines.

WORKING WITH INTERACTIVE DRAFTING INSOLIDWORKSAs mentioned earlier, you can also sketch the 2D drawings in the drawing document ofSolidWorks. In technical terms, sketching 2D drawings is known as interactive drafting. Beforestarting the drawing, it is recommended that you insert an empty view and start creating thedrawing in the empty view after activating that view. The 2D drawings are sketched using thestandard sketching tools available in the Sketch Tools toolbar.

c12-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 8:23 AM36


EDITING THE DRAWING VIEWSIn SolidWorks, you can edit the drawing views using the PropertyManager. You can alsochange the orientation of the generated views using the Named Views option. To changethe orientation, select the parent view that was created using the Named View option; theNamed View PropertyManager is displayed. Double-click the view orientation that you wantto be made current from the View Orientation rollout as shown in Figure 12-44. The orientationof the selected view will be modified. Choose the OK button from the Named ViewPropertyManager. You will notice that all the views derived from the parent view will alsochange their orientation when you change the orientation of the parent view.

CHANGING THE SCALE OF THE DRAWING VIEWSIn SolidWorks, you can also change the scale of the drawing views. To change the scale of thedrawing views, select the drawing view and then select the Custom Scale check box to invokethis rollout available in the PropertyManager. The Custom Scale rollout is displayed inFigure 12-45. Set the scale of the drawing view in the Custom Scale rollout and choose theENTER key. The view will be scaled using the current scale factor.

NoteWhen you scale a view, the view is scaled independently. This is the reason that if you scale theparent view, the views derived from the parent view will not be scaled. You can also change thescale factor of the derived view independent of its parent view.

DELETING THE VIEWSThe unwanted views are deleted from the drawing sheet using the FeatureManager DesignTree or directly from the drawing sheet. Select the view to be deleted from the FeatureManagerDesign Tree and invoke the shortcut menu. Choose the Delete option from the shortcutmenu as shown in Figure 12-46. The Confirm Delete dialog box will be displayed. Choosethe Yes button from this dialog box. You can also delete a view by selecting it directly from the

Figure 12-45 The Custom Scale rollout

Figure 12-44 The View Orientation rollout

c12-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 8:23 AM37


Figure 12-46 Selecting the Delete option from theshortcut menu

drawing sheet and pressing the DELETE key from the keyboard. The Confirm Delete dialogbox is displayed; choose the Yes button from this dialog box.

NoteWhen you delete a parent view, the projected views are not deleted. If you delete the parent viewfrom which a section view or a detail view is generated, the name of the dependent view is alsodisplayed in the Confirm Delete dialog box. If you choose Yes, the dependent views are alsodeleted.

MODIFY THE HATCH PATTERN OF THE SECTION VIEWAs discussed earlier, when you generate a section view of an assembly, a default hatch patternis automatically defined in the section view. If you need to modify the default hatch pattern,select the hatch pattern from the section view and invoke the shortcut menu. Choose theProperties option from the shortcut menu; the Area Hatch/Fill dialog box is displayed asshown in Figure 12-47. The various options available in this dialog box are discussed next.

Tip. You can also rotate a drawing view in the 2D plane. To rotate a drawingview, select the view and choose the Rotate View button from the View toolbar.The Rotate Drawing View dialog box is displayed. You can enter the value orrotation angle in this dialog box or you can also dynamically rotate the drawingview. If you select the Dependent views update to change in orientation checkbox, the views dependent on the rotated view will also change their orientation.

You can also copy and paste the drawing view in the drawing sheet. Select the viewto copy and press CTRL+C from the keyboard. Now, select any where in the drawingsheet to select the sheet and press CTRL+V from the keyboard to paste the drawingview.

c12-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 8:23 AM38


Figure 12-47 The Area Hatch/Fill dialog box

PreviewThe Preview area is used to preview the hatch pattern with the current setting of the hatchpattern.

PropertiesThe Properties area is used to define the type of hatch pattern and the properties of thehatch pattern. The options available in this area are discussed next.

NoneThe None radio button is selected if you donot need to apply any hatch pattern in the sectionview.

SolidThe Solid radio button is used to apply the solid filled hatch pattern to the section view. Bydefault, black color is applied as solid filled hatch pattern.

HatchThe Hatch radio button is selected to apply the standard hatch patterns to the section view.When you select this button, some options available in this dialog box are invoked to definethe properties of the hatch pattern. The options available to define the properties of thehatch pattern are discussed next.

c12-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 8:23 AM39


Figure 12-48 Hatch patterns available in the Pattern drop-down list

PatternThe Pattern drop-down list is used to define the style of the standard hatch pattern youneed to apply to the section view. Some of the standard hatch patterns available in thisdrop-down list are shown in Figure 12-48. The preview of the hatch pattern selected fromthis drop-down list is displayed in the Preview area of the Area Hatch/Fill dialog box.

ScaleThe Scale spinner is used to specify the scale factor of the standard hatch pattern selectedfrom the Pattern drop-down list. When you change the scale factor using this spinner, thepreview displayed in the Preview area updates dynamically.

AngleThe Angle spinner is used to define the angle to the selected hatch pattern.

Apply toThe Apply to drop-down list is used to define whether you need to apply this hatch pattern tothe selected region or to the entire view. If you are editing the hatch pattern of a section viewof an assembly, then you can also specify if you need to apply the hatch pattern to thecomponent.

The Always show dialog on creation check box is used to invoke this dialog box when youapply the hatch pattern next time.

c12-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 8:23 AM40


APPLYING A HATCH PATTERN

You can also apply the hatch pattern to a 2D sketch created using interactive drafting.To apply the hatch pattern to a closed sketch you just need to select any one entity ofthe closed sketch and then choose the Area Hatch/Fill button from the Drawing

toolbar or choose Insert > Area Hatch/Fill from the menu bar. The Area Hatch/Fill dialogbox will be displayed. Set the properties of the hatch pattern in this dialog box and choosethe OK button from the Area Hatch/Fill dialog box.

You can also apply the hatch pattern to a face of the model in the drawing view. To apply thehatch pattern to the face of the model in the drawing view, activate the drawing view andselect the face on which you need to apply the hatch pattern. Invoke the Area Hatch/Filldialog box to apply the hatch pattern. Figure 12-49 shows the hatch pattern applied to theplanar face of the model in the drawing view and a hatch pattern applied to a closed sketchcreated in the drawing view.

Figure 12-49 Hatch pattern applied to the 2D sketch and the planarface

Toolbar: Drawing > Area Hatch/FillMenu: Insert > Area Hatch/Fill

Tip. To change the color of the hatch or solid, select it and then choose the LineColor button from the Line Format toolbar. Select the required color from the EditLine Color dialog box. It should be noted that you cannot change the color of thehatch patterns of the generated section view.

c12-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 8:23 AM41


TUTORIALS

Tutorial 1In this tutorial you will generate the top view, front view, right view, aligned section view,detail view, and isometric view of the model created in the Tutorial 2 of Chapter 7. Use theStandard A4 Landscape sheet format for generating the views. (Expected time: 30 min)


a. Copy the model whose drawing views you want to generate in the current directory.b. Create a new drawing document in the standard A4 Landscape sheet format and generate

the parent view using the named view tool, refer to Figures 11-50 and 11-51.c. Generate the projected views using the Projected View tool, refer to Figure 11-52.d. Generate the aligned section view using the Aligned Section View tool, refer

to Figures 11-53 through 11-56.e. Generate the detail view and the isometric view, refer to Figure 11-57.

Copying the Model in the Current DirectoryFirst, you need to copy the model whose drawing views are to be generated in the currentdirectory.

1. Create a directory with the name c12 in the SolidWorks directory and copy c07tut02.sldprtfrom the /My Document/SolidWorks/c07 directory to this directory.

Opening the New Drawing DocumentAs mentioned earlier in the description, you need to create a new drawing document withstandard A4 sheet.

1. Create a new SolidWorks document in the drawing mode.

The Sheet Format To Use dialog box is displayed. The Standard sheet format radiobutton is selected by default.

2. Choose the A4 Landscape sheet from the Standard sheet format drop-down list andchoose the OK button from the Sheet Format To Use dialog box.

The new drawing document is created with standard A4 sheet size as shown in Figure 12-50.

As discussed earlier, by default the new drawing document starts with first angle projection.But you need to generate the drawing views in the third angle projection. Therefore, youneed to change the type of projection from first angle to third angle.

3. Select the Sheet 1 option from the FeatureManager Design Tree and invoke the shortcutmenu. Choose the Properties option from the shortcut menu.

The Sheet Setup dialog box is displayed.

c12-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 8:23 AM42


Figure 12-50 New drawing document created with A4 standard sheet format

4. Select the Third angle radio button from the Type of projection area of the Sheet Setupdialog box and choose the OK button to exit the dialog box.

Generating the Parent View and the Projected ViewsFirst, you will generate the parent view in the drawing sheet. After generating the baseview, you can use it to generate the other views such as the projected view, detail view,section view, and so on. The parent view will be generated using the Named View tool.

1. Choose the Named View button from the Drawing toolbar and right-click in thedrawing sheet to invoke the shortcut menu.

2. Choose Insert From File; the Open dialog box is displayed.

3. Select c07tut01.sldprt and choose the Open button from the Open dialog box.

The cursor is replaced by the view placement cursor and the Named ViewPropertyManager is displayed. The Front option is selected in the View Orientationrollout. Therefore, if you place the view, it will generate the front view. But the parentview that you need to generate is the top view.

c12-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 8:23 AM43


4. Select the Top option from the View Orientation rollout.

5. Move the cursor close to the upper left corner of the drawing sheet and specify a point atthis location to place the view.

6. If the Tangent Edge Display dialog box is displayed, select the Don’t ask me again checkbox and choose the OK button from the Tangent Edge Display dialog box.

Figure 12-51 shows the top view generated using the Named View tool bar. This view isgenerated at 1:1 scale.

Next, you need to generate the projected view from the parent view generated earlier,which is the top view.

7. Select the parent view and choose the Projected View button from the Drawingtoolbar.

The cursor replaces the place view cursor.

8. Move the cursor below the parent view and specify a point to place the projected view.

9. Next, select the newly generated view and choose the Projected View cursor from theDrawing toolbar.

Tip. When you generate the drawing views in SolidWorks, if there is any cylindricalfeature in the drawing view then the centermarks are automatically displayed inthe drawing view containing the cylindrical feature.

Figure 12-51 Top view generated using the Named View tool

c12-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 8:23 AM44


Figure 12-52 Projected views derived from the top view

10. Move the cursor horizontally toward the right and specify a point on the screen to placethe view. Figure 12-52 shows the views generated from the parent view using the ProjectedView tool.

Generating the Aligned Section ViewNext, you need to create the aligned section view. But before creating the aligned sectionview, you need to create a sketch that will define the section sketch for creating the alignedsection view. Remember that the view is projected normal to the line sketched last.

1. Click on the top view to activate the view.

2. Using the Line tool draw the sketch and apply the relations and dimensions to the sketchas shown in Figure 12-53.

3. Select the dimension and invoke the shortcut menu. Choose the Hide option from theshortcut menu.

4. Now, select the inclined line and then the vertical line. Note that if you selectthe inclined line in the end, the view is generated normal to the inclined line.Now, choose the Aligned Section View button from the Drawing toolbar or chooseInsert > Drawing View > Aligned Section from the menu bar.

The Section View PropertyManager is displayed and you will observe that the alignedsection view will be attached to the cursor as you move the cursor on the drawing sheet.The view generated is normal to the vertical line of the section sketch and the direction ofviewing the section creation is the reverse to the required direction. Therefore, first youneed to flip the viewing direction of section view.

c12-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 8:23 AM45


5. Select the Flip direction check box from the Line Options rollout of the Section ViewPropertyManager.

6. Place the aligned section view on the drawing sheet as shown in Figure 12-54.

Modifying the Hatch Pattern of the Aligned Section ViewThe gap between the hatching line in the aligned section view is large; therefore, youneed to modify the spacing.

Figure 12-53 Sketch to be used as section sketch for the alignedsection view

Figure 12-54 Sheet after generating the aligned section view

c12-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 8:23 AM46


1. Select the hatch pattern and right-click to invoke the shortcut menu. Choose Propertiesto display the Area Hatch/Fill dialog box.

2. Set the value of the Scale spinner to 2 and select View from the Apply to drop-down list.Choose OK to close the dialog box.

Generating the Detail ViewNext, you need to generate the detail view of the right circular feature of the model.Before invoking the Detail View tool to generate the detail view, you need to activate aview from which you will drive the detail view.

1. Activate the top view.

2. Choose the Detail View button from the Drawing toolbar. The Detail ViewPropertyManager is displayed and you are prompted to sketch a circle to continuethe view creation.

The cursor will be replaced by the circle cursor.

3. Create a small circle on the right circular feature of the model in the top view, refer toFigure 12-55.

As you create the circle, the detail view is attached to the cursor; place the view on theright of the drawing sheet.

4. Set the value of the scale factor of the detail view to 3:1 and choose the OK button fromthe Detail View PropertyManager.

Figure 12-55 shows the detail view derived from the top view.

Figure 12-55 The detail view derived from the top view

c12-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 8:23 AM47


Figure 12-56 The detail view derived from the top view

Generating the Isometric ViewThe last view that you need to generate is the isometric view. You will generate the isometricview using the Named View tool.

1. Choose the Named View button from the Drawing toolbar. The Named ViewPropertyManager is displayed and it lists various options of selecting the modelto generate the drawing view.

The cursor will be replaced by the select model cursor.

2. Select any of the view from the drawing sheet to select the model.

A view is attached to the cursor.

3. The Isometric option is selected from the Orientation View rollout. Place the view closeto the top right corner of the drawing sheet and choose the OK button from the NamedView PropertyManager.

Figure 12-56 shows the final drawing sheet after generating all the models.

Saving the DrawingNext, you need to save the drawing.

1. Choose the Save button from the Standard toolbar and save the drawing with the namegiven below and close the file.

\My Documents\SolidWorks\c12\c12-tut01.SLDDRW.

c12-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 8:23 AM48


Tutorial 2In this tutorial you will generate the drawing view of the Bench Vice assembly created inChapter 10. You will generate the top view, section front view, right view, and isometric viewof the assembly in the exploded state. (Expected time: 45 min.)


a. Copy the Bench Vice directory from Chapter 10 to the current directory.b. Create the exploded state of the Bench vice assembly, refer to Figure 12-57.c. Create the drawing document in the standard A4 Landscape sheet format and generate

the parent view using the named view tool, refer to Figure 12-58.d. Generate the section views using the Section View tool, refer to Figure 12-59.e. Generate the right projection view using the Projected View tool, refer to Figure 12-60.f. Generate the isometric view and change the state of the isometric view to the exploded

state, refer to Figure 12-61.

Copying the Model in the Current DirectoryFirst, you need to copy the Bench Vice assembly and its parts to the current directory.

1. Copy the Bench Vice directory from the /My Document/SolidWorks/c10 directory to thecurrent directory.

Creating the Exploded View of the AssemblyBefore proceeding further to create the drawing views of the assembly, you need to createthe exploded state of the assembly in the assembly mode.

1. Open the Bench Vice assembly and create the exploded state and the explode lines asshown in Figure 12-57. It is recommended that whenever you create an exploded state of

Figure 12-57 Exploded view of the assembly with explode lines

c12-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 8:23 AM49


an assembly, you must revert to the collapse state. If you save the assembly in the explodedstate, everytime you generate the drawing views of the assembly, it will generate viewswith the exploded state.

2. Right-click Bench Vice Configutarion(s) > Default in the ConfigurationManager andchoose Collapse to unexplode the assembly.

3. Save and close the assembly.

Opening the New Drawing DocumentAs mentioned earlier in the description, you need to create a new drawing document withstandard A4 sheet.

1. Create a new SolidWorks document in the drawing mode.

The Sheet Format To Use dialog box will be displayed. The Standard sheet format radiobutton is selected by default.

2. Select the A4 Landscape sheet from the Standard sheet format drop-down list and choosethe OK button from the Sheet Format To Use dialog box.

3. Change the projection type from first angle to third angle.

Creating the Parent ViewThe parent view generated in this tutorial is the top view. This view will be generatedusing the Named View tool.

1. Choose the Named View tool and invoke the Open dialog box.

2. Open the Bench vice assembly.

3. Select the Top option from the View Orientation rollout and place the view close to theupper left corner of the drawing sheet.

When you place the view, you will notice that the view placed is larger in size. The size ofthe view is not that is required. Therefore, you need to scale the view.

4. Select the Custom Scale check box to invoke this rollout.

5. Set the value of the scale factor to 1:2 and choose the OK button from the Named ViewPropertyManager.

You may also need to move the view. Figure 12-58 shows the parent view placed in thedrawing sheet.

c12-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 8:23 AM50


Creating the Sectioned Front ViewThe next view that you need to generate is the sectioned front view that is derived fromthe parent view.

1. Activate the top view and choose the Section View button from the Drawingtoolbar.

The Section View PropertyManager is displayed and it prompts you to sketch a line tocontinue view creation. The cursor will be replaced by the line cursor.

2. Create a horizontal line such that it passes through the center of the Bench vice assembly.

As soon as you create the line, the Section View dialog box is displayed. This dialog boxis used to exclude the components from the section cut.

3. Invoke the FeatureManager Design Tree flyout and expand Drawing View1 from theflyout.

4. Now, expand the Bench vice assembly from the flyout.

5. Select the component that will be excluded from the section cut. The components thatwill be excluded from the section cut are Screw Bar, Bar Globes, Jaw Screw, Oval Fillister,Set Screw1, and Set Screw2.

6. Select the Auto hatching check box and choose the OK button from the Section Viewdialog box.

Figure 12-58 Top view generated using the Named View tool

c12-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 8:23 AM51


The preview of the section view is displayed on the drawing sheet as you move the cursorup and down. The direction of viewing of section view is the same as required. Therefore,you need to flip the viewing direction of section view.

7. Select the Flip direction check box and place the section view below the parent view.Choose the OK button from the Section View PropertyManager.

Figure 12-59 shows the section view generated using the Section View tool.

Generating the Right-Side ViewThe next view that you need to generate is the right-side view derived from the frontsection view and will be generated using the Projected View tool.

1. Select the sectioned front view and invoke the Projected View tool.

2. Move the cursor to the right of the sectioned front view and place the view on the right ofthe sectioned front view as shown in Figure 12-60.

Creating the Isometric View in the Exploded StateThe last view that you need to generate is the isometric view in the exploded state.

1. Using the Named View tool, generate the isometric view and place the view near theupper right corner of the drawing sheet.

2. Set the scale factor of the drawing view to 1:2.

Figure 12-59 Section view generated using the Section View tool

c12-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 8:23 AM52


3. Select the view and invoke the shortcut menu. Choose the Properties option from theshortcut menu.

The Drawing View Properties dialog box is displayed.

4. Select the Show in exploded state check box from the Drawing View Properties dialogbox and choose the OK button.

You may need to move the view. Figure 12-61 shows the final drawing sheet after generatingall the drawing views.

Figure 12-60 Right view generated using the Projected View tool

Figure 12-61 Final drawing sheet

c12-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 8:23 AM53


Saving the DrawingNext, you need to save the drawing.

1. Choose the Save button from the Standard toolbar and save the drawing with the namegiven below and close the file.

\My Documents\SolidWorks\c12\c12-tut02.SLDDRW.


1. The Standard sheet format radio button is selected by default in the Sheet Format ToUse dialog box. (T/F)

2. The No sheet format radio button is selected if you want to use the empty sheet, withoutany margin lines or title block. (T/F)

3. The Relative View tool is used to generate an orthographic view; the orientation of theview is defined by selecting the reference planes or the planar faces of the model. (T/F)

4. An auxiliary view is a drawing view that is generated by projecting the lines normal to aspecified edge of an existing view. (T/F)

5. You cannot change the style of the break line in a broken view. (T/F)

6. In technical terms, creating a 2D drawing in the drawing document is known as __________.

7. To create the predefined views choose the __________ button from the Assembly toolbar.

8. The __________ check box available in the View Options rollout is used to display thecomplete outline of the closed profile in the detail view.

9. For changing the scale of the drawing views select the drawing view and select the__________ check box to invoke this rollout available in the PropertyManager.

10. For rotating a drawing view, select the view and choose the __________ button from theView toolbar.

c12-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 8:23 AM54



1. Choose the __________ button from the Drawing toolbar to create an alternate positionview.

2. The __________ dialog box is used to apply the hatch pattern to a closed profile.

3. The __________ check box is used to scale the hatch pattern.

4. A __________ view is a section view in which only the sectioned surface is displayed in thesection view.

5. The __________ dialog box is displayed to confirm the deletion of the views.

6. The views that are generated from a view already placed in the drawing sheet are knownas?

(a) Child views (b) Derived views(c) Predefined views (d) Empty views

7. Which rollout is used to set the parameters of the detail view in the Detail ViewPropertyManager?

(a) View Options (b) View Parameters(c) Parameters (d) Options

8. In which edit box the name of the auxiliary view is specified?

(a) Label (b) View name(c) Name (d) Detail view label

9. Which drop-down list is used to define whether you need to apply this hatch pattern tothe selected region or to the entire view?

(a) Define (b) Apply to(c) Name view (d) None of these

10. From which rollout can you select the view orientation in the Named ViewPropertyManager?

(a) View Orientation (b) Define View(c) Specify View (d) Scale View

c12-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 8:23 AM55


EXERCISE

Exercise 1In this exercise you will generate the front view, section right view, isometric view, and thealternate position view on the isometric view of Exercise 1 of Chapter 11. You need to scalethe parent view to the scale factor of 1:3. The views that you need to generate are shown inFigure 12-62. (Expected time: 30 min.)

Answers to Self-Evaluation Test1. T, 2. T, 3. T, 4. T, 5. F, 6. Interactive drafting, 7. Predefined View, 8. Full outline, 9.Custom Scale, 10. Rotate View

Figure 12-62 Views of Exercise 1

c12-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 8:23 AM56

Chapter 13

Working With DrawingViews-II

After completing this chapter you will be able to:• Generate Annotations in the Drawing Views.• Create Reference Dimensions.• Add Notes to the Drawing Views.• Add Surface Finish Symbols to the Drawing Views.• Add Datum Feature Symbols to the Drawing Views.• Add Geometric Tolerance to the Drawing Views.• Add Datum Target Symbols to the Drawing Views.• Add Center Marks and Center Lines to the Drawing Views.• Add Hole Callouts to the Drawing Views.• Add Cosmetic Threads to the Drawing Views.• Add Weld Symbols to the Drawing Views.• Add Multi-jog Leader to the Drawing Views.• Add Dowel Pin Symbol to the Drawing Views.• Edit the Annotations.• Add BOM and Balloons to the Assembly.• Add New Sheets in the Drawing Document.• Edit Sheet Format.• Create User-Defined Sheet Format.

Learning Objectives

c13-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:12 PM1


ADDING ANNOTATIONS TO THE DRAWING VIEWSAfter generating the drawing views, you need to generate the dimensions in the drawingviews and add the other annotations such as notes, surface finish symbols, geometric tolerance,and so on. There are two types of annotations that can be displayed in the drawing views. Thefirst type of annotation is the generative annotation. These annotations are added whilecreating the part in the part mode. For example, the dimensions that you add to the sketchand features of the part. The second type of annotations are added manually to the geometryof drawing views such as reference dimensions, notes, surface finish symbols, and so on. Boththese types of annotations are discussed next.

Generating Annotations Using the Model Items Tool

The Model Items tool is used to generate the annotations that were added whilecreating the model in the part mode. To invoke this tool, choose the Model Itemsbutton from the Drawing toolbar or choose Insert > Model Items from the menu

bar. The Insert Model Items dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 13-1. The variousoptions available in this dialog box are discussed next.

AnnotationsThe Annotations area of this dialog box is used to select the annotations that you need togenerate in the drawing views. Using the options available in the Annotation area you cangenerate the cosmetic thread, datums, datum targets, dimensions, geometric tolerances, notes,surface finish, and weld symbols. Select the annotation to be generated from this area.

Reference geometryThe Reference geometry area is used to generate the reference geometries that were used increating the model. You can generate axes, curves, planes, surfaces, and so on. Select thecheck box of the reference geometry that you need to generate in the drawing views.

Import fromThe options available in the Import from area are used to define the options from wherethe annotation should be imported. The options available in this area are discussed next.

Entire modelThe Entire model radio button is selected to import the annotations from the entiremodel when a feature of a model is selected from the FeatureManager Design Treeflyout in the Drawing mode. In case of assemblies, the annotations from the entire assemblyare imported even if you select a single component of the assembly.

Selected componentThe Selected component radio button is active if you select a component of the assemblyfrom the FeatureManager Design Tree. This radio button is selected to import theannotations from only the selected component.

Toolbar: Annotation > Model ItemsMenu: Insert > Model Items

c13-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:12 PM2

Working With Drawing Views-II 13-3

Figure 13-1 The Insert Model Items dialog box

Selected featureThe Selected feature radio button is active if you select a feature of the component fromthe FeatureManager Design Tree. This radio button is selected to import theannotations from only the selected feature or features.

Only AssemblyThe Only Assembly radio button is active when you generate the drawing views of anassembly. This radio button is selected to import the annotations that are applied to theassembly in the Assembly mode such as offset distance and so on.

All typesThe All types check box is selected if you need to display all the annotations applied to thepart or assembly.

Include items from hidden featuresThe Include items from hidden features check box is selected to display the annotation thatbelongs to a hidden feature of the model. By default, this check box is cleared. It is

c13-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:12 PM3


recommended that you clear this check box because it will eliminate the display ofunwanted annotations.

Import items into all viewsThe Import items into all views check box is selected to display the annotation in all theviews. The annotations are automatically distributed in all the drawing views. If you need todisplay the annotations in a selected view or views only, clear this check box. When you clearthis check box, the Import to views display area is displayed below the Help button. You canselect the views in which you need to display the annotations. You can also preselect the viewsin which you need to display the annotations before invoking the Insert Model Items dialogbox.

Eliminate duplicate model dimensionsThe Eliminate duplicate model dimensions check box is selected to prevent the display ofthe same annotation more than once.

After setting all the parameters in the Insert Model Items dialog box, choose the OK buttonto display the annotations.

Creating the Reference AnnotationsIn SolidWorks, you can create the reference annotations in the drawing views. The referenceannotations include reference dimensions, notes, surface finish symbols, datum feature symbol,geometric tolerance, and so on. The method of creating the reference annotations is discussednext.

Tip. When you generate the annotations, mostly the annotations overlaps one overthe other. Therefore, you may need to move the annotations after generating. Tomove an annotation, move the cursor on the annotation; a red rectangle is displayed.Press and hold down the left mouse button and drag the cursor to place the annotationat the desired location. Release the left mouse button when the cursor is placed atthe desired location.

The dimensions generated while generating the annotations are parametricdimensions and these dimensions are the link of bidirectional associativity inSolidWorks. To modify the dimensions, double-click the dimension; the Modifydialog box is displayed. Using this dialog box you can modify the value of dimension.After modifying the dimensions choose the Rebuild button from the Standard toolbar or choose CTRL+B from the keyboard.

The modification implemented in the Drawing mode will also be reflected in thePart mode and the Assembly mode.

If you need to delete a particular generated annotation, select the annotation fromthe drawing sheet and press the DELETE key from the keyboard. The annotationdeleted from the drawing view will not be deleted from the part in the Part mode.

c13-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:12 PM4


Creating Reference Dimensions

In the Drawing mode of SolidWorks, you can use the Dimension tool to add referencedimensions to the drawing views. This tool is similar to the Dimensions tool discussedin the sketcher environment of SolidWorks. The additional dimensioning option

is provided in the Drawing mode of SolidWorks is discussed next.

Chamfer DimensionThe Chamfer Dimension option is used to add the reference dimension to the chamfersavailable in the drawing view. To add a chamfer dimension choose Insert > Dimensions> Chamfer Dimension from the menu bar. You can also invoke this tool by choosing theDimension button from the Sketch Relations toolbar and then choosing the ChamferDimension option by invoking the shortcut menu. The cursor is replaced by thechamfer dimension cursor. Now, select the inclined chamfered edge and then select ahorizontal or vertical edge. The chamfer dimension will be attached to the cursor. Selecta point on the sheet to place the dimension. Figure 13-2 shows a chamfer dimensioncreated using the Chamfer Dimension option.

Adding Notes to the Drawing Views

In SolidWorks, you can also add notes to the drawing views in the Drawing mode. Toadd notes to the drawing view, choose the Note button from the Annotation toolbar

Toolbar: Sketch Relations > DimensionMenu: Tools > Dimensions

Figure 13-2 Chamfer dimension created using the ChamferDimension tool

Toolbar: Annotation > NoteMenu: Insert > Annotations > Note

c13-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:12 PM5


or choose Insert > Annotations > Note from the menu bar. The Note PropertyManager isdisplayed as shown in Figure 13-3.

When you invoke the Note PropertyManager, a text box is attached to the cursor. When youmove the cursor close to an existing entity in the drawing sheet, a leader will be displayedattached to the text box. This is because the Auto Leader button is chosen in the Arrows/Leaders rollout. Place the text box at the desired location. As you place the text box, the textedit box will be invoked and you can enter the text. After entering the text, choose OK fromthe Note PropertyManager. The other options available in the Note PropertyManager arediscussed next.

Arrows/LeadersThe options available in the Arrows/Leaders rollout are used to define the style of arrowsand leaders that are displayed in the notes.

Text FormatThe Text Format rollout is used to set the format of text such as font, size, justification,

Figure 13-3 The Note PropertyManager

c13-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:12 PM6


and rotation of the text. You can also add the symbols and hyperlink to the text using theoptions available in this rollout.

BorderThe options available in the Border rollout are used to define the border in which thenote text will be displayed. You can use various types of borders from the Style drop-downlist. The Size drop-down list available in this rollout is used to define the size of theborder in which the text will be placed.

Adding Surface Finish Symbols to the Drawing Views

You can add the surface finish symbols to the drawing views using the Surface Finishtool. To add the surface finish symbols, choose the Surface Finish button from theAnnotation toolbar or choose Insert > Annotations > Surface Finish from the menu

bar. The Properties dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 13-4.

Toolbar: Annotation > Surface FinishMenu: Insert > Annotations > Surface Finish

Figure 13-4 The Properties dialog box

c13-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:12 PM7


As you invoke this tool, a surface finish symbol is attached to the cursor. The options availablein the Properties dialog box are discussed next.

Preview AreaThe preview area is used to preview the surface finish symbol with the current parameters.As you modify the parameters of the surface finish symbol, the preview updates dynamicallyin the preview area.

SymbolThe Symbol drop-down list is used to define the type of surface finish symbols that youcan add to the drawing views. The surface finish symbols include the Basic surface finishsymbol, Machining Required, Machining Prohibited, JIS Surface Texture 1, JIS SurfaceTexture 2, JIS Surface Texture 3, JIS Surface Texture 4, and JIS No Machining.

Direction of layThe Direction of lay drop-down list is used to define the direction of lay in the surfacefinish symbol. This drop-down list is available when only the Basic, Machining Required,or Machining Prohibited option is selected from the Symbol drop-down list.

RoughnessThe Roughness area available in the Properties dialog box is used to define the surfaceroughness values to be displayed in the surface finish symbol.

RotatedThe Rotated check box is selected to rotate the surface finish symbol at an angle of 90º.

Special requirementsThe Special requirements area is used to enter the information such as production method/treatment, sampling length, and some other roughness values, if there is any.

Material removalThe Material removal area is used to define the material removal allowance to be displayedin the surface finish symbol.

LeaderThe Leader area is used to define the style and properties of the leader and the arrowthat will be attached to the surface finish symbol.

FontThe Font area is used to define the font and the font size to be used in the text added inthe surface finish symbol.

c13-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:12 PM8


Adding Datum Feature Symbol to the Drawing Views

The Datum Feature Symbol tool is used to add the datum feature symbol to thedrawing views. The datum feature symbols are used as datum references while addingthe geometric tolerances in the drawing view. To add the datum feature symbol, choose

the Datum Feature Symbol button from the Annotation toolbar or choose Insert >Annotations > Datum Feature Symbol from the menu bar. The Properties dialog box isdisplayed and a datum feature symbol with default parameters is attached to the cursor. TheProperties dialog box used to add the Datum Feature Symbol is displayed in Figure 13-5.

The options available in the Properties dialog box to add the datum feature symbol arediscussed next.

Preview AreaThe preview area available in this dialog box is used to preview the datum feature symbol.By default, the datum symbol feature is displayed in the preview area with the defaultparameters. The preview of the datum feature symbol updates dynamically as you modifythe parameters of the datum feature symbol.

Datum display typeThe Datum display type drop-down list is used to define the border that will be displayedaround the label of the datum feature symbol. The border of the datum feature symbol isdisplayed as a square by default. You can also display the border of the datum featuresymbol as a circle using this drop-down list.

Toolbar: Annotation > Datum Feature SymbolMenu: Insert > Annotations > Datum Feature Symbol

Figure 13-5 The Properties dialog box used to adddatum feature symbol to the drawing views

c13-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:12 PM9


LabelThe Label edit box is used to define the label to be used in the datum feature symbol.

Display with filled triangleThe Display with filled triangle check box is selected to display a filled triangle at thebottom of the datum feature symbol.

Display with shoulderThe Display with shoulder check box is selected to display the datum feature symbolwith a shoulder created at 90º.

After defining all the parameters of the datum feature symbol, specify a point on anexisting entity in the drawing sheet and then move the cursor to define the length andthe placement of the datum feature symbol. As you place one datum feature symbol,another datum feature symbol is attached to the cursor. Therefore, you can place as manydatum feature symbols as you want using the Properties dialog box. The sequence of thenames of datum feature symbols automatically follows the alphabetical order as you placemultiple datum feature symbols.

Adding Geometric Tolerance to the Drawing Views

In a shop floor drawing, you need to provide various other parameters along with thedimensions and dimensional tolerance. These parameters can be geometric condition,surface profile, material condition, and so on. All these parameters are defined using

the geometric tolerance. To add the geometric tolerance to the drawing views, choose theGeometric Tolerance button from the Annotation toolbar or choose Insert > Annotations >Geometric Tolerance from the menu bar. The Properties dialog box will be displayed. It willbe used to define the parameters of the geometric tolerance. When you invoke this tool, ageometric tolerance is attached to the cursor. The Properties dialog box is shown in Figure 13-6.

Various options available in the Properties dialog box to add the geometric tolerance to thedrawing views are discussed next.

Feature control framesThe Feature control frames area is used to define the features of geometric tolerance tobe added in the frames. The features of the geometric tolerance that can be added in theframes are geometric condition symbols, diameter symbol, value of tolerance, materialcondition, and datum references. The options available in the Feature control framesarea are discussed next.

GCSThe GCS button available in the Feature control frames area is used todefine the geometric condition symbol. When you choose this button, theSymbols dialog box is displayed, which is used to define the geometric

condition symbols in the geometric tolerance. The Symbols dialog box is shown in

Toolbar: Annotation > Geometric ToleranceMenu: Insert > Annotations > Geometric Tolerance

c13-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:12 PM10


Figure 13-6 The Properties dialog box used to apply geometric tolerance

Figure 13-7. You can specify the standard of the geometric condition symbol from theSymbol library drop-down list. After selecting the appropriate geometric conditionsymbol, choose the OK button from this dialog box. The preview of the geometrictolerance is displayed in the preview area.

Tolerance 1The Tolerance 1 edit box is used to specify the tolerance value with respect to thegeometric condition defined using the GCS button. Using the Diameter button, youcan add a diameter symbol with the tolerance value. Using the MC button availablenext to the Tolerance 1 edit box, you can specify the material condition in thegeometric tolerance. When you choose the MC button, the Symbols dialog box isdisplayed, see Figure 13-8. This dialog box is used to define the symbol for the material condition.

Figure 13-7 The Symbols dialog box used to definethe geometric condition symbols

c13-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:13 PM11


Tolerance 2The options available in the Tolerance 2 edit box are the same as those discussedearlier. This edit box is used to define the second geometric tolerance, if required.

PrimaryThe Primary edit box is used to specify the alphabets to define the datum referenceadded to the drawing view using the Datum Feature Symbol tool. Similarly, you candefine the Secondary datum reference and the Tertiary datum reference.

FramesThe Frames spinner is used to increase the frames for applying more complexgeometric tolerances.

Projected tolerance zoneThe Projected tolerance zone area is used to define the height of the projected tolerance.Select the Show PTZ check box from the Projected tolerance zone area; the Projectedtolerance zone edit box will be displayed. Specify the zone height in this edit box.

OptionsThe Options button is used to define the settings of the leader, arrow, font, and so on.When you choose this button, the Geometric Tolerance Options dialog box is displayed.Using this dialog box you can set the parameters for leader style, arrow style, font, and soon.

Between two pointsThe Between two points check box is selected if the geometric tolerance to be applied isbetween two points of entities. To apply the geometric tolerance between two points orentities select the Between two points check box and specify the tolerance in the editboxes provided in the Between two points area.

Figure 13-8 The Symbols dialog box used to definethe symbol for material condition

c13-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:13 PM12


Figure 13-9 shows a drawing after adding annotations to the drawing.

Adding Datum Target Symbols to the Drawing Views

The Datum Target tool is used to add a datum target to the drawing views. To add thedatum targets to the drawings, choose the Datum Target button from the Annotationstoolbar or choose Insert > Annotations > Datum Target from the menu bar. The

cursor is replaced by the datum target cursor. Select a model face, an edge, or a line from theview on which you need to add the datum target. The Properties dialog box is displayed asshown in Figure 13-10. This dialog box is used to define the properties of the datum targetsymbol. Set the parameters of the datum target symbol in the Target area of this dialog box.You can set the target shape as a point, circle, or rectangle; you can also define the diameterof the target area if the shapes of the target are selected as point and circle using the Targetarea. If the shape of the target is selected as rectangle then you need to define the length andwidth of the rectangle. Using the Datum referrence(s) edit box you can specify the datumreferences to the datum target symbol. Figure 13-11 shows the datum target symbols added todrawing view.

Figure 13-9 A drawing after adding some annotations

Toolbar: Annotation > Datum Target (Customize to Add)Menu: Insert > Annotations > Datum Target

c13-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:13 PM13


Figure 13-10 The Properties dialog box used to add the datum targetsymbol to the drawing views

Figure 13-11 Datum target symbols added to the model

c13-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:13 PM14


Adding Center Marks to the Drawing Views

The Center Mark tool is used to add center marks to the circular entities. As discussedearlier, center marks are automatically generated when you generate the model. Butif the center marks are not generated while generating the drawing view, or if you

have sketched a view, you can use this tool to add the center marks to the drawing views. Toadd the center marks to the drawing views, choose the Center Mark button from theAnnotations toolbar or choose Insert > Annotation > Center Mark from the menu bar. TheCenter Mark PropertyManager will be displayed as shown in Figure 13-12.

When you invoke the Center Mark PropertyManager, the cursor is replaced by the centermark cursor and you are prompted to select a circular edge or an arc for the Center Markinsertion. By default, the Single Center Mark button is selected in the Options rollout of theCenter Mark PropertyManager. Select the circular edge or arc to add the center mark.Figure 13-13 shows the center marks added using the Single Center Mark button selectedfrom the Options rollout.

Toolbar: Annotation > Center MarkMenu: Insert > Annotations > Center Mark

Figure 13-12 The Center Mark PropertyManager

c13-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:13 PM15


Figure 13-13 Center marks added using theSingle Center Mark option

Figure 13-14 Center marks added using theLinear Center Mark option

If you add center marks to a hole that is part of a linear or circular pattern, the Propagatebutton appears on the center mark. If you choose this button the center mark is added to allthe remaining instances of the pattern.

The center mark in rectangular and circular patterns can also be applied using the LinearCenter Mark and Circular Center Mark buttons. If you select the Linear Center Mark buttonfrom the Options rollout, then you can add the center mark in the linear pattern format.Since the Connection lines check box is selected by default, the center mark will be connectedusing the center lines. Figure 13-14 shows the center marks added using the Linear CenterMark button with the Connection lines check box selected.

Using the Circular Center Mark button, you can create the center mark in the circular patternformat. When you select the Circular Center Mark button from the Options rollout, theCircular lines check box, Radial lines check box, and the Base center mark check box aredisplayed. The Circular lines check box is used to create a circular line around the centers ofthe circle arranged in the form of circular pattern. The Radial lines check box is used todisplay the radial lines with the center mark. The Base center mark check box is used todisplay the base center mark. Figure 13-15 shows the center mark created with the Basecenter mark check box cleared. Figure 13-16 shows the center mark created with the Basecenter mark check box selected. Figure 13-17 shows the center mark created with the Radiallines check box selected.

The Display Attributes rollout available in the Center Mark PropertyManager is used todefine the size of the center mark and the extended lines. The Angle rollout is used to rotatethe center mark at an angle.

c13-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:13 PM16


Figure 13-15 Center marks created with the Basecenter mark check box cleared

Figure 13-16 Center marks created with theBase center mark check box selected

Figure 13-17 Center marks created with the Radial lines check box selected

Adding Center Lines to Views

The Centerline tool is used to create the centerlines in the views by selecting twoedges/sketch segments or a single cylindrical/conical face. To create a centerline, choosethe Centerline button from the Annotation toolbar or choose Insert > Annotations

> Centerline from the menu bar. The Centerline PropertyManager is invoked and it promptsyou to select two edges/sketch segments or a single cylindrical/conical face. Select the entityor entities from the view to add the centerline. Figure 13-18 shows the center lines added tothe drawing views by selecting the surface.

Toolbar: Annotation > CenterlineMenu: Insert > Annotations > Centerline

c13-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:13 PM17


Figure 13-18 Centerlines added using the Center Mark tool

Adding Hole Callout to the Views

The Hole Callout tool is used to generate the hole callouts that are created in Partmode using the Hole PropertyManager, Hole Wizard, or cut option. To generate ahole callout, choose the Hole Callout button from the Annotation toolbar or choose

Insert > Annotations > Hole Callout from the menu bar. The cursor will be replaced by thehole callout cursor. Select the hole from the drawing views; the hole callout will be attached tothe cursor. Pick a point on the drawing sheet to place the hole callout. Figure 13-19 shows adrawing view with hole callouts generated using the Hole Callout tool.

Adding the Cosmetic Threads to the Drawing Views

The Cosmetic Thread tool is used to add cosmetic threads that will display the threadconventions in the drawing views. To add a cosmetic thread in the drawing view,select the circular edge from the drawing view on which you need to apply the cosmetic

thread. Now, choose the Cosmetic Thread button from the Annotation toolbar or choose

Toolbar: Annotation > Hole CalloutMenu: Insert > Annotations > Hole Callout

Toolbar: Annotation > Cosmetic Thread (Customize to Add)Menu: Insert > Annotations > Cosmetic Threads

Tip. You can also set the option for the automatic creation of centerline whilegenerating the drawing views. Choose Tools > Options from the menu bar toinvoke the System Options- General dialog box. Select the Document Propertiestab from this dialog box. Select the Centerlines check box from the Auto insertionon view creation area and choose OK to close the dialog box.

You can also directly select a view to add the centerlines.

c13-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:13 PM18


Figure 13-19 Hole callouts generated using the Hole Callout tool

Insert > Annotations > Cosmetic Thread from the menu bar. The Cosmetic ThreadPropertyManager is displayed as shown in Figure 13-20.

The options available in the Cosmetic Thread dialog box are discussed next.

Figure 13-20 The Cosmetic Thread dialog box

c13-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:13 PM19


Preview AreaThe preview area is used to display the preview of the cosmetic thread. The preview of thecosmetic thread modifies dynamically as you modify the parameters of the cosmetic thread.

Selection AreaThe selection area is used to display the name of the selected entity on which you need toapply the cosmetic thread.

Apply threadThe Apply thread area is used to define the depth of the cosmetic thread.

Major diameterThe Major diameter spinner is used to define the major diameter of the thread.

Thread calloutThe Thread callout edit box is used to specify the text to be used in the thread calloutfor the cosmetic thread.

After setting all the parameters, choose the OK button from the Cosmetic Thread dialogbox. When you add a cosmetic thread to a generated drawing view, the thread convention willbe displayed in all the drawing views. Figure 13-21 shows the cosmetic thread added to themodel.

Figure 13-21 Cosmetic threads added to the drawing views

Tip. You can change the model display setting from hidden lines removed to hiddenlines visible, or wireframe, shaded using the options available in the View toolbar.

c13-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:13 PM20


NoteThe thread conventions once added in the drawing view can only be deleted from the part file.You cannot delete the thread convention from the drawing file. To delete the thread conventionin the part file, expand the Hole or Cut feature in the FeatureManager Design Tree. Now,select the thread convention and delete it.

Adding Weld Symbols to the Drawing Views

The Weld Symbol tool is used to add the welding symbol to the drawing views. Toadd the welding symbol, select the edge or the vertex where you need to add the weldsymbol and choose the Weld Symbol button from the Annotation toolbar or choose

Insert > Annotations > Weld Symbol from the menu bar. The Properties dialog box will bedisplayed as shown in Figure 13-22.

The options available in the dialog box are discussed next.

DimensionThe Dimension area is used to specify the dimension of the weld and the welding symbol.The Weld Symbol button available in the this area is used to define the welding symbols

Toolbar: Annotation > Weld Symbol (Customize to Add)Menu: Insert > Annotations > Weld Symbol

Figure 13-22 The Properties dialog box used to add the welding symbols to the drawing views

c13-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:13 PM21


from the Symbols dialog box displayed in Figure 13-23. Using the edit boxes available inthis area you can define the dimension of weld.

Top/BottomUsing the Top radio button and the Bottom radio button you can specify if you need todisplay the welding symbols on the top or at the bottom.

ContourThe Contour drop-down list is used to define the shape of the cross-section of the weldcontour to be flat, convex, or concave.

The other options available in this dialog box are used to define if you need a symmetricweld, peripheral weld, field, site weld, identification line, and indication of welding process.

StaggerThe Stagger check box is selected to define the stagger in the weld symbol.

After specifying all the parameters in the Properties dialog box, choose the OK button toexit the dialog box and place the weld symbol. Figure 13-24 shows the weld symbol added tothe drawing view.

Adding the Multi-jog Leader to the Drawing Views

Using the Multi-jog Line tool you can add a multi-jog leader line to the drawingviews. A multi-jog leader is basically a leader in which you can add multiple jog lines.To add a multi-jog leader, choose the Multi-jog Leader button from the Annotation

toolbar or choose Insert > Annotations > Multi-jog Leader from the menu bar. The cursorwill be replaced by the multi-jog line cursor. Select a point on the sheet or on an entity fromwhere you need to start the leader. Now, specify the points on the drawing sheet to specify the

Figure 13-23 The Symbols dialog box used to define the weld symbols

Toolbar: Annotation > Multi-jog Leader (Customize to Add)Menu: Insert > Annotations > Multi-jog Leader

c13-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:13 PM22


Figure 13-24 Welding symbol added to the model

jogs and then select the second entity where the second end of leader will be placed. A multi-jogleader will be created. Double-click the sheet to end the multi-jog leader creation. Figure 13-25shows a multi-jog leader added to the drawing view.

Adding the Dowel Pin Symbols to the Drawing Views

The Dowel Pin Symbol tool is used to add the dowel pin symbol to the holes in thedrawing views. The dowel pin symbol is used to confirm the size of the selected hole.

Figure 13-25 Multi-jog leader added to the drawing view

Toolbar: Annotation > Dowel Pin Symbol (Customize to Add)Menu: Insert > Annotations > Dowel Pin Symbol

c13-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:13 PM23


To create a dowel pin symbol, select a hole or circular edge from the drawing view and choosethe Dowel Pin Symbol button from the Annotation toolbar or choose Insert > Annotations> Dowel Pin Symbol from the menu bar. The Dowel Pin Symbol PropertyManager isdisplayed. Using the Flip symbol check box in the Display Attributes rollout, you can flipthe direction of the dowel pin symbol.

EDITING THE ANNOTATIONSYou can edit the annotation added to drawing view by selecting them or by double-clickingthem to display their respective PropertyManager or dialog box. Using the PropertyManageror dialog box you can edit the parameters of the annotations.

ADDING THE BOM AND BALLOONS IN THE DRAWING

The BOM, also known as Bill of Materials, is a table that provides you the information relatedto the number of components in an assembly, their name, their quantity, and other relatedinformation. You can add the BOM in the drawing sheet to display the part list of thecomponents used in the assembly. The BOM placed in the drawing document is parametricin nature. Therefore, if you add or delete a part from the assembly, the change will be reflectedin the BOM in the assembly document. To insert a BOM in the drawing file having thedrawing views of an assembly, select any one view from the drawing document and chooseInsert > Bill of Materials from the menu bar. The Select BOM Template dialog box isinvoked. Using this dialog box you can select the default BOM templates provided inSolidWorks. Select the bomtemp.xls file from the Select BOM Template dialog box andchoose the Open button. The Bill of Materials Properties dialog box will be displayed asshown in Figure 13-26.

Menu: Insert > Bill of Materials

Figure 13-26 The Bill of Materials Properties dialog box

c13-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:13 PM24


Figure 13-27 The Contents tab of the Bill of Materials Propertiesdialog box

The options available in this dialog box are discussed next.

Configuration TabThe options available in the Configuration tab are used to specify the information to beincluded in the BOM and the parts and the subassemblies to be included in the BOM. Theoptions available in this dialog box are discussed next.

The Anchor point area available in this dialog box is used to define the point of placement ofthe BOM. The Use table anchor point check box is used to coincide the anchor point of thedrawing sheet with the anchor point of the BOM. You will learn more about anchor pointlater in this chapter. The Anchor point coincident to drop-down list is used to define thepoint of the BOM that should coincide with the drawing sheet anchor point.

ContentsThe Contents tab is used to display the content of the parts to be used in the BOM. When youselect the Contents tab from this dialog box, the preview of the BOM attached to the top leftcorner of the drawing sheet is displayed. The Contents tab selected from the Bill ofMaterials Properties dialog box is displayed in Figure 13-27.

The parts that will be displayed in the BOM are checked with a green check mark in theContents tab of the Bill of Materials Properties dialog box. You can clear the check markfrom the parts that need not be included in the BOM.

c13-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:13 PM25


Figure 13-28 BOM added to the drawing sheet

ControlThe Control tab is used to define the style from the row numbers. You can also split the tableusing the options available in this tab.

After setting all the parameters, choose OK from this dialog box. The BOM will be placed atthe top-right corner of the drawing sheet. Figure 13-28 shows the BOM added to the drawingsheet.

Tip. You can edit the BOM placed in the drawing sheet by just double-clicking theBOM; the Microsoft Excel environment will be invoked and using the tools availablein Microsoft Excel, you can edit or modify the BOM. Double-click the drawingsheet to return to the assembly environment.

You can set the anchor of the drawing sheet by expanding Sheet Formats 1 fromthe FeatureManager Design Tree. Select the Bill of Materials Anchor andright-click to invoke the shortcut menu. Choose the Set Anchor option from theshortcut menu. The current anchor will be displayed as a point on the drawingsheet. Select a point in the drawing sheet where you need to specify the anchor pointfor placing the BOM. Now, select Sheet 1 from the FeatureManager DesignTree and choose the Edit Sheet option by invoking the shortcut menu to return tothe edit sheet environment.

You can also unlock the BOM from the anchor point so that it can be moved freelyanywhere. To unlock the BOM, right-click it and choose Anchor > Unlock fromthe shortcut menu. The shortcut menu also has some other options such as Hidingor Editing the BOM.

c13-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:13 PM26


Figure 13-29 The Balloon PropertyManager

Adding Balloons to the Drawing Views

The Balloon tool is used to add the balloons to the components of the assembly inthe drawing view. The naming of balloons depends on the sequence of the parts inBOM. To add balloons to the drawing view, choose the Balloon button from the

Annotation toolbar or choose Insert > Annotations > Balloon from the menu bar. TheBalloon PropertyManager is displayed as shown in Figure 13-29.

After invoking the Balloon PropertyManager, you are prompted to select one or more locationsto place balloons. Select the components from the assembly drawing view to add the balloons.If you select the face of a component, the balloon will have a filled circle at the attachmentpoint. However, if you select an edge of the component, the balloon will have a closed filletarrow. After placing all the balloons, choose the OK button from the Balloon PropertyManager.You may have to select and move the balloons after placing them. Figure 13-30 shows thedrawing sheet in which balloons are added.

ADDING NEW SHEETS TO THE DRAWING VIEWSYou can also add new sheets to the drawing document. A multi-sheet drawing document isgenerally used when you need to generate the drawing views of all the components and thedrawing views of the assembly in the same document. You can switch between the sheets easilyto refer to the drawings of different parts of an assembly within the same document and youdo not need to open the separate drawing documents. To add a sheet to the drawing document,select Sheet 1 from the FeatureManager Design Tree and invoke the shortcut menu. Choosethe Add Sheet option from the shortcut menu to add a sheet to the drawing document orchoose Insert > Sheet from the menu bar. The Sheet Setup dialog box is displayed. Using

Toolbar: Annotation > BalloonMenu: Insert > Annotations > Balloon

c13-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:13 PM27


this dialog box you can specify the name, standard sheet format, and scale projection type forthe drawing sheet to be added. Choose the OK button from this dialog box; a new sheet willbe added in the drawing document. Figure 13-31 shows a drawing document with four drawingsheets added and Sheet 4 as the active sheet.

Figure 13-31 Drawing sheets added to the drawing document

Figure 13-30 Balloons added to the assembly drawing view

c13-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:13 PM28


To activate a drawing sheet, select the sheet from the FeatureManager Design Tree andinvoke the shortcut menu. Choose the Active option from the shortcut menu to activate theselected sheet. You can also activate the sheet by selecting the sheet tab from the bottom ofthe drawing document.

EDITING THE SHEET FORMATYou can edit the default standard sheet format according to your requirement. To edit thestandard sheet format, select Sheet 1 from the FeatureManager Design Tree and invoke theshortcut menu. Choose the Edit Sheet Format option from the shortcut menu. All the entities,annotations, and views will disappear from the drawing sheet. Using the sketching toolsavailable in the Sketch Tools toolbar you can edit the sheet format. After editing the sheetformat select Sheet 1 and invoke the shortcut menu. Select the Edit Sheet option from theshortcut menu to switch back to the edit sheet environment.

CREATING A USER-DEFINED SHEET FORMATIn SolidWorks you can also create a user-defined sheet format. To create a user-defined sheetformat, create a new drawing document with standard size with the No Sheet Format optionfrom the Sheet Format To Use dialog box. Select Sheet 1 from the FeatureManager DesignTree and invoke the shortcut menu. Choose the Edit Sheet Format option from the shortcutmenu. The edit sheet format environment is invoked. Using the standard sketching toolsavailable in the Sketch Tools toolbar you can create the sheet format. After creating the sheetformat switch back to the edit sheet environment. Choose File > Save Sheet Format from themenu bar. The Save Sheet Format dialog box is displayed. Select the Custom sheet formatradio button from this dialog box and browse the location where you need to save the sheetformat. Specify the name of the sheet format and choose the save button from the Save Asdialog box. The location and name of the sheet format will be displayed in the Custom sheetformat edit box. Choose the OK button from the Save Sheet Format dialog box. Next timewhen you invoke the Sheet Format To Use dialog box, you can retrieve the saved sheet formatby selecting the Custom sheet format radio button and browse the location using the Browsebutton. Figure 13-32 shows a user-defined sheet format.

c13-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:13 PM29


TUTORIALS

Tutorial 1In this tutorial you will open the drawing created in Tutorial 2 of Chapter 7 and generate thedimensions and add the annotations to the drawing. After that you will change the display ofthe front and the right view to hidden lines visible, and the display of the isometric andaligned section view to shaded mode. (Expected time: 45 min)


a. Copy the model and the drawing document in the current directory.b. Configure the font settings and generate the dimensions using the Insert Model Items tool.c. Generate and arrange the dimensions and delete the unwanted dimensions, refer to

Figures 13-34 and 13-35.d. Add the datum symbol and geometric tolerance to the drawing views, refer Figures 13-36

and 13-37.e. Change the model display state of the drawing views, refer to Figure 13-38.

Copying the Model in the Current DirectoryFirst, you need to copy the model and the drawing document in the current directory.

1. Create a directory with the name c13 in the SolidWorks directory and copy c07tut02.sldprtfrom the /My Document/SolidWorks/c7 directory to this directory.

Opening the Drawing DocumentAfter copying the part and the assembly document, you need to open the drawingdocument in the SolidWorks window.

Figure 13-32 A user-defined sheet format

c13-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:13 PM30


Figure 13-33 Drawing document in which you need to add the detailing

1. Invoke the Open dialog box and open c12tut01.sldprt document.

The drawing document in which you need to add the detailing is displayed in Figure 13-33.

Applying the Documents SettingsBefore you start generating dimensions, you need to configure the document settings.

1. Invoke the Document Properties - Grid/Snap dialog box and select the AnnotationsFont option from this dialog box.

2. The Note/Balloon option is selected in the Annotation type area. Select this option again.The Choose Font dialog box will be invoked.

3. Select the Points radio button from the Height area and set the value of the font size to 9from the list box.

4. Choose the OK button from the Choose Font dialog box. Similarly, set the font size fordimension, detail, and section to 9.

5. Now, select the Arrow option from the Document Properties dialog box. The optionsrelated to size and shape of the arrows are displayed.

6. Set the value of the Height as 1, Width as 3, and Length as 3 in the Size area.

7. In the Section/View size area, set the value of the Height as 3, Width as 6, and Length as12.

8. Choose the OK button from the Document Properties - Grid/Snap dialog box.

c13-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:13 PM31


After applying the document setting, you need to generate the dimensions of the drawingview.

Generating the DimensionsNext, you need to generate the dimensions using the Insert Model Items tool. As discussedearlier, if you do not select any view and generate the dimensions using the Insert ModelItems tool, all the dimensions will be displayed in all the views. Therefore, sometimes thedimensions overlap each other and it becomes confusing to judge which dimension is ofwhich view. Therefore, you will select the view in which you need to generate the dimensionand then you will invoke the Insert Model Items tool.

1. Select the top view and choose the Model Items button from the Annotationtoolbar. The Insert Model Items dialog box is displayed. The name of the selectedview is displayed in the Import to views display area.

2. Choose the OK button from the Insert Model Items dialog box.

The dimensions of the model that can be displayed in the selected view are generated. Ifa radial dimension is attached to the counterbore hole in the top view, it needs to bedeleted because you will add a hole callout to this counterbore hole.

3. Select the radial dimension and press the DELETE key from keyboard to delete thedimension. Similarly, delete the dimension of diameter 20.

The dimension arrows are displayed as no filled, but need to be filled dimension arrows.

4. Drag a window such that all the dimensions are enclosed inside the window. Release theleft mouse button to select all the generated dimensions.

The Dimension PropertyManager is displayed.

5. Select the Filled Arrow option from the Style drop-down list of the Arrow rollout.

The arrows will be changed to filled arrows. The dimensions are scattered arbitrarily onthe drawing sheet. Therefore, you need to arrange the dimensions by moving them tothe required locations.

6. Select the dimension one by one and drag them to the desired location, refer toFigure 13-34.

7. Now, select the aligned section view and generate the dimensions using the Insert ModelItems tool and move the dimensions to place them at appropriate places, refer toFigure 13-35.

8. Choose the Hole Callout button from the Annotation toolbar and select the outercircle of one of the counter bore feature. The hole callout will be attached to thecursor. Pick a point on the drawing sheet to place the hole callout.

c13-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:13 PM32


Adding the Datum Feature Symbol to the Drawing ViewAfter generating the dimensions, you need to add the datum feature symbol to the drawingview. Datum feature symbols are used as the datum reference for adding the geometrictolerance to the drawing views.

1. Select the edge of the outer cylindrical feature from the top view and then choosethe Datum Feature Symbol button from the Annotation toolbar.

Figure 13-34 The dimensions generated using the Insert ModelItems tool

Figure 13-35 The dimensions generated by selecting the alignedsection view

c13-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:13 PM33


The Properties dialog box will be displayed, which is used to define the parameters ofthe datum feature symbol.

2. Choose the OK button from the Properties toolbar.

The datum feature symbol is placed at some default location.

3. Select the datum feature symbol and drag and place it at a location as shown in Figure 13-36.

Adding the Geometric Tolerance to the Drawing ViewAfter defining the datum feature symbol, you will add the geometric tolerance to thedrawing view.

1. Select the circular edge that has a diameter of 12 from the top view and choosethe Geometric Tolerance button from the Annotation toolbar.

The Properties dialog box is displayed. It is used to specify the parameters of the geometrictolerance.

2. Choose the GCS button from the Feature control frames area. The Symbolsdialog box is displayed.

3. Choose the Concentricity and coaxiality option from the ISO Geometric Tolerancinglist box and choose the OK button from the Symbols dialog box.

4. Set the value of tolerance in the Tolerance 1 edit box to .002.

5. Specify A in the Primary edit box to define the primary datum reference.

Figure 13-36 Datum feature symbol added to the drawing view

c13-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:13 PM34


6. Choose the OK button from the Property dialog box. The geometric tolerance will beplaced attached to the selected circular edge.

You may need to move the geometric tolerance if it overlaps the drawing view. Figure 13-37shows the drawing view after adding the geometric tolerance.

Changing the Display View OptionsAfter adding all the annotations to the drawing views, you need to change the modeldisplay setting as discussed in the description of this tutorial.

1. Press and hold down the CTRL key and select the front view and the right-side view fromthe drawing sheet.

2. Choose the Hidden Lines Visible button from the View toolbar.

The hidden lines will be displayed in the selected drawing views.

3. Now, select the isometric view and the aligned section view from the drawing sheet.

4. Choose the Shaded button and the Display HRL Edges In Shaded Mode button fromthe View toolbar.

Figure 13-38 shows the final drawing sheet after changing the display view settings.

5. Save the drawing file.

Figure 13-37 Geometric tolerance added to the drawing view

c13-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:13 PM35


Tutorial 2In this tutorial you will generate the BOM of the Bench Vice assembly and then add balloonsto the isometric view in the exploded state. (Expected time: 45 min.)

The steps to be followed to complete this tutorial are discussed next:.

a. Copy the Bench Vice folder that contains parts, assembly, and the drawing document inthe current directory.

b. Delete the views that are not required in the drawing sheet, refer to Figure 13-40.c. Move to arrange the views in the drawing sheet, refer to Figure 13-40.d. Set the anchor on the drawing sheet where the BOM will be attached.e. Generate the BOM, refer to Figure 13-41.f. Apply the balloons to the drawing view, refer to Figure 13-42.

Copying the Folder in the Current DirectoryFirst, you need to copy the Bench Vice folder in the current directory.

1. Copy the Bench Vice folder from the /My Document/SolidWorks/c12 directory to the currentdirectory.

Figure 13-38 Final drawing sheet

c13-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:13 PM36


Opening the Drawing DocumentAfter copying the part and the assembly document, you need to open the drawingdocument in the SolidWorks window.

1. Open c12tut02.slddrw document.

The drawing document in which you need to generate the BOM and balloons is displayedin Figure 13-39.

Deleting the Unwanted ViewYou need to delete the right-side view, as this view is not required in this tutorial.

1. Select the right-side view and press the DELETE key from the keyboard.

The Confirm Delete dialog box will be displayed.

2. Choose the Yes button from this dialog box. The view will be deleted from the currentdrawing sheet.

Moving the Drawing ViewYou need to move the exploded isometric view because the BOM will be generated at thetop right corner of the drawing sheet.

1. Select the isometric view; the border of the view is displayed in green.

2. Move the cursor to the border. The cursor will be replaced by the move cursor.

Figure 13-39 Drawing document in which you need to generate BOM and balloons

c13-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:13 PM37


3. Drag the cursor to move the drawing view and place the view at the desired location, referto Figure 13-40.

Setting the Anchor for the BOMBefore generating the BOM, you need to set the anchor of the BOM. The anchor is apoint on the drawing sheet with which one corner of the BOM coincides. By default, theanchor is defined at the top left corner of the drawing sheet. But in this tutorial you needto add the BOM on the top right corner of the drawing sheet. Therefore, you will setanchor before generating the BOM.

1. Expand Sheet 1 from the FeatureManager Design Tree and then expand Sheet Formats 1to display the Bill of Materials Anchor 1 option.

2. Select the Bill of Materials Anchor 1 option and invoke the shortcut menu. Choose theSet Anchor option from the shortcut menu.

As you move the cursor on the Bill of Materials Anchor 1 option, the anchor is displayedas a point in the upper right corner of the drawing sheet.

3. Specify the anchor point on the inner top right corner of the drawing sheet. A point willbe placed at the selected location.

After setting the anchor, you need to switch back to the edit sheet environment.

4. Select Sheet 1 from the FeatureManager Design Tree and invoke the shortcut menu.Choose the Edit Sheet option from the shortcut menu.

Figure 13-40 Drawing sheet after moving the drawing view

c13-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:13 PM38


Generating the BOMNext, you need to generate the BOM. As discussed earlier, the BOM generated inSolidWorks is parametric in nature. If a component is deleted or added in the assembly,the change is automatically reflected in the BOM.

1. Select the isometric view and choose Insert > Bill of Materials from the menu bar.

The Select BOM Template dialog box will be displayed.

2. Select the bomtemp.xls file and choose the Open button from the Select BOM Templatedialog box.

The Bill of Materials Properties dialog box will be displayed.

3. Select the Top Right option from the Anchor point coincident to drop-down list.

4. Choose the OK button from the Bill of Materials Properties dialog box. The BOM isgenerated. You will notice that the Description column does not have any data. You canadd more description by double-clicking the BOM.

The drawing sheet after generating the BOM is displayed in Figure 13-41.

Adding the Balloons to the Drawing ViewAfter generating the BOM you need to add the balloons to the drawing views.

1. Choose the Balloon button from the Annotation toolbar.

The Balloon PropertyManager will be displayed. The cursor is replaced by the ballooncursor.

Figure 13-41 Drawing sheet after generating the BOM

c13-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:13 PM39


2. Select the Vice Body from the isometric view displayed in shaded mode. A balloon will beattached to the Vice Body with the sequence of the balloon as the item number displayedin the BOM.

3. Select the Vice Jaw; the balloon will be attached to the Vice Jaw.

4. Similarly, add balloons to all the components in the assembly. You may need to move theballoons, refer to Figure 13-42.

5. Now, drag a window and select all the balloons. Select the Tight Fit option from the Sizedrop-down list in the Balloon PropertyManager. The final drawing sheet after addingballoons to the drawing view is shown in Figure 13-42.

6. Save the drawing.


1. You cannot add annotations while creating the part in SolidWorks. (T/F)

Figure 13-42 Final drawing sheet after adding balloons

c13-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:13 PM40


2. You can add the surface finish symbols to the drawing views. (T/F)

3. The Projected tolerance zone area is used to define the quality of the projected tolerance.(T/F)

4. You can set the target shape as a point, circle, or rectangle while adding a datum target.(T/F)

5. You can also set the option for the automatic creation of centerline while generating thedrawing views. (T/F)

6. The __________ spinner is used to define the major diameter of the thread.

7. The __________ tool is used to add the balloons to the components of the assembly in thedrawing view.

8. The __________ drop-down list available in the Properties dialog box to define the weldsymbol is used to define the shape of the cross-section of the weld contour to be flat,convex, or concave.

9. The __________ tab of the Bill of Materials Properties dialog box is used to display thecontent of the parts to be used in the BOM.

10. The __________ dialog box is invoked to select the default BOM templates provided inSolidWorks.


1. The __________ tool is used to add the cosmetic threads that are used to display thethread conventions in the drawing views.

2. The __________ tab available in this dialog box is used to define the row numbers andyou can also split the table using the options available in this tab.

3. You can change the model display setting from hidden lines removed to hidden linesvisible, or wireframe, or shaded using the options available in the __________ toolbar.

4. Select the __________ check box from the Auto insertion on view creation area toautomatically create centerlines while generating the view.

5. The __________ tool is used to create the centerlines in the views.

c13-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:13 PM41


6. Which dialog box is invoked when you choose the Weld Symbol button from theAnnotation toolbar?

(a) Weld Properties (b) Weld Symbol(c) Properties (d) Weld Joints

7. Which dialog box is displayed when you choose the Cosmetic Thread button from theAnnotation toolbar?

(a) Cosmetic Thread Properties (b) Cosmetic Thread(c) Cosmetic Thread Convention (d) None of these

8. Which PropertyManager is used to add center marks to the drawing views?

(a) Add Center Mark (b) Create Center Mark(c) Center Mark (c) Cosmetic Thread

9. Which area available in the Cosmetic Thread dialog box is used to define the depth ofthe cosmetic thread?

(a) Apply Thread (b) Thread Depth(c) Cosmetic Thread (d) None of these

10. Which PropertyManager is used to add balloons in the drawing views?

(a) Add Balloons (b) Balloon Properties(c) Balloons (d) None of these

EXERCISE

Exercise 1In this exercise you will generate the isometric view in exploded view of the assembly createdin Tutorial 1 of Chapter 11 on the standard A4 sheet format. The scale of the view will be 1:5.After generating the view generate the BOM and add balloons to the assembly view shown inFigure 13-43. (Expected time: 30 min)

c13-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:13 PM42


Figure 13-43 Drawing view for Exercise 1

c13-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:13 PM43


Answers to Self-Evaluation Test1. T, 2. T, 3. F, 4. T, 5. T, 6. Major Diameter, 7. Balloon, 8. Contour, 9. Contents, 10. SelectBOM Template

c13-solidworks-2003.p65 5/12/2003, 12:13 PM44

solidworks

Documents

base feature

solidworks session

solidworks partners

sketch button

sketch toolbar

various options of solidworks

day dialog box tip

cut feature